Specs

Bridgestone Retail Operations, LLC 

PROJECT MANUAL 

Version: January 2012 

BRIDGESTONE RETAIL OPERATIONS, LLC 

FIRESTONE COMPLETE AUTO CARE 


575 S. Vance St. & W. Center Ave. 

Lakewood, CO 

Property #: T.B.D. 

4 Digit: T.B.D. 

6 Digit: T.B.D. 

Date: 08 – 23 - 12 

PROJECT MANAGER 

SITE ENGINEER 

CASCO 

LAMP, RYNEARSON & ASSOCIATES, 

INC. 

10877 Watson Road 4715 Innovation Drive 

St. Louis, MO 63127 Fort Collins, CO 80525 

Tel: (314) 821-1100 Tel: (970) 226-0342

August 23, 2012 

CASCO 

Project Managers 

St. Louis, Missouri 

ADDENDUM ONE TO THE PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS 

FCAC 

LAKEWOOD, CO 

THE SPECIFICATION FOR THIS PROJECT SHALL CONFORM TO THE ATTACHED JANUARY 2012 

PROJECT MANUAL/SPECIFICATIONS, EXCEPT AS MODIFIED BELOW: 

1. Section 02370 Drilled Pier Foundations: Not used. 

2. Section 04720 Cast Stone: Not used. 

3. Section 04840 Thin Brick Veneer: Not used. 

4. Section 04860 Manufactured Stone Veneer: Not used. 

5. Section 05220 Steel Joists: Added section, see attached. 

6. Section 05320 Metal Deck: Added section, see attached. 

7. Section 06073 Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Not used. 

8. Section 07273 Liquid Applied Moistures Barrier: Added section, see attached. 

9. Section 07310 Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Not used. 

10. Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Revised, see attached. 

11. Section 07710 Rain Removal System: Revised, see attached. 

12. Section 08332 Fire Doors & Rolling Fire Doors: Not used. 

13. Section 08360 Overhead Doors: Include Torsion Spring Installation instruction sheet and Clopay sheets; 

see attached. 

14. Section 08410 Metal Framed Storefronts: Revised, see attached. 

15. Section 08625 Metal Framed Skylight/Smoke Vent: Not used. 

16. Section 09245 Stucco: Not used. 

End of Addendum 

CASCO DIVERSIFIED CORPORATION 

Irvine, California 10877 Watson Road Edison, New Jersey 

Tel: (949) 296-2350 St. Louis, Missouri 63127 Tel: (732) 661-1400 

Tel: (314) 821-1100

Bismarck Real Estate Partners, Inc. 


SECTION 05220 

STEEL JOISTS 

PART 1 - GENERAL 

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 

A. The work required under this section consists of all standard open web joists, accessories 

and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on the drawings and as 

specified. 

1.02 SUBMITTALS 

A. Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure 

set forth in these specifications. 

B. Shop Drawings: 

1. Submit shop drawings to CASCO for review prior to fabrication. 

2. Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before 

fabrication. 

3. Furnish detailed drawings and lists showing the mark, number, type, location, and 

spacings of all joists. Show bridging type, mark, method of attachment to the joists 

and anchorage at the ends. Show type of paint and all accessories and details as 

may be required for proper installation of joists. 

4. Show design loads on each joist. 

C. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification stating that all steel joists 

used on this project have been designed and manufactured in accordance with the drawings, 

project specifications and SJI specifications. Manufacturer's certification shall be signed and 

sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal for the state where 

the structure is located. 

D. Design Calculations: Design calculations for all joists used on this project shall be submitted 

only when requested by the Owner's Representative for submittal to the building official or for 

information. Design calculations will not be reviewed by CASCO. All design calculations 

shall be signed and sealed by the manufacturer's engineer with the registered engineer's seal 

for the state where the structure is located. 

E. Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept 

including verification of the design loads shown on the shop drawings. In no case shall this 

review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for design, general or detailed dimensions, 

quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees 

required. 

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 

A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the latest edition of the 

following standards adopted by the Steel Joist Institute: 

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 

2.01 MATERIALS 

Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series. 

Recommended Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders. 

Standard Load Table - Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series. 

A. Steel: Comply with SJI Specifications. 

B. Bridging: Comply with SJI Specifications. 

STEEL JOISTS 05220 - Page 1 of 2



C. Shop Paint: Rustguard 4150-6160 gray, low VOC shop coat primer, Devoe Coatings, by ICI 

and shall conform to the Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications 15-68T, Type 1. 

2.02 FABRICATION 

(A) 

(B) 

(C) 

(D) 

Steel joists shall be fabricated in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Open Web 

Steel Joists, K-Series. 

Provide extended ends, special depth ends, etc., where indicated on the drawings and, as job 

conditions require. 

Before application of shop coat, clean steel free of all foreign substances. Give all steel 

items one (1) shop coat. 

Camber all steel joists for roofs in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Open Web 


PART 3 - EXECUTION 

3.01 DESIGN 

A. Steel joists shall be designed by the manufacturer. The manufacturer's engineer shall be 

responsible for the design, adequacy and safety of all steel joists. Design shall be in 

accordance with the Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series. 

B. Unless otherwise noted, steel joists shall be designed as simply supported, uniformly loaded 

trusses with the top chord braced against lateral buckling. The uniform design load shall be 

the total safe uniformly distributed load as shown in the SJI Standard Load Table. 

C. When net uplift forces due to wind are shown on the drawings, the manufacturer shall design 

the joists, bridging and connections of the joists to the supporting structure for the net uplift. 

A single line of bottom chord bridging must be provided near the first bottom chord panel 

points whenever uplift due to wind forces is shown on the design drawings. 

D. When nonuniform or concentrated loads are shown on the drawings, the manufacturer shall 

design the joists in accordance with Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, 

K-Series. 

3.02 ERECTION 

A. Steel joists shall be erected in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Open Web 


B. Thoroughly examine the structural steel and other supports on which the steel joist work is in 

any way dependent and notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any defects which 

would affect the satisfactory completion of this work. The starting of work in connection with 

open web steel joists shall imply acceptance of the underlying surfaces. 

C. During the construction period, the Contractor shall provide means for the adequate 

distribution of concentrated loads so that the carrying capacity of any joist is not exceeded. 

D. All bridging and bridging anchors shall be placed and joist ends fixed prior to the application 

of any loads. 

E. Roof structure is exposed and shall be painted. During on site storage keep joists clean and 

protected from the elements stored, and covered, to minimize rust. Field touch up painting 

shall be done with the same type of paint as the shop coat. Touch up shall include bare, 

abraded, welded and rusted areas. 

F. Repair or replace all damaged joists. CASCO shall be the sole judge as to whether a joist 

can be repaired or must be replaced. 

END SECTION 

STEEL JOISTS 05220 - Page 2 of 2



SECTION 05320 


METAL DECK 


A. Include all labor, material and equipment to furnish and install metal roof decking in 

accordance with the drawings and as specified. 

B. Furnish and install all perimeter filler strips, closures and accessories as required, to 

complete the metal deck work and make it ready to receive roofing. 


A. Shall be submitted for review only when required by and in accordance with the procedure 

set forth in these specifications. 

B. Shop Drawings 

1. Submit shop drawings to CASCO for review prior to fabrication. 

2. Items requiring field measuring shall have all dimensions verified in the field before 

fabrication. 

3. Furnish detailed drawings and lists showing the mark, number, type, and location of 

all metal roof deck. Show method of attachment to the supporting structure. Show 

all openings for hatches, stacks, etc. Show type of paint and all accessories and 

details as may be required for proper installation of metal roof deck. 

C. Manufacturer's Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification that all metal roof deck used 

on this project has been manufactured in accordance with the drawings, project 

specifications and SDI specifications. 

D. Review of submittals is only for review of general conformance with the design concept. In 

no case shall this review relieve the contractor of the responsibility for general or detailed 

dimensions, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance 

or guarantees required. 


A. Unless otherwise shown or specified, this work shall conform to the latest edition of the 

following standards. 

SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck. 

SDI Diaphragm Design Manual. 

AWS (D1.3) Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. 



A. Steel: Comply with SDI Specifications. 

B. Accessories: Manufacturer's Standard 

C. Shop Finish: Comply with SDI Specifications for galvanized roof deck (G60 finish). 

Galvanized coating shall be suitable to receive field applied paint. 

METAL DECK 05320 - Page 1 of 2




3.01 ERECTION 

A. Metal roof deck shall be erected and fastened in accordance with the SDI Specifications and 

the manufacturer's specifications and erection layouts. Metal roof deck shall be continuous 

over at least three spans. Cutting openings through the deck which are less than 16 square 

feet in area and all skew cutting shall be performed in the field. All cutting of metal roof deck 

shall be by metal cutting saw only. No torch cuts or jagged edges are acceptable. 

B. Top and bottom faces and edges of deck materials where cuts have been made including all 

deck welds shall have prime coating touched-up with a heavy coat of the same type of paint 

as the shop coat. 

C. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces 

of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 

D. Do not hang or support any loads from metal roof deck. 

E. When stored on site, keep deck covered, clean, and protected against dirt, mud and rust. All 

deck damaged, dented, chipped, punctured or otherwise deformed (including weld blow holes 

in deck from welding) during shipping, storage or erection to render it unusable or unsightly 

shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. The Owner Representative shall be the 

sole judge as to whether metal roof deck must be replaced. 

END OF SECTION 

METAL DECK 05320 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 07273 

LIQUID APPLIED MOISTURES BARRIER 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes vapor-permeable air-barrier coatings; StoGuard, by Sto Corp., for wall systems 

of CMU backup with brick veneer, stucco or EIFS exterior finishes. Proprietary systems should 

be considered in all applications. 

1.02 PREINSTALLATION MEETING 

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 

1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, air-leakage and bond 

testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers. 


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and 

approved by manufacturer. 

B. Contractor Requirements: 

1. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of manufacturer’s materials. 

2. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the jobsite to install the 

system in compliance with manufacturer’s published specifications. 

1.04 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS 

A. ASTM, C 1177 Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 

B. ASTM, E 96 Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 

1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 

A. Moisture Control: 

1. Minimize condensation within the assembly. 

2. Drain water directly to the exterior where it is likey to penetrate components in the wall 

assembly (windows and doors, for example). 

3. Provide flashing to direct water to the exterior in accordance with code requirements, 

including above window and door heads, beneath window and door sills and at the base 

of the wall. 

AIR-BARRIER COATINGS 07273 - 1




B. Air Barrier Continuity: provide continuous air barrier system of compatible air barrier 

components. 

C. Compatibility: G.C. to provide proper system application for surface being applied to, and for 

system being applied over it. 

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver Air and Moisture Barrier materials in their original sealed containers bearing 

manufacturer’s name and identification of product. 

B. Protect Air and Moisture Barrier coatings (pail products) from freezing temperatures and 

temperatures in excess of 90 o F (32 o C). Store away from direct sunlight. 


2.01 MANUFACTURERS 

A. Sto Guard®, by Sto Corp.. 

1. Joint Treatment: Sto Gold Fill® - ready mixed acrylic based flexible joint treatment for 

rough opening protection and joint treatment of wall sheathing. 

2. Waterproof Coating: Sto Gold Coat® - ready mixed acrylic based waterproof coating for 

wall sheathing. 

B. Weather Tech Products by Parex, (866) 516-0061. 

1. Joint & Sheathing Treatments: “Weatherseal” applied by spray or roll-on applicators. 

2. CMU Applications: “Weather Dry” coating applied by trowel. 

C. Approved Equal: Proprietary material to system being used in building system. 

2.02 REINFORCING MESH 

A. For sheathing substrates: Mesh – nominal 4.2 oz./sq. yd., self-adhesive, flexible, 

symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber fabric, with alkaline resistant coating for compatibility 

with materials. 

B. For concrete or concrete masonry substrates: Detail Mesh – nominal 4.2 oz./sq. yd., 

flexible, symmetrical, interlaced glass fiber fabric, with alkaline resistant coating for 

compatibility with materials. 

1. Joint & Sheathing Treatments: “Weatherseal” applied by spray or roll-on applicators. 

2. CMU Applications: “Weather Dry” coating applied by towel. 

C. Approved Equal: Proprietary material to system being used in building system. 





2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-permeable air barrier. 

Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing 

substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and 

transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified 

limits. 

2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS 

A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete 

air-barrier assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material. 

B. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane 

foam sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to 

ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant 

manufacturer. 

C. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; 

trowel grade. 


3.01 EXAMINATION 

A. Inspect concrete masonry surfaces for: 

1. Contamination – algae, chalkiness, dirt, dust, efflorescence, fungus, grease, mildew or 

other foreign substances. 

2. Cracks – measure crack width and record location of cracks. 

3. Moisture content and moisture damage – use a moisture meter to determine if the 

surface is dry enough to receive the air and moisture barrier and record any areas of 

moisture damage or excess moisture. 

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray 

affecting other construction. 

B. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, 

holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane. 

C. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. 

D. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and 

edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. 





3.03 INSTALLATION 

A. General: Install air-barrier coating and accessory materials according to air-barrier 

manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a 

continuous air barrier. 

1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base 

flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 

2. Install air-barrier assembly on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 

inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. 

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be 

covered by air-barrier coating material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 

hours. 

C. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, 

concrete below-grade structures, exterior glazing and window systems, storefront systems, 

exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, 

using accessory materials. 

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of air barrier to substrate with termination mastic. 

E. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, storefronts, and doors. 

Apply transitions and flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each 

substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less 

than 1 inch of full contact. 

F. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous 

penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant. 

G. Seal air-barrier assembly around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination 

mastic. 

H. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by 

metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic. 

I. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and 

flatten fishmouths and blisters. Extend patches 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip 

direction. 

J. Air-Barrier Coating Material: Apply continuous unbroken air-barrier coating to substrates 

according to the following thickness. Apply an increased thickness of air-barrier coating in full 

contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 

1. Vapor-Permeable, Air-Barrier Coating: Total dry film thickness as recommended in 

writing by manufacturer to meet performance requirements, applied in one or more equal 

coats. 

2. Apply additional coats as needed to achieve void- and pinhole-free surface. 

K. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency. 

L. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair 

substrates and reapply air-barrier components. 





3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Tests: As determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests: 

1. Quantitative Air-Leakage Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for air leakage 

according to ASTM E 783. 

2. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for minimum air-barrier adhesion 

of 30 lbf/sq. in. according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or 

part thereof. 

B. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 

1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, 

where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness. 

2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above. 

C. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions. 

D. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, 

according to manufacturer's written instructions. 

E. Remove masking materials after installation. 






SECTION 07620 

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 

PART 1 GENERAL 


A. Flashings, counter flashings, facia, soffit and fabricated sheet metal items, as indicated in 

Schedule. 

B. Reglets and accessories. 


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and 

standard details, except as otherwise indicated. 


A. Sustainable Submittals: No submittals are required. Refer to Section 01352 for Sustainable 

recommendations on this project. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS 

2.01 SHEET MATERIALS 

A. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop coated 

with fluoropolymer coating, color as indicated on drawings, or equal. 

B. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70% PVDF 

resin by weight in color coat. 

2.02 ACCESSORIES 

A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. 

B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. 

C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd. 

D. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. 

E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. 

F. Reglets: Formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counter-flashing pieces. 

1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick. 

G. Scuppers: Plain finish shop pre coated with fluoropolymer coating. 

H. Conductor Heads: Plain finish shop pre coated with fluoropolymer coating. 


A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 

B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. 

C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. 

D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed 

lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. 

E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with 

sealant. 

F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form 

drip. 

G. Fabricate through-wall flashings in minimum 96 inch long, but not exceeding 12 foot long sections, 

under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill and similar 

flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Return and brake edges. 


A. Firestone Building Products Co. – Carmel, IN. - No substitutions are permitted 

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07620 - Page 1 of 2




PART 3 EXECUTION 


A. Conform to drawing details. 

B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. 

C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. 

D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines 

accurate to profiles. 

E. Seal metal joints watertight. 

F. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 

3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 

A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashings and trim are 

installed. 






SECTION 07710 

RAIN REMOVAL SYSTEMS 


1.01 Scope of work 

A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment required to complete installation of Aluminum Rain 

Removal Systems and all other related work indicated on drawings or specified herein. 

1.02 References 

A. Aluminum gutters and Downspouts shall meet or exceed the following specifications. 

1. AAMA 1405.1 Specifications for Aluminum Gutter and Downspouts 

2. FHA 4900.1 Minimum Property Standard for One- and Two-Family Dwellings 

3. FHA 4910.1 Minimum Property Standard for Multifamily Dwellings 

1.03 Quality Assurance 

A. Relevant standards and codes are listed in section 1.02 References. 


2.01 Manufacturer 

A. Alcoa Home exteriors, Inc., Omega Corporate Center, 1590 Omega Drive, Pittsburgh, PA 15205, 

(800) 962-6973, or equal. 

B. Substituted manufacturer to be equal in all product specifications. 

2.02 Materials 

A. All Aluminum Rain Removal Systems shall be made of 3105-H26 aluminum sheet (minimum tensile 

strength 26,000 psi, minimum yield strength 22,000 psi) or equivalent. 

B. The finish is Alcoa's Alumalure 2000®, applied in two separate coating operations and is baked on 

for added protection and longer life. The finish shall be a two-coat acrylic finish applied in a twophase 

operation which includes a corrosion-inhibiting primer and a baked-on, high-performance 

acrylic topcoat. The finish is highly weather-resistant and provides the gutter with high performance 

and appearance qualities. The Alumalure 2000 finish system is warranted against chipping, flaking 

and peeling, inside and out, with a lifetime limited warranty. Prior to finishing, the metal shall 

receive a special cleaning process to assure maximum finish adhesion. The inside of all gutters 

and downspouts shall be coated with a special gold-colored corrosion-inhibiting finish. 

2.03 Hanger Systems Description 

A. The Rain Removal Systems shall be designed to be free-floating, enabling the gutter to expand and 

contract with temperature changes, while minimizing stress points which cause buckling and leaks. 

B. System gutters, when properly installed, will support a minimum of 50 pounds (22.7 kg) per lineal 

foot. Six different types of free-floating hanger systems are available in the 5" (127) series, and four 

hanger systems are available in the 6" (152.4) series. These hanger systems permit the gutter to 

be used in both new construction and all types of remodeling work. Gutter hangers to be .051" - 

.082" (1.3 - 2.1) gauge, depending on the style specified. 

C. All hanger systems provide a concealed attachment at the front of the gutter, eliminating any 

exposed protrusions that would detract from the appearance of the gutter. Spikes and ferrules 

(which restrict the movement of the gutter) and brackets attached to the outside periphery of the 

gutter shall not be used. 

RAIN REMOVAL SYSTEM 07710 - Page 1 of 3




2.04 Gutters and Downspouts Description 

A. Two different types of high-quality, corrosion-resistant rain removal systems are available, all 

designed to perform in both residential and light commercial applications. 

B. The front face of the gutter shall have a concealed locking lip and the high back leg shall be formed 

with a return hook at the top. The locking lip and return hook function as receivers for the aprons 

and hangers used to install the free-floating system. 

C. System description: 

1. Traditional Select is a premium-quality 5" (127) system used in single-family homes 

and light commercial building applications. Available with a heavier gauge material in both 

2" x 3" (51 x 76) and 3" x 4" (76.2 x 101.6) downspout sizes to accommodate most rain 

removal requirements. 

2. Traditional Select S-6 works best on large homes where a bigger system will enhance 

the architecture, or apartments, multifamily complexes and other light commercial 

buildings. Designed to be a heavy-duty, large-capacity rain removal system, it is available 

with a 3" x 4" (76 x 102) downspout. 

D. 2"x 3" (51 x 76) downspout will carry water approximately 600 square feet (65,741.800mm2) of roof 

area, while the 3" x 4" (76.2 x 101.6) downspout will drain approximately 1,200 square feet 

(111,483.600mm2). 

E. Color: 

1. Gutters: Finished in color as noted on drawings. 

1. Downspouts: Finished to match adjacent wall color; refer to drawings. 

2.03 Dimensions 

A. Gutters: 

1. Traditional Select: .032” (.813) gauge, 16’-0” (4877), 21’-0” (6401), 26’-0” ) (7925), 33’-0” 

(1005) and 37’-0” (11278) lengths, six hangers. 

2. Tranditional Select S-6: .032” (.813) gauge, 21’-0” (6401) and 37’-0” (11278) lengths, 

four hangers. 

B. Downspouts: 

1. 2" x 3" 6” x 6” (51 x 76) (152 x 152): .024" .027” (.610) (.686) gauge, 10'0" (3048) and 

16'0" (4877) lengths 

2. 3" x 4" (76 x 102): .027" (.686) gauge, 10'0" (3048) and 16'0" (4877) lengths 

2.04 Accessories 

A. All accessories used with Rain Removal Systems shall be accessories designed for use with the 

gutters and have the same finish. Mill finish accessory components include eave tubes, hangers 

and expansion joints. 

1. Roof aprons: .027" (.686) gauge 

2. End caps: .024" (.610) gauge in both the Traditional Select and Traditional Select S-6 

3. Inside and outside mitres: .032" (.813) gauge 

1. Sealant material: Alcoa Gutterseal 

5. Expansion joints: aluminum lined with neoprene 

2. Downspout clip: .014" (.356) gauge 

B. Nails: Alcoa aluminum nails of 5056 or 6110 alloy having a minimum tensile strength of 63,000 psi. 

All nails shall have a suitable etch finish to remove greases and provide additional holding power. 


3.01 Installation/Workmanship 

A. Verify governing dimensions of building. Prior to installation, it is necessary to examine and repair 

any adjoining work on which this work in any way is dependent for its proper installation. 





B. The gutter shall be installed by using a free-floating hanger systems so movement is not restricted. 

Spikes and ferrules or brackets attached to the outside periphery of the gutter shall not be used. 

Hangers should be located a maximum of 32" (812) apart and nailed to the roof sheathing or fascia 

board at rafter locations wherever possible with two 1-1/4" (31.7) or 1-1/2" (38.1) Alcoa aluminum 

screw shank nails. 

C. Expansion joints should be used on all hip roof installations, on straight runs over forty feet in 

length or any conditions where normal movement due to expansion and contraction is restricted. 

B. A visual inspection of entire project should be conducted. All problem areas should be replaced and 

repaired in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

C. Upon completion, contractor shall clean all aluminum work and remove all scrap materials. 

3.02 Protection 

A. Care must be exercised in placing aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials. 

B. Aluminum shall not be installed in contact with dissimilar metals, concrete, stucco, asbestos siding, 

masonry, or corrosive non-metallic materials which might become repeatedly wet. 






SECTION 08360 

SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 



A. Overhead sectional doors, electrically operated. 

B. Operating hardware, tracks, and supports. 

C. Accessories and installation hardware.. 


A. Design and size components to withstand dead loads, positive and negative wind loads as 

calculated in accordance with local code as measured in accordance with ASTM E 330. 

1.03 REFERENCES 

A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- 

Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 

B. ASTM A 924/A 924M - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by 

the Hot-Dip Process. 

C. ASTM B 209/209M - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 

D. ASTM B 221/221M - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, 

Profiles, and Tubes. 


A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. 

B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 

3. Installation methods. 

4. Operation and maintenance data. 

5. Nameplate data and ratings for motors. 

C. Shop Drawings: Include opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, 

anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. 

D. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing 

manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 

E. Verification Samples: For each finish specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) 

square, representing actual product, color, and patterns 

F. Sustainable Submittals: No submittals are required. Refer to Section 01352 for Sustainable 


1.05 WIND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Design doors to withstand positive and negative wind loads as calculated in accordance with 

applicable building code. 

1. Design Wind Load: See Structural Drawings. 

2. Safety Factor: 1.5 times design wind load. 

B. Confirm air borne debris requirement as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of doors specified in 

this section, with not less than ten years of documented experience. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing the types of products specified in this 

section and approved by the door manufacturer. 

C. Conform to applicable code for motor and motor control requirements. 

D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 

as suitable for the purpose specified. 

OVERHEAD DOORS 08360 - Page 1 of 4






A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Clopay Building Products Company, which is located at: 8585 Duke 

Blvd. ; Mason, OH 45040-3101; Toll Free Tel: 800-282-2260; Tel: 513-770-4800; Fax: 513-770- 

3519; Factory contacts, Michele Koverman 937-440-6367, mkoverman@clopay.com;; Chris 

Remick 614-306-9968 cremick@clopay.com. No other manufacturer accepted. 

2.02 OVERHEAD DOORS GENERAL 

A. Provide overhead doors manufactured as a complete assembly. Provide each door assembly 

comprising door panels, brackets, tracks, counterbalance mechanisms, and hardware, all as 

required for the opening size and headroom available. 

B. Vision Panels: Nine (9) full vision panels, pre-painted frames to match door finish. Provide safety 

glass for all vision panel locations, 1/8” safety glass or ½” insulated glass safety glass. Refer to 

Section 2.04. In high wind zones requiring impact-resistant glazing, only three (3) panels will 

incorporate vision panels. 

C. Finish: Exterior 1 mil (.025 mm) coating; interior 0.5 mil (0.013 mm) coating; color as indicated on 

the drawings. 

D. Hardware: Hinges and brackets manufactured from hot-dipped galvanized steel, minimum 0.075 

inch (1.91 mm) thickness. Ten ball steel rollers full floating in case-hardened steel races, mounted 

to fit the taper of the track. 

E. Tracks: Vertical tracks minimum 0.061 inch (1.55 mm) galvanized steel tapered and mounted for 

wedge type closing. Horizontal tracks minimum 0.075-inch (1.91 mm) galvanized steel, reinforced 

with minimum 0.0897 inch (2.28 mm) galvanized steel angles as required. 

a. Track Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 

b. Lift application per drawings 

F. Spring Counterbalance: Torsion spring counterbalance mechanism sized to weight of the door, 

with a helically wound, oil tempered torsion spring mounted on a steel shaft; cable drum of die cast 

aluminum with high strength galvanized aircraft cable with minimum 7 to 1 safety factor. 

a. High Cycle Spring: 50,000 cycles. 

b. Manual operation with maximum exertion of 25 lbs. force to open. 

G. Interior mounted end style lock with shim for 3” track. Do not bend the locking bar. 

H. Weatherstripping: Top brush seal and brush side seals (2-1/2” aluminum leg with 1-1/2” bristle 

length - Part Number 065396 - no substitutions) and special bottom astragal seal with U- 

Shaped flexible PVC astragal Part Number 0620141 (no substitutions). 

I. Install 4” exhaust port centered in the bottom section. Install in closed position with hinge on top. 

J. Interior Step Plate: High impact steel step plate Part Number 0120690 (no substitutions) on 

bottom section below slide lock. 

K. Spring bumper to be installed at the rear of the horizontal track per Clopay shop drawing 

recommendation/s. 

2.03 UNINSULATED SECTIONAL DOORS ( reference floor plan drawings for quantity ) 

A. Heavy Duty Door: Clopay Model 524 

1. Door Size: As noted on drawings. 

2. Steel Skin Thickness: Minimum 0.022 inch (0.56 mm). 

B. Door Construction: 

1. Panel Sections: 2 inches (52 mm) thick roll formed commercial quality steel panel sections, 

hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 924/A 924M and ASTM A 653/A 653M, phosphatized and 

prepainted with primer and baked-on polyester topcoat. Panel faces reinforced with two ½ 

inch (13 mm) deep ribs on 8 inches (200 mm) centers, complemented by six 1/8 inch (3 mm) 

beads on 2 inches (50 mm) centers. Sections formed to create a weather tight tongue and 

groove meeting rail. Bottom panel section reinforced with continuous 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) 

aluminium astragal retainer. 

2. Door Stiles: Galvanized, primed and polyester top-coated turn-down steel end stiles; wrap 

face of panel sections a full 1-3/8 inches (35 mm); 0.049 inch (1.25 mm) minimum thickness 

up to 14 ft., 2 inches (4.32 m), otherwise 0.61 inch (1.55 mm) thickness; engineered for easy 

hardware attachment through pre-punched holes. 





3. Connections: Fasten panel sections and stiles with manufacturer’s Tog-L-Loc joining system. 

2.04 INSULATED THERMALLY SECTIONAL STEEL DOORS ( reference floor plan drawings for 

quantity. Use for locations north of the National Frost Line and high wind zones.) 



2. Overall Panel Thickness: 2 inches (51mm). 2” EPS insulation between two sheets of steel. 

3. Steel Skin Thickness: Minimum 0.023 inch (0.56 mm) exterior; minimum 0.016 inch (0.41mm) 

interior. 

4. Stiles: Steel pre-painted end stiles, minimum 0.049 inch (1.25mm) thick, engineered for easy 


5. Bottom panel section reinforced with continuous 0.050 inch (1.27mm) aluminum astragal 

retainer. 

6. Joint Seals: provide foam strips for field application to stop air infiltration. 

7. Finish: Stucco embossed texture with 0.040 inch (100mm) minor ribs 4 inches or 5 inches 

( 100 or 125mm ) on center, white interior, exterior as indicated on drawings. 

8. Optional Glazing: In high wind zones provide optional impact-resistant glazing. 

B. Insulated overhead doors shall be insulated as follows: 

1. Areas of the country with 6500 hours or greater of 65 heating degree days (HDD 65) shall 

use insulated windows and insulated metal panels in the overhead doors. 

2. Areas of the country with 2500 hours to 6499 hours of 65 heating degree days (HDD 65) shall 

use insulated metal panels but not the windows. 

3. And in areas of the country with 2499 hours of 65 degree days (HDD 65) and less, neither the 

windows nor the metal panels will need to be insulated. 

4. Heating Degree Day (HDD 65) as listed by county in Table 902.1-Chapter 9 of the 2003 

International Energy Conservation Code. 

2.05 ELECTRICAL DOOR OPERATORS 

A. General: Provide electric door operator (Chamberlain Model J) provided by door 

manufacturer for door with operational life specified complete with electric motor and factory 

pre-wired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, clutch, remote-control stations, control 

devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 

Comply with NFPA 70. 

1. Solenoid operated brake. 

B. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for emergency manual 

operation while disconnecting motor, without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect 

and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically 

prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. 

C. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit switch adjustment and 

without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. 

D. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS1, NEMA ICS2, and NEMA ICS6, with 

NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-v, AC or DC. 

E. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, 

electric motor, complying with NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to start, 

accelerate, and operate door in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3fps (0.2 

m/s) and not more than 1 fps ( .03m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering 

service factor. 

1. Type: Solid State. 

2. Type: Jackshaft. 

3. HP: 1/2hp ( 373 W ). 

4. Power Characteristics: 

a. 115V. 

b. 1 phase. 

5. Service Factor: 

a. NEMA MG 1. 

6. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building 

electrical system. 





F. Remote Control Station: provide momentary contact, 3-button control station with push – 

button controls labeled “ Open”, “Close” and “Stop”. 

G. Provide interior units, fully guarded, surface mounted, heavy-duty type, with general – 

purpose NEMA ICS 6 enclosure in one of the following types; 

1. Enclosure Type: Type 1. 

H. Obstruction detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic 

safety sensor able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately 

stops and reverses downward door travel. 

1. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensing edge, 

located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. 

Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 

Connect to control circuit using manufacturer’s standard take-up reel or self-coiling cord. 

Sensing edge shall be operated by: 

a. Electric 

I. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to 

automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. 

J. Provide auxiliary chain hoist: for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor, 

without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible 

from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when 

emergency operator is engaged. 



A. Examine wall and overhead areas, including opening framing and blocking, with installer present, 

for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions 

affecting performance of Work in this Section. 

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory 

preparation before proceeding. 

C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 

3.02 PREPARATION 

A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best 

result for the substrate under the project conditions. 


A. Install door unit assembly in accordance with approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's 

printed instructions. 

B. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect to 

unit components. 

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES 

A. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge. 

B. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 

3.05 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weather-stripping. 

B. Manual door operation should require maximum of 25 lb. lifting force to open. 


A. Protect installed products until completion of project 

B. Clean doors, frames and glazing. 

C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 

D. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. 






SECTION 08410 

METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS – (INCLUDING HURRICANE RESISTANT) 



A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass and metal infill panels. 

B. Aluminum doors and frames and door hardware. 


A. Design and size components to withstand the higher of the following: minimum load requirements 

as stated below, or the load requirements of the applicable codes in effect in the governing 

municipality, as measured in accordance with ASTM E 330.: 

1. Wind loads: 

a. Comply with requirements of ASCE 7. 

1. Positive wind load: 20 lb/sq ft. 

2. Negative wind load: 20 lb/sq ft. 

b. Comply with high wind and airborne debris criteria for relevant area & jurisdictions. 

2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full 

recovery of glazing materials. 

B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of 

lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 

C. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured 

at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with 

ASTM E 283. 

D. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure 

difference of 2.86 lb/sq ft. 

E. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water 

entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within 

system. 

F. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused 

by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental 

effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 





A. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural 

Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of the installation 

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION 

A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. 

B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed 

coatings which bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS 

A. Coordinate the work with installation of firestopping components or materials. 

METAL FRAMED STORE FRONTS – (INCLUDING HURRICANE RESISTANT) 08410 - Page 1 of 4






A. Kawneer Co. 

B. PPG Architectural Metals 

C. Tubelite Architectural Products 

D. Vistawall Architectural Products 

E. United States Aluminum 

2.02 PRODUCTS 

A. Standard (4” Deep Framing): 

1. Kawneer TriFab 451 T 400. 

2. Vista Wall FG-1000. 

3. U.S. Aluminum Series 400. 

B. High Wind (Hurricane Resistant): 

1. Kawneer Model IR 501 with 350 IR Entrance (Hurricane Resistant) 

2. United States Aluminum Model IT-600 Stormfront (Hurricane Resistant) 

3. Vistawall Architectural Products Model FG-5100 StormMax (Hurricane Resistant) 

2.03 COMPONENTS 

A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with 

infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. Verify sizes with drawings. 

1. Finish: Class I color as noted on drawings. Conforming to Aluminum Association 

Standards 

AA-M12C22A31. (Refer to Drawing for Color) 

2. Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, 

drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 

3. Glass 1” insulated. 

4. Glazing stop flush. 

B. Aluminum Framed Storefront Spandrel: 

1. Framing members for spandrel single pane applications to be Kawneer TriFab 450 400 VG (2” 

x 2-1/2” veneer). 

2. Glass: Single Pane Spandrel. 

3. Glazing stops: Flush. 

C. Doors: Glazed aluminum; medium stile. 

1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 

2. Top Rail: 4 3-1/2 inches wide. 

3. Vertical Stiles: 4-1/2 3-1/2 inches wide. 

4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide, complying with ANSI Requirements. 

5. Glass: 1” insulated. 

6. Glazing Stops: Square. 

7. Finish: Same as storefront. 

D. High Wind Storefront System: 

1. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing 

members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. Verify sizes 

with drawings. 

a. Finish: Class I color as noted on drawings. Conforming to Aluminum Association 

Standards AA-M12C22A31. (Refer to Drawing for Color) 

b. Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from 

exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 

c. Glass 1 5/16” insulated impact resistant. 

d. Glazing stop flush. 

2. Aluminum Framed Storefront Spandrel: 

a. Framing members for spandrel single pane applications to be Kawneer IR 501. 

b. Glass: Impact Resistant Spandrel. 

c. Glazing stops: Flush. 

3. Doors: Glazed aluminum; medium stile. 





a. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 

b. Top Rail: 3-1/2” wide. 

c. Vertical Stiles: 3-1/2” wide. 

d. Bottom Rail: 6-1/2” wide, complying with ANSI Requirements. 

e. Glass: 1-5/16” insulated. 

f. Glazing Stops: Square. 

g. Finish: Same as storefront. 


A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). 

B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). 

C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 

D. Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick galvanized steel. 

E. Perimeter Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. 

F. Glass: Safety glass to be provided as required by code. 

G. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration 

requirements. 

2.05 HARDWARE 

A. Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application. 

1. Include for each door weather-stripping, sill sweep strip, threshold, pivots, narrow stile handle 

latch, dead bolt with interior lever and closer. 

2. Pull to be flat plate style (to accommodate BSRO signage on all exterior doors). 

B. Weather-stripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; ADA compliant; provide on all doors. 

C. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; provide on all doors. 

D. Drip Caps: Refer to drawings. 


A. Submit shop drawings as outlined in Section 01300. Do not begin fabrication until shop drawings 

have been approved. 

B. Fabricate components in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. 

C. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. 



A. Install wall system in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 

B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and 

other irregularities. 

C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. 

D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, 

aligning with adjacent work. 

E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. 

F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. 

G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. 

H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal 

barrier. 

I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. 

J. Install hardware using templates provided. 

K. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08800, using glazing method required to 

achieve performance criteria. 

L. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900. 

M. Conduct hose stream test of storefront and door at time of punchlist. 


A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 






A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. 

B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping 

cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. 

C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 

D. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily 

repaired. 






TABLE OF CONTENTS 

DIVISION 00 

BIDDING AND CONTRACT INFORMATION 

I. Invitation to Bid 

II. Project Document List 

DIVISION 01 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

01001 Standard General Conditions – Multi-Draw Contract 

01002 General Project Requirements 

01003 Special Conditions/ Owner Furnished Materials 

01300 Administrative Requirements 

01322 Construction Camera System 

01352 Sustainable Recommendations 

01400 Quality Requirements 

01524 Construction Waste Management 

01600 Product Requirements 

01780 Closeout Submittals 

DIVISION 02 

SITE WORK 

02112 Clearing, Grubbing and Striping 

02200 Earthwork 

02210 Site Grading 

02225 Structural Excavation and Backfill 

02226 Pipe Trench Excavation and Backfill 

02227 Parking Lot Excavation and Backfill 

02228 Site Excavation and Fill 

02245 Lime Stabilized Sub-grade 

02282 Termite Control 

02370 Drilled Pier Foundations 

02480 Landscaping 

02482 Hydro-mulching New Lawns 

02486 Sod Work 

02488 Epic System Water Management 

02518 Interlocking Concrete Pavers 

02520 Portland Cement Concrete Paving 

02530 Asphalt Paving 

02577 Pavement Markings 

02795 Flexible Walkway 

02810 Irrigation System 

DIVISION 03 

CONCRETE 

03100 Concrete Forms and Accessories 

03200 Concrete Reinforcement 

03300 Cast In Place Concrete 

03331 Polished And Stained Concrete Floor 

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - Page 1 of 4




DIVISION 04 

MASONRY 

04065 Mortar and Masonry Grout 

04720 Cast Stone 

04811 Single Wythe Unit Masonry 

04816 Masonry Veneer 

04840 Thin Brick Veneer 

04860 Manufactured Stone Veneer 

DIVISION 05 

METALS 

05120 Structural Steel 

05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 

05511 Folding Metal Ladders 

DIVISION 06 

WOOD AND PLASTICS 

06067 Plastic Surfacing Materials 

06073 Fire-Retardant Treated Wood 

06100 Rough Carpentry 

06193 Plate Connected Wood Trusses 

06410 Custom Cabinets 

DIVISION 07 

THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 

07115 Bituminous Dampproofing 

07190 Water Repellents 

07191 Penetrating Sealer for Curing 

07210 Board and Batt Insulation 

07214 Foamed In Place Insulation 

07240 EIFS 

07270 Firestopping Systems 

07310 Asphalt Shingle Roofing 

07411 Metal Awning/Roofing 

07540 Membrane Roofing System 

07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 

07650 EPDM Sheet Flashing 

07710 Rain Removal System 

07900 Joint Sealers 

DIVISION 08 

DOORS AND WINDOWS 

08112 Commercial Steel Doors and Frames 

08310 Access Doors and Frames 

08332 Fire Doors & Rolling Fire Doors 

08360 Sectional Overhead Doors 

08380 Traffic Doors 

08410 Metal Framed Storefronts 

08625 Metal Framed Skylight / Smoke Vent 

08710 Door Hardware 

08800 Glazing 





DIVISION 09 

FINISHES 

09245 Stucco 

09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies 

09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 

09650 Resilient Flooring 

09685 Carpet Tiles 

09770 Special Wall Surfacing 

09902 Interior and Exterior Paints and Stains 

DIVISION 10 

SPECIALTIES 

10160 Toilet Compartments 

10445 Door and Room Signs 

10513 Metal Lockers 

10810 Toilet Accessories 

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT (NOT INCLUDED) 

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (NOT INCLUDED) 

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 

13850 Gas Detection and Alarm 

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT INCLUDED) 

DIVISION 15 

MECHANICAL 

15000 Automatic Sprinkler Systems 

15010 Supplementary Mechanical Conditions 

15020 Tests and Adjustments 

15050 Basic mechanical materials and Methods 

15075 Mechanical Identification 

15082 Piping Insulation 

15086 Duct Insulation 

15145 Plumbing Piping 

15146 Plumbing Specialties 

15195 Facility Natural Gas Piping 

15212 Compressed Air System 

15410 Plumbing Fixtures 

15486 Fuel-Fired Water Heater 

15500 Dry Pipe Automatic Sprinkler Fire Protection 

15542 Gas-Fired Radiant Heaters 

15545 Unit Heaters 

15738 Split-System Air Conditioning Units 

15810 Ducts 

15820 Duct Accessories 

15838 Power Ventilators 

15840 Operable Exterior Wall Louvers 





15855 HVAC Air Devices 

DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 

16010 Electrical Special Conditions 

16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 

16060 Grounding and Bonding 

16070 Hangers and Supports 

16123 Building Wire and Cable 

16131 Conduit 

16138 Boxes 

16139 Cabinets and Enclosures 

16140 Wiring Devices 

16155 Equipment Wiring 

16195 Electrical Identification 

16210 Electrical Utility Service 

16412 Enclosed Switches 

16426 Enclosed Contactors 

16442 Distribution Switchboards 

16443 Panelboards 

16510 Interior Luminaires 

16520 Exterior Luminaires 

16721 Fire Alarm – Conduit and Pull String Only 

16722 Security Alarm – Conduit Only 

17000 Sprinkler Supervisory, Fire Alarm & Monitoring System 

17101 Detection and Alarm 

APPENDIX A 

Geotechnical Report 

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 


Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC.. 

Invitation to Bid 

Date: 

To: 

From: 

8/23/2012 

Bidders 

Mays & Company 

5949 Sherry Lane, St. 1570 

Dallas, TX 75225 

214.363.8400x131 

Re: 

Instructions to Bidders for: 

Firestone Complete Auto Care 

575 Vance Street & West Center Avenue 

Lakewood, Colorado 80226 

1 Invitation to Bid (ITB) - Introduction 

Mays & Company, with or on behalf of Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC is inviting General 

Contractors to respond to this Invitation to Bid (ITB) for the New Firestone Store PIN #163571 located 

at 575 Vance Street & West Center Avenue, Lakewood, CO 80226 

BSRO is inviting your company to submit a bid proposal for the New Firestone Store. 

Your company has been identified as a potential General Contractor based upon your reputation for 

competitive pricing and excellent customer service. 

Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC is seeking a General Contractor(s) who can meet its stringent cost, 

quality and service requirements. Should you decide to participate in the bid process, you must 

acknowledge the receipt and intent to bid via e-mail to Forrest Wells by 3:00 pm CDT on 9/13/2012. 

Bid Process Overview 

The tentative timeline for the ITB is given below. Please note that these dates are subject to change. 

Changes will be communicated to General Contractors by phone and confirmed via email. 

Selected General Contractors issued ITB 8/23/2012 

Deadline to acknowledge receipt of ITB & intent to bid (Attachment A) 8/27/2012 

Pre-Bid Meeting 

TBD 

Deadline to submit questions (RFI Form Attachment C) 9/11/2012 

ITB response & contractor’s proposal due 9/13/2012 

Project Superintendent Arrival 

TBD 

Project Start Date 11/21/2012 

Construction Complete 4/22/2013 

2 Bid Forms & Bidding Procedures 

Bid Forms include the following documents: 

Completed Contractor’s Bid Proposal Form (Attachment B) 

July 5, 2012 Updated New Store Invitation to Bid Revised 07-05-2012 Page 1



Completed Bridgestone Retail Operations Bid and Schedule of Values (Electronic form under separate 

cover) 

Bidders shall notify the Architect and Owner in writing of any discrepancies, ambiguities, omissions, or 

questions concerning the Drawings and Specifications. Written requests and responses shall be 

made via e-mail using the Request for Information form provided with this invitation. Replies will 

be issued to all prime bidders of record as Addenda to the Drawings and Specifications, which will 

become part of the Construction Contract. The Architect and Owner will not be responsible for oral 

clarification. Questions received less than 48 hours before the bid opening cannot be answered. 

: 

For questions: 

Forrest Wells 

Phone: 

214.363.8400x131 

Cell: 214.952.6947 

Fax: 214.363.8409 

Email address: 

forrest@mayscompany.com 

3 Disclaimer 

This ITB does not commit Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC to any specific course of action. Nor does 

it bind Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC to provide any explanation or reason for its decision to accept 

or reject any bid. 

Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC reserves the right to: 

‣ Discontinue this ITB process without obligation 

‣ Reject any or all bids or any portion of the bids 

‣ Negotiate service terms and cost proposals with the winning General Contractor(s) after the 

successful bid is completed. 

4 Bidding Errors 

Bidding is done at the General Contractor’s risk. If a General Contractor makes an error in the bid 

proposal, the General Contractor assumes sole responsibility for the error. 

5 Proposal Guarantee 

Each bidder agrees that by filing his/her proposal and in consideration of Bridgestone Retail 

Operations LLC receiving and considering such proposal, said proposal shall be firm and 

binding upon each such bidder until the proposal is accepted by Bridgestone Retail Operations 

LLC or for a period not to exceed sixty (60) days from the date set for the opening or proposal 

date, which ever period shall be shorter. 

Bid Requirements 

The objective of this section is to give additional information regarding requirements. 

6 Bid Documents 

The bidding requirements consist of the invitation to bid document, bid proposal forms, scope of work 

documents, special notes, plan sheets noted on EXHIBIT “A” PROJECT DOCUMENT LIST and all 

addendums and clarifications issued prior to bid due date. Your proposal is to be complete in its entirety 

and must include any and all cost for the construction services noted within these documents and on the 

Plan Sheets noted with EXHIBIT “A” PROJECT DOCUMENT LIST. 




7 Site Condition 

It is the General Contractor’s responsibility to become thoroughly familiar with the site. By providing a 

bid proposal to this project, it is presumed that the General Contractor is familiar with all conditions at 

this site and has taken them into account and included them in their bid proposal. The contractor and all 

of his sub-trades shall visit the site and determine the extent of work required to complete the project per 

the bidding instructions, including any associated electrical and plumbing alterations. Bidders must 

examine and determine for themselves the location and nature of proposed work, the amount and 

character of labor and materials required, and any difficulties which may be encountered. 

8 Building Codes 

The plans and specifications may, in some instances, not conform to all local and/or state building codes 

or ordinances. The contractor must be familiar with the normal requirements of such codes and 

ordinances, as well as standard trade practices in the area, and areas where the specifications fail in this 

respect must be brought to our attention at the time of bidding. Whether or not they are specifically noted 

in the bid, such requirements and standard practices shall be considered a part of the bid. The 

successful bidder will coordinate and complete all work and sub-trades to a final and satisfactory 

completion. If specifications exceed the code or ordinance requirements, the specifications shall prevail 

9 Selection of Subcontractors 

Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC’s goal is to obtain quality work at the most effective price. It is 

essential that bids be solicited from qualified firms, (union and/or merit shop as required). 

10 Scope of Work/Special Instructions 

Include in the bid proposal the cost to perform the work outlined on the Scope of Work / Special Notes 

within the Invitation to Bid Document. If there is a conflict in direction provided on the Scope of Work 

documents versus the plan sheet the General Contractor shall seek clarification from the Owners Project 

Manager before proceeding with the work. 

Contractor agrees that no person with responsibilities in the execution of the contract will discriminate 

with respect to any sub-contractor, employee or application for participation in this project because of 

race, creed, color, national origin, sex or age. 

a. You must submit your bid using the attached Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC Bid 

Form. The Bid Form will be emailed to your attention in a protected Excel Spreadsheet 

File. Proposals shall be signed with name clearly printed below the signature. Where 

bidder is a corporation, proposals must be signed with the legal name of the corporation 

followed by the name of the state of incorporation and the legal signature of an officer 

authorized to bind the corporation to a Contract. One (1) original of the proposal must be 

submitted to Forrest Wells within 24 hours of the bid date and time. The bids will be 

privately opened and evaluated. The Owner reserves the right to disqualify any bid for 

any reason. 

b. Submit Proposal via E-mail to: 

Forrest Wells: forrest@mayscompany.com 

Brandy Story: brandy@mayscompany.com 

c. You must be capable of starting construction on or before 11/21/2012. 

d. You MUST acknowledge your acceptance of this INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS and 

your intent to provide a bid within 48 hours of receiving this invitation to bid. 

e. You shall furnish with your bid, a preliminary project schedule created on Microsoft 

Project that assumes a 11/21/2012 start date and a 150 day construction period with 

substantial completion (turnover for fixture and merchandise by the Owner) no later than 

4/22/2013. This “preliminary” schedule must be updated upon the issuance of a Notice to 




Proceed and subsequently on the 1 st day of every month following the start of 

construction reflecting the current and actual status of the progress of the work, i.e., 

adjusting line items, regardless of cause, those that are ahead of or behind schedule. In 

addition, upon the start of construction, a Project Status Report MUST be emailed to 

Forrest Wells and Brandy Story each and every Friday by 5:00 PM Central Standard 

Time indicating what work scheduled during the next 3 weeks. 

f. You must also provide your in-house breakdown/bid tabulation if requested by the 

owner. 

g. You must submit with your bid, the resumes of two Site Superintendents that will be 

available to supervise the construction of the project. The Owner reserves the right to 

interview each superintendent and select the one that we think will be the best person for 

the project. 

h. The project must have a full time project superintendent onsite on the job from the start 

of construction through Contract Completion (Store Opening), which may be as much 

as 30 days following Substantial Completion (Turnover for Fixture and 

Merchandise). The superintendents proposed for this project must have a minimum of 5 

years construction supervision experience within the last 7 years. Owner shall have the 

right to approve the project superintendent prior to construction. 

i. Alternates shall be itemized separately using the appropriate tab of the Bridgestone 

Retail Operations LLC Bid Form and are NOT to be included in the Base Bid. The Base 

Bid should be for the primary products specified on Plans and Specs. Owner reserves 

the right to accept or reject any alternates proposed by the Bidder. 

j. The Bid Documents include: On-site and Off-site improvements including drive 

approaches to street paving, utility routing etc. Your bid shall in a cover letter summarize 

and breakout the costs of the Building and the Site work separately. 

k. Payment & Performance Bonds are are not required for this project. 

l. Questions: Bidders shall notify the Architect and Owner in writing of any discrepancies, 

ambiguities, omissions, or questions concerning the Drawings and Specifications. 

Written requests and responses shall be made via e-mail using the Request for 

Information form provided with this invitation. Replies will be issued to all prime 

bidders of record as Addenda to the Drawings and Specifications, which will become part 

of the Construction Contract. The Architect and Owner will not be responsible for oral 

clarification. Questions received less than 48 hours before the bid opening cannot 

be answered. 

m. Owner/Developer reserves right to reject bids and to waive irregularities, technicalities, 

and informalities. 

n. You must submit with your bid a copy of your Certificate of Insurance and 

Contractor’s License for the state and city in which the project will be built. 

o. Examination: Bidders shall carefully examine the documents and the project site to 

obtain firsthand knowledge of existing conditions. Contractors will not be given extra 

payments for conditions, which can be determined by examining the site and documents. 

p. Subcontractors: Owner/Developer reserves the right to recommend or reject 

subcontractors. 




q. Award: The Contract will be awarded, as soon as is practical. The Owner reserves the 

right to reject and accept any and all bids without explanation, to waive irregularities, and 

to award in the best interest of the Owner. 

r. Contract: The Construction Contract shall be prepared by Mays & Company on the 

Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC Contract for Construction and General Conditions. A 

sample copy of the contract is attached. 

s. You shall include in your bid the set-up, mounting and connection of the Construction 

Observation Camera. The camera shall be mounted at the front right corner of the site 

such that it has a view of the front and right side of the building. Depending on where 

you set up your Job Shack, it can usually be mounted on the Temporary Power Pole that 

serves the Job Shack. PLEASE INCLUDE THE COST OF ONE CAMERA FROM OX- 

BLUE FOR THIS PROJECT. REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. 

11 Temporary Facilities 

a. Include in your bid the cost of a Job Site Office. This office must have lighting and airconditioning. 

This office can be any type of traditional field office structure such as a 

trailer or a steel container. It must be large enough to accommodate a table and chairs to 

seat 8 people. It must have a counter space that will accommodate reviewing drawings. 

And it must have storage space that will accommodate the storage of small items that 

should not be left out on the job site overnight. The office must have one (1) telephone 

dedicated for voice communication and one (1) telephone dedicated for facsimile and 

internet communication. The office must be equipped with a Cordless Phone and a Fax 

Machine. 

b. The Superintendent/Field Office must be equipped with a computer and printer that are 

capable of connecting to the internet, receiving and sending emails, printing of “PDF” files 

that may be sent to the job site during the course of construction, and downloading and 

emailing photos from the Superintendent’s digital camera. 

c. The Superintendent must be equipped with a cellular telephone that has voicemail 

capability. 

d. The Superintendent must be equipped with a digital camera. This camera shall be set up 

to download photos to the Job Office computer. The camera shall also be set up to 

imprint the date and time on each photo. 

e. Include in your bid a Portable Toilet. This toilet must be located near the Job Site Office 

and shall be anchored to the ground in order to prevent vandalism. This toilet must be 

cleaned at least once per week. 

f. Include in your bid, as noted above, the cost of installation of our web-based construction 

Observation Camera. The camera shall be located initially as described below provide 

the maximum site and building visibility until the project advances to a point 21 days prior 

to turnover when it is to be relocated to the inside of the building in such a way as to 

provide visibility throughout the sales floor. The system is to be removed prior to store 

opening. A cost allowance not to exceed $5,000 should be used. Prior to mobilization, 

the developer shall contract OxBlue Corporation to provide BFRC specific construction 

camera services. The construction camera services are to be used throughout the project 

under the terms and conditions further defined in Part One (1) of the required BFRC 

construction specifications. Please submit orders online thirty (30) days prior to 




commencing of new construction. Orders shall be submitted at: 

http://www.oxblue.com/order. The contractor shall be prepared to provide 120 volt 

power and onsite mounting of the construction camera. The camera shall be mounted at 

an elevation above roof height and at a position that allows two complete sides of the 

building to be viewed. For additional information please contact OxBlue Corporation 

directly at 888-849-2583. 

g. Include in your bid the cost of an alternative electrical power for use until the point in time 

when the power company can provide service to a temporary power pole. 

h. One (1) “Firestone Coming Soon” sign will be furnished and installed by 

Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. 




12 Specific Construction Items 

a. Include cost of a Landscape Irrigation System, including sleeves between all landscaped 

areas as well as a sleeve from a landscaped island to the designated point inside the 

building to accommodate the Irrigation Time Control wiring. NOTE: The system shall be 

installed with “Bubblers” at all ornamental & canopy trees. As part of the close-out 

procedure, the Irrigation Installer and the Superintendent shall conduct a meeting with 

the FIRESTONE Store Manager to train the FIRESTONE Store Manager on the 

operation of the Irrigation Timer, recommended water times & frequencies, and standard 

maintenance procedures. Additionally, after the day that the GC turns the building over 

to the Owner (or Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC.) the contractor shall make visits to 

the site every two weeks for 12 months to inspect the plant material & irrigation system 

for any problems. There will be a 12 month warranty on all landscaping and irrigation 

work. Any part of the landscaping or irrigation system that dies or fails to perform to the 

satisfaction of the owner or Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. shall be repaired or 

replaced as applicable at the sole cost of the General Contractor. 

b. The roofing system shall be as per the specifications including the extended 20 year 

warranty. 

c. Your bid should include the demolition of existing improvements as indicated on the Civil 

Drawings (including but not limited to buildings, sheds, septic tanks, etc.). No additional 

compensation will be paid to the GC for the demolition or removal of items that are 

visible from the surface of the ground or identified within the geotechnical investigation 

report that must be removed in order to construct the work indicated on the drawings. 

These items include but are not limited to: trees, culverts, existing debris, etc. 

d. Review the Geotech Report Carefully – Include all soil remediation/ rock removal work 

recommended or that can be reasonably construed from the log of borings. Include the 

cost of all such work in the base bid. 

e. Site grading shall be performed in accordance with these plans and specifications and 

the recommendations set forth in the Geotechnical Report referenced in this plan set. 

The contractor shall be responsible for removing and replacing the suitable materials as 

specified in the Geotechnical Report. All excavated or filled areas shall be compacted as 

outlined in the Geotechnical Report. Moisture content at time of placement shall be 

submitted in compaction report prepared by a qualified Geotechnical Engineer, 

registered with the state where the work is performed, verifying that all filled areas and 

sub-grade areas within the building pad area and areas to be paved have been 

compacted in accordance with these plans and specifications and the recommendations 

set forth in the Geotechnical Report. Sub-base material for sidewalks, curb, or asphalt 

shall be free of organics and other unsuitable materials. Should sub-base be deemed 

unsuitable by BSRO or BSRO representative, sub-base is to be removed and filled with 

approved fill material compacted as directed by the Geotechnical Report. All fill, 

compaction, and backfill materials required for utility installation shall be as per the 

recommendations provided in the Geotechnical Report and shall be coordinated with the 

applicable utility company specifications. The awarded General Contractor MUST be 

prepared to submit a per cubic yard cost for the following two volume items: 

i. Per cubic yard cost to remove and replace existing soils with structural fill. 

ii. Per cubic yard cost to remove and replace existing soils with select fill 

f. The GC is responsible for verifying the exact location and depth of the connection points 

of all sub-surface utilities prior to purchasing materials OR commencement of any work 

that connects to these existing utilities. If the connection points differ in any way 




materially from the Construction Drawings, contact the Mays Construction Manager 

immediately. 

g. You are responsible for having the building corners set by surveyor retained by the 

General Contractor. You must coordinate the completed Footing/Stem wall Survey 

prior to pouring the foundation. Form survey must have horizontal dimensions from at 

least (2) two property lines as well as top of footing elevations as it relates to the finished 

floor elevation. 

13 Permits, Fees and Inspections 

The Contractor shall NOT be required to the Building Permit but will be required to secure any other 

secondary permits and/or inspections required by all applicable federal, state and local codes, rules, 

regulations, ordinances and statutes (“Applicable Laws”). Plans have been submitted to all required 

offices for approval by Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC and we anticipate permits will be ready by the 

start of construction. You must co-ordinate with the Project Manager as it relates to the permit. The 

Project Manager will advise as to the status. Original Certificates of Inspection shall be furnished to 

Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC in all cases where permits are required. The Cost of such secondary 

permits and/or inspections shall be included in Contractor’s invoice to Bridgestone Retail Operations 

LLC with the applicable receipts attached thereto, and the costs shall not be subject to Contractor’s 

percentage charges for overhead and profit. Subcontractor permit fees are not reimbursed. 

14 Utilities 

Power 

a. Do not include the cost of the Building Permit Fee or Impact Fees in your bid. The 

Owner will pay for the Building Permit and Impact Fees. 

b. DO NOT include Water and Sewer Tap Fees in your bid. If the city requires payment by 

the General Contractor at the time that the Building Permit is issued, the GC shall pay for 

these fees and then issue a reimbursable cost invoice for the amount of the fees (without 

any markup) with copies of the check and fee documentation. Your bid should include 

the removal of any existing meters that are not indicated to be re-used. 

c. HOWEVER, utility inspection fees, any required Payment & Performance or Maintenance 

bonds, public improvement permits, etc. that are required in order for your utility subcontractor 

to install his scope of work SHALL be included in your Bid. Also, all charges 

by the water utility company to purchase the actual water meter and associated any vault 

SHALL be included in your BID. 

Include in your bid all required work to bring the electrical service to the building. Your bid should 

include (2) 4” underground conduits and wire or as indicated on the Civil Utility Plan, to the point of 

service at the building, as indicated on the Building Electrical Power Plan. 

Gas 

Include in your bid all required work to bring the gas service to the building. Your bid should include 

underground gas line piping from the point of connection at the existing gas main to the point of service 

on the building. For the purposes of Bidding, assume that the gas meter will be set at the existing gas 

line location by the gas company and you will provide the service line from that point of service to the 

building as indicated on the Plumbing Plan. 




Telephone and Cable TV 

Include all required work to bring the telephone & cable TV cables to the building. Your bid should 

include (2) 4” underground conduit extending from the existing service to the point of service at the 

building, or as indicated on the Utility Plan. 

Follow these guidelines for the installation of the incoming Telecommunications conduit: 

‣ Four inch diameter conduit. 

‣ PVC or galvanized conduit. 

‣ Conduit is to be buried at least 36 inches deep from sub-soil level. For example, if the conduit 

goes under a road, driveway, or parking lot that will be paved concrete, the 36 inch measurement 

is from the soil level down. The depth of pavement or concrete that is placed on top of the soil is 

not counted in this measurement. 

‣ If power is in the same trench as telecommunication conduit, there must be a 12 inch separation 

between the power facility and Telco facilities. In this case, Telco would be at a minimum of 24 

inches preferably with power at 48 inches below sub-soil level and Telco at 36 inches below subsoil 

level. 

‣ In all cases, a minimum of six inches of “safe in” gravel above and below the conduits is 

recommended to protect the conduit from rocks and uneven trench base and from overburden 

(dirt clods and rocks) being backfilled in the trench. In the case of power and Telco using the 

same trench, safe-in gravel should be the medium separating the power and Telco. 

Water and Sewer 

Provide (furnish and install) all water and sewer services lines and associated accessories as indicated 

on the Civil Drawings and/or Plumbing Drawings. 

15 Scheduling 

a. The construction shall be completed in 150 days, INCLUDING average weather days, 

from the date of the Notice to Proceed. Based on past experience this is more than 

enough time to complete the project. There will be no extension of the Substantial 

Completion day. Liquidated Damages may be assessed for each day after the 

Substantial Completion day that the project is not complete. Refer to the Construction 

Contract and General Conditions for further details. 

b. On the 150th day the building should be 100% complete and ready to turnover to 

Firestone Store Operations Team. 100% complete means all contract work is complete 

including ALL punch-list items. With the project ready for “Turnover” to Firestone Store 

Operations Team. A detailed construction punch-list will be developed two weeks prior 

to the Substantial completion day. The Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. Zone 

Construction Manager will also develop a finishes punch-list which may not be done until 

after the “Turnover” date which is expected to be minimal. 30 days after the store 

opening date the Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. Zone Construction Manager will 

compile a final list of any outstanding “punch-list” items. 

c. No revision to the project schedule shall constitute a revision to the Contract time, 

milestone dates, substantial or final completion dates, or any Contract documents. In the 

event that the work in accordance with the project schedule is not maintained in a 

manner which allows completion within the Contract time frame, the General Contractor 

shall at its expense employ additional personnel including overtime labor which in 




Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC’s opinion is necessary to allow the work to be 

completed within the Contract. 

d. The following site visits will take place as a run up to “Turnover”: 

16 Reporting 

i. 28 days before turnover a owner’s consultant will perform a final 3 rd party 

project status report. 

ii. 21 days before turnover the building must be clean and free of ladders, 

debris, lifts etc. with interior finishes complete, temporary or permanent 

power energized, telephone system complete and with dial tone, alarm 

installation and activation complete with the building secure ready to 

receive the 4 th FFE owner delivery. A Contract Change Order will be 

created in the amount of $5,000 crediting the contract should the condition 

of the building not meet the requirements noted above. 

iii. 14 days before turnover the General Contractor is expected to perform 

along with the Owner’s Program Manager, a punchlist for the project. 

iv. 07 days before turnover the BSRO Zone Construction Manager will conduct 

a walk through of the building to ensure the completeness of any remedial, 

incomplete or other remaining work that must be completed upon turnover 

of the project to the Operations Team. 

a. You MUST comply with the Owner’s Construction Progress Reporting on a weekly basis, 

consisting of an updated Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. “Project Status Report” in 

Word 2007 format, a document which includes digital photos, all of which must be 

emailed to Forrest Wells and Brandy Story on Friday of each week. This reporting is not 

flexible. The Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. reviews these reports and photographs 

every Monday so they can (a) be kept informed as to the progress, and (b) informed as 

to the schedule progress to coordinate a myriad of operational events that are linked to 

the state of the construction at certain points in the timeline. Brandy Story. will provide 

electronic copies of the report and instructions. 

b. A Microsoft 2000 Project formatted “Production Schedule” MUST be updated on the 

1 st day of every month to reflect the exact status of the schedule, i.e., adjust line items 

that are ahead of schedule or behind schedule no matter what the reason. ONLY a 

Microsoft Project scheduling system is to be used. 

c. The Project Manager for the project will be required to participate in a Weekly 

Construction Progress Conference Call on each Tuesday during the course of 

construction. During this call there will be a discussion addressing upcoming scheduling, 

Requests for Information’s, potential change orders, upcoming owner furnished 

deliveries, etc. You will be contacted to establish schedule a specific time for the call, 

typically on Tuesdays. THIS CALL IS MANDATORY. 

17 Special Procedures 

a. You must be ready to “FULLY MOBILIZED” on site within seven days of the Notice to 

Proceed. The definition of “fully mobilized” includes the following: Job shack installed on 

site, erosion control devices installed, construction entrance installed, portable toilet on 




site, and clearing and grubbing underway. In order to meet Bridgestone Retail 

Operations LLC expectations, the project cannot get off to a slow start. 

b. Any change in the scope of work, whether suggested by the General Contractor, or 

requested by the Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. or required by another party, shall 

be submitted in accordance with the procedure outlined within the Contract for 

Construction using the only permitted Change Order Request form referenced within the 

Agreement supported by complete and through documentation and a with a total price 

for each proposed addition or deduction to the Agreement. The General Contractor 

SHALL NOT proceed with nor execute the work involved in the “Proposed Change 

Order” unless and until the proposed change has been approved by the 

Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. No change order will be processed without 

adequate supporting detail. 

c. It will be the contractor’s responsibility to furnish sufficient manpower for all trades 

necessary on a daily basis to complete this project within the time frame of the contract. 

d. It is this General Contractor’s responsibility to fully coordinate the work activities of all 

vendors, subcontractors and suppliers to this project so no part shall be left in an 

unfinished and or incomplete condition. This includes those contracted directly with 

Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC and Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC personnel 

such as Construction Project Manager, Store Management and those as applicable to 

interface with project completion. 

e. The Owner will pay for construction testing; however, if a test fails, the General 

Contractor will be responsible for any re-testing costs generated by the deviation. It is 

the General Contractor’s obligation to make sure all test results conform to the 

requirements of the plans and specifications. It is the General Contractor’s obligation to 

(a) schedule the testing firm to be on-site for all inspections and testing required in the 

specifications and (b) give appropriate advance notice to the testing firm of the need for 

their presence at the job site. 

f. If there are any conflicts between the Civil Drawings and any other drawings, you should 

bring up the discrepancy to Forrest Wells of Mays & Co. prior to proceeding with the bids 

or the work. 

g. Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. Requires a smooth, level, blemish free slab that is 

buffed to a shine. Absolutely no honeycombs, holidays, de-laminated areas or spider 

cracks will be accepted. Any areas of the slab which are not acceptable to 

Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. will be required to removed & replaced at the 

General Contractor’s expense without loss of time to the schedule. The concrete 

finishing subcontractor MUST be educated on the process of applying the specified 

sealer product and work together with the sealer applicator to eliminate any defects, 

deviation or other problems during the placement and finishing process. Slab protection 

around the perimeter walls and elsewhere is included within the scope of work for the 

project, including the period of exterior masonry wall construction to protect the floor slab 

from dropped masonry units or mortar, pipe threading, overhead welding etc. 

h. All equipment used on the slab including but not limited to forklifts, scissor lifts, etc. shall 

have WHITE rubber wheels and diapers. Your Superintendent must be diligent in 

enforcing this rule. Any stains or marks on the floor slab caused by hydraulic fluid, 

battery acid or black tires will be removed at the General Contractor’s expense. It has 

been our experience that damage to the slab caused by hydraulic fluid, battery acid 




cannot be repaired and therefore you will be required to remove and replace the 

damaged area of the slab from saw cut joint to saw cut joint. 

i. Fixture Equipment deliveries of Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC supplied material is 

on a tight schedule and will be ONLY be phased according to the following schedule and 

will be released from a consolidated warehouse by the Bridgestone Retail Operations 

LLC Zone Construction Manager ONLY. NOTE that the purpose of the #2.5 delivery 

of shelving is to allow the installation early enough to permit the installation of fire 

sprinkler and lighting prior to inspections for turnover is applicable. The building 

however must be completely secure at that time which is estimated to be 

approximately 32 days prior to turnover. 




Delivery 

Construction 

Milestone 

Item 

Quantity 

Vendor 

#1 

Before Slab 

Pour 

Key Drop Box 1 

BF Warehouse 

Floor Safe 1 Priesmeyer 

#2 

After Roof 

Install 

Rotary cassettes 9 Rotary Lift 

#2.5 

#3 

#4 

Building 

Secure 

After plywood 

ceiling, 

install & paint 

Approximately2 

weeks 

after #3 – but 

no later than 2 

weeks before 

turnover 

No Exceptions 

Tire Shelving N/A Western Pacific 

Parts Wire Shelving N/A ITC 

OH Cord Reel Lights 11 General Mnfg. 

OH Air Hose Reel 11 Reelcraft 

Rotary 

Superstructures/Pedestals/Pumps 

9 Rotary 

Used Oil Tank 1 John Dow, Ind. 

Heavy Duty Cordreel 4 Reelcraft 

Eye Wash 1 Ball Chemical 

5 HP Compressor 2 Gardner/Denver 

Refrigerated Drier 1 Champion 

Wood VCT Flooring N/A Amtico 

Slate VCT Flooring N/A Amtico 

QUICK COUPLERS (10/BOX) 

Warehouse 

Carpet Tiles 

N/A 

Interface 

Flooring 

Balance of Firestone FFE N/A BF Warehouse 

MVS Service Desk 1 Accel Group 

Customer Service Pods 2 Accel Group 

Customer Service Pod 1 Accel Group 

Granite Tops 1 Master Tile 

Power Poles 5 Mono Systems 

Rim Clamp Tire Changer 2 Hennessy 

Electronic Wheel Balancer 1 Hunter 

Alignment Rack N/A Hunter 




j. There are several long lead Owner Furnished items that must be ordered by Bridgestone 

Retail Operations LLC. from several National Account Vendors. These items include but 

are not necessarily limited to: the Automobile Lifts or Hoists, fixtures, racking, automotive 

equipment, imbedded safe and key drop box etc. as noted on the F1 and F2 drawings. 

Most but not all items will be consolidated at a third party warehouse for release to the 

jobsite on the attached schedule. These five delivery dates and all dates contained within 

the Construction Wire, are to be included and incorporated into your Project Schedule. 

These deliveries and associated timelines are CRITICAL and must be achieved without 

any exception. 

k. Contractor shall only use Rotary certified RAI installers for the installation of the 

Rotary lifts. 

l. The Project Manager and or Job Superintendent assigned to manage the project shall 

not be changed or reassigned without written consent from Bridgestone Retail 

Operations LLC. In the event that any Job Superintendent is, for whatever reason, 

unable to work on the project, Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC has the right to accept 

or reject General Contractor’s promptly tendered proposed replacement and re-negotiate 

General Contractor’s fees. The Job Superintendent is expected to be on the job site 

during normal working hours M-F and come to the job site to meet with subcontractors 

performing night work as may be required. 

m. General Contractor shall maintain the highest standards of integrity and honesty in its 

dealings with all public authorities relating to the project. General Contractor hereby 

warrants that all representation it has made or will make to such authorities is factually 

accurate. 

n. The General Contractor will be responsible for the installation of all Bridgestone Retail 

Operations LLC. furnished equipment, fixtures, displays, furniture and inventory racking 

(tier racks & parts racks). General Contractor shall enter into a contract only with 

Bridgestone authorized fixture installers listed in Exhibit B. The following equipment 

will be installed (unloaded, set in place, attached to floor and plugged into a power outlet 

installed by the General Contractor) by a Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. Vendor at 

no expense to the General Contractor: Hunter Alignment Machine, Hunter Brake Lathe, 

and Hunter Wheel Balancers. The New Oil Tank and associated piping and dispensing 

system will also be furnished and installed by a Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. 

Vendor. 

o. Fire Alarm System and Security System shall be exclusively contracted with 

Stanley Security Solutions – Bridgestone’s National Account Vendor – No other 

installers will be accepted. (This work will be contracted directly by BSRO with the 

coordination and scheduling of the alarm and/or burglar alarm installation by the 

successful General Contractor. The contact information for that coordination is: 

STANLEY SECURITY SOLUTIONS 

Contact Person: Andrew (Drew) McLaughlin 

Telephone: 612.872.3453 

E-mail: 

Andrew.McLaughlin@sbdinc.com 

p. The job site (building interior & exterior property) MUST be kept in a clean and orderly 

fashion at all times. 




18 Warranty 

q. Execute periodic cleaning to keep building, site, and adjacent properties free of 

accumulations of waste materials, debris, rubbish, and windblown debris resulting from 

construction operations. 

r. Prior to Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. Turnover and Fixture Day remove 

construction tools, scaffolding, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials. 

s. Broom clean and vacuum interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue 

cleaning to eliminate any accumulation of dust. 

t. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on or 

adhere to wet or newly coated surfaces. 

u. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other 

closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing space. 

v. Store volatile wastes in covered metal containers and remove from premises daily. 

Prevent accumulation of waste which creates hazardous conditions. Provide adequate 

ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. 

w. Do not throw materials from heights. 

x. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site daily until execution of 

final cleaning and dispose off site in lawful manner. 

y. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and 

anti-pollution laws. 

z. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on Project site. Do not dispose of 

volatile wastes or hazardous materials such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in 

storm or sanitary drains. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways. 

aa. CONTRACTOR NOTE: As per the Ashford Formula installation instructions fureseal 

hardener is to be applied to new concrete as soon as the concrete is firm 

enough to work on after toweling. This is critical to proper application on floors 

that ARE NOT going to be dyed or stained and must be verified by the General 

Contractor. Contractor is to provide photographs of the application uploaded onto 

projectmates as a part of the weekly Project Status Report Curecrete Distribution, 

Inc. contact is Brent Green, email Brent.Green@ashfordformula.com. 

1. You must provide a warranty for 1 year after Firestone opens the store for business, or as noted 

in the contract documents requiring a longer warranty period, all warranty periods begin upon 

with the store opening date. During the 11 th month of the warranty, a final “warranty walkthrough” 

will be done to identify any items that should be corrected under the scope of warranty 

work. The complete cost to return and participate in the 11 th month final “warranty walkthrough” 

is included within the cost of the Contract for Construction. 

2. After Firestone opens for business, Contractor shall repair any outstanding problems within 24 

hours notice from Owner. In the event the repair is not completed within such 24-hour period, 

the Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, to have the problem repaired and receive 

immediate reimbursement from the Contractor or deduct such cost from any amount owed to the 

Contractor. Contractor shall notify each subcontractor of this provision. 




19 Insurance 

You must carry Insurance as required by the Contract for Construction and the General Conditions to 

the Contract, in accordance with the example certificates available from the BSRO Zone Construction 

Manager or Fee Service Provider.. 

Include in your bid the cost of the Builders Risk insurance equal to the value of the anticipated contract 

amount, General Liability, Automobile Liability, Excess Umbrella Liability, Workers Compensation and 

Employers’ Liability insurance as required by the Contract for Construction and the General Conditions 

to the Contract in accordance with the example certificates available from the BSRO Zone Construction 

Manager or Fee Service Provider.. 

Name the following parties as “Additional Insured”: 

i. The Lender for the project, if applicable:SMBC Leasing and Finance, Inc. 

ii. Bridgestone Retail Operations, LLC 

iii. Other: Mays & Company Real Estate Development, Inc. 

iv. Any other parties designated by the owners 

20 Application for Payment Process 

Requests for payment shall be made monthly in compliance with the provisions in the Contract for 

Construction and General Conditions to the Contract using only the approved forms contained within the 

Agreement. NO EXCEPTIONS OR DEVIATIONS WILL BE ACCEPTED and will consist of the following 

documents: 

AIA - G702-1992 – Application and Certificate for Payment 

Contractor’s Affidavit and Sworn Statement or Final Contractor’s Affidavit and Sworn Statement 

– Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC form 

General Contractor and Subcontractor trailing Waiver of Lien to Date or Final Waiver of Lien – 

Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC form 

Updated and Current Schedule of Values – Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC form. 

NOTE: PAYMENT APPLICATIONS SUBMITTED AFTER THE FIRST PAYMENT IS PROCESSED 

MUST BE ACCOMPIANED BY THE TRAILING WAIVERS FOR ALL SUBCONTRACTORS WHO 

WERE LISTED AS HAVING BEEN PREVIOUSLY PAID BEFORE THE APPLICATION CAN BE 

PROCESSED AND APPROVED. THE WAIVERS FOR SUBCONTRACTORS REQUESTING 

PAYMENT ARE TO BE IN AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE TOTAL PAID TO DATE AS NOTED ON THE 

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT. NO WAIVERS ARE REQUIRED FOR THE FIRST APPLICATION 

ONLY. 




EXHIBIT “A” - PROJECT DOCUMENT LIST 

The following shall constitute a complete listing of documents for this project: 

This Project Manual prepared by CASCO 

Bid documents include a specification addendum 1, all dated August 23, 2012. 

Civil Documents prepared by LAMP, RYNEARSON & ASSOCIATES, INC dated August 21, 2012 

Geotechnical Investigation Report prepared by PSI dated April 20,2011 and PSI addendum 1 

dated June 21, 2012. 

Other 

Other 

Other 




EXHIBIT “B” 

Mandatory List of Approved National Fixture Installers: 

1. Buss Construction 

Jim Buss 

P. O. Box 8576 

Hot Springs Village, AR 71910 

501 623 7916 (office) 

501 623 7936 (fax) 

501 366 7790 (cell) 

jkbuss@buss-construction.com 

2. FI Companies 

Mary Hack 

Client Support Coordinator 

3150 Bordentown Ave 

Old Bridge, NJ 08857 

732-727-8100 

mhack@ficompanies.com 

3. American Installation 

15600 28 th Avenue North 

Plymouth, MN 55447 

Roger Kill 

763 278 7324 Office 

763-458-3684 Cell 

763-540-0160 Fax 

rkoll@aic-install.com 

4. REAMS 

Larry Roberts – Account Manager 

Reams Enterprises 

1478 Central Ave. 

East Point GA 30344 

404 684 2500 (off) 

404 262 0675 (fax) 

404 787 1538 (cell) 

5. STARNES OSWALT 

Nicholas Masson 

1000 Whitlock Ave., Suite 320 

Marietta, GA 30064 

800 600 5470 x 18 (Office) 

404 262 0675 (fax) 

404 934 5371 (cell) 

6. New Image Construction, LLC 

217 Mohawk School Rd 

New Castle, PA 16102 

Duke Wheeler 

724-667-1062 Office 

724-333-2447 Cell 




724-667-1068 Fax 

21 Preferred Suppliers - National Accounts 

Contractor shall base his bid on National Account pricing for Overhead Doors, Roof, HVAC and heaters, 

and light fixtures. 

For the preferred supplier pricing, the following manufacturer representatives may be contacted: 

OVERHEAD DOORS 

Clopay Overhead Doors: 

Contact Person: 

Sherrie Reed 

Telephone: 937-440-6773 

Fax: 937-440-8826 

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PAINTS AND STAINS (See drawings and section 9902) 

Sherwin Williams Paint: (Paints listed under “Bridgestone” name) 


Shaun Williams 

Telephone: (847) 330-6262 

Fax: 

(847) 330-0056 

Email: 

shaun.williams@sherwin.com 

MECHANICAL (See drawings) 

Lennox: 


Katie L. Schmitter 

Telephone: 847-289-1181 

Fax: 847-289-1182 

katie.schmitter@lennoxind.com 

Carrier: 

York: 

Trane: 


Mike Smid – Temperature Equipment 

Corporation 

Telephone: 708-418-7830 

Fax: 


Jeff Nieman – Midwest Rep 

Telephone: 800-838-7219 

Telephone: 630-279-0050 

Fax: 630-833-3113 


Ammanda Nakamura 

Telephone: 630-734-3200 

Fax: 630-323-9040 

RADIANT HEATERS (See Drawings) 

Spaceray: 


Evelyn Kelch 

Telephone: 888-383-5965 




Fax: 800-869-7485 

CONCRETE SEALER – Ashford Formula (See Section 07191) 

Curecrete: 


Brent Green 

Telephone: 800-988-5654 

Fax: 801-489-5663 

Brent.green@ashfordformula.com 

LIGHT FIXTURES & BULBS (See Drawings) 

Commercial Lighting Industries: 


Frank Halcovich 

Telephone: 800-755-0155 

Cell: 

Fax: 

760-391-6933 

Email: 

frank@commercial-lighting.net 

DYED CONCRETE FLOORING: 

Diamashield, LLC. 


Travis Sibley 

Telephone: 248-228-3250 

Cell: 313-510-6149 

Fax: 248-228-3255 

Email: 

tsibley@diamashield.com 

Restroom Partitions, Accessories, and Metal 

Lockers 

Joseph Niesyto 

General Manager 

Specialties Direct Inc.-Chicago 

630-323-8100 Office 

630-323-8282 Fax 

630-323-8441 Direct Line 

jniesyto@specialtiesdirect.com 




NATIONAL ACCOUNT SUPPLIER – All Wood, Impact & Hollow Metal Doors & Frames, Architectural 

Hardware, Door and Room Signs, Toilet Compartments and Accessories 

Drawings 

Show Room & Fixture Plan 

- Owner Directed National Account Supplier: Fixture # 37 Coat Rack to be supplied by BSRO 

- Owner Directed National Account Supplier: All Toilet Room Accessories EXCLUDING (excluding fixture # 

37 (Coat Rack) which is supplied by BSRO) to be purchased from Specialties Direct Inc. 630-323-8441 


Room Finish & Door Schedules 

- Owner Directed National Account Supplier: All Wood, Impact & Hollow Metal Doors & Frames, Architectural 

Hardware be purchased from Girtman and Associates, A Division of Bass Security Services Inc. 855-447-8600 

Ext. 1505 bridgestone@girtman.com 

Specs 

Spec Section 08112 - Commercial Steel Doors and Frames 

- Owner Directed National Account Supplier: All hollow metal doors and frames to be purchased from Girtman 

and Associates, A Division of Bass Security Services Inc. 855-447-8600 Ext. 1505 bridgestone@girtman.com 

Spec Section 08380 – Traffic Door 

- Owner Directed National Account Supplier: All traffic doors to be purchased from Girtman and Associates, A 

Division of Bass Security Services Inc. 855-447-8600 Ext. 1505 bridgestone@girtman.com 

Spec Section 08710 - Door Hardware 

- Owner Directed National Account Supplier: All hardware in this section, including the Aluminum storefront 

threshold, door sweep, perimeter seal, crash chain & Mortise cylinder, to be purchased Girtman and Associates, 

A Division of Bass Security Services Inc. 855-447-8600 Ext. 1505 bridgestone@girtman.com **All other 

Aluminum Storefront hardware provided by Aluminum Storefront supplier** 

Spec Section 010810 – Toilet Accessories 

- Owner Directed National Account Supplier: All Toilet Room Accessories EXCLUDING (excluding fixture # 

37 (Coat Rack) which is supplied by BSRO) to be purchased from Specialties Direct Inc. 630-323-8441 


Spec Section 010160 – Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments 

- Owner Directed National Account Supplier: All Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments to be purchased from 

Specialties Direct Inc. 630-323-8441 jniesyto@specialtiesdirect.com 

- 

Spec Section 010445 – Door and Room Signs 

- Room and Door Signs to be purchased from Specialties Direct Inc. 630-323-8441 





22 Project Close-Out 

1. Close-Out Book 

The General Contractor shall collect, organize and provide complete electronic closeout documents 

as noted below and within the Project Specifications. The electronic documents are to be 

consolidated and uploaded onto the Projectmates System by the Developer and/or Fee Service 

Provider for future reference: 

In addition, one complete digital disc set of all closeout documents is to be sent to the attention of 

Rocco Spizzirri as noted below. 

a. TAB 1 – Completed MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET and Subcontractor warranty 

letters on Bridgestone Retail Operations Form ONLY, electronic copies will be 

provided for your use. 

b. TAB 2 – Copy of Temporary and/or Final Certificate of Occupancy. 

c. TAB 3 - Manufacturer warranty information for Landscape Irrigation System, Overhead 

Doors, Fire Protection System, Fire Alarm System, HVAC, Light Fixtures (interior & 

exterior), Plumbing Fixtures, Water Heater, etc. 

d. TAB 4 - Operation Manuals for Landscape Irrigation System, Overhead Doors, Fire 

Protection System, Fire Alarm System, HVAC, Light Fixtures (interior & exterior), 

Plumbing Fixtures, Water Heater, etc. (Separate these items with tabs.) 

e. TAB 5 – HVAC Test and Balance Report. 

2. Project Record Documents: 

a. Digital disc is to be sent to: 

Rocco Spizzirri 

Bridgestone Retail Operations 

333 East Lake Street 

Bloomingdale, IL 60108 

b. Original Certificate of Occupancy unless the jurisdiction required that it be located within 

the facility, if that condition exists include a clear and legible copy of the documents. 

c. Completed maintenance and/or operations Bonds (copy of original performance and 

payment Bond) if applicable. 

d. Consent of Surety for final Payment, if applicable 

e. Substantial Completion Punch list showing items completed and approved by 


f. Final Project Status Report (PSR) by third party inspector: Certification that all “Open” or 

“Pending” items on final report by Third Party inspector have been completed and 

certified by Forrest Wells and Bridgestone Zone Construction Manager. 




g. BFRC Post-ADAAG Stores ADA Consent Decree Compliance Certification Program. 

The series of forms and picture requirements are to be completed jointly between the 

General Contractor and the Developer/Fee Service Provider during the punchlist being 

prepared by the contractor 14 days prior to “Turnover”. 

The Developer/Fee Service Provider shall create a sub-folder within the “completed 

photos” tab of the photo album section of Projectmates. The picture requirements are to 

be uploaded into that subfolder. The title of the sub-folder is to read: “ADA PHOTOS”. 

The Developer/Fee Service Provider shall create a sub-folder within the “Closeout” 

section of Projectmates. Issue an email to the attention of Scot Dever, sdever@bfrc, 

requesting the sub-folder creation if one is not already visible and accessible on the 

system. The title of the sub-folder is to read “ADA FORMS” 

Form Requirements: 

BFRC Post-ADAAG Stores Contractor ADA Compliance Certification Form 

Post-ADAAG Store – BFRC Representative Non-Compliant Issues Resolution Form 

BFRC Survey Questions version 4.8.02 1.0- PostADAAG.XLS 

Picture requirements: 

1. A panoramic view of at least 4 stalls showing the Handicap stall(s) and the adjacent 

stalls (Normal stall/HC stall/Striped stall/Normal stall - A normal stall may be an area 

in which a car cannot access, example is landscaping). The required stalls to be 

shown in the photos could be increased due to the amount of handicapped stalls 

required at the location. 

2. Show all handicap signage. 

3. Show all striped paths and walkways from the Handicap stalls to the store entrance. 

4. Show all striping for ramps and/or access to ramps to the store entrance. 

5. Separate photo of entrance is needed if not visible in pictures listed above. 

If more than one photo is required to achieve what is mentioned above, then they must 

provide overlapping views. This is so the photos can be spliced if needed. 

h. Contractors Record Letters of Conformance: By submitting Letter of Conformance, the 

Contractor declares that the Product identified by manufacturer’s name and model 

number is (one of) the product(s) specified and is suitable for the intended use as 

defined within the Contract Documents and has been provided and placed in operational 

condition in accordance with the manufacturers published instructions and the Contract 

documents. Submit completed Letter of Conformance for each product elected as 

indicated within each Specification Section. Fill-in required information on the form and 

sign in ink by the person authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor. No modifications 

to the form are permitted. Record Letters of Conformance are included, and can be 

found at the end of each applicable Specification Section. List of Record Letters of 

Conformance as follows: 

i. Start-Up of systems and Training Certification that include, but not limited to the building 

Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical systems and if installed the Landscape Irrigation 

system (as noted below). Contractors shall start-up and test all systems and certify the 

date of complete and functional systems free of repair or defective parts or work. Each 

Subcontractor shall provide adequate training sessions for all equipment and systems 

signed off by the Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. Construction representative, 




contractor and store representative using the Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. form at 

the end of this section. 

j. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the 

Work: 

• Drawings 

• Addenda 

• Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract Documents. 

• Approved shop drawings and submittals. 

k. Record Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 

2. Field changes of dimension and detail. 

3. Details not on original Contract drawings. 

4. At completion of project provide two (2) complete hard copy and one digital disc 

sets of As-Built Drawings to the owner’s representative. 

3. Irrigation Training: 

a. As part of the close-out procedure, the Irrigation Installer and the Superintendent shall 

conduct a meeting with the FIRESTONE Store Manager and the Owner’s Construction 

Manager to train the FIRESTONE Store Manager on the operation of the Irrigation Timer, 

recommended water times & frequencies, and standard maintenance procedures. The 

Superintendent and the store manager shall complete the Close-Out Training 

Certificate at the end of this document. 

Warranties 

“Contractors Statement of Warranty” For General and all Sub-Contractors, suppliers and 

manufacturers. This includes equipment put into use with Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC. 

during construction beginning from the date of acceptance... 

Final list of subcontractors used complete with telephone numbers, addresses and after hours 

Telephone numbers 

Final lien waivers from Contractor and all Subcontractors and Suppliers on the BFS Retail & 

Commercial Operations, LLC. form (Affidavit of Total Release and Certification of all bills Paid); 

included at the end of this Specification Section. 

Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. 

Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES, with title of Project; 

name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of 

responsible company principal. 

Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Project Manual. 

Include all warranties as listed below: 

Roofing 

Rotary Lifts 

Joint Sealers 

H.M. Doors and Frames 

20 years 

10 Years 

5 years 

1 year 




Overhead Doors & Operators 5 Years (10 years against rusting per specs) 

Metal-Framed Storefront 1 year 

Door Hardware 

5 years 

Glazing 

1 year 

Acoustical Ceilings 

1 year 

Resilient flooring 

1 year 

Painting 

1 year 

Electric Water Cooler 

5 years 

Water Heater 

5 years 

HVAC Equipment 1 year (5 years on compressors / 10 years on heat 

exchanger.) 

Electrical 

1 year 

Concrete 

1 year 

Asphalt Paving 

2 years 

Infrared Tube Heaters 1 year (5 years on combustion chamber/radiant tube.) 

Fire Alarm System 

1 year 

Plumbing 

1 year 

Concrete Sealer 

5 years 

All Labor, Equipment, and Materials not specifically listed above shall receive the 

standard manufacturer’s/contractors warranty or 1 year, whichever is longer. 




BFS Retail & Commercial Operations, LLC 

MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET 

All Sections Must be Complete Prior to Final Payment 

Project Name: Project Ref. No. : Prepared by: Preparer’s Initials: 

Project Address: Contact; Contact Phone: Date Prepared: 

Contract Date: 

Opening Date: 

Type of Construction 

Walls: 

Roof: PVC TPO EPDM Metal Shingle Other 

Roofing Manufacturer: 

Warranty Information (Years) 

Store Type (Check All That Apply) 

Free Standing Strip Center Outlot 

New Store Relocation Remodel 

Design Build Build to Suit Self Developed 

Developer: 

General Contractor 

SUBCONTRACTORS 

Electrical: 

Plumbing: 

Fire Protection: 

Roofing: 

HVAC: 

Paving: 

Painting: 

Storefront: 

Earthwork: 

Site utility: 

Striping: 

Landscaping: 

Floor Covering: 

Carpentry: 

Fencing: 

Exterior Concrete: 

Interior Concrete: 

Masonry: 

Overhead Doors: 

Auto Lifts: 

Structural Steel: 

Company Name Location: Business Phone: Emergency 

Phone: 




Heating and Air conditioning Equipment 

Gas fired Electric Heat 

Quantity Manufacturer Model Number Heat/Cool 

(BTU’s) 

Cool Only 

Miscellaneous Information 

Parking Lot Lighting Manufacturer Catalog/Model 

Number 

Lighting Poles: 

Light fixtures: 

Ballasts: 

Lamps: 

Volts/Watts 

Lamp Model 

Number 

Parking Lot Lighting Manufacturer Catalog/Model 

Number 

Fluorescent Mount: 

Ballasts: 

Lamps: 

Exterior Wall Packs 

Ballasts: 

Lamps: 

Exit Lighting 

Emergency Lighting 

Volts/Watts 

Lamp Model 

Number 




Products 

Door Closers: 

Panic Hardware: 

Automatic Doors: 

Ceiling Panels 

Floor tile: 

Rubber: 

VCT: 

Carpet: 

Restroom Partitions: 

Fire Pump: 

Jockey Pump 

Manufacturer 

Catalog/Model 

Number 

Color style 

Note: Include all information requested, including Owner Provided Parts. 

DNA: Does Not Apply 




Closeout Training Certificate 

Project Name: Project Ref. No. : Prepared by: Preparer’s Initials: 

Project Address: Contact: Contact Phone: Date Prepared: 

Opening Date: 

Turnover Training Attendees: 

Plumbing - Contractor: 

Landscape - Contractor: 

H.V.A.C - Contractor: 

Fire Protection - Contractor: 

Electrical - Contractor: 

Alarms - Contractor: 

________________________________________ 

________________________________________ 

________________________________________ 

________________________________________ 

________________________________________ 

________________________________________ 

Attendees/Trainers 

Name: 

Company: 

Recipients/Trainees: 

Name: 

Signature: 




Project; 

General Contractor: 

Date of training: 2/1/2010 

Start-Up of systems and Training Certification 

Meeting Kick off 

Introductions 

‣ General Trainer – Dave Fremmer 

‣ Subcontractors (list who is present) – See Attached 

Purpose of meeting 

‣ To give a high level overview of building items which you may not be familiar with 

‣ This training is only intended for the operation of the building not any maintenance 

‣ Feel free to ask questions at the end of each section 

Meeting ground rules 

‣ Turn off cell phones 

‣ Stay with the group to speed up the training 

‣ We will try to keep the training brief 

Materials needed for training 

‣ Site Plans 

• ALTA 

• Paving Plan 

• Landscape Plan 

• Site Lighting Plan 

Landscape Contractor Training Items 

Responsibility – BSRO is responsible for the total maintenance of the site 

Lawn – Care & Fertilization – Supply Handout with recommendations 

Planting – Care & Fertilization – Supply Handout with recommendations 

Trees – Care & Fertilization – Supply Handout with recommendations 

Irrigation – Operation & Recommended settings – Supply Handout with recommendations of settings 

Electrical Contractor Training Items 

Keep items clear from in front of the electrical panels Fire Marshal will check this 

Electrical panels 

‣ All panels are labeled 

‣ All electrical items are controlled by switches, not the electrical panels 

‣ If a breaker is reset and trips, call FM immediately 

Building & Sign Lighting Timer 

‣ Timer is attached to a photocell to help with the operation of lights 

‣ Building sign lights are programmed to turn on at Pm if photo cell allows and off at 

Outside Outlets – Installed on separate circuits for sales display items 

Plumbing Contractor Training Items 

Oil Water Separators 

‣ Review where is the Oil & Water Separator is located on the plans 

‣ Floor drains and utility sinks drain into this system to separate the oil from the water before entering 

the sanitary sewer system. 

‣ Do Not flush shop towels or other items that don’t belong in the system 

‣ Maintenance – call BSRO Facilities Maintenance 




Air Compressor & Dryer 

‣ Purpose of the air dryer 

‣ Operation of valves to isolate and remove damaged components from air system while allowing the 

balance of the system to remain in operation 

‣ Armstrong trap will make noise when in operation 

HVAC Contractor - General Training Items 

Thermostats 

‣ Location 

‣ Operation 

Exhaust Fans & Systems 

‣ CO System 

• When alarm sounds leave the building, system will automatically reset 

• Only detects Carbon Monoxide, 

• No Maintenance 

‣ Switch or operation for service area exhaust fan 

‣ Tire storage ventilation system 

• Thermostat location 

• Operation & setting of system 

Air Filter 

‣ Location 

‣ Changing of filters & intervals 

‣ Thermostat Operation 

General Service Guidelines 

Additional or special items 

Fire Protection Contractor - General Training Items 

Fire Sprinkler Riser 

‣ Do not touch valves & keep the area around the fire riser clear, Fire Marshal will check this 

‣ Location of spare sprinkler heads & Wrench 

‣ What is a dry system (if used) and why is this used in cold climates for attic sprinklers 

‣ Compressor for the dry sprinkler system must remain on. 

If the compressor for the dry system runs a lot there is a leak, call FM immediately 

Additional of special items 

Fire Alarm – General Training Items 

Location & General items the store manager should know 

Burglar Alarm – General Training Items 

Review operation of system with store associates 

General Contractor – General Walk Through items 




Warranty & Maintenance Process 

BSRO/Tires Plus Contact – 

‣ Facilities Maintenance (FM) - 

Office - 

Cell - 

Email - 

Calling FM logs the problem and gets the appropriate people involved; we can’t help you if we don’t know 

what is happening. 

The building has a one year warranty on all items, this does not cover abuse, acts of god such as high 

winds, floods, etc., maintenance or normal wear 

Contractor list for emergencies only, follow up with FM after calling the contractor for the proper follow up 

Exterior Items – Site 

Lot Boundary lines & Access Easement Areas 

Asphalt – General Contractor 

‣ Light Duty & Heavy Duty – Locate this on the plans 

• Do not park heavy vehicles for a long time in the areas of light duty asphalt 

‣ Protect from oil & Gas, this will deteriorate the paving since asphalt is a petroleum based product 

Exterior Items - Building 

Knox Box 

‣ Have extra key made for building keys for the fire department 

‣ Call Fire Department to lock the key in the Knox Box 

Roofs – Pitched Roofs – General Contractor 

‣ Stay off roof 

‣ Never attach anything to the roof, i.e. banners, displays 

Roofs – Flat Roofs – General Contractor 

‣ Stay off the roof, the roof access ladder is for maintenance only 

‣ Never put anything up on the roof such as banners, blow up displays, etc. this will void the warranty 

Interior – Sales Area 

Flooring – The floor has been waxed and needs to me maintained 

‣ The floor can be damaged, keep clean from debris and small stones 

‣ Do not drag items across the floor, it will scratch 

Floor Safe – There is an envelope in the top of the safe with a phone number to call to get the code to the 

safe 

Ceiling Tile – Call FM if any stains are noticed, this may be roof, sprinkler or HVAC leaks 

Light Fixtures – Bugs will build up in the center light cover, use caution when cleaning the lights soil 

easily, the use of a new pair of clean gloves is recommended 




Interior – Service Area 

Lifts – Review simple operation if needed 

‣ Use Up & Down button to raise & lower 

‣ To lock the lift 

• Raise the lift above the desired height 

• Press the lock button & Lower the lift to the locked position with the lock button pressed 

‣ To unlock the lift 

• Raise the lift about 6 inches, the lock will automatically release the lock 

• Lower the lift 

‣ Liquid in the lift containment unit is indicated by light between Up & Down control button 

• Call FM for service when this light is illuminated 

‣ Keep water away from cylinders as much as possible 

Floor Maintenance – The more you clean the floor the glossier it will become 

O.H. Doors – Keep area around doors clear for proper operation 

‣ Don’t hook safety chains or banners on door track 

‣ Maintenance Keep doors balanced, opening force should be about 25 lbs. Call FM if doors become 

too heavy or want to close when half way open 

Door Openers - Keep doors in full view when operating automatic doors 

‣ Safety edge & wire attachments should be maintained at all times 

‣ Do not use slid locks or padlocks on automatic doors, remove bolt from slide lock to use padlock if 

needed when the door operator is disengaged 

‣ To operate the overhead doors with operators manually if the opener breaks or power goes out 

• Pull the smaller single chain 

• Lock into place with tension on the chain, this will engage the manual pull chain 

• Operate the door with the larger pull chain 

• Secure the door at closing by the use of slide locks or engaging the door opener & checking that 

the door is secure 

• Exhaust port hoses are provided 

Service Platforms & Storage Above Used Tire Storage 

Don’t overload with paper files or other heavy items 

Spare Parts and Maintenance Products 

The following items have been left in on the Utility Platform. 

‣ One gallon of each type of paint used 

‣ Floor Tile – 1 Case 

‣ Ceiling Tile – 1 Case 

‣ Compressor Oil – 2 quarts 

‣ Spare set of RTU or Air Handler Filters – Pleated Type 

‣ Spare Lamps (exterior & interior) 2 of each type 

The following items have been given to the Store Manager 

‣ 2 Complete sets of electrical panel keys 

‣ 2 Complete sets of keys for towel dispensers 

‣ 2 Keys for smokers station 

Store Manager acknowledges the receipt of the items listed above: 

Store Manager Signature: ____________________________________________ 

Print Name: 

____________________________________________ 




General Conditions Agreement 

Attachment “A” 

Dear Sir / Madam, 

This letter confirms that the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction attached hereto 

(the "Terms") dated ; apply to all proposals issued to Bridgestone Retail Operations, LLC. by 

Contractor whether by telephone, hard copy, electronically or otherwise. 

Receipt of this confirmation is required before Contractor will be authorized to do business from 

BSRO. 

Please have the chairman, president or a vice president of Contractor confirm that the Terms 

apply to all BSRO orders issued to BSRO by signing and faxing this letter (with no changes of 

any kind) to Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC, no later than 

Retain a copy for your files. This letter must be signed by the company, to be paid by 


Very truly yours, 

BSRO 

_______________________________________ 

Registered Legal Name of Contractor 

_______________________________________ 

Address 

_______________________________________ 

City State Zip 

_______________________________________ 

Contractor’s Officer Signature 

(Chairman, President or Vice President only) 

_______________________________________ 

Print Name 

_______________________________________ 

Title 




Contractor’s Bid Proposal Form 

Attachment “B” 

 

 


333 E. Lake Street 

Bloomingdale, IL 60108 

Re: Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC Store PIN # located at , in 

Having carefully examined the Drawings and Specifications listed in the Bidding Instructions letter dated 

, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and having visited the site 

and examined all conditions affecting the work, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials, 

equipment, and the means of construction required, as called for by said documents to complete this 

project for the TOTAL LUMP SUM COST OF: ($ ) 

1. Extra work or changes in the work not called for on the documents or Revisions issued by 

Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC will be performed only on written authorization from Bridgestone 

Retail Operations LLC, and on a basis if subsequent contract negotiations, duly authorized, showing 

the sum to be added to or deducted from the Contract sum, or by duly authorized revisions. 

2. In the event that any additional work is desired by Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC and it is so 

indicated in writing (approved Supplements issued to the Contract), other than that as indicated 

within the Bidding Instructions or other bid documents, the cost of same shall be determined by: (1) 

Unit prices, if applicable; (2) Itemized estimate plus mark-up, when accepted, or; (3) Actual cost plus 

mark-up. On work performed by subcontractor’s labor, the subcontractor’s percentage mark-up for 

combined overhead and profit shall be limited to 5% (percent). On work performed by the General 

Contractor’s own labor forces the allowable mark-up shall be limited to 10% (percent). 

3. One (1) copy of the BSRO Bid and Schedule of Values Sheet (s). 

4. The bidder hereby certifies: 

a) This bid is genuine and is not made in the interest of or on behalf of, an undisclosed person, 

firm or corporation. 

b) He/she has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited another bidder to put in a false or sham 

bid. 

c) He/she has not solicited or induced any person, firm or corporation to refrain from bidding. 

d) He/she has not sought by collusion or otherwise to obtain for himself any advantage over any 

other bidder or over the Tenant. 

5. This bid includes Revision (s): # dated 

# dated 

# dated 

6. If awarded this Construction Contract, the undersigned agrees to complete the project by: 

. 




Firm Name: 

(Signature) 

By: 

(Name) (Title) (Date) 

Business Address: 

Telephone Number: 

Facsimile Number: 

Email Address: ___________________________________________________________________ 




Request For Information - Attachment C 

Project Name: 

Project Number: 

R.F.I. Number: R.F.I. Date: Reply Date: 

To: 

To: 

To: 

Information Requested (Summary) 

Topic: 

The Architect will review formal requests from the General Contractor for information regarding the Work. Each Request For 

Information will be reviewed according to the contract requirements and a notification in writing will be made for progress 

underway will be reported. 

Drawing and/or Specification: 

Existing Condition/statement of Concern: 

GC: GC R.R.I. Number.: Attachment(s) 

R.F.I. Response 

Proposed Solution: 

Action Item(s): 

By: ZCM Signature: Attachment(s) 




BFRC 

Post-ADAAG Stores 

ADA Consent Decree Compliance Certification Program 

(For BFRC stores which had first occupancy of any type after 1/26/93) 

Table of Contents 

Introductory Materials 

Instructions to Contractor ............................................................................................................ pg ii 

Accessibility Concepts ................................................................................................................ pg iii 

Forms 

Post-ADAAG Store – Contractor ADA Compliance Certification Form ................................... pg 1 

Post-ADAAG Store – BFRC Representative Non-Compliant Issues Resolution Form ............. pg 6 

© 2002 - Universal Designers & Consultants, Inc. 

4/8/02 www.UniversalDesign.com Page #



BFRC Post-ADAAG Stores ADA Consent Decree Compliance Certification Program 

Dear Contractor, 

The information you provide is critical to assuring that BFRC facilities are in compliance with the BFRC Americans with Disabilities Act 

Consent Decree requirements. You will be verifying that at the time of your inspection you have recorded the true and accurate conditions of 

the items indicated on the Contractor ADA Compliance Certification Form. 

1. Initial Inspection 

a. Tools needed include: 

- Clip Board 

- Pencil with eraser and black pen (erasable type suggested) 

- Post-ADAAG Store BFRC Contractor ADA Compliance Certification Form (attached) 

- Tape measure (24' minimum length, retractable 'lever-lock' recommended) 

- 24" Digital SMARTTOOL or 24" level 

b. Answer questions by checking-off appropriate boxes and writing comments in pencil. 

c. Take measurements to within 1/8". 

d. Several initial questions require making a determination as to whether an "accessible route" exists. When answering these questions, 

you must be aware of the accessibility features required for an accessible route as described on that page. 

2. Review and Revise 

a. Review any negative answers with your BFRC representative and request a change order to make any necessary accessibility 

enhancements to the facility. 

b. Complete any accessibility enhancements approved by the BFRC representative and revise the certification form accordingly. 

c. Review any remaining negative answers with your BFRC representative. 

d. Finalize the report, completing it in black ink pen and assuring that: 

◦ Each question is answered 

◦ The store # is written at the top of each page 

◦ All information, including comments, is legible 

◦ All comments are adjacent to the question they refer to 

e. Make a copy for your records as you may need to refer to it if there are any questions. 

f. Submit the original to your BFRC representative. 






Accessibility Concepts 

Accessible Route – For a BFRC store to be accessible and usable, elements addressed in Part A – Accessible Route, must be connected by an 

accessible route that meets the criteria described on the compliance form. 

Range of Reach – Many people who are of short stature or who use wheelchairs cannot reach as high as an average size standing person. 

Restroom Turn Around Space – An appropriate size circular or "T" turn clear floor space will allow most wheelchairs to easily turn around. 

While a circular turn is generally preferred, a "T" turn may often be more easily identifiable. 

Closed Fist/Flail Hand – People with arthritis, hand injuries or amputations, or high spinal cord injuries often may have difficulty making (or 

may not be able to make) a tight grip, pinching, twisting their wrist or making fine finger movements. If a device can be operated with your 

hand formed into a loosely clenched fist or open (flail) hand with the thumb against the palm, most people should be able to operate it. 

Measuring Slope – Use the digital slope meter or a level and tape measure to determine both front/back and cross slopes along the 

approximate longitudinal center line, near the top, middle and bottom. If either the average or any two of the three measurements for 

front/back or cross slope exceeds the Allowable Tolerance, that slope condition will be considered non-conforming. 






(This form may only be utilized for BFRC stores which had first occupancy of any type after 1/26/93) 

Inspection Date: 

Store Number: 

Store Address: 

Store Type: Pre-ADAAG 

(Check one) Post-ADAAG 

Store Phone #: 

Store Manager on Duty Signature (Required): 

Inspector Name (Print): 

Contractor Co: 

Inspection Results: Full Compliance 

(Check one) Non-Compliant Issues 

Contractor Phone: 

Inspector Signature (Required): 

Date: 

Instructions for Completing the BFRC Contractor ADA Compliance Certification Form: 

1. If the store does not have a specific feature, check the NA box. 

2. For each question that can be answered, check Y for yes or N for no. 

3. Any question answered "No" must be reviewed with your BFRC representative. 

4. Use a calibrated 24" long slope meter or 24" long level and tape measure to determine slopes along the approximate longitudinal center 

line, near the top, middle and bottom, for both front/back slope and cross slope. If either the average or any two of the three measurements 

for front/back or cross slope exceeds the Allowable Tolerance, that slope condition will be considered non-conforming. 


4/8/02 www.UniversalDesign.com Page 1




If a question on the final submitted compliance form is answered negatively, the BFRC representative must complete the attached Non- 

Compliant Issues Resolution Form describing the reason(s) that each such condition could not be appropriately modified. If the BFRC 

representative requires help in identifying whether additional action should be taken, or for the proper coding for the reason an action was not 

taken, contact ______________________ at _________________. Reasons permitted by the Consent Decree for not making a modification 

include the following, in which case use the abbreviations indicated and provide suitable supporting documentation: 

C Compliance would require modifications to items not in ownership or direct control of BFRC. 

D Compliance would require restroom structural modifications or re-plumbing or re-electrical within or behind walls, or under floors. 

H Compliance would violate historic preservation restrictions or regulations. 

I 

Compliance is technically infeasible, structurally impractical, or virtually impossible. 

N No architectural barrier exists. 

S Compliance would result in a significant loss of selling or serving space. 

R Compliance would cause a significant risk to health or safety. 

Z Compliance would violate an existing permit or certificate of occupance, unable to obtain a permit, or only able to obtain a conditioned or 

burdensome permit. 

For each non-compliant issue, indicate on the BFRC Non-Compliant Issues Resolution Form the question number, the appropriate coding, a 

brief description of why compliance is not possible, and a brief description of any alternative measure that is being employed. Supporting 

documentation must also be provided as described on page 8. 





Post-ADAAG Stores – BFRC Representative Non-Compliant Issues Resolution Form 

Factual Information Requirements 

1. Not in Ownership or Direct Control of BFRC (C) 

Examples could include: 

• Pay telephones. 

• Vending machines. 

• Parking lots. 

2. Restroom Structural, Plumbing, or Electrical Issues (D) 

Provide a photo(s) of the restroom interior and a description of 

the work that would be required. Examples could include: 

• Wall would need to be moved. 

• In-wall plumbing or electrical would need to be relocated. 

• In-floor waste line plumbing would need to be relocated. 

3. Historic Preservation (H) 

Provide a photo(s) and written documentation confirming: 

• Building is listed/eligible for the National Register of Historic Places, or 

• Building is designated as historic under State or local law. 

4. Structural Impracticality, Technically Infeasible, or 

Virtually Impossible (I) 

Provide a photo(s) and/or drawing(s), plus a written explanation 

indicating the condition(s). Examples could include: 

• A structural column would need to be relocated. 

• A bearing wall would require substantial modification. 

• The site size is small and regrading paved areas is not possible. 

• An electric panel board would require relocation. 

• No additional space is available. 

5. No Barrier Exists (N) 

Provide specific written reference to: 

• The Consent Decree Exhibit 4 Tolerances List. 

• A Federal District or higher court ruling, sanction or documentation 

addressing the issue. 

6. Loss of Selling Space (S) 


indicating the condition. Examples could include: 

• Modifications would substantially limit tire displays. 

7. Significant Risk to Health or Safety (R) 


indicating the risk issues(s). Examples could include: 

• A curb ramp would be at a heavily trafficked drive lane. 

• An accessible parking space aisle would be located at a loading zone 

area. 

8. Conditional Permit (Z) 

Provide written documentation confirming that: 

• The building authority would require extraordinary additional work. 

• The building authority would require changes that adversely affect the 

nature of the business. 







Store Number: 


BFRC Representative: (Print/Sign) 

Date: 

Q # 

• 

NC 

Code 

Describe why compliance is not possible. 

Describe any alternative measure(s) being 

taken. 

Fact Info. 

Attached 

Y/N 

Photo 

Attached 

Y/N 






A. ACCESSIBLE ROUTES 

An accessible route at a Post-ADAAG Store must meet the following: 

Width: 35" min/32" min for 36" length 

Vertical Breaks: 1/4" high max if non-beveled, or 3/4" high max if beveled, 

or curb ramp or ramp 

Horizontal Breaks: 3/4" max perpendicular to path 

Protruding Objects Horizontal: 5" max from wall/12" max from post 

Protruding Objects Vertical: 78" min above finished floor 

1. Is there an accessible route from the store property line to at least one pay 

telephone? 

2. Is there an accessible route from the store property line to each accessible 

parking space access aisle? 

3. Is there an accessible route from the store property line to at least one 

accessible customer entry door? 

4. Is there an accessible route from an accessible customer entry door to at 

least one accessible customer service counter? 

5. Is there an accessible route from an accessible customer entry door to each 

accessible customer restroom door? 


least one accessible customer drinking fountain? 


least one courtesy coffee 

station? 

8. Is there an accessible route from an accessible customer entry door to and 

along each merchandise display aisle? 


least one of each type 

vending machine? 


least one waiting area? 

Y N NA Comments 





B. PARKING 

11. Are the correct number of accessible parking spaces provided? 

1 – 25 parking spaces = 1 accessible space 

26 – 50 parking spaces = 2 accessible spaces 


12. Is each accessible parking space at least 94" wide? 

13. Does each accessible parking space have an access aisle at least a 94” wide, 

OR is the combined width of each accessible parking space and adjacent 

access aisle at least 188" wide? 

14. Does each accessible parking space have an upright sign which contains the 

international symbol 

of accessibility? 

15. Is each parking space sign located so as not to be obstructed by parked 

vehicles? 

16. Does each accessible parking space and access aisle have front/back and 

cross slopes that do not exceed 3%? 1 

C. CURB RAMPS & RAMPS 

17. Is each curb ramps or ramps which is part of a required accessible route at 

least 35” wide? 

18. Is the front to back slope of each curb ramp or ramp which is part of a 

required accessible route no steeper than 13% if the rise is 3” high or no 

steeper than 9% if the rise is over 3”h ? 1 

19. Is the cross slope of each curb ramp or ramp which is part of a required 

accessible route no greater than 3%? 1 

20. Are the transitions (i.e., lips) at the top and base of each curb ramp or ramp 

which is part of a required accessible route, smooth or no more than ½” 

high if beveled? 

21. Is the top landing at least 46” long at each curb ramp or ramp which is part 

of a required accessible 

route? 

22. Are handrails provided on both sides of each ramp whose rise exceeds one 

step? 





23. Are the tops of handrails at ramps between 33” and 39” above the ramp 

surface? 

24. Are 10” minimum long horizontal extensions provided at the top and 

bottom of each ramp handrail? 

25. Is the diameter of each ramp handrail gripping surface between 1 ¼” - 2"? 

D. CUSTOMER ENTRY DOOR 

26. Is the net clear width of one door leaf when open 90 o at least 31 3/8” at 

each customer entry that is on an accessible route? 

27. Is the pull side clear floor area maneuvering space at least 17” wide beyond 

the strike of each 

customer entry door that is on an accessible route? 

28. Is the pull sidemaneuvering space at least 59” deep for front approach or 

48" deep for side approach at each customer entry door that is on an 

accessible route? 

29. Is the push side maneuvering clearance at least 10” wide beyond the strike 

of each customer entry 

door that is on an accessible route, if there is both a closer and a latch on 

the door (or 0" required beyond the latch if not both a closer and a latch)? 

30. Is the push side maneuvering space at least 48" deep for front approach or 



31. Is the threshold no higher than ¼” vertical or ½” and beveled at each 

customer entry door that is on 

an accessible route? 

32. Are the handles operable with a closed fist or flail hand at each customer 

entry door that is on an accessible route? 

33. Is the slope of the maneuvering space no steeper than 3% in any direction 

at the exterior side of each customer entry door that is on an accessible 

route? 

34. If all customer entry doors are not accessible, is there a sign with the ISA 

(International Symbol of Accessibility) at each accessible entry door and an 

ISA sign with a directional arrow at each non-accessible customer entry 

door, directing customers to an accessible door? 





E. SALES AREA 

35. Is the clear floor area at least 29” x 47” at one customer service counter on 


36. Is the writing surface no higher than 37” or is there a portable writing 

surface at each customer 

service counter? 

37. Is the clear floor area at least 29” x 47” in front of at least one coffee station 

(if one exists)? 

F. CUSTOMER RESTROOM 

38. Is there a high-contrast low-glare sign with raised (tactile) letters and Braille 

centered at a height of 58"-62" on the wall beside each restroom door, or 

on the door if in-swinging? 

39. Are the restroom entry door handles operable with a closed fist or flail 

hand? 

40. Can the lock on each restroom entry door be operated with a closed fist or 

flail hand? 

41. Is the net clear opening at least 31 3/8” wide at each restroom entry door? 

42. Is the threshold no higher than ¼” or ½” and beveled at each restroom 

entry door? 


the strike of each restroom entry door? 

44. Is the pull side maneuvering space at least 59” deep for front approach or 

48’ deep for side approach 

at each restroom entry door? 

45. Is the push side maneuvering space at least 10” wide beyond the strike of 

each restroom entry door 

if there is both a closer and a latch on the door (or 0" required beyond the 

strike if not both a closer 

and a latch)? 

46. Is the push side maneuvering space at least 48" deep at the restroom entry 

door? 

47. Is the side wall grab bar at least 42" long and within 12" of the rear wall at 

each accessible water closet? 





48. Is the rear wall grab bar at least 36" long (24" if wall space restricted by a 

lavatory) and within 8" 

of the side wall at each accessible water closet? 

49. Are the center line of the grab bars between 32"-37" high at each accessible 

water closet? 

50. Is the diameter of the grab bars 1¼” – 1½” at each accessible water closet? 

51. Is there 1½” clearance between the grab bars and the wall at each 

accessible water closet? 

52. Does each accessible water closet have a seat between 17”-20” high? 

53. Does at least one lavatory have knee space that is at least 27” high 

(excluding the overflow) from 

the front edge to 8” back from the front edge and a top height no greater 

than 35"? 2 

54. Are the accessible lavatory pipes insulated or configured to protect from 

contact? 

55. Are faucet controls at the accessible lavatory operable with a closed fist or 

flail hand? 

56. Is the bottom reflecting edge of at least one mirror no higher than 41”? 

57. Are the highest operable controls on at least one paper towel dispenser (or 

hand dryer) no higher than 49” if only front approach is possible, or 55" if 

side approach is possible? 

58. Is at least one soap dispenser no higher than 49” if only front approach is 

possible, or 55" if side approach is possible? 

59. If the restroom is at least 5'-6" x 7'-6" in size, is there 58" diameter or 58" x 

58" T turn space available? 

G. CUSTOMER PAY TELEPHONES 

60. Is there a 29” x 47” clear floor area no more than 10" from the face of the 

controls at one pay telephone that is on an accessible route? 

61. Does this pay telephone have all controls no higher than 55” if side 

approach is possible or 49” if only front approach is possible? 

62. Does this pay telephone have a hearing-aid compatible volume control 

handset, and a volume 

control pictogram? 





H. CUSTOMER DRINKING FOUNTAIN 

63. Is the spout of one customer drinking fountain at or below a height of 37” 

or is there an adjacent cup dispenser with round (not pointed) bottom cups 

at 48"h max? 

1 Measure along the approximate longitudinal center line, near the top, middle and bottom, for both front/back slope and cross slope. If either the 

average or any two of the three measurements for front/back or cross slope exceeds the Allowable Tolerance, that slope condition will be considered 

non-conforming. 

2 

If the lavatory is less than 17" deep (as measured from the lavatory face to the rear wall), measure from a point 17" from the rear wall. 






4/8/02 www.UniversalDesign.com



BFRC 

Post-ADAAG Stores 

ADA Consent Decree Compliance Certification Program 

(For BFRC stores which had first occupancy of any type after 1/26/93) 

Table of Contents 

Introductory Materials 

Instructions to Contractor ............................................................................................................ pg ii 

Accessibility Concepts ................................................................................................................ pg iii 

Forms 

Post-ADAAG Store – Contractor ADA Compliance Certification Form ................................... pg 1 

Post-ADAAG Store – BFRC Representative Non-Compliant Issues Resolution Form ............. pg 6 






Dear Contractor, 

The information you provide is critical to assuring that BFRC facilities are in compliance with the BFRC Americans with Disabilities Act 

Consent Decree requirements. You will be verifying that at the time of your inspection you have recorded the true and accurate conditions of 

the items indicated on the Contractor ADA Compliance Certification Form. 

1. Initial Inspection 

a. Tools needed include: 

- Clip Board 

- Pencil with eraser and black pen (erasable type suggested) 

- Post-ADAAG Store BFRC Contractor ADA Compliance Certification Form (attached) 

- Tape measure (24' minimum length, retractable 'lever-lock' recommended) 

- 24" Digital SMARTTOOL or 24" level 

b. Answer questions by checking-off appropriate boxes and writing comments in pencil. 

c. Take measurements to within 1/8". 

d. Several initial questions require making a determination as to whether an "accessible route" exists. When answering these questions, 

you must be aware of the accessibility features required for an accessible route as described on that page. 

2. Review and Revise 

a. Review any negative answers with your BFRC representative and request a change order to make any necessary accessibility 

enhancements to the facility. 

b. Complete any accessibility enhancements approved by the BFRC representative and revise the certification form accordingly. 

c. Review any remaining negative answers with your BFRC representative. 

d. Finalize the report, completing it in black ink pen and assuring that: 

◦ Each question is answered 

◦ The store # is written at the top of each page 

◦ All information, including comments, is legible 

◦ All comments are adjacent to the question they refer to 

e. Make a copy for your records as you may need to refer to it if there are any questions. 

f. Submit the original to your BFRC representative. 






Accessibility Concepts 

Accessible Route – For a BFRC store to be accessible and usable, elements addressed in Part A – Accessible Route, must be connected by an 

accessible route that meets the criteria described on the compliance form. 

Range of Reach – Many people who are of short stature or who use wheelchairs cannot reach as high as an average size standing person. 

Restroom Turn Around Space – An appropriate size circular or "T" turn clear floor space will allow most wheelchairs to easily turn around. 

While a circular turn is generally preferred, a "T" turn may often be more easily identifiable. 

Closed Fist/Flail Hand – People with arthritis, hand injuries or amputations, or high spinal cord injuries often may have difficulty making (or 

may not be able to make) a tight grip, pinching, twisting their wrist or making fine finger movements. If a device can be operated with your 

hand formed into a loosely clenched fist or open (flail) hand with the thumb against the palm, most people should be able to operate it. 

Measuring Slope – Use the digital slope meter or a level and tape measure to determine both front/back and cross slopes along the 

approximate longitudinal center line, near the top, middle and bottom. If either the average or any two of the three measurements for 

front/back or cross slope exceeds the Allowable Tolerance, that slope condition will be considered non-conforming. 







Inspection Date: 

Store Number: 


Store Type: Pre-ADAAG 

(Check one) Post-ADAAG 

Store Phone #: 

Store Manager on Duty Signature (Required): 

Inspector Name (Print): 

Contractor Co: 

Inspection Results: Full Compliance 

(Check one) Non-Compliant Issues 

Contractor Phone: 

Inspector Signature (Required): 

Date: 

Instructions for Completing the BFRC Contractor ADA Compliance Certification Form: 

1. If the store does not have a specific feature, check the NA box. 

2. For each question that can be answered, check Y for yes or N for no. 

3. Any question answered "No" must be reviewed with your BFRC representative. 

4. Use a calibrated 24" long slope meter or 24" long level and tape measure to determine slopes along the approximate longitudinal center 

line, near the top, middle and bottom, for both front/back slope and cross slope. If either the average or any two of the three measurements 

for front/back or cross slope exceeds the Allowable Tolerance, that slope condition will be considered non-conforming. 






If a question on the final submitted compliance form is answered negatively, the BFRC representative must complete the attached Non- 

Compliant Issues Resolution Form describing the reason(s) that each such condition could not be appropriately modified. If the BFRC 

representative requires help in identifying whether additional action should be taken, or for the proper coding for the reason an action was not 

taken, contact ______________________ at _________________. Reasons permitted by the Consent Decree for not making a modification 

include the following, in which case use the abbreviations indicated and provide suitable supporting documentation: 

C Compliance would require modifications to items not in ownership or direct control of BFRC. 

D Compliance would require restroom structural modifications or re-plumbing or re-electrical within or behind walls, or under floors. 

H Compliance would violate historic preservation restrictions or regulations. 

I 

Compliance is technically infeasible, structurally impractical, or virtually impossible. 

N No architectural barrier exists. 

S Compliance would result in a significant loss of selling or serving space. 

R Compliance would cause a significant risk to health or safety. 

Z Compliance would violate an existing permit or certificate of occupance, unable to obtain a permit, or only able to obtain a conditioned or 

burdensome permit. 

For each non-compliant issue, indicate on the BFRC Non-Compliant Issues Resolution Form the question number, the appropriate coding, a 

brief description of why compliance is not possible, and a brief description of any alternative measure that is being employed. Supporting 

documentation must also be provided as described on page 8. 






Factual Information Requirements 

1. Not in Ownership or Direct Control of BFRC (C) 

Examples could include: 

• Pay telephones. 

• Vending machines. 

• Parking lots. 

2. Restroom Structural, Plumbing, or Electrical Issues (D) 

Provide a photo(s) of the restroom interior and a description of 

the work that would be required. Examples could include: 

• Wall would need to be moved. 

• In-wall plumbing or electrical would need to be relocated. 

• In-floor waste line plumbing would need to be relocated. 

3. Historic Preservation (H) 

Provide a photo(s) and written documentation confirming: 

• Building is listed/eligible for the National Register of Historic Places, or 

• Building is designated as historic under State or local law. 

4. Structural Impracticality, Technically Infeasible, or 

Virtually Impossible (I) 


indicating the condition(s). Examples could include: 

• A structural column would need to be relocated. 

• A bearing wall would require substantial modification. 

• The site size is small and regrading paved areas is not possible. 

• An electric panel board would require relocation. 

• No additional space is available. 

5. No Barrier Exists (N) 

Provide specific written reference to: 

• The Consent Decree Exhibit 4 Tolerances List. 

• A Federal District or higher court ruling, sanction or documentation 

addressing the issue. 

6. Loss of Selling Space (S) 


indicating the condition. Examples could include: 

• Modifications would substantially limit tire displays. 

7. Significant Risk to Health or Safety (R) 


indicating the risk issues(s). Examples could include: 

• A curb ramp would be at a heavily trafficked drive lane. 

• An accessible parking space aisle would be located at a loading zone 

area. 

8. Conditional Permit (Z) 

Provide written documentation confirming that: 

• The building authority would require extraordinary additional work. 

• The building authority would require changes that adversely affect the 

nature of the business. 







Store Number: 


BFRC Representative: (Print/Sign) 

Date: 

Q # 

• 

NC 

Code 

Describe why compliance is not possible. 

Describe any alternative measure(s) being 

taken. 

Fact Info. 

Attached 

Y/N 

Photo 

Attached 

Y/N 






A. ACCESSIBLE ROUTES 

An accessible route at a Post-ADAAG Store must meet the following: 

Width: 35" min/32" min for 36" length 

Vertical Breaks: 1/4" high max if non-beveled, or 3/4" high max if beveled, 

or curb ramp or ramp 

Horizontal Breaks: 3/4" max perpendicular to path 

Protruding Objects Horizontal: 5" max from wall/12" max from post 

Protruding Objects Vertical: 78" min above finished floor 

1. Is there an accessible route from the store property line to at least one pay 

telephone? 

2. Is there an accessible route from the store property line to each accessible 

parking space access aisle? 

3. Is there an accessible route from the store property line to at least one 

accessible customer entry door? 


least one accessible customer service counter? 

5. Is there an accessible route from an accessible customer entry door to each 

accessible customer restroom door? 


least one accessible customer drinking fountain? 


least one courtesy coffee 

station? 

8. Is there an accessible route from an accessible customer entry door to and 

along each merchandise display aisle? 


least one of each type 

vending machine? 


least one waiting area? 

Y N NA Comments 





B. PARKING 

11. Are the correct number of accessible parking spaces provided? 

1 – 25 parking spaces = 1 accessible space 



12. Is each accessible parking space at least 94" wide? 

13. Does each accessible parking space have an access aisle at least a 94” wide, 

OR is the combined width of each accessible parking space and adjacent 

access aisle at least 188" wide? 

14. Does each accessible parking space have an upright sign which contains the 

international symbol 

of accessibility? 

15. Is each parking space sign located so as not to be obstructed by parked 

vehicles? 

16. Does each accessible parking space and access aisle have front/back and 

cross slopes that do not exceed 3%? 1 

C. CURB RAMPS & RAMPS 

17. Is each curb ramps or ramps which is part of a required accessible route at 

least 35” wide? 

18. Is the front to back slope of each curb ramp or ramp which is part of a 

required accessible route no steeper than 13% if the rise is 3” high or no 

steeper than 9% if the rise is over 3”h ? 1 

19. Is the cross slope of each curb ramp or ramp which is part of a required 

accessible route no greater than 3%? 1 

20. Are the transitions (i.e., lips) at the top and base of each curb ramp or ramp 

which is part of a required accessible route, smooth or no more than ½” 

high if beveled? 

21. Is the top landing at least 46” long at each curb ramp or ramp which is part 

of a required accessible 

route? 

22. Are handrails provided on both sides of each ramp whose rise exceeds one 

step? 





23. Are the tops of handrails at ramps between 33” and 39” above the ramp 

surface? 

24. Are 10” minimum long horizontal extensions provided at the top and 

bottom of each ramp handrail? 

25. Is the diameter of each ramp handrail gripping surface between 1 ¼” - 2"? 

D. CUSTOMER ENTRY DOOR 

26. Is the net clear width of one door leaf when open 90 o at least 31 3/8” at 

each customer entry that is on an accessible route? 


the strike of each 

customer entry door that is on an accessible route? 

28. Is the pull sidemaneuvering space at least 59” deep for front approach or 



29. Is the push side maneuvering clearance at least 10” wide beyond the strike 

of each customer entry 

door that is on an accessible route, if there is both a closer and a latch on 

the door (or 0" required beyond the latch if not both a closer and a latch)? 

30. Is the push side maneuvering space at least 48" deep for front approach or 



31. Is the threshold no higher than ¼” vertical or ½” and beveled at each 

customer entry door that is on 


32. Are the handles operable with a closed fist or flail hand at each customer 

entry door that is on an accessible route? 

33. Is the slope of the maneuvering space no steeper than 3% in any direction 

at the exterior side of each customer entry door that is on an accessible 

route? 

34. If all customer entry doors are not accessible, is there a sign with the ISA 

(International Symbol of Accessibility) at each accessible entry door and an 

ISA sign with a directional arrow at each non-accessible customer entry 

door, directing customers to an accessible door? 





E. SALES AREA 

35. Is the clear floor area at least 29” x 47” at one customer service counter on 


36. Is the writing surface no higher than 37” or is there a portable writing 

surface at each customer 

service counter? 

37. Is the clear floor area at least 29” x 47” in front of at least one coffee station 

(if one exists)? 

F. CUSTOMER RESTROOM 

38. Is there a high-contrast low-glare sign with raised (tactile) letters and Braille 

centered at a height of 58"-62" on the wall beside each restroom door, or 

on the door if in-swinging? 

39. Are the restroom entry door handles operable with a closed fist or flail 

hand? 

40. Can the lock on each restroom entry door be operated with a closed fist or 

flail hand? 

41. Is the net clear opening at least 31 3/8” wide at each restroom entry door? 

42. Is the threshold no higher than ¼” or ½” and beveled at each restroom 

entry door? 


the strike of each restroom entry door? 

44. Is the pull side maneuvering space at least 59” deep for front approach or 

48’ deep for side approach 

at each restroom entry door? 

45. Is the push side maneuvering space at least 10” wide beyond the strike of 

each restroom entry door 

if there is both a closer and a latch on the door (or 0" required beyond the 

strike if not both a closer 

and a latch)? 

46. Is the push side maneuvering space at least 48" deep at the restroom entry 

door? 

47. Is the side wall grab bar at least 42" long and within 12" of the rear wall at 

each accessible water closet? 





48. Is the rear wall grab bar at least 36" long (24" if wall space restricted by a 

lavatory) and within 8" 

of the side wall at each accessible water closet? 

49. Are the center line of the grab bars between 32"-37" high at each accessible 

water closet? 

50. Is the diameter of the grab bars 1¼” – 1½” at each accessible water closet? 

51. Is there 1½” clearance between the grab bars and the wall at each 

accessible water closet? 

52. Does each accessible water closet have a seat between 17”-20” high? 

53. Does at least one lavatory have knee space that is at least 27” high 

(excluding the overflow) from 

the front edge to 8” back from the front edge and a top height no greater 

than 35"? 2 

54. Are the accessible lavatory pipes insulated or configured to protect from 

contact? 

55. Are faucet controls at the accessible lavatory operable with a closed fist or 

flail hand? 

56. Is the bottom reflecting edge of at least one mirror no higher than 41”? 

57. Are the highest operable controls on at least one paper towel dispenser (or 

hand dryer) no higher than 49” if only front approach is possible, or 55" if 

side approach is possible? 

58. Is at least one soap dispenser no higher than 49” if only front approach is 

possible, or 55" if side approach is possible? 

59. If the restroom is at least 5'-6" x 7'-6" in size, is there 58" diameter or 58" x 

58" T turn space available? 

G. CUSTOMER PAY TELEPHONES 

60. Is there a 29” x 47” clear floor area no more than 10" from the face of the 

controls at one pay telephone that is on an accessible route? 

61. Does this pay telephone have all controls no higher than 55” if side 

approach is possible or 49” if only front approach is possible? 

62. Does this pay telephone have a hearing-aid compatible volume control 

handset, and a volume 

control pictogram? 





H. CUSTOMER DRINKING FOUNTAIN 

63. Is the spout of one customer drinking fountain at or below a height of 37” 

or is there an adjacent cup dispenser with round (not pointed) bottom cups 

at 48"h max? 

1 Measure along the approximate longitudinal center line, near the top, middle and bottom, for both front/back slope and cross slope. If either the 

average or any two of the three measurements for front/back or cross slope exceeds the Allowable Tolerance, that slope condition will be considered 

non-conforming. 

2 

If the lavatory is less than 17" deep (as measured from the lavatory face to the rear wall), measure from a point 17" from the rear wall. 






4/8/02 www.UniversalDesign.com




II. 

PROJECT DOCUMENT LIST 

The following shall constitute a complete listing of documents for this project: 

A. This Project Manual Rev. No. Date 

B. Civil Reference Drawings 

CDL Site & Trash Enclosure Details 0 08/23/12 

C. Civil Drawings 

C1.1 Construction Drawings Cover Sheet 0 08/21/12 

C2.1 Stormwater Management Plan 0 02/16/12 

C2.2 Stormwater Management Plan Details 0 02/16/12 

C3.1 Grading Plan 0 02/16/12 

C4.1 Utility Plan 0 08/21/12 

C4.2 Utility Plan Details 0 08/21/12 

C4.3 Utility Plan Details 0 08/21/12 

C5.1 Sanitary Sewer Plan and Profile 0 03/08/12 

C5.2 Sanitary Sewer Plan and Profile 0 03/08/12 

C5.3 Sanitary Sewer Plan Details 0 03/08/12 

C6.1 Storm Line Plan and Profile 0 03/08/12 

C6.2 Roof Drain Plan and Profile 0 03/08/12 

C6.3 Storm Plan Details 0 03/08/12 

C7.1 Street Construction Plan 0 02/16/12 

C7.2 Street Construction Plan Details 0 06/08/12 

C8.1 Pavign Plan 0 02/16/12 

C9.1 Horizontal Control Plan 0 08/21/12 

C10.1 Details 0 08/21/12 

C10.2 Landscape Plan Details 0 02/16/12 

IR1 Irrigation Cover Sheet 0 08/21/12 

IR2 Irrigation Plan 0 08/21/12 

IR3 Irrigation Details 0 08/21/12 

IR4 Irrigation Details 0 08/21/12 

Site Plan Approval Drawings (Partial Set) 

3 of 7 Landscape Plan 0 02/16/12 

5 of 7 Photometric Plan 0 06/01/12 

6 of 7 Site Details 0 02/16/12 

7 of 7 Site Details 0 02/16/12 

D. General Information (For Reference) 

T1 Title Sheet 0 08/23/12 

E. Store Planning (For Reference) 

F1 Fixture Plan and Notes 0 08/23/12 

F2 Showroom Fixture Plan and Elevations 0 08/23/12 

PROJECT DOCUMENTS LIST 00000II - Page 1 of 3 

Lakewood, CO 08/23/12




F. Architectural Drawings 

A1 Floor Plan and Notes 0 08/23/12 

A2 Reflected Ceiling and Floor Finish Plan 0 08/23/12 

A3 Roof Plan and Details 0 08/23/12 

A4 Exterior Elevations and Details 0 08/23/12 

A5 Building Sections and Details 0 08/23/12 

A6 Wall Sections 0 08/23/12 

A6.1 Wall Sections and Details 

A7 Interior Elevations, Sections and Details 0 08/23/12 

A8 Room Finishes and Door Schedules 0 08/23/12 

A9.1 ADA Requirements 0 08/23/12 



G. Structural Drawings 

S1 General Notes 0 08/23/12 

S2 Foundation Plan and Notes 0 08/23/12 

S3 Foundation Details 0 08/23/12 

S4 Roof Framing Plan 0 08/23/12 

S5 Framing Details 0 08/23/12 

S6 Platform Plan and Details 0 08/23/12 

H. Mechanical Drawings 

M1 Mechanical Plan and Notes 0 08/23/12 

M2 Mechanical Details 0 08/23/12 

M3 Mechanical Equipment Schedules 0 08/23/12 

I. Plumbing Drawings 

P1 Plumbing Plan and Notes 0 08/23/12 

P2 Enlarged Restroom Plumbing Plans 0 08/23/12 

P3 Air Piping Plan and Notes 0 08/23/12 

P4 Oil Piping Plan and Notes 0 08/23/12 

P5 Plumbing Details 0 08/23/12 

P6 Plumbing Schedules and Risers 0 08/23/12 

J. Electrical Drawings 

E1 Lighting Plan 0 08/23/12 

E2 Power Plan 0 08/23/12 

E3 Symbols, Notes and Schedules 0 08/23/12 

E4 Details 0 08/23/12 

E5 Riser Diagram, Panel Schedules & Notes 0 08/23/12 

E6 Fire Alarm Plan 0 08/23/12 

E7 Fire Alarm Notes and Details 0 08/23/12 

E8 Burglar Alarm Riser Diagram, Notes, 

Schedules 0 08/23/12 

ESL1 Electrical Site Lighting Plan 0 08/23/12 






K. Appendix A 

Project Geotechnical Report 





City: 

State: 

P.I.N. No. 



{00052658.DOC;1} 

SECTION 01001 

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS – MULTI-DRAW CONTRACT 

1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND INTERPRETATION. 

A. Contract Documents. The term “Contract Documents” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 1 of 

the Agreement. 

B. Interpretation. The Contract Documents are cumulative, and what is called for by any one shall be as 

binding as if called for by all. In the event of a conflict or inconsistency between any of the provisions of the 

Contract Documents, the provision granting greater rights or remedies to Owner, as determined by Owner, or 

imposing the greater duty, standard, responsibility or obligation on the Contractor, as determined by Owner, shall 

govern and control. All capitalized terms used in the Contract Documents shall have the meanings ascribed to them 

in the Agreement or these Standard General Conditions, unless the context clearly requires a different meaning. 

C. Ownership of the Plans. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the number of copies of 

the Plans reasonably necessary for the execution of the Work (as hereinafter defined) will be furnished to Contractor 

by Owner, at Contractor’s expense, and shall be returned to Owner upon completion of the Work, as they remain 

Owner’s property. 

D. Tenders. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids or any parts thereof. 

2. WORK. 

A. Defined. Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, provide, perform, and complete, in the manner 

specified and described, and upon the terms and conditions set forth, in the Contract Documents, all of the 

following, all of which is herein referred to as the “Work”: 

i. Labor, Equipment, Materials and Supplies. Provide, perform, and complete, in the manner 

specified and described in the Contract Documents, all necessary work, labor, services, transportation, equipment, 

materials, supplies, information, data, and other means and items necessary to perform the project described in the 

Contract Documents at the location described in the Agreement to which these Standard General Conditions are 

attached; 

ii. Permits. Procure and furnish all permits, licenses, and other governmental approvals and authorizations 

necessary in connection with the Work (“Permits and Approvals”); 

iii. Bonds and Insurance. Procure and furnish all bonds and all insurance certificates specified in the 

Contract Documents; 

iv. Taxes. Pay all applicable Federal, State, County, or Municipal excise, gross receipts, sales, or other taxes, 

any payroll taxes or assessments, contributions for unemployment insurance, social security taxes, pensions or 

annuities which are measured by the wages, salaries or other remunerations paid to the employees of Contractor; 

v. Miscellaneous. Do all other things required of Contractor by the Contract Documents; and 

vi. Quality. Provide, perform, and complete all of the foregoing in a proper and workmanlike manner, 

consistent with highest standards of professional and construction practices, in full compliance with, and as required 

by or pursuant to, the Contract Documents, and with the greatest economy, efficiency, and expedition consistent 

therewith, with only new, undamaged, and first quality equipment, materials, and supplies. 

B. Authorization for Work. Contractor shall do no Work without written authorization to proceed from 

Owner. No changes shall be made in the Work without written approval from Owner pursuant to Section 13 of 

these Standard General Conditions. 

3. TIME AND SCHEDULE. 

STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS – MULTI-DRAW CONTRACT 01001 - Page 1 of 23




A. Time is of the Essence. The time of commencement, rate of progress and time of completion of the Work 

are of the essence of this Contract. 

B. Time Schedule. Contractor shall provide to Owner a detailed schedule of the Work in accordance with 

Section 22 of these Standard General Conditions. 

4. WARRANTY OF WORK. 

A. Scope. Contractor warrants that the Work shall be free from defects and flaws in design, materials, and 

workmanship, shall conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and shall be fit, sufficient, and 

suitable for the purposes stated in, or reasonably inferred from, this Contract. The warranty in this Section 4 shall 

be in addition to any other warranties expressed in this Contract, or expressed or implied by law, which are hereby 

reserved to Owner. 

B. Correction of the Work Period; Repairs. The Contractor shall remedy any Work that is found not to be 

in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and pay for any damage to other Work resulting 

therefrom, which shall appear within a one year period from Substantial Completion. Notwithstanding the 

foregoing, if the terms of specific warranties required by any of the Contract Documents stipulate a longer time 

period, the longer time period shall govern. The Contractor shall remedy such non-conforming Work promptly 

upon notice from the Owner. For Work not completed until after Substantial Completion, the applicable time period 

will begin at the time the Work is completed. This warranty shall be extended automatically to cover all repaired and 

replacement parts and labor provided or performed under such warranty and Contractor’s obligation to correct Work 

for a period of one year from the date of such repair or replacement. 

The establishment of a one year time period, or longer periods as may be stipulated by specific warranties, 

relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to remedy the Work, and has no relationship to the time 

within which the Contractor's obligation to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents may be sought 

to be enforced by the Owner, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the 

Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's contractual obligations. 

Any applicable warranty periods set forth in this Section 4 shall not be advanced or otherwise affected by the 

fact that the Contractor uses a portion of the work, including, but not limited to, the electrical, mechanical and 

heating and ventilating systems, prior to when such warranty period would otherwise commence. Warranties 

applicable to permanent systems for which the Contractor has elected to use on a temporary basis, including, but not 

limited to, passenger and freight elevators, will not begin until the Contractor has completed temporary use of these 

systems, restored these systems to like new condition (including making a change of all filters on HVAC 

equipment), and turned the system over to the Owner for permanent use or operation by the Owner, or the time of 

Substantial Completion for the entire Project, whichever is later. 

C. Subcontractor Warranties. Whenever the Contract Documents require a Subcontractor to provide a 

guaranty or warranty, Contractor shall be solely responsible for obtaining said guaranty or warranty in form satisfactory 

to Owner and assigning said warranty or guaranty to Owner. 

D. Owner’s Self-Help. If (i) Contractor fails to promptly make the corrections required under the warranty or 

(ii) Owner deems it inexpedient for Contractor to correct any defects or flaws within the scope of the warranty, 

Owner may (a) make the corrections with its own forces or with contracted forces, or (b) waive the right to require 

correction thereof, and, in either event, recover the costs, expenses, losses and damages thereof by making an 

equitable deduction from any funds due to Contractor under the Contract, requiring Contractor to refund to Owner 

therefor, or by such other actions as may be authorized by Law. 

5. CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY. Contractor will be responsible for the execution and completion 

of the Work in accordance with the highest standards in the industry and true intent of the Contract Documents. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





Contractor shall provide, without extra charge, all incidental items required as a part of the Work even though not 

particularly specified or indicated. Should Contractor object to methods or materials specified, Contractor shall 

notify Owner in writing and obtain direction from Owner before proceeding with the Work. Proceeding with the 

Work by Contractor without notice to Owner shall be construed as an acceptance of the Contract Documents. 

Contractor represents by its Proposal and execution of the Contract that it has examined the Premises and 

compared the Premises with the Plans and the other Contract Documents as to any variances, and has satisfied itself 

as to all matters necessary for Contractor to carry out the Work, including, without limitation, the general working 

conditions (including the character of existing structures at or adjacent to the site and the character and extent of 

Owner’s and other contractors’ operations in the area and in connection with the Project), labor requirements, 

accessibility, condition of the Premises, obstructions, drainage conditions, the actual levels, excavating, fillings and 

underground conditions. 

Contractor shall verify conditions at the Premises and all measurements at the Premises and in the Contract 

Documents, shall be responsible for the same. Contractor shall notify Owner in writing of any seeming errors, 

discrepancies or inconsistencies within the Contract Documents and between the Premises and the Contract 

Documents, and shall await instructions from Owner before proceeding with the Work. No allowance or extra 

payment will be subsequently made on account of any costs, expenses, delays or other matters incurred in 

connection with Contractor’s failure to make such comparison and examination, Contractor’s failure to notify 

Owner as required by this Section 5, or on account of any error or oversight on Contractor’s part. 

The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, 

Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing the Work for or on behalf 

of the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. 

6. COMPLIANCE WITH PATENTS. Contractor shall pay or cause to be paid all costs, royalties, and fees 

arising from the use on, or the incorporation into, the Work, of patented equipment, materials, supplies, tools, 

appliances, devices, processes, or inventions. Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold Owner harmless from all 

Claims relating to inventions, patents, patent rights, or other encumbrances arising out of the execution or 

performance of this Contract. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of any and all Claims of infringement 

brought against it relating to the Work and shall furnish Owner with all information and data in its possession 

relating to such Claims. 

7. COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS AND NOTICES. Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees, and take 

all other action that may be necessary to ensure that the Work is provided, performed, and completed in accordance 

with the requirements of all governmental permits, licenses, or other approvals or authorizations that may be 

required in connection with providing, performing, and completing the Work and with all applicable Laws, 

including, without limitation, any Laws prohibiting discrimination because of, or requiring affirmative action based 

on, race, creed, color, national origin, age, sex, or other prohibited classification, including, without limitation, the 

Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, 42 U.S.C. §§ 12101 et seq.; any Laws respecting the assumption of 

liability for taxes, contributions, and premiums for unemployment insurance, old age or retirement benefits, 

pensions, annuities, or other similar benefits for Contractor’s and Subcontractors’ employees; and any Laws 

regarding safety or the performance of the Work, including the federal Fair Labor Standards Act, the federal 

Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and all regulations, standards, and orders of the United States 

Department of Labor. Assessment of any and all penalties against Owner resulting from Contractor’s failure to 

comply with Laws shall be charged to Contractor. 

Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws. Contractor shall call Owner’s attention to any 

errors, discrepancies or inconsistencies between the Contract Documents and applicable Laws. If Contractor 

performs any Work contrary to such Laws, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. 

Nothing in this Section 7 shall in any way limit, abridge or modify the provisions of Section 21 of these 

Standard General Conditions. 

8. INSPECTIONS AND CORRECTIONS. Owner shall at all times have access to the Work wherever it is 

in preparation or progress and Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection. When 

any Work is being performed away from the Premises, Owner shall be notified in reasonable time where such Work 

is being done and when it will be ready for inspection so that Owner may inspect the same from time to time before 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





delivery. Owner shall have the right to inspect all or any part of the Work and to reject all or any part of the Work 

that is, in Owner’s judgment, defective or damaged or that in any way fails to conform strictly to the requirements of 

this Contract. Owner, without limiting its other rights or remedies, may require Contractor to correct or replace, at 

Contractor’s sole cost, all Work necessary to complete or correct all or any part of the Work that is defective, 

damaged, or nonconforming, or cancel all or any part of any order or this Contract. Work so rejected may be 

returned or held at Contractor’s expense and risk. Uninspected Work which has been covered up shall be 

uncovered, at Contractor’s cost, when so ordered by Owner. Contractor shall give timely notice of any tests or 

readiness of machinery or equipment to permit Owner to make inspection at the source, if desired. 

9. SUPERVISION. Contractor shall keep on the Premises, throughout the performance of the Work, a 

competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner, who shall have complete charge of 

the Work on behalf of Contractor. Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among its 

employees and Subcontractors, and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the Work 

assigned to him. Contractor shall conduct its operations in a manner compatible with Owner’s safety regulations, 

local employee practices and all Laws. 

10. SAFETY AND PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY. Contractor shall be solely and 

completely responsible for providing and maintaining safe conditions at the Premises, including the safety of its 

workmen, for the final selection of safety methods, means and safeguards, for the daily inspection of the Premises, 

for the instruction of its workmen on safety, and safety for all persons and property during performance of the Work. 

Contractor shall take all necessary precautions, provide barricades, guards, signs, notices, shoring, bracing, 

passageways, lights, and such other protection as may be required (including without limitation such protection as 

may be required by applicable Laws) for the protection of (1) all persons who may be on the Premises or in adjacent 

or any other areas affected by Contractor’s operations and (2) Owner’s and any third party’s personal or real 

property. Contractor shall execute all repairs to land, structures, sidewalks, streets and alleys because of damages 

done in connection with operations under this Contract. Contractor shall conduct safety meetings at least once a 

week. This requirement shall apply continuously and shall not be limited to normal working hours. Contractor shall 

take all safety precautions as shall be necessary to comply with all applicable Laws and to prevent injury to persons 

and damage to property. 

Contractor shall provide all necessary precautions required to protect occupancy and use of the Premises from 

dirt, dust, weather, and the elements. All concrete and masonry shall be wetted while breaking and handling. 

Openings in floors within the working areas shall be temporarily covered. Proper protection from weather over all 

openings in the Building shall be provided. Paint, paint thinner, gasoline, oil, roofing materials or other flammable 

materials shall be stored outside of all buildings and properly protected. No more than one day’s supply of any such 

building material shall be stockpiled within the building at any time. Materials and/or equipment stored in 

cardboard cartons, wood crates or other combustible containers shall be stored in an orderly manner and in an 

accessible location. Smoking will be allowed only in designated smoking areas only as approved and designated by 

Owner’s Representative. Ample protection with fire extinguishers and non-flammable blankets shall be provided 

where any cutting or welding is done with the use of compressed gasses or electric arc. This protection shall be 

provided by each trade using such welding or cutting equipment. 

Contractor shall conduct all of its operations without interruption or interference with vehicular and pedestrian 

traffic on the Premises, or on public and private rights-of-way unless it has obtained permits therefor from the proper 

authorities. If any public or private right-of-way shall be rendered unsafe by Contractor’s operations, Contractor 

shall make such repairs or provide such temporary ways or guards as shall be acceptable to the proper authorities. 

In an emergency affecting the safety of life or limb, the Work, the Premises or adjoining property, Contractor, 

without special instruction or authorization from Owner, is hereby permitted to act, at its discretion, to prevent such 

threatened loss or injury, and Contractor shall so act, without appeal, if so instructed or authorized by Owner. 

Reasonable compensation for emergency Work, if any, shall be determined by agreement of the parties pursuant to a 

Change Order under Section 13 of these Standard General Conditions. 

11. BONDS AND INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS. 

A. Bonds – Not applicable/Contractor shall provide the following bonds at Contractor’s sole cost and 

expense: 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





1. The Contractor shall, prior to the start of the Work, furnish and deliver to the Owner a performance bond 

and a payment bond (collectively the “Bonds”) each in an amount equivalent to one hundred percent (100%) of the 

Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and completion of all the Contractor’s obligations under the 

Contract Documents and covering the payment of all materials used in the performance of this Contract and for all 

labor and services performed under this Contract, whether by the Contractor, Subcontractors or otherwise. The 

Bonds shall, without limitation, cover the Contractor’s warranty and liquidated damages obligations under this 

Contract. Each surety providing the Bonds must have a Best’s rating not less than A/X and be licensed in the state 

where the job site is located and shall be named in the current list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority 

as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 

(amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. All Bonds signed by an agent must 

be accompanied by a certified copy of his or her authority to act. It shall be the duty of the Contractor to advise the 

surety or sureties of any Change Orders that result in an increase to the Contract Price and to ensure that the amount 

of the Bonds are updated to reflect and cover any such increases throughout the course of the Project. 

2. If the surety behind any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its 

right to do business is terminated in the State or it ceases to meet any of the requirements of Section 11(A)(1), the 

Contractor shall, within five (5) days thereafter, substitute another Bond of equivalent value and surety, both of 

which must be acceptable to the Owner. In addition, no further progress payments under the Contract will be made 

by the Owner until the Contractor complies with the provisions of this Section 11(A)(2). 

B. Insurance. Contractor shall provide certificates and, upon request of Owner, policies of insurance 

evidencing the minimum insurance coverages and limits set forth below within ten (10) days following Owner’s 

execution of this Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work. Such policies shall be in form, and from 

companies, acceptable to Owner, with a current A.M. Best’s rating of not less than A-VII, unless otherwise 

approved in writing by Owner and authorized to do business in the state where the Work is to be performed. Owner, 

including Owner’s directors, officers, managers, members, and employees, shall be named as an additional insured 

on such policies by endorsement to the policies listed in Items ii, iii and iv below. The additional insured 

endorsement shall be at least as broad as the current edition of the Insurance Services Offices (ISO) form CG 2010. 

The insurance coverages and limits set forth below shall be deemed to be minimum coverages and limits and shall 

not be construed in any way as a limitation on Contractor’s duty to carry adequate insurance or on Contractor’s 

liability for losses or damages under this Contract. Contractor shall maintain, at its sole cost and expense, the 

following minimum insurance coverages and limits at all times while providing, performing, or completing the 

Work, including any correction of any failure to meet warranty, are as follows: 

i. Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability. Limits shall not be less than: (a) Workers’ 

Compensation: statutory, (b) Employer’s Liability: $500,000.00 ea. accident-injury, (c) $500,000.00 ea. 

employee-disease, and (d) $500,000.00 disease-policy. Such insurance shall evidence that coverage applies to 

the states in which the Work is to be performed. 

ii. Comprehensive Motor Vehicle Liability. Limits for vehicles owned, non-owned or rented shall not be 

less than $1,000,000.00 bodily injury and property damage combined single limit. Without limiting the 

foregoing, coverage shall be at least as broad as that provided under the current edition of the ISO Business 

Automobile Policy, CA 0001. 

iii. Commercial General Liability. Limits shall not be less than $1,000,000.00 Bodily Injury and Property 

Damage Combined Single Limit with the General Aggregate limit applying, on a per project basis. Coverage is 

to be written on an “occurrence” basis, and shall include: (a) premises operations, (b) products/completed 

operations, (c) independent contractors, (d) personal injury (with employment exclusion deleted), (e) broad 

form property damage endorsement, (f) “X,” “C,” and “U”, and (g) contractual liability (which coverage shall 

specifically include the indemnification set forth in Section 12 of these Standard General Conditions). Without 

limiting the foregoing, coverage shall be at least as broad as that provided under the current edition of the ISO 

Commercial General Liability Policy, CG 0001. 

iv. Umbrella Liability. Limits shall not be less than $4,000,000.00 Bodily Injury and Property Damage 

Combined Single Limit, with the General Aggregate limit applying on a per project basis. This Policy shall 

apply in excess of the limits stated in Items i, ii, and iii above. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





v. Professional Liability (Errors and Omissions). On a claims made basis with an annual aggregate limit of 

liability of not less than $1,000,000 each claim and $2,000,000 in the aggregate (with a deductible of no more 

than $25,000) for six (6) years after completion of the Work under this Contract or the applicable statute of 

limitations, whichever is longer. This Policy shall be required where architectural, engineering or other 

professional services are provided by or through Contractor as a part of the Work. 

vi. Builder’s Risk Insurance. Limits shall be not less than the insurable value of the Work at completion, 

including the aggregate value of Owner-furnished equipment and materials to be constructed or installed by 

Contractor. The coverage period must not end prior to the date of completion of the Work. This coverage shall 

include: (a) “all risks” of direct physical loss to buildings, structures, equipment, and materials used in 

providing, performing and completing the Work, including without limitation fire, extended coverage, 

vandalism and malicious mischief, sprinkler leakage, flood, earthquake, earth movement, collapse, tornado, 

hail, windstorm, and named windstorm, (b) equipment or materials while in warehouses, during installation, 

during testing, and after the Work is completed, but prior to final acceptance, (c) any period during which 

Owner is occupying all or part of the Work but prior to final acceptance without the need for the insurance 

company’s consent, (d) Owner as Named Insured and as the “loss payee” with respect to claims under the 

Builder’s Risk Insurance, and (e) waiver of coinsurance. 

All certificates and policies required in this Section 11 shall: (i) provide that no cancellation or non-renewal of any 

insurance shall become effective until the expiration of thirty (30) days after written notice shall have been given by 

the insurance company to Owner, and (ii) be primary and not entitled to contribution from any insurance maintained 

by Owner. Renewal certificates are to be provided to Owner prior to the expiration of the required insurance 

policies. Except with respect to the limits of insurance, Contractor’s required insurance shall apply separately to each 

insured or additional insured. 

The funding of deductibles, self-insured retentions or self-insured programs maintained by Contractor shall be the 

sole responsibility of Contractor, including any amounts applicable to claims involving the Owner as an additional 

insured. Any self-insured retentions or deductibles not funded by the insurer which are in excess of $25,000 must be 

declared to and approved by the Owner. 

Use of leased employees by Contractor is expressly prohibited without Owner’s written permission. If permitted by 

Owner, Contractor shall: 

a. Require leasing company to provide workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance with 

limits in amounts not less than required of Contractor. 

b. Require leasing company to provide waiver of subrogation in favor of Owner on leasing company’s 

workers’ compensation insurance policy. 

c. Provide Owner with a copy of leasing company’s certificate of insurance, with endorsements, 

evidencing the required coverage. 

In specifying minimum Contractor insurance requirements, Owner does not represent that such insurance is adequate 

to protect Contractor for loss, damage or liability arising from its work. Contractor is solely responsible to inform 

itself of the types or amounts of insurance it may need beyond these requirements to protect itself. 

The insurance requirements set forth in minimum amounts shall not be construed to relieve Contractor for liability in 

excess of such coverages, nor shall it preclude Owner from taking such other actions as is available to it under any 

other provision of the Contract. Any acceptance of certificates of insurance by Owner shall in no way limit or relieve 

Contractor of its duties and responsibilities under this Contract, including the duty to indemnify and hold harmless 

Owner. 

C. Subcontractor Insurance. All Subcontractors shall provide the insurance required by Items i, ii, iii, iv, 

and v (when v is applicable) of Section 11(B) above. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





D. Waiver of Subrogation. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to waive all rights of 

subrogation against Owner, including Owner’s directors, officers and employees, and shall cause each of its 

Subcontractors to waive their rights of subrogation against Owner, including Owner’s directors, officers and 

employees, for all costs or expenses, losses, damages, claims, suits or demands, howsoever caused: 

i. To real or personal property, vehicles, equipment, tools, etc. owned, leased or used by Contractor or 

Contractor’s employees, agents or subcontractors; and 

ii. To the extent such loss, damage, claims, suits or demands are covered, or should be covered, by the required 

or any other insurance (except professional liability to which this requirement does not apply) maintained by the 

Contractor. This waiver shall apply to all first party property, equipment, vehicle and workers compensation 

claims (unless prohibited under applicable state statutes), and all third party liability claims. This waiver shall 

apply to all deductibles, retentions or self-insured layers applicable to the required or any other insurance (except 

professional liability to which this requirement does not apply) maintained by Contractor. If necessary, 

Contractor agrees to endorse the required insurance policies to permit waivers of subrogation in favor of Owner 

as required hereunder. Contractor further agrees to hold harmless and indemnify Owner for any loss or expense 

incurred as a result of professional’s failure to obtain such waivers of subrogation from Contractor’s insurers. 

12. INDEMNIFICATION. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, save harmless, 

and defend Owner, its partners, managers, members, employees, officers, directors, trustees, shareholders, counsel, 

representatives, agents, subsidiaries, affiliates, successors and assigns (the “Indemnified Parties”) against any and 

all Claims that may arise, or be alleged to have arisen, out of or in connection with the Work or any part thereof, 

whether or not due or claimed to be due in whole or in part to the active, passive, or concurrent negligence or fault 

of Contractor; provided, however, the provisions of this Section 12 shall not be construed to require the Contractor 

to indemnify any person or entity indemnified hereunder for or against such person’s or entity’s own negligence or 

to require any indemnification which would make the provisions of this Section 12 void or unenforceable. The 

obligations of the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12 are not to be construed to negate or reduce any other right 

or obligation of indemnification which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Section 12. 

The Contractor shall: (i) to the fullest extent permitted by law, defend, indemnify and hold the Indemnified 

Parties harmless from and against any and all actual liability, loss, suits, claims, actions, causes of action, 

proceedings, demands, costs, penalties, fines and expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys’ fees, 

expert fees, court costs and expenses), and clean-up costs, if caused by reason of or as a result of the generation, 

storage, treatment, handling, transportation, disposal or release by the Contractor or any entity for whom the 

Contractor is responsible of any hazardous material brought onto the Project site by the Contractor, its 

Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors or anyone for whom the Contractor is legally liable in violation of any 

applicable Laws or the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials; and (ii) with 

reasonable promptness remove or cause the removal of such hazardous materials from the Project site or otherwise 

remediate such condition, in each case in accordance with applicable Laws. 

To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the 

Indemnified Parties from all liabilities, claims, demands, actions, suits and costs (including, without limitation, 

reasonable attorneys’ fees, expert fees, court costs and expenses) if caused by reason of or as result of a notice of 

lien, claim for lien, lien, or suit to foreclose a lien filed, given, made or maintained by Subcontractor, 

Sub-subcontractor or supplier provided that the Contractor has received payment pursuant to the terms of this 

Contract and subject to Owner’s rights to withhold payment as provided in this Contract. 

In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 12 by an employee of the Contractor, a 

Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the 

indemnification obligations under this Section 12 shall not be limited by a limitation on the amount or type of 

damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' or workmen's 

compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 

13. CHANGES. Any changes, additions or deletions to this Contract, the Contract Price, the Contract Time, 

the Work or the Premises must be in writing on Owner's Change Order form and signed by either James Blecha, 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





Director, Real Estate Assets & New Store Development or by Nick Capretta, V.P. of Real Estate (the “Authorized 

Signatories”). Contractor expressly recognizes that only the Authorized Signatories can sign a Change Order. If 

Contactor desires to make a change in the Contract, the Work, or the Contract Time, Contractor shall submit a 

written notice to Owner requesting Owner’s approval of such change. No such change shall be effective unless 

agreed to by Owner in a written change order signed by one of the Authorized Signatories (“Change Order”). 

Regardless of whether a change is requested by Contractor, Owner shall have the right, by written order executed by 

one of the Authorized Signatories on behalf of Owner, to make changes in the Contract, the Work, and/or the 

Contract Time prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Price or Contract Time, or both (a “Change 

Directive”). Upon receipt of a Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work 

involved and advise the Owner of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in 

the Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time. The amount 

of any increase or decrease in the Contract Price as a result of a change in the Work shall be determined on the same 

unit basis (exclusive of general conditions, profit and overhead) as similar Work originally included in the Contract, 

with fair allowance being made for any change in basic material prices or labor hourly rate paid by Contractor, using 

the same percentage of general conditions, profit and overhead as provided in the Contract. Where unit price is 

stipulated in the Contract, it shall be used in determining the cost to Owner for such Change Order. Alternate means 

for agreeing upon the cost of any change in the Work is set forth on Schedule 1 attached hereto and made a part 

hereof. In case of dispute between Owner and Contractor as to cost of changes, Contractor shall make all materials 

available for examination by Owner, pursuant to Owner’s right to audit in Section 20 of these Standard General 

Conditions, so as to establish the unit price basis and percentage of general conditions, profit and overhead 

originally included in the Contract. Contractor agrees that in the event Owner and Contractor cannot agree on a 

price for any Change Order, Owner may engage other persons or contractors to make said change in the Work, and 

Contractor agrees to cooperate fully with said persons or new contractor. No decrease in the amount of the Work 

caused by any Change Order shall entitle Contractor to make any claim for damages, anticipated profits, or other 

compensation. 

14. OWNER’S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT. 

A. Termination by Owner for Cause. If it should appear, at any time prior to final acceptance of the Work, 

that Contractor: (i) has failed or refused to prosecute, or has delayed in the prosecution of, the Work with diligence 

at a rate that assures completion of the Work in full compliance with the requirements of this Contract on or before 

the Substantial Completion Date, (ii) has attempted to assign this Contract or Contractor’s rights under this Contract, 

either in whole or in part, (iii) has falsely made any representation or warranty in this Contract, (iv) has otherwise 

failed, refused, or delayed to perform or satisfy any other requirement of this Contract, (v) has failed to pay its debts 

as they come due, (vi) has failed to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the 

respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors, (vii) has been adjudged a bankrupt, or (vii) 

has become insolvent and a receiver has been appointed on account thereof (each an “Event of Default”), and has 

failed to cure any such Event of Default within five (5) business days after Contractor’s receipt of written notice of 

such Event of Default, then Owner shall have the right, at its election and without prejudice to any other remedies 

provided by law or equity, to pursue any one or more of the following remedies: 

(i) Owner may require Contractor, within such reasonable time as may be fixed by Owner, to (1) complete 

or correct all or any part of the Work that is defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, or 

incomplete, (2) to remove from the Premises any such Work, (3) to accelerate all or any part of the Work 

and (4) to take any or all other action necessary to bring Contractor and the Work into strict compliance 

with this Contract. 

(ii) Owner may perform or have performed all Work necessary for the accomplishment of the results 

stated in Subsection (a) above and withhold or recover from Contractor the cost and expense, including 

attorneys’ fees and administrative costs, incurred by Owner in connection therewith. 

(iii) Owner may accept the defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or dilatory 

Work or part thereof and make an equitable reduction in the contract price. 

(iv) Owner may terminate this Contract without liability for Owner to make further payment of amounts 

due or to become due under this Contract. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





(v) Owner may, without terminating this Contract, terminate Contractor’s rights under this Contract and, 

for the purpose of completing or correcting the Work, evict Contractor and take possession of all 

equipment, materials, supplies, tools, appliances, plans, specifications, schedules, manuals, drawings, and 

other papers relating to the Work, whether at the Premises or elsewhere, and complete or correct the Work 

with its own forces or contracted forces, all at Contractor’s expense. 

(vi) Upon any termination of this Contract or of Contractor’s rights under this Contract, and at Owner’s 

option exercised in writing, any or all subcontracts and supplier contracts of Contractor shall be deemed to 

be assigned to Owner without any further action being required, but Owner shall not thereby assume any 

obligation for payments due under such subcontracts and supplier contracts for any Work provided or 

performed prior to such assignment. 

(vii) Owner may withhold from any Progress Payment or Final Payment, whether or not previously approved, 

or may recover from Contractor, any and all costs, including attorneys’ fees and administrative expenses, 

incurred by Owner as the result of any Event of Default or as a result of actions taken by Owner in response to 

any Event of Default. 

(viii) Owner may recover any damages suffered by Owner. 

If the Owner’s termination of the Contractor pursuant to this Section 14(A) is, for any reason, adjudicated to be 

unwarranted or unjustified, the Owner’s termination of the Contractor shall be treated as though it were 

accomplished pursuant to Section 14(B) hereof. 

B. Termination by Owner for Convenience. The Owner may, without cause, terminate performance under 

this Contract by the Contractor. The Owner shall give written notice of such termination to the Contractor specifying 

when termination becomes effective. The Contractor shall incur no further obligations in connection with the Work 

and the Contractor shall stop the Work when such termination becomes effective. The Contractor shall also 

terminate outstanding orders from suppliers and Subcontractors. The Owner may direct the Contractor to assign the 

Contractor's right, title and interest under outstanding orders to suppliers, and/or subcontracts to the Owner or its 

designee. The Contractor shall transfer title and deliver to the Owner such completed or partially completed 

portions of the Work and materials, equipment, parts, fixtures, information and agreement rights as the Contractor 

has. In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, Owner shall pay to Contractor, as its sole and 

exclusive remedy, amounts for Work properly performed through the date of termination. 

C. Owner’s Right to Suspend and Perform Work. 

1. The Owner shall have the right at any time to direct the Contractor to suspend Contractor's performance of 

the Work, or any designated part thereof, for any reason whatsoever, or without reason, for such period of time as 

Owner may determine. If any such suspension is directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall immediately comply 

with same. The Contractor shall continue to perform Work on other portions of the Project if and to the extent 

directed by the Owner. If the Work is suspended, an adjustment will be made in the Contract Sum and Contract 

Time as set forth in this Agreement, provided however that no increase in Contract Time will be made to the extent 

that performance of the Work is or would have been suspended by a cause that the Contractor has or had control 

over. 

2. In the event the Owner directs a suspension of performance under this Section 14(C) due to the 

Contractor's failure or refusal to perform the Construction as required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor 

shall provide adequate assurances to the Owner that the cause of such suspension has been eliminated or corrected 

within seven (7) days of the date of receipt of such direction to suspend performance. If the Contractor fails to 

provide such adequate assurances in a form acceptable to the Owner, the Owner shall have the right, but not the 

obligation, to carry out the Work with its own forces or with forces of another contractor, and the Contractor shall be 

fully responsible and liable for the costs of performing such Work by the Owner. The rights set forth in this Section 

14(C) are in addition to, and without prejudice to, any other rights or remedies the Owner may have against the 

Contractor. 

15. ASSIGNMENTS AND SUBCONTRACTS. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





Neither this Contract nor any interests therein shall be assigned or transferred by Contractor, nor shall any 

part of the Work be subcontracted, without Owner’s written consent; provided, however, that where the applicable 

Laws include Section 9-318 of the Uniform Commercial Code, Owner’s prior written approval shall not be required 

for assignments of accounts. 

Owner may assign this Contract, in whole or in part, or any or all of its rights or obligations under this 

Contract, without the consent of Contractor. If written consent for subcontracting is granted by Owner, Contractor 

agrees that it is responsible for ensuring that all Subcontractors maintain those insurance coverages specified in 

Section 11 (or as amended in writing by Owner). Contractor hereby agrees that it will indemnify, hold harmless and 

defend Owner pursuant to Section 11 of these Standard General Conditions should any such Subcontractors fail to 

maintain the required insurance coverages. 

16. SIMULTANEOUS WORK BY OTHERS. Owner shall have the right to perform or have performed 

such other work as Owner may desire in, about, or near the Premises during the performance of the Work by 

Contractor, and to purchase materials in connection with the Work (“Separate Contractors”). Contractor shall 

afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution 

of their Work, and shall properly connect and coordinate its Work with theirs. 

If any part of Contractor’s Work depends, for proper execution or results, upon the Work of any other 

contractor, Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to Owner any defects in the Work that render it unsuitable 

for such proper execution and results. Contractor’s failure to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the 

other contractor’s work as fit and proper for the reception and implementation of Contractor’s Work, except as to 

defects which may subsequently develop in the other contractor’s work after the execution of the Work. To insure 

the proper execution of its subsequent Work, Contractor shall measure Work already in place and shall at once 

report to Owner any discrepancy between the executed Work and the drawings. 

Owner reserves the right to assign the contracts of any Separate Contractors (“Separate Contracts”) to 

Contractor and to make such Separate Contracts a part of Contractor’s obligations under this Contract. The 

Contractor hereby consents to any such assignment. Upon assignment, Owner shall be relieved of all obligations 

under such Separate Contracts and the Separate Contractors will be deemed Subcontractors in accordance with the 

terms of this Contract. 

17. LIENS. 

A. Waivers of Lien. Contractor shall, from time to time at Owner’s request and in any event prior to any 

partial payment and final payment, furnish to Owner such lien waivers and sworn statements (in the form attached as 

Exhibit H of the Contract hereto or other form approved by Owner) or other evidence as may be necessary to 

establish, to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner, that no lien against the Work or the Premises held by Owner 

exists in favor of any Subcontractors or any person whatsoever for or by reason of any equipment, material, 

supplies, or other item furnished, labor performed, or other thing done in connection with the Work or this Contract 

(“Lien”) and that no right to file any Lien exists in favor of any person whatsoever. 

B. Removal of Liens. If at any time any notice of any Lien is filed, then Contractor shall, promptly and 

without charge, discharge, remove, or otherwise dispose of such Lien. Until such discharge, removal, or disposition, 

Owner shall have the right to retain from any money payable hereunder an amount that Owner, in its sole judgment, 

deems necessary to satisfy such Lien and to pay the costs and expenses, including attorneys’ fees and administrative 

expenses, of any actions brought in connection therewith or by reason thereof. Contractor may, if any Subcontractor 

refuses to furnish a waiver of right of lien in full, furnish a bond satisfactory to Owner, to indemnify against any 

potential lien. If any lien remains unsatisfied after all payments under this Contract are made, Contractor shall pay 

to Owner upon demand all money that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all 

costs and expenses, including attorneys’ fees and administrative expenses. 

18. PAYMENTS. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





A. Contract Price. Owner shall pay to Contractor, in accordance with and subject to the terms and conditions 

set forth in this Section 18 and the Contract Documents, and Contractor shall accept in full satisfaction for 

providing, performing, and completing the Work, the Contract Price set forth in the Agreement, subject to any 

additions, deductions, or withholdings provided for in this Contract, including any adjustments pursuant to Section 

13 of these Standard General Conditions. 

B. Progress Payments. 

(i) Installments. The Contract Price shall be paid in monthly installments as provided in this Section 18. 

Owner shall pay to Contractor ninety percent (90%) of the Value of Work, determined in the manner set forth 

below, installed and complete in place up to the day before the Pay Request (as defined below), less the aggregate 

of all previous Progress Payments. The total amount of Progress Payments made prior to final acceptance by 

Owner shall not exceed ninety percent (90%) of the Contract Price. 

(ii) Value of Work. The Value of the Work shall be determined as follows: 

(a) Lump Sum Items. For all Work to be paid on a lump sum basis, Contractor shall, not later than ten 

(10) days after execution of the Contract and before submitting its first Pay Request, submit to Owner a 

schedule showing the value of each component part of such Work in form and with substantiating data 

acceptable to Owner (“Breakdown Schedule”). The sum of the items listed in the Breakdown Schedule shall 

equal the amount or amounts set forth in the Schedule of Prices for Lump Sum Work. An unbalanced 

Breakdown Schedule providing for overpayment of Contractor on component parts of the Work to be 

performed first will not be accepted. The Breakdown Schedule shall be revised and resubmitted until 

acceptable to Owner. No payment shall be made for any lump sum item until Contractor has submitted, and 

Owner has approved, an acceptable Breakdown Schedule. 

Owner may require that the approved Breakdown Schedule be revised based on developments occurring during 

the provision and performance of the Work. If Contractor fails to submit a revised Breakdown Schedule that is 

acceptable to Owner, Owner shall have the right either to suspend Progress and Final Payments for Lump Sum 

Work or to make such Payments based on Owner’s determination of the value of the Work completed. 

(b) Unit Price Items. For all Work to be paid on a unit price basis, the value of such Work shall be 

determined by Owner on the basis of the actual number of acceptable units of Unit Price Items installed and 

complete in place, multiplied by the applicable Unit Price set forth in the Schedule of Prices. The actual 

number of acceptable units installed and complete in place shall be measured on the basis described in the Plans 

or, in the absence of such description, on the basis determined by Owner. The number of units of Unit Price 

Items stated in the Contract are Owner’s estimate only and shall not be used in establishing the Progress or 

Final Payments due Contractor. The Contract Price shall be adjusted to reflect the actual number of acceptable 

units of Unit Price Items installed and complete in place upon final acceptance. 

(iii) Application of Payments. All Progress and Final Payments made by Owner to Contractor shall be 

applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid and shall not be 

applied to or used for any pre-existing or unrelated debt between Contractor and Owner or between Contractor 

and any third party. 

C. Pay Requests. Contractor shall, as a condition precedent to its right to receive each Progress Payment, 

submit to Owner a pay request in triplicate in the form provided by Owner (“Pay Request”). The first Pay Request 

shall be submitted not sooner than thirty (30) days following commencement of the Work. Owner may, by written 

notice to Contractor, designate a specific day of each month on or before which Pay Requests must be submitted. 

Each Pay Request shall include (i) Contractor’s certification of the value of, and partial or final waivers of lien from 

Contractor and all Subcontractors (using the forms attached hereto as Exhibit H of the Contract) covering, all 

Work for which payment is then requested and (ii) Contractor’s certification that all prior Progress Payments have 

been properly applied to the payment or reimbursement of the costs with respect to which they were paid. Owner 

will make each Progress Payment within thirty (30) days after the date that Owner approves the complete Pay 

Request package for such Progress Payment. 

D. Work Entire. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Contract, each and every part of this Contract 

and of the Work are interdependent and common to one another and to Owner’s obligation to pay all or any part of 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





the Contract Price or any other consideration for the Work. Any and all Progress Payments made pursuant to this 

Article are provided merely for the convenience of Contractor and for no other purpose. 

E. Notice of Completion. When the Work has been completed and is ready in all respects for acceptance by 

Owner, Contractor shall notify Owner and request a final inspection (“Notice of Completion”). Contractor’s Notice 

of Completion shall be given sufficiently in advance of the Substantial Completion Date to allow for scheduling of 

the final inspection and for completion or correction before the Substantial Completion Date of any items identified 

by such inspection as being defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, nonconforming, incomplete, or otherwise not in 

full compliance with, or as required by or pursuant to, this Contract (“Punch List Work”). 

F. Punch List and Final Acceptance. The Work shall be finally accepted when, and only when, the whole 

and all parts thereof shall have been completed to the satisfaction of Owner in full compliance with, and as required 

by or pursuant to, this Contract. Upon receipt of Contractor’s Notice of Completion, Owner shall make a review of 

the Work and notify Contractor in writing of all Punch List Work, if any, to be completed or corrected. Following 

Contractor’s completion or correction of all Punch List Work, Owner shall make another review of the Work and 

prepare and deliver to Contractor either a written notice of additional Punch List Work to be completed or corrected 

or a written notice of final acceptance of the Work (“Final Acceptance”). 

G. Final Payment. As soon as practicable after Final Acceptance, Contractor shall submit to Owner a 

properly completed final Pay Request in the form provided by Owner (“Final Pay Request”). Owner shall pay to 

Contractor the balance of the Contract Price, after deducting there from all charges against Contractor as provided 

for in this Contract (“Final Payment”). Final Payment shall be made not later than thirty (30) days after Owner 

approves the Final Pay Request. The acceptance by Contractor of Final Payment shall operate as a full and 

complete release of Owner of and from any and all lawsuits, claims, demands, damages, liabilities, losses, and 

expenses of, by, or to Contractor for anything done, furnished for, arising out of, relating to, or in connection with 

the Work or for or on account of any act or neglect of Owner arising out of, relating to, or in connection with the 

Work. 

H. WAIVER OF RIGHTS UNDER APPLICABLE PROMPT PAYMENT STATUTES 

THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT THE TERMS OF THIS CONTRACT SHALL GOVERN AND 

CONTROL THE RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF THE PARTIES WITH RESPECT TO PAYMENT 

AND, THEREFORE, THE CONTRACTOR HEREBY WAIVES ANY AND ALL RIGHTS AND 

PROTECTIONS AFFORDED BY THE PROVISIONS OF ANY STATUTE TO THE EXTENT 

INCONSISTENT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS FOR PAYMENT HEREUNDER. The Contractor shall 

include a similar provision in each of its agreements with its Subcontractors. 

19. OCCUPANCY. Owner shall have the right, at its election, to occupy, use, or place in service, including, 

without limitation, installing Owner’s equipment, fixtures and merchandise and operating Owner’s business, any 

part of the Work prior to Final Payment. Such occupancy, use, or placement in service shall be conducted in such 

manner as not to damage any of the Work or to unreasonably interfere with the progress of the Work. No such 

occupancy, use, or placement in service shall be construed as an acceptance of any of the Work or a release or 

satisfaction of Contractor’s duty to ensure and protect the Work, nor shall it, unless conducted in an unreasonable 

manner, be considered as an interference with Contractor’s provision, performance, or completion of the Work. 

20. RIGHT TO AUDIT. Whenever all, or any part, of the Work to be performed or any Change Order under 

this Contract is to be paid for on a cost or a cost plus basis, all of Contractor’s correspondence, books, records, 

vouchers, documents and data, certified payroll records when requested by Owner, relating in any way to the Work 

performed or money expended under this Contract shall be open to, and made reasonably available for Owner’s 

inspection and audit. Owner shall have access, at all reasonable times, to all of Contractor’s records of every kind 

and nature relating to the Work performed. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





21. EEO COMPLIANCE REQUIRED. 

A. Affirmative Action Compliance Programs: Contractor, within one hundred twenty (120) days from the 

commencement of any subcontract in the amount of $50,000.00 or more, and if it is not otherwise exempt under 41 

CFR Part 60-1, will develop for each of its establishments a written affirmative action compliance program as called 

for in 41 CFR Section 60-1.40. Contractor will also require the same of its lower-tier subcontractors who have fifty 

(50) or more employees and receive a subcontract of $50,000.00 or more and who are not otherwise exempt under 

41 CFR Section 60-1.40. 

B. Standard Form 100 (EEO-1): If Contractor has fifty (50) or more employees and the value of the 

contract or purchase order exceeds $50,000.00, Contractor agrees to annually file or within thirty (30) days of 

acceptance of the contract or purchase order, if not presently filed, complete and accurate reports on Standard Form 

100 (EEO-1). 

C. Equal Opportunity Clause: During the performance of the contract or purchase order, Contractor agrees 

as follows: 

(i) Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, 

religion, color, sex, or national origin. Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are 

employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex or 

national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: recruitment or recruitment 

advertising; employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of 

compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous 

places, available to employees and applicants for employment, applicable company, federal and state notices 

setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. 

(ii) Contractor will, in all solicitation or advertisements for employees placed by or on its behalf, state that all 

qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or 

national origin. 

(iii) Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective 

bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union of workers’ 

representative of its commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, (as 

currently amended), and shall post copies of notices in conspicuous places available to employees and 

applicants for employment. 

(iv) Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965 (as currently 

amended), and by the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. 

(v) Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 

1965 (as currently amended), and by the rules, regulations, and order of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant 

thereto, and will permit access to its books, records, and accounts by the contracting agency and the Secretary 

of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. 

(vi) In the event of Contractor’s noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any 

of such rules, regulations, or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended, in whole or in part 

and Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts in accordance with procedures 

authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation, or order of the Secretary of 

Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. 

(vii) Contractor will include the provisions of Sections (i) through (vii) in every subcontract or purchase order 

unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of the 

Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor 

or vendor. Contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as a means of 

enforcing such provisions including sanctions for noncompliance; provided, however, that in the event 

Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of 

said direction, it may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United 

States. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





D. Employment of Disabled Persons: Contractor shall comply with the Rehabilitation Act of 1973 (29 

U.S.C. §706) and to the Affirmative Action regulations regarding persons with disabilities as set forth in 41 CFR 60- 

741. 

Contractor shall not discriminate against any applicant for employment or employee because of physical or mental 

disability and takes affirmative action to employ, advance in employment and otherwise treat qualified persons with 

regard to their physical or mental disability. Contractor shall include the Disability Affirmative Action Clause in all 

non-exempt contracts or purchase orders of $2,500.00 or more. 

E. Employment of Veterans: Contractor shall comply with the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Act of 

1974 (38 USC §4211 et. seq.) and the affirmative action obligations of contractors that are further set forth in 41 

CFR §60-250 et seq. (38 USC §4211, and 38 USC §2024) 

F. Subcontracting with Small Businesses and Small Disadvantaged Business Concerns: It is the policy of 

Owner to place a fair proportion of its acquisitions, including contracts and subcontracts for sub-systems, 

assemblies, components, and related services for major systems, with small business concerns and small 

disadvantaged business concerns. A “small business concern” means a concern, including its affiliates, that is 

independently owned and operated, not dominant in the field of operation in which it is bidding on contracts, and 

qualified as a small business concern under the criteria and size standards in 13 CFR Part 121. Small disadvantaged 

business concern means a small business concern that is at least 51% owned by one or more individuals who are 

both socially and economically disadvantaged, or a publicly owned business having at least 51% of its stock owned 

by one or more socially and economically disadvantaged individuals and has its management and daily business 

controlled by one or more such individuals. (a) “Socially disadvantaged individuals” are defined as individuals 

who have been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias because of their identity as a member of a 

group without regard to their qualities as individuals. (b) “Economically disadvantaged individuals” are defined 

as socially disadvantaged individuals whose ability to compete in the free enterprise system is impaired due to 

diminished opportunities to obtain capital and credit as compared to others in the same line of business who are not 

socially disadvantaged. Individuals who certify that they are members of named groups (Black Americans, Hispanic 

Americans, Native Americans, Asian-Pacific Americans, Subcontinent-Asian Americans) are to be considered 

socially and economically disadvantaged. In addition, consideration under this regulation is extended to womenowned 

small businesses. “Women owned” is defined as a small business that is at least 51% owned by a woman or 

women who are U.S. citizens and who also control and operate the business. 

If a subcontractor or portion of a contract or order which exceeds $10,000.00 becomes involved, Contractor agrees 

that small business concerns and small disadvantaged business concerns shall have the maximum practicable 

opportunity to participate in contract performance consistent with its efficient performance. If a subcontract arises 

within a contract or order which exceeds $500,000.00 and is to be performed entirely within the United States or its 

possessions, and is not for personal services, Contractor will comply with the regulations pertaining to such contract 

as indicated at 48 CFR Chapter 1, §19.702. 

22. PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND TIME OF COMPLETION. Contractor must be ready to proceed with 

the Work promptly upon being awarded the Contract and shall start the Work by the Commencement Date or, at 

Owner’s option, as soon as notice to proceed is given by Owner or as set forth in the Construction Contract and 

carry to completion with utmost speed since time is of the essence. 

Within fourteen (14) calendar days of the notice to proceed, Contractor shall submit to Owner for approval a 

detailed incremental progress schedule for the Work included in the Contract. The progress schedule shall reflect 

the contractual dates and shall include all construction activities such as detailing, shop fabrication, intervals from 

purchase to delivery of purchased items, field activity durations, etc., and shall be in sufficient detail to enable 

Owner, at all times throughout the duration of the Work, to compare actual and scheduled progress. The progress 

schedule shall be prepared in accordance with accepted “Critical Path Methods” or an equivalent technique as 

approved by Owner. 

In the event that Contractor shall fail to provide the above incremental progress schedule within the period 

stipulated, it shall become a prerogative of Owner to prepare such a schedule at the expense of Contractor. In such 

an event, the incremental schedule as prepared by Owner and forwarded to Contractor shall be the approved 

schedule. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





If Contractor fails to maintain the approved schedule, or if the progress performance of the Work or the 

procedure employed in the Work is such that, in the judgment of Owner, the Work will not be completed by the time 

or times stated in the Contract, Contractor shall, at its own expense, Work such overtime, additional shifts, Saturday, 

Sunday and/or holidays, and/or hire additional employees, and/or revise or implement its construction procedure as 

may be necessary to restore adherence to such schedule or to ensure such completion. Owner shall not be subject to 

any claims, demands, or liability for Contractor’s acceleration damages or costs incurred to keep the Work in 

compliance with the Substantial Completion Date. 

23. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME; SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE. 

A. There shall be no changes in the Substantial Completion Date unless a Change Order is executed therefor. 

No such Change Order shall be issued unless the Contractor strictly complies with the provisions of this Section 23 

and other terms of the Contract. 

B. Within five (5) days after the occurrence of an Excusable Event of Delay (as hereinafter defined), the 

Contractor shall submit a written notice (the “Delay Notice”) to the Owner properly labeled as a Delay Notice, 

which shall contain sufficient information to inform the Owner of the occurrence of an Excusable Event of Delay. 

No other form of communication or notice, including, without limitation, schedule updates, monthly reports or 

meeting minutes shall satisfy this obligation. 

C. Within twenty-one (21) days after the occurrence of an Excusable Event of Delay, the Contractor shall 

submit a “Delay Claim.” The Delay Claim shall set forth a detailed explanation for the delay, shall set forth the 

Contractor’s plan for restoring the Work to the Progress Schedule and for mitigating any adverse effects of the 

projected delay. The Delay Claim shall also indicate the modification requested by the Contractor, if any, of the 

Contract Time. Each Delay Claim shall also indicate the reasons that the Contractor considers the delay to 

constitute an Excusable Event of Delay as defined below. 

D. If the Contractor fails to provide a proper Delay Claim within the twenty-one (21) day period set forth 

above, Contractor’s entitlement to an extension of time or additional compensation, if any, shall be barred. If the 

Contractor fails to provide a Delay Notice within the five (5) day period set forth above, but provides the Delay 

Notice before the expiration of the twenty-one (21) day period within which to file a Delay Claim, the Contractor’s 

entitlement to an extension of time, if any, shall be reduced to the extent Owner was prejudiced by the Contractor’s 

failure to provide a Delay Notice within such five (5) day period. 

E. In the event of a delay to the Work, however caused, the Contractor shall have the right to submit a Delay 

Claim to Owner. If the events of delay shall be an Excusable Event of Delay, the Substantial Completion Date shall 

be modified by Change Order by the number of days which such events actually caused such dates or schedule to be 

extended after taking into consideration of schedule float on the most recent updated Progress Schedule. Except to 

the extent set forth in Section 23(F), Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price or to any 

other compensation, fees, reimbursements, profits, damages, losses or costs which may result from, or shall be on 

account of any delay, disruption, hindrance or interference however caused, and Contractor waives its rights, if any, 

at law or equity to claim any compensation, fees, reimbursements, profits, damages, losses or costs from or against 

Owner or any person or entity which may result from or shall be on account of any delay, hindrance or interference, 

however caused. 

F. If the cumulative amount of all delays due to Excusable Events of Delay is twenty-one (21) days or less, 

the Contractor will be granted one or more non-compensable time extensions, subject to the terms and conditions of 

this Section 23. During this initial twenty-one (21) day period of aggregate delays due to Excusable Events of 

Delays, the Contractor shall bear all its additional expenses and the Owner will bear its additional expenses. If the 

cumulative amount of all delays due to Excusable Events of Delays exceeds twenty-one (21) days, the Contractor 

shall, in addition to an extension of time, be entitled to receive its actual costs which are demonstrable and directly 

related to such Excusable Event of Delay for each day of delay beyond the initial twenty-one (21) day period, but 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





only to the extent there is no concurrently caused delay that is the result of the fault or neglect of the Contractor, in 

which event, Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time only in accordance with the terms of this Contract. 

G. Excusable Events of Delay. To the extent that any of the following events results in an actual delay in the 

progress of the Work and is not the result of the fault or neglect of the Contractor, such delay shall, subject to 

compliance with the provisions of the Contract constitute an “Excusable Event of Delay”: 

(i) Acts (including delays in acting or failure to act) of the State, or the City or of any other governmental or 

regulatory authority that are not the result of any fault or negligence of the Contractor, Subcontractors or 

sub-subcontractors; 

(ii) Acts (including delays in acting or failure to act) of the Owner, or of any employee of Owner, or of a 

Separate Contractor employed by the Owner; 

(iii) Restraints or injunctions issued by a judicial body requiring that the Work or any portion thereof shall be 

halted; 

(iv) Unforeseen changes in Law; 

(v) Fires, floods, earthquakes, civil disturbances, wars, insurrections, riots or sabotage; or 

(vi) Adverse weather conditions defined as any day upon which scheduled construction activities cannot occur 

as the result of abnormal weather conditions for the locale. 

24. CONTRACTOR’S MEETINGS. Contractor is required to hold a meeting once per week of the 

representatives of the various Subcontractors engaged about the building for furthering the progress of the Work and 

giving of instructions by Contractor. Owner’s Representative shall be notified in advance of such meeting and will 

be invited to attend. 

25. CONTRACTOR’S SUPERVISION AND EMPLOYEES/INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. 

Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the Work, using its best skill and attention. Contractor shall at all times 

enforce strict discipline and good order among its employees, and shall not employ on the Work any unfit person or 

anyone not skill in the Work assigned to him. Any person or persons or materials, or any complete Work, not 

satisfactory to Owner’s Representative shall be removed. 

Contractor agrees to perform the Work as an independent contractor and not as the agent, employee, or servant 

of Owner. Contractor has and hereby retains the right to exercise full control and supervision of the Work and full 

control over the employment, direction, compensation, and discharge of all persons assisting in the Work. 

Contractor agrees to be solely responsible for all matters relating to payment of its employees, including compliance 

with Social Security, withholding, and all other regulations governing such matters. Contractor agrees to be 

responsible for its own acts and those of its subordinates, employees, Subcontractors and suppliers during the life of 

this Contract. 

26. OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. Owner’s Representative is present for the purpose of overseeing the 

progress of the Work on behalf of Owner. While Owner’s Representative may attempt to assist Contractor in 

interpreting the Plans, the ultimate responsibility remains with Contractor, and any such assistance shall not relieve 

Contractor from any responsibility for the Work, and any Work which proves faulty or fails to comply with the 

requirements of the Contract Documents must be corrected by Contractor at no cost to Owner. 

Owner’s Representative has the authority to require Contractor to stop the Work or any portion thereof and any 

decision made by him in good faith to exercise such authority shall not give rise to any duty or responsibility of 

Owner to Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any of their agents or employees. 

If the Contract Documents, applicable Laws or any public authority require any Work to be specially tested or 

approved, Contractor shall give Owner’s Representative timely notice of its readiness for inspection and, if the 

inspection is by an authority other than Owner’s Representative, of the date fixed for such inspection. Inspections 

by Owner’s Representative shall be promptly made and, where practicable, at the source of supply. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





The fact that Owner’s Representative has failed to object to or has otherwise permitted faulty Work or Work not 

in accordance with the requirements or the Contract Documents does not relieve Contractor of liability for the 

proper correction of Work. 

All communications, except shop drawings and samples, shall be addressed to Owner’s Representative; 

provided that all notices shall be sent to Owner at the notice address for Owner hereunder. 

27. TEMPORARY OFFICE, FACILITIES AND USE OF PREMISES. Contractor shall construct and 

maintain such offices, tool sheds, warehouses, and other temporary structures, as may be necessary for its operations 

and completion of the Work. 

Contractor’s field offices, storage sheds, and all other temporary buildings shall be at least fifty (50) feet outside 

of any building under construction and the space between shall be kept open. Contractor shall confine its apparatus, 

the storage of material and the operations of its workmen to limits indicated by any applicable Law, regulation, 

ordinance, permit or the directions of Owner and shall not unreasonably encumber the Premises. 

28. SUBCONTRACTOR RELATIONS. 

A. Contractor shall, at the time of submission of its bid proposal, notify Owner in writing of the names of 

Subcontractors proposed for the principal parts of the Work; and within seventy-two (72) hours for such others as 

Owner may request. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor that Owner may within a reasonable time object 

to as not satisfactory. If Contractor has submitted before signing the Contract a list of Subcontractors and the 

change of any name on such list is requested in writing by Owner after signing of the Contract, the Contract Price 

expressly shall be increased or diminished by the difference in cost occasioned by such change. 

B. In the selection of its Subcontractors, submission of its bid and performance of the Work, Contractor shall 

take into consideration the possibility of labor disturbances, boycotts or similar obstructive action by any person or 

persons. Any additional time and costs incurred as a result thereof shall be borne by Contractor if the obstructive 

action could have been reasonably foreseen and avoided by Contractor. Contractor agrees that Contractor is fully 

responsible to Owner for the acts and omissions of its Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly 

employed by its Subcontractors. Except as set forth in Section 28(C)(iv), nothing contained in the Contract 

Documents nor any act by Contractor shall create any contractual relationship between any Subcontractor and 

Owner. 

C. Each Subcontractor shall agree: 

(i) To be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents and to assume toward the 

Contractor all obligations and responsibilities that the Contractor assumes toward the Owner; 

(ii) To submit to the Contractor accurate applications for payment in such reasonable time as to enable the 

Contractor to apply for payment under the Contract hereof; 

(iii) To make all claims for extras or changes, for extensions of time and for damages for delays or otherwise, to 

the Contractor in the manner provided for in the Contract Documents; and 

(iv) To make the Owner a third party beneficiary of the subcontracts. All agreements with Subcontractors, 

unless mutually agreed otherwise by the Owner and Contractor, shall expressly include the following 

provision: “Subcontractor agrees that the Owner is an intended third party beneficiary of this Subcontract 

Agreement. Notwithstanding the Owner’s status as an intended third party beneficiary of this Subcontract 

Agreement, the Owner has no duties to the Subcontractor under the Subcontractor Agreement and the 

Subcontractor has no cause of action or other claim against the Owner arising out of the Subcontractor 

Agreement or the Contractor’s failure to perform thereunder.” 

D. The Contractor agrees: 

(i) To pay the Subcontractor those amounts certified on account of the Subcontractor in accordance with the 

Contract hereof; 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





(ii) To pay each Subcontractor a just share of any fire and extended coverage insurance money received by the 

Contractor; 

(iii) The Contractor shall be responsible for all actions, inactions, and omissions of Subcontractors, and lower 

tier Subcontractors, suppliers, and their agents, employees, and any other person employed or performing 

portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor or a party to a contract between the Contractor 

and any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor or supplier; and 

(iv) Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall be deemed to create any contractual relationship 

between the Owner and any Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor or any other party than the Owner and the 

Contractor; provided, however, Owner shall be a third party beneficiary of the subcontracts as provided 

above. 

E. Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work shall be assigned by the Contractor to the Owner 

provided that: 

(i) Assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to the 

Contract and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor 

in writing; and 

(ii) Assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under a bond relating to the 

Contract. 

F. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a copy of all executed subcontract agreements prior to any 

Subcontractor beginning performance of the Work. Contractor shall execute all subcontract agreements in 

accordance with all applicable Laws. 

29. PLANS. While the plans may be subdivided into trades (for the district purpose of facilitating the Work) 

Contractor will be held to furnish all labor and materials necessary to completely perform the Work as contemplated 

by the Plans. 

Contractor understands and agrees that the Work herein described shall be complete in every detail, 

notwithstanding every item necessarily involved is not particularly mentioned, and Contractor will be held to 

provide all labor and materials necessary for the entire completion of the Work intended, and shall not avail himself 

of any manifestly unintentional error or omission should such exist. Should any error, omission, or inconsistency 

appear in the Plans, it shall be the duty of Contractor, before proceeding with the Work, to advise Owner’s 

Representative in writing of same, and in no case shall Contractor proceed with the Work until such error, omission 

or inconsistency has been corrected. 

Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Owner will furnish to Contractor, free of charge, all copies of 

Plans reasonable necessary for the execution of the Work. They are not to be used on other work, and all copies, 

with the exception of the signed contract set of the Plans, are to be returned to Owner on request at completion of the 

Work. 

30. CONTINUOUS OPERATION OF PREMISES. Owner may at its option commence or continue 

operations on the Premises and to this end Contractor shall cooperate with Owner’s Representative with respect to 

performance of the Work. If necessary to avoid interference with Owner’s operations, the Work shall be done 

during hours to suit Owner’s convenience and without additional cost to Owner. 

Owner’s commencement or continuance of operations, including without limitation fixturing or opening the 

Premises to the general public, shall not in any way diminish Contractor’s obligations under the Contract 

Documents. 

31. MEASUREMENTS, FITTING OF PARTS, CUTTING, PATCHING AND DIGGING. Contractor 

without extra charge shall make such slight alterations, cutting, fitting or patching of the Work as may be necessary 

to make adjustable parts fit to fixed parts, leaving all complete and in proper shape when done. Contractor shall not 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





damage or endanger any Work by cutting, digging or otherwise, and shall not cut or alter the Work of any other 

Contractor without the consent of Owner. 

32. SAMPLES TO BE SUBMITTED. Contractor shall furnish to Owner, at Owner’s offices and for Owner’s 

approval, when requested, samples of all materials to be used in the execution of the Work herein described, and of 

the finish to be given to the several parts. All materials furnished for incorporation in the Work must be fully equal 

to the approved samples. 

33. OWNER’S OPTIONS. Where the Contract Documents specify a particular type or brand of material or 

equipment Contractor shall figure the price of the make or style specified. If Contractor prefers to use any substitute 

article or material which Contractor believes to be equal, Contractor shall so state in its bid, giving the price to be 

added to or deducted from its base bid price. The final selection will rest with Owner. 

34. QUALITY OF MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP. Should any dispute arise as to the quality or 

fitness of materials or workmanship, the decision as to acceptability shall rest strictly with Owner, based on the 

requirement that all Work done or materials furnished shall be first class in every respect. Contractor’s obligations 

with respect to the Work shall not be limited in any way by considerations of what is usual or customary in erecting 

other buildings. 

35. GLASS DAMAGE AND CLEANING. Immediately before turning the Work over to Owner, Contractor 

shall replace all damaged glass and have all glass washed clean by professional washers. 

36. CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE, NON-CONFORMING OR DAMAGED WORK PRIOR TO 

COMPLETION OF THE WORK. All defective or non-conforming materials or workmanship or Work which 

becomes damaged after it is in place in the Building prior to completion of the Work shall be immediately removed, 

reconstructed or refinished by Contractor. Except for Work damaged by Owner’s sole negligence, the expense of 

doing so or the cost of delays and of making good other Work affected by the changes shall be borne by Contractor, 

and no extension of time will be allowed for the correcting of faulty or damaged work. It is not incumbent upon 

Owner to give notice of the rejection of faulty or damaged work. If, however, Contractor does not remove the faulty 

or damaged Work within a reasonable time after notice from Owner, Owner may remove at the expense of 

Contractor. 

37. INSPECTION OF OWNER’S EQUIPMENT, MACHINERY, FIXTURES AND MERCHANDISE. 

Contractor agrees to let Owner place and install as much equipment, machinery, fixtures and merchandise during the 

progress of the Work as is possible before the completion of the various parts of the Work. Contractor further 

agrees that such placing and installation of same does not in any way evidence the completion of the Work or any 

portion of it, nor signify Owner’s acceptance of the Work or any part of it. 

Owner will attempt to interfere as little as possible with the Work of the trades in and about the Building, but 

Contractor shall not make any claims to Owner due to such interferences. 

38. MOVING MATERIALS. If it becomes necessary at any time during construction to move materials 

which are to enter into the construction, or equipment which has been temporarily placed, Contractor shall, when 

directed by Owner’s Representative, move them or cause them to be moved without additional charge to Owner. 

Once such materials and equipment are stored at the Project site they cannot be removed without Owner’s 

permission. 

Contractor shall provide a roadway completely around the footprint of the Building, as soon as possible after 

construction begins, to provide access for heavy fire department equipment. 

Automobiles, trucks and other motor vehicles will not be allowed to park within the perimeter of the Building, 

at any time, except when directly involved in the construction with the operator responsible for the vehicle present 

and with Owner’s permission. 

39. CLEANING. It shall be the duty of each Contractor and its respective Subcontractors to keep the 

building and adjoining premises free at all times from accumulations of waste material or rubbish caused by the 

respective employees and Work of each. All waste material, including all garbage, rubbish, debris, and broken 

concrete, shall be removed from the Premises as soon as possible and not allowed to excessively accumulate. All 

combustible debris shall be removed from all buildings at the close of every working day. All other debris shall be 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





removed from the Premises at least once every week. Unless more exactly specified, all tools, scaffolding and 

surplus materials shall be promptly removed from completed areas of Work and Contractor shall leave its Work and 

the Premises clean and acceptable to Owner. 

In addition to Contractor’s obligation to meet the foregoing requirements on an on-going basis, Contractor shall 

perform a final cleaning of the building and surrounding premises, leaving it in a broom-clean condition to Owner’s 

satisfaction. In the event of Contractor’s failure to comply with the requirements of this Section 39, Owner may 

elect to use outside services to fulfill the necessary requirements and charge Contractor the cost thereof. 

40. GENERAL PROVISIONS. 

A. Definitions. Whenever the following capitalized terms are used in the Contract Documents, they shall have 

the following meanings: 

“Claims” shall mean all lawsuits, claims, damages, demands, liabilities, losses, and expenses, including attorneys’ 

fees and administrative expenses of Owner. 

“Substantial Completion” or “Substantially Complete” shall mean the point in time when Owner determines that: 

(a) the progress of the Work, is fully complete and functional in accordance with the requirements of the Contract 

Documents such that only minor punch list items remain and the Work is ready to be utilized for its intended 

purpose; (b) the applicable governmental authorities have issued a certificate of occupancy and any other applicable 

permits, approvals, licenses, entitlements or other written evidence from the applicable governmental authority that 

said Work has been completed to such authority’s satisfaction; and (c) with respect to the Project’s mechanical and 

HVAC systems, the Work is fully commissioned, balanced, tested and operational in compliance with the Contract 

Documents and applicable Laws. 

“Substantial Completion Date” shall mean the date(s) required by the Agreement for the achievement by 

Contractor of Substantial Completion of the Work. 

“Final Completion Date” shall mean the date upon which all Work must be complete to Owner’s satisfaction, 

including all punch list items, as established in the Agreement. 

“Contract Time” refers individually and collectively to the deadlines or time periods referred to in the Agreement 

or Construction Schedule for achievement of any Milestone, Substantial Completion Date or Final Completion Date 

as adjusted by Change Orders to the extent expressly permitted by the Contract. References in the Contract 

Documents to adjustments to the Contract Time refers not only to the Contract Time as a whole, but to each of the 

time periods or deadlines comprising the Contract Time, the intent being that each such deadline or time period shall 

(with due consideration to any interdependencies between or among them) be separately administered, evaluated 

and, if appropriate, adjusted as permitted by the Contract Documents. 

“Laws” shall mean all laws, statutes, ordinances, regulations, orders, decrees and other legal requirements, whether 

federal, state or local existing on or after the date of execution of this Contract. 

“Subcontractor” means a person or entity who has an agreement (whether written or oral) with the Contractor to 

perform or supply any portion of the Work. 

B. Binding Effect. This Contract shall be binding upon Owner and Contractor and upon their respective 

heirs, executors, administrators, personal representatives, and permitted successors and assigns. Every reference in 

this Contract to a party shall also be deemed to be a reference to the authorized officers, employees, agents, and 

representatives of such party. 

C. Relationship of the Parties. Contractor shall act as an independent contractor in providing and 

performing the Work. Nothing in, nor done pursuant to, this Contract shall be construed (i) to create the relationship 

of principal and agent, partners, or joint venturers between Owner and Contractor or (ii) to create any relationship 

between Owner and any Subcontractor of Contractor, except that Owner shall be a third party beneficiary of the 

subcontract agreement as provided herein. 

D. No Waiver. No (i) examination, inspection, investigation, test, measurement, review, determination, 

decision, certificate, or approval by Owner, (ii) order by Owner for the payment of money, (iii) payment for or use, 

occupancy, possession, or acceptance of, the whole or any part of the Work by Owner, (iv) extension of time granted 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





by Owner, (v) delay by Owner in exercising any right under this Contract, nor (vi) any other act or omission of 

Owner shall constitute or be deemed to be an acceptance of any defective, damaged, flawed, unsuitable, 

nonconforming, or incomplete Work, equipment, materials, or supplies, nor operate to waive or otherwise diminish 

the effect of any warranty or representation made by Contractor, of any requirement or provision of this Contract, or 

of any remedy, power, or right of Owner. 

E. No Third Party Beneficiaries. No claim as a third party beneficiary under this Contract by any person, 

firm, or corporation other than Contractor shall be made or be valid against Owner. 

F. Severability. The provisions of this Contract shall be interpreted when possible to sustain their legality 

and enforceability as a whole. In the event any provision of this Contract shall be held invalid, illegal, or 

unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, in whole or in part, neither the validity of the remaining part of 

such provision, nor the validity of any other provisions of this Contract shall be in any way affected thereby. 

G. Notices. Any notices or other communication required or permitted to be given under this Contract shall 

be in writing and shall be (i) personally delivered, or (ii) delivered by a reputable overnight courier, or (ii) delivered 

by certified mail, returned receipt requested, and deposited in the U.S. Mail, postage prepaid. Telecopy notices shall 

be deemed valid only to the extent they are (i) actually received by the individual to whom addressed and (ii) 

followed by delivery of actual notice in the manner described above within three (3) business days thereafter. 

Notices shall be deemed received at the earlier (i) of actual receipt, (ii) one (1) business day after deposit with an 

overnight courier as evidenced by a receipt of deposit, or (iii) three (3) business days following deposit in the U.S. 

mail, as evidenced by a return receipt. Notices shall be directed to the parties at their respective addresses set forth 

in the Agreement or at such other address as either party may, from time to time, specify by written notice to the 

other in the manner described above. 

H. Choice of Law. This Contract shall be construed in accordance with the internal laws, but not the conflicts 

of laws rules, of the state in which the Project is located. 

I. Patriot Act Compliance. Contractor represents and warrants to the Owner that neither it nor any of its 

principals, shareholders, members, partners, or affiliates, as applicable, is a person or entity named as a Specially 

Designated National and Blocked Person (as defined in Presidential Executive Order 13224) and that it is not acting, 

directly or indirectly, for or on behalf of a Specially Designated National and Blocked Person. Contractor further 

represents and warrants to the Owner that Contractor and its principals, shareholders, members, partners, or 

affiliates, as applicable, are not, directly or indirectly, engaged in, and are not facilitating, the transactions 

contemplated by this Contract on behalf of any person or entity named as a Specially Designated National and 

Blocked Person. Contractor hereby agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its officers, directors, 

employees, agents, representatives, engineers, and attorneys, from and against any and all claims, damages, losses, 

risks, liabilities, and expenses (including reasonable attorneys' fees and costs) arising from or related to any breach 

of the representations and warranties in this subsection. 

J. Waiver of Consequential Damages. Contractor waives all claims against Owner for consequential 

damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. 

K. No Personal Liability. The Contractor shall not bring claims or lawsuits against any principals, 

employees, agents, officers, directors, stockholders, partners, subsidiaries and affiliates of the Owner. The 

Contractor further agrees that the sole and exclusive remedy of the Contractor for payment and/or performance of 

this Contract shall be against the assets of the Owner. 

L. Reservation of Rights. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the duties and obligations 

imposed by the Contract Documents and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the Owner are in addition to, 

and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to the Owner which are 

otherwise imposed by or available under law, by special warranty or guarantee or by other provisions of the Contract 

Documents, and the provisions of this Section 40(L) will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract 

Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. All 

representations, warranties, and guarantees made in the Contract Documents will survive final payment and 

termination or completion of this Contract. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





SCHEDULE 1 

METHODS OF CALCULATING CHANGE ORDERS 

No. 1 - Unit Prices 

Unit prices, if stated in the Contract, shall govern. All unit prices shall include overhead and profit, shall be 

for Work in place and shall include all incidental items for a complete job. For changes in quantity of the same 

material, the appropriate unit price in the Contract shall be applied to the net change. 

No. 2 - Itemized Estimate Plus Mark-up 

(a) For changes to be performed by Contractor’s own forces, and not covered by unit prices, there shall be 

added to or deducted from the Contract Price as approved by Owner the percentages set forth in the Contract as 

Contractor’s mark-up for additional or deleted Work applied to estimated costs. Such percentage for overhead and 

profit shall be applied to the estimated costs of labor and materials, and the estimated cost of labor for this purpose 

shall include applicable insurance, taxes, bond premiums, vacation allowances, travel allowances, and welfare funds. 

Contractor’s mark-up shall constitute all of its charges for overhead and profit, both direct and indirect, 

including but not limited to, all charges for supervision, the services of its general office organization, field office 

expense, and the use of tools or equipment having a cost basis of less then $1,000. 

(b) For changes to be performed by Subcontractors under Contractor, and not covered by unit prices, the 

estimated cost and Subcontractor’s mark-up for such Work shall be computed by the Subcontractor in the same 

manner as described in Subsection (a) preceding (except that the percentages for Subcontractor’s mark-up shall be 

as approved by Owner), shall be checked and approved by Contractor before submitting same to Owner for its check 

and approval, and shall constitute all of its charges for overhead and profit, both direct and indirect, including but 

not limited to, all charges for supervision, the services of its general office organization and field office expense. 

For such changes there shall be added to or deducted from the Subcontractor’s price as approved by 

Owner Contractor’s mark-up as stated in the Contract, which mark-up shall constitute all of Contractor’s charges for 

overhead and profit, both direct and indirect, including, but not limited to, all charges for supervision, the services of 

its general office organization and field office expense. 

Where revisions involve both additions and deductions, the estimated cost of labor and materials added and 

deducted shall be balanced against each other and the percentage for Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s mark-up shall 

be applied to the net result. 

No. 3 - Actual Cost Plus Mark-up 

Should Owner so elect, the increase or decrease in the price agreed to be paid under the Contract for changes 

shall be Contractor’s costs determined as set forth below. Contractor shall keep and present, in such manner as 

Owner may direct, an accurate account of its costs, together with the supporting vouchers. Contractor’s costs shall 

be the total of: 

(a) The cost to Contractor of all labor performed and all materials furnished for and used in the authorized 

changes in the Work, less all cash, trade and other discounts. 

(b) 

Sums paid by Contractor for royalties, permits and inspection mark-up. 

(c) Premiums for Contractor’s Commercial General Liability Insurance, Workers’ Compensation 

Insurance and other necessary insurance, and applicable payroll taxes. 

{00052658.DOC;1} 





(d) Subcontractor’s costs are comparable to these allowed Contractor under Subsections (a), (b) and (c) 

of this Method No. 3, plus Subcontractor’s mark-up at percentages approved by Owner. Such percentage for 

overhead and profit shall be applied only to the cost of material and labor as defined in Subsection (c) of this 

Method No. 3. 

(e) The percentages set forth in Contractor’s mark-up for additional or deleted Work applied to cost (a) 

above. Such percentage for overhead and profit shall be applied to the cost of labor and material only, and the cost 

of labor for this purpose shall not include applicable insurance, payroll or other taxes, unemployment insurance, 

social security, pension or annuities, bond premiums, and such other items as, but not limited to, vacation 

allowances, travel allowances, and welfare funds. 

Contractor’s and Subcontractor’s mark-up as determined above shall constitute all of its or their charges for 

overhead and profit, both direct and indirect, including, but not limited to, all the charges for supervision, the 

services of its or their general office organization, field office expense, and the use of tools or equipment having a 

cost basis of less than $1,000. The expense of making good any damage to the Work or Premises and the removal 

and replacement of materials or Work rejected or condemned by Owner as failing to conform with the requirements 

of the Drawings and Specifications shall be borne by Contractor and shall not be charged as items of cost. Where 

revisions involved both additions and deductions, the cost of labor and materials added and deducted shall be 

balanced against each other and the percentage for Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s mark-up shall be applied to the 

net result. 

(end of Methods of Evaluation) 

Should Owner order Contractor to proceed with an Change Order pending the submission of a price for the 

Change Order based on Method No. 2, then Contractor shall proceed, and shall require each of its Subcontractors to 

proceed, with such revisions or additions to the Work on the basis of cost as provided in Method No. 3. Should the 

price based on Method No. 2, when submitted, not be acceptable to Owner, then except as otherwise ordered by 

Owner, Contractor shall continue and complete, and shall require each of its Subcontractors to continue and 

complete, said revisions and additions on the basis of cost as provided in Method No. 3. 

Contractor shall not be entitled to increased compensation for changes unless done pursuant to written 

authorization from Owner as defined above (except in an emergency endangering life or property). Drawings 

without a written order shall not constitute such authority. Owner shall have the right to make minor changes in the 

Work not inconsistent with the purposes of the building at no additional cost. 


{00052658.DOC;1} 





SECTION 01002 

GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 

A. GENERAL 

1. Contractor and all Subcontractors are directed and required to read the entire project manual 

and Standard General Conditions included herein in order to familiarize themselves with all 

items related to their individual crafts. 

2. The BFS Retail & Commercial Operations, LLC, Standard General Conditions as part of the 

Contract Form are a part of these specifications and the contractors will be held responsible 

for their fulfillment. Non-reading of said Standard General Conditions by Contractor or 

Subcontractors shall not be accepted as an excuse for failure to comply with them. 

3. Contractor shall keep one complete up-to-date set of Drawings and Specifications on the job 

at all times, including all voided sheets for ready reference in addition to other copies of 

Drawings and Specifications used by mechanics on actual construction work. 

B. DEFINITIONS 

1. Wherever the words "Owner and Contractor” are used in this Project Manual, it refers to 

those entities as defined on the Contract Form. 

C. TERMS INCLUDED 

1. Any item or construction detail not shown on the Drawings but called for in the Specifications 

and any item or construction detail shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the 

Specifications are a part of this contract just as much as if they are shown and mentioned on 

both Drawings and Specifications. 

D. CHANGES 

1. Any changes or additions to the Contract, Drawings or Specifications shall be in writing on 

Owner's "Change Order" form. Contractor and all Subcontractors are hereby given notice 

that no extras will be recognized unless they are authorized in writing on said form by 

Owner's Field Representative. 

E. DISCREPANCIES, CONTRADICTIONS AND AMBIGUITIES 

1. Any discrepancies, contradictions or ambiguities on the Drawings and/or specifications or 

between the Drawings and specifications shall be called to the Owner's attention at time of 

submitting bid and before awarding of contract. If this procedure is not followed, the Owner 

reserves the right to rule on any discrepancies, contradictions or ambiguities in the 

Drawings and Specifications after awarding of contract and Owner's decision shall be final. 

Contractor shall have no claim for extra compensation because of decision. 

2. No extra charge will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and 

measurements indicated on Drawings. Differences which may be found shall be submitted to 

Owner for his consideration before proceeding with the work. 

GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01002 - Page 1 of 7




F. CODES 

1. Contractor shall submit his base bid in accordance with Drawings and Specifications. If 

Drawings and Specifications do not comply with any codes or utility company requirements 

having jurisdiction, then Contractor shall submit an alternate price on any changes 

necessary to comply with such codes. If such alternates are not stated in bid, it shall be 

assumed that Contractor's base bid includes all work necessary to comply with such codes 

or utility company regulations. No extras shall be paid for any work required for complying 

with such codes or for replacing work and materials in order to meet requirements of codes 

or utility company regulations having jurisdiction. 

2. If Drawings and Specifications call for an installation with requirements in excess of the 

minimum code requirements, the installation shall be made strictly in accordance with the 

Drawings and Specifications. 

G. INSPECTION OF WORK 

1. Contractor shall provide and keep on job a safety helmet for use of authorized 

representatives. 

2. In the event the specifications, laws, ordinances, or any public authority requires any part of 

work or materials to be specially tested or installation specially supervised, such testing and 

supervision shall be at Contractor's expense. Owner shall be notified in writing of time, date 

and place fixed for such testing and supervision. 

H. CONTRACTOR 

1. Attention is called to the Contractor that he shall provide a competent superintendent and 

any necessary assistants (all satisfactory to owner) in order to provide strict supervision over 

all Subcontractors. He shall familiarize himself with those portions of the Specifications and 

Drawings pertaining to the Subcontractors. The Contractor shall see that each of the 

Subcontractors under this Contract fully and faithfully completes all work in strict accordance 

with the provisions as set forth in the Drawings and Specifications as they pertain to those 

Subcontractors. General Contractor shall be held responsible for the failure of any of his 

Subcontractors to complete all the work in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 

2. Should the Contractor object to methods or materials specified, he shall notify Owner in 

writing and have same adjusted before proceeding with the work. Procedure without notice 

shall be construed as full acceptance of the Drawings and Specifications. 

I. SUBCONTRACTS 

1. General Contractor shall be held responsible for all material or labor furnished by 

Subcontractors. Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any Subcontractors and 

Contractor shall obtain Owner's approval before letting any Subcontracts or placing orders 

for materials. 

2. Subcontractor certification shall be required for hoist and “Firestone Rubber guard” roof 

installations. 

J. COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS 

1. Contractor shall collaborate with any Subcontractor for building of recess, openings, etc. or 

leaving holes as required by other Contractors. If proper notice and instructions are not given 

to Contractor prior to the erection of such work, Subcontractor shall then employ Contractor 

to do the work required for them at Subcontractor's expense. 





K. ACCEPTANCE OF OTHER CONTRACTOR'S WORK 

1. If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of 

any other Contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to Owner any defects 

in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. His failure to 

inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other Contractor's work as fit and 

proper for the reception of his work, except as to defects which may develop in the other 

Contractor's work after the execution of his work.. 

L. MATERIALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 

1. Wherever any particular brand of material is specified, either on Drawings or Specifications, 

the same is to be regarded as a standard. If any other article of equal merit is proposed by 

Contractor, he must obtain owner's prior approval in writing. Where specifications list several 

Manufacturers of like materials, only those manufacturers' products are acceptable. If 

Contractor desires to use any other, written approval shall be obtained from Owner before 

accepting quotations or Purchasing materials manufactured by firms not specified. If 

Contractor purchases materials manufactured or fabricated by firms that are not listed in 

specifications, they do so at their own risk. No item other than specified will be considered if 

brought to site without previous written permission. All materials of special make where called 

for shall be furnished with all accessories necessary for proper installation as per 

manufacturer's recommendations and specifications. 

M. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 

1. Unless otherwise specifically provided by contract, change order or herein, all materials shall 

be new. Both workmanship and materials shall be of the best quality for their respective 

trades. Each Contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work under 

contract to him. 

2. In addition each Contractor shall provide, without extra charge, all incidental items required 

as a part of the work or required in order that various portions of building are completed in 

accordance with good construction and engineering practice. These are to be provided even 

though such items may not be specifically described or indicated, but are necessary to 

complete property the installation of the work. Each Contractor shall submit, without extra 

charge, evidence (satisfactory to Owner) that each item of material furnished under his 

contract fulfills the requirements of the specifications for such materials. 

3. It is the Owner’s intent that wherever possible, the Contractor shall select materials that have 

a recycled content or are available from a regional source. 

4. Should at any time improper, imperfect, or unsound material or faulty workmanship be 

observed, whether before or after the same shall have been brought into the structure, the 

Contractor shall, upon notice from the Owner, cause the same to be removed and good and 

proper material or work substituted therefore without delay. In the event the Contractor 

defaults in promptly handling the foregoing and after receipt of written notice by Owner of 

such default, Owner may resort to such other means as may be deemed necessary to 

correct such imperfections as described above. The cost of correcting these imperfections or 

such alterations shall be charged to the Contractor and the amount therefore deducted from 

the sum due to or recoverable from him under this contract. 

5. If Owner deems it inexpedient to correct work injured or work done not in accordance with 

Drawings, Specifications and contract, an equitable deduction from the contract price or 

refund to Owner shall be made therefore. 





6. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the safety and good condition of all work and 

materials in his contract until the completion of his contract as an entirety. In addition, 

Contractor shall be responsible for fulfilling his obligation of providing all materials and 

executing all work in strict accordance with drawings and specifications for a period of one 

year from date of completion of project. 

N. PAYMENT AND LIEN WAIVER 

1. Beginning with the first application for payment, the Contractor shall submit a notarized 

Waiver of Right of Lien for material and labor (which is in place and paid for) from all Sub- 

Contractors and suppliers included in the applicable payment. 

O. MATERIALS FURNISHED BY OWNER 

1. Contractor shall refer to Section 01003 of these Specifications for materials to be furnished 

by Owner and installed by Contractor. Those materials will be supplied by Owner, F.O.B. job 

site and shall be stored by Contractor (see paragraph immediately below) and installed by 

Contractor or respective Subcontractor. In the absence of any notes or statements on 

Drawings, or in specifications, to the effect that various materials to complete job are to be 

furnished by Owner, they shall be furnished by Contractor. 

P. RECEIVING AND CARING FOR MATERIAL FURNISHED BY OWNER 

1. General Contractor shall be held responsible for receiving and safeguarding of all material 

furnished by Owner. General Contractor shall receive all items from the shipper,, unload, 

check and sign the bill of lading as to number of items received, description, weight and for 

visible or concealed damage. He shall examine this material when it is received. If any 

damage is found or if any items are missing from shipment that are called for on carriers 

delivery ticket all shall be immediately called to the attention of carriers agent. Notations of 

such damage or shortages shall be made on the delivery ticket or bill of lading, or in any 

other manner in accordance with the requirements of that particular carrier. General 

Contractor shall obtain the signature of carrier's agent to this notation of damage or 

shortage. Such papers and notations shall then be delivered to Owner immediately to enable 

Owner to file necessary claim. In the event such damages or shortages are not noted then it 

shall be contractors obligations to furnish new items of equal quality to complete the project. 

2. General Contractor to advise and confirm exact street address and postal zip code for 

deliveries. 

Q. STORAGE SHED 

1. Contractor shall provide shed for safe storage of such material as may be damaged by 

weather including materials furnished by Owner. Contractor shall keep shed in good repair 

and when it is no longer needed remove from site. 

R. MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES 

1. Manufacturer's warranties on installed equipment and other building items, as well as 

Subcontractor and supplier warranties and guarantees, express or implied, respecting any 

part of the work and any materials used therein shall be deemed obtained and shall be 

enforced--by the Contractor as the agent for the benefit of the owner. 

2. Contractor shall furnish copies of the warranties of the equipment or building items where 

such warranties have been issued by manufacturer. 





S. CONTROLLED MATERIALS 

1. Where materials are required by the Governing Building Codes to be certified by an 

accredited authoritative agency as meeting accepted engineering standards for quality, the 

certification shall be furnished by the Contractor. 

T. SCHEDULES & ESTIMATES 

1. Immediately after execution and delivery of the contract, the Contractor shall deliver to the 

Owner a "Building Progress Schedule" showing the proposed dates of commencement and 

completion of each of the various sub-divisions of work required under this project. 

Contractor shall keep schedule updated at least bi-weekly. 

2. Within twenty (20) days after execution of Contract, Contractor shall name all Subcontractors 

and material dealers from whom materials will be purchased for this project. 

3. In the case that work is not completed within the allotted time frame the Contractor will be 

responsible for Liquidated Damages. 

4. He shall submit a breakdown (Schedule of Values) of the contract price, by trade, to the 

Owner on the Schedule of Value form. This "Schedule of Values" when approved by Owner 

shall be the basis of computing monthly estimates of work completed on the project. 

U. SHOP DRAWINGS 

1. Contractor shall submit with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or in that 

of any other Contractor, three copies of all shop or setting drawings and schedules required 

for the work of the various trades. Owner shall waive the requirement of all shop drawing 

submittals when Contractor intends to supply materials exactly matching the drawings and 

specifications with the exception of: pre-engineered building reaction loads and anchor bolt 

layouts; reinforcing steel; HVAC equipment. Contractor must submit shop drawings for all 

proposed "equal” substitution products. Owner shall pass upon submitted drawings with 

reasonable promptness making desired corrections, including all necessary corrections 

relating to artistic effect. Contractor shall make all corrections required by Owner, file with him 

two corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. Owner's approval of 

such drawings or schedules shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for deviations 

from drawings or specifications, unless he had in writing called Owner's attention to such 

deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of 

any sort in shop drawings or schedule. 

V. PERMITS AND FEES 

1. Refer to Invitation To Bid Section 13: Permits, Fees and Inspections. 

W. MODEL ENERGY EFFICIENCY CODE REQUIREMENTS 

1. When required, Contractor shall obtain and submit the fully executed Energy Efficiency- 

Forms and Calculations to the governing authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor shall 

furnish Owner with a copy of the executed form and calculations. All fees pertaining to the 

above shall be paid by the Contractor. 





X. TEMPORARY LIGHT, HEAT, POWER, WATER AND TELEPHONE 

1. Contractor shall provide all temporary light and power necessary to the operation under this 

contract, including connections needed to supply same. He shall also provide water and 

toilet facilities for his men and all other operations in connection with the building and remove 

all temporary lines and connections at completion of the work. 

2. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and provide heat if it is necessary to protect the 

construction, provide for safety of materials and personnel, and make possible the 

expeditious handling of the performance of this contract. Owner shall approve method of 

heating used which shall comply with OSHA requirements, local and national codes. 

3. Contractor shall provide a temporary construction telephone at the job site when one is not 

already there. 

4. Reference Invitation To Bid Section 11: Temporary Facilities for additional requirements. 

Y. SHORING AND BRACING 

1. Contractor shall provide all permanent and temporary bracing, shoring, and anchoring that 

the nature of his work may require in order to make everything absolutely stable and secure 

even where such bracing, shoring, and anchoring are not explicitly called for. Contractor will 

be held strictly accountable for any damage or injury resulting from judgment or for any other 

cause. 

2. Contractor shall do all underpinning or shoring that may be necessary to properly execute 

the work or for protection of adjoining property under local code or law. 

Z. PROTECTION AGAINST INJURY OR DAMAGE 

1. Contractor shall protect from damage the work finished and furnished by him or others. He 

shall protect if from loss resulting from carelessness, the elements or any other causes, 

except for damage by perils covered by the usual fire and extended coverage risk assumed 

by the Owner. He shall protect the entire work until it is completed and accepted by Owner. 

Owner will not carry individual policies at different sites as owner is self-insured and will 

assume the following risk: In case the building or building materials shall be destroyed, in 

whole or in part, by any of the perils covered under the fire and extended coverage 

insurance on the usual standard form of insurance policy in use in the state within which the 

site is situated, Owner shall cover damages. Normal perils that are covered include fire, Acts 

of God, vandalism, and malicious mischief. Theft and collapse are not covered. 

2. Contractor shall replace any part of the work which is damaged as described above prior to 

the time the entire work is completed and accepted by Owner. Contractor shall also protect 

and hold Owner harmless from any damage to adjacent property arising out of the 

performance of this Contract. 

AA. 

FINAL CLEAN-UP AND REMOVALS 

1. Contractor is responsible for cleanliness of the service area floor. He shall use diligence to 

prevent oil spills, marking of floor by equipment or materials or any other discoloration or 

roughness. All spills/marks shall be cleaned up immediately. 

2. At the completion of work, Contractor shall remove all his rubbish from and about the 

building or premises, all his tools scaffolding and surplus materials. He shall leave his work 

"Broom-Clean" or its equivalent, unless more exactly specified. 





3. Upon completion of the job, all plaster, paint stains, labels, etc. shall be removed from glass 

by Contractor, and glass washed and the entire building be left in a clean and sightly 

condition. 






SECTION 01003 

SPECIAL CONDITIONS/OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS 

A. OTHER CONTRACTS 

1. It is Owner's intention that other contracts will be let in connection with this building project such 

as the installation of signs, various shop equipment, etc. The Contractor and all of the 

Subcontractors shall cooperate with the parties installing special items in order that work can be 

properly coordinated and completed as expeditiously as possible. 

B. MATERIALS FURNISHED BY OWNER 

C. SIGNS 

1. All items that are furnished by the Owner or Tenant for installation by the Contractor, see 

itemized listing below, will be shipped F.O.B. job site, (street address, city, state, zip). These 

materials shall be received, unloaded, stored and installed by the Contractor. Contractor shall 

receive all items from the shipper, unload, check and sign the bill of lading as to number of items 

received, description, weight and for visible or concealed damages. Contractor shall be 

responsible for the security of the Owner furnished items until the construction project is 

complete. 

2. In the absence of any notes or statement on the Drawings to the effect that various materials are 

to be furnished by the Owner, then all materials to complete the job are to be furnished by the 

Contractor. 

3. The Owner expects to furnish when needed, the items listed below, so that Contractor's work 

schedule may be maintained as contemplated. However, they shall not be responsible for any 

delays or inability to supply or deliver any materials contemplated to be supplied by them 

hereunder, provided such delays are occasioned to be fire, the elements, emergency, interruption 

of transportation facilities, inability to obtain of Bridgestone/Firestone or their source of supply. 

Contractor shall submit a schedule showing dates materials are to be delivered to job site. 

4. As previously stated, Owner will pay all delivery charges necessary to ship all Owner furnished 

items to the new store site (or to Contractor's yard or other alternate delivery site as requested by 

Contractor). Any freight charges for demurrage, re-delivery, double handling, temporary storage, 

etc. that are incurred by Owner for shipments that are refused by the Contractor, shall be the 

Contractor's responsibility and shall be deducted from the final payment. These potential extra 

freight charges shall be charged to the Contractor only if the deliveries are made to the proper 

location and on or after the date requested by the contractor. Owner shall be responsible for 

extra charges if deliveries are made early and subsequently refused. Please be aware that it is 

very difficult to revise the shipping schedule for items once they have been released. 

1. Refer to Invitation To Bid Section 11: Temporary Facilities. 

2. Building mounted signage, as shown on drawings, furnished and installed by Owner. Contractor 

to furnish electrical power to a junction box at the signs shown; final hookup from junction box at 

the sign by Contractor. 

3. Free standing signs. 

a. By Sign Vendor – sign pole foundation and sign by Bridgestone Retail Operation, unless 

noted otherwise on plans. 

b. By Contractor – electrical power to a junction box at the sign. 

SPECIAL CONDITIONS/OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS 01003 - Page 1 of 2




D. EQUIPMENT 

c. By Contractor – final hookup of electric to the sign. 

d. By Contractor – monument sign foundation and base. 

1. Contractor shall install all equipment / fixtures as listed on sheets F1 and F2 in full 

accordance with the manufacturers latest recommendations so that it is operational and 

functions as intended. 


SPECIAL CONDITIONS/OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS 01003 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 01300 

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 



A. Pre-construction meeting. 

B. Progress meetings. 

C. Construction progress schedule. 

D. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. 

E. Number of copies of submittals. 

F. Submittal procedures. 


2.01 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING 

A. Owner's Representative will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. 

B. Agenda: 

1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 

2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 

3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 

4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, schedule of values, and progress 

schedule. 

5. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the Owner's 

Representative. 

6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for 

payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 

7. Scheduling. 

C. The Contractor shall record the minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to 

participants, to Owner's Representative, and to those affected by decisions made. 

2.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS 

A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at appropriate intervals. 

B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, and the Owner's 

Representative; as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. 

C. Agenda: 

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 

2. Review of Work progress. 

3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 

4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 

5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 

6. Maintenance of progress schedule. 

7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 

8. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 

9. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 

10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 

11. Other business relating to Work. 

D. The Contractor shall record the minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to 

participants, to Owner's Representative, and to those affected by decisions made. 

E. Refer to Invitation To Bid Section 16: Reporting, for additional requirements. 

2.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 

A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned 

operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. 

B. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. 

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - Page 1 of 2




C. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. 

D. Refer to Invitation To Bid Section 15: Scheduling, for additional requirements. 

2.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW and/or APPROVAL 

A. Shop Drawings and Information will be required as listed below: 

1 Structural Steel and Joists (Wood structures if applicable) 

2 Anchor Bolt Details 

3 Reinforcing Steel in Concrete & Masonry 

4 Storefront Glazing 

5 Mechanical Equipment (see Section 15010) 

6 Interior and Exterior Luminaries 

7 Electrical Switch-gear and Panel-boards 

8 Fire Alarm 

9 Sprinkler (If applicable) 

10 Plumbing Fixtures 

11 Concrete and Mortar Mix Designs 

12 Doors & Hardware 

PART 3 SUBMITTALS 

3.01 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS 

A. Documents for Review: 

1. Small size sheets, not larger than 8-1/2 x 11 inches: Submit the number of copies which the 

Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Owner's Representative. 

2. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches: Submit one reproducible transparency and 

one opaque reproduction. 

3.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 

A. Transmit each submittal with approved form. 

B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential 

alphabetic suffix. 

C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or Supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and 

specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. 

D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of 

Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is 

in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 

E. Deliver submittals to and as designated by the Owner's Representative. 

F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. 

G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. 

H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be 

detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 

I. Provide space for Contractor and Owner's Representative review stamps. 

J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. 

K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any 

inability to comply with requirements. 


ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 01322 

CONSTRUCTION CAMERA SYSTEM 


1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and 

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this 

Section. 

B. Refer to Invitation To Bid Section 11: Temporary Facilities for additional 

requirements. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes an integrated, professional-grade, high resolution digital 

webcam system designed specifically for the construction industry as a turnkey 

package including camera and related hardware, mounting equipment, software, 

wireless cellular data transmission service, website hosting, image hosting and 

storage, online interface for the system and technical support. 

1.03 DEFINITIONS 

A. System Vendor: Provider of megapixel camera (4mp) system hardware and 

software and host maintaining off-site server, data storage devices, and 

troubleshooting software and equipment. Contractor shall maintain an active 

contract for System Service for duration of Contract Time unless other term is 

agreed upon in writing by the Owner. Cost for System Service shall be included 

in the Contract Sum. 

B. System Service: Host services provided by System Vendor including image 

acquisition, transfer, backup, periodic upgrades to the system, viewing access 

via a maintained interface on the Internet and on-line storage of images for 

duration of the Service Contract. 


A. Shop Drawings: 

1. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of 

vantage point marked for location and direction of camera. Provide 

single camera with view of the service bays through the overhead door 

openings. Indicate camera mounting heights relative to ground and roof 

elevation. 

B. Closeout Submittals: 

1. Digital Images: Submit digital still images exactly as originally recorded in 

the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or 

modifications using image-editing software. 

a. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each 

image. 

b. Format: Submit a sortable/identifiable archive of all digital still 

images on an external hard drive or DVD format. 

CONSTRUCTION CAMERA SYSTEM 01322 - Page 1 of 5




1.05 COORDINATION 

A. Coordinate layout and installation of camera to avoid interference from trees and 

to prevent sunlight and light from fixtures entering directly into the camera lens. 

1.06 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to 

repair or replace components of cameras and equipment related to camera 

operation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified construction 

period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Failure of system to meet performance requirements. 

2. Faulty operation of hardware and software. 

3. Defects in other components of the work. 

1.07 USAGE RIGHTS 

A. Contractor shall understand that photographs and archives generated by the 

camera system become the mutual property of the Owner and System Vendor 

and cannot be used for advertisement or publicity reasons without the expressed 

written consent of the Owner and System Vendor. 



A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the 

following: 

1. OxBlue, Inc., 888-849-2583, http://www.OxBlue.com/. 

B. Substitutions: Comply with provisions of Division 1 Section 01600, "Product 

Requirements." 

2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 

A. The indoor/outdoor camera system shall consist of a tamper and impact 

resistant, discreet, fixed pole-mount enclosure with integrated fixed camera, lens 

and controller. 

B. The cameras shall have the ability to take a high-resolution four (4) megapixel 

digital still images of the construction site every 15 minutes, and upload the still 

images over a wireless cellular modem to a secure, password-protected website. 

2.03 EQUIPMENT 

A. Camera: Integrated high definition camera and lens assembly consisting of a 

charge coupled device (CCD) camera with a remotely controlled focal length lens 

mounted as a permanent module with the following features: 

1. Digital Still Image Resolution: Minimum sensor size of 4.0 megapixels, 

and at an image resolution of not less than 2304 x 1728 pixels. 

2. Memory: Unlimited remote storage provided by the system vendor. 





3. Lens: 6.3 - 63 mm (38-380mm equivalent in 35mm photography), system 

capable of ten times (10x) optical zoom. Include a wide angle conversion 

lens with a 0.66x factor. Provide capability to remotely control focal 

length lens to change resolution, focus and zoom. 

4. Focus Mode: iESP auto, Spot AF, Selective AF target, Manual. 

5. Metering Mode: Digital iESP multi-pattern auto TTL, Spot metering, 

Center Weighted metering. 

6. Data Connection: Provide one of the following: 

a. In areas with cellular coverage, operate cameras via built-in 

cellular data connection provided and maintained by the system 

vendor. 

b. In areas without cellular coverage, operate cameras via an RJ- 

45 Ethernet data connection over broadband or satellite internet 

access provided and maintained by the Contractor. 

7. Electrical Operation: 120 VAC at maximum 83 Watts. 

B. Quantity of Cameras: See Invitation to Bid Section 11. 

C. Camera Enclosure: Construct tamper and impact resistant housing of extruded 

aluminum, die cast aluminum, and sheet aluminum body with factory-applied 

powder coated finish. 

1. Construct with forward opening, front hinged lid, allowing easy access to 

camera mounting sled. 

2. Provide rear link-lock latch, manufactured from stainless steel, suitable 

for use with pad lock. 

3. Equip with heater, blower and thermostat. 

4. Size: 25-1/4 inches long by 6-7/8 inches wide by 5 inches high. 

2.04 INTERFACE AND ONLINE ACCESS 

A. Remote Access: Contractor's System Vendor shall provide an online interface 

system to allow viewing of all high-definition digital still images captured and 

stored during construction, from any location with internet access and with 

password protection. 

1. Maintain images on the System Vendor's website for reference available 

at all times during construction and for not less than 90 days after Final 

Completion. 

B. Online Interface: 

1. The online interface system shall be accessible by an unlimited number 

of human users. 

2. System shall display Project name and Owner Logo. 

3. The system shall display online time-lapse videos and allow for videos to 

be downloaded by users. 

4. Navigation: Provide calendar based navigation system for selecting 

specific images. 

5. Zoom: Provide pan and zoom capability for zooming into high definition 

images. 

6. User Screen Viewing Options: 

a. Dynamic Calendar: Provide screen showing calendar in which 

each day displays an image for that day. 

b. Project Dashboard: Provide screen allowing user to view multiple 

sites at one time. 







c. Full-Screen: Provide screen maximizing view of images on users 

monitor. 

7. Email: Provide capability to email photos with comments from within the 

system. 

8. Slideshow: Provide capability to browse through images, moving forward 

and backward in time by individual image and by day. 

A. Unpack camera system components and save packing materials (box and foam) 

for future shipment of camera system including associated appurtenances and 

mounting equipment to Owner or Manufacturer as required. 


A. General: 

1. Install camera system in accordance with manufacturer's printed 

instructions, State and Municipality codes and requirements and 

approved submittals. 

2. Install units plumb and at proper angle to provide maximum field of view 

of on-site operations. 

3. Securely and rigidly anchor products in place. 

4. Connect cameras to power. 

B. Position camera so that field of view of approximately 77 degrees covers 

intended area of site. 

1. Install camera at elevation that will provide uncompromised visual 

coverage. 

2. Install camera so that position of sun or man made light sources will not 

come into direct contact with field of view of camera at any time during 

construction. 


A. Preinstallation Testing: Test camera on site at ground level prior to mounting unit 

in its intended elevated position. 

1. Contact System Vendor not less than 24 hours in advance of installation 

for testing. 

2. Connect unit. 

3. After 30 minutes contact System Vendor and require System Vendor to 

remotely confirm camera is operating properly. 

4. Install camera in approved location. 

3.04 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL 

A. Maintenance: Maintain camera equipment in good operating condition on a 24- 

hour basis until removal. 

B. Termination and Removal: Remove camera system prior to Substantial 

Completion. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace 

construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 





1. Camera system including associated appurtenances and mounting 

equipment are property of Owner. 






SECTION 01352 

SUSTAINABLE RECOMMENDATIONS 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions 

and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with BSRO’s 

Environmentally Friendly Building Practices. 


A. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested within a 10- 

year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made from bamboo, cotton, 

flax, jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vegetable oils or wool. 

B. Regional Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested or recovered, as well as 

manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site. If only a fraction of a product or material is 

extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage (by weight) 

shall contribute to the regional value. 

C. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be determined by 

weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to 

determine the recycled content value. 

1. “Post-consumer” material is defined as waste material generated by households or by 

commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product, 

which can no longer be used for its intended purpose. 

2. “Pre-consumer” material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream, during the 

manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind or 

scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that 

generated it. 


A. General: No specific submittals will be required by the Owner on this project. The use of materials 

that could qualify is encouraged by the Owner. 

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 

2.01 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS 

A. Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: Contractor is encouraged, but not required, to provide building 

materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer 

recycled content constitutes a minimum of 20 percent of cost of materials used for 

Project. 

1. Cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of 

post-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost 

of the item. 

2. Cost of pre-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of 

pre-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost 

of the item. 

3. Do not include furniture, plumbing, mechanical and electrical components, and specialty 

items such as elevators and equipment in the calculation. 

2.02 REGIONAL MATERIALS 

A. Credit MR 5.1 and Credit MR 5.2: Contractor is encouraged, but not required, to provide a 

minimum of 20 percent of building materials (by cost) that are regional materials. 

SUSTAINABLE RECOMMENDATIONS 01352 - Page 1 of 3




2.03 CERTIFIED WOOD 

A. Credit MR 6: Contractor is encouraged, but not required, to provide a minimum of 50 percent (by 

cost) of wood-based materials that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an 

FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, “FSC Principles and Criteria for 

Forest Stewardship.” 

1. Contractor is encouraged, but not required, to provide plate connected wood trusses per 

Section 06193 to comply with FSC SJD-01-001. 

2.04 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS 

A. Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, the Contractor is 

encouraged to use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content 

when calculating according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D: 

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 

2. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L. 

3. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 60 g/L. 

4. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

5. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 60 g/L. 

6. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

7. Carpet pad Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

8. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

9. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

10. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. 

11. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L. 

12. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L. 

13. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 

14. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. 

15. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L. 

16. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L. 

17. Wood Flooring Adhesives: 100 g/L. 

18. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L. 

19. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine covered 

board, metal, unsupported vinyl, Teflon, ultra-high molecular weight polyethylene, rubber or 

wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250 g/L. 

20. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L. 

21. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L. 

22. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L. 

23. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L. 

24. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. 

25. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L. 

26. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L. 

27. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight. 

28. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight. 

29. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight. 

30. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L. 

31. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 

32. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. 

33. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. 

34. Other Sealants: 420 g/L. 

35. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 

36. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 

37. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L. 

38. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L. 

B. Credit EQ 4.2: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, the contractor is 

encouraged to use paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content when 

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D: 

1. Flat Paints, Coatings and Primers: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 

2. Nonflat paints, Coatings and Primers: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 





3. Anticorrosive and Antitrust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 

4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 

5. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 

6. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 

7. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 

8. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 

9. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 

C. Credit EQ 4.4: Do not use composite wood or agrifiber products or adhesives that contain ureaformaldehyde 

resin. 

PART 3 – NOT USED 






SECTION 01400 

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 



A. References and standards. 

B. Quality assurance submittals. 

C. Control of installation. 

D. Testing and inspection services. 

1.02 STANDARDS and REFERENCES 

A. Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable industry 

standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents 

to the extent referenced. 

B. Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards 

applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract 

Documents. 

C. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the contractor shall 

obtain copies directly from the publication source at his own expense. 

D. Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following 

acronyms or abbreviations, as referenced in the Contract Documents are defined to mean the 

associated name. 

Master Listing of Specification Standard and 

Reference Sources. 

AABC MN Associated Air Balance Council 

ABMA STD American Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. 

ACI 

American Concrete Institute International 

AISC 

American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 

ANSI 

American National Specification Institute 

ARI 

Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 

ASME 

American Society of Mechanical Engineers 

ASSE 

American Society of Sanitary Engineering 

ASTM 

American Standard Testing Methods 

AWS 

American Welding Society 

AWWA American Water Works Association 

CISPI 

Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute 

GA 

Gypsum Association 

IEEE 

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 

IIAR 

International Institute of Ammonia Refrigeration 

IMIAWC International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council 

MSS 

Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry, Inc. 

NEBB 

National Environmental Balancing Bureau 

NECA 

National Electrical Contractors Association 

NEMA 

National Electrical Manufacturers Association 

NETA 

International Electrical Testing Association 

NFPA 

National Fire Protection Association 

PDI 

Plumbing and Drainage Institute 

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 

UL 

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - Page 1 of 11




E. For products and workmanship specified, comply with requirements of the applicable reference and 

standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. 

F. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where 

a specific date is established by applicable code. 

G. Should specified reference standards have conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification 

from the Owner's Representative before proceeding. 

H. Reference BSRO’s Testing Specification (Construction Material Testing & Observation Agreement 

Requirements) by BSRO’s contract testing agency. 

1.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES 

A. G.C. to coordinate scheduling of testing agency in accordance to prescribed observations. 

B. Coordination of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance 

with requirements of Contract Documents. 

C. BSRO Employed Agency: 

1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM C802. 

2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D290. 

3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located. 

4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 

5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable 

to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 


2.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION 

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and 

workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. 

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. 

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from 

Owner's Representative before proceeding. 

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent 

tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. 

2.02 TOLERANCES 

A. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract 

Documents, request clarification from Owner's Representative before proceeding. 

2.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION 

A. Contractor Responsibilities: 

1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used 

which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 

2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' 

facilities. 

3. Provide incidental labor and facilities: 

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. 

b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected. 

c. To facilitate tests/inspections. 

d. To provide storage and curing of test samples. 

B. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by 

the same agency. 

2.04 DEFECT ASSESSMENT 

A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. 

B. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, 

the Owner's Representative will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. 

C. Refer to Invitation To Bid Section 17: Special Procedures, paragraph e (page 12). 





PART 3 REQUIRED TESTS – Excerpts from Construction Material Testing and Observation 

Agreement 

3.01 Site and Building Excavation and Backfilling Testing Specification 

The Testing Specifications listed below shall be executed without deviation in accordance with the 

Project Drawings and Specifications. Any discrepancies between these documents will be brought 

to the immediate attention of the Bridgestone Retail Operations, LLC Zone Construction Manager. 

All reports shall be made on 8-1/2 x 11 white papers, suitable for photocopying and binding in 

booklet form. All sheets shall have the Testing and Engineer’s letterhead (including phone number, 

address and email address). Larger sheets shall be folded and bound into the booklet. Reports 

shall include: 

a. Date issued 

b. Project title and number as it appears on the Contract Documents. 

c. Name of the inspector 

d. Name and seal of registered engineer in responsible charge. 

e. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 

f. Identification of product and specification section. 

g. Location of sampling or inspection in the Project. 

h. Type of inspection or test performed. 

i. Date of test. 

j. Results of test. 

k. Indicate conformance or non-conformance with the Contract Document requirements and 

provide Testing and Engineer’s interpretation of test or inspection results. 

All tests and inspections not conforming to the Contract Documents shall be stamped with a red 

stamp indicating non-0conrormance and distributed within 20 hours of discovery using the red letter 

format attached to this document. 

After each inspection or test, a report shall be distributed within three calendar days to: 

Bridgestone Retail Operations, LLC Zone Construction Manager 

SITE-Work Engineering Consultant 

Developer or Contractor 

Building Official 

Architectural Consultant 

1 copy 

1 copy 

3 copies 

as Required 

1 copy 

3.02 Inspection Services for Site and Building Excavation and Backfilling shall include: 

1. Prior to placement of backfill materials in the floor slab and parking areas observe the 

subgrade to determine that the soils are suitable for support of the floor slab. 

2. Observe proof rolling operations in any remaining, accessible areas of the subgrade in the 

building and pavement areas to identify and report any soft or unstable soils prior to any 

placement of fill or base coarse material across the site. 

3. Within the building area, perform one (1) test for every 100 cubic yards of fill and backfill or in 

areas of natural grade or cut, one (1) test for every 1000 square feet, except that such tests 

must be located as to give equal coverage to all portions of the building sub-grade. 

4. Within the paved areas of the site except trench excavations, one (12) test for every 500 

cubic yards of fill or in area of natural grade or cut one (1) test for every 2000 square feet. 

a. Within trench excavations provide one (1) test for every 200 cubic yards or 50 linear feet of 

fill or back fill. 





b. Building foundation excavation and subgrade preparation shall be observed for conformity 

to the size, depth and suitability of the excavated areas and test for verification of the soil 

bearing capacity for compliance with the geotechnical recommended specified values. 

Porous fill shall be examined for soils classification, depth and percentage of compaction. 

5. Using the geotechnical engineering report as a guide, report any deviation from the 

recommendations contained within the geotechnical report and point out the deviation to the 

job superintendent. DO NOT MAKE ANY RECOMMENDATIONS FOR MEANS AND 

METHODS TO BE USED BY THE CONTRACTOR. 

6. Test and verify soil-bearing capacity of each column footing and every 30 lineal feet of wall 

foundation. 

7. Perform the following tests as necessary: 

a. Atterberg Limits Test – two (2) tests anticipated 

b. Percent Fines - two (2) tests anticipated 

c. Standard Proctor - two (2) tests anticipated 

d. Nuclear Density Gauge to evaluate bearing soils at spread footing excavation and for fill 

soils – ten visits anticipated. 

e. Hand auger and penetrometer for native soils. 

3.03 Asphalt/Concrete Pavement Testing Specification 





























1 copy 

1 copy 

3 copies 

as Required 

1 copy 





3.04 Inspection Services for Asphalt Testing and Inspection shall include: 

a. Take one (1) core sample at the rate of not less than one every 10,000 square feet of parking 

lot area, but not less than three (1) cores in light duty areas or three (1) cores in heavy duty 

areas. Testing and Engineer shall consult with the Bridgestone Retail Operations, LLC Zone 

Construction Manager for locations prior to the commencement of coring. Selection of core 

locations shall provide the greatest amount of information for the area tested. 

Perform the following tests: 

• Compression tests in accordance with ASTM C39. 

• Asphalt density tests in accordance with ASTM D2950. 

• Extraction and gradation tests in accordance with ASTM D4074 and ASTM D71. 

• Measure thickness of Pavement. 

b. Testing during placement of asphalt concrete mixture. 

• Test engineer shall be on-SITE when placement begins. 

• Perform on-SITE density tests utilizing Nuclear Density equipment. 

• Record ambient temperature. 

• Record asphalt mixing temperatures. 

3.05 Concrete Testing Specifications 





























1 copy 

1 copy 

3 copies 

as Required 

1 copy 





Concrete sampling shall be performed by an ACE certified technician, Grade 1 or higher. 

3.06 Testing Services for Concrete Shall Include: 

a. Review Contractor’s proposed materials and mix design for conformance with specifications. 

b. Conduct strength tests as required in the Specification: 

• Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C172. Sample at regularly spaced 

intervals from the middle portion of the batch. Sampling time shall not exceed fifteen (15) 

minutes. 

• Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C31. 

o 

o 

o 

o 

A minimum of four (4) concrete test cylinders shall be taken for every 100 cubic 

yards or less of each class of concrete placed each day and not less than once 

for each 4,000 square feet of surface area for slab. 

Initial cure during the first 24 hours shall be made by placing cylinders adjacent 

to the pour. Protect cylinders for loss of moisture by covering with wet sand, 

burlap, visqueen, or curing compound. Protect cylinders from direct sunlight or 

radiant heating devices. Do not disturb cylinders. 

Do not transport cylinders to laboratory within the first 48 hours. Protect 

cylinders from vibration, freezing temperatures and moistures loss during 

transportation. 

Wet cure cylinders under controlled temperature until testing. 

• Test Cylinders in accordance with ASTM C39. 

o 

o 

o 

o 

Date test cylinders and number consecutively. Give each cylinder of each set an 

identifying letter (i.e. A, B, C etc.). Prepare a sketch of the building plan for each 

test set identifying the placed concrete location(s). 

Test one cylinder (A) at 7 days for information 

Test two cylinders (B and C) at 28 days and the average of the breaks shall 

constitute the compressive strength of the concrete sample. 

Retain fourth cylinder (D) for further testing if needed, but do not cylinder for 

more than 60 days. 

• Conduct slump test for each cylinder set taken in accordance with ASTM C143. Make 

additional slump tests for every other load from a stationary mixer or truck to test 

consistency. Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM C172 

• Conduct air content test for each cylinder set for concrete exposed to freeze-thaw in 

accordance with ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or ASTM C138. Indicate the test method on 

the report. Test shall be made at the same time as the slump test. 

• Conduct temperature test for each concrete sample. 

• In addition to the required information noted previously in this section, record the following 

information on concrete compression reports: 

o Test cylinder number and letter. 

o Specific foundations or structures covered by this test. 

o Proportions of concrete mix or mix identification. 

o Maximum size coarse aggregate. 

o Specified compressive strength. 

o Tested compressive strength. 

o Slump, air contentment (when applicable) and concrete temperature. 

o Date and time concrete was placed. 





o 

o 

Ambient temperature during concrete placement. 

Type of fracture during the test. 

• At the start of each day’s mixing, report any significant deviations from approved mix 

designs including temperature, moisture and condition of aggregate. 

• Certify each delivery ticket of concrete. Report type of concrete delivered, amount of 

water added and time at which the cement and aggregate were loaded into the truck, and 

time at which concrete was discharged from the truck. 

3.07 Masonry Testing Specification 





























1 copy 

1 copy 

3 copies 

as Required 

1 copy 

3.08 Testing Services and Inspection Services for Masonry Shall Include: 

Mortar Grout: 

a. Conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C1090 (UBC Std 24 – 28) 

• Take two strength samples for each 2500 square feet of masonry wall surface, for each 

type of group placed each day. 

• Create test samples by forming with wood surface on bottom and concrete block on sides. 

The samples shall be 3 inches square and 8 inches high. 

• Initial cure during first 48 hours. Protect samples from loss of moisture by covering with 

wet cloth and keeping moist. Protect from freezing and variations in temperature. Record 

maximum and minimum temperatures by using max. /min. thermometer. 





• Remove masonry units that form samples after 48 hours and transport group samples to 

laboratory. Keep samples protected from vibration, freezing, and moisture loss during 

transportation. 

• Test samples with test method ASTM C39 at 28 days. Compressive strength shall be the 

average of the two samples and shall be adequate if it equals fm as defined on the 

drawings but not less than 2000 psi. 

b. Conduct slump test at the time compressive test samples are taken in accordance with ASTM 

C143. Grout shall have a slump between 8 inches and 11 inches. 

c. In addition to the required information noted previously in this specification, record the following 

information on group reports: 

• Mix design or mix designation. 

• Test sample number. 

• Specific wall areas covered by the test. 

• Description of sample – dimensions amount out of plumb in percent. 

• Description f units used to form sample. 

• Curing history with max. /min. temperature and age when transported to the lab and age 

when tested. 

• Tested compressive strength. 

• Description of failure. 

Mortar: 

a. Prepare and test mortar in accordance with the following (UBC Std. 24 – 22) 

• Spread mortar on the masonry units ½ to 5/8 inch thick and allow standing for one minute. 

• Remove mortar and place in a 2 inch by 4 inch cylinder in two layers, compressing the 

mortar into the cylinder using a flat end stick or fingers. Lightly tap the mold on opposite 

sides, level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to the 

laboratory. 

• Opposite sides, level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to 

the laboratory. 

• After 48 hours set, have the laboratory remove molds and place them in the fog room until 

testing in damp conditions. 

b. Execute one mortar test specimen for each 2,500 square feet of masonry wall constructed and 

minimum of one mortar test specimen for each date that masonry construction is performed. 

Test specimen at 28 days. 

c. Strength of mortar will be considered satisfactory if each mortar test equals or exceeds 1,500 

psi (this corresponds with type S, 2000 psi mortar mix as defined in the Contract Documents). 

d. In addition to the required information noted previously in this section, record the following 

information on the masonry mortar compression reports: 

• Mix design or mix designation. 

• Test sample number. 

• Specific wall areas covered by the test. 

• Description of units used to form the sample. 

• Tested compressive strength. 

3.09 Structural Inspection Specifications 

































1 copy 

1 copy 

3 copies 

as Required 

1 copy 

3.10 Structural Inspection Services Shall Include: 

Concrete Foundations and Slabs-on-Grade: 

a. Inspect foundations for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: 

• Concrete footing size and depth. 

• Footing rebar size, spacing and placement (cover). 

• Placement and vibration of concrete. 

• Dowel bar size, orientation, embedment and spacing. 

• Anchor bolt size, orientation, embedment and spacing. 

b. Inspect slabs-on-grade for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the 

following: 

• Preparation of subgrade. 

• Slab thickness. 

• Size, spacing, placement (cover) and lap of reinforcement, if applicable. 

• Size, spacing and placement of joint dowels. 

• Placement and finishing of concrete. 

• Time of saw cuts after placement of concrete. 

Masonry Walls: 

a. Inspect walls for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: 

• Placement of concrete masonry units (joint space, level, plumb). 

• Horizontal reinforcing, spacing and lap. 

• Vertical bar size, spacing and placement (spacing across width of wall) at walls and control 

joints. 

• Vertical bar laps. 





• Lift heights, placement and vibration of grout. 

b. Inspect bond beams for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: 

• Location. 

• Size, placement, and lap of reinforcing bars. 

• Placement and vibration of group. 

c. Inspect openings for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on following: 

• Types of concrete masonry units used to form lintels. 

• Reinforcing bar size and placement at lintels. 

• Stirrup size and spacing at lintels. 

• Vertical reinforcing size and placement at the door jambs. 

• Placement and vibration of grout in lintels and jambs. 

• Vertical reinforcing size and placement at door jambs. 

• Placement and vibration of gout in lintels and jambs. 

d. Inspect pilasters for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: 

• Vertical reinforcing size and placement. 

o Tie size and placement 

o Placement and vibration of grout. 

e. Inspect walls for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: 

• Spacing and grouting of embedded plates for joist bearing. 

• Spacing and grouting (or installation of Hilti anchors) of embedded plated for continuous 

angle attachment at roof perimeter. 

3.11 Structural Steel – (Flat Roof Building Design Projects Only): 

a. Inspection of columns, beams, joists and joist girders for compliance with Drawings and 

Specifications shall be by a structural engineer licensed in the state where the project is located. 

Report on the following: 

• Size. 

• Straightness. 

• Erection tolerances and bearing length. 

o Minimum 2-1/2 inch bearing length for joists. 

o Minimum 6 inches bearing length for joist girders. 

o Imperfections or damage. 

b. Inspection of bolted connections for placement and tightness shall be by a structural engineer 

licensed in the state where the project is located. High strength bolts shall be torque to a 

minimum value as shown in the specification for Structural Joists using A325 or A490 bolts. 

Report on the following: 

• 4 locations of joist girder to column connections shall be selected at random and checked. 

• 4 locations of beam to column connections shall be selected at random and checked. 

• 4 locations of column to footing connections shall be selected at random and checked. 

c. Inspect welded connections for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Welding 

inspection shall be done by a Welding Inspector certified by AWS in accordance with AWS QCI 

Standard and Guide for qualifications and certification for welding inspectors and meeting the 

qualifications required of AWS D1.1. Report on the following: 

• 10 locations of joist to joist girder welds shall be selected at random and visually inspected 

for length and size of weld. 

• 10 locations of joist girder to column welds, when applicable, shall be selected at random 

and visually inspected for length and size of weld. 





If approved by the Zone Construction Manager, the testing engineer shall verify the adequacy of the 

welds in question by means of ultrasonic inspection 

d. Inspect steel roof deck for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the 

following: 

• Select 6 random sheets for each type of deck used and inspect for deck thickness, type and 

material. 

• Inspect 10 percent of deck welds/connections over the entire roof area for size and spacing 

(CWI to perform inspection). 

• Inspect 10 percent of side lap connectors over the entire roof area for type, size and 

spacing for side al connectors. 






SECTION 01524 

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 



A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. This section includes procedural requirements for the following: 

1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste. 

2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 

3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste. 

B. The contractor is recommended, but not required, to follow these procedures. 


A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting 

from construction, remodeling, renovation or repair operations. Construction waste includes 

packaging. 

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective 

demolition operations. 

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, 

reuse or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation 

for reuse. 

E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another 

facility. 

F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation 

into the Work. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with 

requirements in Division 1 Section “Administrative Requirements.” Revise methods and 

procedures related to waste management. 

1. The contractor is recommended to review procedures for periodic waste collection and 

transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 

2. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 

PART 2 – NOT USED 

PART 3 – EXECUTION 

3.01 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION 

A. General: The Contractor is recommended, but not required, to implement waste management 

plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation and other items to implement 

waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure 

minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and 

used facilities. 

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are 

to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold. 

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - Page 1 of 2




2. Comply with Division 1 Sections for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and 

noise control. 

3.02 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL 

A. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for 

recycling waste materials shall accrue to contractor. 

B. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 

3.03 DISPOSAL OF WASTE 

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove 

waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable 

to authorities having jurisdiction. 

1. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and 

areas. 

B. Burning: Do not burn waste material. 

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner’s property and legally dispose of them. 


CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT 01524 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 01600 

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 



A. Substitution limitations and procedures. 

1.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 

A. Instructions to Bidders: specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the 

bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. 

B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution 

with Contract Documents. 

C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter: 

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level 

of the specified product. 

2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 

3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may be required for the 

Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 

4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become 

apparent. 

5. Will reimburse Owner and Owner's Representative for review or redesign services associated 

with re-approval by authorities. 

D. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 

1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one 

proposed substitution. 

2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed 

product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 

3. The Owner's Representative will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject 

request. 


NOT USED 


NOT USED 


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 01780 

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 

Refer to Invitation To Bid Section 22: Project Close-Out for closeout requirements. 


CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01780 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 02112 

CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPING 

PART 1 GENERAL: 

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 

A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to complete the clearing, grubbing 

and stripping as indicated by the drawings and as specified herein and shall include 

removing and disposing of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, logs, vegetation, rubbish and 

other objectionable matter from the project area. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT APPLICABLE 

PART 3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 

3.01 CLEARING 

A. Clear the project site of designated trees, stumps, brush, roots, logs, vegetation, rubbish, 

and objectionable material. 

3.02 GRUBBING 

A. Grub all stumps and roots to a depth of two and one half feet below natural ground. 

3.03 STRIPING 

A. Striping all area, which underlie compacted fill, of all humus, vegetation or other 

unsuitable materials encountered within the top 6 inches of soil. 

3.04 DISPOSAL 

A. Remove all materials from the clearing, grubbing, and stripping operation from the site 

when no disposal area is shown on the drawings, Burning will be allowed when not in 

violation with local ordinances; however, Contractor shall be held responsible for any fires 

or accidents resulting from this operation. 


CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPING 02112 – PAGE 1 OF 1




SECTION 02200 

EARTHWORK 


1.01 DESCRIPTION 

a. The extent of earthwork and site grading, including preparation of subgrade for 

pavements where shown on the drawings. The following operations are included in this 

section of the specifications: 

i. Preparation of subgrade, complete. 

ii. Compacted fill under and around paving. 

iii. Excavation and backfilling, complete, including the footings and miscellaneous 

items. 

iv. Testing and Inspection Service: The Owner shall employ and pay for a testing 

and inspection service. Testing service will include soil survey for satisfactory 

soil materials, sampling and testing soil materials proposed for use in the work, 

and field testing facilities for quality control testing during earthwork operations. 


a. References 


i. ASTM D698 - Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixture 

using 5.5 (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 inch (305 mm) Drop. 

ii. ASTM D2167 - Test Methods for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In Place by the 

Rubber Balloon Method. 

iii. Texas State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, referred to as 

THD, Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 

latest editions. 

iv. American Association of State Highways and Transportation Officials, referred to 

as AASHTO. 

a. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. 

1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING 

a. Material Storage: Stockpile excavated materials classified as satisfactory soil material 

where directed, until required for fill; place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper 

drainage. 



a. Fill: In accordance with drawings. 

EARTHWORK 02200 – Page 1 of 5





a. No additional requirements. 


3.01 PROTECTION 

a. Safety Codes and Standards: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for performing 

the work in a safe and workmanlike manner. The Contractor shall be responsible for 

familiarizing himself with and complying with all safety requirements of the governing 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

b. Existing Utilities: Locate existing utilities underground by careful excavation before 

starting earthwork operations. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from 

damage during construction operations. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping 

or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult the Architect immediately for 

directions as to procedure. Cooperate with Owner and public and private utility 

companies in keeping services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to 

satisfaction of utility owner. 

i. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the 

Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by Architect and then only 

after temporary utility services have been provided. 

c. Use of Explosives: Do not bring explosives onto site or use in work without the prior 

written permission of Architect. Contractor is solely responsible for the handling, storage, 

and use of explosive materials when their use is permitted. 

d. Protection of Persons and Property: 

3.02 EXCAVATION 

i. Barricade open excavations and post with warning lights as required for the 

safety of persons. Protect structures, utilities sidewalks, pavements, and other 

facilities immediately adjacent to excavations from damages caused by 

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and other hazards. 

ii. Take precautions and provide necessary bracing and shoring to guard against 

movement or settlement of existing improvements or new construction. 

Contractor is entirely responsible for strength and adequacy of bracing and 

shoring, and for safety and support of construction from damage or injury caused 

by lack thereof or by movement or settlement. 

a. Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of all material encountered to obtain 

required elevations. Excavations shall be made to proper depth, with allowances made 

for clearances to install services and forms. Cuts shall be accurately shaped to crosssections 

and grades indicated. 





i. Classification of Materials: Material to be excavated is unclassified. Contractor 

shall visit and determine for himself classification of the materials to be removed. 

NO EXTRA PAYMENT will be made for rock excavation. 

b. Unauthorized Excavation: Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of the material 

indicated below elevations without specific direction of the Architect. Replace 

unauthorized excavation as herein specified. Excavations from footing carried below 

elevations indicated on drawings shall be filled with specified footing type concrete at 

Contractor's expense. Excavations carried below the grades indicated for trenches shall 

be backfilled with suitable soil or select fill at Contractor's expense. 

c. Dewatering: 

i. Perform earthwork and site grading in a manner to prevent surface water and 

sub grade or ground water from flowing into excavations, and to prevent water 

from flooding the project site and surrounding area. 

ii. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove all water from 

excavations using dewatering methods, which will prevent softening of 

foundations bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to 

stability of the sub grades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, 

sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering components 

necessary to convey water away from the site. 

iii. Convey water removed from excavations and rainwater to collecting or runoff 

areas. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions. 

Do not use trench excavations for site utilities as temporary drainage ditches. 

d. In no case shall "water settling" or jetting be employed. 

3.03 BACKFILL AND FILL 

a. General: 

i. Backfill consists of the placement of specified backfill material in layers, in the 

excavations to the required sub grade elevations. 

ii. Fill consists of the placement of specified fill materials, in layers, over the ground 

surface to the required elevations. 

b. Backfill and Fill Materials: 

i. Provide satisfactory soil materials for backfill and fill. Use excavated or borrow 

material that has been sampled, tested, and approved as satisfactory backfill and 

fill material by the testing service. 

c. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in 

loose depth. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide 

the optimum moisture content of the soil material. Compact each layer to the required 

percentage of maximum density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill 

material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 





3.04 COMPACTION 

a. Perform the compaction of soil materials using suitable soil compaction equipment for the 

materials to be compacted and the work area locations. 

b. Control soil compaction during construction for compliance with percentage of maximum 

density specified for each area classification. 

c. Compaction Equipment: 

i. Provide compaction equipment of suitable size and number, and in satisfactory 

working condition to compete the work on schedule. 

ii. Use sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic tired roller, tamper rollers, vibrating tampers, 

pneumatic hand tampers, or other compaction equipment capable of obtaining 

the required density throughout the entire area being compacted. 

d. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: 

i. Buildings and Miscellaneous Structures: See Foundation Notes on drawing S-1. 

ii. Concrete Pavements: 

e. Moisture Control: 

i. Provide equipment capable of adding measured amounts of moisture to the soil 

material as determined by moisture density relation tests. Maintain the actual 

moisture content in the soil material at the time of compaction to within the limits 

specified for each area classification. 

ii. Where the sub grade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned 

before compaction, uniformly apply the required amount of water to the surface 

of sub grade, or layer of soil material, in such a manner as to prevent free water 

appearing in the surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. 

iii. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit 

compaction to specified percentage of maximum density. 

iv. Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction 

may be stockpiled or spread on the surface where directed by the Architect and 

permitted to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing, until the 

moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value, as determined by moisture 

density relation tests. When accepted by the Architect, the soil material may be 

used in compacted backfill or fill. 

3.05 GRADING AND DRAINAGE 

a. Uniformly grade all areas within the limits of site grading under this section, including 

adjacent transition areas. Smooth the finished surface within the specified tolerances, 

compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or 

between such points and existing grades. Where finish contour lines are not shown 

ground surfaces shall be finished to drain away from buildings and minor surfaces shall 

be finished. 





3.06 MAINTENANCE 

a. Protection of existing site: 

i. Carefully maintain benchmarks, monuments, layout stakes and other reference 

points. 

ii. Protect property, including adjoining property and public right-of-ways, from 

damage by trucks and equipment. 

b. Protection of graded Areas: 

i. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free of trash and 

debris. 

ii. Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to the 

specified tolerances. 

c. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: When completed compacted areas are disturbed by 

subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape and 

compact to the required density prior to further construction. Use hand tamping for 

recompaction over underground utilities, if any. 

3.07 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS 

a. Transport waste material, including excavated material classified as unsatisfactory soil 

material, trash, and debris to designate spoil areas on the Owner's property and dispose 

of as directed. 

b. Remove all waste materials, including excavated material classified as unsatisfactory soil 

material, trash, and debris, from the Owner's property and legally dispose of it. 


a. Submit test and inspection reports under provisions of Section 01400-Quality Requirements. 

b. Testing Laboratory Services: 

i. Tests for Proposed Soil Materials: The testing service will determine the suitability of 

all materials to be used as fills. Submit one moisture-density curve for each type of 

soil encountered in sub grade and used as fill. Determine maximum densities in 

accordance with ASTM D698, current issue. 

ii. Testing service must inspect and approve all sub grades and fill layers before further 

construction work is performed thereon. Each sub grade and fill layer shall be tested 

for in-place density and moisture content in accordance with ASTM D2167 at a 

frequency as defined in Section 01400 Quality Requirements. 

3.09 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE 

A. Contractor shall be responsible for additional work as may be required to correct work which 

does not conform to specified requirements, including density and tolerances. 






SECTION 02210 

SITE GRADING 


1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish shaping and 

grading indicated on the drawings and specified herein and shall include maintaining 

surface drainage during construction, finish grading and all phases of the cleanup 

operation. This specification is a performance specification and the performance of 

the completed work is the responsibility of the Contractor. 

B. The Contractor shall uniformly grade the entire project site to provide a pleasing 

appearance. 


PART 3 

CONSTRUCTION METHODS 

3.01 FINISHING SLOPES AND SURFACES 

A. The Contractor shall shape and grade the project site to conform to the proposed 

grade and/or sections shown on the drawings, and as directed by the Engineer. In 

any case, the Contractor shall grade the site to provide positive drainage away from 

buildings and towards roads and drainage facilities. The finished appearance shall be 

reasonably smooth and even (abrupt changes in slope shall not be used). The degree 

of finish for grading slopes shall be within a tolerance of 0.1 feet of plan grade* from 

either blade-grader operations, or by hand-shovel operations, as the Contractor may 

elect, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 

3.02 TOP SOIL 

A. See Section 02227 - Site and Parking Lot Excavation and Backfill for stockpiling 

topsoil and utilization of topsoil. 

3.03 CLEAN-UP 

A. The Contractor shall keep the site and structures free from accumulations of waste 

materials, debris, etc. caused by the work or his employees. Upon completion of the 

project and before requesting final inspection, the site and his work shall be "broom 

clean" or its equivalent. 

*NOTE: The Contractor shall provide finished grade 4" below plan grade in all turfed areas to allow for 

topsoil and sodding to finished plan grade. 


SITE GRADING 02210 – Page 1 of 1




SECTION 02225 

STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 



A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish the structural 

excavation required to complete the project. 

PART 2 MATERIALS 

2.01 GENERAL 

A. Structural excavation shall include all material encountered including earth, asphalt, 

base material, concrete, masonry, rock, trees, stumps, and roots. 

PART 3 EXECUTIONS 

3.01 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION EXCEEDING 5 FEET IN DEPTH: 

A. Excavation Safety: 

1. The Contractor's excavation safety procedures shall, in all respects, meet 

the current standards established by the U. S. Department of Labor, 

Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) on excavation, 

trenching and shoring. 

B. Responsibility: 

1. Contractor has the sole and exclusive responsibility for the sufficiency of the 

trench excavation safety systems utilized. 

2. The Contractor shall specifically agree that neither the Owner nor the 

Engineer has such responsibility, and Contractor will not rely on the Owner 

or the Engineer or any of their representatives for inspection, design, 

supervision, construction or any other aspect of trench excavation safety 

protection. 

3. Contractor shall fully indemnify, safe and hold harmless Owner and 

Engineer, their employees and agents (hereinafter the Indemnities) against 

any and all liability, damage, loss, claims, demands and actions of any 

nature whatsoever on account of personal injuries (including, without 

limitation on the foregoing, workers' compensation and death claims), or 

property loss or damage of any kind whatsoever, which arise out of or are in 

any manner connected with, or are claimed to arise out of or be in any way 

connected with, the negligence of the Contractor in the inspection, design, 

engineering, supervision, construction, safety devices or other activity 

connected with the trench excavation safety protection under this 

Agreement. 

4. Contractor shall, at his own expense, investigate all such claims and 

demands, attend to their settlement or other disposition, defend all actions 

based thereon and pay all charges of attorneys and all other costs and 

expenses of any kind arising from any such liability, damage, loss, claims 

demands, and actions. 

STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02225 – Page 1 of 4




3.02 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION 5 FEET OR LESS IN DEPTH: 

A. GENERAL: 

1. The limit of excavation shall be such to allow for placing and removing forms, 

installing sheeting, shoring, bracing, etc. The Contractor shall pile excavated 

material in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid 

obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Gutters shall be kept clear. 

B. VERTICAL SIDES: 

1. When necessary to protect existing or proposed structures or other 

improvements, the Contractor shall maintain vertical sides of the excavation. 

2. The limit shall not exceed three feet outside the footing on a vertical plane 

parallel to the footing except where specifically approved otherwise by the 

Engineer. 

3. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring and bracing as 

necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, 

structures, equipment, trees, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for the 

design and adequacy of all sheeting, shoring, and bracing. 

4. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed as the excavation is 

backfilled in such a manner as to prevent injurious caving. 

C. SLOPING SIDES: 

1. Where sufficient space is available, the Contractor shall be allowed to back 

slope the sides of the excavation. 

2. The back slope shall be such that the excavation shall be safe from caving. 

3. The type of material being excavated shall govern the back slope used. The 

Contractor shall be responsible for determining the back slope used, but in 

any case the back slope shall be no steeper than 1 foot horizontal to 1 foot 

vertical. 

3.03 CONSTRUCTION METHODS 

A. DEWATERING 

1. The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from water by use of 

cofferdams, bailing, pumping, well point, or any combination as the particular 

situation may warrant. 

2. All dewatering devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide 

clearance for construction, removal of forms, and inspection of exterior of 

form work. 

3. It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a firm 

dry bed. The foundation bed shall be kept in a dewatered condition a 

sufficient period of time to insure the safety of the structure, but in no case 

shall dewatering be terminated sooner than 7 days after placing concrete. All 

dewatering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the 

Engineer. 

4. The excavation shall be protected from excessive rainfall and drying. The 

excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before work on 

the structure is started. 

5. It is the intent of these specifications that the Contractor provide a relatively 

smooth, firm foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the 

undisturbed earth without additional cost to the Owner, regardless of the 

soil conditions encountered. The Engineer will be the judge as to whether 

these conditions have been met. 

6. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not 

endanger the work. 





B. UNAUTHORIZED OVEREXCAVATION 

1. Excavation for slabs, footings, etc., that bear on earth shall not be carried 

below the elevation shown on the drawings. 

2. In the event the excavation is carried on below the indicated elevation, the 

Contractor shall bring the slab, footing, etc., to the required grade by filling 

with concrete having a minimum compressive strength of at least 3000 p.s.i. 

at 28 days. 

C. BACKFILL MATERIAL 

1. General: 

a. Suitable material chosen from the excavation shall be used for 

backfill. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, 

which will not readily break down under compaction. 

b. This material will be subject to approval by the Engineer. 

c. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous 

material. 

2. Excavated materials, which are to be used for, fill or backfill may be 

stockpiled on the site. The Engineer shall approve location of stockpiles. 

3. Top soil should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading around 

structure. 

4. Fiberglass Manholes and Wetwells: 

a. Sand shall be used for backfill around manholes and/or wetwells 

for a distance of 2 feet from the outside surface and extending from 

the bottom of the excavation to the bottom of the top slab. 

b. Suitable material (as set out above) chosen from the excavation 

may be used for the remainder of the backfill. 

c. Location of stockpiles shall be approved by the Engineer. 

D. SCHEDULE OF BACKFILLING 

1. Concrete and Masonry Structures: 

a. The Contractor shall begin backfilling of concrete structures no 

sooner than 7 days but no later than 14 days, after they are 

cast. 

b. The Contractor shall backfill brick and mortar structures after they 

have been in place at least 3 days. 


a. The Contractor may begin backfilling of manholes and/or wetwells 

as soon as the concrete has been allowed to cure and any forms 

are removed. 

E. BACKFILL 

1. General: 

a. Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than 9 inches (loose 

measure) and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor 

Density A.S.T.M. Specification D-698. Flooding will NOT be permitted. 

Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging 

action against the structure. 


a. Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than 6 inches (loose 

measure) and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor 

Density. Flooding will NOT be permitted. Backfill shall be placed in 

such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the structure. 




Version: December 2010a 

F. EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIAL 

1. All excess and/or unsuitable excavated material shall be loaded and hauled off 

the Contractor. 






SECTION 02226 

PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 



A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish the pipe trench 

excavation for all piping required to complete the project. This specification is a performance 

specification and the performance of the completed work is the responsibility of the 

Contractor. 

PART 2 

PRODUCTS 

2.01 GENERAL: 

A. Trench excavation shall include all material encountered including dirt, asphalt, base 

material, concrete, masonry, rock, trees, stumps and roots. Trench excavation will not be 

measured. 


3.01 TRENCHES EXCEEDING 5 FEET IN DEPTH: 

A. TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY: 

3.02 RESPONSIBILITY: 

1. The Contractor's trench excavation safety procedures shall, in all respects, meet the 

current standards established by the U. S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and 

Health Administration (OSHA) on excavation, trenching and shoring. 

A. Contractor has the sole and exclusive responsibility for the sufficiency of the trench 

excavation safety systems utilized. 

B. The Contractor shall specifically agree that neither the Owner nor the Engineer has such 

responsibility, and Contractor will not rely on the Owner or the Engineer or any of their 

representatives for inspection, design, supervision, construction or any other aspect of trench 

excavation safety protection. 

C. Contractor shall fully indemnify, safe and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, their 

employees and agents (hereinafter the Indemnities) against any and all liability, damage, 

loss, claims, demands and actions of any nature whatsoever on account of personal injuries 

(including, without limitation on the foregoing, workers' compensation and death claims), or 

property loss or damage of any kind whatsoever, which arise out of or are in any manner 

connected with, or are claimed to arise out of or be in any way connected with, the 

negligence of the Contractor in the inspection, design, engineering, supervision, construction, 

safety devices or other activity connected with the trench excavation safety protection under 

this Agreement. 

D. Contractor shall, at his own expense, investigate all such claims and demands, attend to their 

settlement or other disposition, defend all actions based thereon and pay all charges of 

attorneys and all other costs and expenses of any kind arising from any such liability, 

damage, loss, claims demands, and actions. 

PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02226 - Page 1 of 4




3.03 TRENCHES 5 FEET OR LESS IN DEPTH: 

A. The Contractor shall maintain vertical sides of the trench. The minimum and maximum width 

of trench is set out on the Drawings. 

B. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring and bracing as necessary to 

provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, trees, etc. 

The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and adequacy of all shoring, bracing and 

sheeting. The Contractor shall remove shoring, bracing and sheeting, as the excavation is 

backfilled, in such a manner as to prevent injurious caving. 

3.04 CONSTRUCTION METHODS 

A. The Contractor shall schedule the excavation of pipe trenches at such times and in such 

sequence as to present the least interference with other items of the work and the operation 

of the existing facilities. 

B. The Contractor shall place excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work, 

and will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Gutters shall be kept clear. 

3.05 UNAUTHORIZED OVEREXCAVATION: 

A. If the Contractor should excavate below the proposed trench grade (without authorization of 

the Engineer) the Contractor shall correct the grade by filling in with cement stabilized sand 

or crushed stone embedment as shown on the drawings. 

3.06 TREES, STUMPS OR ROOTS: 

A. Where trees, stumps or roots are encountered, and they shall be removed and disposed of 

by the Contractor. Roots shall be cut off flush with the sides of the trench. 

3.07 ROCKS, BOULDERS, EXISTING STRUCTURES, ETC.: 

A. Where rocks, boulders, existing structures or other unsuitable soil conditions are 

encountered, they shall be removed by the Contractor to a depth of 12 inches below the 

grade line for the full width of the trench and refilled with cement or crushed stone 

embedment. 

3.08 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW IN SEWERS AND DRAINS: 

A. The Contractor shall made adequate provision for maintaining the flow of sewers and drains 

encountered during construction. 

3.09 DEWATERING: 

A. The Contractor shall keep the pipe trench free from water by use of bailing, pumping, well 

points or any combination as the particular situation may warrant. It is the intent of these 

specifications to install pipe on a firm dry bed. 

B. All dewatering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The 

cessation of the dewatering operation will be accomplished during a sufficient period of time 

to insure that there is no displacement of the pipe due to unequal hydrostatic pressure. 

3.10 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM: 

A. When the soil encountered at the established bedding grade is quicksand, muck or similar 

unsuitable material, the Contractor shall proceed as follows: 





1. All unstable soil shall be removed to a depth of 2 feet below bottom of pipe for pipe 2 

feet or more in diameter, and to a depth equal to the diameter of pipe for pipe less 

than 2 feet in diameter. 

2. Such excavation shall be carried at least one foot beyond the horizontal limits of the 

pipe on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable 

material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer, and 

each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by tamping as required to 

provide a stable foundation for the structure. 

3.11 UNYIELDING TRENCH BOTTOM: 

A. When the soil encountered at the established bedding grade is ledge rock, rocking or gravelly 

soil, hard pan or other unyielding material, such materials shall be removed prior to bedding 

the pipe. These materials shall be excavated for a minimum of 6 inches below the bottom 

of the pipe and shall be replaced with crushed stone embedment. 

3.12 SHAPING TRENCH BOTTOM: 

A. The bottom of the trench shall be undercut for bedding to support the bottom quadrant 

uniformly and for its entire length. Provide bell holes for couplings. The pipe shall be bedded 

in a foundation of stable material as shown in the project drawings and accurately shaped 

to fit the lower part of the pipe exterior. 

3.13 BACKFILL MATERIAL: 

A. General: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, suitable granular material chosen from 

the excavation shall be used for final backfill. The granular material chosen shall be free of 

large lumps, or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. Backfill material 

shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. Material will be subject to approval 

by the Engineer. In areas not under existing or proposed pavement, the last 6 inches of 

backfill shall be topsoil. 

B. Select Backfill Material: When "select" backfill material is shown on the drawings, it shall be 

granular in nature, free of large clods, and have a plasticity index (P.I.) of less than 15. 

3.14 INITIAL BACKFILL: 

A. Initial backfill is defined as that granular backfill from the bottom of the trench to 1 foot above 

the top of the pipe and shall be select. 

B. The Contractor shall place initial granular backfill bedding in maximum 8-inch layers (loose 

measure) and mechanically compact it to a density between 90% and 95% of the maximum 

density as determined by ASTM D-698 with a moisture content near optimum. 

C. Granular backfill below the top of the pipe shall be placed and compacted along the sides of 

the pipe equally to prevent strain on or displacement of the pipe. 

3.15 FINAL BACKFILL: 

A. General: Final backfill is defined as that granular backfill from 1 foot above the top of the pipe 

to finished subgrade, pavement underside or ground line. In areas not under proposed 

pavement, where the site soils are not granular, backfill with granular material and the last 6 

inches of backfill shall be topsoil. See project drawings for special requirements under 

sidewalks and paved areas. 





B. Mechanically Tamped: The Contractor shall place final granular backfill in maximum 8-inch 

layers (loose measure) and mechanically compact it to a density between 90% and 95% of 

the maximum density ASTM D-698 with a moisture content near optimum. 

C. Water Tamped: Not permissible in this project. 

3.16 SAND EMBEDMENT: 

A. When sand embedment is required on the drawings, the material used for sand shall be 

"builders sand", sandy loam, or other sand material that shall contain no more than 25% clay 

and shall be free of rock, lumps or clods. 

B. The Engineer shall be the judge as to the suitability of a material for use as sand embedment. 

C. Sand embedment shall be used only when the excavated material is not suitable for use as 

sand embedment. 

D. If the trench bottom is in a soil that conforms to the requirements for sand embedment the 

6 inches below the pipe need not be undercut. 

3.17 CRUSHED STONE EMBEDMENT: 

A. When crushed stone embedment is required on the drawings, the material used for 

embedment shall be angular crushed stone, in the general size range of 3/4" to 1/16" which 

has good stability. Crushed stone shall be graded in accordance with Size #67 or #68 of 

AASHTO M 43, ASTM D 448. 

3.18 CONCRETE EMBEDMENT: 

A. Concrete Embedment: When concrete embedment is required on the drawings, the concrete 

shall conform to Section 03300. Concrete embedment shall be allowed to cure for at least 24 

hours before placing initial backfill and at least 48 hours before placing final backfill unless 

approved otherwise by the Engineer. 

3.19 EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIAL: 

A. Excess and Unsuitable Material: All excess and/or unsuitable excavated material shall be 

loaded and hauled offsite by the Contractor and disposed of in a legal manner. 






SECTION 02227 

PARKING LOT EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 



A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish the site and parking lot 

excavation, subgrade preparation and backfill required to complete the project. This 

specification is a performance specification and the performance of the completed work is 

the responsibility of the Contractor. 

B. Comprehensive item for excavation and earthwork (dig up, move, use, remove, haul 

dispose) for all classes of material within site and parking lot area. Construct, shape, and 

finish all earthwork to specified line and grade. Compact earth subgrade where shown on 

plans, as cut section or embankment. Excess and waste becomes contractor's property 

unless otherwise specified. Contractor to furnish any borrow needed unless otherwise 

specified. Furnish and place topsoil where called for on plans. Excavate for side street 

transitions and nonconcrete driveway adjustments. 


PART 3 EXECUTION / CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 

3.01 STRIPPING AND EXCAVATION: 

A. Strip top 6" in all areas to underlie compacted fill, curbs, base or pavement, by removing 

all humus, vegetation, other unsuitable materials. 

B. Remove existing trees, shrubs, fences, curb, gutter, sidewalk, drives, paving and 

structures within graded area which interfere with new construction or finished grade. 

C. Stockpile topsoil as defined in Section 02210 for future use in top 4" to provide finish 

grades as shown on grading plan. 

D. Dispose of silt, muck, organic materials and debris. Do not use in project. 

3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION: 

A. Cut or build embankment in compacted layers, finish to specified line and grade. 

B. Maintain moisture and density until covered by base. 

C. Dig out soft or wet areas found at any time, replace with suitable material, recompact 

(especially utility trenches). 

3.03 CURB BACKFILL AND TOP SOIL: 

A. Compact earth behind curbs without delay after curb completion. 

B. Top 3" (where disturbed by construction or where unsatisfactory material is exposed by 

excavation) of finished earth grade shall be top soil as defined in Section 02210 excavated 

from the site. No excessive clods. 

PARKING LOT EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02227 - Page 1 of 2




3.04 EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIAL: 

A. All excess and/or unsuitable excavated material shall be loaded and hauled offsite by the 

Contractor and disposed of in a legal manner. 


PARKING LOT EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 02227 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 02228 

SITE EXCAVATION AND FILL 



A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for excavation and fill required to 

obtain the finished site grades shown on the drawings necessary to complete the project. 

This specification is a performance specification and the performance of the completed 

work is the responsibility of the Contractor. 

PART 2 PRODUCTS / MATERIALS 

2.01 GENERAL 

A. No excavated asphalt, base material, concrete, masonry, rock, trees, stumps and roots 

shall be used for fill. Only excavated material defined in Section 02200. 

2.02 BALANCE OF CUT AND FILL 

A. The excavation (of suitable materials) and fill does not balance. The Contractor shall haul 

in suitable material or haul off excess material to provide the finished line and grades 

shown in the plans. 

PART 3 EXECUTION / CONSTRUCTION METHODS 

3.01 GENERAL 

A. The Contractor shall accomplish all site excavation as required to conform to the grades 

and sections shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall use suitable material taken 

from the site excavation, ditch excavation, street excavation and parking lot excavation to 

fill the site as required to conform to the grades and sections shown on the drawings. 

3.02 TOP SOIL 

A. The Contractor shall schedule his operation so that the majority of the top soil excavated 

will be spread as the top layer of fill. 

3.03 SHAPING AND GRADING 

A. “See Section 02210 "Site Grading". 


SITE EXCAVATION AND FILL 02228 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 02245 

LIME STABILIZED SUB-GRADE 



A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide the lime slurry 

treatment for the subgrade when required by the drawings. Application of dry lime 

shall not be allowed. This specification is a performance specification and the 

performance of the completed work is the responsibility of the Contractor. 

PART 2 PRODUCETS / MATERIAL 

2.01 HYDRATED LIME: 

2.02 WATER: 

A. Hydrated lime shall be a standard brand conforming to the requirements of Item 264, 

Type A, of the Texas Highway Department Standard Specifications. 

A. Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, alkali, organic 

matter and other substances deleterious to the lime or lime-base mixture. 

2.03 LIME SLURRY: 

A. Lime slurry shall conform to the requirements of Item 264, Type B, Grade 2 of the 

Texas Highway Department Standard Specification. 


3.01 EQUIPMENT 

A. Any combination of equipment may be used that will produce a uniform lime subgrade 

mixture, free from loose or segregated areas and of uniform density and moisture. 

B. Tamping rollers 

1. Tamping rollers, sheeps foot type, shall consist of one or more units. 

2. Each unit shall consist of watertight cylindrical drum not less than 60 inches 

in length, surrounded by metal studs with tamping feet projecting not less 

than 7 inches from the surface of the drum and spaced not less than 6 

inches nor more than 10 inches apart, measured diagonally from center to 

center. 

3. The tamping feet shall be an approved type suitable for compacting 

subgrade courses. Each unit shall be equipped with a suitable device for 

cleaning the tamping feet. 

4. The rolling units of multiple-type tamping rollers shall be pivoted on the main 

frame in a manner that will permit the units to adapt themselves to uneven 

ground surface and to rotate independently. 

5. When fully loaded, the rollers shall produce a pressure of at least 750 pounds 

per square inch on the combined areas of the tamping feet in contact with the 

ground. 

LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE 02245 – Page 1 of 4




C. Three-Wheel General Purpose Rollers: 

1. Shall be self propelled, weighing not less than 10 tons and having a minimum 

compression of 300 pounds per inch width of rear wheel. The wheels of the 

rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers. 

D. Pneumatic-Tired Rollers 

1. Shall be single or double axle vibrating or non-inflated type, equipped with tires 

of equal size and diameter, uniformly inflated, so that the air pressure of the 

several tires shall not vary more than 5 pounds per square inch. 

2. Rollers may be self-propelled or towed by a suitably powered unit. The selfpropelled 

roller, or the power unit and towed roller shall be considered a 

pneumatic-tired roller unit. 

a. Light Pneumatic-Tired Rollers shall have two axles on which are 

mounted not less than 9 pneumatic-tired wheels in such a manner that 

the rear group of tires will not follow in the tracks of the forward group. 

The axles shall be mounted in a rigid frame provided with a loading 

platform or body suitable for ballast loading. The roller shall develop a 

compression of not less than 225 pounds per inch width of the tire 

tread and shall be capable of being unloaded to loads up to 300 

pounds per inch of nominal tire width. The rollers shall be weighed as 

directed. 

b. Heavy Pneumatic-Tired Rollers shall be of the vibratory or nonvibratory 

type with a minimum loading of 25,000 pounds per tire. The 

tires shall be suitable for inflation to not less than 90 p.s.i. The loading 

shall be distributed equally to all wheels. 

C. Tractors: Tractors shall be of the type suitable for compacting these courses. 

D. Blade Graders 

E. Scarifiers 

1. Blade graders shall have a wheelbase of not less than 15 feet and a blade of not 

less than 10 feet and shall be self-propelled. 

1. Scarifiers shall have two rows and the teeth in each row shall not be more than 

8-inches apart. The rows of teeth shall be staggered so that the teeth furrows 

will not be more than 4-inches apart. 

F. Lime Slurry Equipment 

1. The plan and equipment for the preparation and application of the lime slurry 

shall be approved prior to commencement of the work. Plant and equipment for 

the preparation of lime slurry shall be located as directed by the Engineer. 

3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS: 

A. No slurry shall be applied except when the air temperature is at least 40 degrees F in the 

shade and is rising. 





B. No slurry shall be applied to a sub grade that is frozen or contains frost. If the air 

temperature falls below 35 degrees F in the shade, completed lime-treated areas shall be 

protected by approved methods against any detrimental effects or freezing. 

C. Uncompacted soil-lime mixtures that are wet by rain so that the average moisture content 

at the time of compaction exceeds the tolerance specified shall be dried by aeration or 

other approved methods until the moisture content within the specified limits is obtained. 

3.03 SCARIFYING AND PRELIMINARY MIXING: 

A. Prior to the application of lime slurry the sub grade shall be scarified and thoroughly 

pulverized and mixed. 

B. Applications: Lime slurry shall be applied only on that area where the mixing operations 

can be completed the same day. 

3.04 SLURRY PLACING: 

A. The lime slurry shall be placed by trucks equipped with approved distributors, and an 

agitator that will keep the lime and water in a consistent mixture. 

B. The distribution of lime at the rate specified shall be attained by successive passes over a 

measured section or area until the proper lime and moisture content has been secured. 

3.05 RATE OF APPLICATION: 

3.06 MIXING: 

A. The rate of application of lime treatment of the natural subgrade shall be determined by 

the Eades and Grim pH Test procedure, but shall not exceed 7.0% by dry weight. The 

optimum moisture shall be maintained within 2%. 

A. The mixing procedure shall be as hereinafter described: 

1. First Mixing: 

a. The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road 

mixers or other approved equipment, and the mixing continued until, in 

the opinion of the Engineer, a homogeneous, friable mixture of material 

and lime is obtained, free from all clods or lumps. 

b. Materials containing plastic clays or other material which will not readily 

mix with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of 

the lime application, brought to the proper moisture content and left to 

cure 72 hours or as directed by the Engineer. 

c. During the curing period, the material shall be kept moist as directed. 

2. Final Mixing: 

a. After the required curing time, the material shall be uniformly mixed by 

approved methods. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, they 

shall be reduced in size by raking, blading, discing, harrowing, 

scarifying or the use of other approved pulverization methods so that, 

when all nonslaking aggregates retained on the No. 4 sieve are 

removed, the remainder of the material shall meet the following 

requirements when tested in the field by laboratory sieves: 





PERCENT 

Minimum Passing 1" Sieve 100 

Minimum Passing No. 4 Sieve 60 

b. Old bituminous wearing surface shall be pulverized so that 100% will 

pass a 2" sieve. 

c. During the interval of time between applications and mixing, hydrated 

lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of 6 hours or 

more or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing will not be 

accepted for payment. 

3.07 COMPACTION: 

A. Compaction shall be in layers (6" maximum-loose measure) to the uniform density as 

shown on the drawings. 

B. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing and in no case later 

than 3 calendar days after final mixing, unless approval is obtained from the Engineer. 

C. The material shall be aerated or sprinkled as necessary to provide the optimum moisture. 

D. Compaction shall begin at the bottom ad shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is 

uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. 

E. If the total thickness of the material to be treated cannot be mixed in one operation, the 

previously mixed material shall be bladed to a windrow just beyond the area to be treated 

and the next layer mixed with lime as previously specified. The first layer of the treated 

material shall be compacted in such a manner that the treated material will not be mixed 

with the underlying material. 

F. After compaction and shaping the surface shall be kept wet until the paving is applied to 

seal the sub grade. 

3.08 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES: 

A. SURFACE TEST: 

1. After the sub grade is completely compacted to required density, the surface 

shall be tested for smoothness and accuracy of grade as hereinabove set out. If 

any portions are found to lack required smoothness or failing accuracy of grade 

or crown, such portions shall be scarified, reshaped, recompacted and otherwise 

manipulated until the required smoothness and accuracy is obtained. The 

Contractor under the supervision of the Engineer shall make these tests. 

2. Density: Field density tests will be taken in accordance with the provisions as set 

out in Section 01400 Quality Requirements. 






SECTION 02282 

TERMITE CONTROL 



A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. Provide soil treatment for termite control, as herein specified. 


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. 


A. In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions 

and recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and application. 

B. Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of 

governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution. 

C. Use only termiticides which bear a Federal registration number of the U.S. Environmental 

Protection Agency. 

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS 

A. Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading 

operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. 

B. To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during 

inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant 

manufacturer. 

1.06 SPECIFIC PRODUCT WARRANTY 

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01780. Furnish written warranty certifying that applied 

soil termiticide treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites and, that if 

subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re-treat soil 

and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 

1. Bid Alternate: At the Owner's option, at the termination of the guarantee, an 

extension renewal of inspections and service treatment shall be made available to 

Owner. 

TERMITE CONTROL 02282 - Page 1 of 2





2.01 SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION 

A. Use an emulsible concentrate termiticide for dilution with water, specially formulated to 

prevent infestation by termites. Fuel oil will not be permitted as a diluent. Provide a solution 

consisting of one of following chemical elements and concentrations: 

1. Chloropyrifos ("Dursban TC"); 1.0 percent in water emulsion. 

2. Permathrin ("Dragnet", "Torpedo"); 0.5 percent in water emulsion. 

B. Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator if also acceptable to Architect 

and approved for intended application by jurisdictional authorities. Use only soil treatment 

solutions which are not injurious to planting. 


3.01 APPLICATION 

A. Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of 

treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake and level soil to be treated, except previously 

compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placement 

of compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer. 

B. Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows: 

C. Under slab-on-grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed, using the 

following rates of application: 

1. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. to soil in critical areas under slab, 

including entire inside perimeter inside of foundation walls, along both sides of 

interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, 

and around interior column footers. 

2. Apply one gallon of chemical solution per 10 sq. ft. as an overall treatment under slab 

and attached slab areas where fill is soil or unwashed gravel. Apply 1-1/2 gallons of 

chemical solution to areas where fill is washed gravel or other coarse absorbent 

material. 

3. Apply 4 gallons of chemical solution per 10 lin. ft. of trench, for each foot of depth 

from grade to footing, along outside edge of building. Dig a trench 6" to 8" wide 

along outside of foundation to a depth of not less than 12". Punch holes to top of 

footing at not more than 12" o.c. and apply chemical solution. Mix chemical solution 

with the soil as it is being replaced in trench. 

D. At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated, apply at rate of 4 

gals. per 10 lin. ft. of penetration. 

E. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that soil termiticide treatment has been 

applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. 

F. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape 

grading, or other construction activities following application. 


TERMITE CONTROL 02282 - Page 2 of 2



Version: Version: January 2012 

SECTION 02370 

DRILLED PIER FOUNDATIONS 


1.01 WORK INCLUDED 

a. Bored end bearing cast-in-place concrete piers with reinforcing steel. 

1.02 RELATED WORK 

a. Appendix A - Soil Investigation Data: Soil report. 

b. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. 

c. Section 02200 - Earthwork: Cut and fill to specified level and/or designated bearing 

elevation. 

d. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Specifications for concrete. 




a. Test Reports: Reports of all tests and inspections shall be forwarded to the Owner, the 

Architect, the Structural Engineer and the Contractor. Reports of tests shall state 

whether or not tests conform with contract documents. 

1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING 




a. Concrete Materials and Mix: Specified in Section 03300 and on drawings. 

b. Steel Casing: Of sufficient strength, diameter, length and construction to meet 

construction requirements as to safety and prevention of caving of soil and water 

penetration. 



DRILLED PIER FOUNDATIONS 02370 Page 1 of 3





3.01 PRECAUTIONS 

a. General Contractor shall employ drilling contractors who have adequate equipment to 

perform the required work. 

b. Make certain the drilling contractor is aware of the project requirements, unit prices, and 

the need to properly staff the work to meet the construction schedule. 

c. Make certain the drilling contractor is aware of all active underground utility lines. 

d. Where overhead power lines exist, observe proper clearances required by utility 

company. 


a. Drill concentric pier shafts. 

b. Clean pier bearing surface utilizing drilling equipment to expose a bearing surface free of 

loose material. Provide for the protection of workmen when in excavation according to 

OSHA requirements. Pier bearing shall be free of standing water, foreign matter, or 

loose material. 

c. Allow inspection of pier shafts prior to reinforcing steel and concrete placement. Prevent 

foreign matter from falling into pier hole. 

d. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with Section 03300. 

e. Place concrete within eight (8) hours after pier hole is cleaned and in accordance with 

Section 03300. Use equipment designed for vertical placement of concrete. Vibrate 

concrete full depth of pier. 

f. Provide dowels for connection plinth and grade beams. 

g. Place concrete through a temporary casing if an inflow of subsurface water occurs. Place 

concrete to height sufficient to effect seal. 


a. The Special Inspector will inspect construction periodically throughout the various work 

stages, as defined in Chapter 17 of the IBC. In addition, the Special Inspector prior to the 

placing of concrete will inspect the formwork and placement of reinforcement. 

b. Notify the Architect and Owner's testing agency at least 72 hours in advance, excluding 

Saturday and Sunday, before drilling piers. 

3.04 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 

a. Provide continuous inspection of pier drilling operations to ascertain compliance with 

requirements of Contract Documents. 





b. Determine that proper bearing strata is obtained and utilized for bearing and that shafts 

are properly clean and dry before placing concrete. 

c. Notify Architect if soil or water conditions require casing of piers. 

d. Prepare and submit inspection reports of pier drilling which shall contain following: 

i. Pier mark with location as established on the drawings, using grid lines as 

references. 

ii. Pier diameter and bell size. 

iii. Pier bearing elevation (depth) as calculated from finish floor elevation. 

iv. Depth of penetration into bearing strata. 

v. Condition of bottom of excavation. 

vi. Plumbness deviation. 

vii. Description of unusual conditions encountered, including ground water and if 

casing was used, size and depth of casing. 

viii. Size, number and length of rebar placed. 

ix. Record of deviations from Contract Document requirements. 

e. Perform concrete testing in accordance with Section 01400 Quality Requirements. 


a. Maximum: 1" in l0' from vertical for plumb piers. 

b. Top: Maximum 2 inches from location indicated. 

3.06 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE 

A. Contractor shall be responsible for additional work as may be required to correct work, which 

does not conform to specified requirements, including strength and tolerances. 






SECTION 02480 

LANDSCAPING 


1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 



1.02 SUMMARY: 

A. This section includes provisions for the following items: 

1. Preparation and excavation of planting beds. 

2. Planting of trees, shrubs, sod, seed, and associated materials. 

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: 

A. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 

1. Excavation, filling, and fine and finish grading required establishing elevations 

shown on drawings. 

1.04 UTILITIES: 

A. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner that will avoid 

possible damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes set by others until 

removal is mutually agree upon by parties concerned. 

1.05 REFERENCES: 

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 

1. ANSI Z60.1 - American Standard for Nursery Stock 

B. American Sod Producer Association (ASPA) 

C. American Nursery and Landscape Association (ANLA) 

D. Erosion Control Technology Council (ECTC) 


2.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 

A. Condition of new plant materials is responsibility of Contractor and shall be approved by 

Owner. Owner reserves right to inspect and reject plants at any time and place. 

B. Measure plants when branches are in their normal position. 

C. Trees and shrubs shall meet requirements for spread, height, or container size stated in 

The Drawings. 

1. Measurements shall be taken from ground level to average height of shrub and 

not to longest branch. 

2. Height and spread dimensions specified herein refer to main body of trees 

measured from crown of roots to tip of top branch. 

D. Caliper measurements shall be taken at point on tree trunk 6 inches above natural ground 

line for trees up to 4 inches in caliper, and at point 12 inches above natural ground line for 

trees exceeding 4 inches in caliper. 

E. If range of sizes is given, no plant shall be less than minimum size, and at least 50 percent 

of plants shall be as large as upper half of range specified. 

F. Measurements specified are minimum size acceptable and, where pruning is required, are 

measurements after pruning. 

G. Subcontractors: 

1. Subcontract landscape work to a single firm specializing in landscape work. 

LANDSCAPING 02480 - Page 1 of 11




H. Sources: 

1. Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing 

authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. 

2. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, 

submit proof of non-availability to Architect, together with proposal for use of 

equivalent material. 

3. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer's 

certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory 

made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official 

Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable. 

4. Sandy Loam: Before delivery of sandy loam, furnish Architect with written 

statement giving location of properties from which sandy loam is to be obtained. 

5. Trees, Shrubs and Plants: Provide trees, shrubs, and plants of quantity, size, 

genus, species, and variety shown and scheduled for landscape work and 

complying with recommendations and requirements of ANSI Z60.1 "American 

Standard for Nursery Stock". Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown in 

recognized nursery in accordance with good horticultural practice and free of 

disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun-scald, injuries, 

abrasions, or disfigurement. 

6. Inspection: The Architect may inspect trees and shrubs either at place of growth 

or at site before planting, for compliance with requirements for genus, species, 

variety, size, and quality. Architect retains right to further inspect trees and 

shrubs for size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and 

latent defects, and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time 

during progress of work. Remove rejected trees of shrubs immediately from 

project site. 

2.02 SUBMITTALS: 

A. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division Specification 

Sections. 

1. Plant and Material Certifications: 

a) Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities 

b) Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and 

fertilizer materials. 

B. Planting Schedule: 

1. Proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type of landscape work 

during normal seasons for such work in area of site. 

C. Maintenance Instructions: 

1. Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner 

for maintenance of landscape work for one full year. 

2. Instructions shall address; trees, shrubs, ground cover and lawns. 

2.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 

A. Packaged materials 

1. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis, and name of 

manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while 

stored at site. 

2.04 PLANT MATERIALS: 

A. Plant material (trees and shrubs) shall conform to requirements of ANSI Z60.1 of rules and 

grading upgraded to meet the following: 

Plants shall be of selected specimen quality, exceptionally heavy, symmetrical, 

tightly knit, so trained or favored in their development and appearance as to be superior in 

form, number of branches, compactness and symmetry. Plants shall have normal habit or 

sound, healthy, vigorous plants with well developed root system. 

Plants shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae. 

Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. 





Trees with abrasion of bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots, or fresh cuts of limbs over 1 1/4-inch, 

which have not completely calloused, shall be rejected. 

Plants shall be typical of their species or variety and shall have normal habit of growth and be 

legibly tagged with proper name. Plants shall have been grown under climatic conditions 

similar to those of site or have been acclimated to such condition for at least 2 years. 

Root system of each plant shall be well-provided with fibrous roots. Parts shall be sound, healthy, 

vigorous, well-branched, and densely foliated when in leaf. 

Plants designated ball and burlap shall be moved with root systems as solid units with balls of earth 

firmly wrapped with burlap and comply with the following: 

a. Diameter and depth of balls of earth shall be sufficient to encompass 

fibrous root feeding systems necessary for healthy development of plant. 

b. No plant shall be accepted when ball of earth surrounding its roots has 

been badly cracked or broken preparatory to or during process of 

planting. Balls shall remain intact during all operations. 

c. Plants that cannot be planted at once shall be heeled-in by setting in 

ground and covering balls with soil or mulch and then watering. 

d. Hemp burlap and twine is preferable to treated. If treated burlap is used, 

twine shall be cut from around trunk and burlap shall be removed. 

8. Trunk of each tree shall be single trunk growing from single unmutilated crown of 

roots. No part of trunk shall be conspicuously crooked as compared with normal 

trees of same variety. 

9. Thickness of each shrub shall correspond to trade classification "No.1". Singlestemmed 

or thin plants shall not be accepted. Side branches shall be generous, 

well-twigged, and plant as whole well-branched to ground. Plants shall be in 

moist condition, free from dead wood, bruises, or other root or branch injuries. 

2.05 LAWN SEED 

A. Lawn seed mixture shall be fresh, clean new crop seed. Furnish to Owner dealers 

guaranteed statement of composition of mixture and percentage of purity and germination 

of each variety. 

B. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight and 

minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed. 

Seed mixtures vary by region and season and shall comply with State DOT and Local Soil 

Conservation Service Standards for lawn turf. 

2.06 SOD 

A. Sod shall be ASPA certified, species suitable as lawn turf for the region. Sod shall be 

strongly rooted, weed, disease, pest free and uniform in thickness. 

2.07 TOPSOIL 

A. Natural, friable, fertile, fine loamy soil possessing characteristics of representative topsoil 

in the vicinity that produces heavy growth. Topsoil shall have a pH range of 5.5 to 7.4 

percent, free from subsoil, objectionable weeds, litter, sods, stiff clay, stones larger than 1- 

inch in diameter, stumps, roots, trash, toxic substances, or any other material which may 

be harmful to plant growth or hinder planting operations. Top soil shall contain a minimum 

of two percent organic material. 

B. Verify amount stockpiled if any, and supply additional as needed from naturally welldrained 

sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep. Do not obtain topsoil from bogs 

or marshes. 





2.08 FERTILIZER 

A. Deliver fertilizer, mixed as specified, in original unopened standard size bags showing 

weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Containers shall bear manufacturer's 

guaranteed statement of analysis, or manufacturer's certificate of compliance covering 

analysis shall be furnished to Owner. Store fertilizer in such manner that it shall be kept 

dry. 

B. Base percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash on laboratory test 

recommendations as approved by Owner. For bidding assume 10 percent nitrogen, 6 

percent phosphorus, and 4 percent potash by weight. At least 50 percent of total nitrogen 

shall contain no less than 3 percent water-insoluble nitrogen. At least 60 percent of 

nitrogen content shall be derived from super-phosphate containing not less than 18 

percent phosphoric acid or bone meal containing 25 - 30 percent phosphoric acid and 2 - 

3 percent nitrogen. Potash shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 55 - 60 

percent potash. 

2.09 PEAT MOSS 

A. Peat moss shall be Michigan peat moss or approved equal in color and consistency. 

B. Peat moss shall be moss peat, finely shredded to pass 1/2-inch mesh and shall be no less 

than 90 percent organic material by weight, with ash content by ignition of no more than 

10 percent. 

C. Material shall contain 35 - 66 percent moisture by weight, but shall have water-holding 

capacity of 150 - 200 percent. 

D. Material shall have pH value of 4 to 5. 

E. Material may be imported supplied in bales or domestic furnished in bulk. If furnished in 

bulk, material and its source shall be acceptable to Owner. 

2.10 COLORED RUBBER MULCH 

A. Mulch shall be of sufficient character as not to be easily displaced by wind or water runoff. 

B. Material: 

1. The core substrate used in Rubber Mulch is 5/16” to 7/8”. Rubber nuggets are 

irregular in shape and size. 

2. Rubber Mulch shall contain less than .01% metal. 

3. Non toxic, polyurethane coating chemically cured to the rubber. 

4. The potential for zinc leach from Rubber Mulch product shall be below the EPA’s 

Secondary Maximum Contaminate Levels (SMCL), the proprietary coatings shall 

reduce zinc leaching and run off by at least 60% when using a constant water 

flush test method. 

5. Rubber Mulch shall be IPEMA certified for ASTM F1292-04. 

C. Product Warranty: Rubber Mulch shall retain at least 50% of its color based on opacity at 

12 years. 

D. Refer to drawings for color selection. 

2.11 STAKING MATERIAL 

A. Stakes shall be 8-ft steel tee posts. Three stakes shall be used for each tree. 

B. Wire used for tree staking shall be pliable No. 12 galvanized soft steel wire. 

C. Hose shall be 2-ply fibred-bearing rubber garden hose, not less than 1/2-inch inside 

diameter, black or green, and of suitable length. 

2.12 WATER 

A. Potable water shall be furnished by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish hose and 

other watering equipment. 

2.13 WEED MAT 

Weed mat shall be 4.1 oz., woven polypropylene, needle-punched fabric, weed barrier 





2.14 STEEL EDGING 

A. Steel edging shall be 1/8-inch x 4-inch interlocking steel edge, staked with metal stakes 

sufficiently to hold in place. 

2.15 EROSION CONTROL BLANKET 

A. Rolled erosion control products shall follow the type and material composition as per the 

Erosion Control Technology Council (ECTC) standard specification recommendations. 

2.16 WIRE: 

A. Shall be a minimum 12 GA zinc-coated. 

2.17 HOSE: 

A. Shall be of suitable length, 2 ply, reinforced green rubber and 3/4" and ½" in diameter. 

2.18 "T" POST: 

A. Painted green, 6 ½' length, metal. 

2.19 POND LINERS: Shall be Firestone EPDM Geomembrane. 



A. If project completion date prohibits in-season planting, prepare for out-of-season seeding 

or sodding so that lawns shall be completed and ready for acceptance at time of project 

completion. 

B. Locations containing unsuitable subsoil shall be treated by one or more of the following: 

1. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be due to excessive compaction 

caused by heavy equipment and where natural subsoil is other than AASHTO 

classification of A6 or A7, loosen such areas with spikes, discing, or other means 

to loosen soil to condition acceptable to Owner. Loosen soil to minimum depth of 

12 inches with additional loosening as required to obtain adequate drainage. 

Contractor may introduce peat moss, sand, or organic matter into the subsoil to 

obtain adequate drainage. Such remedial measures shall be considered as 

incidental, without additional cost to Owner. 

2. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be due to presence of boards, 

mortar, concrete, or other construction materials in sub-grade and where natural 

subsoil is other than AASHTO classification of A6 or A7, remove debris and 

objectionable material. Such remedial measures shall be considered as 

incidental, without additional cost to Owner. 

3. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be because natural subsoil falls into 

AASHTO classification of A6 or A7 and contains moisture in excess of 30 

percent, then installation of sub-drainage system or other means described 

elsewhere in Specifications shall be used. Where such conditions have not been 

known or revealed prior to planting time and they have not been recognized in 

preparation of The Drawings and Specifications, then Owner shall issue pricing 

order to install proper remedial measures. 

C. Perform planting operations at steady rate of work unless weather conditions make it 

impossible to work. No plant material shall be planted in frozen ground. 

D. Disk, drag, harrow, or hand rake subgrade to depth of 4 inches and removed stones larger 

than 1-1/2 inches to provide bond for topsoil. Topsoil, which must be transported across 

finished sidewalks, shall be delivered in such manner that no damage will be done to 

sidewalks. 





E. Do not place topsoil until subgrade has been approved in accordance with Section 02300. 

Before placing topsoil, rake subsoil surface clear of stones, debris, and roots. Compact 

topsoil to form layer with minimum depth of 4 inches in lawn areas and 12 inches in shrub 

beds. Place topsoil so that after final settlement there will be positive drainage conforming 

to elevations shown on the Drawings. 

F. Tree and Shrub Preparation 

1. Dig bare-rooted shrubs with adequate fibrous roots. Cover roots with uniformly 

thick coating of mud by being puddled immediately after they are dug, or packed 

in moist straw or moss. 

2. Dig ball and burlap plants with firm natural balls of earth of diameter and depth to 

include fibrous roots. 

3. Protect roots or balls of plants at all times from sun and drying winds. 

4. Ball and burlap plants which cannot be planted immediately upon delivery shall 

be set on ground and protected with soil, wet moss, or other acceptable material. 

Heel-in bare rooted plants that cannot be planted immediately upon delivery. All 

shall be kept moist. 

5. Open and separate bundles of plants before roots are covered. Prevent air 

pockets among roots. During planting operations, cover bare roots with canvas, 

hay, or other suitable material. Plants shall not be bound with wire or rope which 

will result in damage to bark or branches. 

G. Seed Bed Preparation 

1. Grade areas to finish grades, filling as needed or removing surplus dirt. Float 

areas to smooth, uniform grade as indicated on the Drawings. Lawn areas shall 

slope to drain. 

2. Where no grades are shown, areas shall have smooth and continual grade 

between existing or fixed controls, such as walks, curbs, catch basin, steps, or 

building, and elevations shown on The Drawings. Roll, scarify, rake, and level as 

necessary to obtain true, even lawn surfaces. Finish grades shall meet approval 

of Owner before grass seed is sown. 

3. Loosen soil to depth of 6 inches in lawn areas by approved method of 

scarification and grade to remove ridges and depressions. Remove stones or 

foreign matter over 2 inches in diameter from top 2 inches of soil. Float lawn 

areas to finish grades. 

4. Seed beds shall be permitted to settle or shall be firmed by rolling before seeding 

begins. 

H. Sod Bed Preparation: Grade areas to finish grade, filling as needed or removing surplus 

dirt, stones, debris, etc. and floating areas to smooth, uniform grade as indicated on The 

Drawings. Lawn areas shall be graded to drain. 

I. Fertilizer Application: Apply fertilizer in two applications and water immediately following 

each application. The first application shall be one week prior to seeding/sodding at the 

rate of 25 pounds per 1000 square feet and barrowed into the top two inches of topsoil. 

The second application shall be at the rate of 10 pounds per 1000 square feet immediately 

following the second mowing. 


A. Before commencing work, trees and shrubs that are to be saved shall be protected from 

damage by placement of fencing flagged for visibility or some other suitable protective 

procedure approved by Owner. Contractor will be responsible for replacing saved trees or 

shrubs for a period of one year after project completion. 

B. Trucks or other equipment shall not be driven or parked within drip line of any tree unless 

tree overspreads paved area. 

C. Use precautionary measures when performing work around trees, sidewalks, pavements, 

utilities, and other features either existing or previously installed. 

D. Adjust depth of earthwork and topsoil when working immediately adjacent to 

aforementioned features in order to prevent disturbing tree roots, undermining sidewalks 

and pavements, and damage in general to other features either existing or previously 

installed. 





E. Cover plants transported to project in open vehicles with tarpaulins or other suitable 

covers securely fastened to body of vehicle to prevent injury to plants. Closed vehicles 

shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating of plants. Evidence of inadequate 

protection following digging, carelessness while in transit, or improper handling or storage 

shall be cause for rejection. Plants shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected. Such 

protection shall encompass entire period during which plants are in transit, being handled, 

or are in temporary storage. 

F. Plants shall not be delivered to the site more than seven days prior to planting. If plants 

transported to site will not be planted within 48 hours of delivery, they will be healed in 

(covered with sawdust, soil or mulch), and the containers or balls protected from wind and 

temperature and kept moist until planting. 

G. Where excavating, fill, or grading is required within drip line of trees that are to remain, 

work shall be performed as follows: 

1. Trenching: When trenching occurs around trees to remain, tree roots shall not 

be cut but trench shall be tunneled under or around roots by careful hand digging 

without injury to roots. 

2. Raising Grades: 

a. Where fill not exceeding 16 inches is required, clean, washed gravel 

graded from 1 inch to 2 inches in size shall be placed directly around 

tree trunk. Extend gravel out from trunk on all sides minimum of 18 

inches and finish approximately 2 inches above finished grade at tree. 

Install gravel before any earth fill is placed. New earth fill shall not be 

left in contact with trunks of trees requiring fill. 

b. Where fill exceeding 16 inches is required, construct dry-laid tree well 

around trunk of tree. Tree well shall extend out from trunk on all sides 

minimum of 3 feet and to 3 inches above finish grade. Place coarsegraded 

rock directly around tree well extending out to drip line of tree. 

Place clean, washed gravel graded from 1 inch to 2 inches in size 

directly over coarse rock to depth of 3 inches. Place approved backfill 

material directly over washed gravel to desired finish grade. 

3. Lowering Grades: Existing trees in areas where new finish grade is to be 

lowered shall have regrading work done by hand to elevation indicated on The 

Drawings. Roots as required shall be cut cleanly 3 inches below finished grade 

and scars covered with tree paint. 

4. Trees marked for preservation that are more than 6 inches above proposed 

grades shall stand on broad rounded mounds and graded smoothly into lower 

level. Trees located more than 16 inches above proposed grades shall have drylaid 

stone wall or other retaining structure as detailed on The Drawings 

constructed minimum of 5 feet from trunk. Exposed or broken roots shall be cut 

clean and covered with topsoil. 

3.03 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING 

A. Plants too large for 2 persons to lift in and out of holes shall be placed with sling. Do not 

rock trees in holes to raise. 

B. If rock or other underground obstruction is encountered, Owner may require plant pits to 

be relocated, pits enlarged, or plants deleted from project. 

C. Make adjustments in locations as directed. In event that pits or areas for planting are 

prepared and backfilled with topsoil to grade prior to commencement of lawn operations, 

they shall be so marked that when planting proceeds, they can be readily located. In case 

underground obstructions such as ledges or utilities are encountered, change location 

under direction of Owner without charge. 

D. Holes for trees shall be at least 2 feet greater in diameter than spread of root system and 

at least 6 inches deeper than root ball. Holes for shrubs and vines shall be at least 12 

inches greater in diameter than spread of root system and at least 2 feet deep. 





E. During backfilling of tree holes and shrub beds with topsoil, manure, ground limestone (if 

soil tests indicate it is needed), and commercial fertilizer at rate of 3 pounds for trees up to 

3 inches in caliper, 1 pound per inch caliper for larger trees, 6 ounces for small shrubs and 

8 ounces for each shrub 4 feet or over shall be added as progress of work permits. Omit 

ground limestone and manure in case of acid soil plants. Manure, limestone, and fertilizer 

shall be thoroughly mixed with topsoil in planting operation. Manure shall not come in 

immediate contact with roots. 

F. Plants shall be planted in center of holes and at same depth as they had previously grown. 

Backfill topsoil in layers of not more than 8 inches and each layer watered sufficiently to 

settle before next layer is placed. Tamp loam under edges of balled plants. Use enough 

topsoil to bring surfaces to finish grade when settled. 

1. Provide saucer around each plant as shown on The Drawings. 

2. Soak plants with water twice within first 24 hours after time of planting. Apply 

water with low pressure so as to soak in thoroughly without dislodging topsoil. 

3.04 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS 

A. Shredded Hardwood Bark Mulch 

1. Use 4 inches of shredded hardwood bark mulch or approved equal as top 

dressing in planting beds. Mulch single trees or shrubs to outside edge of 

saucer. 

2. Weed mat shall be placed under planting areas that will not to be seeded. In 

addition, the contractor shall place weed mat in any other locations as directed 

on the construction drawings. Weed mat shall be covered with 4 inches of 

shredded hardwood bark mulch and secured in place with soil staples. 

B. Use peat moss for planting soil mixture only and not be used as mulch, except on ground 

cover. 

C. Peg sodded slopes greater than 3:1 to hold in place. 

D. Areas to be covered with erosion control blankets shall be properly prepared, fertilized, 

and seeded before blanket is applied. When blanket is unrolled, netting shall be on top 

and fibers in contact with soil. In ditches, apply blanket in direction of flow of water. On 

slopes, apply blankets vertically on slope. Overlap ends and sides 6” and staple to 

manufacturer's recommendations. 

3.05 SEEDING 

A. Do not perform seeding in windy conditions. 

B. Seeding shall be dispersed in 2 directions at right angles to each other. 

C. Seed lawn areas by sowing evenly with approved mechanical seeder at rate of minimum 

of 3 pounds per 1,000 square feet. Culti-packer or approved similar equipment may be 

used to cover seed and to form seedbed in 1 operation. In areas inaccessible to 

culti-packer, lightly rake seeded ground with flexible rakes and roll with water ballast roller. 

After rolling, seeded areas shall be lightly mulched with wheat straw. 

D. Surface layer of soil for seeded areas shall be kept moist during germination period. 

Water seeded areas twice first week to minimum depth of 6 inches with fine spray and 

once per week thereafter as necessary to supplement natural rain to equivalent of 6 

inches depth. 

3.06 SODDING 

A. A 1'-6" wide strip shall be sodded along sidewalks, roadways, and parking areas to 

prevent washing and erosion. 

B. Cut and lay sod on same day. Only healthy vigorous growing sod shall be laid. 

C. Lay sod across slope and tightly together to result in solid coverage free of gaps. 

D. Roll or firmly but lightly tamp new sod with suitable wooden or metal tamper sufficiently to 

set or press sod into underlying soil. 

E. After sodding has been completed, clean up and thoroughly water newly-sodded areas. 





3.07 MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION 

A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting. Plants shall be watered, mulched, 

weeded, pruned, sprayed, fertilized, cultivated, and otherwise maintained and protected 

until acceptance. Settled plants shall be reset to proper grade and position, planting 

saucer restored, and dead material removed and replaced. Tighten and repair stakes and 

wires. Correct defective work as soon as possible after it becomes apparent and weather 

and season permit. 

B. Maintain lawns for at least 30 days after sodding and 60 days after seeding, or as long as 

is necessary to establish uniform stand of the specified grasses, or until substantial 

completion of project, or until acceptance of lawns, whichever is later. 

C. In event that lawn operations are completed too late in Fall for adequate germination 

and/or growth, maintenance shall continue into following growing season or until uniform 

stand of specified grasses has been established. 

D. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil and adjust watering 

schedule established by irrigation system installer to fit conditions. 

E. After grass growth has started, areas that fail to show uniform stand of grass for any 

reason whatsoever shall be reseeded in accordance with The Drawings and as specified 

herein. Such areas shall be reseeded repeatedly until areas are covered with satisfactory 

growth of grass at no additional cost to Owner. Topsoil conditioning or removal and 

replacement shall be performed if required to facilitate establishment of grass at no cost to 

Owner. 

F. Watering shall be done in such manner and as frequently as is deemed necessary by 

Owner to assure continued growth of healthy grass. Water areas of site in such a manner 

as to prevent erosion due to excessive quantities applied over small areas and to avoid 

damage to finished surface due to watering equipment. 

G. Water for execution and maintenance shall be provided by Contractor at no expense to 

Owner. Contractor shall furnish portable tanks, pumps, hose, pipe, connections, nozzles, 

and any other equipment required to transport water from available outlets and apply it to 

seeded areas in approved manner. 

H. Initiate mowing of seeded areas when grass has attained height of 3 inches. Maintain 

grass height at 2 1/2 to 3 inches at subsequent cuttings depending on time of year. Not 

more than 1/3 of grass leaf shall be removed at any cutting and cutting shall not occur 

more than 10 days apart. 

I. Heavy cuttings shall be removed to prevent destruction of underlying turf. If weeds or 

other undesirable vegetation threaten to smother planted species, such vegetation shall 

be mowed or, in case of rank growths, shall be uprooted, raked and removed from area by 

methods approved by Owner. 

J. Protect seeded area from pedestrian or vehicular trespassing while grass is germinating. 

Provide fences, signs, barriers, or other necessary temporary protective devices. Repair 

damage resulting from trespass, erosion, washout, settlement, or other causes. 

K. Remove fences, signs, barriers, or other temporary protective devices after final 

acceptance. 

L. If substantial number of plants are diseased, distressed, or dead at time of inspection, 

acceptance will not be granted and Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of plants 

shall be extended until replacements are made. 

M. Replacements shall be plants of same variety and size specified on The Drawings. 

Furnish and plant as specified herein. Cost shall be borne by Contractor. Replacements 

resulting from removal, loss, or damage due to occupancy of project in any part, 

vandalism, physical damage by animals, vehicles, etc., and losses due to curtailment of 

water by local authorities will be approved and paid for by Owner. 

N. Remove and replace dead, defective and/or rejected plants as required before final 

acceptance. Replacement of plant materials that may be necessary shall be at expense 

of Contractor. 

O. Grassed areas damaged during process of work shall be responsibility of Contractor, who 

shall restore disturbed areas to condition satisfactory to Owner. This may include filling to 

grade, fertilizing, seeding, and mulching. 

P. Guarantee plants for period of 2 years after inspection and acceptance. 





Q. At end of Establishment Period, inspection shall be made again. Remove from site any 

plant that is dead or unsatisfactory to Owner. Replace plants during normal planting 

season. 

3.08 MAINTENANCE AFTER CONSTRUCTION – SUBMIT BID ALTERNATE (OPTION) 

A. Maintenance after construction shall be commenced upon completion of a Maintenance 

Agreement based on proposal submitted by the Contractor specified in Part 1 above. The 

Maintenance Agreement and the maintenance work shall conform to the following 

requirements. 

B. General Landscaping 

1. Landscape maintenance shall include necessary watering, cultivation, weeding, 

pruning, wound dressing, disease and insect pest control, protective spraying, 

labor for replacement of dead plant material, straightening plants which lean or 

sag, adjustments of plants which settle or are planted too low, mowing, 

replacement of mulch that has been displaced, repairing and reshaping of 

saucers, and reseeding or replanting of those areas affected. Remove rubbish, 

waste, tools, and equipment used at end of each workday. Other procedures 

consistent with good horticultural practice necessary to ensure vigorous, healthy 

growth of plant material are also part of Maintenance Contract. 

2. During first year of Maintenance Contract, replacement of plant material shall be 

responsibility of Contractor with exceptions as listed herein. 

3. Landscape maintenance contractor shall purchase and maintain Contractor's 

general liability insurance in amount of $1,000,000 for protection from 

Contractor's operations under Maintenance Contract. Certification of such 

insurance shall be filed with Owner prior to commencement of work. 

C. Watering 

1. The Owner’s irrigation system shall be used by landscape maintenance 

contractor for watering. Failure of system does not relieve landscape 

maintenance contractor's responsibility of maintaining desired level of moisture 

necessary to maintain vigorous, healthy growth. 

2. Water shall be applied in quantities sufficient to penetrate soil to minimum depth 

of 8-inches in shrub beds and 6-inches in turf areas at rate that will prevent 

saturation of soil. 

3. On-site water will be furnished by Owner. Contractor shall furnish hose and 

other watering equipment. 

D. Weeding: Landscape maintenance contractor shall keep areas free from weeds and 

undesirable grasses by approved methods and materials . 

E. Disease and insect pest control: Inspect plant material at least once each month to locate 

any disease or insect pest infestations. Upon discovery of infestation, nature or species of 

infestation shall be identified. Control in accordance with industry standards shall be 

immediately implemented. 

F. Fertilizing: Landscape maintenance contractor shall fertilize on regularly scheduled 

program to fit requirements of plant material to maintain vigorous, healthy growth. Spilled 

or excess fertilizer shall be swept and properly disposed. Flushing into storm sewer is 

prohibited. 

G. Pruning and repair: Amount of pruning shall be limited to minimum necessary to remove 

dead or injured branches, to compensate for loss of roots as result of transplanting 

operations, and to maintain safety in traveled areas. Pruning shall not change the natural 

habit or attractive, balanced shape of plant. Cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs. 

H. Mowing: Mow grass areas at regular intervals to keep grass height from exceeding 3- 

inches. Mow in such manner as to prevent clippings from blowing onto paved areas and 

sidewalks. Cleanup after mowing shall include sweeping or blowing to clear mowing 

debris. 

I. Clean up: During course of maintenance, excess and waste materials shall be 

continuously and promptly removed at end of each workday. 





J. Maintenance report and schedule of activities: Landscape maintenance contractor shall 

provide schedule and report to Owner that details planned maintenance activities including 

names of any subcontractors. 

K. General Irrigation: 

1. After extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement has expired, landscape 

maintenance contractor shall maintain irrigation system in good operating 

condition through monthly inspections of system components and make repairs 

as necessary. This includes checking and verifying operation in each zone, 

alignment of heads, rain sensors, controller, and checking leaks. 

2. Landscape maintenance contractor shall make every effort to conserve water by 

adjusting programming to allow for weather changes and growth seasons. 

Irrigation should be conducted between 2:00 a.m. and 6:00 a.m. unless 

requested by Owner. 

L. Winterization: 

1. When cold weather approaches and chance for freezing conditions exist, the 

irrigation system shall be drained after each use. 

2. Winterization procedure shall include the following: 

a. Shut water off at main gate valve 

b. Open manual drain valves 

c. Blow out each section twice with compressed air 

d. Set controller to cycle through each section minimum time available, 

once each day through winter months. 

e. If backflow preventor is installed with unions, remove and store out of 

weather. 

M. Spring Start-up: Spring start-up procedure shall include the following: 

1. Reinstall backflow prevention 

2. Close manual drain valves 

3. Slowly turn water on 

4. Check for leaks and proper alignment of heads 

5. Repair and adjust system as required for proper operation 

N. Component Replacement: If replacement of component parts becomes necessary after 

normal use and after original warranty has expired, Owner is responsible for expense of 

replacements, provided there has been no mishandling of these items on part of 

landscape maintenance contractor. 

O. Termination Of Maintenance Contract: 

1. If Owner fails to make payment for period of 90 days without written clarification, 

landscape maintenance contractor may, upon 12 additional days written notice to 

Owner, terminate contract and recover from Owner payment for work executed 

and for proven loss sustained upon materials, equipment, or tools, including 

reasonable profit and damages applicable to Maintenance Contract. 

2. If landscape maintenance contractor defaults, persistently fails, or neglects to 

carry out work in accordance with Maintenance Contract, Owner, after 12 days 

written notice to landscape maintenance contractor and without prejudice to any 

other remedy Owner may have, may make good such deficiencies, including 

compensation for additional services made necessary, and deduct cost from 

payment due landscape maintenance contractor or Owner may terminate 

Maintenance Contract. 






SECTION 02482 

HYDROMULCHING NEW LAWNS 


1.01 CONDITIONS AND MATERIALS: 

A. The Contractor will visit the site to examine the conditions, as they exist, determine the 

nature of the materials to be used, and all other facts pertinent to the work. 

1.02 PROTECTION: 

A. Loss or damage of hydromulching, whether by theft, vandalism, fire, flood, lightning, 

storms, freezes, insects, disease, etc., rests solely with the Contractor until final 

acceptance by Owner. 

1.03 DELIVERY: 

A. Hydromulching material shall be delivered to the site only after the berms are prepared 

and are ready for planting. 

1.04 DAMAGES: 

A. Any areas damaged through landscape operations pertaining to this contract will be 

fully restored to their original condition. 


2.01 SUPPLIES: 

A. The Contractor will supply all tools, hoses, and other equipment for performance of 

specified maintenance. The Contractor at his expense shall furnish hose and other 

watering equipment required for the work. 

B. This cost will be included in the bid proposal. 

2.02 HYDROMULCHING-BERMUDA GRASS SEED: 

A. Quantities: 2 pounds per 1,000 square feet. 

2.03 WOOD CELLULOSE FIBER: 

2.04 MULCH: 

A. Quantities: 50 pounds per 1,000 square feet. 

A. Use mulch with tackifier on all berms indicated on the landscape plan, at the rate of 1 

1/2 pounds of Fiber Tack, per 1,000 square feet. 

B. Apply the mulch, taking extreme care not to spray the material outside the lawn areas, 

by using a 4'x8'bafter board along all bed and concrete areas. 

HYDROMULCHING NEW LAWNS 02482 – Page 1 of 2




2.05 FERTILIZER: 

A. Shall be (13-13-13) at 2lbs per l,000 square feet. 


3.01 LAWN PREPARATION: 

A. Tilling and Grading: 

1. Areas that have become hardened and non-porous because of construction 

activities, shall be loosened by rototilling, disking, harrowing, or any 

approved method. 

2. All areas to receive seed will be hand and machine raked and graded after 

tilling. Remove all large lumps of clay, debris, stones, etc., before 

hydromulching. 

3.02 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE: 

A. After hydromulching, maintain the lawn area and keep constantly moist until the seed 

has germinated and the grass begins to spread. After this, water the grass less 

frequently but more thoroughly at each watering. 

B. The Contractor will be responsible for watering and necessary maintenance of all 

installed materials until final acceptance by the Owner. Maintenance will include: 

1. Weeding. 

2. Mowing. 

3. Edging grass. 

4. Watering. 

C. Water will be available on the site at no expense to the Contractor. 

3.03 CLEANUP: 

A. All areas are to be kept as neat and clean as possible during the installation process. 

All trash and debris generated will be removed from the project daily. 

B. Final clean up will include removal of all landscape debris from the site. All walks and 

curbs will be broomed cleaned, unless otherwise directed by the Owner. 


HYDROMULCHING NEW LAWNS 02482 – Page 2 of 2




SECTION 02486 

SOD WORK 





1.02 SUMMARY OF SECTION 

A. This section includes provisions for the following items: 

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS 

1. Topsoil placement and procedure 

2. Sodding 

A. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 


1. Topsoil stockpiling is specified in Division 2 section "Site Clearing". 

2. Excavation, filling, and rough grading required establishing elevations shown on 

drawings is specified in Division 2 Section, "Earthwork." 

3. Underground sprinkler system is specified in a separate Section. 

A. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 

Specification Sections: 

B. Plant and Material Certifications: 

1. Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. 

2. Manufacturer's or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and 

fertilizer materials. 

3. Label data substantiating those plants, trees, shrubs and planting materials 

comply with specified requirements. 

C. Maintenance instruction: 


1. Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner 

for maintenance of landscape work for one full year. Submit prior to expiration of 

required maintenance period(s). 

A. Subcontractors 

1. Subcontract landscape work to a single firm specializing in landscape work. 

B. Source Quality Control 

SODDING WORK 02486 – Page 1 of 4




1. Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by governing 

authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials. 

2. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not obtainable, 

submit proof of non-availability to Architect, together with proposal for use of 

equivalent material. 

1.06 ANALYSIS AND STANDARDS: 

A. Package standard products with manufacturers certified analysis. For other materials, 

provide analysis by recognized laboratory made in accordance with methods established 

by the Association of Official Agriculture Chemists, wherever applicable. 


2.01 TOPSOIL: 

A. Provide topsoil, dark brown in color, surface soil, reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, 

brush, weeds and other litter, and free of roots, stumps, stones larger than 2 inches in any 

dimension, and other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. 

1. Obtain Topsoil from local sources. Obtain topsoil only from naturally, welldrained 

sites where soil occurs in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Do not 

obtain from bogs or marshes. 

2.02 FERTILIZER, GRASS AND STARTER FERTILIZER: 

A. Granular non-burning product composed of not less than 50% organic slow acting, 

guaranteed analysis, professional fertilizer containing 16% nitrogen, 1 0% phosphoric acid, 

and 5% potash by weight or similar composition. 

2.03 GRASS MATERIALS / SOD 

A. Provide strongly rooted sod, not less than 2 years old, free of weeds and undesirable 

native grasses, and machine out to pad thickness of 3/4 inch (plus or minus 1/4 inch), 

excluding top growth and thatch. Provide only sod capable of vigorous growth and 

development when planted. 

B. Provide sod of uniform pad sizes with maximum 5 percent deviation in either length or 

width. Broken pads or pads with uneven ends will not be acceptable. Sod pads incapable 

of supporting their own weight when suspended vertically with a firm grasp on upper 10% 

of pad with be rejected. 

C. Provide sod composed principally of following: Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylon). 


3.01 PREPARATION: 

A. Before placing clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other 

extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. 

B. Spread topsoil to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades, and elevations shown, 

after light rolling and natural settlement. 

SODDING WORK 02486 - Page 2 of 4




C. Fine grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, 

rake, and drag lawn areas, remove edges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish 

grades. 

3.02 PREPARATION FOR PLANTING LAWNS: 

A. Loosen sub grade of lawn areas by discing or tiling to a minimum depth of 2 inches and a 

maximum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones measuring over 1 ½" in any dimension. 

Remove sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter. Limit preparation to areas 

which will be planted promptly after preparation. 

B. Spread topsoil to minimum depth required to meet lines, grades, and elevations shown, 

after light rolling and natural settlement. 

C. Place approximately ½ of total amount of topsoil required. Work into top of loosened 

sub grade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil. 

3.03 PREPARATION OF UNCHANGED GRADES: 

A. Where lawns are to be planted in areas that have not been altered or disturbed by 

excavating, grading, or stripping operations, prepare soil for lawn planting as follows: Till to 

a depth of not less than 4 inches. Remove high areas and fill in depressions. Till soil to a 

homogenous mixture of fine texture, free of lumps, clods, stones, roots and other 

extraneous matter. 

B. Prior to preparation of unchanged areas, remove existing grass, vegetation and turf. 

Dispose of such material outside of Owner's property. Do not turn existing vegetation over 

into soil being prepared for lawns. 

C. Allow for sod thickness in areas to be sodded. 

D. Apply specified commercial fertilizer at 2 pounds per 100 sq. ft. upon completed soil 

mixture. Delay application of fertilizer if lawn planting will not follow within a few days. 

E. Fine grade lawn areas to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, 

rake, and drag lawn areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish 

grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted immediately after grading. 

F. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow 

surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 

3.04 SODDING FIELDS: 

A. Lay sod within 24 hours from time of stripping. 

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips; do 

not overlap. Stagger strips to offset joints in adjacent courses. Tamp and roll lightly to 

ensure contact with subgrade after watering sod. Work sifted sandy loam into minor 

cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering of adjacent grass. 

C. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after planting and roll. 

3.05 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION 

A. During sodding work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. 





B. Protect sodding work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations 

by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation 

and maintenance periods. Repair damaged landscape work as directed. 

C. Remove excess unused topsoil from the site in accordance with Division 2 Section "Site 

Clearing" unless otherwise indicated. 






SECTION 02488 

EPIC SYSTEM WATER MANAGEMENT 


1.01 SCOPE OF WORK – SUMMARY 

A. The work shall include the following: 

1. Survey work shall ensure that the base grade of the installation areas (Individual 

EPIC cells) is level, smooth, and compacted. 

2. Plans and provisions are made for adequate containment of sand and gravel 

along EPIC cell perimeter edges as specified on plans. 

3. EPIC parts assembly and related service components are made according to 

EPIC approved plans or supervised by an EPIC certified individual. 

4. Grading, leveling, and final compaction of the sand fill are to be completed by the 

Contractor and approved by the Owner, or Owners Representative before 

proceeding to the final seeding phase. 

5. Locate and protect all existing EPIC components, pipe, valves, valve boxes and 

other physical features on the field and the immediate vicinity. 

6. Protect all pavement and hard surface areas. Damaged areas will be replaced at 

Contractor's expense. 

7. Settling and compaction shall be done with water, vibra-plate and/or rolling as 

specified. 

8. Furnish and apply specified amendments and/or fertilizer. 

9. Incorporate amendments using a Toro sand pro, Blekavator or equivalent 

machine with 2-4" cultivating attachments. 

10. Finish grade as specified. 

11. Seed or Sod as per specifications. 


A. The Contractor shall obtain and submit imported sand and gravel samples, if required, to 

the owner for inspection prior to using imported fill material on the field. 

1. The imported bottom gravel will be clean #10 sieve size to 114" fine gravel. 

2. The imported sand shall meet specifications detailed by EPIC in regards to 

particle size, capillary draw, compaction, and drainage characteristics. (Refer to 

"Choosing the right sand", and "EPIC sand testing procedure" as preliminary 

screening tools). Submit a 1 quart sample of sand source to an EPIC analyst for 

acceptance analysis if required. 

3. A sieve analysis of the sand shall be reviewed by the owner. The owner has the 

right to reject the imported sand if it does not meet specifications. 

4. Submit executed Guarantee of Contractor/Subcontractor. 


A. Deliver undamaged products to job with tags and labels intact. 

B. Arrangements to be made for forklift of equivalent to unload palletized EPIC components 

off delivery truck. 

C. Store materials in protected areas, off the ground, and in areas as not to interfere with the 

progress of the work. 

D. Transport, store and handle in strict accord with the manufacture's written 

recommendations. 

EPIC SYSTEM WATER MANAGEMENT 02488 - Page 1 of 7




E. Make delivery to job when notified by Contractor verifying that the job is ready to receive 

the work of this section and that arrangements have been made to properly store, handle 

and protect such materials and work. 


A. Contractor shall acquaint himself with all existing site conditions. If unknown active utilities 

are encountered during work, notify Architect promptly for instructions. Failure to notify will 

make Contractor liable for damage to these utilities arising from Contractor's operations 

subsequent to discovery of such unknown active utilities. 

1.05 FIELD MEASUREMENTS 

A. Make and be responsible for all field dimensions necessary for proper fitting' and 

completion of work. Report discrepancies to Civil Engineer before proceeding. 

PART 2 MATERIALS 

2.01 EPIC COMPONENTS 

A. Firestone Part Numbers 

1. Firestone EPIC Chambers - W56WMGTEC60 

2. Firestone EPIC Pan Sheet - W56WMGTES01 

3. Firestone EPIC Pans - W56WMGTEP01 

4. Firestone EPDM Geomembrane - various, see TIS online at 

www.firestonesp.com. 

5. EPIC Grommet - W56WMGTEG01 

6. Control valves, sensors, timers and pumps as specified in project plans. 

B. Connection pipe shall be 2" Schedule 40 PVC or ABS. 

C. Drainage lines shall be a 6" or larger Schedule 40 PVC or ABS unless specified otherwise 

in plans. 

D. EPIC supply lines shall be 3f4" or larger Schedule 40 PVC. 

E. Plastic Septic tank reservoir, size and make as specified in plans. 

F. Pump access cover or manhole as specified in plans. 

2.02 WATER SUPPLY LINES 

A. Water delivery systems supplying water to the Reservoir float valve to be installed 

according to plans with minimum delivery pressure of 20 p.s.i. and delivery volume of 12 

GPM per acre of turf. 

2.03 SAND AND GRAVEL FILL MATERIAL 

A. The sand shall meet EPIC specifications. 

B. The fine gravel shall meet EPIC specifications of #10 sieve - 1f4" diameter size or 

equivalent on approval. 

2.04 FERTILIZER AND AMENDMENTS 

A. Analysis 15-15-15 Best Endure 

B. Analysis 6-2-4 Tri C Organic Soil Conditioner/Fertilizer with Micronutrients 

C. Elemental Sulfur 

D. Granular Gypsum 





E. Source references: Ewing Irrigation, Simplot Partners, or other approved regional 

sources. 

F. Regional modifications based on sand analysis, plant species and agronomist 

recommendations can be variations of items 1-7. 

G. Jobe's tree fertilizer spikes (3 per tree) 

2.05 SEED 

A. Mixture to be the following: 80% Kentucky Bluegrass to consist of 3 of the following 

varieties in equal amounts: Award, Odyssey, Rugby 2, Absolute, Nuglade, Impact. And 

20% Perennial Ryegrass to consist of the 2 of the following varieties in equal amounts: 

Advent, Caddyshack, Monterrey, TopGun. 

B. All seed components shall be Certified Blue Tag Seed. 

C. The contractor shall submit seed analysis from Seed Company to Owner prior to seeding. 

D. Seed source: Jacklin Seed, 1-800-688-7333 

E. Other seed acceptable by the owner and suitable for climate zone. 

2.06 SOD 

A. Sod shall be a minimum of 80% Kentucky bluegrass, varieties to be reviewed by owner. 

B. Other approved sand based sod approved by owner and Landscape Architect or Civil 

Engineer. 

C. Sod shall be cut to a minimum thickness of 112 inch and grown on a minimum of 85% 

sand. 


3.01 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 

A. An excavated 14” (+) deep containment area is prepared to receive the 14” – 30” profile of 

imported of washed sand, 2” gravel fill material, and EPIC components over the entire 

project surface. Overall depths of EPIC areas are 14” in turf areas, 16” in shrub areas, 

and 30" in designated large tree root ball areas as specified in plans. Check for 

specialized depth variations on plans. 

B. The base of the EPIC cell containment areas shall be sloped 0% in all directions with a 

grading tolerance of ±0.5 inches. 

C. Sloped areas with a slope grade of less than 1% need not be benched if EPIC pan cells 

are used. Level benching of sub-grade is required for overall slope exceeding 1% with a 

maximum bench drop of 2 – 3” vertical between benches. 

D. After the subgrade has been properly graded, it shall be compacted using a suitable 

vibrating roller or compactor to 90% Proctor density. 

3.02 SUBGRADE EVALUATION AND FINISH 

A. After sub grade compaction the end result should be a smooth, level and compacted 

surface. 

3.03 SUBGRADE EPDM LINER APPLICATION 

A. Rollout protective 4 oz. geo-fabric sub-liner over base if required on plans. Overlap edges 

with 6” of material. 

B. Roll out EPDM liner material over smooth sub-base and remove wrinkles or folds from 

bottom of liner. 

C. EPDM liner is extended up the EPIC containment cells slightly above finished grade along 

perimeter walls separating non EPIC areas. Do not trim excess material until finished 

grade is established. 





D. EPDM liner converging into EPIC cell corners is neatly folded over itself to form a 

watertight continuity. Be sure cut edges of liner in fold are near the surface. 

E. Create an 8" vertical wall of EPDM liner between adjoining EPIC cells. EPDM liner of 

adjoining cells is supported by sand fill material from both sides of adjoining EPIC cells to 

keep the 8" wall in the vertical position. Temporary wall construction can be made through 

the use of a sacrificial ¾” by 7.24" board (1 x 8), a stretched line along barrier wall 8" 

above base grade over which is draped EPDM liners from adjoining EPIC cells, a built-up 

and compacted soil hump 8" high and 12" wide at the base, or any other technique 

suitable and approved by the EPIC certified installer to create a water tight stable 

containment area. 

F. Do not construct more lined EPIC cells as can be filled in a day. Liner placement shall be 

such as to avoid unnecessary traffic over liner material. 

G. Firestone EPDM Geomembrane seaming, and repair if required, to be made according to 

Firestone construction standard 02770. 

3.04 SYSTEM FEED, RESERVOIR AND DRAIN LINE INSTALLATION 

A. Install 6" diameter drain lines according to plans or specifications. Be sure that drain lines 

are at proper elevations to maintain gravity drain function back to appropriate storage 

reservoirs without. sags that can retain water. 

B. Install EPIC pump supply lines according to plans. 

C. Drain and feed lines must be surrounded by sand or road base material prior to backfilling 

with native excavated trench material. 

D. All joints in distribution/drain line system outside of EPIC cells must be glued according to 

accepted industry standards for plastic pipe. 

E. Install appropriate number of EPIC distribution start units as specified on plans. 

F. Install plastic reservoir tank at elevation specified on plans. Provide a 4" deep 

compacted5and base for reservoir tank bottom. 

G. Install primary collection reservoir according to separate specified procedure as specified 

in plans. 

3.05 PAN PLACEMENT, EPIC CHAMBER CONNECTION AND GRAVEL FILL 

A. Connect EPIC pans, chambers and 2" Sch40 PVC or ABS connectors as specified on 

plans. 

B. Use an appropriate alignment method to maintain straight line separation distance 

between EPIC chamber rows as specified on plans. 

C. Do not glue but insert 2" connection pipes 3.5" into chamber to engage the internal stop 

nub inside the EPIC chamber. 

D. Transition 2" PVC line through upright EPDM liner walls in areas shown on plans. 

E. Transition procedure and inspection under the direction of Certified EPIC supervisor to 

insure a water tight transition between EPIC cells. 

F. After 2" connections are made, weigh down all EPIC chambers with sand bags on top of 

EPIC crown to prevent shifting during gravel and sand fill operations. 

G. Place approved #10 gravel 2" deep along bottom of EPDM liner and along sides of EPIC 

chambers. The gravel fill must enter and cover the outside sidewall openings in the EPIC 

chamber. 

H. Remove excess gravel from crown of EPIC chamber if present. 

3.06 SAND PLACEMENT AND FINAL GRADE 

A. Place all imported sand over gravel and to· depths specified on plans. 

B. Compact sand in two steps a) area between EPIC pan sides, connectors, and EPIC 

chamber sides keeping liner pan sides upright, and b) area above chambers to final grade 

level. 





C. Water settle and roll using a 2 ft. x 6 ft. smooth roller delivering approximately 100 pounds 

weight per linear foot width. 

D. Use the color change in sand during the water charging process to identify flow 

restrictions or anomalies if any. Notify owner, Landscape Architect or Civil Engineer if an 

even moisture pattern does not develop at the finish grade level. 

E. Upon completion of fine grading and placement of all sand, the Contractor shall notify the 

owner and have available a laser plan system with slope control for Owner inspection. 

3.07 MATERIAL APPLICATION METHODS 

A. After all surface grading is approved; surface materials ‘may be applied using a drop or 

cyclone type spreader for uniform distribution of materials. 

B. Apply 15-15-15 Best Endure at the rate of 4 pounds of material per 1,000 sq. ft. (174 

pounds/acre). 

C. Apply Elemental Sulfur at the rate of 1 pound of material per 1,000 sq. ft. (45 

pounds/acre). 

D. Apply Gypsum (Calcium Sulfate) at the rate of 1000 pounds per acre. 

E. Apply 6-2-4 Tri C Organic Soil Conditioner/Fertilizer with Micronutrients at the rate of 1000 

Ibs per acre. 

F. Incorporate the materials to a depth of 2-4 inches using a Toro Sand Pro with 2 inch teeth 

in 2 directions. (45 & 90 degrees) 

G. Areas where Netlon ATS (Firestone Item Number W56WMGTNM01) mesh elements 

are incorporated, soil amendments are incorporated with a Blekavator at the same time in 

conjunction with the Reflex mesh elements to avoid secondary disturbance of blended 

mesh material. 

3.08 FINE GRADING AND SURFACE PREPARATION 

A. After completing Section 3.07, drag and smooth the surface to reestablish grade 

tolerances. This may be accomplished with a box drag, weighted chain link fence, or other 

device. 

B. Apply moisture or irrigation to settle the surface and roll with a 2 ft. x 6 ft. roller having 

approximately 100 Ibs. of weight per linear foot width. 

C. Repeat operation until surface is smooth, level, and firm. Foot printing should not be 

deeper than 0.5 inches. 

3.09 SEED APPLICATION 

A. Before seed is applied, owner must inspect the field. Seed shall not be applied until 

further settling is not apparent. 

B. Seed shall be applied with a mechanical device such as a Brillion Seed Drill with minimum 

2.28 inch spacing. All applications must be in two directions, (90 degrees across) applying 

one half of the seed in each direction. 

C. Apply 3 pounds of seed per 1,000 sq. ft. (130 pounds/acre) 

D. In the event that there is washing or erosion from irrigation or rainfall, the Contractor shall 

reseed areas that are not uniform. 

E. EPIC system must be adjusted so that moisture is present in the top 114 inch of the 

surface. 

3.10 SOD SELECTION (IF OPTION IS SELECTED) 

A. Use only high quality sod of known genetic origin that is free of noxious weeds, disease, 

and insect problems. It should appear healthy and vigorous and should conform to the 

following. 

B. Sod should have been grown in soil comprising at a minimum 85% sand, or bare rooted 

sod grown with soil less techniques. 





C. Sod should be machine cut at a uniform depth of 1-1/2” – 2” (13-51mm) - excluding shoot 

growth and thatch. 

D. Sod should not have been cut in excessively wet or dry weather. 

E. Sections of sod should be a standard size (as determined by the supplier), uniform and 

untorn. 

F. Sections of sod should be strong enough to support their own weight and retain their size 

and shape when lifted by one end. 

G. Harvest, delivery, and installation of sod should take place within a period of 36 hours. 

3.11 SOD INSTALLATION 

A. Moistening sod after it is unrolled helps maintain viability. Store it in the shade during 

installation. 

B. Rake the soil surface to break the crust just before laying sod. During the summer, the 

sand should be wet on the surface before laying the sod to cool the sand and reduce root 

burning and dieback. 

C. Do not sod on gravel or soils that may have been recently treated with sterilants or 

herbicides. 

D. Lay the first row of sod in a straight line with subsequent rows placed parallel to and 

butting tightly against each other. Stagger strips in a brick- like pattern. Be sure that the 

sod is not stretched or overlapped and that the joints are butted tightly to prevent voids. 

Use a knife or sharp spade to trim and fit irregularly shaped areas. 

E. As sodding of clearly defined areas is completed, roll sod to provide firm contact between 

roots and sand. 

F. After rolling, irrigate until the soil is wet 4 inches (102 mm) below sod. 

G. Keep sodded areas moist to a depth of 4 in. (102 mm) until the grass takes root. This can 

be determined by gently tugging on the sod - resistance indicates that rooting has 

occurred. 

H. Mowing should not be attempted until the sod is firmly rooted, usually 2-3 weeks. 

3.12 SEEDED AREA ESTABLISHMENT 

A. In the event that there is lack of uniform turf, establishment after a period of 30 days, the 

Contractor shall re-seed the affected areas at the specified rates. The field will not be 

accepted as complete until there is uniform germination of turf grass plants. 

3.13 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING PROCEDURE 

A. For shrubs, perennials, and annuals after completion of section 3.07, dig out appropriate 

sand volume to receive root ball of nursery stock. 

B. Remove nursery shipping container, loosen root ball and discard any loose greenhouse 

planting media from plant. Do not damage existing root structure and only discard 

surrounding soil that falls off easily. 

C. Plant directly in sand and refill and press excavated sand fill around root ball of plant. 

Press down firmly around planting and smooth out sand surface after planting. Crown of 

D. plant is just below the finished sand surface. 

E. A dedicated EPIC pan and Chamber unit may be designated for each large tree planting. 

Check with plans. After the addition of the 2" gravel layer inside the pan, do not add the 

sand fill until the tree is ready for planting. . 

F. For trees fill the area above the gravel inside the EPIC pan with sand to a level which 

coincides with the bottom of the root ball. 

G. Remove tree root ball covering, loosen roots, and discard any loose soil not held together 

by existing roots. 





H. While suspending the tree in its proper location centered over the EPIC pan, pour loose 

sand evenly around root ball to provide support to the tree. If possible use dry sand for 

better encapsulation flow. 

I. With foot pressure compact the loose sand around the tree and add additional sand to 

meet established finished grade. 

J. Insert (3) Jobe's tree spikes or equivalent fertilizer one foot away from tree trunk in a 

triangular pattern around the tree. The spikes are pushed in to be 6" below final grade. 

K. Slowly pour 5 gallons of water around fill area of tree trunk for additional settling of sand 

fill, add additional sand to fill sink holes around tree. 

L. Small trees (recommended) need not be staked for additional support. 

M. If large top heavy trees are planted provide traditional support stakes for one year. Be 

sure stakes are not pounded in deeper than 20" from surface grade to avoid contact with 

sub-ground EPIC system components. 






SECTION 02518 


INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 


A. Concrete paver units. [Concrete paver edge units.] 

B. Bedding and joint sand. 


NONE 


A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

1. C 33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 

2. C 136, Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregate. 

3. C 140, Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 

4. C 144, Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 

5. C 936, Specification for Solid Interlocking Concrete Paving Units. 

6. C 979, Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete. 

7. D 698, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures 

using a 5.5-lb (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 in. (305 mm) drop. 

8. D 1557, Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soil and Soil Aggregate Mixtures 

Using a 10-lb (4.54 kg) Rammer and 18 in. (457 mm) drop. 

9. D 2940, Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports. 


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of concrete interlocking pavers for 

a minimum of three (3) years. 

B. Installation shall be by a contractor and crew with at least one (1) year of experience in 

placing interlocking concrete pavers on projects of similar nature or dollar cost. 

C. Installation Contractor shall conform to all local, state/provincial licensing and bonding 

requirements. 


A. Submit product drawings and data. 

B. Submit full size sample sets of concrete paving units to indicate color and shape 

selections. 

Color will be selected by Architect/Engineer/Landscape Architect/Owner from manufacturer's 

available colors. 

C. Submit sieve analysis for grading of bedding and joint sand. 

D. Submit test results from an independent testing laboratory for compliance of paving unit 

requirements to ASTM C 936. 

E. Indicate layout, pattern, and relationship of paving joints to fixtures and project formed 

details. 

F. Substitutions: Substitutions shall be submitted 10 days prior to bid opening for acceptance. 

INTERLOCKING CONCRETE PAVERS 02518 - Page 1 of 6




1.06 MOCK-UPS 

A. Install a 7 ft. x 7 ft. (2 m x 2 m) paver area as described in Article 3.02. This area will be 

used to determine surcharge of the bedding sand layer, joint sizes, lines, laying pattern(s), 

color(s), and texture of the job. This area shall be the standard from which the work will be 

judged. Consideration shall be given with regard to differences in age of materials from time 

of mock-up erection to time of actual product delivery. 

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver concrete pavers to the site in steel banded, plastic banded, or plastic wrapped 

cubes 

capable of transfer by fork lift or clamp lift. Unload pavers at job site in such a manner that no 

damage occurs to the product. 

B. Sand shall be covered with waterproof covering to prevent exposure to rainfall or removal 

by wind.The covering shall be secured in place. 

C. Coordinate delivery and paving schedule to minimize interference with normal use of 

buildings adjacent to paving. 

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 

A. Do not install sand or pavers during heavy rain or snowfall. 

B. Do not install sand and pavers over frozen base materials. 

C. Do not install frozen sand. 


2.01 CONCRETE PAVERS 

Concrete pavers may have spacer bars on each unit. These insure a minimum joint width 

between each unit into which sand is placed. Spacer bars help prevent contact of the edges 

with adjacent pavers and subsequent spalling. They are highly recommended for mechanically 

installed pavers. 

Manually installed pavers may be installed with or without spacer bars. 

A. Concrete pavers shall be supplied by Pavestone Company or equal. 

B. Product name(s)/shape(s), color(s), overall dimensions, and thickness of the paver(s) shall 

be: 

2003 ADA Compliant 3 7/8 in./ 98 mm x 7 13/16in./198 mm x 2 3/8 in./ 60 mm thick. 

C. Pavers shall meet the following requirements set forth in ASTM C 936, Standard 

Specification for Interlocking Concrete Paving Units: 

1. Average compressive strength of 8,000 psi (55 MPa) with no individual 

unit under 7,200 psi (50 MPa). 

2. Average absorption of 5% with no unit greater than 7% when tested in 

accordance with ASTM C 140. 

3. Resistance to 50 freeze-thaw cycles when tested in accordance with 

ASTM C 67. 

D. Pigment in concrete pavers shall conform to ASTM C 979. 

E. Material shall be manufactured in individual layers on production pallets. 

F. Materials shall be manufactured to produce a solid homogeneous matrix in the produced 

unit. 

2.02 VISUAL INSPECTION 

A. All units shall be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the proper placing of 

unit or impair the strength or permanence of the construction. 





B. Minor cracks incidental to the usual methods of manufacture, or chipping resulting from 

customary methods of handling in shipment and delivery, shall not be deemed grounds for 

rejection. 

2.03 SAMPLING AND TESTING 

A. Manufacturer shall provide access to lots ready for delivery to the Owner or his authorized 

representative for testing in accordance with ASTM 936 82 for sampling of material prior to 

commencement of paver placement. 

B. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of three (3) years testing backup data showing 

manufactured products that meet and exceed ASTM 936-82 when tested in compliance with 

ASTM C-140. 

C. Sampling shall be random with a minimum of nine (9) specimens per 20,000 sq. ft. per 

product shape and size with repeated samples taken every additional 20,000 sq. ft. or a 

fraction thereof. 

D. Test units in accordance with ASTM for compressive strength, absorption and dimensional 

tolerance. A minimum of three (3) specimens per test required for an average value. Testing 

of full units is preferred. 

2.04 REJECTION 

A. In the event the shipment fails to conform to the specified requirements, the manufacturer 

may sort it, and new test units shall be selected at random by the Owner from the retained lot 

and tested at the expense of the manufacturer. If the second set of test units fails to conform 

to the specified requirements, the entire lot shall be rejected. 

2.05 EXPENSE OF TESTS 

A. The expense of inspection and testing shall be borne by the Owner. 

2.06 BEDDING AND JOINT SAND 

The type of sand used for bedding is often called sand that is suitable for the manufacturing of 

concrete. Sands vary regionally. Screenings and stone dust can be unevenly graded and have 

an excess amount of material passing the No. 200 (75 Hm) sieve. Bedding sands with these 

characteristics should not be used. Contact paver contractors local to the project and confirm 

sand(s) successfully used in previous similar applications. Limestone sand should not be used 

for bedding sand. Mason sands are typically acceptable only for joint sand, provided they meet 

grading requirements as shown in Table 2 of this section. 

A. Bedding and joint sand shall be clean, non-plastic, free from deleterious or foreign matter. 

The sand shall be natural or manufactured from crushed rock. Limestone screenings or stone 

dust shall not be used. When concrete pavers are subject to vehicular traffic, the sands shall 

be as hard as practically available. 

B. Grading of sand samples for the bedding course and joints shall be done according to 

ASTM C136. The bedding sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33 as 

shown in Table 1. 





Table 1 

Grading Requirements for Bedding Sand 

ASTM C 33 

Sieve Size Percent Passing 

3/8 in. (9.5 mm) 

No. 4 (4.75 mm) 

No. 8 (2.36 mm) 

No. 16 (1.18 mm) 

No. 30 (600 µm) 

No. 50 (300 µm) 

No. 100 (150 µm) 

100 

95 to 100 

85 to 100 

50 to 85 

25 to 60 

10 to 30 

2 to 10 

Bedding sand may be used for joint sand. However, extra effort in sweeping and compacting 

the pavers may be required in order to completely fill the joints. If joint sand other than bedding 

sand is used, the gradations shown in Table 2 are recommended. Joint sand should never be 

used for bedding sand. 

C. The joint sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 144 as shown in 

Table 2 below: 

Table 2 

Grading for Joint Sand 

ASTM C 144 

Sieve Size 

No. 4 (4.75 mm) 

No. 8 (2.36 mm) 

No. 16 (1.18 mm) 

No. 30 (600 µm) 

No. 50 (300 µm) 

No. 100 (150 µm) 

No. 200 (75 µm) 

Natural Sand 

Percent Passing 

100 

95 to 100 

70 to 100 

40 to 75 

10 to 35 

2 to 15 

0 



For installations on a compacted aggregate base and soil subgrade, the specifier should be 

aware that the top surface of the pavers may be 1/8 to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm) above the final 

elevations after compaction. This difference in initial and final elevations is to compensate for 

possible minor settling. 





A. Verify that subgrade preparation, compacted density and elevations conform to the specifications. 

Compaction of the soil subgrade to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density per ASTM 

D 698 is recommended. Higher density, or compaction to ASTM D 1557 may be necessary 

for areas subject to continual vehicular traffic. Stabilization of the subgrade and/or base 

material may be necessary with weak or saturated subgrade soils. The Architect/Engineer 

should inspect subgrade preparation, elevations, and conduct density tests for conformance 

to specifications. 

B. Verify that geotextiles, if applicable, have been placed according to specifications. 

C. Verify that aggregate base materials, thickness, compaction, surface tolerances, and 

elevations conform to the specifications. 

Local aggregate base materials typical to those used for flexible pavements or those conforming 

to ASTM D 2940 are recommended. Compaction to not less than 95% Proctor Density in 

accordance with ASTM D 698 is recommended for pedestrian areas. Compaction to not less 

than 98% Modified Proctor Density according to ASTM D 1557 is recommended for vehicular 

areas. The aggregate base should be spread and compacted in uniform layers not exceeding 6 

in. (150 mm) thickness. Recommended base surface tolerance should be plus or minus 3/8 in. 

(10 mm) over a 10 ft. (3 m) straight edge. The Architect/Engineer should inspect geotextile 

materials and placement (if appli-cable), base preparation, surface tolerances, elevations, and 

conduct density tests for conformance to specifications. 

Mechanical tampers are recommended for compaction of soil subgrade and aggregate base 

around lamp standards, utility structures, building edges, curbs, tree wells and other protrusions. 

In areas not accessible to roller compaction equipment, compact to specified density with 

mechanical tampers. 

D. Verify location, type, installation and elevations of edge restraints around the perimeter 

area to be paved. 

E. Verify that base is dry, uniform, even, and ready to support sand, pavers, and imposed 

loads. 

F. Beginning of bedding sand and paver installation means acceptance of base and edge 

restraints. 


A. Spread the sand evenly over the base course and screed to a nominal 1 in. (25 mm) 

thickness, not exceeding 1-1/2 in. (40 mm) thickness. The screeded sand should not be 

disturbed. Place sufficient sand to stay ahead of the laid pavers. Do not use the bedding sand 

to fill depressions in the base surface. 

B. Ensure that pavers are free of foreign materials before installation. 

C. Lay the pavers in the pattern(s) as shown on the drawings. Maintain straight pattern lines. 

D. Joints between the pavers on average shall be between 1/16 in. and 3/16 in. (2 mm to 5 

mm) wide. 

Some paver shapes require a larger joint. Consult manufacturer for recommended joint widths. 

E. Fill gaps at the edges of the paved area with cut pavers or edge units. 





Units cut no smaller than one-third of a whole paver are recommended along edges subject to 

vehicular traffic. 

F. Cut pavers to be placed along the edge with a double blade paver splitter or masonry saw. 

G. Use a low amplitude, high frequency plate vibrator to vibrate the pavers into the sand. Use 

Table 3 below to select size of compaction equipment: 

Table 3 

Compactor Equipment 

Minimum Centrifugal 

Paver Thickness 

Compaction Force 

60 mm 3000 Ibs. (13 kN) 

80 mm 5000 Ibs. (22 kN) 

H. Vibrate the pavers, sweeping dry joint sand into the joints and vibrating until they are full. 

This will require at least two or three passes with the vibrator. Do not vibrate within 3 ft. (1 m) 

of the unrestrained edges of the paving units. 

I. All work to within 3 ft. (1 m) of the laying face must be left fully compacted with sand-filled 

joints at the completion of each day. 

J. Sweep off excess sand when the job is complete. 

K. The final surface elevations shall not deviate more than 3/8 in. (10 mm) under a 10 ft. (3 

m) long straightedge. 

L. The surface elevation of pavers shall be 1/8 in. to 1/4 in. (3 to 6 mm) above adjacent 

drainage inlets, concrete collars or channels. 

M. The resanding as necessary of paver joints shall be accomplished by contractor for a 

period of 90 days after completion of work. 


A. After removal of excess sand, check final elevations for conformance to the drawings. 






SECTION 02520 

PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 



A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, Including General and Supplementary 

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. Extent of portland cement concrete paving is shown on drawings, including curbs, gutter, 

walkways, and pavement. 

B. Prepared subbase is specified in "Earthwork" section. 

C. Concrete and related materials are specified in Division 3. 

D. Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 7. 


A. Provide samples, manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials' certifications as 

required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers and sealers. 


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein 

specified. 

1.05 JOB CONDITIONS 

A. Traffic control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other 

construction activities. 



A. Forms: 

1. Coordinate with requirements for "temporary Facilities" specified in Division 1. 

1. Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement 

during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until 

removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. 

2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as 

required. 

PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - Page 1 of 5




B. Coat forms with a non-staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface surfaces 

of concrete. 

C. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain, cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. 

D. Reinforcing bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 

E. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with 

ends square and free of burrs. 

F. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, Internally and externally threaded. Design hook 

bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during 

concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. 

G. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for 

concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as 

required. 

H. Expansion Joint Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for 

preformed expansion joint fillers and sealers. 

I. Anti-spalling Compound: Combination of boiled linseed oil and mineral spirits, complying 

with AASHTO M-233. 

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may 

be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. "Masterseal"; Master Builders. 

b. "Spartan-Cote"; The Burke Co. 

c. "Kure-n-Seal"; Sonneborn-Contech. 

d. "Hardtop"; Gifford-Hill. 

J. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, 2-component material suitable for use on dry or damp 

surfaces. Provide material "Type,” "Grade,” and "Class" to suit project requirements. 

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which 

may be incorporated in the work include but are not limited to the following. 

2.02 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN, AND TESTING 

a. "Epoxtite"; A.C. Horn. 

b. "Patch and Bond Epoxy"; The Burke Co. 

c. "Sure-Poxy"; Kaufman Products Inc. 

A. Comply with requirements of applicable Drawings and Division 3 sections for concrete mix 

design and testing. 



A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing 

concrete. 





B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and need for additional 

compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are 

ready to receive paving. 

3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION 

A. Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Install forms to allow continuous 

progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete 

placement. 

B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 

1. Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 

2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 

C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required ensuring separation 

from concrete without damage. 

3.03 REINFORCEMENT 

A. Locate, place, and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 sections, unless 

otherwise indicated. 

3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT 

A. General: Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete, 

and as herein specified. 

B. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. 

Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is 

placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at 

required finish elevation and alignment. 

C. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along 

face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away 

from joint assembles, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for 

hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of 

reinforcing dowels, and joint devices. 

D. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or 

partially hardened concrete surfaces. 

E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far as 

possible. If interrupted for more than ½ hour, place a construction joint. 

F. When adjacent pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment 

on concrete until pavement has attained sufficient strength to carry loads without injury. 

G. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic matching may be used for curb and gutter placement at 

Contractor's option. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and 

laboratory test results that meet or exceed minimums specified. Machine placement must 

produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as 

specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with 

formed concrete as specified. 





3.05 JOINTS 

A. General: 

1. Construct expansion, weakened-plane concrete. Construct transverse joints at 

right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated. 

2. When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously 

placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: 

1. Provide Weakened-Plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as 

shown on drawings. Construct weakened-plane joints for a depth equal to at 

least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows: 

C. Construction Joints: 

a. Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by 

grooming top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing 

edges with a joiner. 

1. Place construction Joints at end of placements and at locations where placement 

operations are stopped for more than ½ hour, except where such placements 

terminate at expansion joints. 

2. Construct joints as shown or, if not shown, use standard metal keyway-section 

forms. 

D. Expansion Joints: 

1. Provide pre-molded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch 

basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects, unless 


2. Locate expansion joints at 50 feet o.c. for each pavement lane unless otherwise 

noted on plans. 

E. Extend Joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than ½ inch or more than 1 inch 

below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint 

filler flush with finished concrete surface. 

F. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. 

Where more than one length is required, lace or clip Joint filler sections together. 

G. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete Remove protection after concrete has been 

placed on both sides of joint. 

H. Fillers and Sealants: comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for 

preparation of joints, materials, installation, and performance. 

3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING 

A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screening and floating. 

Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to 

compact surface and produce uniform texture. 

B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-ft. straightedge. Distribute concrete as 

required to remove surface irregularities and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous 

smoother finish. 





C. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging 

tool, and round to 1/2-inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. Eliminate tool marks on 

concrete surface. 

3.07 CURING 

D. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, 

complete troweling and finish surface as follows: 

1. Broom finish by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface perpendicular 

to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture 

acceptable to Architect. 

E. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, 

clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace 

areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect. 

A. Protect and cure finished concrete paving in compliance with applicable requirements of 

Division 3 sections. Use membrane-forming curing and sealing compound or approved 

moist-curing methods. 

3.08 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS 

A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. 

B. Drill text cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of 

cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with 

portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. 

C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from 

pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, 

maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of 

materials as they occur. 

D. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, disco before final inspection. 






SECTION 02530 

ASPHALT PAVING 



A. Drawings, Geotechnical Report and general provisions of Contract, Including General and 

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. Provide asphalt paving over prepared subbase where indicated: 

1. Parking areas. 

2. Driveways. 

B. Provide striping for parking, roadway, fire lanes and handicapped markings as indicated 

on drawings. (Refer to Specification Section 02577) 


A. Provide samples, manufacturer’s product data, test reports and materials’ certifications as 

required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers and sealers. 


A. Comply with local governing codes and regulations. 

B. Comply with State highway or transportation department standard specifications, latest 

edition, and with local governing regulations if more stringent than specified requirements. 

1.05 LAYER DESIGN THICKNESS AND TOLERANCES 

A. Provide prepared subgrade, granular base, bituminous base course and bituminous 

surface course as indicated on the civil drawings. Subgrade shall meet the requirements 

of Section 02200 – Earthwork and the Geotechnical Report. 

B. Construction Tolerances: Test finished surface of each course for smoothness using 10 

foot straightedge, applied parallel with, and at right angles to, centerline of paved area. 

Surfaces will not be accepted if exceeding the following tolerances and smoothness: 

1. Base Course Thickness: Within ½ inch. 

2. Surface Course Thickness: Within ¼ inch. 

3. Base Course Surface Smoothness: Within ¼ inch. 

4. Surface Course Surface Smoothness: Within 3/16 inch. No ponding acceptable. 

5. Crowned Surfaces: Within ¼ inch from template. 


A. Weather limitations: 

1. Apply prime and tack coats when ambient temperature is above 50º F, and when 

temperature has not been below 35º F for 12 hours immediately prior to 

application. Do not apply when base is wet, frozen or contains an excess of 

moisture. 

2. Base course mixtures shall not be placed when either the temperature of the 

surface on which the mixture is to be placed is below 40º F, on any wet or frozen 

surface, or when weather conditions prevent the proper handling and finishing 

of the mixture. 

3. Surface course mixtures shall not be placed when either the air temperature or 

the temperature of the surface on which the mixture is to be placed is below 50º 

F, on any wet or frozen surface, or when weather conditions prevent the proper 

handling or finishing of the mixture. 

ASPHALT PAVING 02530 - Page 1 of 3






A. Use locally available materials and gradations, which exhibit a satisfactory record of 

previous installations. 

B. Base Course Aggregate: Sound, angular crushed stone or crushed gravel, sand, stone or 

screenings which comply with the Geotechnical Report and civil drawings criteria for base 

course aggregate. 

C. Surface Course Aggregate: Crushed stone or crushed gravel and sharp-edged natural 

sand which comply with the Geotechnical Report and civil drawings criteria for surface 

course aggregate. 

D. Mineral Filler: Rock, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with ASTM D 242 

unless specified otherwise in the civil drawings and the Geotechnical Report. 

E. Asphalt Cement: Comply with ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material; ASTM D 946 

for penetration-graded materials unless specified otherwise in the civil drawings and the 

Geotechnical Report. 

2.02 ASPHALT-AGGREGATE MIXTURE 

A. Provide plant-mixed, hot-laid asphalt-aggregate mixture complying with ASTM D 3515, 

complying with local DOT and DPW regulations, as specified and/or detailed on the civil 

drawings and in the Geotechnical Report. 



A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before applying 

prime coat. Proof roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and areas 

requiring additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until deficient subbase areas 

have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. 

B. Refer to the specified and/or detailed pavement sections and associated DOT 

specifications for prime and tack coat criteria, application rates and necessity. 


A. Placing Mix: Place asphalt concrete mix on prepared surface, spread and strike-off. 

Spread mixture at minimum temperature of 275º F. Place inaccessible and small areas by 

hand. Place each course to required grade, cross-section and compacted thickness. 

Beginning of work means acceptance of subbase. 

1. Paver Placing: Place in strips not less than 10 feet wide, unless otherwise 

acceptable to Architect. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place 

succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete base 

course for a section before placing surface course. 

2. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive 

days’ work, to ensure continuous bond between adjoining work. Construct joints 

to have same texture, density and smoothness as other sections of asphalt 

concrete course. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat. 

B. Rolling: Begin rolling when mixture will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 

Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas 

inaccessible to rollers. 

1. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately 

following rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown 

rolling, and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling, if required, with hot 

material. 

2. Second Rolling: Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is 

hot. Continue second rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted. 





3. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for 

removal of roller marks. Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and 

course has attained maximum density. 

C. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective 

areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh hot asphalt concrete. Compact by rolling to 

maximum density and smoothness. 

D. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until pavement 

has cooled and hardened. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has 

cooled enough not to become marked. 






SECTION 02577 

PAVEMENT MARKING 



A. Work included: Provide pavement marking in the types and arrangements shown on the 

Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 

B. Related work: 


1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited 

to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of 

these Specifications. 

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced in 

the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and 

the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. 


A. Comply with provisions of Section 01300. 

B. Product data: Within 10 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's 

Notice to Proceed, submit: 

1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING 

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 

2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with 

the specified requirements; 

3. Photographs, scale drawings, or other data acceptable to the Architect, showing 

types of graphics proposed to be used. 

A. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions. 


2.01 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT 

A. Provide paint specifically formulated for use as pavement marking in automobile traffic 

areas, and in the colors as indicated on drawings. Verify with local authority. 

B. Acceptable products: 

1. "Traffic Paint" manufactured by J. E. Bauer Company. 

2. "Traffic Paint" manufactured by Tnemec. 

3. "Romark Traffic" manufactured by Glidden-Durkee. 

4. "Traffic and Zone Marking Paint" manufactured by PPG. 

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02577 - Page 1 of 2




2.02 OTHER MATERIALS 

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper 

installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Engineer. 


3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS 

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of thi's Section will be performed. 

Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed 

until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 


A. Secure the Architect's approval of graphics design and layout prior to start of application. 

B. Using proper masking, stencils, and application equipment recommended for the purpose 

by the manufacturer of the approved paint, apply the approved paint in strict accordance 

with its manufacturer's recommendations. 


A. Provide traffic cones, barricades, and other devices needed to protect the paint until it is 

sufficiently dry to withstand traffic. 

3.04 CLEANUP 

A. When paint is thoroughly dry, visually inspect the entire application, and: 

1. Touchup as required to provide clean, straight lines and surfaces throughout. 

2. Using a permanently opaque paint identical in color to the surface on which the 

paint was applied, block out and eliminate all traces fo splashed, tracked, and/or 

spilled pavement marking paint from the background surfaces. 


PAVEMENT MARKINGS 02577 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 02795 

FLEXIBLE WALKWAY 


1.00 GENERAL PROVISIONS 

A. The Contract and General Conditions and all sections within Division 1, General 

Requirements, are made a part of this section of the specifications. 

1.01 WORK INCLUDED 

The work in this section includes, but is not limited to: 

A. Supply and install single pass flexible walkway surfacing system. 

B. Coordinate with other trades and general contractor. 

1.02 WORK NOT INCLUDED 

A. Base materials. 

B. Testing by owner’s representatives on substrate materials used to support the flexible 

walkway surfacing system. Refer to Section 01400 Quality Requirements. 

C. Subgrade drainage. 

1.03 QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Installers shall be trained, approved and certified by the manufacturer. 

B. All necessary material components and applicable overview required to install the single 

pass system shall be provided by the certified technicians. 

C. Special Details: 

1. Compacted; natural stone, crushed stone, recycled concrete, recycled asphalt are 

acceptable “dynamic” substrates when approved by the manufacturer and meet 

design specifications. 

2. A site evaluation on all substrate structural performance shall be conducted by the 

owner or owner’s representative and results to be reviewed by the manufacturer 

for acceptance as an approved substrate prior to installation of the flexible 

walkway surfacing system. 

3. If work scheduled by the manufacturer and their authorized installers could not 

commence on time to do work by others preventing the installation, the 

manufacturer will reschedule their installation date after all deficiencies are 

corrected by the general contractor. 

1.04 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 

A. The owner or authorized owner’ representative and the manufacturer’s representative will 

inspect all work in place for Substantial Completion status. 

1.05 GUARANTEE 

A. See Invitation to Bid Section 22. 

FLEXIBLE WALKWAY 02795 - Page 1 of 3






A. All flexible walkway materials are to be acquired from the manufacturer, their approved 

agents, or approved distributors/manufacturer. 

B. The flexible walkway product is porous, and meets class B fire rating criteria. 

C. Primer to be single component moisture cured urethane. 

D. The urethane binder is 100% MDI based. 

E. Substrate by others is to be a minimum of four inches thick after the compaction process 

reaches a density value of 95% min. 

F. Aggregate will be 3/8” nominal size of type appropriate to the project requirements and/or 

aesthetic design. 

G. Drainage components – reference drawings. 

2.01 PRODUCT PERFORMANCE 

The flexible walkway system will have the following technical specifications: 

A. Accelerated weathering 3000 hours – no change to product. 

B. Thermal stability range of -53 degrees to 212 degrees. 

C. Freeze thaw at 250 cycles – no change to product. 

D. Shall meet or exceed ADA requirements. 


3.00 EVALUATION 

A. Prior to installation of the flexible walkway, certified manufacturer’s approved technicians 

will inspect the substrate visually for performance qualities. If the substrate is found to be 

unsatisfactory for the flexible walkway installation, written and verbal notice will be given to 

authorized representative and general contractor. The notice will contain the suspected 

defects in materials, structural performance or deviation from design specifications of the 

base materials. 

3.01 COMMENCING WORK AFTER REMEDIAL ACTIONS BY OTHERS 

A. Installation will take place only after all known defects in the substrate are repaired, tested 

and approved by the proper authorities overseeing the project. 

B. Prior to the installation of the flexible walkway materials, the owner shall have a qualified 

civil or soils engineering firm determine the structural properties of the proper base 

material and that it has been placed to a minimum of 95% compaction. 

3.02 CONDITIONS 

A. An ambient temperature of 50 degrees F or greater with a relative humidity reading of 

under 75% shall prevail during the installation, and for at least 24 hours after the 

completion time of that day’s work, to allow for proper curing of the materials; or 

manufacturer’s recommendations. 

B. All materials incorporated into the flexible pavement system are to be protected before, 

during and after installation until fully cured. 

C. Work will not take place when it is raining or the humidity is too high to install flexible 

pavement materials. 






A. All rubber and stone materials are to be transported in weather resistant bags protecting 

against adverse weather conditions. 

B. The urethane will be shipped in containers that protect against water intrusion. 

C. If freezing overnight temperatures are anticipated, heated storage will be provided by the 

contractor for proper storage of the urethane binding agent. 


A. Technicians performing the flexible pavement installation will be certified by the 

manufacturer. 

B. Primer where required by contract will be applied at a rate of 300 square feet per gallon by 

use of a sprayer, roller, brush or mechanical device; or manufacturer’s recommendations. 

C. Blend only dry stone, dry rubber granules and urethane binder. 

D. Trowel, power screed or roll mixture in place following the manufacturer’s approved 

procedures and details. 

E. The layer of flexible pavement shall be allowed to cure with no foot, machine, load bearing 

equipment or vehicle traffic for a minimum of 24 hours from the end of the day’s work; or 

manufacturer’s recommendations. 

3.05 MONITORING AND MAINTENANCE 

A. The manufacturer’s installer shall be responsible for the entire installation of the contracted 

work. The installer shall monitor the curing of the materials until it has cured to insure no 

damage has occurred prior to acceptance of the work by the owner or authorized 

representative. 

B. Once the flexible walkway is installed and fully cured, cleaning may be accomplished by 

use of a leaf blower, broom or hose as needed. 






SECTION 02810 

IRRIGATION SYSTEM 



A. Provide an underground irrigation system as shown and specified. The work includes: 


1. Automatic/manual irrigation system including piping, fittings, sprinkler heads, and 

accessories. 

2. Valves, backflow preventer, and fittings. 

3. Controller, control wire and mounting accessories. 

4. Testing 

5. Excavating and backfilling irrigation system work. 

6. Associated plumbing and accessories to complete the system. 

7. Extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement (ALTERNATE BID). 

A. lnstaller’s Qualifications: 

1. Minimum of 5 years experience installing irrigation systems of comparable size. 

2. Must be State Licensed Irrigator. 

1.03 MATERIAL AND METHODS: 

A. Materials, equipment, and methods of installation shall comply with the following codes 

and standards: 

1. Uniform Plumbing Code,(UPC)published by the Western Plumbing Officials’ 

Assoc. 

2. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): National Electric code. 

3. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). 

4. National Sanitation Foundation, (NSF). 

5. The Irrigation Association, (IA). 

1.04 REFERENCS 

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

ASTM D2239 - Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside 

Diameter 

ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR-Series) 

ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cement for poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings 

ASTM D2609 - Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe 

ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and 

Fittings 

National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) 

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC) 

1.05 SUBMITTALS (Refer to Section 01300) 

A. Project Record Documents: 

As-Built Drawings: Furnish two sets, noting exact locations of elements and changes to 

Construction Drawings. 

IRRIGATION SYSTEM 02810 - Page 1 of 8




Operation Manual: Furnish two copies, bound in 1 inch diameter three ring binders, 

indexed and tabbed for easy reference, and labeled on spine and cover. Manual 

shall include following: 

a. Approved submittals as specified herein. 

b. Installation instructions including mounting details for control valves. 

c. Operating Instructions: 

1) Winterization procedures 

2) Recommended operation sequence, frequency, and length of 

operation cycle, as per relationship to estimated absorption rate, 

evaporation rate, and anticipated flow. 

d. Maintenance Instructions: 

1) Manufacturers' product data, installation, and maintenance 

instructions. 

2) Copies of completed warranty information. Contractor to complete and 

mail necessary warranty registration information to manufacturer 

keeping copies for 

B. Controller Chart: Prepare color coded chart, reduced in size, containing same plan 

information as As-Built drawings, and laminated in plastic on both sides, with following 

specific information: 

1. Note routing of control wires. 

2. Identify valves as to size, station number shown on controller, and type of 

irrigation head (e.g. spray head, turf head) on each valve. 

3. Delineate each station's limits of coverage by color-coding, with each station 

having different color showing its zone with zone number designation. 


A. Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration. 

B. Provide secure, locked storage for valves, sprinkler heads, and similar components that 

cannot be immediately replaced, to prevent installation delays. 


A. Call proper authorities to locate all underground utilities. 

B. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns, and other features designated to remain as part of 

the final landscape work. 

C. Promptly notify the Landscape Architect of unexpected sub-surface conditions. 

D. Irrigation system layout is diagrammatic. Exact locations of piping, sprinkler heads, 

valves, and other components shall be established by Contractor in the field at time of 

installation and approved by the Landscape Architect. 

1.08 WARRANTY 

A. Guarantee installation for 1 year from date of final acceptance for the following: 

1. Defects in material, equipment, and workmanship. 

2. Repair of damage to premises resulting from leaks or other defects in material, 

equipment, and workmanship to satisfaction of Owner. 

B. Repairs, if required, shall be done promptly at no cost to Owner. 

C. Parts Manufacturers’ warranties shall be provided to Owner. 






A. Maintenance Agreement (ALTERNATE BID): 

1. Prior to beginning installation, execute bonded, optional Extended 2-Year 

Maintenance Agreement with Owner for period of 2 years from date of Final 

Acceptance for the following: 

a. Spring start-up of system in accordance with Section 02900. 

b. Monthly checks of system during operating season. 

c. Winterization of system in accordance with Section 02900. 

2. Costs for additional work required for repair of items not covered by warranty 

(e.g. damage by others) shall be negotiated between Owner and Contractor prior 

to initiation of any repairs. 

3. Costs for Extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement are over and above 

Contract Sum, and shall not be included in construction price. Payment for 

extended maintenance by Owner shall occur upon completion of scheduled 

service and additional work, if any, as it occurs on monthly basis throughout 

duration of Extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement. 



A. Acceptable manufacturers shall include: 

Rain Bird Sales, Inc. - Turf Division 

The Toro Company - Irrigation Division 

L.R. Nelson Corporation - Turf Division 

2.02 PIPE 

A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe over 1 inch diameter shall conform to ASTM D2241, SDR 

21, and Class 200. 

B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe 1 inch diameter and under shall conform to ASTM D2241, 

SDR 13.5, and Class 315. 

C. Flexible Polyethylene (PE): Pipe shall conform to ASTM D2239, SDR 11.5, PE23, rated at 

100 PSI, National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved. Subject to approval of Owner, 

PE shall be used for laterals in areas where ground is subject to freezing for extended 

periods of time each year. 

D. Joints: 

1. Pipe sizes 2 1/2 inch or smaller shall have bell and socket joints. 

E. Pipe sizes larger than 2 1/2 inch shall have snap connections with rubber gasket joints. 

Thrust blocking shall be required in accordance with Section 02510. 

F. Fittings: 

1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings: Fittings shall conform to ASTM D2241, Schedule 

40, and Molded. 

2. Flexible Polyethylene (PE) Lateral Line Fittings: Fittings shall conform to ASTM 

D2609, Type 1 PVC insert fittings designed for used with this type of pipe. Pipe 

and fittings shall be joined with stainless steel pinch clamps or worm gear clamps, 

including stainless steel screw. 

G. Risers above finished grade shall be black in color or receive 2 coats of black exterior semigloss 

enamel paint if a color other than black. 


A. Sleeves: Sleeves for pipes passing beneath paving shall conform to ASTM D2241, 

Schedule 40. Minimum diameter of 2 inch or 2 sizes larger than pipe scheduled to pass 

through them. 

B. PVC Solvent Cement: Cement shall conform to ASTM D2564. 





C. Swing Joint Connections: Connections between heads and laterals shall be thick wall, 

flexible, polyethylene pipe, with fittings that have male barbs on one end and either male or 

female screw ends opposite. Glue fittings and female barb adapters are not allowed. 

2.04 CUTOFF OR ISOLATION VALVES 

A. 3 Inches or Smaller: Ball valves as manufactured by Red-White Valve Corporation, 

Carson, CA. 

B. Larger than 3 inches: Cast iron and bronze mechanical joint valves, fusion bonded epoxy 

coated exterior and interior, Resilient Wedge Valve as manufactured by Clow Valve Co., 

Oskaloosa, IA. 

3. Provide a valve key and cast iron cylindrical valve box with top with each valve. 

2.05 QUICK COUPLER VALVES 

A. Provide be one of following: 

1. Rain Bird model 44NP Valve with model 33K Key 

2. Toro 470 Series Valve and Coupler Key 

3. Nelson Model 7643 Valve with Model 7640 Coupler Key and Model 8649 Locking 

Top Wrench. 

B. Provide each valve with key having 3/4 inch male top pipe threads for hose connection. 

2.06 ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVES 

A. Provide one of the following: 

1. Rain Bird PEB Series electric remote control valves 

2. Toro 252 Series plastic valves 

3. Nelson Model 7900 Series plastic valves 

B. Provide watertight connectors as Scotch Lock or Rain Bird Snap Tight connectors with 

sealant for wiring connections. 

2.07 MASTER VALVES 

A. Master valves shall be electric control valve as specified herein. 

B. Size of valve shall be same as diameter of main line pipe as noted on the drawings. 

C. Provide watertight connectors as Scotch Lock or Rain Bird Snap Tight connectors with 

sealant for wiring connections. 

2.08 SPRINKLER HEADS 

A. Full or Part Circle Pop-Up Fixed Spray Sprinkler: 

1. Acceptable Products: 

a. Rain Bird 1800 Series nozzles with 1800 Series sprinklers having Pressure 

Regulating (PRS) and Seal-A-Matic (SAM) features. 

b. Toro 570 Series plastic nozzles with 570C Series sprinklers having Pressure 

Compensating Devices (PCD) and optional check valve unit. 

c. Nelson 6400 Series with Anti-Drain Valves (ADV) with Pressure Compensating 

Screens (PCS). 

2. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, pop-up heights shall be: 

a. Turf - 4 inches 

b. Shrub and groundcover beds - 12 inches 

B. Full or Part Circle Pop-up Gear Driven Rotor Sprinkler. 

1. Acceptable Products: 

a. Rain Bird Turf Bird Rotor Pop-up Sprinkler Series, R-50C Commercial 

Series, R-70 Series, with Seal-A-Matic (SAM) check valve. 

b. Toro Super 700 Sprinklers Series S700C Commercial, with check valve. 





c. Nelson Pro 6000 and 6500 Series Gear Drives with Anti-Drain Valves (ADV). 

2.09 VALVE BOX 

A. Valve boxes shall be manufactured by Ametek, Plymouth Products Division, Sheboygan 

WI. No irrigation valve box shall be placed in pavement areas unless otherwise shown on 

the Drawings. 

1. When used with single valve, provide Economy Turf Box with green colored snap 

fit cover labeled "Valve Box". 

2. When used with 2 or more valves, provide Jumbo Box with 20 inch x 14 inch cover 

opening with cover labeled "Control Valve". 

2.10 AUTOMATIC LOW POINT DRAIN VALVES 

A. Automatic drain valves shall be Rain Bird Model Number 16A, FDV, or equal by acceptable 

manufacturers specified above. 

2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER 

A. Controller shall have wall mount, weatherproof, lockable cabinet with internal transformer. 

Acceptable products include: 

1. Rain Bird RC-4C, RC-7C, RC-1260C. 

2. Toro Vision II Plus Series Controller 

3. Nelson 8900 Series Controller 

2.12 CONTROL WIRE 

A. Number 14-size minimum copper wire, U. L. approved for underground direct burial. 

1. Colored wire shall have same color-coding as shown on controller. 

2. Provide single wire from controller to each valve. 

3. Provide common neutral from controller to each valve. 

2.13 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR 

A. Comply with requirements and codes of local governing authority regarding backflow 

prevention. 

B. Provide the necessary materials, insulation/draining capabilities, and insulated fiberglass 

enclosure, dark green in color. 

C. Backflow preventors shall be type suitable for use in high hazard cross connection to 

potable water system as manufactured by Watts Regulator Company, Lawrence, Ma. 

1. Reduced pressure backflow preventors shall be No. 909 series Reduced Pressure 

Principle Backflow Preventor. 

2. Double check valve assembly backflow preventors shall be No. 709 series Double 

Check Valve Assembly. 

3. In absence of local codes or requirements, provide double check assembly 

backflow preventor installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

2.14 RAINFALL SENSOR 

A. Provide rainfall sensor to cancel operation of controller during substantial rainfall. 

Acceptable products include: 

1. Mini-Click Rain Sensor manufactured by Glen-Hilton 

2. Equivalent as manufactured by Rain Bird, Toro, or Nelson. 





2.15 METER 

A. Meter box shall conform to requirements of local utility company. 



A. Pressure/Flow Test: Conduct tests at the irrigation water tap or meter location and provide 

written re-sults to Owner including the following information: 

1. Static pressure in psi 

2. Residual pressure in psi 

3. Flow in gpm 

B. Prior to installation, receive approval from General Contractor to proceed with construction. 

C. Contractor shall field verify all aboveground and underground utilities prior to start of work. 


A. Trenching and Backfilling: 

1. Trenching and backfilling shall conform to Section 02300. 

2. Excavate trench to proper depth as shown or specified. 

3. Minimum trench width shall be 3 1/2 inches. 

4. Overexcavate trenches deeper than required in soils containing rock or other 

hard material that might damage pipe and backfill to proper depth with selected 

fine earth or sand. 

5. Backfill and hand tamp overexcavation prior to installing piping. 

6. Keep trenches free of obstructions and debris that would damage pipe. 

7. Sprinkler piping shall not be installed in same trench as heating duct, electric 

ducts, storm and sanitary sewer lines, water and gas mains. 

B. Do not cut sidewalks, paved areas, or curb and gutter when trenching for piping unless 

otherwise noted on the Drawings. 

1. Provide sleeves as specified in Part 2 above under paving prior to installation of 

paving. 

2. Auger, bore, or tunnel under existing paving without disturbing pavement. 

Damaged pavement shall be removed and replaced in accordance with Section 

02740 or 02751. 

3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Minimum cover from top of piping to finished grade shall be provided as follows: 

1. Lawn and planting areas: 

a. Mains and Control Valves: 18 inches 

b. Laterals: 12 inches 

2. Drives or parking areas: 24 inches 

B. Clearances: Maintain 3 inch minimum horizontal clearance between parallel lines in 

same trench or vertical clearance between lines crossing at angles. 

C. Special Requirements - PVC and PE pipe: 

1. Snake pipe in trench at least 1 foot per 100 feet of pipe to allow for thermal 

expansion. 

2. Pipe laterals shall be laid to drain to low point drains located at lowest elevations 

of each zone. 

D. Rest full length of pipe section on bed of trench, excavating recesses to accommodate 

joints. Do not lay pipe on unstable material or blocking, or when in opinion of Owner 

conditions are unsuitable. 





E. Threaded Plastic Pipe Jointing: 

1. Do not use solvent cement on threaded joints. 

2. Wrap joints with Teflon tape or use virgin Teflon lubricant. 

F. Bell and Socket Plastic Pipe Jointing: Cement joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. 

3.04 SLEEVING 

A. Provide sleeves for both piping and control wiring where either passes under paved 

surfaces. 

1. Depths of sleeves shall be same as that required for piping at each location or 

condition. 

2. Extend sleeves 12 inches beyond paving at each end. 

3. Install permanent benchmark at top of curbs for reference to sleeve locations. 

3.05 AUTOMATIC DRAIN VALVES 

3.06 VALVES 

A. Provide automatic low point drains on all zones. Provide two valves at lowest points of 

each zone, with each drain installed above a 12 inch x 12 inch x 12 inch deep area of 

coarse gravel. 

A. Do not locate beneath paved surfaces. 

B. Install plumb to within 1/16 inch. 

C. Locate within valve box with 6 inch deep layer of coarse gravel beneath bottom of valve. 

D. Top of quick coupler valves shall be 6 inches to top of valve box. Top of gravel layer shall 

be 3 inches below top of valve. 

E. Master Valve (if required on the Drawings): 

1. Locate immediately behind backflow preventor. 

2. Valve shall be energized by master valve circuit on automatic controller. 

3.07 SPRINKLERS 

A. Install plumb to within 1/16 inch with top collar, not nozzle, flush with finish grade. 

B. Provide swing joint with each sprinkler except where entire head is raised above grade 

and/or where rigid riser piping is required. 

C. Heads adjacent to paving and curb: Locate between 6 and 12 inches from edge of paving 

or back of curb to prevent car overhang to conflict with a fully extended sprinkler. 

3.08 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND CONTROL WIRE 

A. Conform to the National Electrical Code (NEC) and local electrical codes. 

B. Provide electrical connection to system as designated on the Drawings and as specified 

herein. 

C. Wire Placement: 

1. Do not run control and power supply wiring in same conduit. 

2. Provide continuous runs of wire between controller and valves. Splices shall be 

made with one of following: 

a. Watertight below ground electrical junction boxes. 

b. Water-tight connectors, such as utilized for valves, and located within 

valve box for ease of locating. 

c. The location of electrical splices shall be shown on the As-Built 

drawings. 

3. Bury control wire beside pipe in same trench. Bundle and tape together at not 

more than 10 ft in-tervals. 





D. Expansion Loops: Construct by wrapping wire around 1/2 inch diameter pipe to create 

coil. A 3 foot section of wire shall be used to create 12 inch coil with 6 foot section being 

used to create 24 inch coil. 

1. Provide 12 inch coils at each wire splice, not including valves, and at each 

change of wire direction. 

2. Provide 24 inch coils at each control valve and where each valve enters conduit 

for automatic controller. 

3.09 BACKFILLING 

A. Sand or fine-grained soils shall be used for initial backfill to sufficient depth to prevent 

damage to pipe from rocks or other debris during compaction of subsequent backfill. 

B. Fill trench to within 3 inches of finish grade with excavated soil and compact in accordance 

with Section 02300. 

C. Fill top 3 inches with existing topsoil in planting or turf areas and wheel roll until 

compaction of backfill is same as surrounding soil. 

D. Grade backfilled trench uniform with surrounding grades. 

3.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR 

A. Comply with local codes for installation of backflow preventor. In absence of local codes, 

install in ac-cordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 

B. Provide combination of drains and quick coupler valves to accommodate winterization of 

entire system by forced air. Submit materials and methods to Owner for consideration and 

receive approval prior to installation of work. 

3.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER 

A. Location and installation shall be as shown on the Drawings and approved by Owner prior 

to installa-tion. 

B. Provide rigid conduits for both power supply and control wiring. 

1. Control wire conduit shall extend to 18 inches below grade. 

2. Secure conduit to wall with anchors and screws. 

C. Provide electrical grounding for controller in accordance with manufacturer's written 

instructions. 


A. Inspection and Adjustments: Following installation, make final adjustments to lawn 

irrigation system prior to Owner's final inspection. 

1. Flush system completely, with nozzles and screens removed, to extract debris. 

2. Verify sprinkler operation and alignment for direction of throw. Correct as 

necessary. 

3. Check pop-up spray nozzling for proper arc of spray with no overthrow onto 

pavement. Adjust nozzles as necessary for proper throw. 

4. Insure uniform distribution exists. 

5. Insure proper sprinkler head operational after landscaping and/or sod installation. 

B. Demonstration: Following final adjustment, operate entire installation to demonstrate 

complete and successful operation of equipment. 






SECTION 03100 

CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 



A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. 

B. Openings for other work. 

C. Form accessories. 

D. Form stripping. 


A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code 

requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. 


2.01 PREFABRICATED FORMS 

A. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gage matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of 

concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. 

2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES 

A. Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, 

free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch in concrete surface. 

B. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, 22 gage thick, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, 

anchors for securing to concrete formwork. 

C. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and 

character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. 

D. Waterstops: Rubber, minimum 1,750 psi tensile strength, minimum 50 degrees F to plus 175 

degrees F working temperature range, 4 inch wide, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile, 

preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing. 



A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree 


3.02 ERECTION - FORMWORK 

A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements. 

B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to 

overstressing by construction loads. 

C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete 

during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores. 

D. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. 

E. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings. 

F. Provide fillet strips on external corners of beams, joists, and columns. 

G. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from 

moisture or crushing. 

H. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to 

formwork. 

If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over reinforcement, 

request instructions from Owner's Representative before proceeding. 

CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 03100 - Page 1 of 2




3.03 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS 

A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete 

work. 

B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. 

C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, 

sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. 

D. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and 

plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. 

E. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous without 

displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight. 

F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and 

inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. 

3.04 FORM CLEANING 

A. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 

1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that 

water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports. 

2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts. Do 

not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed within 

heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter. 

3.05 FORMWORK TOLERANCES 

A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301. 


A. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork 

design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure. 

3.07 FORM REMOVAL 

A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight 

and imposed loads. 

B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces 

scheduled for exposure to view. 


CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES 03100 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 03200 

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 



A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete. 

B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement. 


A. Perform work of this section in accordance with CRSI (DA4). 



A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 

B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, plain type. 

C. Reinforcement Accessories: 

1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 

2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of 

reinforcement during concrete placement. 

3. Provide stainless steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 


A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice. 

B. Welding of reinforcement is not permitted. 

PART 3 

EXECUTION 

NOT USED 


CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03200 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 03300 

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 



A. Concrete formwork. 

B. Floors and slabs on grade. 

C. Concrete shear walls, elevator shaft walls, and foundation walls. 

D. Concrete reinforcement. 

E. Joint devices associated with concrete work. 

F. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, flagpole bases, 

thrust blocks, and manholes. 

G. Concrete curing. 





2.01 FORMWORK 

A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand 

hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. 

1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will provide 

smooth, stain-free final appearance. 

2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with 

application of coatings. 

3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete surface. 


A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 

B. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, plain type. 

C. Reinforcement Accessories: 

1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 

2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of 

reinforcement during concrete placement. 

3. Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement 

within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS 

A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal Portland type. 

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 

C. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 

2.04 ADMIXTURES 

A. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. 

B. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type A - Water Reducing, Type C - Accelerating, and Type G 

- Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding. 

1. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight 

of cement. 

2.05 CURING & SEALER 

A. Refer to Section 07191. 

CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - Page 1 of 3




2.06 FINISH & SEALERS 

A. Stained concrete; refer to Section 03301. 

B. Sealed concrete floors; refer to Section 07191. 

2.06 JOINT DEVICES AND MATERIALS 

A. Waterstops: Rubber type, COE CRD-C 513. 

B. Joint Filler: ASTM D 1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/4 inch thick; tongue and 

groove profile. 

2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN (Refer to Structural Drawings) 

A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. 

B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis of 

field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301. 

1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Owner's 

Representative for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 

C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended 

by manufacturer. 

D. Normal Weight Concrete: 

1. Compressive Strength, per ASTM C 39 at 28 days: in accordance with drawings. 

2. Total Air Content: Per Drawings. 

3. Maximum Slump: Per Drawings. 

2.08 MIXING 

A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch not 

less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. 

B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94. 



A. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form 

accessories. 

B. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in 

accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

C. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert 

steel dowels and pack solid with epoxy grout. 

D. Install 6 mil. vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal 

watertight by taping edges and ends. 

3.02 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT 

A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and 

accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete 

coverage required for protection. 

3.03 PLACING CONCRETE 

A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. 

B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R. 

C. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler. 

D. Place joint filler in floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set top to required elevations. Secure 

to resist movement by wet concrete. 

E. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. 

F. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

G. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set 

top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete. 

H. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur. 





I. Saw cut joints within plans the same day as the concrete is placed. As soon as the concrete has 

hardened sufficiently to prevent raveling or dislodging of aggregates. This will typically be from 1 

hour in hot weather to 4 hours in cold weather after completing the finishing of the slab in that joint 

location. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into ¼” depth of slab thickness. 

J. Do not add water to concrete mix. 

3.04 CONCRETE FINISHING 

A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. 

B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. 

C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more 

in height. Provide finish as follows: 

1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not 

more than 24 hours after form removal. 

D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows: 

1. Motorized powered – (hand operated or riding) steel trowel surfaces that will receive 

carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile. 

2. Motorized powered – (hand operated or riding) steel trowel surfaces that will be left exposed. 

3. Make successive passes with increased pressure to produce a smooth floor. Stop just prior to 

creating dark trowel burns. 

4. No sprinkling of water or cement while finishing which would cause dusting and scaling. 

E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at 

1:100 nominal. 

3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION 

A. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period 

necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. 

1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days. 

2. High early strength concrete: Not less than 4 days. 

B. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period. 

C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 

1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep 

continuously moist for not less than three days by water-fog spray or saturated burlap. 

2. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry. 

a. Curing compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate 

recommended by manufacturer. Confirm compatibility to stained concrete finishes, glues 

and concrete sealers. 

3.06 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE 

A. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Owner's Representative. 

The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. 



Bridgestone Retail Operations LLC 



SECTION 03331 

POLISHED AND STAINED CONCRETE FLOOR 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and 

Division 1 Specification sections, apply to Work of this Section. 

B. Section Includes: 

1. Mechanical grinding of floor surface with diamonds. 

2. Solvent-based Polished Concrete Dye floor finish for Interior use. 

3. Approved chemical reactive concrete stabilizer to enhance density and hardness of concrete. 

4. Floor Finish: final polished with a 400-grit diamond resin and burnished 

5. Approved Cleanser. 

6. Polish: high-speed floor burnisher pad to heat cure 

7. Slip and skip resistance to exceed OSHA and ADAAG recommendations for Static Co- 

Efficient of Friction Test (SCOF wet and dry) for hard surfaces. 

C. Related Sections: 

1. Division 3 Section “Cast-In-Place” for general applications of concrete. 


A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data sheets and installation instructions for each product 

specified. 

B. Samples for Initial Selection provided by Manufacturer per Specifier’s Requirements: 

Manufacturer’s color charts showing full range of colors available. 

C. Qualification Data: For firms proposing to do polished concrete floors, include lists of completed 

projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of dye and densifier products shall have minimum 3 

years experience in the production of chemical dyes and densifiers. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 10 years experience in dyeing applications and polished concrete 

floors. Applicator shall be Certified by Manufacturer. 

C. Substitutions: The use of any products other than those specified shall be considered providing 

that the Contractor requests its use in writing within 10 days prior to bid date. This request shall be 

accompanied by: 

1. A certificate of compliance, along with product and installation data, from the material 

manufacturer stating that the proposed products meet or exceed the requirements specified 

for application of a dye to polished concrete with densifier. 

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each specified material from same source and maintain high degree of 

consistency in workmanship throughout Project. 

E. Assure that all products used in the polished concrete floor are compatible with one another. 


A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with legible manufacturer’s 

identification and information. 

B. Store specified products in conditions recommended by the manufacturer. 

POLISHED AND STAINED CONCRETE FLOOR 03331 Page 1 of 3





A. Environmental Conditions: Maintain an ambient temperature of between 50 o and 90 o F during 

application and at least 48 hours after application. 

B. Protection: Precautions shall be taken to avoid damage or contamination of any surfaces near 

the work zone. Protect completed dye work from moisture or contamination. 

C. All equipment must be diapered and have non-marking tires. Do not allow pipe cutting or 

welding to be performed on the slab. Do not use red or blue chalk lines, as they may 

permanently stain concrete. Orange is recommended. 

1.06 PRE-JOB CONFERENCE 

A. One week prior to the placement of solvent-based Dye and Densifier a meeting will be held to 

discuss the project and application of materials. 

B. It is suggested that that the Owner, General Contractor, Subcontractor and a Manufacturer 

Representative be present. 


2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 

A. Manufacturer: Diamashield, LLC, 32401 Industrial Drive, Madison Heights, MI 48071. Office: 

248-228-3250, Fax: 248-228-3255. Contact: Travis Silbley; Cell: 313-510-6149; Email: 

tsibley@diamasheild.com. 

B. Manufacturer: Densifier to be Retroplate 99, Diama Guard, or approved equal. 


A. Solvent-based Polished Concrete Dye: AmeriPolish solvent-based dye by ADCSC is an 

environmentally friendly dye formulated to penetrate concrete and cementitious surfaces to provide 

a translucent color enhancement of the concrete in conjunction with densified and polished 

concrete. 

1. Color: Refer to drawings. 

B. Densifier: 

1. Solvent based Retroplate 99, lithium based Diama Guard or approved equal. 

C. Concrete floor finished to a 400 resin and burnished polish. 

D. Joint Sealant: Provide joint sealant as specified by manufacturer for crack management. Material 

shall be colored to match proposed finish. 



A. Verification of Conditions: Contractor and Owner’s Representative shall examine areas and 

conditions under which work will be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and 

timely completion of work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. New Concrete: 

1. Newly placed concrete shall be sufficiently cured for a recommended 28 days. 

2. Cure concrete flatwork with new, unwrinkled, non-staining, high quality curing paper or a 

breathable curing blanket. Do overlap paper or blankets. Tape seams. 

3. Follow AmeriPolish Technical information for diamond grinding steps required prior to 

application of solvent-based dye. 





4. Immediately prior to dyeing, thoroughly clean the concrete. Sweep surfaces and scrub using 

a rotary floor machine and white brush or pad. Use quality commercial cleaning product, such 

as AmeriPolish ProGuard Conditioning Cleaner, formulated for polished concrete, to facilitate 

cleaning. Rinse surfaces after cleaning until rinse water is completely clean. Allow floor to dry 

completely prior to application of floor stain. 

3.03 APPLICATION OF SOLVENT-BASED DYE 

A. Concrete surfaces shall be dry and properly prepared as described above. Protect surrounding 

areas from over-spray, run-off and tracking. 

B. Apply solvent-based dye at the coverage rate recommended by the manufacturer and use 

application equipment described in the manufacturer’s printed technical literature. 

3.04 APPLICATION OF COMMERCIAL DENSIFIER FOR POLISHED CONCRETE 

A. Concrete must be thoroughly cleaned of solvent-based dye residual with water and white pad or 

brush prior to application of commercial densifier specifically manufactured for use with polished 

concrete. 

B. Densifier shall be tested for compatibility with solvent-base dye. 

C. Apply according to manufacturer’s written instructions allowing to saturate the concrete and keep 

wet until the point of rejection. 

3.05 APPLICATION OF STAIN SHIELD 

A. Following final diamond polishing steps, clean floor with water and white pad or Brush, and allow to 

thoroughly dry prior to application of AmeriPolish ProGuard Stain Shield. Apply two light “film” 

applications of Stain Shield, allowing floor to dry between applications. 

3.06 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANT 

A. Installation and curing of joint sealant shall follow manufacturer’s guidelines for specific stain/finish 

system. 


A. Protect floor from traffic and water for at least 72 hours after final application of Pro-guard Stain 

Shield. 


A. Maintain solvent-base dyed and densified floors by sweeping dry soils and particulate on a 

scheduled rotation. Clean spills when they occur and rinse dirt off with water. Wet-clean heavily 

soiled areas by mopping or by scrubbing with a rotary floor machine equipped with a white brush 

and AmeriPolish ProGuard Conditioning Cleaner. 






SECTION 04065 

MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 



A. Mortar for masonry. 

B. Grout for masonry. 

1.02 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 

A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature in compliance with recommendations of 

IMIAWC (CW)(HW). 



A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270: Type S. 

B. Stain Resistant Pointing Mortar: One part Portland cement, 1/8 part hydrated lime, and two parts 

graded (80 mesh) aggregate, proportioned by volume. Add aluminum tristearate, calcium stearate, 

or ammonium stearate equal to 2 percent of Portland cement by weight. 

C. Packaged Dry Mortar: ASTM C 387, Type N, using gray color cement. 

D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type N. 

E. Quicklime: ASTM C 5, non-hydraulic type. 

F. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. 

G. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Iron or chromium oxides with demonstrated stability and 

colorfastness. 

1. Colors: As required to match Owner's Representative's color samples. 

2. Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients without exceeding manufacturer's 

recommended pigment-to-cement ratio. 

H. Water: Clean and potable. 

I. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather. 

J. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity. 

K. Bonding Agent: Latex type. 

2.02 MORTAR MIXING 

A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C 270 

and in quantities needed for immediate use. 

B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. 

C. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and 

coloration. 

D. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar. 

E. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing. 

F. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half 

hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F. 

2.03 GROUT MIXES 

A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type 

in accordance with ASTM C 94. 

1. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less. 

2. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. 

B. Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; provide premixed type in 

accordance with ASTM C 94. 

1. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches. 

MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04065 - Page 1 of 2




2.04 GROUT MIXING 

A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM standards. 

B. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. 



A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces. 

B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with brick masonry units. Brace masonry to resist wet 

grout pressure. 


A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of Section 04811. 

B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids. 

C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by rodding. 

D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout. 

E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces. 

3.03 GROUTING 

A. Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other limitations 

of contract documents. 


MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT 04065 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 04720 

CAST STONE 

PART 1 

GENERAL 

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES: 

A. Architectural cast stone. 

B. Units Required are: 

1. Exterior wall units, including medallions. 

C. Simulated stone veneer. 

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS: 

A. Section 04811 – Unit Masonry Assemblies: Installation of cast stone in conjunction with 

masonry. 

B. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers: Materials and execution methods for sealing soft joints in 

cast stone work. 

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS: 

A. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American 

Concrete Institute International; 2008. 

B. ASTM A 123/A 12M – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron 

and Steel Products; 2002. 

C. ASTM A 185/A 185M – Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, 

for Concrete; 2007. 

D. ASTM A 615/A 615M – Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for 

Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. 

E. ASTM C 33 – Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2007. 

F. ASTM C 150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007. 

G. ASTM C 270 – Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2007a. 

H. ASTM C 494/C 494M – Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2008a. 

I. ASTM C 1364 – Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone; 2007. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute with a 

minimum of 5 years of experience in producing cast stone of the types required for project 

and: 

1. Adequate plant capacity to furnish quality, sizes, and quantity of cast stone required 

without delaying progress of the work. 

2. Products previously produced by plant and exposed to weather that exhibit satisfactory 

appearance. 

CAST STONE 04720 - Page 1 of 3




PART 2 

PRODUCTS 

2.01 MANUFACTURERS: 

A. Architectural Cast Stone: 

1. Any current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute. 

2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE 

A. Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural 

stone, complying with ASTM C 1364. 

1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C 1364. 

2. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by field experience. 

3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface 

blemishes visible from distance of 20 feet (6 meters). 

4. Color: Match cast stone color called out on drawings. 

B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings. 

1. Variation from Any Dimension, including Bow, Camber and Twist: Maximum of 

plus/minus 1/8 inch or length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than ¼ 

inch. 


A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150. 

1. For Mortar: Type I or II, except Type III may be used in cold weather. 

B. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands. 

C. Admixtures: ASTM C 494/C 494M. 

D. Water: Potable. 

E. Mortar: Portland cement-lime, ASTM C 270, Type N; do not use masonry cement. 

F. Sealant: As specified in Section 07900. 

G. Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, 

efflorescence, and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring 

or damaging masonry surfaces; approved for intended use by Cast Stone Manufacturer and 

by Cleaner Manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. 

PART 3 

EXECUTION 


A. Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of 

Section 04811. 

B. Setting: 

1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation. 

2. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated, working from top to bottom. 

C. Joints: Make all joints 3/8 inch, except as otherwise detailed: 

1. Rake mortar joints ¾ inch for pointing. 





2. Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints. 

3. Point joints with mortar in layers 3/8 inch thick and tool to a slight concave profile. 

4. Leave the following joints open for sealant: 

a. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills and steps. 

b. Joints below ledge and relieving angles. 

c. Joints labeled “expansion joint”. 

D. Sealant Joints: Install sealants as specified in Section 07900. 

E. Repairs: Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight 

at 10 feet. 

1. Repair with matching touch-up material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance 

with manufacturer’s instructions. 

2. Repair methods and results subject to Owner’s approval. 






SECTION 04811 

SINGLE-WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 



A. Concrete masonry units. 

B. Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories. 


A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 

B. Sustainable Submittals: 

1. Horizontal & Vertical Reinforcement. 


2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 

A. General: 

1. Water Repellant System: All masonry units to be manufactured with integral liquid polymeric 

admixture during production, achieving a Class E rating when tested in accordance to ASTM 

E 514-74. 

B. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 

1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as 

indicated on the drawings for specific locations. 

2. Standard Units: ASTM C 90. 

a. Hollow block, as indicated on drawings. 

b. Exposed faces: Special color and texture where indicated on drawings. 

C. Concrete Brick: Comply with referenced standards and as follows: 

1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 4 inches and nominal depths as 

shown on the drawings. 

2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90. 

a. Hollow Block, as indicated on drawings. 

b. Exposed faces: Color and texture per the drawings. 

3. Manufacturers: 

a: Spec Brik 

Tel: (800) 789-0872 

Attn: Bill Dawlson 

www.specbrik.com 

b. Quik Brik by: 

Oldcastle Architectural 

375 Northridge Road, Suite 250 

Atlanta, GA 30350 

Phone: 877-506-2745 

4. Special Shapes: Provide scored lintel block for all lintels. Color and texture as indicated on 

drawings. 

5. Mortar: To match block colors. 

2.02 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE 

A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82 steel wire, hot dip galvanized after 

fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; 

width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on 

each exposure. 

SINGLE WYTHE UNIT MASONRY 04811 - Page 1 of 3





a. AA Wire Products, L.L.C. 

b. Dur-O-Wal, Inc. 

c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 

2.03 MORTAR MIXES 

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 

2.04 MORTAR MATERIALS 

A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 Type S. 

1. Colored mortar: Premixed cement as required to match color of brick. 

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color. 

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 

D. Aggregate: ASTM C 144. 

E. Water: Clean and potable. 

F. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity. 


A. Weeps: Molded PVC grilles, insect resistant. 

2.06 FLASHINGS 

A. Plastic Flashings: Sheet polyvinyl chloride; 10 mil thick. 

B. EPDM Flashings: Flash Guard – Firestone manufacturer preferred product. 

C. Pan Flashing: Plastic Pan Flashing: Blok Flash by Mortar Net, 800-664-6638, or equal. 

2.07 FINISHES 

A. Paint as indicated on Drawings. 

B. Seal integral color CMU per Section 07190. 



A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry. 

B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located. 

C. Verify that built-in items ( for example the early bird key drop box) are in proper location, and ready 

for roughing into masonry work. 


A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections. 

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building 

structure provides permanent bracing. 

3.03 COURSING 

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. 

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform 

thickness. 

C. Concrete Masonry Units: 

1. Bond: Running. 

2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches. 

D. Quik Brick: 


2. Coursing: One unit and mortar joint equal to 4”. 





3.04 PLACING AND BONDING 

A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints. 

B. Remove excess mortar as work progresses. 

C. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be 

made, remove mortar and replace. 


A. Horizontal joint reinforcement: refer to Structural Drawings. 

B. Lap joint reinforcement ends: refer to Structural Drawings. 

3.06 MASONRY FLASHINGS 

A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all 

locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted. 

B. Lap end joints of flashings at least 4 inches and seal watertight with mastic or elastic sealant. 

3.07 CUTTING AND FITTING 

A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and 

location. 

B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or 

strength of masonry work may be impaired. 

3.08 CLEANING 

A. Remove excess mortar and clean mortar smears as work progresses. 

B. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 

3.09 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK 

A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners which 

are subject to damage by construction activities. 

B. Provide daily weather protection of masonry work to prevent moisture intrusion until work is 

completed. 






SECTION 04816 


MASONRY VENEER 


A. Clay Facing Brick. 

B. Cut Limestone. 

C. Mortar. 

D. Reinforcement and Anchorage. 

E. Installation of Lintels. 

F. Accessories. 

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS 

A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete 

Institute International; 2005. 

B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute 

International; 2005. 

C. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 

2005. 

D. ASTM C 91 - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2005. 

E. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007. 

F. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006. 

G. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale); 

2007a. 

H. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2007a. 

I. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007. 


A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except where 

exceeded by requirements of the contract documents. 


2.01 BRICK UNITS 

A. Manufacturers: 

1 Product as indicated on the drawings or equal. 

2 Substitutions: Not permitted unless approved prior to bidding. 

B. Facing Brick: ASTM C 216, Type FBS, Grade SW. 

1 Color and texture: As indicated on the drawings. 

2 Nominal size: As indicated on drawings. 

2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS 

A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91 Type N. 

1. Colored mortar: Premixed cement as required to match color of brick. 

MASONRY VENEER 04816 - Page 1 of 3




B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I; color as required to produce approved color. 

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 

D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404. 

E. Water: Clean and potable. 


A. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry veneer 

and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 

1 Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 0.1875 inch thick. 

2 Vertical adjustment: Not less than 3-1/2 inches. 


A. Weeps: Molded PVC grilles, insect resistant. 

B. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of wall cavity, 

and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents and allow proper cavity 

drainage. 

C. Cavity Air Barrier: 

1. Liquid applied air and moisture barrier equal to Stoguard by STO Corp on CMU. 

2. Sheet applied vapor retarder over stud construction. 

3. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a polyesterreinforced 

ethylene interpolymer alloy. 

a. Projects: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. DuPont: Thru-Wall Flashing. 

2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.: Flex-Flash. 

3. Hyload, Inc.: Hyload Cloaked Flashing System. 

4. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.: Total Flash. 

2.05 MORTAR MIXES 

A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. 


3.01 COURSING 

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement. 

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform thickness. 

C. Brick Units: 


3.02 PLACING AND BONDING 

A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work. 

3.03 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS 

A. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall flashing, above shelf 

angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls. 

B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity as recommended by manufacturer to prevent mortar 

droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents. 

C. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents. 





3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER 

A. Masonry Back-Up: Embed anchors in masonry back-up to bond veneer at maximum 2.0 sq ft of wall 

surface per anchor. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum 

spacing of anchors is 16 on center. 

3.05 LINTELS 

A. Install loose steel lintels over openings. 

3.06 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS 

A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. 

3.07 AIR MOISTURE BARRIER 

A. Install liquid applied air/moisture barrier on CMU wall. Product installation may be either spray or brush 

applied, per manufacturer’s installation procedures. 

B. Provide vapor retarder complying with this Section, for stud wall application. 

C. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture 

flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of 

mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with 

adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 

2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At 

heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end 

dams. 

3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing ½ 

inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 


A. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. 

B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft. 

C. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative. 

D. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft.. 






SECTION 04840 

THIN BRICK VENEER 

PART 1 

GENERAL 

1.01 SUMMARY: 

A. Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 1 

General Requirements, and Drawings are applicable to this Section. 

B. Section Includes: 

1. Adhesive adhered, solid, manufactured thin brick veneer for exterior application over 

building substrate. 

2. Adhesives, fasteners and mortar. 

3. Moisture barrier. 


1. Section 05400 “Cold Formed Metal Framing” for exterior wall framing. 

2. Section 06100 “Rough Carpentry” for exterior sheathing. 

3. Section 07900 “Sealants” for sealants at control joints and intersections with dissimilar 

materials. 


A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300. 

1. Product Data: Submit for all specified products. Include all applicable physical and 

performance data. 

2. Manufacturer’s detailed installation instructions. 


A. Installer: Experienced in similar types of work of similar scope and be able to furnish list of 

previous jobs and references if requested by Architect. 

B. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints as indicated on Drawings. Confirm locations and 

frequency with Architect before beginning work. 

C. Certifications: 

1. Provide written documentation that products have met or exceeded at least one of the 

following certifications for a minimum of 10 years: 

a. FHA-HUD. 

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS: 

A. Environmental Requirements: 

1. Minimum air temperature of 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to, during, and for 48 

hours after completion of work; and 

2. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC (International Masonry Industry All-Weather 

Council) – Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather 

Masonry Construction. 

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 

A. Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with the following? 

1. Store mortar materials on pallets in dry place. 

2. Protect materials from rain, moisture, and freezing temperatures. 

THIN BRICK VENEER 04840 - Page 1 of 4




3. Store manufactured thin brick veneer above ground on level platforms, which allow air 

circulation under stacked units. 

4. Handle units on pallets or flat bed barrows. 

1.06 WARRANTY: 

A. Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance with Section 01780. 

1. Provide a 20-year warranty against manufacturing defects in manufactured thin brick 

veneer products. 

PART 2 

PRODUCTS 

2.01 THIN BRICK VENEER: 

A. Thin Brick Veneer shall comply with: 

1. Kiln fired thin brick, composed of following materials: 

a. Clay, shale, fire clay, sand or mixtures thereof, kiln fired to fusion to produce clay 

masonry units per ASTM C1088, Type TBS (Standard). 

2. Durability: ASTM C1088, Grade Exterior. 

3. Freeze and Thawing: No breakage and not greater than 0.5% loss in dry weight when 

tested in accordance with ASTM C1088. 

4. Thin brick veneer size: 7 inches by 2 inches by ¾ inch. 

2.02 BRICK VENEER ACCESSORIES: 

A. Rigid Backer Board: High density, asphalt impregnated, fiberboard nail base, ASTM C 208. 

Rigid backer board shall meet requirements specified in Federal Specification LLL-1-535B, 

Class E, Style 2 and ANSI/AHA A194, 1-1985, Type IV, Class 2. 

1. Manufacturer: Temple Inland Corporation. 

B. Adhesive: Exterior, waterproof, synthetic rubber base adhesive, complying with APA AFG- 

01. 

1. Manufacturer: As specified by brick manufacturer. 

C. Mortar: A rich mixture of the following materials, mixed in accordance with the 

manufacturer’s detailed installation instructions for tuck pointing thin brick veneer joints. 

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for coldweather 

construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce 

mortar color indicated. 

2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. 

3. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 

a. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural 

sand or crushed stone. 

b. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to 

produce required mortar color. 

4. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded 

for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in 

masonry mortar. 

5. Water: Potable. 

6. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use. Mix grout to 

ASTM C 270, Type S proportions. 

D. Mortar Mixes: 

1. Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, 

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless 


2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 





3. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with 

other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement 

products. 

a. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 

b. Mix to match mortar color called for on drawings. 

E. Mortar Barrier: 

1. Tyvek Stucco Wrap, by E.I. Dupont, or comparable product as approved by Owner. 

Provide tape to seal joints, seams and tears, of same permeance as membrane. 

F. Fasteners: Coated 1-1/2 inch nails, staples or screws of type and for spacing as 

recommended by thin brick veneer manufacturer for loads encountered. 

G. Cleaner: Nonacid cleaner as recommended by thin brick veneer manufacturer. 

PART 3 

EXECUTION 

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION: 

A. Examination. 

1. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work in accordance 

with the manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 

2. Verify that built-in items are in proper location and ready for roughing into masonry work. 

3. Consult Architect if deficiencies exist. Correct deficiencies in accordance with 

requirements of thin brick veneer manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 

B. Protect surrounding area from possible damage during installation work. 

C. Initiating installation constitutes Installer’s acceptance of substrates. 

3.02 INSTALLATION: 

A. Moisture Barrier: 

1. Apply sheets horizontally, starting at the base of the wall, and lapping each successive 

upper sheet over the previous lower sheet. 

2. Lap horizontal and vertical joints 6 inches. 

3. Cut and seal joints, penetrations openings, and projections with manufacturer’s 

recommended tape. 

4. Install with corrosion-resistant staples. 

B. Individual Brickette ® Thin Brick Veneer Unit Application: 

1. Apply exterior adhesive to the back of each thin brick veneer unit. Cover the wall 

substrate with exterior adhesive to a depth of 1/8 inch in accordance with the 

manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 

2. Place individual Brickette ® units in position level with 3/8 inch joint spacing, plumb with 

surrounding units. Apply firm pressure to bed the unit solidly in the adhesive base. 

a. Bond Pattern: Running bond, or as indicated on the drawings. 

b. Install outside corner return units with short and long lengths alternated. 

c. Plan work to minimize jobsite cutting. Perform necessary cutting with proper tools 

to provide uniform edges; take care to prevent breaking unit corners or edges. 

C. Jointing: 

1. Allow adhesive to set and cure in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for 

individual thin brick veneer units. 

2. Install mortar to thin brick veneer joints using a tuck pointing tool, metal tipped mortar 

bag or a grout setting machine in accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation 

instructions. 

a. Fill joints completely with mortar. 

b. Remove excess mortar; do not allow mortar to dry on face of units. 





c. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger 

than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicted. 

d. Clean and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 

D. Control Joints: Size in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance, but in no 

case larger than adjacent mortar joints in exposed thin brick veneer units. 

E. Expansion Joints: Provide where indicated on Drawings or as recommended by system 

manufacturer. 

F. Built-In Work: As work progresses, build in door and window frames, nailing strips, anchor 

bolts, plates, and other items specified in various sections. 

1. Build in items plumb and level. 

2. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. 

3.03 ADJUSTING: 

A. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves and grounds. Cooperate 

with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape and location. 

3.04 CLEANING AND SEALING: 

A. Cleaning: Comply with the following: 

1. Remove excess mortar and smears using brush or steel wool. 

2. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. 

3. Clean soiled surfaces with non-acidic solution, acceptable to the thin brick veneer 

manufacturer, which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. 

4. Leave surfaces thoroughly clean and free of mortar and other soiling. 

5. Use nonmetallic tools in cleaning operations. 






SECTION 04860 

MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER 

PART 1 

GENERAL 

1.01 SUMMARY: 

A. Section Includes: 

1. Manufactured stone veneer masonry, accessories, and related materials. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 

1. For manufactured stone veneer units, include construction details, material 

descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 

2. Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions and recommendations. 

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for manufactured stone veneer 

units including dimensions. 

C. Material Test Reports: 

1. Provide ICC (International Code Council) ES Report No. 2593. 

2. Provide ICC Acceptance Criteria for Precast Stone Veneer (ICC-ES AC51) Test 

Reports for physical properties. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member of the Masonry Veneer Manufacturers Associate 

www.masonryveneer.org and the International Code Council (ICC) www.iccsafe.org. 

B. Source Limitations for Manufactured Stone Veneer: Obtain manufactured stone veneer units 

through single source from single manufacturer. 

C. Source Limitations for Raw Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality, including color, 

from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer 

for each raw material. 

D. Certification: Manufacturer’s ICC-ES evaluation report certifying that a qualifying inspection 

of the facilities manufacturing process has been successfully completed and manufacturer is 

in compliance with ICC operational standards and Acceptance Criteria for Precast Stone 

Veneer (AC 51). 


A. Coordinate delivery of manufactured stone veneer to avoid delaying the work and to minimize 

the need for on-site storage. 

B. Pack, handle and ship manufactured stone veneer units in suitable handi-packs or crates on 

40 by 48 inch wooden pallets. 

1. Pack units so that faces do not rub against other units. 

2. When using flatbed delivery equipment, use brick boards to securely strap the load to 

prevent damage to the units. 

3. Keep units ventilated under covers to prevent condensation. 

MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER 04860 - Page 1 of 3




C. Store cementitious materials and metal lath on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry 

location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. 

D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained 

and contamination can be avoided. 

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS: 

A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and ambient temperature in area of 

installation at minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during, and for 48 hours following installation. 

B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with 

ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Do not use units containing visible frozen 

moisture. Do not use calcium chloride or anti-freeze admixtures. 

C. Hot-Weather Requirements: If temperature exceeds 90 degrees F, additional water may be 

needed on the scratch-coated surface and the backs of the manufactured stone veneer units 

being applied. Providing shade and/or frequent misting of the wall may be required. Consult 

with mortar manufacturer to determine if mortar mix hot weather mix options are available. 

Local building code hot weather methods should be followed. 


A. Limited Warranty on Materials: 20 year material-only on veneer installed in accordance with 

manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations. 

1. Provide new materials in lieu of defective materials, per Section 01300 / 01780. 

PART 2 

PRODUCTS 

2.01 MANUFACTURERS: 

A. Specific manufacturer as indicated on drawings. Alternate manufacturers shall be 

considered per Section 01002. 

B. If not specified, submit product manufacturer per Paragraph 1.03.A. Qualifications. 

2.02 MANUFACTURED STONE VENEER: 

A. Shapes, colors and profiles shall be provided as indicated on drawings. 

1. Size: As shown on drawings. 

2.03 MANUFACTURED STONE ACCESSORES: 

A. Provide as required for proper installation per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

PART 3 

EXECUTION 

3.01 EXAMINATION: 

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements 

for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performances of work. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 






A. Prevent work from occurring on the opposite side of walls to which veneer is applied during 

and for 48 hours following installation. 

B. Surface Preparation: Follow manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations for 

appropriate type of substrate. 


A. Install manufactured stone veneer in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation Guidelines 

for Adhered Concrete Masonry Veneer. 

B. Install metal lath and scratch-coat of mortar in accordance with manufacturer’s Installation 

Guidelines for Adhered Concrete Masonry Veneer. 

C. Install manufactured stone veneer as indicated on Drawings. 

1. Coordinate installation of manufactured stone veneer with installation of flashing 

specified in other Sections. 

D. Before tooling the mortar grout, allow mortar to become “thumb-print hard”. 

E. Brush joints within 2 hours. 

3.04 EXAMINATION: 

A. Clean manufactured stone veneer in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 

3.05 PROTECTION: 

A. Protect finished work from rain during and for 48 hours following installation. 

B. Protect finished work from damage during remainder of construction period. 






SECTION 05120 

STRUCTURAL STEEL 



A. Structural steel framing members, support members, suspension cables, sag rods, and struts. 

B. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates. 

C. Grouting under base plates. 


A. Shop Drawings: 

1. Connections not detailed. Connections shall be prepared under the seal of a licensed 

structural engineer registered in the state of project construction. 


A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC M016. 



A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A 36/A 36M, or ASTM A992 GR50 as indicated on drawings. 

B. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade A. 

C. Steel Plate: ASTM A 514/A 514M. 

D. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B, Finish black. 

E. Shear Stud Connectors: ASTM A 108 Grade -. 

F. Sag Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 

G. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, plain. 

H. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade C. 

I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 

J. Grout: Non-shrink, non-metallic aggregate type, complying with ASTM C 1107 and capable of 

developing a minimum compressive strength of 7,000 psi at 28 days. 

K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard. 


A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible. 

B. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors. 

C. Develop required camber for members. 

2.03 FINISH 

A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP paint system guide no. 7.00. 

B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field welded, 

in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted. 

PART 3 

EXECUTION 

3.01 ERECTION 

A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC S303. 

B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe 

condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent 

bracing. 

C. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise specifically 

permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC S329. 

D. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's 

instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45 degrees. 


STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 05400 

COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 



A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 

B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing. 

1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

A. Design wall system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, 

undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night 

temperature ranges. 

B. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, 

and clearances of intended openings. 


A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with requirements of AISI SG- 

673. 


2.01 FRAMING MATERIALS 

A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel shape with punched web; U-shaped 

track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 

1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings. 

2. Galvanized finish in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M: G90/Z275. 

B. Joist and Headers: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel shape with unpunched web; U- 

shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 


A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; 

finish to match framing components. 

B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic. 

2.03 FASTENERS 

A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: ASTM A 123, hot dip galvanized to 

1.25 oz/sq ft. 

B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated. 

C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1. 


A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections of sizes and profiles required; with framing members 

fitted, reinforced, and braced to suit design requirements. 



A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS 

A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 


COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 05511 

FOLDING METAL LADDERS 



A. Folding aluminum wall ladders. 


A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Blocking in metal wall studs and partitions for 

anchorage of access ladders 


A. ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety 

Requirements; 1992. 

B. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and 

Plate; 2001. 

C. ASTM B 210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn 

Seamless Tubes; 2002. 

D. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded 

Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2000. 

E. ASTM B 308 - Standard Specification for Aluminum - Alloy T6061-T6 Standard 

Structural; 2002 

F. OSHA 29 CFR Standard 1910.27 - Fixed ladders; Occupational Safety and Health 

Standards; current edition 



B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 




C. Shop Drawings: Detailed drawings showing complete dimensions, all materials, 

mounting attachments, and fabrication details. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the engineering and 

manufacturing of metal ladders, with not less than ten years of experience. 

1.6 WARRANTY 

A. Provide manufacturer's standard limited five-year warranty against defects in 

materials and workmanship. 

FOLDING METAL LADDERS 05511 - Page 1 of 3




B. See Section 01780 – Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturer: ALACO Ladder Co., which is located at: 5167 G St. ; 

Chino, CA 91710-5143; Toll Free Tel: 888-310-7040; Tel: 909-591-7561; Email: 

request info (sales@alacoladder.com); Web: www.alacoladder.com 

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of 

Section 01600. 

2.2 MATERIALS 

A. Extruded Aluminum Profiles: ASTM B 221, ASTM B 210, ASTM B 308, Alloy 6061- 

T6; standard mill finish. 

B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6; standard mill finish. 

C. Fasteners: Aluminum solid aircraft rivets rated at 300 lbs shear strength. 

D. Cast fittings, connectors and rung ends: Cast Aluminum alloy 356 

2.3 LADDERS 

A. Ladders - General: Comply with ANSI A14.3 and OSHA regulations. 

B. Folding Wall Ladders: 24 inches wide. 

1. Slope: 60 degrees; 6-inch wide aluminum nonslip steps mounted on 10-13/32 

inches centers to 5-1/4 inch aluminum side rails. 

2. Provide handrails of 1-1/4 in round serrated aluminum tubing with cast or 

extruded aluminum fittings and four mounting brackets. 

3. Fasten each step with not less than eight aluminum aircraft rivets. 

4. Furnish with mounting bracket-slide assemblies to allow flat storage against 

wall and non-marking solid rubber feet for secure installation. 

2.4 FINISHES 

A. Provide all aluminum in standard mill finish. 



A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. 

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Owner and 

Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 


A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, 

and in compliance with ANSI A14.3 and OSHA 1910.27. 


A. Protect installed products until completion of project. 





B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 






SECTION 06067 

PLASTIC SURFACING MATERIALS 



A. Plastic Laminate Surfacing Materials. 


A. Section 06410 - Custom Cabinets. 


A. Per Section 01300. 


A. Store products of this section in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions to prevent 

breakage and marring of surfaces. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturer, Surfacing Materials: Pionite Decorative Laminates Auborn, ME 04211- 

1014 customer response line 1-800-PIONITE 

B. Acceptable Manufacturer, Surfacing Materials: Formica Corporation; Cincinnati OH 45241; 

customer response line 1-800-FORMICA. 

C. Acceptable Manufacturer, Surfacing Materials: Cabinetparts.com, Inc., 1301 W. Copans Rd., St. 

G6, Pompano Beach, FL, Tel: 800-857-8721. 

D. Acceptable Manufacturer, Surfacing Materials: Wilsonart International, Tel: 800-433-3222. 

E. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 

2.02 PLASTIC LAMINATE SURFACING MATERIALS 

A. Standard Plastic Laminate: Formica Plastic Laminates: Sheet material constructed of decorative 

surface papers, impregnated with melamine resins, bonded under heat and minimum 750 psi 

pressure to kraft papers impregnated with phenolic thermosetting condensation resins; of the 

following types: 

1. For Countertops and Other Horizontal Wearing Surfaces: General Purpose Horizontal Type: 

Formica Grade 51, Nominal sheet thickness 0.050 inch, meeting performance requirements of 

NEMA LD 3 and ISO Standard HGS. 

2. For Vertical Flat and Formed Surfaces Exposed to View: General Purpose Vertical Post 

Forming Type: Formica Grade 30/31, Nominal sheet thickness 0.039 inch, meeting 

performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 and ISO Standard VGP. 

PLASTIC SURFACING MATERIALS 06067 - Page 1 of 2




B. Backing Sheet: 

1. Formica Grade 89, Nominal sheet thickness 0.050 inch, meeting performance requirements of 

NEMA LD 3 and ISO Standard BGF. 

2. Color: white. 

C. Cabinet Exterior including Doors: Formica Grade 72, Nominal sheet thickness 0.020 inch, meeting 

performance requirements of NEMA LD 3 and ISO Standard CLS. 

1. Color: Refer to Drawings (Suede). 

D. Cabinet Liner: Formica Grade 72, Nominal sheet thickness 0.020 inch, meeting performance 

requirements of NEMA LD 3 and ISO Standard CLS. 


E. Sill Material. 


F. Adhesives for Installation of Materials: As specified in manufacturer's printed installation 

instructions. Refer to Section 01352 for recommended VOC limits. 



A. Surface Preparation: Precondition surfacing materials and surfaces to receive surfacing materials 

in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 


A. Installation of sheet materials is specified in Section 06410 - Custom Cabinets. 

B. Install cast products in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 


PLASTIC SURFACING MATERIALS 06067 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 06073 

FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED WOOD 

1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: Fire retardant treatment for wood, including framing, decking, sheathing and other 

wood construction, not exposed to weather. 

B. Related Sections: Section(s) related to this section include: 

1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100. 


A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this 

specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority 

abbreviation, designation number, title, or other designation established by issuing authority. 

Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and 

standard designation. Most recent editions should be used. 

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

1. ASTM D 5516 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Flexural Properties of Fire Retardant 

Treated Softwood Plywood Exposed to Elevated Temperatures. 

2. ASTM D 5664 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire-Retardant Treatments and 

Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber. 

3. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 

1. NFPA 255 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

2. NFPA 703 Standard for Fire-Retardant Coatings for Building Materials. 

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 

1. UL 723 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

2. UL Building Materials Directory. 


A. Performance Requirements: Provide fire retardant treatment which will perform in accordance with 

manufacturer’s stated performance criteria without defects, damage or failure. 


A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Section 01300. 


A. Wood Treatment Plant Qualifications: Wood treatment plant experienced in performing work of this 

section which has specialized in the treatment of wood similar to that required for this project. 

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING 

A. General: Comply with Section 01002. 

B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and 

at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. 

1.07 WARRANTY 

A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. 

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty 

document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and 

not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under the Contract Documents. 


2.01 RELATED WOOD MATERIALS 

A. General: Refer to Division 6 Wood and Plastics Sections for related wood materials specified herein. 

FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED WOOD 06073 - Page 1 of 2




B. Moisture Content: Provide fire retardant treated wood with moisture content as follows: 

1. Lumber: Dried to a maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment. 

2. Plywood: Dried to a maximum moisture content of 15% after treatment. 

2.02 SOURCE QUALITY 

A. Source Quality: Obtain fire retardant treatment from a single manufacturer. 


3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical bulletins, for fire 

retardant treatment installation. 


A. Fire Retardant Treatment: Apply a fire retardant treatment in accordance with requirements of 

applicable codes and manufacturer’s requirements. 


A. Protection: Protect fire retardant treated wood from damage during construction. 


FIRE-RETARDANT TREATED WOOD 06073 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 06100 

ROUGH CARPENTRY 



A. Structural wall framing. 

B. Wall sheathing. 

C. Preservative treatment of wood. 

D. Wood nailers, curbs, and cant strips for roofing and items installed on roof. 

E. Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, and wood trim. 

F. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips. 

G. Overnead Door Blocking. 


A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 

1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: Any agency with rules approved by American 

Lumber Standards Committee. 


A. Per Section 01300. 

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS 

A. Design structural site fabricated trusses under direct supervision of a Professional Structural 

Engineer experienced in design of such trusses and licensed in state of project construction. 


A. Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation 

and to allow air circulation. 


2.01 DIMENSION LUMBER 

A. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 

B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. 

C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. 

D. Stud Framing (2 x 2 through 2 x 6 ): 

1. Grade: No. 2. 

E. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 x 6 through 4 x 16 ): 

1. Machine stress-rated (MSR) as follows: 

a. Fb-single (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending): 1350 psi. 

b. E (minimum modulus of elasticity): 1,300,000 psi. 

F. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, Trim, and Nailers: 

1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 

2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 

G. Overhead Door Blocking: 

1. Lumber: Southern Pine (specific gravity 0.55) or Spruce Pine (specific gravity 0.42), Grade 

No. 2. 

2.02 CONSTRUCTION PANELS 

A. Miscellaneous Panels: 

1. Concealed Plywood: PS 1, C-C Plugged, exterior grade. 

2. Plywood Floor Sheeting: per plans; otherwise APA rated ¾” tongue-in-groove. 

3. Plywood Roof Sheeting: per plans; otherwise APA rated 19/32” CDX or better. 

4. Plywood Ceiling: per plans; B-D Int. APA rated ½”. 

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - Page 1 of 3





A. Fasteners and Anchors: 

1. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations, 

unfinished steel elsewhere. 

2. Screened soffit vent, to match prefinished aluminum eave. 

2.04 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT 

A. Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Treatment C2 using waterborne preservative 

to 0.25 percent retention. 

1. Kiln dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 

2. Treat wood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. 

3. Treat wood in contact with masonry or concrete. 

2.05 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS 

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with 

requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fir-testresponse 

characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method 

indicated by a qualified testing agency. 

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread 

index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant 

progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame 

front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the 

test. 

1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fireretardant-treated 

lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to 

accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where 

indicated. 

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when 

tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is 

not indicated. 

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. 

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing 

agency. 

E. Application: Treat all rough carpentry and the following: 

1. Concealed blocking. 

2. Roof construction and trusses. 

3. Plywood roof deck and ceiling material. 


3.01 FRAMING INSTALLATION 

A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower 

required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. 

B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to 

maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation 

of permanent bracing. 

C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. 

D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing 

indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA WCD 1. 

E. Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty 

items, and trim. 





3.02 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD 

A. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating 

lapping side members. 

B. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings. 


A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. 

B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet 

maximum. 






SECTION 06193 

PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 



A. Prefabricated wood trusses for roof. This includes truss to girder connectors as required. 

B. Bridging, bracing, and anchorage. 


1. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry 


A. Submit the following under provisions of section 01300. 

1. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s installation instructions. 

2. Shop Drawings: Indicate framing system, sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers, 

bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing, connecting plates, and framed openings. 

3. Certification: Submit design calculations, which will include all truss to girder connectors. 

Design calculations to be sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in state where project is 

located. 

4. Truss manufacturer to provide a certification letter stating that the fire retardant trusses will 

maintain their structural integrity after the fire treating process. 


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of prefabricated wood trusses, with three-year 

minimum experience. 

B. Design trusses under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in structural framing 

design of trusses, licensed in state where Project is located. Comply with the “National Design for 

Stress Graded Lumber and its fastenings”, as published by NFPA. And “Design Specifications for 

Light Metal Place Connected Wood Trusses”, as published by TPI. 

C. Refer to drawings and government codes for live and dead load requirements. 

D. Lumber grading agency: Certified by ALSC. 

E. Truss Plates: I accordance with Truss Plate Institute. 

F. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, and other government load criteria. 

2. Conform to applicable code for fire retardant requirements. 

3. Conform to UL requirements to achieve rating indicated. 

G. Fire retardant material – refer to Section 06100. 



A. Member of TPI and having minimum experience level indicated. 


A. Lumber Grading Rules: NFPA. 

B. Plywood Gussets: Graded by APA; fir wood species, lumber core, standard grade, waterproof 

glue; 19 percent maximum moisture content. 

C. Steel Connectors: ANSI/ASTM A446 steel, Grade A; galvanized; die stamped with integral teeth 

D. Fasteners: galvanized; size and type to suit condition 

E. Bearing Plate Anchors: Bolts or ballistic fasteners for anchorages to steel. 

F. Wood blocking: Softwood lumber, fir species, construction grade, maximum moisture content of 19 

percent. 

G. Fire retardant material – refer to Section 06100. 

PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06193 - Page 1 of 2






A. Place trusses true to line and level. 

B. Provide temporary bracing to hold trusses in place until permanently secured. 

C. Place permanent bridging, bracing, and anchors to maintain trusses straight and in correct position 

before inducing loads. 

D. Do not field cut trusses. 

E. Place headers and supports to frame openings required. 


A. Install wood trusses within installation tolerance of ANSI/TP1. 


A. Framing Members: ½ inch maximum from true position. 


PLATE CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES 06193 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 06410 

CUSTOM CABINETS 



A. Special fabricated cabinet units. 

B. Countertops. 

C. Cabinet hardware. 

D. Prefinished surfaces. 

E. Preparation for installing utilities. 

1.02 RELATED SECTION 

A. Section 06067 – Plastic Surfacing Materials. 


A. AHA A135.4 - Basic Hardboard; American Hardboard Association. 

B. ANSI A208.1 - Wood Particle board. 

C. AWI P-200 - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural Woodwork 

Institute. 

D. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware 

Manufacturer’s Association, Inc. (ANSI/BHMA A156.9). 

E. FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact; Federal Specifications and Standards. 

F. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers 

Association. 


A. Shop Drawings: indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, 

joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of 

finishes. 

B. Sustainable Submittals: No submittals are required. Refer to Section 01352 for Sustainable 

recommendations on this project. Refer to Section 01352 for recommended VOC limits. 


A. Perform work in accordance with AWI P-200, Custom quality. 

B. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI P-200, Custom quality. 

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in 

this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 


A. Protect units from moisture damage. 


A. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and 

humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. 

CUSTOM CABINETS 06410 - Page 1 of 3





2.01 PANEL MATERIALS 

A. Wood Particle board: NIST PS 1; AWI P-200 standard, composed of wood chips, medium 

density, made with high waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application. 

2.02 MANUFACTURERS - PLASTIC LAMINATE 

A. Pionite 

B. Formica 

C. Nevemar 

D. Wilsonart 

E. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 

2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS 



A. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive. 

B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. 

C. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. 

D. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 

E. Cabinet Hardware: 

1. Cabinet door hardware: Provide hinges (Stanley concealed casework hinges self 

closing nickel finish), catches (Stanley magnetic catch) and pulls (Stanley cabinet 

pulls satin finish aluminum) of types indicated, to accommodate each door size and 

style. 

2. Sliding Door Hardware: Provide sets of type indicated, including pulls to 

accommodate each pair of sliding doors. Provide sliding type sets, except where 

rolling types are indicated. 

3. Drawer Hardware: Provide slides and pulls of types indicated, to accommodate each 

drawer size and style. Equip each drawer with side-mounted, full-extension, ballbearing, 

nylon roller drawer slides with load capacity of 75 lbs. per pair. 

4. Locks: Provide standard pin-type or disc-type (5 pins or discs) tumbler locks, keyed 

individually. Provide every other door and all drawers with locks, final location of 

locks shall be approved by the Architect. 

5. Shelf Supports: Where shelving is indicated as “adjustable”, provide recessed 

mounted slotted-type standards and brackets of needed to support shelves with 

uniform 40 lb. per sq. ft loading. 

6. Exposed Hardware Finish: Except where noted otherwise, provide exposed hardware 

with BHMA satin stainless steel finish. 

F. Grommets: Plastic material for cut-outs. 


A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage 

through building openings. 

B. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. 

C. Door and Drawer Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; flush style. 

D. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. 

Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 





E. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. 

Fit comers and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel edges. Locate 

counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 

PART 3 

EXECUTION 


A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 

B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough4n associated with work of this section. 


A. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. 

B. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. 


A. Adjust installed work. 

B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 

3.04 CLEANING 

A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. 






SECTION 07115 

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 

PART 1 

GENERAL 




1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 

A. This Section includes cold-applied emulsified-asphalt dampproofing applied to the following 

surfaces: 


1. Exterior face of subgrade walls where indicated on plans; that grade is above finished 

floor elevations 

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of 

application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness and protection course. 


A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from 

a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommend by manufacturer of primary 

materials. 

1.05 PRODUCT CONDITIONS 

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather 

conditions permit asphalt dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written 

instructions. 

PART 2 

PRODUCTS 


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Cold-Applied, Emulsified-Asphalt Dampproofing: 

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The). 

b. Gardner Asphalt Corporation 

c. Henry Company 

d. Karnak Corporation 

e. Koppers Industries, Inc. 

f. Marlarkey Roofing Company 

g. Meadows, W.R., Inc. 

h. Sonneborn, Div of ShemRex, Inc. 

i. Tamms Industries 

2.02 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 

A. Cold-Applied, emulsified Asphalt Dampproofing: 

1. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1. 

BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - Page 1 of 2




2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1, except diluted with water as 

recommend by manufacturer. 

PART 3 

EXECUTION 


A. Examine substrates, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface 

smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. 

1. Begin dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating work 

have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being 

stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering 

and clogging weep holes and drains. 

B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and 

apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer. 

3.03 APPLICATION, GENERAL 

A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements 

are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of 

dampproofing. 

1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or required to achieve 

coverages indicated. 


BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07115 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 07190 

WATER REPELLENTS 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes penetrating water-repellent treatments for the following vertical surfaces: 

1. Cast stone. 

2. Concrete unit masonry. 

3. Clay brick masonry. 

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS 



A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site prior to application of water 

repellent. 


2.01 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS 

A. Silane, Penetrating Water Repellent: Clear, containing 20 percent or more solids of 

alkyltrialkoxysilanes; with alcohol, mineral spirits, water, or other proprietary solvent carrier; and 

with 400 g/L or less of VOCs. 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be 

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; Enviroseal 20. 

b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Weather Worker J-29-WB. 

c. Pecora Corporation; KlereSeal 940-S VOC. 

d. PROSOCO, Inc.; SL100. 

e. Tnemec Inc.; Dur A Pell 40. 



A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with 

requirements and conditions affecting performance of the Work. 

1. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry according to water-repellent manufacturer's 

requirements. Check moisture content in representative locations by method 

recommended by manufacturer. 

2. Verify that there is no efflorescence or other removable residues that would be trapped 

beneath the application of water repellent. 


A. Cleaning: Before application of water repellent, clean substrate of substances that could impair 

penetration or performance of product according to water-repellent manufacturer's written 

instructions. 

WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - Page 1 of 2





A. Apply a heavy-saturation coating of water repellent, on surfaces indicated for treatment, using 

low-pressure spray to the point of saturation. Remove excess material; do not allow material to 

puddle beyond saturation. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for application 

procedure unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Apply a second saturation coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's 

written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of 

surfaces between coats. 

3.04 CLEANING 

A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by 

water-repellent application as work progresses. Correct damage to work of other trades caused 

by water-repellent application. 


WATER REPELLENTS 07190 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 07191 

PENETRATING SEALER FOR CURING 

PART 1 

GENERAL 


A. Non-pigmented sealer for horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces. 


A. Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. 


A. Verify compatibility of product with proposed manufacturer of finishes. 

1. Sealed flooring. 

2. Tiled or painted flooring. 

3. Polished and stained concrete. Refer to Section 03331. 


A. Regulatory Requirements: Products shall comply with federal, state, and local volatile 

organic compounds (VOC) regulations. 





A. Do not apply sealer to surfaces below 50 degrees F or above 95 degrees F unless 

recommended by the manufacturer. 

B. Do not apply sealer when rain is predicted within 24 hours after surface has been wet. 

PART 2 

PRODUCTS 

2.01 MANUFACTURER & MATERIAL 

A. Sealer for Curing: CURECRETE DISTRIBUTION INC. Cure Seal-Hardener by Ashford 

Formula. 

B. No substitutions permitted. 

PART 3 

EXECUTION 


A. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for new concrete project 

conditions; for multi-coat application. 


PENETRATING SEALER FOR CURING 07191 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 07210 

BOARD AND BATT INSULATION 



A. Board insulation and integral vapor retarder, rigid interior wall insulation, at perimeter foundation 

wall, and underside of floor slabs. 

B. Batt insulation in exterior roof and wall construction. 


A. Section 07211-Horizontal Cavity Loose Fill Insulation. 

B. Section 07540-Membrane Roofing System and Insulation. 





2.01 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS 

A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X; Extruded expanded polystyrene 

board with cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 

1. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 

2. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. 

3. Board Edges: Square. 

4. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F (-3.9 degrees C.) 

5. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi. 

6. Board Density: 0.5 lb/cu ft. 

7. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume. 

8. Flame/Smoke Properties: in accordance with ASTM E 84. 

2.02 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS 

A. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed glass fiber batt; friction fit, conforming to the following: 

1. Thermal Resistance: As indicated on drawings. 

2. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 

3. Facing: Foil-reinforced-kraft vapor retarder 

4. Flame/Smoke Properties: in accordance with ASTM E 84. Heat content must not exceed 

1,000 BTU/Ft 2 . 


a. Certain-Teed Products Corp. 

b. Manville Building Materials Corp. 

c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. 

d. Or Equal. 

B. Air Baffles: Preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheet designed and sized to fit between roof 

framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented 

eaves. 

2.03 All Board and Batt Insulation Materials Shall Be Formaldehyde Free. 


BOARD AND BATT INSULATION 07210 - Page 1 of 2





A. Install insulation in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction. 

3.02 SCHEDULES 

A. Perimeter Insulation: 

1. Extruded polystyrene. 

2. Bead adhesive application. 

3. 1/2 inch thick protection board (if noted on drawings) 

B. Wood Framed Roof Insulation: fiberglass batts with integral vapor retarder, stapled to wood 

trusses. 


BOARD AND BATT INSULATION 07210 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 07214 

FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 



A. Foamed-in-place insulation in masonry cavity walls. 


A. Section 04811 – Single Wythe Unit Masonry. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type specified 

in this section, with not less than 5 years of documented experience. 

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified, with 

minimum 5 years of experience and approved by the manufacturer. 




1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke limitations. 



A. Tripolymer manufactured by C.P. Chemical Co., Inc. 

B. Core-Fill-500 manufactured by Tailored Chemical Products, Inc. 

C. Thermco Foam with T-17 manufactured by Thermal Corporation. 


A. Insulation: FHSA Non-toxic type. 

1. Thermal Conductivity: ASTM C 177; 

a. 0.219 k value at 75 degrees F. 

2. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96; 15.5 - 16.9 perms. 

3. Density: ASTM D 1622; .8 - 1.3 lb/cu ft. 

4. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: ASTM E 84 5 / 0. 



A. Verify work within construction spaces or crevices is complete prior to insulation application. 


A. Apply insulation in strict compliance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 


FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION 07214 - Page 1 of 1




PART I 

GENERAL 

SECTION 07240 

EIFS 

1.01 SUMMARY: Provide a mechanically attached, Water Managed Exterior Insulation and Finish 

System, as shown on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as needed for a complete and 

proper installation. 

1.02 RELATED WORK: Section 06200 - Rough & Finish Carpentry; product specification for plywood 

EIFS substrate. Section 09260 - Gypsum Wallboard & Partition System; product specification for 

EIFS substrate. 

1.03 SUBMITTAL: Submittal is required for the work of this Section and must be submitted per Section 

01300- Submittals. 

A. Review of submittals by Professional of Record shall be limited to verifying aesthetics 

compliance with design documents. 

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: The Water Managed Exterior Insulation and Finish System 

manufacturer’s specifications and standard installation details shall be followed completely, and 

shall be considered a part of this Section as if the manufacturer’s specification was included in its 

entirety. 

A. A representative of the E.I.S.S. manufacturer shall provide observations and documentation 

during the installation as noted in Part III of this section to assure proper installation of the 

manufacturer’s product. 

B. Furnish manufacturers’ certification that the materials meet or exceed specified requirements. 


A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: The Contractor shall provide the Manufacturer’s Standard 5-Year 

Product Warranty in the Building Maintenance Manuals submitted to BSRO per Section 

01300 - Submittals. 

B. Installer’s Warranty: The Contractor shall include a copy of the EIFS installer’s warranty for all 

work provided, for a term of 1 year after the Date of Substantial Completion, in the Building 

Maintenance Manuals submitted to BSRO per Section 01300 - Submittals. 

C. Given the current litigation with this product, as an inducement to accept the E.I.F.S. product, 

the E.I.F.S. manufacturer and installer shall agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless 

the Owner, Architect, Engineer and the Professional of Record against any and all claims, 

damages, suits, actions, legal costs and expenses directly and/or indirectly related to 

litigation associated with the E.I.F.S. system. 

PART 2 

PRODUCTS 

2.01 ACCEPTABLE EIFS MANUFACTURERS: 

A. Manufacturers: Provide a water managed, drainable system that will be equal to Stoessence 

system. Materials are specified to establish a standard quality, or by performance 

requirements and general description of product. The Professional of Record reserves the 

right to reject any material which, in his opinion will not produce the quality of work specified 

herein. 

EIFS 07240 - Page 1 of 3




2.02 MATERIALS: 

A. Sheathing: Glass Mat Faced Exterior Sheathing shall be Dens-Glass Gold Sheathing by G-P 

Gypsum Corporation, Atlanta GA (800/ 947-4497 Northeast US), subject to acceptance by 

the EIFS manufacturer as part of the warranted EIFS system. Paper-faced exterior gypsum 

sheathing is NOT an acceptable product substitution. 

B. Sheathing at Building Signage: Do NOT provide Glass Mat Faced Exterior Sheathing without 

also providing exterior plywood sheathing backup at any location where signage is scheduled 

to be provided; in lieu of Glass Mat Faced Exterior Sheathing at these locations, the 

Contractor may provide Exterior Plywood Sheathing, subject to acceptance by the EIFS 

manufacturer as part of the warranted EIFS system. 

C. Nominal 1.0 lb./cu.ft. (16 kg/m 3 ) Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board in compliance 

with ASTM C 578 Type I requirements, and EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded 

Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board. Minimum thickness ¾”. See Drawings. 

D. Expanded Polystyrene less than 25 flame spread, 1.0 lb./per cu. Ft. average density; u = 0.26 

per inch; ASTM C578-85 Class A. 

Dimensional tolerance shall be as follows: 

1. Edges shall be square within 1/16” over the entire length of the board. 

2. Thickness shall be plus or minus 1/16”. 

3. Foam shall be aged by air drying for a minimum of six weeks or equivalent kiln dried. 

PART 3 

EXECUTION 

3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which 

work of this Section will be provided, shall correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper 

completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 


A. The Water Managed EIFS manufacturer’s specifications and recommended standard 

installation details shall be followed completely, and shall be considered a part of this section 

as if the manufacturer’s specification was included in its entirety. 

B. Install the work of this section in accordance with the shop drawings and with pertinent 

requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, anchoring all components firmly 

into position straight, level, and plumb within a tolerance of 1:1000 vertical and horizontal. 

C. All installation of E.I.F.S. Materials shall be performed by and/or supervised by applicators 

who carry a certificate of training by the Manufacturer. Contractor must have a minimum 

industry experience with EIFS systems no less than 5 years and must have completed 10+ 

projects of similar size. 

Under no circumstances shall any of the E.I.F.S. Products be altered by adding any additives, 

except for small amounts of clean water as directed on label. Antifreeze, accelerators, rapid 

binders, etc., are forbidden. 

D. The overall minimum base coat thickness shall be sufficient to fully embed the mesh in 

multiple base coat applications. 





E. EIFS surfaces in contact with sealants shall be coated with manufacturer approved sealer. 

F. EIFS panel tolerance: Maximum variance from plane shall be 1/4” within a 4-foot radius. 

3.03 FIELD VISITS / OBSERVATIONS: 

A. Observation of the E.I.F.S. installation shall be performed by a representative of the 

Manufacturer. A report of each day’s work shall be developed describing the materials and 

workmanship to be in compliance with Manufacturers recommendations, or to describe any 

deficiencies, with associated correction identified. Reports shall be on E.I.F.S. 

manufacturer’s company letterhead. A copy of each report shall be sent to the Owner, 

Contractor and Professional of Record. If deficiencies occur, the Contractor shall 

immediately perform corrections recommended by E.I.F.S. Manufacturer and insurable by 

Property Loss Underwriters. 

B. The intent of these specifications are to ensure the system is installed strictly in a manner 

that will be warranted by the E.I.F.S. manufacturer and insurable by Property Loss 

Underwriters. 






SECTION 07270 

FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS 



A. Closures of openings in walls, floors, and roof decks against penetration of flame, heat, and 

smoke or gases in fire resistant rated construction. 

B. Closure of openings in walls against penetration of gases or smoke in smoke partitions. 


A. Expansion and seismic joint firestopping: Section 05810, EXPANSION JOINT COVER 

ASSEMBLIES. 

B. Spray applied fireproofing: Section 07253, SPRAYED ON FIREPROOFING (Mineral Fiber). 

C. Sealants and application: Section 07920, SEALANTS AND CAULKING. 

D. Fire and smoke damper assemblies in ductwork: Section 15840, DUCTWORK AND 

ACCESSORIES. 


A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS. 

B. Manufacturers literature, data, and installation instructions for types of firestopping and smoke 

stopping used. 

C. List of FM, UL, or WH classification number of systems installed. 

D. Certified laboratory test reports for ASTM E814 tests for systems not listed by FM, UL, or WH 

proposed for use. 

1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 

A. Deliver materials in their original unopened containers with manufacturer’s name and product 

identification. 

B. Store in a location providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. 


A. FM, UL, or WH or other approved laboratory tested products will be acceptable. 

B. PUBLICATIONS LISTED BELOW FORM A PART OF THIS SPECIFICATION TO THE EXTENT 

REFERENCED. PUBLICATIONS ARE REFERENCED IN THE TEXT BY THE BASIC 

DESIGNATION ONLY. 1.7 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS 

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 

E84-01........................................Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 

E814-02......................................Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops 

D. Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM): 

Annual Issue Approval Guide Building Materials 

E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 

Annual Issue Building Materials Directory 

Annual Issue Fire Resistance Directory 

1479-00 ......................................Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops 

F. Warnock Hersey (WH): 

Annual Issue Certification Listings 


2.01 FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 

A. Use either factory built (Firestop Devices) or field erected (through-Penetration Firestop Systems) 

to form a specific building system maintaining required integrity of the fire barrier and stop the 

passage of gases or smoke. 

FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS 07270 - Page 1 of 3




B. Through-penetration firestop systems and firestop devices tested in accordance with ASTM E814 

or UL 1479 using the "F" or "T" rating to maintain the same rating and integrity as the fire barrier 

being sealed. "T" ratings are not required for penetrations smaller than or equal to 100 mm (4 in) 

nominal pipe or 0.01 m 2 (16 sq. in.) in overall cross sectional area. 

C. Products requiring heat activation to seal an opening by its intumescence shall exhibit a 

demonstrated ability to function as designed to maintain the fire barrier. 

D. Firestop sealants used for firestopping or smoke sealing shall have following properties: 

1. Contain no flammable or toxic solvents. 

2. Have no dangerous or flammable outgassing during the drying or curing of products. 

3. Water-resistant after drying or curing and unaffected by high humidity, condensation or 

transient water exposure. 

4. When used in exposed areas, shall be capable of being sanded and finished with similar 

surface treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface. 

E. Firestopping system or devices used for penetrations by glass pipe, plastic pipe or conduits, 

unenclosed cables, or other non-metallic materials shall have following properties: 

1. Classified for use with the particular type of penetrating material used. 

2. Penetrations containing loose electrical cables, computer data cables, and communications 

cables protected using firestopping systems that allow unrestricted cable changes without 

damage to the seal. 

3. Intumescent products which would expand to seal the opening and act as fire, smoke, toxic 

fumes, and, water sealant. 

F. Maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke development of 50 when tested in accordance with 

ASTM E84. 

G. FM, UL, or WH rated or tested by an approved laboratory in accordance with ASTM E814. 

H. Materials to be asbestos free. 

2.02 SMOKE STOPPING IN SMOKE PARTITIONS 

A. Use silicone sealant in smoke partitions as specified in section SEALANTS AND CAULKING. 

B. Use mineral fiber filler and bond breaker behind sealant. 

C. Sealants shall have a maximum flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50 when tested in 

accordance with E84. 

D. When used in exposed areas capable of being sanded and finished with similar surface 

treatments as used on the surrounding wall or floor surface. 



Submit product data and installation instructions, as required by article, submittals, after an on 

site examination of areas to receive firestopping. 


A. Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, or other substances that prevent adherence and 

bonding or application of the firestopping or smoke stopping materials. 

B. Remove insulation on insulated pipe for a distance of 150 mm (six inches) on either side of the 

fire rated assembly prior to applying the firestopping materials unless the firestopping materials 

are tested and approved for use on insulated pipes. 


A. Do not begin work until the specified material data and installation instructions of the proposed 

firestopping systems have been submitted and approved. 

B. Install firestopping systems with smoke stopping in accordance with FM, UL, WH, or other 

approved system details and installation instructions. 

C. Install smoke stopping seals in smoke partitions. 

3.04 CLEAN-UP AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK 

A. As work on each floor is completed, remove materials, litter, and debris. 





B. Do not move materials and equipment to the next-scheduled work area until completed work is 

inspected and accepted by the project Architect 

C. Clean up spills of liquid type materials. 






SECTION 07310 

ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING 

PART I 

GENERAL 


A. The roof system shall consist of asphalt shingles for sloping roofs. 


A. Materials and methods shall be in accordance with the printed instructions and specifications of the 

Roofing Manufacture and the National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) Recommendations. 

B. The roofing installer shall be certified by the Roofing Manufacturer and have a minimum 3 years 

Installation experience and provide evidence of same upon request. 

C. The Roofing Contractor shall arrange with a field representative of the Roofing Manufacture and 

Owner for a pre-construction meeting prior to the start of Roof Work. This meeting shall be for the 

purpose of reviewing the manufacturer’s requirements, specifications, details, materials and methods 

of installation for Roof Work. 


A. Submit the following: 

1. Manufacturer’s Literature: Materials description and installation instructions for roofing materials. 

2. Roofing Contractor’s Guarantee: Three (3) signed copies. 

3. Samples: Pieces of sheet metal flashing. 

4. Shop Drawings: Submit two (2) sets of prints to owner for approval of all fabricated items prior to 

fabrication. The Contractor will be responsible for all details, dimensions and the correct fit of all 

work. Do not fabricate work until owner has approved the drawings. 


A. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s unopened containers identified to show name, brand, type, grade, 

and UL label. Store, protect and keep materials dry until roofing is completely installed. Store roll 

goods on end. 

1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS: 

A. Protect the building from damage resulting from spillage, dripping and dropping of materials. Repair 

and restore other work damaged during roofing operations. 


2.01 MANUFACTURER: 

A. Owens Corning or approved equal. 

2.02 MATERIALS: 

A. Asphalt Shingles: Fiberglass-based asphalt shingles with Tru-Bond nailing strip and SureNail 

technology. 

1. Wind Resistance: 110 MPH or 130 MPH, to comply with local standards. 

2. Fire-Test-Response Classification: UL 790, Class A Fire Resistance. 

3. Colors, Blends and Patterns: See drawings. Provide Owner selection from manufacturer’s full 

range of colors, textures and patterns for asphalt shingles of type indicated. 

B. Ridge Shingles: Manufacturer’s standard, factory-precut units to match asphalt shingles. 

C. Ridge Vent: Manufacturer’s standard, factory units to match asphalt shingles 

D. Sheet Metal Materials: Coil-Coated Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated, commercial-quality steel 

sheet conforming to ASTM A 755, G 90 coating designation, coil coated with high-performance 

fluoropolymer coating not less than 0.0336 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated. 

ASPHALT SHINGLE ROOFING 07310 - Page 1 of 3




E. Sheet Metal Finish: Fluoropolymer 2-Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard 2-coat, thermo cured 

system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat, containing 

not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. Color and 

gloss as selected by D.F.F. 

F. Felt Underlayment: Type 1, 36-inch wide, asphalt-saturated organic felt, complying with ASTM D 226 

(No. 15) or ASTM D 4869. 

G. Waterproof Underlayment: Minimum 40-mil. Thick, self-adhering, polymer-modified, bituminous sheet 

membrane, complying with ASTM D 1970. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment 

manufacturer. 

H. Nails: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.120-inch diameter barbed shank, sharp-pointed, conventional roofing 

nails with a minimum 3/8-inch diameter head and of sufficient length to penetrate at least 1/8 inch 

through plywood sheathing. 

1. Where nails are in contact with flashing, prevent galvanic action by providing nails made from the 

same metal as that of the flashing. 

I. EPDM – Cricket & Parapet wall covering. Minimum 45 mil. and thick mesh reinforced fully adhered 

EPDM roofing material. Preferred Manufacturer: Firestone. Refer to roof plan. 

J. Snow Brackets: Snow Bracket D: 10-inch length (250 mm), paint lock steel, 16 gauge, Powder Coated: 

Best match of roof color from manufacturer’s standard colors. 

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: 

a. TRA-MAGE Roof Accessory Systems, which is located at: 1657 South 580 East, P.O. Box, 

American Fork, UT 84003, Tel: 801-756-8666. 

b. Or equal. 



A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knotholes or other 

minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secure with noncorrosive roofing nails. 

B. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. Do not 

install roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof sheathing have been 

installed and are securely fastened against movement. 

C. Do not install underlayment or shingles on wet surfaces. 

3.02 INSTALLATION OF ROOF: 

A. Prior to starting work, examine all roof decks on which work is to be applied for defects in materials and 

workmanship which may be detrimental to the proper installation or long-term performance of the 

shingles. 

B. General: Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations but not less that those 

recommended by ARMA’s “Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual” or the “The NRCA Steep Roofing 

Manual.” 

1. Fasten asphalt shingles to roof sheathing with nails. 

C. Felt Underlayment: Apply 1 layer of felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface when slope is 

greater than 4 in 12, 2 layers for slopes less than 4 in 12, to receive asphalt shingles, lapping 

succeeding course a minimum of 2 inches, end laps a minimum of 4 inches, and hips a minimum of 6 

inches. Fasten felt with sufficient number of roofing nails to hold underlayment in place until asphalt 

shingle installation. 

1. Omit felt underlayment at areas of waterproof underlayment. Lap felt underlayment over waterproof 

underlayment as recommended by manufacturer but not less than 2 inches. 

D. Waterproof Underlayment: Apply waterproof underlayment at eaves, valleys and as noted on roof plan. 

E. Flashing: Install metal flashing and trim as indicated and according to details and recommendations of 

the “Asphalt Roofing” section of “The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual” and ARMA’S Residential Asphalt 

Roofing Manual.” 





F. Install asphalt shingles, beginning at roof’s lower edge, with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted 

asphalt shingles with tabs removed. Fasten asphalt shingles in the desired weather exposure pattern; 

use number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacture for regional application. Use 

vertical and horizontal chalk lines to ensure straight coursing. 

1. Cut and fit asphalt shingles at ridges and edges to provide maximum weather protection. Provide 

same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap asphalt shingles at ridges to shed water 

away from direction of prevailing wind. 

2. Use fasteners at ridges of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified. 

G. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work. Space movement 

joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner of intersection. Where 

lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently 

waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with 

mastic sealant (concealed within joints). 

H. Metal Fabrication Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams and seal with 

epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 

I. Snow Brackets: Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and 

engineered layout charts. 

1. Bracket Type D: Install with four 2 inch (51 mm) fasteners directly into sheathing with triangular end 

of bracket at eave end of shingle and upper end under shingle in course above. 






SECTION 07411 

METAL AWNING/ROOFING 



A. General: 

1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services to provide metal canopy 

as indicated, in accord with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 

2. Furnish all labor, material, tools, equipment, and services for all preformed roofing as 

indicated, in accord with the provisions of the Contract Documents. The Metal 

Roofing Manufacturer will provide all components required for a complete metal 

roofing system to include panels, panel clips, trim/flashing, fascias, ridge, closures, 

sealants, fillers and any other required items. 

3. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades. 

4. See Division 1 for General Requirements. 


A. Applicable standards: 

1. ASTM A653, “Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron 

Alloy-Coated by Hot-Dip Process”, American Society for Testing and Materials, 1998. 

2. ASTM B209, “Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate”. 

3. ASTM E1592, “Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and 

Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference”, 1995. 

4. ASTM E1646, “Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel 

Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference”, 1995. 

5. ASTM E1680, “Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Metal Roof 

Panels Systems”, 1995. 

6. UL 580, “Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies”, 1994. 

7. UL 2218 Class 4 hail rating. 

B. Manufacturer’s qualifications: 

1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing 

metal roofing systems. Panels specified in this section shall be produced in a 

permanent factory environment with fixed-base roll-forming equipment. A letter 

certifying the manufacturer’s qualifications shall accompany the product material 

submittals. 

C. The Installer shall meet the following minimum criteria: 

1. Have received training and licensing from the metal roofing manufacturer for the 

installation of the specified roof system. 

2. A letter certifying the installer as the Manufacturer’s Certified Installer shall 

accompany the submittal package. 

1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Performance testing: 

1. Metal awning systems shall be tested in accordance with Underwriters Laboratories, 

Inc. (UL) Test Method 580 “Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies”, Class 90 

rating. 

2. Metal roof panel systems shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E1592-95 for 

negative loading. 

3. Metal roof panel systems shall have a maximum air infiltration rate of 0.007 cfm/ft2 at 

a pressure differential of 6.24 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E1680-95. 

METAL ROOFING SYSTEMS Section 07411 - Page 1 of 5




4. Metal roof panel systems shall have no uncontrollable water leakage at a pressure 

differential of 6.24 psf when tested in accordance with ASTM E1646-95. 


A. General: 

1. The Standing Seam Roof System (SSRS) shall be designed by the Manufacturer as 

a complete system. Members and connections not indicated on the drawings shall 

be the responsibility of the Contractor. All components of the system shall be 

supplied or specified by the same manufacturer. 

2. The SSRS shall be installed on a solid substrate approved by the Manufacturer. 

B. Design loads: 


a. The design wind speed for the metal roofing system shall be as defined on 

the contract documents in accordance to local building codes. 

2. Thermal effects: 

a. Roof panels shall be free to move in response to the expansion and 

contraction forces resulting from temperature variation, as specified in the 

MBMA Metal Roofing Systems Design Manual. 

C. Roof panels: 

1. Deflection requirements shall be, as a minimum, L/180 for roof snow load (but not 

less than 20/psf). 

D. Accessories and their fasteners: 

1. Accessories and their fasteners shall be capable of resisting the specified design 

wind uplift forces and shall allow for thermal movement of the roof panel system. 



1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Delivery: 

1. Deliver metal roofing system to job site properly packaged to provide protection 

against transportation damage. 

B. Handling: 

1. Exercise extreme care in unloading, storing and installing metal roofing system to 

prevent bending, warping, twisting and surface damage. 

C. Storage: 

1. Store all material and accessories above ground on well-supported platforms that 

provide a minimum of ¼” to 12” of slope. Store under waterproof covering. Provide 

proper ventilation of metal roofing system to prevent condensation build-up between 

each panel or trim/flashing component. 

1.07 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS 

A. Red Shield or no dollar limit warranty specified is to be followed with no exceptions. The 

warranty period is in Section 1.07 A.1. 

1. Warranty Coverage: 20 year. 

2. Manufacturer’s liability requirement: No dollar limit. 

3. Warranty coverage to include: All system panels, insulations and system 

components and accessories manufactured by Firestone Metal Products. The 

warranty covers weathertightness, finish, materials, labor and workmanship. 

B. Finish warranty period 20 years commencing on date of substantial completion. 

1. Firestone Metal Products 20-year non pro-rated warranty covering a UNACLAD 

finish including color, fade, chalking and film integrity. 






2.01 MANUFACTURER 

A. Firestone Metal Products: Petersen Aluminum. 

2.02 ROOFING TYPE 

A. UNA-CLAD UC-3 Double-Lock Standing Seam Roofing System (SSRS), roll formed 

roofing panels. 

2.03 PANEL MATERIALS AND FABRICATION 

A. Aluminum Panels: ASTM B209, Aluminum Association specification sheet 3003- 

H14/3105-H14 for painted finish. 

1. Thickness: .040 inch. 

B. Form roofing panels in longest practical lengths, true to shape, accurate in size, square 

and free from distribution or manufacturing defects. 

1. Seam Height: Minimum of 1.5”. 

2. Seam Spacing: 20”. 

3. Seams shall be mechanically locked in the field with a mechanical seamer. 

4. Seams shall have a factory applied integral seam sealant in leg of panel. 

2.04 FINISHES 

A. Coil primed and coated on one side with 70% full strength Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 

fluorpolymer coating of 1.0+/-0.1 mil totally dry film thickness. A wash coat of 0.3-0.4 dry 

film thickness shall be applied to the reverse side. 

1. Color: Selected by Owner’s Representative from manufacturer’s standard 

colors. 

2. Number of Coats: 2 coats. 

3. Finish Warranty: 20 years. 

4. Provide factory applied strippable plastic film for protection during fabrication and 

installation. Protective film must be removed immediately after installation. 


A. Installation Clips: Manufacturer’s standard stainless steel clips for concealed 

securement of panels. 

B. Clip Fasteners: Stainless Steel. 

C. Underlayments: 

1. Waterproof Membrane: ASTM D1970, self-adhering with resistance to direct 

exposure for at least 42 days. Minimum high temperature resistance of 230 degrees 

F. Maximum water vapor permeance of 0.1 perms. 

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 

A. Fasteners: 

1. Fasteners for panels shall be “Red Shield” type and size specified below, or as 

otherwise approved for the applicable requirements and shall be the manufacturer’s 

standard. 

B. Components: 

1. Components shall be compatible with the roof panel furnished. Flashing, trim, metal 

closure strips, caps, gutters, downspouts, roof curbs and similar metal components 

shall not be less than the minimum thickness specified by the SSRS Manufacturer. 

Exposed metal components shall be finished to match the panels or trim, as 

furnished. Molded closure strips shall be closed-cell or solid-cell synthetic rubber or 





C. Sealants: 

1. All tape sealant is to be a pressure sensitive, 100 percent solid, sealing tape with a 

release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sagging, non-toxic, nonstaining 

tape sealant approved by the SSRS Manufacturer. 

2. The SSRS Manufacturer shall approve all joint sealant that will come into contact 

with the SSRS. 


A. Panels shall be produced by a Manufacturer meeting the requirements of section 1.02B. 

B. Fabricate trim, flashing, and accessories to Manufacturer’s specified profiles. 

2.08 PREFABRICATED PIPE FLASHINGS 

A. Pipe flashings shall provide a weathertight joint at projections through the roof, taking into 

account the thermal movement of the roof and the service temperature of the projection. 

Pipe flashings shall have an aluminum-flanged base ring. 

2.09 SNOW FENCE 

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 

1. TRA-MAGE Roof Accessory Systems, which is located at: 1657 South 580 East, 

P.O. Box 682, American Fork, UT 84003, Tel: 801-756-8666; 

2. Or equal. 

B. Product: 

1. Snow Fence System C-2-1-Z clamp on for standing seam; Paintlock Steel, 16 

gauge; Powder Coated: Best match of roof color from manufacturer’s standard 

colors. 


3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS 

A. Examination: 

1. The Contractor shall verify installed work of other trades that such work is complete 

to a point where the roofing system installation may commence. 

2. Verify that the substructure installation is in accordance with the approved shop 

drawings and SSRS Manufacturer’s requirements. Coordinate with SSRS 

Manufacturer to ensure that the substructure is installed to accommodate the 

appropriate clip spacing. 

B. Discrepancies: 

1. In event of discrepancy, notify the Professional of Record and Owner’s 

Representative. 

2. Do not proceed with installation until discrepancies have been resolved. 

C. Verify that roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, vents, and other penetrations 

through roof substrate are complete. 


A. Install the SSRS in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop 

drawings. 

B. Install the SSRS so that it is weathertight and allows for thermal movements. 

C. Avoid placing pipe penetrations through the panel seams. 





D. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials (i.e. copper, 

lead, graphite, treated lumber, mortar, etc.). Water run-off from these materials is also 

prohibited. 

E. Comply with the SSRS Manufacturer’s approved installation drawings and instructions. 

F. Field cutting of panels, trim and/or flashing shall be accomplished by hand or electric 

shears. At no time shall a hotsaw be used. 

G. Snow Brackets: Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written 

instructions and engineered layout charts.. Install with four 2 inch (51 mm) fasteners 

directly into sheathing with triangular end of bracket at eave end of shingle and upper 

end under shingle in course above. 

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING 

A. Repair panels with minor damage. 

B. Remove panels damaged beyond repair and replace with new panels to match adjacent 

undamaged panels. 

C. Clean exposed panel surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with 

recommendations of panel and coating manufacturers. 

D. Remove protective film immediately after installation. 






SECTION 07540 

MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM 



A. A Mechanically-Fastened Roofing System incorporates a 10’ or 8’ wide (white) .060” thick, scrim-reinforced, 

Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) membrane. Insulation is mechanically fastened to an acceptable roof deck. 

Provide perimeter sheets (5’ or 4’ wide respectively) installed along the building edges and field membrane 

sheets are mechanically fastened to the roof deck with the appropriate Manufacturer Fasteners and 

Fastening Plates. Adjoining sheets of membrane are overlapped and joined together with a minimum 1-1/2” 

wide hot air weld. 

B. System selection should be adequate to perform per manufacturer’s guidelines as dictated by local codes 

and jurisdictions. Roofing supplier/installer shall verify local acceptance of materials for use in high wind and 

coastal areas. 


A. This roofing system must be installed by a Manufacturer Authorized Roofing Applicator in compliance with 

shop drawings as approved by Manufacturer. 

B. Upon completion of the installation, an inspection will be conducted by a Technical Representative of 

Manufacturer to ascertain the roofing system has been installed according to Manufacturer's specifications 

and details. 

C. This roofing system meets Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM) requirements (minimum 

required FM design is FM Class1A-90). 

1.03 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS/MANUFACTURERS: 

A. Firestone Building Products Co., Carmel, IN. 


A. The contractor shall prepare all shop drawings, product literature, etc. as required to properly coordinate and 

construct the project, and as per the requirements of the Project Manual. Submit the following items for 

review by the Professional of Record in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals. 

B. For all projects (prior to project inspection by Manufacturer) a final shop drawing must be approved by 

Manufacturer, for use on specific location. 


A. Applicator Qualifications: Roofing installer shall have the following: 

1. Current Firestone Master Contractor status. 

1.06 RODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 

A. Deliver materials to job site in original, unopened containers labeled with the manufacturer's name, brand 

name and installation instructions. 

B. Job site storage temperatures in excess of 90°F may affect shelf life of curable materials (i.e., uncured 

flashing, adhesives, sealants, primers, SecurTape, Pourable Sealer and Pressure-Sensitive Flashings). 

C. When liquid adhesives and sealants are exposed to lower temperatures, restore to a minimum of 60°F before 

use. Do not store adhesive containers with opened lids due to loss of solvent, which will occur from flash off. 

D. Insulation and underlayment must be stored so it is kept dry and is protected from the elements. Store 

insulation on a skid and completely cover with a breathable material such as tarp or canvas. If the insulation 

is lightweight, it should be weighted to prevent possible wind damage. 

MEMBRANE ROOFING SYSTEM 07540 - Page 1 of 6




1.07 OB CONDITIONS 

A. The use of a vapor retarder to protect insulation and reduce moisture accumulation within an insulated roofing 

assembly should be investigated by the specifier. Consult the latest publications by ASHRAE (American 

Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.) and NRCA (National Roofing 

Contractors Association) for specific information. 

B. If this roofing system is installed during windy conditions or on projects, which are not encapsulated, 

precautionary measures must be taken to utilize temporary ballast during installation. 

C. Coordination between trades is essential to avoid unnecessary rooftop traffic over sections of the roof and to 

prevent damage to the membrane. 

1.08 WARRANTY 

A. Roofing – Refer to Invitation to Bid. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturer - Roofing System: Firestone Building Products Co., Carmel, IN. 

www.firestonebpco.com. 

1. Roofing systems by other manufacturers are not acceptable. 

B. Manufacturer of Insulation and Cover Boards: Same manufacturer as roof membrane. 

C. Manufacturer of Metal Roof Edging: Same manufacturer as roof membrane. 

1. Metal roof edging products by other manufacturers are not acceptable. 

2. Field- or shop-fabricated metal roof edgings are not acceptable. 

2.02 TPO MEMBRANE MATERIALS 

A. Membrane: Flexible, heat weldable sheet composed of thermoplastic polyolefin polymer and ethylene 

propylene rubber; complying with ASTM D 6878, with polyester weft inserted reinforcement and the 

following additional characteristics: 

1. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) plus/minus 10 percent, with coating thickness over reinforcement of 

0.024 inch (0.61 mm) plus/minus 10 percent. 

2. Puncture Resistance: 265 lbf (1174 N), minimum, when tested in accordance FTM 101C Method 

2031. 

3. Solar Reflectance: 0.79, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1549. 

4. Color: White. 

5. Acceptable Product: ULTRAPLY TPO by Firestone. 

B. Membrane Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofing system and 

warranty to be provided; use only fasteners furnished by roof membrane manufacturer. 

C. Curb and Parapet Flashing: Same material as membrane, with encapsulated edge which eliminates need 

for seam sealing the flashing-to-roof splice; precut to 18 inches (457 mm) wide. 

D. Formable Flashing: Non-reinforced, flexible, heat weldable sheet, composed of thermoplastic polyolefin 

polymer and ethylene propylene rubber. 

1. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) plus/minus 10 percent. 

2. Tensile Strength: 1550 psi (10.7 MPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638 after 

heat aging. 

3. Elongation at Break: 650 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638 after heat 

aging. 

4. Tearing Strength: 12 lbf (53 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1004 after heat 

aging. 

5. Color: White. 

6. Acceptable Product: ULTRAPLY TPO Flashing by Firestone. 





E. Tape Flashing: 5-1/2 inch (140 mm) nominal wide TPO membrane laminated to cured rubber polymer 

seaming tape, overall thickness 0.065 inch (1.6 mm) nominal; TPO QuickSeam Flashing by Firestone. 

F. Pourable Sealer: Two-part polyurethane, two-color for reliable mixing; Pourable Sealer by Firestone. 

G. Seam Plates: Steel with barbs and Galvalume coating; corrosion-resistance complying with FM 4470. 

H. Termination Bars: Aluminum bars with integral caulk ledge; 1.3 inches (33 mm) wide by 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) 

thick; Firestone Termination Bar by Firestone. 

I. Cut Edge Sealant: Synthetic rubber-based, for use where membrane reinforcement is exposed; UltraPly 

TPO Cut Edge Sealant by Firestone. 

J. General Purpose Sealant: EPDM-based, one part, white general purpose sealant; UltraPly TPO General 

Purpose Sealant by Firestone. 

K. Molded Flashing Accessories: Unreinforced TPO membrane pre-molded to suit a variety of flashing details, 

including pipe boots, inside corners, outside corners, etc.; UltraPly TPO Small and Large Pipe Flashing by 

Firestone. 

L. Roof Walkway Pads: Non-reinforced TPO walkway pads, 0.130 inch (3 mm) by 30 inches (760 mm) by 40 

feet (12.19 m) long with patterned traffic bearing surface; UltraPly TPO Walkway Pads by Firestone. 

2.03 ROOF INSULATION 

A. Roof insulation shall be polyisocyanurate roof insulation as shown on drawings with a minimum “R” value 

after aging in accordance with LTTR procedures as provided by Firestone Building Products Co. 

Polyisocyanurate shall have a typical compressive strength of 20 psi. Polyisocyanurate roof insulation shall 

meet Federal Specification HH-I-1972/2-Class I, UL Class A rating and Factory Mutual (FM) Class 1 

approval. 

1. Provide in all locations. 

2. Apply insulation in layers not to exceed 2”; multiple layers are to be staggered. 

3. Provide 1” rigid insulation at all preformed curbs without factory installed insulation. 

B. All insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the roof deck with a minimum six (6) fasteners per 48 inches 

per a 96 inch board. Additional fasteners shall be located as required to eliminate high spots in boards. 

C. Insulation joints shall be 1/4” or less in width. Repair all joints wider than 1/4” with insulation. Stagger all 

joints. 

D. Broken corners shall be cut out and replaced with sections of insulation large enough to be supported on two 

or more deck flutes. 

E. All roof insulation shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of Factory Mutual (FM). 

F. Tapered roof insulation and necessary fill boards forming all crickets between each scupper (where 

applicable), crickets on the high side of roof scuttle, crickets formed on high side of smoke/heat release vents, 

HVAC units and all other roof penetrations with curbs, as shown on roof plan shall be polyisocyanurate roof 

insulation meeting Federal Specifications HH-1-1972/2 Class 1 and Factory Mutual (FM) Class 1 approval. 

Taper insulation to provide 1/4” per foot minimum slope at areas noted as crickets on roof plan. 

2.04 ROOF HATCH 

A. Shall be provided per drawings, with ladder safety post, by Bilco Co., New Haven, CT. 

2.05 RELATED MATERIALS 

A. Non-Reinforced or Reinforced Flashing, Bonding Adhesive, Cut Edge Sealant, Water Cut-Off Mastic, CCW- 

102C Sealant, Brite-Ply Spicing Cement, Sure-Weld Membrane Cleaner, Heat Weldable Walkway Pads, 

Pre-Molded Inside/Outside Corners, Pipe Flashings and Sealant Pockets. 






3.01 GENERAL 

A. When feasible, begin the application at the highest point of the highest roof level and work to the lowest point 

to prevent moisture infiltration and to minimize construction traffic on completed sections. This will include 

completion of all flashings and terminations. 

B. Follow criteria outlined in the "Design Criteria" Section of Manufacturer's technical manual to prepare the roof 

deck or the substrate prior to the application of the new roofing system. 

3.02 ROOF DECK CRITERIA 

A. Defects in the roof deck must be reported and documented to the specifier, general contractor and building 

owner for assessment. The Manufacturer Authorized Roofing Applicator shall not proceed unless the defects 

are corrected. 

B. Acceptable decks and the applicable Manufacturer Fasteners: 

1. Steel, 22 gauge or heavier - Fasteners Plates are required for membrane securement with a 

minimum pullout of 500 pounds per fastener. 

2. Verify system compliance with manufacturer & jurisdictional tested product approvals in high wind 

areas. 

3.03 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION 

A. For all projects, substrate must be even without noticeable high spots or depressions and free of accumulated 

water, ice or snow. Clear substrate of debris and foreign material. Fresh bitumen based roof cement must 

be removed or concealed. 


Refer to the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets and Technical Data Bulletins for cautions and warnings. 

Remove excess dust and dirt from the membrane by wiping with a clean rag. If necessary, scrub the sheets 

with warm soapy water and rinse with clean water. 

A. Insulation Attachment 

1. Insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the roof deck as follows: 

a. For HP Recovery Board or minimum 1-1/2” thick Polyisocyanurate, a minimum of 5 fasteners 

and plates per 4’ x 8’ board are required. 

b. For Polyisocyanurate less than 1-1/2” thick, a minimum of 6 fasteners and plates per 4’ x 8’ 

board are required. 

c. Insulation boards 4’ x 4’, regardless of thickness, must be fastened at the minimum rate of 1 

fastener and plate every 4 square feet. 

2. Manufacturer's Plates, Seam Fastening Plates (2” diameter) or Insulation Fastening Plates (3” 

diameter) must be used with appropriate fastener for insulation attachment. 

B. Membrane Placement and Attachment and Hot Air Welding 

1. A minimum of one perimeter sheet shall be installed at edges of each roof level and either 10’ or 8’ 

wide membrane shall be installed in the field of the roof. 

2. Membrane sheets shall be mechanically fastened with the appropriate Fastener/Fastening Plate 

spaced 6” to 12” on center, depending on project criteria, within the membrane splice. 

3. Overlap adjacent membrane sheets approximately 5--1/2” at those locations where Fastening Plates 

are located (along length of membrane) and a minimum of 2” at end roll sections (width of the 

membrane). 

4. Hot air weld the membrane sheets a minimum of 1-1/2” with an Automatic Hot Air Welding Machine. 

5. Membrane that has been exposed to the elements for approximately 7 days must be prepared with 

Sure-Weld Membrane Cleaner. Wipe the surface where Sure-Weld Membrane Cleaner has been 

applied with a clean, dry HP Splice Wipe or other white rag to remove cleaner residue prior to hot air 

welding. 





C. Additional Membrane Securement 

1. The membrane must be secured at the perimeter of each roof level, roof section, expansion joint, 

curb, skylight, interior wall, penthouse, etc., at any angle change which exceeds 2” in one 

horizontal foot and at all other penetrations in accordance with Manufacturer’s Published Details. 

D. Membrane Flashing 

1. Flash all walls and curbs with Sure-Weld reinforced membrane. Non-Reinforced membrane shall 

be limited to inside and outside corners, field fabricated pipe seals, scuppers and Sealant 

Pockets where the use of premolded accessories are not practical. Terminate the flashing in a 

manner approved by Manufacturer. 

2. On vertical surfaces, such as walls, curbs and pipes, Bonding Adhesive is not required when the 

flashing height is 12” or less and the membrane is terminated under a metal counterflashing 

(nailed). When a coping or termination bar is used for vertical terminations, Bonding Adhesive 

may be eliminated for flashing heights 18” or less. 

E. Provide premolded boots for pipes, conduits, vents and miscellaneous supports for all roof penetrations. 

Boots shall be compatible with roof membrane and of same color. Including, but not limited to, sign 

wiring, irrigation equipment and sanitary roof vents. 

F. Roof Drains: 

1. Taper insulation around drain to provide smooth transition from roof surface to drain. Use 

specified pre-manufactured tapered insulation with facer or suitable bonding surface to achieve 

slope; slope not to exceed manufacturer's recommendations. 

2. Position membrane, then cut a hole for roof drain to allow 1/2 to 3/4 inch (12 to 19 mm) of 

membrane to extend inside clamping ring past drain bolts. 

3. Make round holes in membrane to align with clamping bolts; do not cut membrane back to bolt 

holes. 

4. Apply sealant on top of drain bowl where clamping ring seats below the membrane 

5. Install roof drain clamping ring and clamping bolts; tighten clamping bolts to achieve constant 

compression. 

3.05 FINISHING AND WALKWAY INSTALLATION 

A. Install walkways at access points to the roof, around rooftop equipment that may require maintenance, and 

where indicated on the drawings. 

B. Walkway Pads: Adhere to the roofing membrane, spacing each pad at minimum of 1.0 inch (25 mm) and 

maximum of 3.0 inches (75 mm) from each other to allow for drainage. 

1. If installation of walkway pads over field fabricated splices or within 6 inches (150 mm) of a splice edge 

cannot be avoided, adhere another layer of flashing over the splice and extending beyond the walkway 

pad a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on either side. 

2. Prime the membrane, remove the release paper on the pad, press in place, and walk on pad to ensure 

proper adhesion. 


A. Inspection by Manufacturer: Provide final inspection of the roofing system by a Technical Representative 

employed by roofing system manufacturer specifically to inspect installation for warranty purposes (i.e. not a 

sales person). 

B. Perform all corrections necessary for issuance of warranty. 

3.07 CLEANING 

A. Clean all contaminants generated by roofing work from building and surrounding areas, including bitumen, 

adhesives, sealants, and coatings. 

B. Repair or replace building components and finished surfaces damaged or defaced due to the work of this 

section; comply with recommendations of manufacturers of components and surfaces. 

C. Remove leftover materials, trash, debris, equipment from project site and surrounding areas. 






A. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, provide durable protection and 

replace or repair damaged roofing to original condition. 






SECTION 07620 

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 



A. Flashings, counter flashings, facia, soffit and fabricated sheet metal items, as indicated in 

Schedule. 

B. Reglets and accessories. 


A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and 

standard details, except as otherwise indicated. 





2.01 SHEET MATERIALS 

A. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop coated 

with fluoropolymer coating, color as indicated on drawings, or equal. 

B. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70% PVDF 

resin by weight in color coat. 


A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers. 

B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. 

C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd. 

D. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. 

E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. 

F. Reglets: Formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counter-flashing pieces. 

1. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) thick. 

G. Scuppers: Plain finish shop pre coated with fluoropolymer coating. 


A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. 

B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. 

C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. 

D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed 

lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. 

E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with 

sealant. 

F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form 

drip. 

G. Fabricate through-wall flashings in minimum 96 inch long, but not exceeding 12 foot long sections, 

under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill and similar 

flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall openings. Return and brake edges. 


A. Firestone Building Products Co. – Carmel, IN. - No substitutions are permitted 







A. Conform to drawing details. 

B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. 

C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. 

D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines 

accurate to profiles. 

E. Seal metal joints watertight. 

F. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashings and trim are 

installed. 






SECTION 07650 

EPDM SHEET FLASHING 



A. Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM) sheet flashing.. 

B. Flashing accessories. 

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 

A. Section 07620 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 


A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets showing product characteristics and including installation 

instructions. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Company with at least three years of successful experience in weathertight 

installation of flashing. 


A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer’s sealed containers and packaging, bearing 

manufacturer’s name and product identification. 

B. Stack flashing materials to avoid twisting, bending, and abrasion. Protect materials from weather 

before installation. 

C. Sheet flashing, adhesives and tapes are typically combustible and may constitute a fire hazard if 

improperly stored or installed. Do not expose to flame or other ignition sources. 



A. Firestone Specialty Products: Product FlashGard Thru-wall Flashing: www.firestonesp.com 

1. Location: 250 West 96 th St., Indianapolis, IN 46260. 

2. Phone: (800) 428-4442, ext. 57095. 

B. Substitutions: Not permitted. 


A. Sheet Flashing: Non-reinforced, ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) sheet. 

1. Thickness: 0.040 inches (40 mils). 

2. Length: 50 feet. 

B. Width: As noted on drawings. 

2.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA 

A. FlashGard Thru-wall Flashing by Firestone Specialty Products; no substitutions. 


A. Tape, Adhesive/Primer, Block Sealer, Metal Drip Edge, Termination Bar, Sealer and Fasteners as 

recommended or manufactured by Firestone Specialty Products; no substitutions. 

EPDM SHEET FLASHING 07650 - Page 1 of 2






A. Verify that surfaces to receive flashing are thoroughly dry, free from dirt, oil, grease and other 

materials, reasonably smooth and without any sharp edges, fins, loose or foreign materials that 

may damage membrane. 

1. Do not use open flame sources or any other means to expedite drying of adhesives, sealants 

or primers. 

B. Roughened surfaces that could cause damage shall be properly isolated from the membrane. 

C. Verify that locations to receive flashing are sloped so water that enters will drain to building exterior 

face. 


A. Properly fill voids of sheet flashing substrate surface greater than ¼ inch wide with appropriate 

material such as mortar or grout. 

B. Remove any moisture on the substrate prior to installation. 


A. Coordination: Interface flashing work with adjacent and adjoining work to ensure weather 

resistance and durability of completed flashing. 

B. Install sheet flashing in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and details. 

C. Upon completion of the masonry veneer installation, trim the sheet flashing as indicated on the 

Drawings to form a drip edge. Do not terminate sheet flashing within the mortar joint. 


EPDM SHEET FLASHING 07650 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 07710 

RAIN REMOVAL SYSTEMS 


1.01 Scope of work 

A. Furnish labor, materials and equipment required to complete installation of Aluminum Rain 

Removal Systems and all other related work indicated on drawings or specified herein. 

1.02 References 

A. Aluminum gutters and downspouts meet or exceed the following specifications. 

1. AAMA 1405.1 Specifications for Aluminum Gutter and Downspouts 

2. FHA 4900.1 Minimum Property Standard for One- and Two-Family Dwellings 

3. FHA 4910.1 Minimum Property Standard for Multifamily Dwellings 

1.03 Quality Assurance 

A. Relevant standards and codes are listed in section 1.02 References. 


2.01 Manufacturer 

A. Alcoa Home exteriors, Inc., Omega Corporate Center, 1590 Omega Drive, Pittsburgh, PA 15205, 

(800) 962-6973, or equal. 

B. Substituted manufacturer to be equal in all product specifications. 

2.02 Materials 

A. All Aluminum Rain Removal Systems shall be made of 3105-H26 aluminum sheet (minimum tensile 

strength 26,000 psi, minimum yield strength 22,000 psi) or equivalent. 

B. The finish is Alcoa's Alumalure 2000®, applied in two separate coating operations and is baked on 

for added protection and longer life. The finish shall be a two-coat acrylic finish applied in a twophase 

operation which includes a corrosion-inhibiting primer and a baked-on, high-performance 

acrylic topcoat. The finish is highly weather-resistant and provides the gutter with high performance 

and appearance qualities. The Alumalure 2000 finish system is warranted against chipping, flaking 

and peeling, inside and out, with a lifetime limited warranty. Prior to finishing, the metal shall 

receive a special cleaning process to assure maximum finish adhesion. The inside of all gutters 

and downspouts shall be coated with a special gold-colored corrosion-inhibiting finish. 

2.03 Hanger Systems Description 

A. The Rain Removal Systems shall be designed to be free-floating, enabling the gutter to expand and 

contract with temperature changes, while minimizing stress points which cause buckling and leaks. 

B. System gutters, when properly installed, will support a minimum of 50 pounds (22.7 kg) per lineal 

foot. Six different types of free-floating hanger systems are available in the 5" (127) series, and four 

hanger systems are available in the 6" (152.4) series. These hanger systems permit the gutter to 

be used in both new construction and all types of remodeling work. Gutter hangers to be .051" - 

.082" (1.3 - 2.1) gauge, depending on the style specified. 

C. All hanger systems provide a concealed attachment at the front of the gutter, eliminating any 

exposed protrusions that would detract from the appearance of the gutter. Spikes and ferrules 

(which restrict the movement of the gutter) and brackets attached to the outside periphery of the 

gutter shall not be used. 





2.04 Gutters and Downspouts Description 

A. Two different types of high-quality, corrosion-resistant rain removal systems are available, all 

designed to perform in both residential and light commercial applications. 

B. The front face of the gutter shall have a concealed locking lip and the high back leg shall be formed 

with a return hook at the top. The locking lip and return hook function as receivers for the aprons 

and hangers used to install the free-floating system. 

C. System description: 

1. Traditional Select is a premium-quality 5" (127) system used in single-family homes 

and light commercial building applications. Available with a heavier gauge material in both 

2" x 3" (51 x 76) and 3" x 4" (76.2 x 101.6) downspout sizes to accommodate most rain 

removal requirements. 

2. Traditional Select S-6 works best on large homes where a bigger system will enhance 

the architecture, or apartments, multifamily complexes and other light commercial 

buildings. Designed to be a heavy-duty, large-capacity rain removal system, it is available 

with a 3" x 4" (76 x 102) downspout. 

D. 2"x 3" (51 x 76) downspout will carry water approximately 600 square feet (65,741.800mm2) of roof 

area, while the 3" x 4" (76.2 x 101.6) downspout will drain approximately 1,200 square feet 

(111,483.600mm2). 

E. Color: 

1. Gutters: Finished in color as noted on drawings. 

2. Downspouts: Finished to match adjacent wall color; refer to drawings. 

2.05 Dimensions 

A. Gutters: 

1. Traditional Select: .032” (.813) gauge, 16’-0” (4877), 21’-0” (6401), 26’-0” ) (7925), 33’-0” 

(1005) and 37’-0” (11278) lengths, six hangers. 

2. Tranditional Select S-6: .032” (.813) gauge, 21’-0” (6401) and 37’-0” (11278) lengths, 

four hangers. 

B. Downspouts: 



2.06 Accessories 

A. All accessories used with Rain Removal Systems shall be accessories designed for use with the 

gutters and have the same finish. Mill finish accessory components include eave tubes, hangers 

and expansion joints. 

1. Roof aprons: .027" (.686) gauge 

2. End caps: .024" (.610) gauge in both the Traditional Select and Traditional Select S-6 

3. Inside and outside mitres: .032" (.813) gauge 

4. Sealant material: Alcoa Gutterseal 

5. Expansion joints: aluminum lined with neoprene 

6. Downspout clip: .014" (.356) gauge 

B. Nails: Alcoa aluminum nails of 5056 or 6110 alloy having a minimum tensile strength of 63,000 psi. 

All nails shall have a suitable etch finish to remove greases and provide additional holding power. 


3.01 Installation/Workmanship 

A. Verify governing dimensions of building. Prior to installation, it is necessary to examine and repair 

any adjoining work on which this work in any way is dependent for its proper installation. 





B. The gutter shall be installed by using a free-floating hanger systems so movement is not restricted. 

Spikes and ferrules or brackets attached to the outside periphery of the gutter shall not be used. 

Hangers should be located a maximum of 32" (812) apart and nailed to the roof sheathing or fascia 

board at rafter locations wherever possible with two 1-1/4" (31.7) or 1-1/2" (38.1) Alcoa aluminum 

screw shank nails. 

C. Expansion joints should be used on all hip roof installations, on straight runs over forty feet in 

length or any conditions where normal movement due to expansion and contraction is restricted. 

D. A visual inspection of entire project should be conducted. All problem areas should be replaced and 

repaired in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

E. Upon completion, contractor shall clean all aluminum work and remove all scrap materials. 

3.02 Protection 

A. Care must be exercised in placing aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials. 

B. Aluminum shall not be installed in contact with dissimilar metals, concrete, stucco, asbestos siding, 

masonry, or corrosive non-metallic materials which might become repeatedly wet. 





Date: January 2012 

SECTION 07900 

JOINT SEALERS 



A. Sealants and joint backing. 


A. Maintain temperature and humidity as recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after 

installation. 


A. LEED Submittals: No submittals are required. Refer to Section 01352 for LEED recommendations 

on this project. 



A. Silicone Sealants: 

1. Bostik. 

2. ChemRex Inc. (Sonneborn). 

3. Dow Corning Corporation. 

4. Tremco 

5. Or Equal 

B. Polyurethane Sealants: 

1. Bostik. 


3. Tremco 

4. Or Equal 

C. Polysulfide Sealants: 


2. Or Equal 

D. Acrylic Sealants: 

1. Tremco 

2. Or Equal 

E. Butyl Sealants: 

1. Bostik. 

2. H.B. Fuller Company (PTI). 

3. Tremco 

4. Or Equal 

F. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 


2. Tremco 

3. Or Equal 

G. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers: 

1. Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd. 

2. Sealform Ltd (willseal). 

3. Or Equal 

2.02 SEALANTS 

A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, 

and A; single component. 

1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 

JOINT SEALERS 07900 - Page 1 of 2



Date: January 2012 

B. Exterior Expansion Joint Sealer: Precompressed foam sealer; urethane with water-repellent; 

C. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring. 

D. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, single component, 

paintable. 

E. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, 

M and A; single component. 

F. Firestopping: Provide non-sag, one component sealant, meeting ASTM E814, ASTM 84, IEEE 634 

and listed as UL 1479. The following are acceptable products: (fire separation assembly, if 

applicable) 

1. FIRECODE compound with THERMAFIBER Safing Insulation, by USG Corporation, Chicago IL (312/ 321- 

4221). 

2. FYRE-Shield Sealant, by Tremco, Beachwood OH (800/ 321-7906). 

3. CAFCO TPS Firestop Putty, by Isolatek International, Stanhope NJ (201/ 347-1200). 


A. As recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 


3.01 PREPARATION and INSTALLATION 

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements and ASTM C 1193 for 

preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. 


JOINT SEALERS 07900 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 08112 

COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 



A. Hollow metal doors, frames, and accessories. 


A. Section 08710 – Door Hardware. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five years documented experience-producing products 

specified in this section and Member of HMMA. 






A. Steel Sheet: One of the following: 

1. Cold-rolled steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial quality. 

2. Hot-rolled steel sheet conforming to ASTM A 569/A 569M, pickled and oiled, commercial 

quality. 

B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial quality, minimum G60/Z180 zinc 

coating. 

C. Insulating Material: Glass fiber or rock wool. 

2.02 DOOR AND FRAME ASSEMBLIES 

A. Door Construction: A standard 3 feet by 7 feet door shall meet requirements of ANSI A250.4 

procedure for level A doors for 1,000,000 cycles and twist test of 300 pounds; provide test reports. 

B. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80; constructed as tested in accordance with NFPA 

252 for specified fire resistance ratings. 

1. Listed or classified by UL and bearing the fire rating label or seal of that agency. 

2.03 DOORS 

A. Exterior Doors: Galvanized steel face sheets of minimum 16 gage thickness. 


2. Sizes: Indicated on drawings. 

3. Fill spaces between stiffeners with insulating material. 

B. Interior Doors: Steel face sheets of minimum 18 gage thickness. 


2. Sizes: Indicated on drawings. 

3. Non-Insulated. 

C. Face and Core Fabrication: Visible seams on face sheets not permitted. 

1. Stiffen face sheets with continuous vertical sections, formed of minimum 22 gage steel sheet, 

which, upon assembly, span full thickness of interior space between door faces. 

2. Space stiffeners 6 inches apart, maximum; spot-weld to both face sheets at 5 inches, 

maximum, on center vertically. 

D. Vertical Edge Fabrication: Join face sheets at vertical edges by continuous welding on each edge, 

extending full door height; grind, fill, and dress welds to provide smooth flush surface. 

1. Single acting swing doors: Bevel each vertical edge 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 

COMMERCIAL STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08112 - Page 1 of 3




E. Horizontal Edge Fabrication: Close top and bottom edges of doors with continuous steel channels, 

16 gage minimum; spot-weld channels to both door faces. 

1. Exterior doors: Provide openings in bottom closure to permit escape of entrapped moisture. 

2. Exterior doors: Provide additional flush closing channel at top edge; spot-weld channel to 

both door faces. 

F. Hardware Preparation: 

1. Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap doors at factory for fully templated mortised hardware only, in 

accordance with approved hardware schedule and supplied templates. 

2. Provide reinforcing plates at locations of surface-mounted and non-templated hardware. 

3. Provide hardware reinforcing plates as follows: 

a. Full mortise hinges and pivots: 7 gage minimum. 

b. Lock face and flush bolts: 12 gage minimum. 

c. All other surface mounted hardware: 14 gage minimum. 

G. Moldings and Stops: Same material as door face material, minimum 20 gage, with butt corner 

joints. 

H. Provide full perimeter weather stripping including door sweeps and thresholds for all 

exterior doors. 

2.04 FRAMES 

A. Frames for Exterior Doors: Welded type, of galvanized steel sheet; knock-down frames not 

permitted. 

1. Minimum 16 gage thickness 

2. Sizes and Profiles: Indicated on drawings. 

3. Provide aluminum drip cap for exterior doors and frames. 

B. Frames for Interior Doors: Welded type of steel sheet; knockdown frames not permitted. 

1. Opening widths up to, and including, 4 feet: Minimum 16 gage thickness. 

2. Sizes and Profiles: Indicated on drawings. 

C. Fabrication: Form frame members straight, and of uniform profile through length, with integral trim, 

of sizes and profiles indicated. 

1. Comply with frame schedule and approved shop drawings. 

2. Miter perimeter trim faces and weld continuously; butt interior joints; butt stop joints. 

3. Stops: Minimum 5/8 inch in depth. 

4. When shipping limitations so dictate, fabricate frames for large openings in sections designed 

for assembly in the field; install alignment plates or angles, of same material and gage as 

frame, at each joint. 

5. Provide temporary steel spreader welded to jamb feet for bracing during shipping and 

handling. 

D. Hardware Preparation: 

1. Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap frames at factory for fully templated mortised hardware only, in 

accordance with approved hardware schedule and supplied templates. 

2. Provide reinforcing plates at locations of surface-mounted and non-templated hardware. 

3. Provide hardware reinforcing plates as follows: 

a. Full mortise hinges and pivots: 7 gage minimum thickness by 1-1/4 inches by 10 inches 

minimum. 

b. Strikes and Electrical Strikes: 12 gage minimum. 

c. Flush bolts: 12 gage minimum. 

d. Closers: 12 gage minimum. 

e. All other surface mounted hardware: 12 gage minimum. 

E. Floor Anchors: Same material as frame material; minimum 14 gage. 

1. Weld anchors inside each jamb for floor anchorage. 

F. Jamb Anchors for Masonry Walls: Same material as frame material; adjustable T-strap, stirrup 

strap, or wire type jamb anchors; minimum 16 gage steel or 0.156 inch diameter. 

1. Weld anchors inside each jamb for wall anchorage. 

2. Stirrup straps: Minimum 2 inches by 10 inches in size; corrugated and/or perforated type. 

3. Provide the following minimum number of anchors each jamb for indicated frame heights: 

a. Up to 60 inches: 2 anchors. 

b. Greater than 60 inches to 90 inches: 3 anchors. 





c. Greater than 90 inches to 96 inches: 4 anchors. 

d. Greater than 96 inches: 4 anchors, plus one for each 24 inches, or fraction thereof, over 

96 inches, spaced at 24 inches, maximum, on center. 

G. Jamb Anchors for Frames in Stud Partitions: Same material as frame material; minimum 18 gage. 

1. Weld anchors inside each jamb for wall anchorage. 

2. Provide the following minimum number of anchors, each jamb for indicated frame heights: 

a. Up to 60 inches: 3 anchors. 

b. Greater than 60 inches to 90 inches: 4 anchors. 

c. Greater than 90 inches to 96 inches: 5 anchors. 

d. Greater than 96 inches: 5 anchors, plus one for each 24 inches, or fraction thereof, over 

96 inches, spaced at 24 inches, maximum, on center. 

H. Jamb Anchors for Frames to be Anchored to Previously Placed Concrete, Masonry or Structural 

Steel: 3/8 inch diameter bolts with spacers welded to concealed surface of each jamb at: 

1. 6 inches from top of frame. 

2. 6 inches from bottom of frame. 

3. 26 inches, maximum, on center between top and bottom anchors. 

I. Glazing Stops: Provide stops to secure glazing for frames specified or scheduled to have glazed 

openings; size as indicated on approved shop drawings. 

1. Loose Glazing Stops: Removable channel stops of same material as frame material, 

minimum 16 gage, butt corners; countersunk for fasteners; secured with Number 6 cadmium 

or zinc-plated screws. 

2.05 HARDWARE LOCATIONS 

A. Hinges: 

1. Top: 5 inches from head of frame to top of hinge. 

2. Bottom: 10 inches from finished floor to bottom of hinge. 

3. Intermediate: Centered between top and bottom hinges. 

B. Locks and Latches: 

1. Unit and integral type locks and latches: 38 inches from finished floor to centerline of knob. 

2. Deadlocks: 48 inches from finished floor to centerline of strike. 

C. Door Trim: 

1. Door pulls: 42 inches from finished floor to center of grip. 

2. Push plates: 48 inches from finished floor to centerline of plate. 



A. Prior to installation, check and correct frames for size, swing, squareness, alignment, twist and 

plumbness. 


A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 

B. Installation Tolerances: Do not exceed the following: 

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured on a line, 90 degrees from one jamb, at the 

upper corner of the frame at the other jamb. 

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured on jambs on a horizontal line parallel to the 

plane of the wall. 

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured at face corners of jambs on parallel lines 

perpendicular to the plane of the wall. 

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch measured on the jamb at the floor. 


A. Adjust installed doors for correct swings and site tolerances. 






SECTION 08310 

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes: 

1. Fire rated wall access panels. 

2. Related hardware and attachments. 

B. Related Sections: 

1. Section 05400 – Cold Formed Metal Framing 

2. Section 06193 – Plate Connected Wood Trusses. 

3. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 

4. Section 09510 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings. 

5. Section 09902 – Interior and Exterior Paints and Stains. 


A. Design Requirements: 

1. Verification: Obtain specific locations and sizes for required access doors and frames from 

trades, including mechanical and electrical, requiring access to concealed equipment and 

indicate on submittal schedule. 


A. Comply with Section 01300. 

B. Shop Drawings: 

1. Door and panel units: Show types, elevations, thickness of metals, full size profiles of door 

members. 

2. Hardware: Show materials, finishes, locations of fasteners, types of fasteners, locations and 

types of operating hardware, and details of installation. 

3. General: Show connections of units and hardware to other Work. Include schedules showing 

location of each type and size of door and panel units. 

C. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for each type of access door and panel assembly, 

including setting drawings, templates, fire-resistive characteristics, finish requirements, and details of 

anchorage devices. 

1. Include complete schedule, types, locations, construction details, finishes, latching or locking 

provisions, and other pertinent data. 

D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements and rough-in dimensions. 

1. Shop drawings 

2. Manufacturer’s literature and data. 



B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain access door and panel units, and frames for entire Project from 

1 source and 1 single manufacturer. 

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Section 08310 - 1 of 3




C. Fire Resistance Ratings: Wherever a fire resistance classification is indicated, provide access door 

and panel assemblies with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in 

Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL), “Building Materials Directory” for rating shown. 

1. Provide 90 minute UL label at partitions rated 1 hour or higher. 

D. Size Variations: Obtain Architect’s acceptance and approval of manufacturer’s standard size units 

that may vary slightly from sizes indicated on Drawings. 

E. Coordination: Provide inserts and anchoring devices that will be built into other Work for installation 

of access door assemblies. Coordinate delivery with other Work to avoid delay. 



B. Package and ship per manufacturer’s recommendations. 

C. Store per manufacturer’s instructions. 

1. Store in dry area out of direct sunlight. 



A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer: 

1. Babcock-Davis 

9300 73 rd Ave. N 

Brooklyn Park, MN 55428 

Toll Free Hotline: 888-412-3726 

Toll Free Fax: 888-312-3726 

Direct Phone: 763.488.9247 

Direct Fax: 763.488.9248 

E-Mail: info@babcockdavis.com 

Internet: www.babcockdavis.com 

B. Or equal. 

C. Specifications and Drawings are based on manufacturer's proprietary literature from Nystrom 

Building Products. Other manufacturers shall comply with minimum levels of material, color 

selection, and detailing indicated in Specifications or on Drawings. Architect will be sole judge of 

appropriateness of substitutions. 


A. Commercial quality, cold steel sheet with baked on rust inhibitive gray primer. 

B. Galvanized, bonderized steel with baked on rust inhibitive gray primer. 

C. Type: No. 304 stainless steel with No. 4 satin polish finish. 

2.03 ACCESS PANELS 

A. Oversized Fire Rated Access Panels for horizontal and vertical applications, Babcock-Davis FRD 

Series 

1. Size: 36 inch x 36 inch. Double door construction. 

2. Door: Fabricate from 18-gauge galvanized steel, insulated sandwich type construction. 22 

gauge liner. 

3. Frame: Fabricate from 16-gauge galvanized steel. 





a. .875 flange at perimeter. 

4. Hinge: Concealed continuous rod opening to 100 degrees. 

5. Latching/Locking Mechanism: Factory installed flush ¼ inch allen key, self latching. 

6. Finish: White electrostatically applied rust inhibitive prime coat. 

7. Insulation: 1 ½ inches thick high temperature. 

8. Automatic Closure Device: Integral automatic spring closure device for each door, will close 

and latch all doors from an open position of approximately 90 degrees. 

9. Interior Latch Release: Mechanism to allow for panel to open from interior side-standard on all 

panels. 


A. Manufacture each access panel assembly as an integral unit ready for installation. 

B. Welded construction: Furnish with a sufficient quantity of ¼ inch mounting holes to secure access 

panels to types of supports indicated. 

C. Recessed panel: Form face of panel to provide specified recess for application of finish material. 

Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling. 

D. Furnish number of latches required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed. 




B. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. 

C. Verify mechanical and electrical requirements for ceiling or wall access panels. 


A. Advise installers of work relating to access panel installation including rough opening dimensions, 

locations of supports, and anchoring methods. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. 


A. Install access door and frame units per manufacturer’s written instructions. 

B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place. 

C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed Work requiring access. 

D. Fire-rated units: Include UL or Warnock-Hersey labels. 

3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN 

A. Adjust panel after installation for proper operation. 

B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or damaged. 






SECTION 08332 

FIRE DOORS & ROLLING DOORS 



A. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 

General Requirements, apply to the work of this Section. 

1.02 SUMMARY 

A. The work of this Section includes rolling fire doors and rolling doors. 

B. Related Sections: Other specification sections which directly relate to the work of this Section include, 

but are not limited to, the following: 

1. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware; key cylinders for locks. 

2. Section 16100 - Electrical; wiring. 




A. Manufacturer: Manufacturers proposed for use, which are not named in these specifications, shall 

submit evidence of ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a 

list of five projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years. 

B. Installer: Installation of rolling fire doors shall be performed by an authorized representative of the 

manufacturer. 

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, guides, motors, and related primary components 

from one manufacturer. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to 

manufacturer of primary components. 


A. Deliver materials and products in labeled protective packages. Store and handle in strict 

compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. Protect from damage from 

weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. 


2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER 

A. Provide rolling fire doors by Overhead Door Corporation, Pennsylvania Division; Telephone 

800-929-2553 or 717-248-0131; Fax 800-929-1274, or equal. 

2.02 ROLLING DOORS 

A. Trade Reference: Series 620 or 625 (insulated) or equal Doors by Overhead Door Corporation. 

B. Curtain: Interlocking roll-formed slats as specified following. Endlocks shall be attached to each end 

of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement. 

1. Curved profile for doors thru 14'0" wide by 12'0" high, fabricated of 22 gauge 

galvanized steel. (20 gauge galvanized steel.) (22 gauge stainless steel.) 

C. Glazing: Not Required 

FIRE DOORS – ROLLING FIRE DOORS 08332 – Page 1 of 4




D. Finish: 

1. Galvanized Steel: Slats and hood shall be galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 

525 and receive rust-inhibitive, roll coating process, including bonderizing, 0.2 mils thick 

baked-on prime paint, and 0.6 mils thick baked-on polyester (powder coated) top 

coat. Non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive 

primer. 

2. Stainless Steel: Slats shall be stainless steel with 2B mill finish. 

E. Color: Refer to Drawings. 

F. Bottom Bar: Two (galvanized) structural steel angles 1-1/2" by 1-1/2" by 1/8" minimum. 

G. Guides: Roll-formed steel shapes attached to continuous steel wall angle for doors thru 12' wide. 

1. Fastening Guides to Non-Masonry Fire Walls: Comply with the manufacturer’s listing. 

I. Brackets: Steel plate to support counterbalance, curtain and hood. 

J. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type. Counterbalance shall be housed in a steel tube or 

pipe barrel, supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0.03" per foot of span. 

Counterbalance shall be adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel. 

K. Hood: 24 gauge galvanized primed steel minimum for wall openings thru 19' wide. Hood shall 

be equipped with thermally controlled, internal, galvanized steel flame baffle as required. 

L. Manual Operation: Manual Chain hoist. 

L. Insulated overhead doors shall be insulated as follows: 


use insulated metal panels. 

2. And in areas of the country with 2499 hours of 65 degree days (HDD 65) and less will not 

need to be insulated. 



M. Locking interior bottom bar slide bolt. 

N. Wall Mounting Condition: Face-of-wall mounting. 

2.03 ROLLING FIRE DOORS 

A. Trade Reference: Series 630 Fire Doors by Overhead Door Corporation. 

B. Label: Provide fire doors certified with the following listing. 

1. Rolling fire doors up to 144 sq. ft. and 12' in width or height shall bear the UL and FM 

1-1/2 Hour Class B Label for non-masonry fire walls. 

C. Curtain: Interlocking roll-formed slats as specified following. Endlocks shall be attached to each end 

of alternate slats to prevent lateral movement. 

1. Curved profile type C-187 for doors thru 14'0" wide by 12'0" high, fabricated 

of 22 gauge galvanized steel. (20 gauge galvanized steel.) (22 gauge stainless 

steel.) 

D. Glazing: Not Required 





E. Finish: 

1. Galvanized Steel: Slats and hood shall be galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A 

525 and receive rust-inhibitive, roll coating process, including bonderizing, 0.2 mils thick 

baked-on prime paint, and 0.6 mils thick baked-on polyester (powder coated) top 

coat. Non-galvanized exposed ferrous surfaces shall receive one coat of rust-inhibitive 

primer. 

2. Stainless Steel: Slats shall be stainless steel with 2B mill finish. 

F. Color: Gray polyester top coat. 

G. Bottom Bar: Two (galvanized) structural steel angles 1-1/2" by 1-1/2" by 1/8" minimum. 

H. Guides: Roll-formed steel shapes attached to continuous steel wall angle for doors thru 12' wide. 

1. Fastening Guides to Masonry Fire Walls: UL listed expansion anchors, or by throughbolts 

on soft brick or hollow block walls, or by bolts on steel jambs, or welded in 

accordance with manufacturer’s listing. 

2. Fastening Guides to Non-Masonry Fire Walls: Comply with the manufacturer’s listing. 

I. Brackets: Steel plate to support counterbalance, curtain and hood. 

J. Counterbalance: Helical torsion spring type. Counterbalance shall be housed in a steel tube or pipe 

barrel, supporting the curtain with deflection limited to 0.03" per foot of span. Counterbalance 

shall be adjustable by means of an adjusting tension wheel. 

K. Hood: 24 gauge galvanized primed steel minimum for wall openings thru 19' wide. Hood shall be 

equipped with thermally controlled, internal, galvanized steel flame baffle as required. 

L. Manual Operation: Manual Chain hoist. 

M. Automatic Closure: 

1. Automatic closure thermally controlled by means of 165 degree or 212 degree fusible links. 

2. Test and reset lever shall be provided to test release function and reset the door from the 

floor without tools or special training. (Test lever shall be lockable by padlock provided by 

others.) 

N. Locking interior bottom bar slide bolt. 

O. Wall Mounting Condition: Face-of-wall mounting. 



A. Take field dimensions and examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions 

under which this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions 

are corrected. 


A. Strictly comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations. Coordinate 

installation with adjacent work to ensure proper clearances and allow for maintenance. 

B. Install rolling fire doors in compliance with requirements of NFPA 80. Test fire-release system and reset 

components after testing. 

C. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule. 






A. Test rolling doors for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without 

binding or distortion. 

B. Touch-up damaged coatings and finishes and repair minor damage. Clean exposed surfaces using 

non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material or product 

being cleaned. 






SECTION 08360 

SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 



A. Overhead sectional doors, electrically operated. 

B. Operating hardware, tracks, and supports. 

C. Accessories and installation hardware.. 


A. Design and size components to withstand dead loads, positive and negative wind loads as 

calculated in accordance with local code as measured in accordance with ASTM E 330. 


A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- 

Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 

B. ASTM A 924/A 924M - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by 

the Hot-Dip Process. 

C. ASTM B 209/209M - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 

D. ASTM B 221/221M - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, 

Profiles, and Tubes. 








5. Nameplate data and ratings for motors. 

C. Shop Drawings: Include opening dimensions and required tolerances, connection details, 

anchorage spacing, hardware locations, and installation details. 

D. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing 

manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 

E. Verification Samples: For each finish specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) 

square, representing actual product, color, and patterns 



1.05 WIND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 

A. Design doors to withstand positive and negative wind loads as calculated in accordance with 

applicable building code. 

1. Design Wind Load: See Structural Drawings. 

2. Safety Factor: 1.5 times design wind load. 

B. Confirm air borne debris requirement as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of doors specified in 

this section, with not less than ten years of documented experience. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing the types of products specified in this 

section and approved by the door manufacturer. 

C. Conform to applicable code for motor and motor control requirements. 

D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., 

as suitable for the purpose specified. 







A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Clopay Building Products Company, which is located at: 8585 Duke 

Blvd. ; Mason, OH 45040-3101; Toll Free Tel: 800-282-2260; Tel: 513-770-4800; Fax: 513-770- 

3519; Factory contacts, Michele Koverman 937-440-6367, mkoverman@clopay.com;; Chris 

Remick 614-306-9968 cremick@clopay.com. No other manufacturer accepted. 

2.02 OVERHEAD DOORS GENERAL 

A. Provide overhead doors manufactured as a complete assembly. Provide each door assembly 

comprising door panels, brackets, tracks, counterbalance mechanisms, and hardware, all as 

required for the opening size and headroom available. 

B. Vision Panels: Nine (9) full vision panels, pre-painted frames to match door finish. Provide safety 

glass for all vision panel locations, 1/8” safety glass or ½” insulated glass safety glass. Refer to 

Section 2.04. In high wind zones requiring impact-resistant glazing, only three (3) panels will 

incorporate vision panels. 

C. Finish: Exterior 1 mil (.025 mm) coating; interior 0.5 mil (0.013 mm) coating; color as indicated on 

the drawings. 

D. Hardware: Hinges and brackets manufactured from hot-dipped galvanized steel, minimum 0.075 

inch (1.91 mm) thickness. Ten ball steel rollers full floating in case-hardened steel races, mounted 

to fit the taper of the track. 

E. Tracks: Vertical tracks minimum 0.061 inch (1.55 mm) galvanized steel tapered and mounted for 

wedge type closing. Horizontal tracks minimum 0.075-inch (1.91 mm) galvanized steel, reinforced 

with minimum 0.0897 inch (2.28 mm) galvanized steel angles as required. 

a. Track Width: 3 inches (75 mm). 

b. Lift application per drawings 

F. Spring Counterbalance: Torsion spring counterbalance mechanism sized to weight of the door, 

with a helically wound, oil tempered torsion spring mounted on a steel shaft; cable drum of die cast 

aluminum with high strength galvanized aircraft cable with minimum 7 to 1 safety factor. 

a. High Cycle Spring: 50,000 cycles. 

b. Manual operation with maximum exertion of 25 lbs. force to open. 

G. Interior mounted end style lock with shim for 3” track. Do not bend the locking bar. 

H. Weatherstripping: Top brush seal and brush side seals (2-1/2” aluminum leg with 1-1/2” bristle 

length - Part Number 065396 - no substitutions) and special bottom astragal seal with U- 

Shaped flexible PVC astragal Part Number 0620141 (no substitutions). 

I. Install 4” exhaust port centered in the bottom section. Install in closed position with hinge on top. 

J. Interior Step Plate: High impact steel step plate Part Number 0120690 (no substitutions) on 

bottom section below slide lock. 

K. Spring bumper to be installed at the rear of the horizontal track per Clopay shop drawing 

recommendation/s. 

2.03 UNINSULATED SECTIONAL DOORS ( reference floor plan drawings for quantity ) 



2. Steel Skin Thickness: Minimum 0.022 inch (0.56 mm). 

B. Door Construction: 

1. Panel Sections: 2 inches (52 mm) thick roll formed commercial quality steel panel sections, 

hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 924/A 924M and ASTM A 653/A 653M, phosphatized and 

prepainted with primer and baked-on polyester topcoat. Panel faces reinforced with two ½ 

inch (13 mm) deep ribs on 8 inches (200 mm) centers, complemented by six 1/8 inch (3 mm) 

beads on 2 inches (50 mm) centers. Sections formed to create a weather tight tongue and 

groove meeting rail. Bottom panel section reinforced with continuous 0.050 inch (1.27 mm) 

aluminium astragal retainer. 

2. Door Stiles: Galvanized, primed and polyester top-coated turn-down steel end stiles; wrap 

face of panel sections a full 1-3/8 inches (35 mm); 0.049 inch (1.25 mm) minimum thickness 

up to 14 ft., 2 inches (4.32 m), otherwise 0.61 inch (1.55 mm) thickness; engineered for easy 






3. Connections: Fasten panel sections and stiles with manufacturer’s Tog-L-Loc joining system. 

2.04 INSULATED THERMALLY SECTIONAL STEEL DOORS ( reference floor plan drawings for 

quantity. Use for locations north of the National Frost Line and high wind zones.) 



2. Overall Panel Thickness: 2 inches (51mm). 2” EPS insulation between two sheets of steel. 

3. Steel Skin Thickness: Minimum 0.023 inch (0.56 mm) exterior; minimum 0.016 inch (0.41mm) 

interior. 

4. Stiles: Steel pre-painted end stiles, minimum 0.049 inch (1.25mm) thick, engineered for easy 


5. Bottom panel section reinforced with continuous 0.050 inch (1.27mm) aluminum astragal 

retainer. 

6. Joint Seals: provide foam strips for field application to stop air infiltration. 

7. Finish: Stucco embossed texture with 0.040 inch (100mm) minor ribs 4 inches or 5 inches 

( 100 or 125mm ) on center, white interior, exterior as indicated on drawings. 

8. Optional Glazing: In high wind zones provide optional impact-resistant glazing. 

B. Insulated overhead doors shall be insulated as follows: 


use insulated windows and insulated metal panels in the overhead doors. 

2. Areas of the country with 2500 hours to 6499 hours of 65 heating degree days (HDD 65) shall 

use insulated metal panels but not the windows. 

3. And in areas of the country with 2499 hours of 65 degree days (HDD 65) and less, neither the 

windows nor the metal panels will need to be insulated. 



2.05 ELECTRICAL DOOR OPERATORS 

A. General: Provide electric door operator (Chamberlain Model J) provided by door 

manufacturer for door with operational life specified complete with electric motor and factory 

pre-wired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, clutch, remote-control stations, control 

devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation. 

Comply with NFPA 70. 

1. Solenoid operated brake. 

B. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for emergency manual 

operation while disconnecting motor, without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect 

and operator so they are accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically 

prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. 

C. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit switch adjustment and 

without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. 

D. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS1, NEMA ICS2, and NEMA ICS6, with 

NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-v, AC or DC. 

E. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, 

electric motor, complying with NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to start, 

accelerate, and operate door in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3fps (0.2 

m/s) and not more than 1 fps ( .03m/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering 

service factor. 

1. Type: Solid State. 

2. Type: Jackshaft. 

3. HP: 1/2hp ( 373 W ). 

4. Power Characteristics: 

a. 115V. 

b. 1 phase. 

5. Service Factor: 

a. NEMA MG 1. 

6. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building 

electrical system. 





F. Remote Control Station: provide momentary contact, 3-button control station with push – 

button controls labeled “ Open”, “Close” and “Stop”. 

G. Provide interior units, fully guarded, surface mounted, heavy-duty type, with general – 

purpose NEMA ICS 6 enclosure in one of the following types; 

1. Enclosure Type: Type 1. 

H. Obstruction detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated external automatic 

safety sensor able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately 

stops and reverses downward door travel. 

1. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety sensing edge, 

located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. 

Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. 

Connect to control circuit using manufacturer’s standard take-up reel or self-coiling cord. 

Sensing edge shall be operated by: 

a. Electric 

I. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to 

automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. 

J. Provide auxiliary chain hoist: for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor, 

without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are accessible 

from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when 

emergency operator is engaged. 







B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory 


C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 







B. Coordinate installation of electrical service. Complete power and control wiring from disconnect to 

unit components. 

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES 

A. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 1/8 inch from 10 ft straight edge. 

B. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 


A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation and full contact with weather-stripping. 

B. Manual door operation should require maximum of 25 lb. lifting force to open. 





D. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. 






SECTION 08380 

TRAFFIC DOORS 



A. Impact Traffic Door / Food Service Door. 

B. Hardware and accessories. 



B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 





C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details; include door elevations, head, jamb, and 

Hardware. 

D. Sustainable Submittals: No submittals are required. Refer to Section 01352 for Sustainable 


1.03 DELIVERY,STORAGE, AND HANDLING 

A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation. 


A. Maintain environmental conditions ( temperature, humidity, and ventilation ) within limits 

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental 

conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers 

Mueller Door Corporation 

P.O. Box 69 

Wauconda, IL 60084-0069 

800-981-2040 

Suzanne@muellerdoor.com 

B. Substitions: Or equal. 

2.02 IMPACT TRAFFIC DOORS / FOOD SERVICE DOORS 

A. Food Service Doors; ¾ inch solid proprietary Flexcor polyethylene. 

1 Model Q225-7500-3684. 

2. Window size: Refer to drawings. 

3. Window: patent pending gasket free system. 

4. Glazing: clear single polycarbonate glazed. 

5. Brush Seal: Q225-00-3684. 

6. Frame: 3684-8. 

2.03 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Hinges: Double action 

1. Patent pending M-beam system 

2. Stainless steel / aluminum 

3. Zero lubrication 

4. Integrated pivoting jamb guard 

TRAFFIC DOORS 08380 - Page 1 of 2










B. Verify jambs plumb and square. 

. 







3.05 ADJUSTIN 

A. Adjust door assembly for smooth operation.. 





B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. 


TRAFFIC DOORS 08380 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 08410 

METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS – (INCLUDING HURRICANE RESISTANT) 



A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass and metal infill panels. 

B. Aluminum doors and frames and door hardware. 


A. Design and size components to withstand the higher of the following: minimum load requirements 

as stated below, or the load requirements of the applicable codes in effect in the governing 

municipality, as measured in accordance with ASTM E 330.: 


a. Comply with requirements of ASCE 7. 

1. Positive wind load: 20 lb/sq ft. 

2. Negative wind load: 20 lb/sq ft. 

b. Comply with high wind and airborne debris criteria for relevant area & jurisdictions. 

2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full 

recovery of glazing materials. 

B. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection of 

lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 

C. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured 

at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with 

ASTM E 283. 

D. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure 

difference of 2.86 lb/sq ft. 

E. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water 

entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within 

system. 

F. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused 

by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental 

effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements. 





A. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural 

Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of the installation 


A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. 

B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed 

coatings which bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather. 


A. Coordinate the work with installation of firestopping components or materials. 







A. Kawneer Co. 

B. PPG Architectural Metals 

C. Tubelite Architectural Products 

D. Vistawall Architectural Products 

E. United States Aluminum 

2.02 PRODUCTS 

A. Standard: 

1. Kawneer TriFab 451 T. 

B. High Wind (Hurricane Resistant): 

1. Kawneer Model IR 501 with 350 IR Entrance (Hurricane Resistant) 

2. United States Aluminum Model IT-600 Stormfront (Hurricane Resistant) 

3. Vistawall Architectural Products Model FG-5100 StormMax (Hurricane Resistant) 


A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with 

infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. Verify sizes with drawings. 

1. Finish: Class I color as noted on drawings. Conforming to Aluminum Association 

Standards 

AA-M12C22A31. (Refer to Drawing for Color) 

2. Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from exterior, 

drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 

3. Glass 1” insulated. 

4. Glazing stop flush. 

B. Aluminum Framed Storefront Spandrel: 

1. Framing members for spandrel single pane applications to be Kawneer TriFab 450 VG (2” x 2- 

1/2” veneer). 

2. Glass: Single Pane Spandrel. 

3. Glazing stops: Flush. 

C. Doors: Glazed aluminum; medium stile. 


2. Top Rail: 4 inches wide. 

3. Vertical Stiles: 4-1/2 inches wide. 

4. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide, complying with ANSI Requirements. 

5. Glass: 1” insulated. 

6. Glazing Stops: Square. 

7. Finish: Same as storefront. 

D. High Wind Storefront System: 

1. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing 

members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. Verify sizes 


a. Finish: Class I color as noted on drawings. Conforming to Aluminum Association 

Standards AA-M12C22A31. (Refer to Drawing for Color) 

b. Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section insulated from 

exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 

c. Glass 1 5/16” insulated impact resistant. 

d. Glazing stop flush. 

2. Aluminum Framed Storefront Spandrel: 

a. Framing members for spandrel single pane applications to be Kawneer IR 501. 

b. Glass: Impact Resistant Spandrel. 

c. Glazing stops: Flush. 

3. Doors: Glazed aluminum; medium stile. 

a. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 

b. Top Rail: 3-1/2” wide. 





c. Vertical Stiles: 3-1/2” wide. 

d. Bottom Rail: 6-1/2” wide, complying with ANSI Requirements. 

e. Glass: 1-5/16” insulated. 

f. Glazing Stops: Square. 

g. Finish: Same as storefront. 


A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). 

B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M). 

C. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 

D. Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick galvanized steel. 

E. Perimeter Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. 

F. Glass: Safety glass to be provided as required by code. 

G. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration 

requirements. 

2.05 HARDWARE 

A. Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application. 

1. Include for each door weather-stripping, sill sweep strip, threshold, pivots, narrow stile handle 

latch, dead bolt with interior lever and closer. 

2. Pull to be flat plate style (to accommodate BSRO signage on all exterior doors). 

B. Weather-stripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; ADA compliant; provide on all doors. 

C. Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; provide on all doors. 

D. Drip Caps: Refer to drawings. 


A. Submit shop drawings as outlined in Section 01300. Do not begin fabrication until shop drawings 

have been approved. 

B. Fabricate components in strict accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. 

C. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. 



A. Install wall system in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 

B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and 

other irregularities. 

C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. 

D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, 

aligning with adjacent work. 

E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. 

F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam. 

G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. 

H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal 

barrier. 

I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. 

J. Install hardware using templates provided. 

K. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08800, using glazing method required to 

achieve performance criteria. 

L. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900. 

M. Conduct hose stream test of storefront and door at time of punchlist. 


A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 






A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. 

B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping 

cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. 

C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer. 

D. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily 

repaired. 






SECTION 08625 

METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHT / SMOKE VENT 



A. Engineering, preparation of fabrication drawings and structural calculations for the entire skylight 

system. 

B. Fabrication and installation of extruded aluminum skylight assembly. 

C. Finish of skylight assembly and related flashings. 

D. Gaskets and sealants. 

E. Skylight glass and glazing. 

F. Skylight related flashings. 

1.02 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS 

A. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association (AAMA): 

Specifications for Aluminum Structures 

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers: 

ASHRAE 90.1 – Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. 

C. ASTM International (ASTM): ASTM B 221 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum- 

Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 

D. Factory Mutual System (FM Global): 

FM – Approval Guide, Chapter 18 – Building Materials 

FM Standard 4430 – Test Criteria for Heat and Smoke Vents 

E. National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): 

NFRC 100 – Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors. 

NFRC 200 – Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and 

Visible Transmittance of Normal Incidence 

F. North American Fenestration Standard (NAFS): 

AAMA\WDMA\CSA\101\I.S.2\A440 – The Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, 

Skylights and Glass Doors. 


A. A skylight smoke vent assembly that is weather tight and air tight conforming to the performance 

requirements in this section, and sizes noted on plans. 

METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHT / SMOKE VENT 08625 - Page 1 of 6




B. Performance Requirements: 

1. Structural Members shall be of sufficient size to support design loads as prescribed by 

government building codes. 

2. Deflection of skylight framing members shall not exceed L/175 when subject to a uniform load 

deflection test in accordance with ASTM E330, and per the above specified loads. 

3. Water Penetration: No water penetration shall occur when system is tested in accordance 

with ASTM E331. Water penetration is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled water 

other than condensation on the interior surface of any part of the skylight. 

a. Drain to the exterior all water entering at joints or glazing reveals as well as all 

condensation occurring within unit construction. 

4. Air Infiltration: Air infiltration through the skylight/smoke vent assembly, when tested in 

accordance with ASTM E283, shall not exceed 0.06 cubic feet per minute per square foot of 

fixed area. 

5. Thermal Movement: Skylight/smoke vent assembly shall be so designed and anchored that 

there will be no objectionable distortion or stresses in fastening and joinery due to expansion 

and contraction when subjected to temperature variance. 

6. High Wind Debris Areas: When required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, skylight/smoke 

vent and curb assemblies shall conform with Florida NOA or Dade County product approvals. 

7. Snow Loads: Skylight/smoke vents shall be designed to operate in regional snow loads as 

noted on structural plans. 


A. Submittal for specified items as required in Section 01300. 

1.05 WARRANTY 

A. Vendor shall warrant to Firestone that all products comply with this specification. Firestone 

reserves the right to refuse and reject material that does not comply with this specification and for 

the following reasons based on visual inspections. 

B. Vendor agrees to assist in investigation alleged product failures and other user complaints should 

they occur. Product failure settlement shall be negotiated between the “Vendor” and “Firestone” at 

any time during the duration of the Firestone warranty. 

1.06 CHANGES IN PROCESS OR PRODUCT 

A. Vendor shall be required to report to Firestone Purchasing Department 30 days prior to producing 

and shipping any material when making a change in a purchased raw material, manufacturing 

process, manufacturing location, sources, or the product. Firestone will review all changes and 

shall reserve the right to require re-qualification of the subject material or equipment. Firestone 

reserves the right to approve or reject any proposed changes. 







A. Contact documents are based on Firestone Building Products, Michael Orkey at (317)-575-7245. 

orkeymichael@firestonebp.com 

B. Alternate Manufacturer for Florida NOA and high wind, air borne debris areas: 


1. Bristolite Skylights, Inc., 800-854-8618. 

A. Lens Configuration: SR50, 100% impact modified clear prismatic acrylic, or polycarbonate 

prismatic lens over SR25 white prismatic lens. Both layers shall be double glazed and ready for 

installation. 

1. Outer Lens: SR 50 – 100 percent impact modified clear prismatic acrylic of sufficient 

thickness recommended to meet the specified performance requirements. Rated CLASS 1 

Hail Resistance (1” hail), CLASS 3 Hail Resistance (1.75” hail). 

2. Outer Lens: FBC – HVHZ Approved Polycarbonate. 

3. Inner Lens: SR25 White Prismatic Acrylic Lens. 

4. High Velocity Hurricane Zone Approved. 

B. Glazing Material: 

1. Glazing material must have a maximum light distribution characteristic that maximizes the 

shading factor. Per Addendum D of ASHRAE 90.1-2007, the diffusing qualities of glazing 

must have a minimum haze factor of 90 percent or greater. The combined inner/outer lens 

target values shall be as follows: 

2. Light Transmittance 67.8 percent minimum. CLASS 1 & CLASS 3 ACRYLIC. 

3. Light Transmittance: 60.0 percent minimum. FBC-HVHZ Approved Polycarbonate. 

4. Diffusion/Haze Factor: 100 percent min. 

5. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.49 maximum. NFRC 200 “U” Value: 0.82 or lower 

(glazing and framing) in accordance with NFRC 100 or “unlabeled skylight” default 

requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2007 **NOTE**Select Hail rating. Class 3 units should be 

presented as option in high hail risk zones. 

a. Hail Resistance Level: Class 1 (1” hail) as tested by certified engineering firm. 

b. Hail Resistance Level: Class 3 (1.75” hail) as tested by certified engineering firm. 

6. High Velocity Hurricane Zone Approved. Polycarbonate as tested by certified engineering 

firm. 

C. Frame: 

1. ASTM B 221 alloy 6063-T5 extruded aluminum frame with extruded aluminum dome retaining 

angle, Insulated thermal break, and integral condensate gutter. 

2. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard mill finish. 

3. Provide pre-installed 1-1/2” x ¼ inch foam rubber gasket between frame and curb. 

4. Provide weather sweep attached to frame. 

D. Roof Curb: 

1. Color – white. 

2. Metal – Galvalume steel construction and liners. 

a. Full height mitered and welded corners. 

b. Factory installed 3/16” galvanized steel Safe-Security Guard 6” x 6” grid pattern. 

c. 1-1/2” thick 3 lb. density fiberglass insulation. 





E. Smoke Hatch: 

1. Single-leaf or FM Approved Double-leaf, double glazed, venting skylight with plastic thermal 

break, sealed and insulated, with fusible link. 

2. Venting skylights shall meet all requirements specified above for fixed skylight units. 

3. Fusible link rating: 360 0 F standard (variations must be requested). 

4. Doors: Acrylic plastic double dome designed to remain tightly sealed against 30 lb/sq ft 

internal uplift pressure until triggered by UL listed fusible link or opened manually from interior 

level. When released, doors shall be capable of opening against a 10 lb/sq ft external snow 

or wind load and lock in open position. Increased operating loads as required by regional 

snow loads are available upon request. (Verify with structural design loads) 

F. Accessories: 

1. Fasteners (For anchorage of skylight to roof curb): #12 x 1-1/2” 300 series stainless steel 

screws with washers. Provide fasteners in sufficient quantity for complete installation. 

2. Washers: Neoprene/stainless steel bonded washers. 


A. Skylights must be factory assembled and glazed, ready for installation. 

B. Fabricate skylights weather tight and free of visual distortions and defects. 

C. Protect exterior drip/counter flashing and drainage ports from weather and airborne debris. 

D. Miter and full penetration weld all corners of curb and retaining frames. 

E. Retaining frames that secure the glazing panels along each side under spring tension need not be 

welded and must be sealed with a silicone sealant along the full perimeter of the retaining frame. 

Skylight frames must be pre-drilled for anchorage to roof curbs. 

F. Seal glazing panels to base frame allowing for sufficient expansion and contraction. Provide 

exterior weep hole arrangement. 

2.04 QUALIFICATION TESTING 

A. Skylights must conform with all federal, state and local code bodies having jurisdiction, and be 

designed to withstand all forces of nature deemed necessary by those code bodies for the specified 

project location. 

B. Plastic unit skylights shall conform to recommendations of the AA Specifications for Aluminum 

Structures. 

C. Skylights must be designed to carry a minimum 30 psf tributary roof load or greater per side as 

specified in the current International Building Code or prevailing model code. 

D. Skylights must be tested and labeled in accordance to AAMA\WDMA\CSA\101\I.S.2\A440 as 

required by Section 2405.5 of the 2003 International Building Code. 

E. Drop Test: A 200 lb drop test from a height of 24 inches above the center (highest point) of dome 

shape and at mid points of both the 5 foot and 6 foot side (approximately 15 inches and 18 inches 

from center). The 200 lb. load must be contained within a flexible bladder or sack having 

approximate dimensions no larger than 30 inches long, 20 inches wide and 8 inches high, filled with 

course sand or pea gravel. The dome must withstand the sack drop without inverting or breaking. 

Finished skylight domes sealed in frame must also handle 500 lb. on 1 square foot (.09 sq m) point 

loading without inverting. The drop test must be witnessed and certified by the test laboratory 





which provides the NAFS certification. 

F. Skylights must be certified by the NFRC. 

G. Skylights must be certified by the NAFS. 

H. Smoke Hatch/Smoke Venting Skylights must be Factory Mutual approved. 

2.05 INSPECTION 

A. Firestone will conduct a “First Article Inspection” of vendor’s formal submission from a 

representative production batch/run. This inspection includes subjecting the submission to full 

QA/QC and physical testing (including dimensions), as well as examination of all packaging, 

labeling and lot numbering. 

B. Firestone reserves the right to sample any material shipped and test any provision of the 

referenced product specification at any time. 

2.06 PACKAGING AND MARKING 

A. Each dome shall be marked with a small 2” x 1-1/2” label on the aluminum frame. See attachment. 

B. Skylight daylighting components shall be carefully packaged on wooden skids. 



A. Prior to beginning work of this section, an authorized representative shall examine the associated 

support structure to determine that it is properly prepared and ready to received the skylight work 

included herein. No installation shall proceed until any discrepancies have been resolved. 


A. Aluminum surfaces in contact with masonry, concrete or dissimilar materials, if not organically 

coated, shall be given a heavy coat of zinc chromate or bituminous paint. 


A. Skylight installation shall be the sole responsibility of the General Contractor in strict accordance 

with the skylight manufacturer instructions. 

B. Install skylights plumb, true without warping or racking of panels. 

C. Anchor system in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instruction. 

D. During erection, provide for thermal movement with a minimum ambient air temperature shift of 

100 0 Farenheight without creating undue stresses. 

E. Apply sealant where required by manufacturer. Before application, clean surfaces as 

recommended by manufacturer. 


A. All parts of the work, when completed, shall be within the following tolerances: 

1. Maximum variation from plane or location shown on approved shop drawings: 1/8” per 12 





feet of length or ½” in total length. 

2. Maximum offset from true alignment between two members abutting end-to-end, edge-toedge 

in line or separated by less than 3”: 1/32”. 


A. Glazing panels shall be left in scratch free condition inside and out. 

B. Remove all debris created by this work. 






SECTION 08710 

DOOR HARDWARE 



A. Hardware for hollow steel doors. 

B. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. 

C. Thresholds. 

D. Weather-stripping, seals and door gaskets. 

E. Drip Caps. 


A. Keys: Coordinate with Owner for keying requirements. 


A. Conform to code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. 



A. Hinges: Stanley, Hager, or Lawrence 

B. Pivots: Stanley, Hager, or Lawrence. 

C. Latch Sets: Schlage, Yale, or Corbin. 

D. Push/Pulls: Rockwood. 

E. Cylindrical Locks: Schlage, Yale, or Corbin. 

F. Mortise Locks: Schlage, Yale, or Corbin. 

G. Exit Devices: Electric latch by Von Duprin. 

H. Closers: LCN, Norton or Yale. 

I. Thresholds: Reese Enterprises, Inc., Pemko. 

J. Flush Bolts: Ives Co. 

K. Security Bar: Exit Security Bars 

L. Electric Strikes by Von Duprin. 

M. Drip Edge: Pemko 

N. Weather Strip: Pemko 

O. Or as indicated on the Finish Hardware Schedule. 

2.02 FINISHES 

A. Finishes: Per Drawings. 



A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in 

Schedule, unless otherwise noted: 

1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural 

Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." 

2. For steel doors and frames: See Section 08111. 

C. Provide temporary construction lock cores. 


A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. 

B. Adjust closers to comply with ANSI criteria, where required. 


DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 08800 

GLAZING 



A. Glass. 

B. Glazing compounds and accessories. 


A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air 

barrier: 

1. In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900. 

2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from 

glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. 





A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing 

installation methods. 

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 

5 years documented experience. 

C. All glass panels to be labeled with NFRC sticker, per IECC. 


2.01 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS 

A. Manufacturers: 

1. Libbey-Owens Ford Company. 

2. PPG Industries, Inc.. 

3. Or Equal 

B. Clear Float Glass (Type I): Clear, annealed. 

1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 2 clear, Quality q3 glazing select. 

2. 1/4" mm minimum thickness. 

C. Safety Glass: 

1. Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering. 

2. Laminate glazing comply with CPSC 16CFR, Part 1201. 

D. Tinted Glass: Float type, heat strengthened, light reducing tint color, per drawing. 

E. Wired Glass (Type III): Clear. 

1. Square mesh of woven stainless steel wire. 

2. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type II patterned and wired flat, Class 1 translucent, Quality q8 

glazing. 

3. Polished both sides. 

4. 1/4 inch thick. 

2.02 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS 

A. Insulated Glass Units: 

1. Outdoor lite. 

a. ¼” glass: 

b. Coating to be placed on 2nd surface. Solarban 60 by PPG Inc. or approved equal. 

2. Indoor lite. 

a. ¼” clear glass: 

1) Total Unit Thickness: 1” minimum. 

GLAZING 08800 - Page 1 of 2




3. Performance: 

a. Visible light transmittance 70% or greater. 

b. Light to solar gain ratio 1.25 or greater. 

B. Edge Seal Construction: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 

C. Edge Seal Material: Black Color. 

2.03 FROSTED COLORED GLASS 

A. ¼” glass to comply with requirements specified in this Section. 

B. PPG Pacifica (Dark Blue) with acid etching on #2 side. 

2.04 GLAZING COMPOUNDS 

A. Butyl Sealant: Single component; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning. 

B. Acrylic Sealant: Single component, solvent curing, non-bleeding; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 

25; color as selected. 

C. Silicone Sealant: Single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of 

properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected. 

2.05 GLAZING ACCESSORIES 

A. Manufacturer's standard type. 



A. Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 

3.02 CLEANING 

A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. 

B. Remove labels after Work is complete. 

C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces. 


A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. 


GLAZING 08800 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 09245 

STUCCO 


1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Metal lath and accessories. 

2. Pre-mix three coat stucco. 

B. Related Work: 

1. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. 


A. Product data for each product specified. 


A. Deliver cementitious materials to Project site in original packages, containers, or bundles, 

labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name, and lot number. 

B. Store materials inside, under cover, and dry, protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface 

contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from construction traffic and other causes. 


A. Comply with requirements of referenced stucco application standards and recommendations 

of stucco manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after stucco 

application. 

B. Warm-Weather Requirements: Protect stucco against uneven and excessive evaporation 

and from strong flows of dry air. Apply and cure stucco as required by climatic and job 

conditions to prevent dryout during cure period. Provide suitable coverings, moist curing, 

and barriers to deflect sunlight and wind as required. 

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not apply stucco when ambient temperature is below 

40 degrees F. 

D. Provide temporary covering and other provisions necessary to minimize harmful spattering 

of stucco on other work. 



A. Metal Lath: 

1. Cemco Metal Lath Products. 

2. Dietrich Industries, Inc., Colton, CA (909) 824-9717 

3. United States Gypsum Company, Glendale, CA (800) 974-4874. 

STUCCO 09245 - Page 1 of 4




2.02 LATH 

4. Western Metal Lath Company, Riverside, CA (909) 360-3500. 

B. Metal Accessories: 

1. Fry Reglet Corporation (626) 289-4744. 

2. Kwik Corner Accessories. 

3. Western Metal Lath Company (909) 360-3500. 

4. Stockton Products (510) 351-6700. 

A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847. 

1. Material: Structural-quality galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 

minimum coating designation, unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Paper Backing: 

1. Comply with FS UU-S-790A, Type 1 Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper. 


A. General: Provide metal accessories required for a complete installation, complying with 

ASTM C 1063 and the requirements indicated below. Coordinate depth of accessories with 

thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. 

1. Galvanized Steel Components: Fabricated from minimum 0.0172 inch galvanized 

steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G40 minimum coating designation. 

2. Aluminum Components: Fabricated from 0.050 inch extruded aluminum, 6063-T5 

alloy and temper, with clear anodized finish, complying with ASTM B 221. 

B. Metal Corner Reinforcement: Expanded, large-mesh, welded-wire mesh diamond-metal lath 

fabricated from 0.0475-inch-diameter galvanized wire and specially formed to reinforce 

external corners of portland cement stucco on exterior exposures while allowing full stucco 

encasement. 

C. Casing Beads: Galvanized steel or aluminum square-edged style with expanded flanges. 

D. Control Joints: Prefabricated, galvanized steel or aluminum. Two-piece stucco control 

screed with adjustable opening for joint widths from 1/8 to 5/8 inch. Provide removable 

protective tape on stucco face of control joints. 

E. Weep Screed: Manufacturer's standard profile designed for use at sill plate line to form 

stucco stop and prevent stucco from contacting damp earth, fabricated from galvanized steel 

sheet. 

F. Vent Screed: Galvanized steel or aluminum vented stucco channel screed. 

G. Drip Screed: Galvanized steel or aluminum vented drip screed. 

H. Channel Screed: Galvanized steel or aluminum stucco channel screed. 

I. Reglet: Galvanized steel or aluminum, stucco type reglet. 

J. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for installations 

indicated. 





2.04 STUCCO MATERIALS 

A. Stucco – Provide Color Teck Three Coat System as manufactured by Omega Products 

International. Contractor furnished and installed. 



A. Examine the surfaces to be covered by the work of this Section. Report unsatisfactory 

conditions to the proper authority. Do not proceed with the work of this Section until 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 LATHING 

A. Standards: Comply with SSMA referenced standard and with requirements of 

ASTM C 1063. 

B. Install metal lath for the following applications where stucco base coats are required: 

1. Exterior sheathed wall surfaces using 3.4 lbs. per sq. yd. self-furring diamond-mesh 

lath. 

3.03 PREPARATIONS FOR STUCCO 

A. Clean substrates for direct application of stucco, removing loose material and substances 

that may impair the Work. 

B. Install temporary grounds and screeds to ensure accurate rodding of stucco to true surfaces; 

coordinate with scratch-coat work. 

3.04 INSTALLATION OF STUCCO ACCESSORIES 

A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation standards for provision and 

location of stucco accessories of type indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install 

with tight joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to stucco bases to hold 

accessories in place and in alignment during stuccoing. 

B. External Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners. 

C. Terminations of Stucco: Install casing beads unless otherwise indicated. 

D. Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at locations complying with 

the following criteria: 

1. Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of construction directly 

behind stucco membrane. 

2. Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet in either direction or a lengthto-width 

ratio of 2-1/2 to 1. 

3. Wall Areas: Not more than 144 sq. ft. 

4. Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq. ft. in area. 

5. Where stucco panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints full width or height of 

stucco membrane. 





3.05 STUCCO APPLICATION 

A. Standard: Apply stucco materials, composition, and mixes to comply with ASTM C 926. 

B. Base Coats: 

1. Apply the scratch coat with sufficient material and force to form good keys on metal or 

wire fabric lath. Embed and fill spaces of lath and score horizontally. 

2. Do not apply brown coat sooner than 48 hours after installation of the scratch coat. 

Apply brown coat, bring to grounds, straighten to a true surface, float and compact, 

and leave sufficiently rough to ensure bond for finish coat. 

3. Do not locate cold joints of one coat over cold joints of the previous coat. 

4. Do not apply finish coat sooner than 10 days after installation of brown coat. Allow 

plaster to crack, wet down, and let dry before finish coat. 

C. Finish Coats: Finish stucco true and even within 1/8-inch tolerance in 5 feet, and leave the 

finished surfaces free from tool marks and other blemishes. 

1. Texture: Medium sand float. Apply finish stucco to an approximate thickness of 

1/8 inch and uniformly float to a true, even plane. 

a. Trowel on a finish coat and double back with a second application. Formulate 

stucco mix with a 20-mesh aggregate. 

b. Using circular motion, rub surface with float to achieve uniform pattern, bringing 

sand particles to surface. Use an absolute minimum of water in floating. 

D. Curing: After application, each base coat of portland cement stucco shall contain sufficient 

moisture to assure hydration for at least 48 hours. If necessary to moisten stucco, avoid 

soaking and apply water in fine fog spray. Do not apply stucco to surfaces which contain 

surface water. 

3.06 STUCCO PATCHING/REPAIR 

A. Cut, patch, replace, repair, and point up stucco as necessary to accommodate other work. 

Repair cracks and indented surfaces. Point up finish stucco surfaces around items that are 

built into or penetrate stucco surfaces. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, 

check cracking, dryouts, efflorescence, excessive pinholes, and similar defects. Repair or 

replace work as necessary to comply with required visual effects. 

3.07 CLEANING 

A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize spattering of stucco on 

other work. Promptly remove stucco from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not to 

be stuccoed. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during stuccoing 

work. When stuccoing work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, equipment, 

and stucco debris. 

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer 

and installer, that ensure stucco work is without damage or deterioration at the time of 

Substantial Completion. 






SECTION 09260 

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 



A. Metal stud wall framing. 

B. Metal channel ceiling framing. 

C. Gypsum wallboard. 

D. Joint treatment and accessories. 


A. Application and Finish of Gypsum Panel Products; GA-216-2007, Gypsum Association. 

B. Recommended levels of Gypsum Board Finish; GA-214-07, Gypsum Association. 





2.01 MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM 

A. United States Gypsum Company. 

B. Or Equal 

2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS 

A. Ceiling Hangers: ASTM C 754. 

2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS 

A. Standard Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut. 

1. Thickness: As indicated. 

2. Edges: tapered edges. 

B. Fire Rated Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; Type X, UL or WH rated; sizes to minimize joints in 

place; ends square cut. 


2. Edges: tapered. 

C. Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M; ends square cut. 


2. Edges: tapered edges. 


A. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project 

conditions. 

B. Beads and Moldings: As indicated on plans. 


3.01 FRAMING INSTALLATION 

A. Metal Framing: Comply with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated. 

C. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center maximum. 

3.02 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION 

A. As recommended by the gypsum board manufacturer. 

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - Page 1 of 2




3.03 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES 


3.04 JOINT TREATMENT 



GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 09511 

SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 



A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. 

B. Acoustical units. 






A. Ceiling Panels: 

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

2. Or approved equal. 

B. Suspension Systems: 

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 

2. Or approved equal. 

2.02 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS 

A. Acoustical Panels Type ACT-1: 

1. Surface Texture: Medium 

2. Composition: Wet-formed mineral fiber 

3. Color: Factory prefinish standard color as indicated on drawings. 

4. Size: 48 IN x 24 IN x 5/8 IN 

5. Edge Profile: Square Lay-in for interface with Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tee grid. 

6. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product carton 

0.55. 

7. Ceiling Attention Class (CAC): ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton 35. 

8. Articulation Class (AC): ASTM E 1111; Classified with UL label on product carton (Not 

Applicable). 

9. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL). 

10. Light Reflectance (LR): ASTM E 1477; 0.80. 

11. Dimensional Stability: Standard. 

12. Acceptable Product: Cortega Tile & Lay-In, 769A as manufactured by Armstrong World 

Industries. 

2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 

A. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial quality hot dipped galvanized 

steel (galvanized steel, aluminum, or stainless steel) as per ASTM A 653. Main beams and cross 

tees are double-web steel construction with 15/16 type exposed flange design. Exposed surface 

chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel (aluminum or stainless steel) in baked 

polyester paint. Main beams and cross tees shall have rotary stitching ( exception: extruded 

aluminum or stainless steel). 

1. Structural Classification: ASTM C 635 Intermediate Duty. 

2. Color: To match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise. 

3. Acceptable Product: Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tee, as manufactured by Armstrong World 

Industries. 

B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung 

Unless otherwise indicated. 

SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - Page 1 of 2




C. Wire for Hangers and Tees: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, prestretched, with a 

yield stress load of at least time three design load, but not less than 12 gauge. 

D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal or extruded aluminum of types and profiles indicated or, if not 

indicated, manufacturer’s standard moldings for edges and penetrations, including light fixtures, 

that fit type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. Provide moldings with exposed flange 

of the same width as exposed runner. 


A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic 

requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified. 


3.01 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM 

A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's 

instructions. 

B. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or 

support components independently. 

3.02 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS 

A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Install hold-down clips on panels within 10 ft of an exterior door. 


SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09511 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 09650 

RESILIENT FLOORING 



A. Resilient tile flooring. 

B. Resilient base. 


A. Conform to manufacturers requirements. 





A. 4.5”x36” beveled edge planks (45 square feet per carton); see drawings. 

B 

12”x12” beveled edge tile (45 square feet per carton); see drawings. 

C. Amtico customer service will order appropriate quantity of strip based upon sf of tile ordered. 

1. Manufacturer: Amtico 

2. Colors: See Drawings. REFER TO DRAWINGS. 

2.02 MATERIALS - BASE 

A. Base: REFER TO DRAWINGS. 



A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain rooms and areas to receive resilient flooring and base at 70 

degrees F. minimum for at least 72 hours before, during, and after installation, or as otherwise 

required by manufacturer. Thereafter, maintain temperature at 55 degrees F minimum. 

B. Existing Conditions: Moisture testing has been performed on concrete floor slabs. Test results are 

included in Appendix A for information only. This information does not relieve Subcontractor of 

responsibility for performing pre-installation moisture testing. All testing shall be in accordance with 

methods and procedures detailed In ACI Committee 302 – Strategic Development Council‘s 

Task Group on Moisture : Chapter 3 Moisture Testing Basics. A copy of this document can be 

reviewed in detail by contacting Bridgestone Firestone’s Real Estate and Construction Office at 630- 

259-9248. 

RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - Page 1 of 3





A. Do not begin installation until work of other trades within the area has been completed. 

B. Verify that surfaces to receive resilient flooring are smooth, level, and flat. 

C. Verify that surfaces to receive resilient flooring are clean, and free of grease, oil, construction films, 

other coatings, stains, dust and other deleterious materials that might affect final appearance or 

adhesive bond. 

D. Concrete: Do not install resilient flooring over concrete until concrete has cured and is dry to bond 

with adhesives. 

1. Cure concrete surfaces a minimum of 28 days prior to beginning resilient flooring work. 

2. Perform the following tests. If test results exceed flooring manufacturer’s limitations, do 

not commence installation until corrective actions have been completed. 

a. Moisture Testing: Perform calcium chloride tests in accordance with ASTM F 

1869. 

b. Perform bond tests in accordance with flooring manufacturer’s 

recommendations. 

c. Perform pH tests in accordance with flooring manufacturer’s recommendations. 

E. Inspect materials prior to installation. Do not install materials with visible defects. 

F. Notify Project Manager of deficiencies detrimental to proper installation. Do not proceed with work 

until deficiencies are corrected. Commencing installation implies acceptance of surfaces. 


A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. 

B. Prepare substrates to be smooth, flat, level, permanently dry, clean and free of foreign materials 

such as grease, oil, solvents, curing and hardening compounds, sealers, asphalt, old adhesive 

residue, construction films and coatings, stains and dust. 

C. Level substrates to maximum 1/8” in 10 feet and fill cracks using Portland-cement based leveling 

and patching compounds in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions. Do not lay resilient flooring 

over gypsum-based compounds. 

D. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with ASTM F710. 

3.04 INSTALLATION – FLOORING 

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

1. Adhesive – Amtico 373 (item #Amtico 373-4) 

4 gallon pail covers approx. 720 square feet 

2. Floor Finish – Complete Low Gloss Dressing (item # Complete 1gal.) 

1 gallon container covers 2000 square feet 

3. Floor Cleaner – Stride Neutral Ph Cleaner Concentrate (item# Stride 1 gal.) 

1 gallon container dilutes with water to cover 64,000 square feet 





3.05 INSTALLATION – BASE 

A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. 

B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use 

premolded units. 

3.06 CLEANING 

A. Remove and replace all defective and damaged materials, including those which failed to bond to 

the substrate. 

B. Sweep and vacuum floor after installation. 

C. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, removing all exposed adhesive and visible 

blemishes. Reclean surfaces soiled prior to acceptance of project at no additional cost to OWNER. 

1. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 

D. Seal and wax flooring in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

E. Dispose of sealant and adhesive remnants and containers in accordance with applicable 

regulations, and protective coverings. 


A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for period recommended by manufacturer, but for at least 48 hours 

after installation. 

B. Do not place any equipment, casework or furnishings on resilient flooring until the flooring adhesive 

is fully cured and dried, and the flooring is tightly bonded to the substrate. 

C. Protect installed flooring from until date of Final Acceptance. Remove protection immediately prior 

to acceptance. 

D. Protect work of other trades and existing work; correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, 

as acceptable to Project Manager 

3.08 WASTE MANAGEMENT 

A. Separate waste in accordance with the requirements of Section 01570 - Construction Waste 

Management. 






SECTION 09685 

CARPET TILE 



A. Carpet tile, fully adhered. 

B. Matching roll carpet for direct glue installation on stairs. 


A. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and Rug 

Institute. 


A. Colors: Refer to Drawings. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum 5 years 

experience. 


A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. 



A. See drawings for Product information. 



A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Section 03300 and 

are ready to receive carpet tile. 

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of 

adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces. 

C. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 


A. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104. 

B. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match. 

C. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. 

D. Lay carpet tile in square pattern for quarter turn installation; set parallel to building lines. 

E. Fully adhere carpet tile to substrate. 

F. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions. 

CARPET TILE 09685 - Page 1 of 2




G. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 

3.03 INSTALLATION ON STAIRS 

A. Use one piece of carpet for each tread and the riser below. Apply seam adhesive to all cut edges. 

B. Lay carpet with pile direction in the length of the stair. 

C. Adhere carpet tight to stair treads and risers. 

3.04 CLEANING 

A. Remove excess adhesive without damage, from floor, base, and wall surfaces. 

B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 


CARPET TILE 09685 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 09770 

SPECIAL WALL SURFACING 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section Includes: Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels. 


1. Division 06 Section: Finish Carpentry. 

2. Division 09 Section: Gypsum Drywall. 


A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this 

specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, 

authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing 

authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority 

abbreviation and standard designation. 

B. ASTM International: 

1. ASTM D256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of 

Plastics. 

2. ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 

3. ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 

4. ASTM D696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics 

Between -30 degrees C and 30 degrees C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer. 

5. ASTM D790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced 

Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 

6. ASTM D2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a 

Barcol Impressor. 

7. ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of 

Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 

8. ASTM D3274 Standard Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint 

Films by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation. 

9. ASTM D5420 Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by 

Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact). 

10. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 


A. Performance Requirements: Provide fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) panels which have been 

manufactured and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without 

defects, damage or failure. 


A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 

Submittal Procedures Section. 

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. 

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including 

anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures. Indicate location and dimension of 

joints and fastener attachment. 

SPECIAL WALL SURFACING 09770 Page 1 of 6




D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors and textures. Submit 2 

samples of each type of panel, trim and fastener. 

E. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following: 

1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance 

characteristics and physical properties. 

2. Certificates: 

a. Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 

b. Submit certificate of installer’s qualifications. 

3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions. 



G. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 

1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in 

accordance with Division 01 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data) 

Section. Include methods for maintaining installed products and precautions against cleaning 

materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. 

2. Warranty documents specified herein. 


A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar 

size and complexity. 

B. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: All products are Class C fire rated per ASTM E-84. 

Varietex Sandstone finish available in Class A and meets Canadian code CAN/ULC-S102 test 

method results of




1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS 

A. Environmental Requirements: 

1. Installation shall not begin until building is enclosed, permanent heating and cooling 

equipment is in operation and residual moisture from plaster, concrete or terrazzo work has 

dissipated. 

2. Install panels between 60 degrees F - 75 degrees F (15 - 24 degrees C) and relative humidity 

below 65%, ideally at the same conditions as the room’s normal operating temperatures after 

building is occupied. 

3. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by 

adhesive manufacturer. 

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before 

fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and 

fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. 

C PRECONDITIONING: Prior to installing Varietex, remove the packaging and allow the panels to 

acclimate to room temperature and humidity for at least 48 hours. Ideally, the room temperature 

and humidity during acclimation and installation should be the same as the final operating 

conditions. Panels will provide a clean, aesthetically pleasing finished installation. However, by 

nature, fiberglass reinforced plastic paneling may occasionally have small areas that are 

aesthetically unacceptable for use. Panels should be inspected on-site prior to installation. If any 

portion of material will not provide an acceptable appearance, Kemlite should be notified at once. 

Upon verification of unacceptability, that responsibility is for the replacement of defective material 

but not for labor or other handling or installation expenses. 


A. Extra Materials: Provide five percent of additional material for use by owner in building 

maintenance and repair. 


2.01 DECORATIVE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) PANELS 

A. Manufacturer: Kemlite Company, Inc. 

1. Contact: 23525 W Eames, Channahon, IL 60410; Telephone: (888) DECOFRP, (815) 467- 

8600; Fax: (815) 467-8666; E-mail: decofrp@kemlite.com; website: 

www.frpdesignsolutions.com. 

2. Or equal. 

B. Proprietary Products/Systems: FRP panels, including the following: 

1. VARIETEX CLASS C (or Class A, if required by Local Authorities) 

a. Surface Texture: Sandstone 

b. Thickness: 0.09 inch. 

c. Weight: 0.73 psf. 

d. Size: 4 feet × 8 feet. 

e. Color: Refer to drawings. 

f. Physical Properties: 

1) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790): 14 × 10 3 psi. 

2) Flexural Modulus (ASTM D790): 0.4 × 10 6 psi. 

3) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 7 × 10 3 psi. 

4) Tensile Modulus (ASTM D638): 0.8 × 10 6 psi. 





5) Barcol Hardness (ASTM D2583): 45. 

6) Izod Impact (ASTM D256): 4 ft lb/in 2 . 

7) Gardner Impact (ASTM D5420): 25 in-lb. 

8) Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 0.16% (24 hrs @ 77 degrees F, 0.16% (24 hrs @ 

25 degrees F. 

9) Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E84): Class A. 

10) Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (ASTM D696): 2 × 10 -5 in/in°F. 

11) Taber Abrasion Test: 0.036% maximum weight loss when subjected to 25 cycles 

with 1000g CS17 wheel. 

2.02 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 



A. Adhesive: 

1. Provide panel adhesive as recommended by panel manufacturer. 

B. Trim and Seam Treatment: 

1. Manufacturer: Acceptable to panel manufacturer. Provide corner, splice and edge trims to 

match manufacture and color of panels. 


3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS 

A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the FRP panel manufacturer. 


A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that substrate conditions, which have been previously 

installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with 

manufacturer’s instructions. 

1. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of FRP panels. 

2. Examine back-up surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are 

smooth, uniform, clean and free from foreign matter, nails are countersunk and joints and 

cracks are filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface. 

3. Do not proceed with installation of FRP panels until unacceptable conditions are corrected. 


A. General: 

1. Prior to installing panels, remove packaging and allow panels to acclimate to room 

temperature and humidity for at least 48 hours. 

2. Wall substrate must be dry and free from dirt, dust, grease and other contaminants. Wall shall 

be prepared to ensure proper adhesion for FRP installation, per manufacturer’s 

recommendation. 

3. Walls must be flat and even. Remove high spots and fill low spots with material acceptable to 

panel manufacturer. 

4. Remove wallpaper, soluble or loose paint and other foreign matter that might interfere with 

proper adhesive bond. 

5. Prior to installation verify joint compound primer treatment. 






A. General: 

1. Inspect panels for any defects immediately. Do not install panels of unacceptable quality. 

2. Do not install panels directly over stud framing or furring. 

3. When cutting panels, position them so that the saw blade enters the front side of panel first to 

avoid chipping or damage. 

4. Protect decorative laminate face of panel by covering work area. 

5. Follow adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations for appropriate height of adhesive bead left 

by trowel and do not allow adhesive to skin over. 

B. Joint Seam Treatment: Install panels using the following method. 

1. [Color matched acrylic latex caulk]. 

2. [Silhouette trims]. 

C. Installation Using Caulk: 

1. Plan panel layout so seams are not directly over seams of substrate. 

2. Apply adhesive directly to back of FRP panel with 100% adhesive coverage using crosshatch 

pattern. Extend adhesive to all edges of panel. 

3. Install panel. Place six-penny finishing nails at 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) spacing against the panel 

about 2 feet (610 mm) apart to hold panels in place while adhesive sets and provide proper 

spacing for color caulk. Continue installing panels using this method, leaving nails in place 

during installation. 

4. Remove nails after adhesive sets. 

5. Place a narrow piece of masking tape along panel edge from top to bottom, exactly at joint 

edge. Firmly apply tape to both panels. 

6. Fill 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) gap between the panels with caulk, making sure gap is completely filled. 

7. Tilt caulk tube back from vertical so that tip of tube advances first in direction of travel. 

8. Wet finger and smooth bead if necessary. 

9. Remove masking tape before bead cures. Clean off excess adhesive with damp cloth. 

10. Install corner moldings as described in molding instructions. 

D. Installation Using Silhouette Trims: 

1. Start in the corner. Mark plumb line 48 1/8 inches (1222 mm) from corner. Set first panel true 

with plumb line. Where several courses of panels are used on a high wall, use both vertical 

and horizontal lines to ensure alignment. 

2. Install one piece of inside corner molding. 

3. Apply adhesive directly to entire back of FRP panel using crosshatch pattern. Apply adhesive 

to within 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) of all edges of panel. 

4. Slide panel into molding and withdraw to provide appropriate gap. Align with plumb line. 

5. Begin in top corner nearest molding with laminate roller, rolling down and out toward the edge 

without molding. 

6. Continue rolling down and out working across panel away from previously installed panel or 

initial molding. Remove all trapped air. 

7. Install one-piece division bar and caps or next molding by sliding onto panel. 

8. Repeat process, working in one direction around room. 





9. Immediately remove all adhesive residues. To remove, clean with nonabrasive cotton cloth 

and warm water. If necessary, use a mild nonabrasive detergent. For cleanup with solvent 

based adhesives, use mineral spirits or acetone to remove residue. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. Clean panel surfaces in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 

1. Use a clean, damp, nonabrasive cotton cloth and a mild liquid detergent or household cleaner. 

2. Rinse with clean water using a clean, nonabrasive cotton cloth. 

3. Dry panels with a soft, clean nonabrasive cotton cloth. 

4. Do not use cleaners containing acid, alkali or sodium hypochlorite. 


A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity on the site. 






SECTION 09902 

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PAINTS AND STAINS 



Surface preparation and field application of paints and stains on interior substrates. 


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers. Labels shall include manufacturer's 

name, type of coating, brand name, lot number, estimated coverage, surface preparation 

requirements, drying time, cleanup instructions, color designation, and instructions for mixing. 

B. Store paint products in covered, ventilated area at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F 

and maximum ambient temperature of 90 degrees F. 





2.01 MANUFACTURER: 

A. The Sherwin Williams Company 

Representative: Shaun Williams, National Account Executive 

1051 Perimeter Dr., Suite 954 

Schaumburg, IL 60173 

Tel: (847) 330-6262 

Fax: (847) 330-0056 

Cell: (630) 617-1714 

E-mail: shaun.williams@sherwin.com 

2.02 All materials provided under this section shall be rated as low VOC materials. 



A. Verify that site environmental conditions are appropriate and substrates are in proper condition to 

receive work of this section. 

B. Verify that shop applied primers are compatible with specified finish coats. 


A. All surface to be painted shall be prepared according to the coating manufacturer’s written 

instructions. All surfaces shall be clean, dry, and dull before painting. 

B. Previously Coated Surfaces: 

1. Surface Prep: All surface contamination such as oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale, dirt, 

foreign matter, rust, mold, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers must be removed to 

assure sound bonding to the tightly adhering old paint or coating. Glossy surfaces of old 

paint films must be clean and dull before repainting. 

2. Thorough washing with an abrasive cleanser will clean and dull in one operation, or, wash 

thoroughly and dull by sanding. 

3. Any surface preparation short of total removal of the old coating may compromise the service 

length of the system. Check for compatibility by applying a test patch of the recommended 

coating system, covering at least 2 to 3 square feet. Allow to dry one week before testing 

adhesion per ASTM D3359. If the coating system is incompatible, complete removal is 

required. 

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR PAINTS AND STAINS 09902 - Page 1 of 4





A. Apply paint products in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. 

B. Paint Colors 

1. Refer to drawings for paint colors and their respective locations. 

C. Quality Assurance: 

1. Apply additional coats as needed to ensure 100% opacity and a uniform finish. 

2. Before work begins, provide a letter of “intent to warranty” from the supplying store. 


A. Keep project premises free of painting-related debris. Collect material that may constitute a fire 

hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. 

B. Protect work adjacent to painting operations from paint spatters and spills. Immediately remove 

paint that falls on finished surfaces not scheduled to receive paint, using materials and techniques 

that will not damage affected surfaces. 

3.05 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE 

A. Concrete, Stucco, Synthetic Stucco, Exposed Aggretate Concrete, Fluted Block, Common Brick, 

Durock and Concrete Masonry Units: 

1. Prime (1 coat): 

a. S-W Loxon Exterior Masonry Primer A24W300. 

2. Finish ( 2 coats ): 

a. S-W Loxon Masonry Topcoat A24 Series ( Field Areas ) 

B. Aluminum, Factory Finished Metal Siding, and Porcelain Panels: 


a. S-W DTM Bonding Primer B66A50. 

2. Finish (2 coats): 

a. S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Satin A82 Series 

C. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 


a. S-W Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66W310 


a. S-W Sher-Cryl HPA Semi-Gloss B66T354 

D. Steel Bollards 


a. S-W Pro-Cryl Universal Acrylic Primer B66W310 


a. S-W Sher-Cryl HPA Gloss B66Y300 

3.06 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE- CUSTOMER SHOWROOM ,MANGER’S OFFICE,RESTROOMS, 

CLEAN UP AREA: 

A. Concrete, Precast Panels, Cement Plaster and Durock and Concrete Masonry Units: 

1. Spot Prime: S-W PrepRite Interior Masonry Primer B28W300 

2. Finish (Two Coats): S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-shel B20W2200 Series 

B. Gypsum Drywall - Walls: 


a. S-W PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 


a. S-W ProMar 200 Latex Eg-shel B20W2200 Series 





C. Gypsum Drywall - Ceilings: 




a. S-W ProMar 400 Flat Latex B30W451 Series 

D. Wood-Doors and Trim: SAME AS ADJACENT WALL COLOR 

1. Prime: S-W PrepRite Classic Interior Latex Primer B28W101 

2. Finish (Two Coats): S-W ProClassic Waterbourne Interior Acrylic S.G. B31W20 Series 

* Note: Use Industrial Urethane Alkyd Enamel – Finish – Where applicable. 

E. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: 


a. S-W DTM Acrylic Primer / Finish B66W1 


a. S-W ProClassic Waterbourne Interior Acrylic S.G. B31W20 Series 

F. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: (Tires Plus) 

1. Finish (One Coat): ProCoat Acoustical Tile Restoration Coating/Paint Adjacent Gyp Pro Coat 

to match ACT 

G. Exposed Overhead Work: 



2. Finish (1 coat): 

a. S-W Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall B42W1 

H. Floor Border Paint: 

1. Prime: 

a. Tile-Clad High Solids Epoxy, B62 Series, 2.5 – 4.0 mils/ct 

2. Finish: 

a. Tile-Clad High Solids Epoxy, B62 Series, 2.5 – 4.0 mils/ct 

3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE-SERVICE BAYS: 



a. S-W PrepRite Interior Masonry Primer B28W300. 


a. S-W DTM Semi-Gloss B66W200 Series 

B. Gypsum Drywall – Walls: 





C. Wood – Plywood Ceilings: 


a. S-W PrepRite Classic Interior Latex Primer/Finish B66W1 


a. S-W DTM Primer/Finish B66W1 

D. Wood – Doors and Trim: 


a. S-W PrepRite Classic Interior Latex Primer B28W101 








1 Prime (1 coat): 




F. Exposed Overhead Work: (Renovation Projects) 

1. Spot Prime (1 coat): 




3.08 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE – INVENTORY 



a. S-W PrepRite Interior Masonry Primer B28W300. 

2 Finish (2 coats): 


B. Gypsum Drywall – Walls: 





C. Gypsum Drywall – Ceilings: 





D. Wood – Plywood Ceilings: 







a. S-W PrepRite Classic Interior Latex Primer B28W101 


a. S-W ProClassic Waterbourne interior Acrylic S.G. B31W20 Series 

G. Exposed Overhead Work: 

1. Spot Prime (1 coat): 









SECTION 10160 


TOILET COMPARTMENTS 

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES (see drawing for applicability) 

A. Toilet compartments and urinal screens, as supplied by SDI (Specialties Direct Inc.), (630) 323- 

8100. 


A. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing, blocking, and anchors as required. 





A. ASI Group. 

B. Or Equal 


A. Doors, panels and pilasters to be 1” thick with homogeneous color throughout, constructed from 

high density polyethylene (HDPE) resins, which are, waterproof non-absorbent and have a selflubricating 

surface that resists markings from pens, pencils and other writing instruments. 

1. Doors, panels and pilasters shall be 1” thick with uniformly machined edges. 

2. Doors and panels shall be 55” high and mounted at 14” above the finished floor. 

3. Urinal Screen Panels to be 18” wide x 42” high. 

4. Doors and panels to have an extruded aluminum heat sink strip attached to the lower edge. 

5. Pilasters shall be 81-1/2” high. Pilasters shall include a mounting system comprised of ¼” x 

1” stainless steel mounting bar attached to the pilaster, having 3/8” zinc plated steel lag 

bolts. Each mounting bar shall be secured to the building structure with 3/8” zinc plated steel 

studs. A shoe shall conceal each floor mounting, having an internal cross section conforming 

to the pilaster. 

6. Pilasters are overhead braced with an extruded anti-grip aluminum headrail. 

2.03 HARDWARE 

A. Door hardware shall be as noted: 

1. Heavy-duty 8” aluminum hinge shall have gravity-acting cam. Slide latch, strike/keeper and 

hinges are through bolted onto doors and pilasters using stainless steel, vandal-resistant 

through bolts. Keeper provides for emergency access into the stall by lifting up on the bottom 

of the door. 

B. Panel and pilaster brackets shall be as noted: 

1. Aluminum stirrup brackets shall be 2” long, made of heavy-duty anodized extruded aluminum 

(6063-T5 Alloy). Stirrup brackets shall be 1/8” thick and mounted with stainless steel, vandalresistant 

screws. Panels shall be attached with stainless steel, vandal-resistant through 

bolts. The attachment of brackets to the adjacent wall construction shall be accomplished 

with 2-1/2” stainless steel vandal-resistant screws and plastic anchors. 

C. Pilaster shoes shall be stainless steel 5” high with a #4 satin finish. Pilaster shoes are anchored to 

the pilaster with #10 stainless steel, vandal-resistant screws. Optional: Plastic pilaster shoes shall 

be 5” high. 

D. Headrail shall be made of heavy-duty anodized, extruded aluminum (6063-T5 alloy). Headrail is 

anti-grip and attaches to the top of the pilaster with stainless steel, tamper-resistant screws. 

Headrail is attached to the adjacent wall construction with a headrail bracket. 

E. Headrail brackets shall be made from a die cast aluminum alloy and shall be attached to the 

adjacent wall construction with 2-1/2” stainless steel, tamper-resistant screws and plastic anchors. 

TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 - Page 1 of 2




2.04 FINISH 

A. Color: Refer to drawings. 



A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Take complete and accurate measurements of toilet compartment locations. 

C. Start of work constitutes acceptance of job. 

D. Install compartments in a rigid, straight, plumb and level manner, with steel laid out as shown on 

the shop drawings and manufacturer’s installation instructions. 

E. All doors and panels to be mounted at 14” above the finished floor. 

F. Clearance at vertical edges of door shall be uniform top to bottom. 

G. No evidence of cutting, drilling and/or patching shall be visible on the finished work. 

H. Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and be left free of all imperfections. 

3.02 WARRANTY 

A. ASI Group guarantees its plastic against breakage, corrosion and delamination for 15 years from 

the date of receipt by the customer. If materials are found defective during that period for the 

reasons listed above, the materials will be replaced free of charge. No credits or allowances will be 

issued for any labor or expenses relating to the replacement of components covered under the 

warranty plan. All such expenses are to be borne by the buyer. 


TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10160 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 10445 

DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS 



A. Door Signs. 

B. Room Signs. 


A. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and 

Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. 

B. Local and state ordinances that modify or replace federal guidelines. 





A. Regulatory Requirements: Sign types to comply with ADAAG requirements, or local jurisdiction 

having authority. 



A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 

1. ASI Group (BSRO Vendor), (901) 312-6195. 

2. Or equal. 

2.02 SIGNS 

A. Acrylic Graphic Braille Signs: 

1. Acceptable product: Seton Series M54xx. 

2. Colors: Selected by Owner's Representative from manufacturer's full range of available 

colors. 

3. Sign size: 8 by 8 inches. 

4. Graphics: International symbols for indicated information. 

5. Lettering: 5/8 inch high, raised 1/32 inch, with Number 2 Braille coding. 

6. Sign frames: Manufacturer's standard. 

B. Accessibility Signs: 

1. Colors: To be selected. 

2. Sign size: 8 by 8 inches. 

3. Graphics: International symbols for indicated information. 

C. Accessories: Installation accessories specified in manufacturer's instructions. 

D. Refer to drawings for locations. 



A. Install room and door signs in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 

B. Locate signs in accordance with approved shop drawings and ADAAG requirements. 


DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS 10445 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 10513 

METAL LOCKERS 



A. Standard type lockers (Traditional Collection). 

B. Accessories, including tops, bases, vertical fillers, recess trim, benches and built-in locks. 


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A1008 – Standard Specification for Steel 

Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality. 

B. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 

C. ADAAG – American with Disabilities Act, Accessibility Guidelines. 

D. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 


A. No submittal required. 


A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation. 

B. Sequence deliveries to avoid project delays, but minimize on-site storage. 



A. (BSRO Vendor) ASI Storage Solutions Inc., 4444 Delp Street, Memphis, TN 38118; Tel: (901) 

312-6195; Fax: (901) 312-6197; www.asilockers.com. 

B. Or Equal. 

1. Provide metal lockers from a single manufacturer. 


A. Steel: Prime grade mild cold-rolled sheet steel free from surface imperfection, capable of taking a 

high-grade enamel finish. 

B. Hooks: Zinc plated forged steel, ball ends. 

C. Bolts and Nuts: Zinc plated truss fin head bolts and hex nuts. 

2.03 STANDARD LOCKERS 

A. Traditional Collection. 

B. Locker Configurations: 

1. Double Tier. 

C. Material: Mild cold rolled commercial quality steel, ASTM A1008. 

D 

Finish: Steel surfaces power washed, phosphate treated and finished with an electrostatically 

applied 2-mil thick hybrid epoxy/polyester power coating and baked. 

E. Construction: Unitized with common intermediate uprights separating units. 

F. Door Frames: 

1. 16-gage channel. 

METAL LOCKERS 10513 - Page 1 of 3




2. Vertical members: Provide additional flange for continuous door strike. 

3. Cross frame members: 16-gage channel shaped. 

a. Double Tier Lockers: Include intermediate cross frames. 

G. Doors: 16-gage with louvers, channel shaped on both the lock and hinge side, with angle 

formations across the top and bottom. 

H. Body: 

1. Bottoms: 16-gage. 

2. Tops, Sides, Backs and Shelves: 24-gage. 

3. Bolt spacing shall not exceed 9 inches o.c. 

I. Hinges: 16-gage continuous piano type, riveted to both door and frame. 

J. Handles: One-piece 20-gage deep drawn stainless steel cup designed to accommodate lockers. 

K. Latching: 

1. Lifting Trigger: 14-gage steel, attached to the latching channel. 

2. Trigger: Padlock eye for use with 9/32 inch diameter padlock shackle. 

3. Door latch clip to enlarge frame at three points on doors over 42 inches high and two points 

on other doors. 

4. Locking Device: Positive automatic type, locker door may be locked when open and closed 

without unlocking. 

5. Provide rubber silencer secured to frame at each latch hook. 

L. Interior Equipment: 

1. 3 wall hooks and one ceiling hook Double Tier lockers. 

M. Number Plates: Polished aluminum number plate riveted to door face with black numerals ½ inch 

high. 

N. Color: 

1. Doors and exposed body parts as selected from ASI’s standard designer color range. 

2. Non-exposed body parts finished in #03 Almond. 

O. Assemble locker components with rivets. 


A. Sloped Tops: 

1. Continuous slope top: 18-gage sheet steel, powder coated to match locker color. 

2. Hoods: 72 inches in length by depth of locker. 

3. For longer lengths, provide slip joints without visible fasteners at splice locations. 

4. Provide end closures. 

5. Slope Rise: 1/3 of locker depth. 

a. At continuous hoods add a 1 inch vertical rise at the front. 

B. Bases: 

1. Zee base: 14-gage sheet steel, power coated to match locker color. 

2. Front base/closed end base: 18-gage sheet steel, powder coated to match locker color. 

3. Install front bases between the front legs without overlap or exposed fasteners. 

4. Install end bases between front and rear legs of lockers at end of a row. 



A. Do not begin installation until substrates and bases have been properly prepared. 

B. If substrate and bases are the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory 



A. Install metal lockers and accessories at locations shown in accordance with manufacturer’s 

instructions. 





B. Install lockers level and plumb with flush surfaces and rigid attachment to anchoring surfaces. 

C. Anchor lockers to floor and wall at 48 inches or less, as recommended by the manufacturer. 

D. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation. 

E. Install sloping tops and metal fillers using concealed fasteners. Provide flush hairline joints against 

adjacent surfaces. 

F. Install front bases between legs without overlap or exposed fasteners. Provide end bases on 

exposed ends. 


A. Adjust doors and latches to operate without binding. Verify that latches are operating 

satisfactorily. 

B. Touch-up with factory-supplied paint and repair or replace damaged products before 

Substantial Completion. 








SECTION 10810 

TOILET ACCESSORIES 



A. Toilet Room Accessories. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five (5) years of documented experience producing 

products of the types specified in this section. 

B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ADAAG requirements. 






A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 

1. ASI-American Specialties, Inc. (BSRO Vendor), (901) 312-6195. 

2. Bobrick 

3. Bradley 

4. Or Equal 

B. Supply all products of this section from a single manufacturer. 

2.02 TOILET ACCESSORIES 

A. Paper Towel Dispenser and Disposal: Model Bradley 235-10. 

B. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Model Bobrick B-254. 

C. Toilet Paper Holder: Model Bobrick B-2740. 

2.03 MIRRORS 

A. Mirror: Model Bradley 740-1836. 

1. Frame: Angle. 

2. Mirror: Tempered glass. 

3. Size: As indicated on drawings. 

4. Finish: No.4 satin stainless steel. 

B. Angle Mirror Frames: Fabricated from 0.050 inch stainless steel, formed to 3/4 by 5/8 inch angle; 

heliarc-welded corners, finished to match sheet finish; concealed "H" type mounting bracket with 

tamper-proof fasteners. 

C. Glass Mirror: 1/4 inch thick float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, quality q1 mirror select; 

silver-coated, hermetically sealed with uniform electrolytically-deposited copper plating. 

2.04 GRAB BARS 

A. Grab Bars - Basic Requirements: Fabricated to comply with ASTM F 446 and to withstand a 900 

pound force, from ASTM A 554 stainless steel tubing, 0.050 inch, Type 304, 18-8 alloy; formed 1- 

1/2 inch radius return to wall at each end; each end heliarc-welded to minimum 11 gage stainless 

steel circular flange; welds finished to match tube finish. 

B. Grab Bars: Series Bobrick B-6206.. 

1. Sizes and configurations: As indicated on drawings. 

C. Grab Bar Concealed Mounting Flanges: Stainless steel, 3 inch diameter by 1/2 inch deep, with 

0.0897 inch steel tenon plate for concealed attachment, using three set screws. 

TOLIET ACCESSORIES 10810 - Page 1 of 2






A. Verification of Conditions: 

1. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of conditions. 


A. Install toilet accessories plumb and level in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation 

instructions. 

B. Locate toilet accessories at heights specified by Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 

C. Verify locations with drawings. 

3.03 CLEANING 

A. Remove manufacturer's protective vinyl coating from sight-exposed surfaces 24 hours before final 

inspection. 

B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 

3.04 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED PRODUCTS 

A. Protect products from damage caused by subsequent construction activities. 

B. Field repair of damaged product finishes is prohibited; replace products having damaged finishes 

caused by subsequent construction activities. 


TOLIET ACCESSORIES 10810 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 13850 

GAS DETECTION AND ALARM 



A. Remote CO Sensors. 

B. CO System Controller. 


A. Sheet M-1 of the construction documents 

B. Sheet E-2 of the construction documents 


A. NFPA 30A, Section 7.4.7 Gas Detection System 

B. UL - Underwriters Laboratory. 


A. General Description: 

1. CO Sensor: 

a. Provide a remote CO sensor as located on the drawings. The remote CO 

sensors shall utilize a solid state sensing element, be microprocessor 

based and be both temperature and humidity compensated for long life 

and stability. Pilot lights or LED’S (light emitting diodes) shall indicate 

1. Unit normal operation/NOT in alarm. 

2. High CO/unit in alarm, and 

3. shall indicate unit malfunction. 

b. In the unit malfunction condition the sensors output shall be fail-safe and 

indicate steady high CO condition. 

c. The CO sensor range shall be 0 to 250 ppm and shall be calibrated with 

a CO test gas and be calibrated to initiate exhaust fan operations at 50 

ppm of CO concentration. 

2. CO System Controller 

a. The CO system controller shall monitor its remote sensor. When a CO 

alarm level is detected the controller shall delay exhaust fan contact 

closure for 30 seconds. If the high CO conditioned persists for more than 

30 seconds the exhaust fan contacts shall close. The minimum fan ON 

time shall be field settable from one to eight minutes, in one minute 

increments. Should the CO concentration remain above the alarm level 

after the minimum run time has timed out, the exhaust fan contacts shall 

remain closed (ON) and a second "alarm" set of contacts shall close. 

Automatically increase fan speed to meet increasing heating or cooling 

demands and to reset the room set temperature when the room 

becomes unoccupied. 

GAS DETECTION AND ALARM 13850- PAGE 1 OF 5




b. The controller shall have a clock to operate the exhaust fan equipment on 

a time basis, without high CO concentration. The fans shall operate from 

zero to eight minutes (field adjustable in on minute increments) per hour. 

This timed fan run shall be different from the minimum run time setting. A 

switch shall be provided to enable to disable the time base operation 

c. The CO controller shall be designed such that in the event of a power 

failure the control unit shall set itself to an alarm condition and upon 

power restoration shall automatically activate the fan output to clear any 

possible accumulated toxic gases. 

d. The controller shall have an LED to indicate alarm condition of the 

remote sensor. 

e. Options available for CO System Controllers: 

1. Power "ON" light emitting diode (LED) to indicate power to system 

2. Fan ON (LED) indication 

3. Local alarm horn and/or light. Horn has silence switch. 

4. Remote alarm panel. 

5. Calibration Kit. 

6. Keyed panel lock(s.) 

B. Design Requirements: 

1. Provide clearly labeled light emitting diodes (LED’s) indicating lamps on the face 

of the controller panel to indicate the following: 

a. Power "ON" to system -- Green LED. 

b. One Red LED to indicate high CO condition (warning level). 

c. One Red LED to indicate Alarm condition. 

2. Provide an audible alarm with a minimum sound intensity of 68dB, on the face of 

the control panel. Provide an "Audible Silence" push button switch to silence the 

audible. Audible silence circuit shall be self resetting so that after alarm is 

cleared the audible alarm will automatically resound on the next alarm 

activation. 

3. Provide a Green LED on the face of the control panel to prove, when lighted, that 

the remote Sensor has power. 

4. Provide a remote CO alarm panel and mount where indicated on the plans. The 

remote alarm panel shall include a red LED alarm lamp and an audible alarm, 

with a minimum sound intensity of 68dB. Provide an "Audible Silence" 

momentary push button switch to silence the audible. The alarm LED must stay 

lighted as long as the alarm condition persists. 

C. Performance Requirements: 

1. Automatic fan run upon power restoration 

2. Input Power: 120VAC, 60Hz, 1A (fused) 

3. Relay Contacts: 24VAC, 2A resistive, 1.5A inductive 

4. Timers: 30 second delay on 

a. Min. Fan Run Time 1-8 minutes 

b. Hourly Fan Run 0-8 minutes 

5. Enclosure: 






a. Nema 1 standard other available 

b. Dimensions: 12”H x 12” W x 4” D 

6. Finish: Gray enamel 

7. Weight: 8 lbs 






C. Shop Drawings: Drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, 

including anchorage, accessories and wiring diagrams. 

D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Refer to Quality Assurance requirements for 

information description. 

1. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials 

comply with specified performance characteristics, criteria, and physical 

requirements. 

2. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Manufacturer's field reports specified herein. 

E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for 

installed products. 

2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein. 

3. Record Documents: Project record documents for installed materials. 


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field service 

representation during construction and operation. 

B. Installer Qualifications: 

1. Installer experienced in performing work of this section similar to that required 

for this project. 

2. Manufacturer trained, certified or otherwise acceptable to manufacturer. 

C. Regulatory Requirements: 

1. Building Codes: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 

2. Housing: UL Listed, fire retardant plastic. 

3. NEC Class 2 compliant device. 

D. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of manufacturing and installation 

workmanship. 

1. Provide installation in areas designated by Architect. 

2. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship and operation are 

approved by Architect. 

E. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project 

requirements, substrate conditions, manufacturer's installation instructions and 

manufacturer's warranty requirements. 





1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING 

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solventbased 

materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having 

jurisdiction. 


A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within 

limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products 

under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 

1.09 WARRANTY 

A. Manufacturer/installer has responsibility for an extended Corrective Period for work 

of this Section for the period stated from date of Substantial Completion against all 

the conditions indicated below, and when notified in writing from Owner. 

B. Manufacturer/installer shall promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner 

correct deficiencies: 

1. Failure due to defective materials and workmanship. 

2. Failure due to programming and embedded factory installed system 

information. 

C. Contractor/manufacturer/installer shall be notified immediately of defective products, 

and be given a reasonable opportunity to inspect the goods prior to return. 

Manufacturer will not assume responsibility, or compensation, for unauthorized 

repairs or labor. 



A. Provide a Model GVU-1 Carbon Monoxide (CO) detection and control system as 

specified on drawings. 

B. Acceptable Manufacturer: TOXALERT INTERNATIONAL, INC., P.O. Box 159, 

MOUND, MN 55364 Phone 952.472.4541, Fax 972.472.4960 www.toxalert.com 



A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's Data Sheet including product technical 

bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions and product carton instructions 

for installation. 

B. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for product 

installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Do not begin installation until areas, supporting construction and substrates have 

been properly prepared. 

D. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of 

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 






A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for 

achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 



3.04 CLEANING 

A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. 

Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in 

accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to Owner's acceptance. Remove 

construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. 



B. Protect wiring and devices from subsequent construction and finish work. 


3.06 OWNER'S INSTRUCTION 

A. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of installed units. 

B. Provide instruction to ensure that the system is operated properly. Training shall be 

accomplished before Owner's personnel operate the system, and shall occur at the 

site of the project. Include training of managers, front desk, maintenance, security, 

and other staff personnel as identified. 






SECTION 15000 

AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 


1.01 GENERAL: 

A. The General Conditions, Division 101 of General Requirements, Section 15010 - Standard Provisions, 

and Section 15050 - Basic Material and Methods are hereby made a part of this section. 

1.02 SCOPE: 

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required for the complete design and 

installation of Automatic Sprinkler System. 

B. All areas of the building shall be protected by wet Automatic Fire Sprinklers, except for the areas 

defined in Section 15500 “Dry Pipe Automatic Sprinkler Fire Protection”. The system shall be 

hydraulically calculated. Density shall be in accordance with NFPA-13 unless special circumstances 

such as stacking heights or materials to be stored cause other chapters of the NFPA to be required. 

Follow those chapters for the appropriate sprinklering requirements. 

C. Fire Sprinkler Contractor shall field verify all existing conditions prior to designing and installing system. 

D. Water supply shall come from a new fire line service complete with double check backflow preventer, 

and valving as required by the city. Fire sprinkler contractor shall pay all tap fees, permits, and charges 

necessary for a complete and approved installation. 

E. Preparation of detailed shop drawings for the fire protection systems to meet the approval of state and 

local authorities having jurisdiction on this project. FDC shall provide the seal and signature of a 

licensed professional engineer on the shop drawings and calculations at time of submittal. 


A. Sprinkler System shall comply with all applicable State and City Codes, NFPA Requirements, and 

Owner's Insurance Company Requirements; including, but not limited to the following: 

1. Uniform Building Code. 

2. NFPA Chapter 13. 

3. Life Safety Code NFPA-101. 

4. Uniform Fire Code. 


A. Prepare detailed working drawings of the Automatic Sprinkler System. 

B. Submit drawings and calculations to the Fire Marshal and Owner's Insurance Underwriter and obtain 

their approval. 

C. Submit four (4) copies of approved drawings and calculations to the Architect and two (2) copies to the 

Fire Marshal for their review and approval. 

D. Submit "cutsheet" samples of Sprinkler Heads to Architect for approval. 


2.01 GENERAL: 

A. All materials, equipment, valves and devices installed or furnished under this contract shall be listed and 

approved for use by the authorities, agencies, codes and standards cited in this section of the 

specifications. 

AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15000 1 OF 5




2.02 PIPING: 

A. Sprinkler Piping smaller than 4" shall be Schedule 40 (ASTM Specifications A-120 or A-53) black steel 

pipe which shall be assembled with 175 psig standard cast iron, threaded fittings or with flanged 

sprinkler type fittings or grooved fittings as required. Piping 4" and larger may be UL approved steel 

pipe with grooved or welded fittings as approved by the local authorities. Grooved fittings shall be 

Victaulic or approved equal, the grooving machine shall be the same as that recommended by the 

fittings manufacturer. 

B. Schedule 10 (thin wall) sprinkler piping may be used where approved by the authorities. 

C. Piping from 5'-0" outside building to alarm check valve installation shall be ductile iron piping wrapped 

with 3 mil polyethylene. 

2.03 HANGERS: 

A. Provide necessary UL approved hangers to support the sprinkler pipings. Hangers shall be spaced in 

accordance with requirements of the NFPA Chapter 13. 

2.04 SPRINKLER HEADS: 

A. Sprinkler heads in areas with finished ceilings shall be pendant spray type, chrome finish with chrome 

escutcheon and shall be equal to Grinnell issue 'C' Duraspeed 1/2" orifice and UL and FM listed. 

B. Heads in areas without ceilings and with exposed piping shall be upright type, brass finish and shall be 

equal to Grinnell issue 'C' Duraspeed 1/2" orifice and UL and FM listed. 

C. Head in vicinity of heating equipment and electrical equipment shall be high temperature heads of the 

type approved by the appropriate Fire Underwriters Association. 

D. Heads in the Used Inventory Room shall be extended coverage type and supplied with Tyco G2 

sprinkler guards or equal. 

E. Inventory Room in rack sprinklers shall be Tyco large orifice, Quick Response, brass upright heads, 

165 o F. Provide Tyco sprinkler guard with shield, balance in rack sprinklers with ceiling sprinklers. 

F. Verify if the area above the overhead doors requires protection. Provide an upright head above the 

doors and side walls between the doors. Do not run piping over the door tracks. 

2.05 FIRE DEPARTMENT SIAMESE: 

A. Shall be equal to Potter-Roemer No. 5750 sidewall two way 2 1/2", 2-1/2" x 4" size, chrome plated, front 

plate with raised lettering, "Automatic Sprinkler", and chrome plated caps attached with sufficient 

amount of chain. 

2.06 GATE VALVES: 

A. Gate valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be Underwriter's approval equal to Jenkins 825A or Crane 467. 

2.07 CHECK VALVES: 

A. All check valves shall be equal to Jenkins 729, Crane 375 or Walworth 883F and equipped with an 

automatic ball drip to drain the line between the Fire Department connection and the check valve. 

2.08 FLOW SWITCHES: 

A. Provide a Grinnell Series WFD flow switch in each sprinkler system connection serving each sprinkler 

zone. Switches shall be suitable for connection into the fire alarm system. 

2.09 MONITOR SWITCHES: 

A. Each manual sectionalizing valve and shutoff valve in the sprinkler system shall be provided with a 

Grinnell F640 monitoring switch to indicate whether the valve is open or closed. Wiring from switches to 

the fire alarm system will be done under Division 16. The switch shall have a tamper indication if 

removed from its mounting or the housing cover is removed; it shall signal an alarm when the valve 

position is altered. 

AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER PROTECTION 15000 2 OF 5




2.10 ALARM VALVE ASSEMBLIES: 

A. The alarm valve assembly shall be equal to Grinnell model A-3 consisting of a service shutoff valve, a 

clapper type main check valve, an auxiliary seat (alarm outlet), a retarding chamber, and electric circuit 

closer, gauges, check valves, gate valves, globe or angle valves and cocks. 

2.11 WATER MOTOR GONG: 

A. Water powered gong with clapper roller, clapper, strainer, water wheel shaft, housing, cover plates and 

other standard components. 

2.12 SPARE SPRINKLERS: 

A. Provide a wall mounted sprinkler cabinet with a minimum of 12 sprinklers of each type installed and a 

sprinkler wrench. Mount cabinet next to sprinkler alarm valve. 


3.01 SCOPE: 

A. Furnish and install with all related items, a completely designed fire protection automatic sprinkler 

system. 

3.02 CERTIFIED CONTRACTORS: 

A. Fabrication and installation shall be by state licensed fire sprinkler company with experienced, 

competent workmen regularly engaged in the work. 

3.03 COORDINATION: 

A. Work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following: 

1. Required fittings and valves, etc. 

2. Overhead sprinkler system for entire building, including all required items, except under exterior 

canopies and/or overhangs over walkways. 

3.04 DESIGN: 

A. Piping in areas having ceilings, other than the underside of the roof deck, shall be concealed; piping in 

storage and service areas may be exposed but kept at a minimum distance from ceiling. All piping shall 

be new, clean and free from rust. 

B. The Sprinkler Contractor shall coordinate his work and services with all other ceiling mounted, 

suspended or overhead equipment and with structural system. No sprinkler lines shall pass through 

ductwork. 

C. Deep escutcheons may be used in order to locate heads close to lighting fixtures. Where sprinkler 

heads occur under overhangs, escutcheons of lesser depth may be used where acceptable to NFPA 

13. 

D. Risers shall be located where indicated on the drawings and be equipped with variable pressure alarm 

valves. Valves shall be complete with all necessary items, fittings, identification tags or plates, and 

accessories including alarm valve and water motor gong. Design shall allow for suitable venting and 

drainage of same, all to meet with the approval of NFPA 13. 

E. Designs requiring cutting of structural members for passage of sprinkler pipes or hanger shall be 

avoided. When design, due to economy, appearance and similar aspects, denote the necessity of 

cutting, it shall be held to an absolute minimum and done only with the Architect's written approval. 

F. In addition to meeting the National Fire Protection Association No. 13 Requirements, the following will 

apply to the sprinkler system: 

1. The sprinkler system shall be electrically inter-connected to the building fire alarm system. 





3.05 DRAWINGS: 

2. The sprinkler system main control valve shall be electrically supervised so that at least a local 

alarm will sound when the valve is closed. 

A. Shop drawings consisting of the following shall be furnished by the Sprinkler Sub-Contractor: 

1. Layout drawing of complete overhead automatic sprinkler system indicating relationship of all 

other overhead items including light fixtures, location of risers, piping, etc. shall be as 

inconspicuous as possible, provide a pleasing overhead appearance, and still fulfill all functional 

requirements. 

2. Sprinkler Contractor shall obtain a copy of APPROVED ceiling grid system from ceiling subcontractor 

and shall work to this layout when preparing shop drawings and installing work. 

Cutting of ceiling runners will not be permitted. 

3. Pilot plan indicating location of all underground connections, control valves, piping and all related 

items, and any other items of data deemed necessary by NFPA 13. 

4. Complete details and sections as required to clearly define and clarify the design indicated by the 

aforementioned layout and pilot plan. 

5. All shop drawings, prior to being sent to the Architect, must bear the Fire Engineering Dept. 

stamp of acceptance. 

B. Furnish and install, next to the sprinkler riser main, a printed sheet, protected by wood framed glass 

cover, giving brief instructions regarding control, emergency procedure and other data as deemed 

necessary by Fire Marshal. 

C. Upon completion of the work, accurately mark one copy of shop drawings showing location of all 

underground fire prevention system piping, valves, etc., as finally installed. Show location of 

underground piping and valves by dimension. Also, give flow line elevations of underground piping from 

street main to building. Upon completion of the job, furnish Owner one (1) neat legible copy of "as built" 

drawings. 


A. Sleeves shall be provided for piping passing through concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls and 

partitions, through floors, ceilings, walls, or partitions of other building materials. Watertight sleeves 

caulked with mastic or lead shall be provided for floor slabs and walls on or below grade. Standard pipe 

or galvanized sheet metal sleeves shall be installed in above grade construction as may be required. 

The sleeves shall be of sufficient diameter to pass pipe lines with couplings or with insulation or annular 

area for caulking where required. Escutcheons shall be approved floor and ceiling plates made of steel 

or brass, plain or chromium plate finish and shall be installed around all exposed piping passing through 

a finished floor, wall or ceiling. The plates shall be of sufficient outside diameter to cover the sleeve 

opening and shall be provided with springs or set screws to insure them fitting snugly around the pipe. 

B. All openings for piping should be anticipated and indicated on the approved and accepted shop 

drawings. Any additional cutting of openings must have written approval of the Architect. 

C. This Contractor will NOT use air conditioning duct supports, air device outlets or supports, piping or 

supports as a means of support of any material, accessories or workmen in the installation of the 

system. 

D. Sprinkler pipes cannot be routed over the door tracks in the Service Bays. 

3.07 GUARANTEE: 

3.08 TESTS: 

A. The entire installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the building acceptance date. 

A. Prior to connecting to the overhead sprinkler piping, the underground main shall be flushed per the 

requirements of NFPA-13. 

AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER PROTECTION 15000 4 OF 5




3.09 ACCEPTANCE: 

A. After completion of all installation, tests, etc. and prior to the opening date, the Sprinkler Contractor shall 

instruct the Owner in the operation of the sprinkler system. Provide written operating instructions and 

mount on wall in a frame with glass front. Include the following so that the owner: 

1. Will immediately recognize the main valves are in open or closed position. 

2. Will know how to drain the system. 

3. Will know how to reset the alarm system. 

4. Will know now to make complete weekly inspection. 

5. Will know how to maintain the system in accordance with NFPA No. 13. 

3.10 PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION: 

A. Contractor shall complete the automatic fire sprinkler system ready for operation, in all respects, as soon 

as possible. When the system is complete and ready for continuous operation, activate the system for its 

intended use. After use, water charges, if any, will be paid by the Owner. 






SECTION 15010 

SUPPLEMENTARY MECHANICAL CONDITIONS 


1.01 GENERAL AND SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS: Shall be made a part of this section. 

The Contractor shall read all sections of the specifications in order to thoroughly understand the nature 

of the entire project, the requirements for coordination among the several trades, and items in other 

sections which apply to the mechanical work. 

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK : Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required for the 

complete furnishing and installation of the mechanical systems. 

1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE: 

A. Finish painting unless specified otherwise in another section: Refer to Section: PAINTING. 

B. Electrical Work: Refer to Section: ELECTRICAL. 

1.04 UTILITIES, LOCATIONS AND ELEVATIONS: 

A. Locations and elevations of the various utilities, included within the scope of this contract, have 

been obtained from as-built plans and/or other substantially reliable sources and are offered 

separate from the contract documents as a general guide only, without guarantee as to accuracy. 

The Contractor shall examine the site and shall verify to his own satisfaction the locations and 

elevations of all utilities and shall adequately inform himself of their relation to his work. 

B. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for connections to the various utilities as indicated, as well 

as provide for all meters, meter settings, pads, pits, and covers required by the Utility Company. 

1.05 PERMITS AND APPROVALS: 

A. All work done under this contract shall comply with all local and state codes having jurisdiction 

and with the requirements of the Utility Companies whose services may be used. All 

modifications required by these codes shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge. 

Where code requirements are less than those shown on the plans or in the specifications, the 

plans and specifications shall be followed. 

B. The Contractor shall obtain all permits, inspections and approvals as required by all authorities 

having jurisdiction. All fees and costs of any nature whatsoever incidental to these permits, 

inspections and approvals must be assumed and paid by the Contractor. 

1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS: 

A. Shop drawings of fully descriptive catalog data shall be submitted by the Contractor for all items 

of material and equipment furnished and installed under this contract. The Contractor shall 

submit to the Architect a sufficient number of copies of all such shop drawings or catalog data to 

provide him with as many reviewed copies as he may need; plus two (2) copies for retention by 

the Architect and Engineer. 

B. Before submitting shop drawings to the Architect for review, the Contractor shall examine them 

and satisfy himself that they are correctly representative of the material or equipment to which 

they pertain. The Contractor shall so note on these drawings before submitting them. The 

Contractor's review of the shop drawings is not intended to take the place of the official review by 

the Architect, and shop drawings which have not been reviewed by Architect shall not be used in 

fabricating or installing any work. 

SUPPLEMENTARY MECHANICAL CONDITIONS 15010 - Page 1 of 4




C. The review of shop drawings or catalog data by the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor from 

responsibility for deviations from the plans and specifications unless he has, in writing, specifically 

called attention to such deviations at the time of submission and has obtained the permission of 

Architect thereon; nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for error of any kind in shop drawings. 

When the Contractor does call such deviations to the attention of the Architect, he shall state in 

his letter whether or not such deviations involve any extra cost. If this is not mentioned, it will be 

assumed that no extra cost is involved for making the change. 

D. Shop drawings will be returned unchecked unless the following information is included: 

Reference to all pertinent data in the specifications or on the drawings, size and characteristics of 

the equipment, name of the project, and a space large enough to accept an approval stamp. The 

data submitted shall reflect the actual equipment performance under the specified conditions and 

shall not be a copy of a scheduled data on the drawings. 

E. Shop drawings shall be submitted on the following items, but not limited to: 

1. Fans 12. Water Heaters 

2. Plumbing Fixtures 13. Air Conditioning Units 

3. Insulating Materials 14. Condensing Units 

4. Valves and Fittings 15. Unit Heater 

5. Ductwork Layout 16. Fire Sprinkler System 

6. Turning Vanes 17. Fire Damper 

7. Dampers 18. Vibration Isolation 

8. Air Devices 19. Infrared Heaters 

9. Temperature Controls 20. Compressed Air System 

10. Piping Materials 21. Radiant Heater 

11. Pipe Supports 22. Oil Interceptor 

1.07 LOCATION OF OUTLETS: 

A. The location of all pipes, outlets, appliances, etc., shown on the drawings are approximate only, 

and understood to be subject to such revisions as may be found necessary or desirable at the 

time the work is installed. 

B. Generally, all outlets shall be properly centered in rooms, panels, and other finished work and 

shall not interfere with outlets or equipment or other trades, and shall meet the dimensioned or 

large scale drawings of the Architect. 

C. The Contractors shall coordinate their work with the ceiling and wall finish trades, so that the 

finished project will be symmetrical. Outlets smaller than the pattern shall be centered on the 

pattern, while any outlets larger than the pattern or at the intersection of four patterns unless 

dimensioned otherwise on the plans. 

1.08 PAINTING: 

A. Finish painting of all exposed materials and equipment is included as part of the work of another 

section of specifications. However, the following items shall be part of the work of this section: 

B. All pipes and apparatus shall be thoroughly cleaned and all rust and grease removed. No 

nameplates, rotating shafts, bearing bronzes, electric windings, or valve stems shall be painted 

nor shall any part furnished in nickel or chrome plate be painted. 

C. All motors, pumps, starters, switches and other apparatus furnished from the factory with enamel 

finish, shall have all abraded surfaces touched up with the same type, color or paint. 





D. Materials shall be best quality of their several kinds and shall be Kelly-Moore, Pittsburg, Pratt and 

Lambert. 

1.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING: Refer to General Conditions. No joists, girders or columns shall be cut 

without first obtaining written permission from Architect. 

1.10 SLEEVES: The Contractor shall provide sleeves for his service lines (including ductwork) passing 

through walls, floors, ceilings, roof, etc., subject to the approval of the Architect. All pipe sleeves 

installed in the vertical position shall be constructed of 26-gage galvanized iron. All pipe sleeves in the 

horizontal position shall be constructed of standard weight steel pipe or extra heavy cast iron pipe. 

Oversized sleeves shall be provided for insulated lines and ductwork to pass full thickness of 

insulation. All sleeves shall be installed flush with finished surface. 

1.11 MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLS: 

A. Electric motors shall be of the speed, phase and voltage specified and shall be type 

recommended by motor manufacturer, for type of service intended. Unless otherwise specified, 

all motor starting equipment, overloads, pushbuttons shall be furnished by the Mechanical 

Contractor and wiring for same will be furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor except 

where normally furnished as a mounted prewired component of a major item of equipment. 

B. Electric motor shall be of the type, size and electrical characteristics shown and specified, and 

any change in motor size, brought on directly or indirectly by a substitution of equipment having 

characteristics peculiar to itself requiring such a change shall be the responsibility of the 

Contractor who initiates the change, and the entire cost of such change including conduit, wiring, 

motor starting equipment, etc., shall be paid by the Contractor at no additional cost to Owner, 

unless substitutions was initiated by Owner. 

1.12 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES (ESCUTCHEONS) : All exposed pipes passing through walls, floors, 

and ceilings, shall be provided with an approved chrome or nickel plated plates. Ceiling plates shall be 

provided with set screws. This shall also apply where pipes pass through the interior parts of cabinet 

work. 

1.13 DISCREPANCIES AND INCONSISTENCIES : Refer to General Conditions. Wherever there are 

discrepancies between drawings or between drawings and specifications or conflict within 

specifications, the Contractor shall base his bid upon the better quality or greater quantity called for 

and it shall be so furnished and installed unless otherwise ordered. 

1.14 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS: 

A. At the completion of work, the Contractor shall deliver to Owner operating instructions and 

maintenance brochures as hereinafter described. They shall consist of typewritten description of 

system operation, including necessary diagrams, keyed to valve and piping identification systems 

and shall include various operating instructions as received with each piece of equipment, and 

one copy of each shop drawing or other submittal data. Operating instructions shall be bound in 

a hardboard cover secured with fasteners. The project will not receive final acceptance of 

Architect until this data has been received by Owner. Instruct Owner's operating personnel in 

proper operation and maintenance of equipment and systems for a period of not less than three 

(3) days. One day of instruction shall be timed to include a normal seasonal changeover. 

1.15 ROUGH-IN AND FINAL CONNECTION : The Contractor shall have the responsibility of rough-in for 

and assembly of various equipment and to make final connection to all equipment furnished by Owner, 

or under other sections of these specifications. Rough-in and assemblies of this equipment shall be 

determined from the manufacturer's shop drawings or as directed and in no case shall the location be 

scaled from the architectural drawings or mechanical drawings. 






A. The Contractor shall guarantee all labor and materials furnished by him for a period of one year 

from the date of acceptance of the completed work. Certain work shall be guaranteed for a 

longer period when so specified. The warranty shall cover the repair or replacement without 

additional cost to the Owner of any and all defects (including lost refrigerant) which, in the opinion 

of the Architect, are a result of defective material or faulty workmanship. 

B. Refer to Closeout in Section 01780. 

1.17 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION : When each and every piece of mechanical equipment is 

ready to operate, if it is to the advantage of the Owner or the project construction to operate this 

equipment, the Mechanical Contractor, under this section of the work, shall allow his equipment to be 

operated without obligating the Owner for acceptance. The Owner or General Contractor shall furnish 

the necessary operating personnel to supervise the overall operation of the machinery, but it shall 

remain the Contractor's responsibility until final acceptance by the Engineer for the Owner. 


NOT USED 


NOT USED 






SECTION 15020 

TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS 


1.01 GENERAL 

A. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, adjust, check, repair and place in service the various 

mechanical systems herein specified with their respective equipment, accessories and piping. He 

shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and tools, necessary to conduct the tests herein 

specified and those required by the governing authorities. All tests shall be made by the Contractor 

in the presence of the Owner or his representative. 

B. No work of any nature shall be covered, enclosed or otherwise concealed until properly inspected, 

tested and approved. Any leaks which develop during any of the tests shall be corrected with new 

material and made as good as required; said tests shall be repeated until the work is satisfactory to 

the Architect and the Owner in every way. 

C. Each separate system with its various components shall be operated by the Contractor for a 

reasonable length of time to demonstrate the performance of all equipment and piping in 

accordance with the true intent and purpose of the plans and specifications. All necessary 

adjustments shall be made to the satisfaction of the Owner/Architect. 

D. At no time during testing shall the Contractor vent or release any refrigerant to atmosphere. 


2.01 BALANCING: 

A. Contractor shall perform the complete balancing of the entire systems. 

1. Upon completion of the installation and start-up of the mechanical equipment, he shall check, 

adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain conditions in each conditioned space. 

2. Prepare and submit complete report on the balance and the operation of the system. 


3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF TESTS: The following tests shall be made in accordance with all 

laws and governing authorities. 

3.02 WATER PIPING SYSTEMS: All water piping systems shall be properly tested to assure their being 

absolutely tight. In the case of pipes which are to be insulated, these tests shall be completed and the 

piping systems proved to be absolutely tight before any insulation is applied. Wherever pipes are 

placed so that they will ultimately be concealed, these tests shall be conducted and the absolute 

tightness of each piping system shall be demonstrated before the system is concealed and made 

inaccessible. The procedure of these tests shall consist of subjecting a piping system to a hydrostatic 

pressure of 150 psi gage for a period of not less than eight (8) hours. During this test period, all leaks 

in pipe, fittings and accessories, in the particular piping system which is being tested, shall be stopped 

and the hydrostatic test shall be applied again. This procedure shall be repeated until for an entire 8- 

hour period, no leaks can be found while the system being tested is subject to the pressure mentioned 

above. 

TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS 15020 - Page 1 of 2




3.03 WASTE PIPE AND CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING: Soil waste and vent pipe and condensate drain 

pipe shall have all outlets temporarily plugged up. The pipes shall be filled with water testing the 

system in sections. lf, after 24 hours, the level of the water has been lowered by leakage, the leaks must 

be found and stopped by the Contractor, and the water level shall again be raised and the test repeated, until 

after the 24-hour retention period there shall be no perceptible lowering of the water level of the system 

being tested. 

3.04 REFRIGERANT PIPING: 

A. When the refrigeration piping system is complete, disconnect and cap all lines to gauges and 

pressurestats that can be damaged by a pressure test. Charge system with two (2) pounds of 

refrigerant. Open all service valves in system. Replace refrigerant drum with cylinder of dry 

nitrogen and build up system pressure to 100-150 lbs. in accordance with local codes. Check all 

joints and equipment for leaks with use of halide electronic leak detector. Relieve system pressure 

and repair or correct all leaks. Reconnect all capped lines. The entire system shall be evacuated 

with use of vacuum pump capable of pulling system down to 50-100 micron range. Do not use 

compressor as pump. Break vacuum with dry refrigerant on small systems or dry nitrogen on large 

installation. 

3.05 NATURAL GAS PIPING: 

A. Low pressure natural gas piping shall be air tested to a pressure of 6" mercury column for a period 

of not less than 15 minutes. Readings shall be made only with mercury manometer. 

B. Medium pressure natural gas piping shall be air tested to a pressure of 25 psi for a period of 

one hour. 


TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS 15020 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 15050 

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 





B. Requirements specified in Division 15, Section "Supplementary Mechanical Conditions" 

apply to this Section. 


A. Pipe, pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing. 

B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred 

spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above 

ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels. 

C. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished 

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. 

D. Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient 

temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. 

E. Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical 

contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. 

F. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather 

conditions and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient 

temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 


A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 

Specifications Section 01300. 


A. Qualify welding processes and operators for structural steel according to AWS D1.1 

"Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

B. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 

1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping." 

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding 

processes involved and that certification is current. 

C. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and 

ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and 

connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, 

and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these 

increases, if larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of 

the equipment are specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and 

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 15050 - Page 1 of 4




commissioning requirements. 


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through 

shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, 

debris, and moisture. 

B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When 

stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor. 

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components. 

B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of 

construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 

C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in 

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment 

for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring 

positioning prior to closing in the building. 

E. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead 

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised 

service companies, and controlling agencies. 


2.01 PIPING SPECIALTIES 

2.02 GROUT 

A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type, where 

required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 

1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping. 

2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. 

3. Cast Brass: One-piece, with set-screw. 

a. Finish: Rough brass. 

B. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar 

metals, to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. 

1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and 

weld neck end types and matching piping system materials. 

2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 

3. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250 psig minimum 

working pressure at 180 deg F temperature. 

C. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations: 

1. Steel Sheet-Metal: 24 gage or heavier, galvanized sheet metal, round tube 

closed with welded longitudinal joint. 





A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B. 

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, 

nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and 

exterior applications. 

2. Design Mix: 5000 psi, 28-day compressive strength. 

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged. 


3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS 

A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify 

otherwise. Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 specify piping 

installation requirements unique to the piping system. 

B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) 

indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and 

arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, 

and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to 

layout are approved on coordination drawings. 

C. Install piping at indicated slope. 

D. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating 

pressure. 

E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and 

service areas. 

F. Install piping free of sags and bends. 

G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. 

Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated. 

H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. 

Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. 

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation. 

J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. 

K. All pipes through walls, floors, and ceilings, within the building, shall be furnished with 

escutcheon plates. This shall include all branch connections to fixtures and equipment. 

Plates on piping in finished areas including piping below counter tops and in cabinet work 

shall be one piece, brass chromium plated, of the proper size to fit the pipe. 

L. Sleeves are not required for core drilled holes. 

M. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by PE plastic (removable) sleeves. 

N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board 

partitions, concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated. 

O. All cast iron vents through the roof shall be flashed and counterflashed with 4 pound sheet 





lead. Flashing shall be not less than 20 inches on the roof and shall extend up the pipe 

tot he underside of hub or flashing sleeve. Counterflashing shall lap down over base 

flashing not less than 3 inches. 

P. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and 

floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material. 

Firestopping materials are specified in Division 7. 

Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in 

requirements. 

3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS 

A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom, where mounting heights 

are not indicated. 

B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown 

only in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts the Architect. 

C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems 

and components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated. 

D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or 

replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, 

with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an 

accessible location. 

E. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 

3.03 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE 

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and 

elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. 

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 






SECTION 15075 

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 



Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location. 



A. Brady USA, Inc. or equal. 

2.02 NAMEPLATES 

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting 

background color. 

2.03 TAGS 

A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting 

background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. 

B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. 

2.04 STENCILS 

A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size: 

1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch high 

letters. 

2. Ductwork and Equipment: 2-1/2 inch high letters. 

2.05 PIPE MARKERS 

A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. 

B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi- rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or 

pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being 

conveyed. 

C. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, 

minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 



A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with 

sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. 

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. 

C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

D. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried 

pipe. 

E. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. 

F. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. 

G. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch 

diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align 

with axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and 

drops, adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at 

each obstruction. 

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - Page 1 of 2




H. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in corner 

of panel closest to equipment. 


MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15075 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 15082 

PIPING INSULATION 



A. Piping insulation. 

B. Jackets and accessories. 


Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with 

ASTM E 84. 


2.01 GLASS FIBER 

A. Manufacturer: 

1. Knauf Fiber Glass 

2. Schuller International/Johns Manville Insulations 

3. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; 

4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 

B. Insulation: ASTM C 547 and ASTM C 795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 

1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 

2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 

3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. 

C. Insulation: ASTM C 795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 

1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 



D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture 

vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 of 0.02 perm-inches. 

E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers. 

F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: 


a. Knauf Fiber Glass 

b. Schuller International/Johns Manville Insulations 

c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; 

d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 

2. Compatible with insulation. 

G. Insulating Cement/Mastic: 





d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements 

2. ASTM C 195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool. 

H. Fibrous Glass Fabric: 






PIPING INSULATION 15082 - Page 1 of 2




2. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 

3. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density. 

4. Weave: 5x5. 

I. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 






2. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight. 

3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color. 

J. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 






2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. 

K. Insulating Cement: 





d. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 

2. ASTM C 449/C 449M. 



A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. 



B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. 


A. Plumbing Systems: 

1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: 

a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 

1) Pipe Size Range: all. 

2) Thickness: 1 inch. 

2. Domestic Cold Water, Roof Drainage : 

a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 

1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 

2) Thickness: 1 inch. 

b. polyurethane Insulation: 

1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes. 

2) Thickness: 1 


PIPING INSULATION 15082 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 15086 

DUCT INSULATION 



A. Duct insulation. 

B. Duct Liner. 

C. Insulation jackets. 


Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E 84. 


Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and 

insulation cements. 


2.01 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE 


1. Owens-Corning Fiberglas 

2. Or Equal 

B. Insulation: ASTM C 553; flexible, noncombustible blanket. 

1. 'K' value : ASTM C 518, 0.31 at 75 degrees F. 



C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 

1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 

2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E 96; 0.02 perm. 

3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. 

D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 


a. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; 

b. Or Equal 

2. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure 

sensitive rubber based adhesive. 

E. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: 



b. Or Equal 


3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color. 

F. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage. 

2.02 GLASS FIBER, RIGID 

A. Manufacturers 

1. Owens-Corning Fiberglas 

2. Or Equal 

B. Insulation: ASTM C 612; rigid, noncombustible blanket. 

1. 'K' value : ASTM C 518, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 



4. Density: 3.0 lb/cu ft. 

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: 

DUCT INSULATION 15086 - Page 1 of 2




1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 

2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E 96; 0.04 perm. 

3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. 

D. Vapor Barrier Tape: 



b. Or Equal 


sensitive rubber based adhesive. 

E. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish: 



b. Or Equal 

2. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight, glass fabric. 

3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color. 

2.03 GLASS FIBER DUCT LINER, RIGID 


1. Owens-Corning Fiberglas; 

2. Or Equal 

B. Insulation: ASTM C 1071; flexible, noncombustible blanket with poly vinyl acetate polymer 

impregnated surface and edge coat. 

1. 'K' Value: ASTM C 1071 or ASTM C 518, maximum 0.31 at 75 degrees F. 

2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F. 

3. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 5,000 fpm. 

4. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: ASTM C 1071 0.30 for 1/2 inch thickness. 

5. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: ASTM C 1071 0.45 for 1 inch thickness. 

6. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: ASTM C 1071 0.60 for 1-1/2 inches thickness. 

7. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: ASTM C 1071 0.70 for 2 inch thickness. 

8. Minimum Noise Reduction Criteria: ASTM C 1071 for 1 inch thickness. 

C. Adhesive: 



b. Or equal 

2. Waterproof, ASTM E 162 fire-retardant type. 

D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head. 




B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards. 


A. Supply, Return, outside air intake, plenums 

1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 1/2" inches thick. 

2. Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Liner Insulation: 1 ½" inches thick. 

B. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings: 

1. Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Liner Insulation: 1 ½" inches thick 


DUCT INSULATION 15086 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 15145 

PLUMBING PIPING 



A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 

1. Sanitary sewer. 

2. Domestic water. 

3. Storm water. 


A. Perform Work in accordance with local and State plumbing code. 

B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. 

C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation 

of backflow prevention devices. 


Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. 


2.01 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING 

A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A 74 extra heavy weight. 

1. Fittings: Cast iron. 

2. Joint Seals: ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum. 

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 3034 SDR 35. 

1. Fittings: PVC. 

2. Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F 477 elastomeric gaskets. 

C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. 


2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D 2564 solvent cement. 

2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING 



2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene gaskets or 

lead and oakum 

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 306, DWV. 

1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper. 

2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder 

C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. 



2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE 



2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C 564 neoprene 

gaskets or lead and oakum. 




C. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A). 


2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn50 solder. 

D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665 or ASTM D 3034. 



PLUMBING PIPING 15145 - Page 1 of 6




2.04 WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING 

A. Refer to civil documents and specifications. 

2.05 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING 

A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B 42, hard drawn. 

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 


2.06 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE 

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88 (ASTM B 88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H). 

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze. 

2. Fittings: Cast iron, coated. 


4. Joints: Grooved mechanical couplings. 

2.07 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING 

A. Refer to civil documents and specifications. 

2.08 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING 




gaskets. 










E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, ASTM D 3034, or ASTM F 679. 


2. Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F 477 elastomeric gaskets. 

2.09 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE 




gaskets. 










2.10 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS 

A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under: 

1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions. 

2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints. 

B. Pipe Size Over 2 Inches: 

1. Ferrous pipe: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene 

gaskets. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig slip-on bronze flanges; 1/16 inch thick preformed 

neoprene gaskets. 





C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, 

water impervious isolation barrier. 

2.11 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS 

A. Pipe Size 3 Inches and Under: 

1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 

2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. 

B. Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 

1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed 

neoprene gaskets. 

2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 

C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, 


2.12 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 

A. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent: 

1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches:Malleable iron, adjustable swivel,split ring. 

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 

5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 

6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel 

clamp. 

7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 

8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete 

pier or steel support. 

9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 

B. Plumbing Piping - Water: 

1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 

3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger 

rods. 

5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels with 

welded supports or spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. 

6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook. 

7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel 

clamp. 

8. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 

9. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, 

and concrete pier or steel support. 

10. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, 

nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 

11. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 

2.13 GATE VALVES 


a.Milwaukee 

b.Nibco 

c.Red& White 

2. Up To and Including 3 Inches: MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, 

handwheel, inside screw, solid wedge disc, solder ends. 

2.14 GLOBE VALVES 

A. Up To and Including 2 Inches: 


a.Milwaukee 

b.Nibco 

c.Red& White 





2. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, bronze disc, solder ends. 

2.15 BALL VALVES 


a. Milwaukee 

b. Nibco 

c. Red& White 

2.16 SWING CHECK VALVES 

A. Up To and Including 2 Inches: 


a.Milwaukee 

b.Nibco 

c.Red& White 

2. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder 

ends. 

2.17 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES 


a. Milwaukee 

b. Nibco 

c. Red& White 

B. Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N seals, wafer style 

ends. 

2.18 RELIEF VALVES 

A. Pressure Relief: 

1. Manufacturers: Watts or equal. 

2. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs, automatic, direct 

pressure actuated. 

2.19 STRAINERS 

A. Size 2 inch and Under: 


a.Milwaukee 

b.Nibco 

c.Red& White 

2. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated 

screen. 

3. Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel 

perforated screen. 

2.20 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS 

A. General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant: 

1. Manufacturers: 3 M or Metacaulk 

2. Water based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, rated for 3 hours 

per ASTM E 814 and UL 1479. 

B. General Purpose Vibration Resistant Fire Stopping Sealant: 


2. Silicone based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and 

moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E 814 and UL 1479. 

C. DWV Plastic Pipe Systems Fire Stopping Sealant: 


2. Silicone based, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture 

resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E 814 and UL 1479 with metal collars. 



A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated. 


A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. 





B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. 

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 



B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. 

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. 

D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. 

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected 

equipment. Refer to Section 15122. 

G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation 

and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 15260. 

H. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure that piping is not less than 6" 

below the frost line 

I. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. 

J. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. 

Refer to Section 09900. 

K. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood. 

L. Install water piping to ASME B31.9. 

M. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855. 

N. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. 

O. Inserts: 

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 

P. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. 

2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 

3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent 

work. 

4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 

5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement 

without disengagement of supported pipe. 

3.04 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM 

A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with applicable codes. 

3.05 SERVICE CONNECTIONS 

A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations required 

for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly connected with slope 

for drainage and cover to avoid freezing. 

B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer and 

water meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve, and sand strainer. 

C. Provide new gas service complete with gas meter and regulators. Gas service distribution piping to 

have initial minimum pressure of 7 inch wg inch wg. Provide regulators on each line serving gravity 

type appliances, sized in accordance with equipment. 


A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: 

Metal Piping 

Pipe Size Pipe Support Pipe Size Rod Diam. 

Spacing 

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 

1/2" & 3/4 Not over 6'-0" up to 2" 3/8" 

1" & 1-1/4" Not over 9'-0" 2-1/2"&3" 1/2" 

1-1/2" thru 3" Not over 10'-0" 4" & 5" 5/8" 

4" and up Not over 12"-0" 6" & 8" 3/4" 





B. Plastic Piping: 

1. All Sizes: 

a. Maximum hanger spacing: 6 ft. 

b. Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch. 






SECTION 15146 

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 



A. Floor drains. 

B. Cleanouts. 

C. Hose bibs. 

D. Trench Drains 

E. Backflow preventers. 

F. Thermostatic Mixing Valves. 

G. Trap Primers. 


2.01 DRAINS 

A. Floor Drains 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the 

following. 

2. Basis-of-Design Product: J.R. Smith or comparable product by one of the following. 

a. Zurn 

3. ASME A112.21.1M; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep 

holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer. 

2.02 CLEANOUTS 

A. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas (GCO): 

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the 

following. 


a. Wade 

b. Zurn 

3. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover. 

B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas (FCO): 


following. 


a. Wade 

b. Zurn 

3. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top 

assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed 

cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. 

C. Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas SCO/WCO: Caulked or threaded type. Provide 

bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders. 

2.03 HOSE BIBBS, HYDRANTS, VALVES, AND WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS 

A. Interior Hose Bibbs: 


following. 

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Chicago Faucet or comparable product by one of the following. 

a. Watts 

b. Woodford 

PLUMBING SPECIALITIES 15146 - Page 1 of 3




3. Bronze or brass with integral mounting flange, replaceable hexagonal disc, hose thread spout, 

chrome plated where exposed with handwheel, integral vacuum breaker in conformance with 

ASSE 1011. 

B. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: 


following. 


a. Watts 

b. Febco 

3. ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts and stainless steel springs; two 

independently operating, spring loaded check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure 

relief valve located between check valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in 

case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, 

and four test cocks. 

2.04 TRENCH DRAIN 

A. Basis-Of-Design Product: Trench drain as manufactured by ACO Polymer Products Inc. 

Furnish and install a polymer channel drain with built in 0.66% slope and all fittings and 

accessories. Trench drain to be complete with perforated galvanized steel grate with ¼” 

holes – part # 9870-411 with locking devices , built in drain connections and catch basin at 

each connection to sanitary line – part # 9860-TS with galvanized steel sediment bucket and 

foul air trap end closure, shovel head part # 9853 for cleaning channel drain system. 

B. Approved Equal: 

1. J.R. Smith 

2. Zurn 

2.05 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES 

A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices: 

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of 

the following. 

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Powers or comparable product by one of the following. 

a. Acorn Safety. 

b. Leonard Valve Co. 

c. Watts. 

d. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control 

Products. 

3. Standard: 

a. ASSE 1070 – Distributions System. 

b. ASSE 1071 – Emergency Fixtures. 

4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 

5. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve. 

6. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 

7. Connections: Threaded or union inlets and outlet. 

8. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, 

temperature-control handle. 

9. Tempered-Water Setting: See Drawings. 

10. Valve Finish: Rough Bronze. 

2.06 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE 

A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one 

of the following.. 

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Mifab Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: 





a. Precision Plumbing Products. 

b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. 

c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. 

d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator 

Company. 

3. Standard: ASSE 1018. 

4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 

5. Body: Bronze. 

6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded, union, or solder joint. 

7. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) threaded or solder joint. 

8. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not 

chrome finished. 



A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 

B. Install in strict conformance with all applicable codes. 

C. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of 

domestic water may occur: janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation 

systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibs. 

D. Pipe relief from backflow preventers to nearest drain. 

E. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures (each 

washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or ¾” minimum, and 18 inches long. 






SECTION 15195 

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 


1.1 SUMMARY 


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 

2. Piping specialties. 

3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 

4. Valves. 

5. Pressure regulators. 


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Service Regulators: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated. 

B. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is 

more than 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) but not more than 2 psig (13.8 kPa), and is reduced to secondary 

pressure of 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or less. 


A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 

1. Piping specialties. 

2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components. 

3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of 

selected models. 

4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to 

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and 

Pressure Vessel Code. 

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

NATURAL-GAS PIPING 15195 - Page 1 of 10





A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping 

according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, 

storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and 

moisture. 

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging 

coating, and protect from direct sunlight. 

D. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight. 


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact 

utility-locating service for area where Project is located. 

B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities 

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after 

arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements 

indicated: 

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two (2) days in advance of proposed 

interruption of natural-gas service. 

2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Construction Manager's 

written permission. 

1.7 COORDINATION 

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. 

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind 

finished surfaces. 


2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS 

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 

2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket 

welding. 

3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, 

and threaded ends. 





4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of 

epoxy, adhesive, and PE. 

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves. 

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES 

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 

2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 

3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 

4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 

5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa). 

6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 

7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 

8. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm.) 

B. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire 

screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threadedend 

connection. 

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS 

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. 

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for 

wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complying 

with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are 

prohibited. 

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES 

A. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Comply with 

ASME B16.33. 

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa). 

2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 

3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 

4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas 

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" 

Articles. 

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for 

valves 1 inch (25 mm) and smaller. 

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) to NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have initials "WOG" 

permanently marked on valve body. 

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Comply with 

ASME B16.38. 





1. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa). 

2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 

3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas 

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" 

Articles. 

4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body. 

2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS 

A. General Requirements: 

1. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. 

2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 

3. Elevation compensator. 

4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for 

regulators NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. 

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Actaris or 

comparable product by one of the following: 

a. American Meter Company. 

b. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. 

c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. 

d. Maxitrol Company. 

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 

3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 

4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 

5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the 

valve port. 

6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 

7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 

8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum 

pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 

9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not 

exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 

10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 

11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not 

connected to vent piping. 

12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig (13.8 kPa). 

2.6 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING 

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for 

marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils 

(0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in 

a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up 

to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow. 







A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping 

connections before equipment installation. 

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 


A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section. 

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and on Local Authority Having Jurisdiction to 

determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected. 

C. Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition. 

3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NFPA 54 and on Local Authority Having Jurisdiction for installation and purging of 

natural-gas piping. 

B. Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 

2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating 

manufacturer. 

3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe. 

C. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 

3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION 

A. Comply with NFPA 54 and on Local Authority Having Jurisdiction for installation and purging of 

natural-gas piping. 

B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during 

progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right 

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated 

otherwise. 

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. 

E. Locate valves for easy access. 

F. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. 





G. Install piping free of sags and bends. 

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 

I. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. 

J. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for 

roughing-in requirements. 

K. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including 

service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install 

where condensate is subject to freezing. 

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. 

Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) 

long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove 

plug or cap. 

L. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure 

protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. 

M. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or 

floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. 

N. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas 

piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe 

with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to 

outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. 

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be 

installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit. 

2. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in 

cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 

1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other 

metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not 

embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate. 

3. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have 

cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation. 

4. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from 

physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports. 

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker 

barriers. 

5. Prohibited Locations: 

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash 

chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator 

shafts. 

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions. 

O. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side 

down. 

P. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. 





Q. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to 

each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections. 

R. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. 

S. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated 

valve. 

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements 

for sleeves specified in Section 15093 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping." 

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with 

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 15093 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC 

Piping." 

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with 

requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 15098 "Escutcheons for HVAC Piping." 

3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION 

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel 

tubing, aluminum, or copper connector. 

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes. 

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space 

adequate for servicing and testing. 

D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing. 

E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping. 

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION 

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. 

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before 

assembly. 

C. Threaded Joints: 

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 

2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 

3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 

4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal 

threading is specified. 

5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or 

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 





D. Welded Joints: 

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and 

welding operators. 

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 

3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds 

and where damage to coating occurs during construction. 

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" 

Chapter. 

F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas 

service. Install gasket concentrically positioned. 

G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare 

dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not 

overtighten. 

H. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or 

paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. 

3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION 

A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices 

specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 15062 "Hangers 

and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 

C. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod 

sizes: 

1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size, 

3/8 inch (10 mm). 

2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch 

(10 mm). 

3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 108 inches (2743 mm); 

minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm). 

4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod 

size, 1/2 inch (13 mm). 

5. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 5/8 inch 

(15.8 mm). 

D. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum 

spacing and minimum rod sizes: 

1. NPS 3/8 (DN 10): Maximum span, 48 inches (1220 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 

mm). 

2. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 72 inches (1830 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 

mm). 





3. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches (2440 mm); minimum rod size, 

3/8 inch (10 mm). 

3.8 CONNECTIONS 

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. 

B. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment 

grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. 

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. 

D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 

72 inches (1800 mm) of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve 

and appliances or equipment. 

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as 

practical to inlet of each appliance. 

3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING 

A. Comply with requirements in Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for 

piping and valve identification. 

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished 

grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 


A. Perform tests and inspections. 

B. Tests and Inspections: 

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to [NFPA 54] and authorities having 

jurisdiction. 

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 

D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.11 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE 

A. Aboveground natural-gas pipingshall be the following: 

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 

2. Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. 





3.12 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45 kPa) 

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be the following: 


B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following: 



3.13 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45 kPa) 

AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG (34.5 kPa) 

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be the following: 


B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following: 


2. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints. 

C. Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following: 



END OF SECTION 15195 





SECTION 15212 

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 



A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings. 

B. Air compressor. 


2.01 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40 black iron above ground, 

Schedule 80 iron black below grade wrapped with Scotchwrap #50 tape for corrosion 

protection. 

1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A 234/A 234M, forged steel welding type. 

2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. 

2.02 VALVES 

A. Gate Valves 


a. Nibco 

b. Apollo. 

2. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw, solid 

wedge disc, solder ends. 

B. Ball Valves 


a. Nibco 

b. Apollo. 



3. MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, 

regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with 

balancing stops, solder ends with union. 

C. Swing Check Valves 


a. Nibco 

b. Apollo. 



3. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder 

ends. 

D. Air Outlets 

1. See plans 

2. Quick Connector: 3/8 inch brass, snap on connector with self closing valve, Style A. 

2.03 UNIONS AND COUPLINGS 

A. Unions 

1. Ferrous Pipe: 150 psi malleable iron threaded unions. 

B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end, 


C. Flexible Connector: Neoprene with brass threaded connectors. 

2.04 COMPRESSOR 

A. Furnished by Bridgestone/Firestone – (see plans for additional information) installed by Contractor. 

COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 15212 - Page 1 of 2






A. Install equipment in accordance with drawings and the manufacturer's printed instructions and 

specifications. 


A. Compressed Air Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test compressed air piping in 

accordance with ASME B31.1. 

B. Repair or replace compressed air piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest to demonstrate 

compliance. 

C. Cap and seal ends of piping when not connected to mechanical equipment. 


COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM 15212 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 15410 

PLUMBING FIXTURES 



A. Water closets. 

B. Urinals. 

C. Lavatories. 

D. Sinks. 

E. Service sinks. 

F. Electric water coolers. 


Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,as 

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 


2.01 WATER CLOSETS, URINALS, and LAVATORIES 

A. Acceptable manufacturers: 

1. American Standard 

2. Kohler 

3. Crane 

B. Exposed Flush Valve: 


a. Sloan. 

b. Zurn 

c. Wade 

C. Seat: 

1. Manufacturer : 

a. Bemis. 

2. Equal. 

2. Plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, with cover, and with antimicroia 

agent. 

2.02 SINKS 

A. Sink: (Employee Restroom) 

1. Manufacturer: 

a. Elkay. 

2. Accessories: Chrome plated 17 gauge brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with 

escutcheon, wheel handle stop, rigid supplies. 

B. Mop Sink: 


a. Fiat. 

b. Zurn. 

c. American Standard. 

C. Service Sink – Floor Mounted: 


a. Fiat. 

b. Zurn. 

2.03 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS, ADAAG COMPLIANT 

A. Oasis 

B. Elkay 

PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - Page 1 of 2




C. Halsey Taylor 



A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with the requirements of the drawings, fixture 

manufacturer recommendations, industry standards, and applicable codes. 


A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. 

B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and 

escutcheons. 

C. Install components level and plumb. 

D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts. 

E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color to match 

fixture. 

F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in 

place. 


Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 


Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 


PLUMBING FIXTURES 15410 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 15486 

FUEL-FIRED WATER HEATERS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. Gas-fired, tankless, domestic-water heaters. 


A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated on drawings. Include 

rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties 

and accessories. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, 

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to comply 

with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 

C. ASME Compliance: 

1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domesticwater 

heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: 

Section VIII, Division 1. 

2. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, finned-tube, 

domestic-water heaters to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: 

Section IV. 

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with 

potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects." 

FUEL-FIRED WATER HEATERS 15486 - 1




1.5 WARRANTY 

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or 

replace components of fuel-fired, tankless domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or 

workmanship within specified warranty period. 

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 

a. Structural failures including supports. 

b. Faulty operation of controls. 

c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. 

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion. 

a. Gas-Fired, Tankless, Domestic-Water Heaters: 

1) Heat Exchanger: Ten (10) years. 

2) Controls and Other Components: Three (3) years. 


2.1 GAS-FIRED, TANKLESS, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

1. Rheem Manufacturing Company; Rheem Water Heating. 

2. Takagi. 

B. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3 for gas-fired, instantaneous, domestic-water heaters for 

indoor application. 

C. Construction: Copper piping or tubing complying with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable 

water, without storage capacity. 

1. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread. 

2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). 

3. Heat Exchanger: Copper tubing. 

4. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 

5. Jacket: Metal, with enameled finish, or plastic. 

6. Burner: For use with tankless, domestic-water heaters and natural-gas. 

7. Automatic Ignition: Manufacturer's proprietary system for automatic, gas ignition. 

8. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat. 

D. Support: Bracket for wall mounting. 

E. Capacity and Characteristics: 

1. Flow Rate: 4.3 gpm @ 77 deg temperature rise. 

2. Temperature Setting: 140 deg F. 

3. Fuel Gas Demand: See drawings. 





4. Fuel Gas Input: See drawings. 

5. Gas Pressure Regulator: 

a. See drawings. 

6. Electrical Characteristics: 

a. See drawings. 

7. Minimum Vent Diameter: See drawings. 

2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES 

A. Heat-Trap Fittings: ASHRAE 90.2. 

B. Manifold Kits: Domestic-water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping 

for field installation, for multiple domestic-water heater installation. Include ball-, butterfly-, or 

gate-type shutoff valves to isolate each domestic-water heater and calibrated balancing valves 

to provide balanced flow through each domestic-water heater. 

C. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1-M, manually operated. Furnish for installation in 

piping. 

D. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3, appliance type. See drawing. 

E. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21/CSA 6.5, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic 

valve. 

F. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as 

great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater workingpressure 

rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank. 

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. 

G. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater workingpressure 

rating. 

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. 

H. Vacuum Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. 

I. Domestic-Water Heater Stands: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand for floor 

mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water. Provide dimension that will 

support bottom of domestic-water heater a minimum of 18 inches (457 mm) above the floor. 

J. Domestic-Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel bracket for 

wall mounting, capable of supporting domestic-water heater and water. 






3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION 

A. Tankless, Domestic-Water Heater Mounting: Install tankless, domestic-water heaters per 

manufacturer’s installation instruction. 

3.2 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in 

Section 15076 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 


A. Perform tests and inspections per manufacturer recommendations. 






SECTION 15500 

DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTION 



A. The design and installation of a dry pipe hydraulically calculated automatic fire sprinkler system 

complete and ready for operation, for the unheated attic space or any area that may be subject to 

freezing. 

B. Installation of new sectional valves in the sprinkler/standpipe system feed mains as indicated on 

the drawings. 

D. Modification of the existing sprinkler systems as indicated on the drawings. Size system by pipe 

schedule in accordance with NFPA 13. 

E. Existing piping to be reused, replaced or removed as indicated on the drawings. Removal of 

piping to include all valves, flow switches, supervisory devices, hangers, supports, and 

associated fire alarm system conduit and wire. 

F. Expansion or revision of building fire alarm system(s) to incorporate newly installed sprinkler 

system alarm and supervisory devices. 

G. Provide access doors or panels where control or drain valves are located behind plaster or 

gypsum walls or ceilings as necessary to install piping above suspended plaster or gypsum 

ceilings. 

H. Exposed piping and supports to remain unpainted, unless indicated on drawings. 


A. Treatment of penetrations through rated enclosures: Section 07270, FIRESTOPPING 

B. Access panels for plaster ceilings: Section 08305, ACCESS DOORS 

C. Section 15050, BASIC METHODS AND REQUIREMENTS (MECHANICAL) 

D. Alarm Supervision: Section 13850, FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 

E. Section 01340, SAMPLE AND SHOP DRAWINGS 

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA 

A. The design, materials, equipment, installation, inspection, and testing of the automatic sprinkler 

system shall be in accordance with the required advisory provisions of NFPA 13, 14, 20, 25, 75, 

82, and 231C. Exception to NFPA Fire Codes are as follows: 

B. Base system design hydraulic calculations using the area/density method on the following criteria 

and in accordance with NFPA 13. 

1. Sprinkler Protection: 

a. Provide sprinklers in accessible shafts per NFPA 13. 

2. Add water allowance of 15 L/s (250 gpm) for inside and outside hose streams to the sprinkler 

requirements at the connection to the distribution main. 

DRY PIPE AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER FIRE PROTECTION 15500 - Page 1 of 10




3. Hydraulic Calculations: The calculated demand including hose stream requirements shall fall 

no less than 10 percent below the available supply curve. 

4. Water Supply: 

a. Elevation of static and elevation of residual test gage: 600 mm (2 ft.) above site grade 

b. Static pressure: _____ kPa (psi) 

c. Residual pressure: _____ kPa (psi) 

d. Flow: _____ L/s (gpm) 

e. Date:_____ Time:______ 

C. For each sprinkler zone provide a control valve, flow switch, self-contained test and drain 

assembly and pressure gage. 

D. Provide a guard for each sprinkler in the janitor’s closets, and sprinklers within 2100 mm (7 ft.) of 

the floor and other areas as required by NFPA 13. 

E. Seismic Protection: Seismically brace all new and existing piping systems in accordance with 

Zone _____ of NFPA 13. 

1.5 CONTRACTORS QUALIFICATIONS: 

A. Design and installation of this project shall be accomplished by a contractor who meets the 

following qualifications: 

1. Engages on a regular and full time basis in the design and installation of automatic sprinkler 

systems. 

2. Employ or contract on a regular basis for system design, a professional engineer or at least 

one person having passed the elements for a NICET Level III rating in automatic sprinkler 

design. 

3. Can provide on-site emergency service within four hours notification. 


A. Submit as one package in accordance with Section 01340 SAMPLES AND SHOP DRAWINGS. 

B. Sprinkler design professional’s Registration or Certification. 

C. Emergency service point of contact name and 24 hour emergency telephone number. 

D. Manufacturer’s Literature and Data: 

1. Pipe and fittings. 

2. Valves 

3. Drips 

4. Fire Department Siamese Connection 

5. Sprinklers-each type and model 

6. Air Compressors 

7. Inspectors Test Alarm Modules 

8. Sprinkler Cabinets 

9. Sprinkler Plugs 





10. Pressure Gages 

11. Pressure Switches 

12. Pipe Hangers and Supports 

13. Water Flow Switches 

14. Valve Tamper Switches 

15. Water Motor Alarm 

16. Double Detector Check Valve Assembly 

17. Water Measuring Device 

18. Jockey Pump 

19. Test Header 

20. Valve Cabinet 

E. Detailed drawings in accordance with NFPA 13. Drawings shall be prepared using CADD 

software stamped by the sprinkler design professional and include all new and existing sprinklers 

and piping. Drawings are subject to change during the bidding and construction periods. Any wall 

and ceiling changes occurring prior to the submittal of contractors shop drawings shall be 

incorporated into the contractors detailed design at no additional contract cost. 

F. Hydraulic calculations for each sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13. 

G. Operation and Maintenance Data 

1. Indicating Valves 

2. Water Flow and valve tamper switches 

3. Alarm Valves 

4. Pre-action Valves 

5. Air Compressor 

6. Excess Pressure Pump 

H. Recommended preventive maintenance schedule 

1.7 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION 

A. A mylar as-built drawing and two blueline copies shall be provided for each drawing. One copy of 

final CADD drawing files shall also be provided on 89 mm (3 1/2 in.), 1.44 mb diskette, for each 

drawing. 

B. Four sets of manufacturer’s literature and data updated to include submittal review comments 

and any equipment substitutions. 

C. Four sets of hydraulic calculations for each sprinkler system updated to include submittal review 

comments and any changes to the installation which affect the calculations. 

D. Four copies of the hydrostatic report and NFPA 13 material and test certificate for each sprinkler 

system. 

E. Four sets of operation and maintenance data updated to include submittal review comments and 

any equipment substitutions. 





F. Manufacturers literature, hydraulic calculations, reports and operation and maintenance data 

shall be in a labeled 3-ring binder. 

1.8 WARRANTY 

A. All work performed and materials and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from 

defects for a period of one year from date of acceptance by the government. 

B. All existing piping and equipment incorporated into the new system shall be hydrostatically tested 

and warranted as new. 

1.9 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS 

A. Publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The 

publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. 

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 

13-1996 ......................................Installation of Sprinkler Systems 

24-1995 ......................................Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their 

Appurtenances 

25-1995 ......................................Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of water Based Fire 

Protection Systems 

70-1996 ......................................National Electrical Code 

72-1996 ......................................National Fire Alarm Code 

170-1996 ....................................Standards for Fire Safety Symbols 

231-1995 ....................................General Storage 

231C-1995 .................................Rack Storage of Materials 

291-1995 ....................................Fire Flow Testing and Marking of Hydrants 

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 

1996 ...........................................Fire Protection Equipment Directory 

D. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation (FM) 

1996 ...........................................Approval Guide 

E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 

F442-96......................................Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe 

F. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASTM) 

1015-93 ......................................Double Check Backflow Prevention Assembly 

1.10 ............................................POST CONTRACT MAINTENANCE AND EMERGENCY 

SERVICE 

G. Complete maintenance and inspection service for the sprinkler systems shall be provided by a 

factory trained authorized representative of the manufacturer of the major equipment for a period 

of one year after acceptance of the entire installation. 





H. Contractor shall provide all necessary test equipment, parts and labor to perform required 

maintenance. 

I. All inspections, testing and maintenance work required by NFPA 25 and recommended by the 

equipment manufacturer shall be provided. Work shall include operation of sprinkler system 

alarm and supervisory devices. 

J. Maintenance and testing shall be performed on a quarterly basis. A computerized preventive 

maintenance schedule shall be provided and shall describe the protocol for preventive 

maintenance of equipment. The schedule shall include a systematic examination, adjustment, 

and cleaning of all equipment. 

K. Non-included Work: Maintenance service shall not include the performance of any work due to 

improper use, accidents or negligence for what the contractor is not responsible. 


2.1 GENERAL 

A. All devices and equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. listed for their intended 

purpose. All sprinklers shall be Factory Mutual approved. 

2.2 PIPING AND FITTINGS 

A. Pipe and fittings from inside face of building 300 mm (12 in.) above finished floor to a distance of 

approximately 1500 mm (5 ft.) outside building: Ductile Iron, flanged fittings and 316 stainless 

steel bolting. 

B. Fire Protection water supply within the building up to sprinkler system isolation valves shall be 

per NFPA 13, black steel, schedule 10 minimum. 

C. Sprinkler piping downstream of the isolation valve on wet-pipe systems shall be per NFPA 13. D. 

Sprinkler piping of a dry pipe system shall be galvanized. Schedule 40 minimum. 

D. Threaded or flanged fittings shall be ANSIB1 6.3 cast iron, class 125 minimum. Threaded fittings 

are not permitted on pipe with wall thickness less than schedule 40. 

E. All fittings on galvanized piping shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 

F. Slip type or clamp-on type rubber gasketed fittings shall be listed for each piping application. 

2.3 VALVES 

A. Listed Indicating Valves: 

1. Gate: OS&Y, 1200 kPa (175 lb.) WOG. 

2. Butterfly: Gear operated, indicating type, 1200 kPa (175 lb.) WOG 

3. Ball (inspectors test and drain only): iron body, stainless steel trim, for 2050 kPa (300 psi) 

service, indicating type. 

4. Ball and butterfly valves shall not be used on incoming water service, and on the suction side 

of either the fire pump or jockey pump. 

B. Check Valves: Swing type, rubber faced or wafer type spring loaded butterfly check valve, 

1200 kPa (175 lb.) WOG. 





C. Alarm Check: Iron body, bronze mounted, variable pressure type with retarding chamber. Provide 

basic trimmings for alarm test by pass, gages, drain connections, mounting supports for retarding 

chamber, and drip funnel. Provide pressure sensitive alarm switch to actuate the fire alarm 

system. 

D. Drain Valves: Threaded bronze angle, globe, ball or butterfly, 1000 kPa (150 lb.) WOG equipped 

with reducer and hose connection with cap or connected to a drain line. 

E. Self-contained Test and Drain Valve: 

1. Ductile iron body with bronze “Drain” and “Test” bonnets. Acrylic sight glass for viewing test 

flow. Various sized orifice inserts to simulate flow through 14 mm (17/32 in.), 13 mm (1/2 in.), 

12 mm (7/16 in.), and 10 mm (3/8 in.) diameter sprinklers, 32 mm (1 1/4 in.) female threaded 

outlets or 32 mm (1 1/4 in.) one-quarter turn locking lug outlets for plain end pipe (end 

preparation to be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation). 

2. Bronze body, with chrome plated bronze ball, brass stem, steel handle, teflon seat and sight 

glasses. Provide valve with three position indicator plate (off, test, and drain), 6 mm (1/4 in.) 

tapping for pressure gage and various other orifice inserts to simulate flow through 10 mm 

(3/8 in.), 12 mm (7/16 in.), 13 mm (1/2 in.), and 14 mm (17/32 in.) diameter sprinklers. 

F. Dry Pipe Valve: Flanged , iron body. Provide basic trimmings for alarm test bypass, water flow 

alarm, high and low pressure switches, gages, drain connections, drip funnel, accelerator and 

necessary pipe, fittings and accessories required to provide a complete installation. 

G. Double Check Backflow Prevention Assembly: Provide two independent check valves with OS&Y 

shut off valves, ball type test cocks. Maximum friction loss through assembly shall not exceed 

35 kPa (5 psi) at design flow. Unit shall be functional in vertical or horizontal position, rated for 

1200 kPa (175 psi) working pressure. 

2.4 AUTOMATIC BALL DRIPS 

Cast brass 20 mm (3/4 in.) in line automatic ball drip with both ends threaded with iron pipe 

threads. 

2.5 FIRE DEPARTMENT SIAMESE CONNECTION 

Brass, flush wall type, exterior fire department connection with brass escutcheon plate, without 

sill cock, and a minimum of two 65 mm (2 1/2 in.) connections threaded to match those on the 

local fire protection service, with polished brass caps and chains. Provide escutcheon with 

integral raised letters ”Automatic Sprinkler”. Provide connection with a swing check valve. Install 

an automatic ball drip between fire department connection and check valve to discharge over an 

indirect drain connection or to the outside. 





2.6 SPRINKLERS 

A. Quick response sprinklers shall be standard type except as noted below. The maximum distance 

from the deflector to finished ceiling shall be 50 mm (2 in.) for pendent sprinklers. Pendent 

sprinklers in finished areas shall be provided with semi-recessed adjustable screwed 

escutcheons and installed within the center one-third of their adjustment. The sprinkler shall be 

installed in the flush position with the element exposed below the ceiling line. 

B. Do not use quick response sprinklers in the same sprinkler zone with other sprinklers types. 

2.7 TOOLS AND REPLACEMENT PARTS 

A. Sprinkler Cabinet 

1. Provide a minimum 5 percent spare sprinklers with escutcheons with a minimum of two of 

each type. 

2. Provide a minimum of two of each type sprinkler wrenches used. 

B. Sprinkler system water flow switch: one of each size provided. 

C. Sprinkler system valve tamper switch: one of each type provided. 

D. Sprinkler system pressure switch: one of each type provided. 

E. Provide two sprinkler plugs attached to multi-section extension poles 2400 mm (8 ft.) minimum. 

2.8 AIR COMPRESSOR 

A. Provide air compressor specifically approved for a dry sprinkler system with UL Listed FM 

Approved dry valves. 

B. Compressor shall maintain the required operating pressure on the dry system and be capable of 

full recovery within 30 minutes of an emergency. 

C. Provide a 120 volt electrical connection to a non-switched dedicated electrical connection and 

equip with an hourly run meter. 

2.9 EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP 

Provide an excess pressure pump at the fire line entrance to the building, consisting of gear 

pump and motor, pressure switches, check valve, control box with indicating lights and key 

operated switch, all assembled and wired on a steel panel designed for mounting directly on the 

sprinkler riser. Maintain system pressure 70 kPa (10 psi) above peak surge pressure. 

2.10 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 

Provide for all new and existing sectional valves, riser control valves, system control valves, drain 

valves, test and drain connections and alarm devices with securely attached identification signs 

(enamel on metal) in accordance with NFPA 13. 

2.11 HANGERS AND BEAM ATTACHMENTS 

In accordance with NFPA 13 and 14. 





2.12 WATERFLOW SWITCHES 

A. Integral, mechanical, non-coded, non-accumulative retard type, with two sets of SPDT auxiliary 

contacts and adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds. Set flow switches at an initial setting between // 20 

and 30 seconds // 30 and 45 seconds //. 

B. All conduit and wiring connected thereto, shall be provided in Section 16721, FIRE ALARM- 

LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEM. 

2.13 VALVE SUPERVISORY SWITCHES 

A. Provide each indicating sprinkler, standpipe and fire pump control valve with adequate means for 

mounting a valve supervisory switch. 

B. Mount switch so as not to interfere with normal operation of the valve and adjust to operate within 

two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or when the stem is moved no 

more than one fifth of the distance from its normal position. 

C. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof die cast aluminum housing, which shall 

provide a 20 mm (3/4 in.) tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for 

attachment to the valves. 

D. Switch housing to be finished in red baked enamel. 

E. Supervisory switches for ball and butterfly valves may be integral with the valve. 

F. All conduit and wiring connected thereto shall be provided in Section 16721, FIRE ALARM- 

LOCAL BUILDING SYSTEM 

2.14 PRESSURE SWITCHES 

A. Provide with 15 mm (1/2 in.) NPT male pressure connection. 

B. Alarm switch shall be activated by any flow of water equal to or in excess of the discharge from 

one sprinkler. 

C. Supervisory switch shall be activated by either high or low air pressure condition. 

D. Furnish switch in a red baked enamel, weatherproof, oil resistant housing with tamper resistant 

screws. 

2.15 WATER MOTOR GONG 

Provide water powered mechanical device providing an audible signal when there is a flow of 

water in the automatic sprinkler system. 

2.16 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES 

A. Exposed piping passing through walls, floors or ceilings shall be provided with chrome colored 

escutcheon plates. 



A. Supervisory Switches: For each indicating sprinkler system risers sprinkler zone, main service 

entrance, PIV (post indicator valve), control valve, provide a supervisory switch that is connected 

to the fire alarm system. test and drain valves shall not be provided with supervisory switches. 





B. Waterflow Switches: For each sprinkler zone and where indicated on drawings, provide a 

waterflow switch. Install waterflow switch and adjacent valves in easily accessible locations. 

C. Sprinkler Zone: Each sprinkler zone shall coincide with each smoke zone and fire alarm zone. 

D. Piping connections: 

1. Sprinkler System Only: Start at flanged outlet within the building at exterior wall. 

E. Drains, Test Pipes and Accessories: 

1. Provide a drain at base of risers, drain connection on valved sections, and drains at other 

locations for complete drainage of the system. Provide valve in drain lines and connect to the 

central drain riser. Discharge riser outside over splash block, indirectly over standpipe drain 

connected to storm sewer, or as indicated. The main drain shall be capable of full discharge 

test without allowing water to flow onto the floor. 

2. Provide test pipes in accordance with NFPA 13. Test pipes shall be valved and piped to 

discharge through proper orifice as specified above for drains. 

F. Provide a 690 kPa (100 psi) pressure gage at each flow alarm switch location, at the top of each 

sprinkler or standpipe riser, at each main drain connection, and on the suction and discharge of 

the fire pump. 

G. Conceal all piping, except in pipe rooms without ceilings. 

H. Install new piping and sprinklers aligned with natural building and other sprinklers lines. 

I. Piping arrangement shall avoid contact with other piping and equipment and allow clear access 

to other equipment or devices requiring access or maintenance. 

J. Install CPVC piping only above gypsum board or acoustical ceiling panels classified for surface 

burning characteristics (See UL product category BIYR in the Building Materials Directory), or 

behind a Listed Sprinkler Cover Support System. In unfinished areas with flat ceiling construction 

and sprinkler deflectors installed within 200 mm (8 in.) of the ceiling, piping may be exposed 

when listed quick response sprinklers are used. 

K. Cutout disks, which are created by cutting holes in the walls of pipe for flow switches and nonthreaded 

pipe connections, shall be affixed near to the pipe where the originated. They shall be 

displayed until final inspection and then removed. 

L. For each new or existing fire department connection, locate the symbolic sign given in NFPA 170 

a distance of 2400 to 3000 mm (8 to 10 ft.) above each connection location. The sign shall be 

450 x 450 mm (18 x 18 in.) with symbol at least 350 x 350 mm (14 x 14 in.). 

M. Firestopping shall comply with Section 07270, FIRESTOPPING. All holes through stairways, 

smoke barrier walls, and fire walls shall be sealed on a daily basis. 

N. Provide hydraulic design information signage as required by NFPA 13 and 14. 

O. Install access doors in ceilings of rooms where above ceiling access is required. 





3.2 TEST 

A. Automatic Sprinkler System: NFPA 13 and 25. 






SECTION 15542 

GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes gas-fired tubular infrared radiant heaters with straight or “U” tube 

configurations. 


A. Product Data: For each type of gas-fired radiant heater indicated. Include rated capacities, 

operating characteristics, and accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required 

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field 

connection. 

C. Wiring Diagrams: Power control wiring. 

D. Field quality-control test reports. 

E. Operation and maintenance data. 



Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for 

intended use. 

1.04 WARRANTY 

A. Heaters shall be design certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) to American 

National Standard Z83.20/CSA2.34. The manufacturer shall provide a written limited warranty 

covering the heavy one-piece cast iron burner for a period of ten (10) years, the emitter tube for 

a period of five (5) years, and all components utilized in the heater's control assembly for a period 

of one (1) year. 


2.01 U-TUBE RADIANT HEATERS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated 

on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Gas-Fired Products Inc.; Space-Ray Div. 

2. Roberts-Gordon, Inc. 

3. Solaronics, Inc. 

4. Detroit Radiant Products; Re-Verber-Ray. 

GAS-FIRED RADIANT HEATERS 15542 - Page 1 of 4




B. The heaters shall utilize factory assembled, highly-efficient aluminum reflectors with a reflectivity 

of 97.5% and designed for U-tube heaters. The tube body and u-bend shall be totally enclosed 

with a single reflector to maximize emitter temperature and radiant heat exchange between the 

firing and exhaust legs. In addition, the reflector ends shall be enclosed for maximum radiant 

heat output and minimum convection losses. The single reflector design shall cover the firing and 

exhaust legs as well as the entire u-bend. U-tube configuration made of straight tubes with 

individual reflectors covering the firing and exhaust legs shall not be accepted. 

C. The heater's emitter tube shall operate at an average surface temperature of 750ºF-900ºF and 

shall be made of 16-gauge calorized aluminized steel or calorized titanium alloy Alumi-Therm 

steel for long life (3" O.D. for LTU40-75 and 4" O.D. for LTU80-250). The emitter tube shall be 

calorized for longevity, corrosion resistance, and high radiant efficiency. The measured surface 

emissivity shall be 0.83-0.86 at operating temperature. The calorization process shall produce an 

emitter tube that is highly radiant absorptive on the interior (0.95) and highly radiant emissive 

(0.83-0.86) on the exterior. The system shall have a radiant efficiency (or radiant coefficient) of 

65%. 

D. To assure a high degree of safety and increased radiant efficiency, the heaters shall operate 

under negative pressure at all times during operation to preclude the escape of combustion gases 

inside the building. The heater exhaust assembly shall include a 120-volt draft inducer. The draft 

inducer shall be equipped with a permanently lubricated, totally enclosed and shielded, fan 

cooled, and heavy-duty ball bearing motor. The motor shall not require maintenance or 

lubrication for the life of the unit. The draft inducer assembly shall be capable of rotating 90 º for 

vertical or horizontal venting. 

E. Heaters shall be equipped with a 24-volt direct spark ignition with automatic 100% shutoff system. 

Power supplied to each heater shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. The heater controls shall include a 

pressure switch designed to provide complete unit shutoff in the event of combustion air or flue 

blockage. The heaters shall be equipped with an on-line diagnosis monitoring light system. The 

three lights shall monitor the power to the heater, insufficient airflow, and the spark ignition and 

the combination gas valve operation. 

F. The heater's burner shall consist of a heavy-duty cast iron atmospheric burner. The flame 

characteristics shall be highly luminous for maximum radiant heat transfer through the emitter 

tube wall. 

G. Heaters shall operate satisfactorily in any position from horizontal to forty-five degrees (45º) from 

horizontal, and shall be suitable for vented/indirect vented applications. Heaters shall be 

designed to operate on natural or propane gas. 

2.02 STRAIGHT TUBE HEATERS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated 

on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Gas-Fired Products Inc.; Space-Ray Div. 

2. Roberts-Gordon, Inc. 

3. Solaronics, Inc. 

4. Detroit Radiant Products; Re-Verber-Ray. 

B. The heaters shall utilize factory assembled, highly efficient aluminum reflectors with a reflectivity 

of 97.5%. The reflector ends shall be enclosed for maximum radiant heat output and minimum 

convection losses. Heaters shall be equipped with a 24-volt direct spark ignition with automatic 

100% shutoff system. Power supplied to each heater shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. The heater controls 

shall include a pressure switch designed to provide complete unit shutoff in the event of 

combustion air or flue blockage. The heaters shall be equipped with an on-line diagnosis monitoring 

light system. The three lights shall monitor the power to the heater, insufficient airflow and the 

spark ignition and combination gas valve operation. 





C. The heater's burner shall consist of a heavy-duty cast iron atmospheric burner. The flame characteristics 

shall be highly luminous for maximum radiant heat transfer through the emitter tube wall. 

D. The heater's emitter tube shall operate at an average surface temperature of 700ºF - 800ºF and 

shall be made of 16-gauge calorized aluminized steel or calorized titanium alloy Alumi-Therm 

steel for long life (4" O.D.). The emitter tube shall be calorized for longevity, corrosion resistance, 

and high radiant efficiency. The measured surface emissivity shall be 0.83 - 0.86 at operating 

temperature. The calorization process shall produce an emitter tube that is highly radiant absorptive 

(0.95) on the interior and highly radiant emissive (0.83-0.86) on the exterior. The system shall 

have a radiant efficiency (or radiant coefficient) of 58%. 

E. To assure a high degree of safety and increased radiant efficiency, the heaters shall operate under 

negative pressure at all times during operation to preclude the escape of combustion gases 

inside the building. The heater exhaust assembly shall include a 120-volt draft inducer. The draft 

inducer shall be equipped with a permanently lubricated, totally enclosed and shielded, fan 

cooled, and heavy-duty ball bearing motor. The motor shall not require maintenance or lubrication 

for the life of the unit. The draft inducer assembly shall be capable of rotating 90º for vertical or 

horizontal venting. 

F. The heaters will be CSA design certified for vertical or horizontal venting, maximum 75 feet horizontal 

sidewall venting, and for 50 feet outside combustion air inlet duct. There shall be no draft 

hoods. The combustion chamber shall be totally enclosed. 

G. The heaters shall be factory assembled and tested. The heaters shall not require any field adjustments 

to assure maximum performance and safety. Heaters shall operate satisfactorily in any 

position from horizontal to forty-five degrees (45º) from horizontal, and incline mounted up to 2/12 

pitch, and shall be suitable for vented/indirect vented applications. Heaters shall be designed to 

operate on natural or propane gas. 

2.03 CONTROLS 

A. Thermostat: Devices and wiring are specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and 

Controls." 



A. Install and connect gas-fired radiant heaters and associated fuel and vent features and systems 

according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written 

installation instructions. 

B. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using manufacturer’s suspension kits. 

C. Maintain manufacturers' recommended clearances to combustibles. 

D. Install piping adjacent to gas-fired radiant heaters to allow service and maintenance. 

E. Gas Piping: Comply with Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping." Connect gas piping to gas train 

inlet; provide union with enough clearance for burner removal and service. 

F. Vent Connections: Comply with Division 15 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." 

G. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections. 

1. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory mounted. 



H. Adjust initial temperature set points. 



I. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency. 


A. Tests and Inspections: Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and 

malfunctioning controls and equipment. 






SECTION 15545 

UNIT HEATERS 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. This Section includes gas-fired unit heaters. 


A. Product Data: For each type of fuel-fired unit heater indicated. Included rated capacities, 

operating characteristics and accessories. 

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicated dimensions, weights, loads, required 


connection. 

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring. 

C. Field quality-control test reports. 

D. Operation and maintenance data. 



Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for 

intended use. 

B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, 

Section 6 – “Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning”. 

1.04 WARRANTY 


replace heat exchanger of fuel-fired unit heater that fails in materials or workmanship within 

specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 


2.01 GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS 

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering 

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the 

following: 

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, as indicated on Drawings, 

or a comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Sterling HVAC Products; Div. of Mestek Technology Inc. 

2. Lennox Industries, Inc. 

3. Modine Manufacturing Company. 

4. Reznor/Thomas & Betts Corporation. 

D. Description: Factory assembled, piped and wired and complying with ANSI Z83.8/CSA 2.6. 

E. Fuel Type: Design burner for natural gas having characteristics same as those of gas available 

at Project site. 

UNIT HEATERS 15545 - Page 1 of 3




F. Type of Venting: Separated combustion, vented. 

G. Housing: Steel, with integral draft hood and inserts for suspension mounting rods. 

H. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel. 

I. Burner Material: Aluminized steel with stainless-steel inserts. 

J. Unit Fan: Propeller blades riveted to heavy-gauge steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub, 

dynamically balanced and resiliently mounted. 

K. Controls: Regulated redundant gas valve containing pilot solenoid valve, electric gas valve, 

pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff and manual shutoff all in one body. 

1. Gas Control Valve: Single stage. 

2. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark with flame sensor. 

3. Fan Thermal Switch: Operates fan on heat-exchanger temperature. 

4. Control transformer. 

5. High Limit: Thermal switch or fuse to stop burner. 

6. Thermostats: Devices and wiring are specified in Division 15. 

7. Thermostat: Single-stage, wall-mounting type with 50 to 90 deg. F (10 to 32 deg. C) 

operating range and fan on switch. 

L. Discharge Louvers: Independently adjustable horizontal blades. 

M. Accessories: 

1. Vertical discharge louvers. 

2. Discharge Nozzle: Discharge at 50 to 90 degrees from horizontal. 

3. Two point suspension kit. 

4. Summer fan switch. 

5. Unit-mounted thermostat bracket. 

6. Power Venter: Centrifugal aluminized-steel fan, with stainless-steel shaft; 120-V AC 

motor. 

7. Concentric, Terminal Vent Assembly: Combined combustion-air inlet and power-vent 

outlet with wall or roof caps. Include adapter assembly for connection to inlet and outlet 

pipes and flashing for wall or roof penetration. 

N. Capacities and Characteristics: See Drawings. 



A. Install and connect gas-fired unit heaters and associated fuel and vent features and systems 

according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's written 

installation instructions. 

B. Install and connect oil-fired unit heaters and associated fuel and vent piping according to NFPA 

31, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer’s written installation instructions. 

C. Suspended Units: Suspend from substrate using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building 

attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and plumb. 





D. Install piping adjacent to fuel-fired unit heater to allow service and maintenance. 

E. Gas Piping: Comply with Division 15. Connect gas piping to gas train inlet; provide union with 

enough clearance for burner removal and service. 

F. Vent Connections: Comply with Division 15. 

G. Electrical Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections. 

1. Install electrical devices furnished with heaters but not specified to be factory mounted. 

H. Adjust initial temperature set points. 

I. Adjust burner and other unit components for optimum heating performance and efficiency. 


A. Test and Inspections: Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and 

malfunctioning controls and equipment. 






SECTION 15738 

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 


1.01 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate 

evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. 



B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicated dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, 

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 

C. Operation and maintenance data. 

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by 

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 

B. ASHRAE Compliance: 

1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, “Safety Standard for 

Refrigeration Systems”. 

2. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 4 – “Outdoor Air Quality”, Section 5 

– “Systems and Equipment”, Section 6 – “Procedures”, and Section 7 – “Construction and 

System Start-up”. 

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004. 

1.04 WARRANTY 


replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship 

within specified warranty period. 

1. Warranty Period: 

a. For Compressor: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 

b. For Parts: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 

c. For Labor: One year from date of Substantial Completion. 



A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as indicated on 

Drawings, or a comparable product by one of the following: 

1. Carrier Corporation; Home Comfort and HVAC Building & Industrial Systems. 

2. Lennox Industries, Inc. 

3. Trane; a business of American Standard companies. 

4. York; a Johnson Controls company. 

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS 15738 - Page 1 of 5




2.02 INDOOR UNITS 

A. Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components: 

1. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and 

insulation on back of panel. 

2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner. 

3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermalexpansion 

valve. Comply with ARI 210/240. 

4. Gas Heat Exchanger: Multi-pass crimped seam clamshell, aluminized steel, variable 

capacity gas control valve, manual reset switch, auto ignitor, variable speed combustion 

air inducer, two stage pressure switch and direct vented. 

5. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to 

motor. 

6. Fan Motors: 

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type 

and efficiency requirements specified on drawings. 

b. Multitrapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. 

c. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection. 

8. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in 

ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 

9. Filters: Permanent, cleanable. 

10. Condensate Drain Pans: 

a. Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from 

cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers and return bends) and 

humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection. 

1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face (to comply with 

ASHRAE 62.1-2004). 

2) Depth: A minimum of 2” deep. 

b. Single-wall, galvanized steel sheet. 

c. Double-wall, galvanized steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam 

insulation and moisture-tight seal. 

d. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. 

Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of panel. 

e. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound. 

B. Evaporator-Fan Components: 

1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by 

Architect. 

a. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner. 

b. Drain Pans: Galvanized steel, with connection for drain; insulated. 

2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermalexpansion 

valve. Comply with ARI 210/240. 

3. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory 

ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors, 

manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box 

for overcurrent protection. 





4. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal. 

5. Fan Motors: 

a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type 

and efficiency requirements specified in Division 15 Section “Common Motor 

Requirements for HVAC Equipment”. 

b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. 

6. Air Filtration Section: 

2.03 OUTDOOR UNITS 

a. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section: 

1) Comply with NFPA 90A. 

2) Minimum Arrestance: According to ASHRAE 52.1 and MERV according to 

ASHRAE 52.2. 

3) Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors 

on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from 

access plenum. 

b. Disposable Panel Filters: 

1) Factor-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type. 

2) Thickness: 2”. 

3) Initial Resistance: .1 Wg. 

4) Recommended Final Resistance: .25 Wg. 

5) Merv according to ASHRAE 52.2: 5. 

6) Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive and 

antimicrobial agent. 

7) Frame: Galvanized steel, with metal grid on outlet side, steel rod grid on inlet 

side, and hinged; with pull and retaining handles. 

A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components: 

1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable 

panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in 

base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. 

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration 

isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload 

devices, start capacitor, relay, and contractor. 

a. Compressor Type: Scroll. 

b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-resent high-pressure switch and 

automatic-reset low-pressure switch. 

c. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A. 

d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid 

subcooler. Comply with ARI 210/240. 

3. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat. 

4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. 

5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. 

6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 40 deg F. 

7. Mounting Base: Polyethylene. 






A. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan. 

B. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator 

fan, with the following features: 

1. Compressor time delay. 

2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start. 

3. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting, 

operating mode, and fan speed. 

4. Fan-speed selection including auto setting. 

C. Automatic-resent timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor. 

D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, 

dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both 

ends. 

E. Drain Hose: For condensate. 

F. Additional Monitoring: 

1. Monitor constant and variable motor loads. 

2. Monitor variable-frequency-drive operation. 

3. Monitor economizer cycle. 

4. Monitor cooling load. 

5. Monitor air distribution static pressure and ventilation air volumes. 

2.05 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS 

A. See Schedule. 



B. Install units level and plumb. 

C. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer’s standard mounting devices securely 

fastened to building structure. 

E. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4” thick, reinforced concrete 

base that is 4” larger, on each side, than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are 

specified in Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”. Coordinate anchor installation with 

concrete base. 

F. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base. 

G. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on equipment supports specified in 

Division 7 Section “Roof Accessories”. Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmiumplated 

fasteners. 

H. Install seismic restraints. 

I. Install and connect precharged refrigerant tubing to component’s quick-connect fittings. 

Install tubing to allow access to unit. 






A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate 

general arrangement of piping, fittings and specialties. 

B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit. 

C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section “Metal 

Ducts”. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to 

split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are 

specified in Division 15 Section “Duct Accessories”. 


A. Perform tests and inspections. 

1. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect 

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in 

testing. 

B. Testing and Inspections: 

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest unit 

until no leaks exist. 

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper 

motor rotation and unit operation. 

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and 

equipment. 

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 

D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 

3.04 DEMOLITION 

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to 

adjust, operate and maintain units. 






SECTION 15810 

DUCTS 



A. Metal ductwork. 

B. Flexible Duct 


No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. 


A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. 

B. Regulatory requirements: UL compliance; affix UL Listing Mark, with Class code, to each UL listed 

unit. 

C. Code compliance: Units listed as complying with SBCC. 



A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A 653/A 653M galvanized steel sheet, Forming Steel (FS) 

designation, with G60/Z180 zinc coating. 

B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A 366/A 366M. 

C. Aluminum Ducts: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); aluminum sheet, alloy 3003-H14. Aluminum 

Connectors and Bar Stock: Alloy 6061- T6 or of equivalent strength. 

D. Flexible Ducts: 


a. Zip R Flex 

b. Tuttle & Bailey 

c. Metalflex 

d. MasterFit 

2.02 DUCTWORK FABRICATION 

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal 

and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating 

pressures indicated. 




B. Install and seal metal and flexible ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction 

Standards - Metal and Flexible. 


DUCTS 15810 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 15820 

DUCT ACCESSORIES 



A. Air turning devices/extractors. 

B. Backdraft dampers. 

C. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 

D. Duct access doors. 

E. Duct test holes. 

F. Fire dampers. 

G. Flexible duct connections. 

H. Volume control dampers. 


2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS 

A. Manufacturers: Titus or equal. 

B. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually 

adjustable blades, mounting straps. 

C. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel construction, 

with push-pull operator strap. 

2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS 

A. Manufacturers: Price or equal. 

B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving Equipment: 

Air moving equipment manufacturer's standard construction. 

C. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: galvanized steel, with center 

pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in 

rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment 

device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 

2.03 DUCT ACCESS DOORS 


B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 

and as indicated. 

C. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick fastening 

locking devices. For insulated ducts, install minimum 1 inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover. 

1. Less Than 12 inches Square: Secure with sash locks. 

2. Up to 18 inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks. 

3. Up to 24 x 48 inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside 

handles. 

4. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. 

5. Sash Lock: 

6. Compression Latch 

7. Hinge: 

D. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 

2.04 DUCT TEST HOLES 

A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, 

threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps. 

2.05 FIRE DAMPERS 


B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. 

C. Ceiling Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame and 16 gage flap, two layers 0.125 inch 

ceramic fiber on top side and one layer on bottom side for round flaps, with locking clip. 

D. Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and 

DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - Page 1 of 2




lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket. 

E. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure 

springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for 

1.0 inch pressure class ducts up to 12 inches in height. 

F. Multiple Blade Dampers: 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil-impregnated bronze or 

stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed 

linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock. 

G. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for combination 

fire/balancing dampers. 

2.06 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS 




C. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 

1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, 

minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. 

a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide. 

2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel. 

D. Leaded Vinyl Sheet: Minimum 0.55 inch thick, 0.87 lbs per sq ft, 10 dB attenuation in 10 to 10,000 

Hz range. 

2.07 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS. 




C. Splitter Dampers: 

1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier for 

sizes over 24 inches. 

2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous 

hinge or rod. 

3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged 

bushing with set screw; 

D. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. 

E. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. 

Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with 

suitable hardware 

F. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple 

blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings; 

G. Quadrants: 

1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 

2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or 

adapters. 

3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. 



A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA 

HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15810 for duct 

construction and pressure class. 


DUCT ACCESSORIES 15820 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 15838 

POWER VENTILATORS 





1.2 SUMMARY 


1. In-line centrifugal fans. 

2. Propeller fans. 


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations. 

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. 


A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required 


connection. 

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 


2.1 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Loren Cook Co. 


1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 

2. PennBarry. 

B. Housing: Split, spun aluminum with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet flanges, and 

support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting. 

C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on 

outside of fan housing. 

POWER VENTILATORS 15838 - Page 1 of 3




D. Belt-Driven Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure 

around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside of 

fan housing. 

E. Fan Wheels: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub. 

F. Accessories: See Construction Documents. 

G. Capacities and Characteristics: See Construction Documents. 

2.2 PROPELLER FANS 

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Loren Cook Co. or 


1. Greenheck Fan Corp. 

2. PennBarry. 

B. Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with primed finish 

coat applied after assembly for field painting and to match wall. 

C. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, extruded-aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; 

factory set pitch angle of blades. 

D. Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of 

fan housing. 

E. Fan Drive: 

1. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. 

F. Accessories: See Construction Documents. 

G. Capacities and Characteristics: See Construction Documents. 



A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. 

B. Support units per manufacturer’s installation instructions. Unit shall be level and plumb and on 

factory provided vibration isolators. 

C. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods per manufacturer’s 

instructions. 

D. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance per manufacturer’s instructions. 

E. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 15077 "Identification for HVAC Piping 

and Equipment." 






A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct 

connections with flexible connectors. 

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. 


A. Tests and Inspections: 

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to 

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload 

protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan 

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and 

adjust belts, and install belt guards. 

5. Adjust belt tension. 

6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 

7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 

8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in 

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 

9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to 

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 

10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 

11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. 

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and 

equipment. 

3.4 ADJUSTING 

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 

B. Adjust belt tension. 

C. Lubricate bearings. 






SECTION 15840 

OPERABLE EXTERIOR WALL LOUVERS 


1.1 SUMMARY 

A. Section includes operable, extruded-aluminum louvers. 


A. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and 

attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 

1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for motorized operable louvers. 


2.1 OPERABLE, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS 

A. Louver Construction and Operation: Provide operable louvers with extruded-aluminum frames 

and blades not less than 0.080-inch (2.03-mm) nominal thickness, and with operating 

mechanisms to suit louver sizes. 

1. Motor operation with two-position, spring-return application (with power on, motor opens 

louver; with power off, spring closes louver); 110-V, 60-Hz motor and limit switch; 

equipped with frame-mounted switch. 

B. Dual-Blade, Operable Louver: Fixed drainable blades and operable plain blades combined in 

single frame. 

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ruskin 

Company or comparable product by one of the following: 

a. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 

2. Louver Depth: 6 inches (150 mm) overall. 

3. Louver Performance: 

a. See Drawing. 

4. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal. 

2.2 LOUVER SCREENS 

A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver. 

1. Screen Location: Interior face unless otherwise indicated. 

2. Screening Type: Bird screening. 

OPERABLE EXTERIOR WALL LOUVERS 15840 - 1




B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with factory supplied fasteners. See installation 

instructions for spacing. 

C. Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens 

are attached. 

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: 

1. Bird Screening: Per Manufacturer’s Specifications. 

2.3 MATERIALS 

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. 

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for 

forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. 

C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 

2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES 

A. Factory applied primer coat for field painting. 



A. Locate and place louvers as shown on plans, level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with 

adjacent work. 

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws 

where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. 

C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as 

indicated. 

D. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, 

masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of 

bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing. 

3.2 ADJUSTING 

A. Test operable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that comply with 

requirements. 





B. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of 

corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove 

damaged units and replace with new units. 






SECTION 15855 

HVAC AIR DEVICES 


1.01 SUMMARY 


1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 

2. Perforated diffusers. 

3. Louver face diffusers. 

4. Fixed face registers and grilles. 


1. Division 10 Section “Louver and Vents” for fixed and adjustable louver and wall vents, 

whether or not they are connected to ducts. 

2. Division 15 Section “Duct Accessories” for fire and smoke dampers and volumecontrol 

dampers not integral to diffusers, registers and grilles. 


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish and mounting details and 

performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop and noise ratings. 

2. Diffuser, Register and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, 

quantity, model number, size and accessories furnished. 

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 


2.01 CEILING DIFFUSERS 

A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers: 

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements. 

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by 

one of the following: 

a. Titus 

b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek Company 

c. Carnes 

d. Krueger 

e. Tuttle & Bailey 

3. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 

4. Material: Steel 

5. Finish: Baked enamel 

6. Face size: Per drawings 

7. Mounting: Per drawings 

8. Pattern: Four way throw 

2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, 

“Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets.” 

HVAC AIR DEVICES 15855 - Page 1 of 2






A. Install diffusers, registers and grilles level and plumb. 

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings 

and accessories. Air outlet and inlet location have been indicated to achieve design 

requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw and pressure drop. Make 

final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling 

panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items 

conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. 

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service 

and maintenance of dampers, air extractors and fire dampers. 


A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers and grilles to air patterns indicated or as directed, 

before starting air balancing. 


HVAC AIR DEVICES 15855 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 16010 

ELECTRICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 


1.01 SPECIAL NOTICE 

A. The general conditions of the contract and applicable requirements of the general condition 

govern this Division. 

B. Read all relevant documents, become familiar with the job, the scope of work, type of general 

construction, architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical drawings and the 

specifications. Become familiarized with the purpose for which these documents have been 

prepared and shall become cognizant of all the details involved. Coordinate work with that of 

others to the end that unnecessary delays be avoided. 

1.02 TERMS 

A. The term "Contractor" used in this division of the contract documents shall mean the 

contractor whose work is covered by this section. 

B. The term "Architect" used in this division of the contract documents shall mean the Architect of 

Record. 

C. The term "Engineer" used in this division of the contract documents shall mean the consulting 

electrical engineer. 

D. The term "furnish" used in this division of the contract documents shall mean to supply the 

work described. 

E. The term "install" used in this division of the contract documents means to fix in position the 

work described. 

F. The term "provide" used in this division of the contract documents means to furnish the 

material described for use by others. 


A. The work under this section to the specifications shall include all labor and materials noted, 

required or necessary for the complete electrical installation described herein and/or shown on 

the drawings. All work shall be completed to the entire satisfaction of the Architect and 

Engineer. 

B. This work includes, but is not limited to the following: 

1. Electric and signal services hereinafter specified and/or shown on the drawings including 

fees, permits, and provisions for metering equipment as required. 

2. Complete systems of distribution and utilization for light and power. 

3. Empty conduit systems for telephones an other miscellaneous 

communications systems. 

4. Lighting fixtures and lamps. 

5. Rough-in and the connections to mechanical equipment. 

6. Rough-in and the connections of equipment furnished by others. 

7. Complete signal systems as shown on the plans and/or hereinafter 

specified. 

1.04 CODES, STANDARDS AND PERMITS 

A. Obtain all permits, inspections and approvals as required by regulatory authorities. Pay all 

fees and costs of any nature whatsoever incidental to these permits, inspections and 

approvals. Pay any pro-rata costs for utilities serving this property. 

B. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, specifications, 

ordinances and utility company regulations. 

C. In case of difference between applicable codes, specifications, utility company regulations and 

the Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Promptly notify the Architect in 

ELECTRICAL SPECIAL CONDITIONS 16010 - Page 1 of 7




writing of any such difference. Should any work be performed that does not comply with the 

requirements of the applicable codes and utility company regulations, the contractor shall bear 

all costs arising in correcting these deficiencies. 

D. In addition to local, county, and state ordinances and the utility company regulations, the 

following industry standards and codes shall apply as applicable except where the 

requirements of this specification are more stringent than the following standards, they shall 

take precedence 

1. ASTM - American Society of Testing Material 

2. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineer 

3. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society 

4. NEC - National Electric Code 

5. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 

6. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association 

7. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories 

1.05 SPECIAL CONSIDERATION 

A. The manufacturer's published directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage, protection, 

installation, piping, and wiring of all equipment and material. Promptly notify the Architect in 

writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the 

manufacturers' directions and shall obtain the Architect's instructions before proceeding with 

the work. Should any work be performed that does not comply with the manufacturers' 

directions or such instructions from the Architect, the contractor shall bear all costs arising in 

connection with the deficiencies. 

B. Comply with all local customs as to which particular trade shall install any part or parts of any 

work or equipment specified under the heading of electrical work and plan and execute work 

so as not to interfere with other contractors in the building. 

1.06 GUARANTEE 

A. Furnish the name, address and telephone number of those persons responsible for service on 

systems and equipment covered by the "Guarantee". 

B. All work shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from date of final completion. 

C. Upon notice of any electrical malfunction, remedy the malfunction including all materials, 

equip-ment, and labor at no cost to the Owner. 

D. In addition to the guarantee herein specified, each piece of electrical equipment shall be 

provided with the standard manufacturer's warranties for the number of years as specifically 

noted. 

1.07 RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR 

A. Each contractor shall be responsible for all work of every description in connection with his 

contract. He shall specifically and distinctly assume, and does so assume, all risk for damage 

or injury from whatever cause to property or person used or employed on or in connection with 

his work and of all damage or injury to any persons or property wherever located, resulting 

from any action of operation under the contract or in connection with the work, and undertake 

the promise to defend the Owner against all claims on account of any such damage or injury. 

B. Each contractor will be held responsible for the execution of a satisfactory and complete piece 

of work, in accordance with the true intent of the drawings and specifications and all bulletins 

and addenda which may be issued during the time of bidding. He shall provide, without extra 

charge, all incidental items required as a part of his work, even though not particularly 

specified or indicated, and if he has good reason for objecting to the use of any materials, 

appliance or method of construction shown or specified, he shall make report of such 

objections to the Engineer and obtain proper adjustment before the Contract is made, and 

shall proceed with the work, only with the understanding that a satisfactory job is required. 

C. Each contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all national, state, local and county 

codes, standards, ordinances and regulations. 





1.08 SUBMITTAL DATA 

A. Within thirty (30) days after award of the Contract, make a submittal of all proposed equipment 

to be used on the job. 

B. Submit through regular channels submittal data as specified in the Architectural Section of the 

specifications. Upon receipt of this data, the Engineer will check, stamp and sign it, retain one 

copy, and return the remainder for distribution. 

C. Before submission of the submittal data, check each piece of apparatus, equipment and 

accessory to insure compliance with the requirements of the plans and specifications, and 

clearly mark each submittal with his signature to indicate that they are in full compliance. Any 

submittals received without the contractor's signature may be returned without being checked 

by the Engineer's office. 

D. Point out all deviations between the plans and specifications and materials submitted. 

E. Each submittal shall be bound in an individual folder properly indexed and marked to indicate 

job, contractor, Architect, and Engineer. Data submitted shall show proposed equipment only 

and shall not be catalogues showing a manufacturer's complete line. Sufficient data shall be 

included to prove compliance with the specifications as far as use, capacity, efficiencies, 

physical size, quality of materials, and all other pertinent specified particulars. Data shall 

include manufacturer's name for each item of equipment being submitted. 

1.09 SHOP DRAWINGS 

A. Submit shop drawings whenever equipment proposed varies in physical size and arrangement 

from that shown on the drawings thus causing rearrangement of equipment space where tight 

spaces require extreme coordination between ductwork, piping and other equipment where 

called for elsewhere in these specifications, and where specifically requested by the Engineer. 

Shop drawings shall be made at no additional charge to the Owner or Engineer. 

B. All required shop drawings as hereinafter specified, shall be prepared at a scale of not less 

than 1/4 inch equals one foot by the Contractor. He shall submit prints as hereinbefore 

described under "Submittal Data." 

C. Composite shop drawings shall be prepared as specified. Aid in the coordination of this work 

so that all systems will fit within spaces allotted. Shop drawings shall be prepared to show 

physical arrangement and dimensions of all switchboards, distribution panelboards, 

transformers and similar major equipment and routing of all service and main distribution 

feeders. Shop drawings for switchboards, distribution panelboard and other motor control 

centers shall include a one-line diagram indicating bussing arrangement. Shop drawings shall 

indicate manufacturer's name for each item of equipment being submitted. 

1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS 

A. Before submission of the submittal data, check each piece of apparatus, equipment and 





B. In addition to the above, accumulate during the job progress the following data in duplicate 

prepared in a neat brochure or packet folder. 

1. All warranties and guarantees and manufacturer's directions on equipment and material 

covered by the Contractor. 

2. Copies of reviewed shop drawings. 

3. Repair parts list of all major items and equipment including name, address and telephone 

number of local supplier or agent. 

4. Diagrams hereinbefore specified. 

1.11 SUPERVISION 

A. Before submission of the submittal data, check each piece of apparatus, equipment and 









1.12 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 

A. The interrelation of the specifications, drawings and schedules shall be as hereinbefore 

described in the Architectural Sections of the specifications. 

B. When the drawings do not give exact details as to the elevations of pipe, conduit and ducts, 

the contractors shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the 

elevations intended with the proper grades for the functioning of the systems involved. Piping, 

exposed conduit and the duct system are generally intended to be installed true and square to 

the building construction and located as high as possible against the structure in a neat and 

workmanlike manner. Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. 

C. Different electrical outlets, devices, etc. are indicated by symbols scheduled on the drawings. 

Approximate locations are shown; however, the Architect or Engineer reserves the right to 

make reasonable changes in locations without additional cost. 

D. Lines indicating branch circuits do not show exact routing but indicate the arrangement and 

control of circuits. Conceal raceways (unless noted otherwise) and run in most direct manner 

between cabinets, outlets, etc. 

1.13 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES 

A. Before submitting proposals for his work, each bidder shall be held to have examined the 

premises and satisfied himself as to the existing conditions under which he will be obliged to 

operate, or that will in any manner affect the work under this Contract. No allowance shall be 

made subsequently in this connection in behalf of the Contractor for any error or negligence 

on his part 

1.14 COST BREAKDOWN 

A. At the request of the Architect or Engineer furnish, on an approved form, a breakdown of the 

cost of labor and materials for stipulated items. The total of these breakdowns shall equal the 

contract amount. This data must be received by the Architect and/or Engineer prior to the 

approval of the first estimate for payment on the contract and shall be used to evaluate 

monthly cost estimates. 

1.15 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS 

A. The manufacturer's published directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage, protection, 

installation, piping and wiring of all equipment and material. Promptly notify the Engineer in 

writing of any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the 

manufacturer's directions, and obtain the Engineer's instructions before proceeding with the 

work. Should any work be performed before receiving such instructions from the Engineer, 

the contractor shall bear all costs arising in connection with the deficiencies. 


2.01 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS 

A. Materials furnished shall be new of best quality and grade of standard manufacturer, shall 

conform to the National Board of Fire Underwriters' requirements, and shall bear the 

Underwriters' Laboratories seal of approval. 

B. Indication on drawings and/or naming in specifications of model numbers of a particular 

manufacturer shall not be construed as excluding from consideration similar and equivalent 

items produced by other manufacturers, subject to following provisions 

1. Where a manufacturer's name appears in the specifications, it is not to be construed as 

to mean that equipment by the named manufacturer does not have to fully meet the 

requirements detailed in the specifications. All similar equipment provided for the project 

by any one contractor shall be of the same manufacturer whether furnished under the 

original contract or under a change order, unless specifically specified to the contrary 





2. Each item of equipment shall fit plan and space allowed and surrounding conditions and 

fulfill completely the function for which it is intended as well as item named on drawings 

or in specifications. 

3. Full and complete catalog illustrations, specifications, and descriptive data defining in 

detail each item shall be submitted to Architect for approval before order in placed for 

such items. 

2.02 SCAFFOLDING 

A. Furnish all scaffolding as required for the installation of his work. Either arrange for servicing 

in connection with any rigging and hoisting required or provide equipment to hoist apparatus to 

be installed into place. Any equipment too large to permit passage through doorways and 

access ways is brought to the job and set in place before the spaces are enclosed. 

2.03 ACCESS DOORS 

A. Furnish and turn over to the General Contractor for installation access doors as required to 

operate and service all equipment and valves furnished and installed by him. Access doors 

shall be of the sizes indicated on the drawings or required for proper access to equipment with 

mounting straps, concealed hinges, screwdriver locks and so designed that they will open 

180°. The doors shall be constructed from 16 gauge steel with door and frame finished in 

prime coat finish. 

B. Approved Manufacturers: Josam, Milcor, Zurn, and Wade. 

2.04 SERIES RATING 

A. The entire electrical distribution system shall be series rated for 65KA symmetrical incoming 

fault current unless otherwise noted on the plans. 


3.01 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. Notify the General Contrator sufficiently ahead of the construction of any floors, walls, ceiling, 

roofs, etc., of the openings that will be required for his work. He shall also see that any and all 

sleeves that are required for his work are set at proper times so as not to hold up the progress 

of the job. Any cutting and patching required to be done because of lack of proper 

coordination shall be done by the General Contractor at the expense of the contractors 

involved. Do not request the General Contractor to cut any structural members without first 

having received written permission from the Architect. Cutting of round openings which can 

be done by the use of a rotary drill may be done by the contractor requiring same. 

3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 

A. Before beginning any excavations of any nature whatsoever, make an attempt to locate all 

underground utilities of every nature occurring within the bounds of the area to be excavated. 

Then proceed with caution in his excavation work so that no utility shall be damaged with a 

resultant loss of service. 

B. Should damage result to any utility through the Contractor's negligence, carelessness, or 

failure to comply with the above directive, he will be liable for any such damage and for all 

expense incurred in the expeditious repair or replacement of such damaged utilities. Repair of 

damaged utilities shall be to a condition equal to or better than the adjacent undamaged 

portion of such utility and to the complete satisfaction of the Architect. 

C. All necessary excavation and backfill for the installation of the electrical work shall be 

accomplished by each contractor under his phase of the work. All such work shall be included 

regardless of the type of materials encountered in the excavation. Refer to and comply with all 

special requirements in the treatment of open ditches, backfill and backfill material as 

hereinbefore specified in the Architectural sections of the specifications. 

D. Trenches for all underground piping shall be excavated to the required depths. Should rock 

be encountered, it shall be excavated to a depth of 6 inches below the bottom of the conduit 

before laying and the space between the bottom of the conduit shall be filled with gravel and 





thoroughly tamped. Trenches shall be backfilled with clean dirt as stated hereinafter. 

E. Backfill shall be installed in layers 12 inches deep, adequately tamped and wetted down or 

flushed before the second layer of earth is laid in place. This process shall be continued until 

the trenches are filled. No roots, rocks or foreign material of any description shall be used in 

backfilling trenches. Any additional materials required for backfilling shall be furnished by this 

contractor and any excess materials and debris shall be removed from the site by this 

contractor. Any special backfill materials shall be provided as hereinafter specified as shown 

on the drawings. 

F. All excavating and backfilling shall be done in a manner so as not to disturb adjacent 

structures and any shoring required shall be furnished. 

3.03 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS AND BASES 

A. All concrete equipment foundations, bases, and roof curbs as required for the installation of 

electrical work hereinafter specified will be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. 

The contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of his equipment with these 

bases. He shall furnish all anchor bolts and other accessories required for casting in these 

concrete bases and shall also furnish proper template and dimension for casting bases and 

setting of all sleeves or anchor bolts. After equipment is set on concrete bases, the equipment 

shall be fully grouted to the base filling all void spaces with a non-shrinking grout. All concrete 

work shall be done in accordance with applicable portions of the specifications. 

3.04 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT 

A. The contractor shall be responsible to see that equipment proposed by him will fit the spaces 

available. In certain instances he will note that the equipment is mentioned by name in the 

equipment schedules. In these cases, it is the equipment whose dimensions and connection 

arrangements have been used for the preparation of the layouts shown on the working 

drawings. Should the use of equipment by other approved manufacturers or of other physical 

shape than those shown on the drawings be proposed, it shall be the responsibility of the 

Contractor making the proposal to submit for approval shop drawings showing the 

arrangement of the proposed equipment in the space available. Approval of substitution 

offered without these shop drawings does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of 

arranging the equipment in a satisfactory workable installation in the space shown on the 

drawings. 

3.05 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES 

A. Check with the General Contractor and other contractors, either under his control or those 

responsible solely to the Owner for any work being performed under this specification to 

determine whether there will be any interference with the electrical work. If this Contractor 

fails to check with the other contractors and this work is later found to interfere with their work, 

then he shall make necessary changes without additional cost or delay to the Owner to 

eliminate such interferences. 

B. Where lighting fixtures are shown to conflict with locations of structural members, mechanical 

or other equipment, provide adequate support and wiring to clear same. 

3.06 FINAL OBSERVATIONS 

A. The purpose of the final observation is to determine whether the contractor has completed the 

work in a proper and workman-like manner, that he has apparently installed the work in 

accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, and that in the Architect and 

Engineer's opinion the work is satisfactory for the Owner to accept. 

B. It shall be the duty of each contractor to personally make a special inspection trip assuring 

himself that the work on the subject is ready before calling upon the Architect and Engineer to 

make a final site observation. 

C. Each contractor shall have all necessary bonds, guarantees, receipts, affidavits, etc. called for 

in the various articles of this specification, prepared and signed in advance, and together with 

a letter or transmittal, listing each paper included, shall deliver the same to the Architect at or 

before the time of said final inspection. The contractor is cautioned to check over each bond, 





receipt, etc. before preparing same for submission to see that the terms check with the 

requirements of the specifications. 

3.07 CLEANING 

A. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, switches, panelboards and other devices and equipment 

furnished and set in place. All surfaces shall be properly polished and shall be free of paint 

and other dirt and debris. 

B. Touch up or refinish all equipment furnished with factory applied finishes which have been 

damaged during the construction of the work. Properly protect the fronts of all panelboards, 

switchboards and other similar equipment to prevent marring and other defacing. 

3.08 TESTING AND LOAD BALANCING 

A. Test all circuits to assure them to be free of grounds. Light and test each lamp. Prove and 

test energy available at the load side of disconnect switches and final point of connection to 

driven equipment. The contractor shall make all reasonable tests as required by the Engineer 

to prove the integrity of the system. 

B. The various branch circuits served from the lighting panel boards vary in loading. The 

contractor shall carefully balance the load on each phase when connecting the various branch 

circuits in each panelboard. When all load is turned on and the system is operating at 100% 

demand, the imbalance shall not exceed 10%. 

C. Furnish at the completion of the project or each bonafide portion of the project, a final 

inspection certificate from the local inspecting authority. 

3.09 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION 

A. When each and every piece of electrical and mechanical equipment is ready to operate, if it is 

to the advantage of the Owner or the project construction to operate this equipment, the 

Mechanical and Electrical Contractors under this section of the work shall allow their 

equipment to be operated without obligating the Owner for acceptance. 

B. The Owner or General Contractor shall furnish the necessary operating personnel to supervise 

the overall operation of the machinery, but it shall remain the Contractor's responsibility until 

final acceptance by the Engineer for the Owner. 






SECTION 16050 

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 

PART 1 

GENERAL 


A. Excavation and Backfill. 

B. Cutting and Patching 

C. Concrete Equipment Foundation and Bases 

D. Miscellaneous Metals 

E. Miscellaneous Wood Grounds, Nailers, Blocking, etc. 

F. Joint Sealers 

G. Access Panels 


A. Section 16010 – Electrical Special Conditions. 

B. Section 16131 – Conduit 


A. See Section 16010 for submittal procedure. 

B. Product data for the following products: 

1. Access panels and doors. 

2. Joint sealers. 

C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood supports 

and anchorage for electrical materials and equipment. 

D. Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations in accordance with Division 16 

Section "Basic Electrical Requirements." 

E. Samples of joint sealer, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors 

available for each product. 

F. Welder certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders comply with requirements 

specified under "Quality Assurance" article of this Section. 

G. Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations for selective demolition 

prior to commencement of Work. Include coordination for shut-off of electrical service, and 

details for dust and noise control. 

1. Coordinate sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy specified in 

Division 1 Section "Summary of Work." 


A. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 70. 

B. All products shall be listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for 

the purpose specified and shown. 

C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application 

joint sealers, access panels, and doors. 

D. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural 

Welding Code - Steel." 

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding 

processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS 16050 - Page 1 of 9




E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide access 

door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL 

"Building Materials Directory" for rating shown. 

1. Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door. 


A. Deliver joint sealer materials in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing 

about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, 

curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. 

B. Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with the manufacturers' 

recommendations to prevent their deterioration and damage. 


A. Conditions Affecting Excavations: The following project conditions apply: 

1. Maintain and protect existing building services which transit the area affected by 

selective demolition. 

2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage 

caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards 

created by excavation operations. 

3. Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during the design of the 

Project. Reports of these investigations are available for information only; data in the 

reports are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of 

conditions. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn 

from this information. 

4. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in excavation areas. If utilities 

are indicated to remain, support and protect services during excavation operations. 

5. Remove existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. 

a. Uncharted or Incorrectly Charted Utilities: Contact utility owner immediately 

for instructions. 

b. Temporary light and power system shall be furnished, installed an 

maintained for use by all trades during construction, use 150 amp minimum. 

6. Use of explosives is not permitted. 

B. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions 

within the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do no apply joint sealers to wet 

substrates. 


2.01 SOIL MATERIALS AND DEFINITIONS 

A. Subbase: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil layer used in pavement 

systems between the subgrade and the pavement base course material. 

B. Subgrade: as used in this Section refers to the compacted soil immediately below the slab or 

pavement system. 

C. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed 

stone, crushed slag, or natural or crushed sand. 





D. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed 

gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve, and not more than 5 percent passing a 

No. 4 sieve. 

E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification groups 

GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP; free of clay, rock, or gravel larger than 2 inches in any 

dimension; debris; waste; frozen materials; and vegetable and other deleterious matter. 

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS METALS 

A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36. 

B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. 

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. 

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded. 

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, 

nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications. 

F. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required. 

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER 

A. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 

Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 

boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with 

AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent. 

B. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue; thickness 

as indicated, or if not indicated, not less that 15/32 inches. 

2.04 JOINT SEALERS 

A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and 

with joint substrates under conditions of service and application. 

B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 

C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types: 

1. One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, 

Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and 

other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 

2. One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, 

Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and 

nonporous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior 

joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of 

high humidity and temperature extremes. 

3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be 

incorporated in the Work are stated below: 

a. One-Part, Nonacid-Curing, Silicone Sealant: 

1. "Dow Corning 790," Dow Corning Corp. 

2. "Silglaze N SCS 2501," General Electric Co. 

3. "Silpruf SCS 2000," General Electric Co. 

b. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant, Silicone Sealant: 

1. "Dow Corning 786," Dow Corning Corp. 

2. "SCS 1702 Sanitary," General Electric Co. 





D. Fire-Resistant Joint Sealers: Two-part, foamed-in-place, silicone sealant formulated for use in 

through-penetration fire-stopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations 

through fire- rated walls and floors. Sealants and accessories shall have fire- resistance 

ratings indicated, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 

814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to 

authorities having jurisdiction. 

2.05 ACCESS DOORS 

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be 

incorporated in the Work are stated below: 

a. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam," Dow Corning Corp. 

b. "Pensil 851," General Electric Co. 

A. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with 

attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be 

continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. 

B. Frames: 16-gage steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in unit 

masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling. 

1. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 

inch-wide-exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors. 

2. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead. 

3. For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed 

casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame. 

C. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed 

continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint. 

1. Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and 

self-closing mechanism. 

D.. Locking Devices: Where indicated, provide 5-pin or 5-disc type cylinder locks, individually 

keyed; provide 2 keys. 

E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products 

which may be incorporated in the Work are stated below: 

2.06 SLEEVES 

1. Bar-Co., Inc. 

2. J.L. Industries. 

3. Karp Associates, Inc. 

4. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc. 

5. Nystrom, Inc. 

A. All sleeves passing through walls, floors on or below grade, or in moist areas shall be 

constructed of galvanized steel, schedule 40 pipe and shall be designed with suitable flange 

in the center to form a water proof passage. After the conduit has been installed in the 

sleeves, the void space around the conduit shall be caulked or waterproofed. 







A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with 

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and 

application of joint sealers and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until 

unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 

3.02 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS 

A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint 

sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer. 

B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer. Protect 

adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape 

immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 


A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as 

required for stability of excavation. 

B. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with 

local codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time 

period excavations will be open. 

1. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed to 

remain, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished grade 

elevation. 

C. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and 

ordinances. 

D. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into 

excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 

1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent 

softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system 

components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 

2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside 

excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use 

trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 

E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for 

backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 

1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within 

drip-line of trees indicated to remain. 

2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not 

acceptable for use as backfill or fill. 

F. Excavation for Underground Vaults and Electrical Structures: Conform to elevations and 

dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to 

permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, 

and for inspection. 

1. Excavate, by hand, areas within drip-line of large trees. Protect the root system from 

damage and dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and cover exposed 

roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1 inch in diameter and larger with emulsified 





asphalt tree paint. 

2. Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just 

before concrete reinforcement is placed. 

G. Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installations as follows: 

1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working 

room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches clearance on both sides of raceways and 

equipment. 

2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. 

3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which installations can be made and the 

trench backfilled within the same day. 

4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill 

with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of raceways and 

equipment. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock 

bearing surface and electrical installations. 

H. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric 

temperature is less than 35 deg F (1 deg 2 C). 

I. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for each 

area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section. 

1. Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated 

or borrowed materials. 

2. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials. 

3. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock 

bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. 

4. For raceways less than 30 inches below surface of roadways, provide 4-inch-thick 

concrete base slab support. After installation of raceways, provide a 4-inch thick 

concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway 

subbase. 

5. Other areas, use excavated or borrowed materials. 

J. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 

1. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been 

recorded. 

2. Removal of concrete formwork. 

3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids. 

4. Removal of trash and debris. 

K. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 

inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 

inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. 

L. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture 

content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry 

density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on 

surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 

M. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to 

required elevations. Prevent displacement of raceways and equipment by carrying material 

uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift. 

N. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum percentage of 

density specified for each area classification indicated below. 

O. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following 

percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture-density 

relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than 





the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, 

for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless 

soils). 

1. Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12 

inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum 

density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless 

material. 

2. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill 

or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent 

relative density for cohesionless material. 

3. Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill 

material to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 percent relative 

density for cohesionless soils. 

P. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned 

before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to 

achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or 

subsequent to, compaction operations. 

Q. Repair all paving, etc., damaged in the execution of electrical work to the satisfaction of all 

parties concerned. 

R. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at electrical installation excavations during the period 

12 months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or 

other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface 

treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent 

areas. 

S. Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, if 

unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation until suitable bearing 

materials are reached. 

T. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade 

elevations or dimensions without specific direction from the Architect. 

3.04 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE 

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and 

elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. 

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code." 

3.05 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE 

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, 

alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. 

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to 

view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install 

fasteners without splitting wood members. 

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 

3.06 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS 

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to 

products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. 

1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint sealants. 

2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic- emulsion joint 

sealants. 





B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool 

sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and 

adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to 

joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not 

approved by sealant manufacturer. 

C. Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other 

accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to 

provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which 

penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and 

inspecting agency. 

3.07 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS 

A. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb 

and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. 

B. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. 

3.08 INSTALLATION OF SLEEVES 

A. Install pipe sleeves at all locations where pipe passes through walls, floors or ceilings above 

or below grade. 

B. Where subject to moisture or weather, seal sleeves with watertight sealant. 

3.09 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS AND BASES 

A. All concrete equipment foundations, bases, and roof curbs as required for the installation of 

electrical work hereinafter specified will be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. 

The contractor shall be responsible for the proper coordination of his equipment with these 

bases. He shall furnish all anchor bolts and other accessories required for casting in these 

concrete bases and shall also furnish proper template and dimension for casting bases and 

setting of all sleeves or anchor bolts. After equipment is set on concrete bases, the 

equipment shall be fully grouted to the base filling all void spaces with a non-shrinking grout. 

All concrete work shall be done in accordance with applicable portions of the specifications. 

3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING 

A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 Section "CUTTING 

AND PATCHING." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, the following 

requirements apply: 

1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required 

to: 

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 

b. Remove and replace defective Work. 

c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract 

Documents. 

d. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 

e. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 

f. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to 

provide for Architect observation of concealed Work. 

2. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components, and 

materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of electrical items 





indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the new Work. 

3. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or 

scheduled to be removed. 

4. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the 

spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 

5. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect 

adjacent installations. 

6. Patch existing finished surfaces and building components using new materials 

matching existing materials and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer 

to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being 

patched. 

7. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for 

the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to 

the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being 

patched. 






SECTION 16060 

GROUNDING AND BONDING 



A. Grounding and bonding systems and requirements. 


Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms or less. 


2.01 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES 

A. Provide electrical grounding conductors that are sized according to the NEC. 

B. Provide grounding and bonding products which are UL-Listed and labeled for their intended use. 



A. Install electrical grounding and bonding systems as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s 

instructions and applicable portions of NEC, NECA’s “Standard of Installation”, and in accordance 

with recognized industry practices to ensure compliance with requirements. 

B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding 

and bonding system with other work. 

C. Comply with applicable electrical code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and 

NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to systems, circuits and 

equipment. 


A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS except Section 4. 

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.13. 


GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 16070 

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 



A. Conduit and equipment supports. 

B. Anchors and fasteners. 


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose 

specified and indicated. 



A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and 

type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. 

B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized. 

C. Anchors and Fasteners: 

1. Do not use powder-actuated anchors, spring clips, or beam clamps. 

2. Obtain permission from Architect before using powder-actuated anchors. 

3. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, powder-actuated 

anchors, or preset inserts. 

4. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, steel ramset fasteners, or 

welded fasteners. 

5. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors or expansion anchors. 

6. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall 

fasteners. 

7. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts. 

8. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 

9. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. 

D. Formed Steel Channel: 

1. Product: Unistrut 



A. Locate and install anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of 

Installation". 

1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 

2. Do not drill or cut structural members. 

3. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members. 

4. Do not screw into roof decking. Do not support hangers from roof deck. 


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 16070 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 16123 

BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 



A. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less. 

B. Wiring connectors and connections. 



B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this 

section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 

miles of Project. 

C. Products: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for 

the purpose specified and indicated. 


2.01 WIRING REQUIREMENTS 

A. All conductors shall be of copper 98% conductivity, 600 volt, conforming to the latest Local 

Electrical Code and bearing the Underwriters' Label of Approval. 

B. Except as hereinafter specified, wire smaller than #12 shall not be used. No. 12 or No. 10 branch 

circuit wire shall be Type "THHN" and all neutral wires for branch circuits shall have white 

covering. Wire for panel feeders and all wires No. 8 and larger shall be stranded Type "THHN". All 

wiring for exterior use and wet locations will be with THWN insulation. 

C. All wire will be color coded as follows: 

1. For 208/120V 

A-Phase - Black 

B-Phase - Red 

C-Phase - Blue 

Neutral - White 

2. Green shall be used only for grounding wire to meet local or national electric code 

requirements. 

3. Colors as selected for the purpose of identifying circuits shall be applied to the insulation. 

The colors must be fast, fadeless and capable or withstanding cleaning in the event that the 

insulation becomes soiled. 

D. Conductors shall be of sizes indicated. Conductors shall not be pulled through conduits until 

plastering is completed and conduits are free from moisture. Soapstone or other lubricants shall 

NOT be used. Connections shall be made to outlets, fixtures, apparatus, etc., without straining. 

E. Conductors shall be continuous between outlets without splices, except in outlet or junction boxes. 

Type of connection must be approved by the Local Code, and will be of the type required if other 

than as specified above. 

F. JOINTS AND SPLICES 

A. Make terminations, taps and splices with an indent type pressure connector with insulating 

cover 8 AWG and smaller. 

B. Instead of indent type connectors, insulated spring compression connectors may be used for 

10 AWG and smaller. 

C. Use mechanical compression for 6 AWG or larger. Cover connector with insulating tape or 

heat shrinkable insulation equivalent to 150% conductor insulation. 


BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - Page 1 of 2





A. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. 

1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. 

2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact 

routing and lengths required. 

3. Include wire and cable of lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location 

shown. 

B. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation." 


A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA STD ATS, except Section 4. 

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.1. 


BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 16131 

CONDUIT 



A. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies. 



B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified 

and shown. 


2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS 

A. All conduit shall be EMT, except for exterior or hazardous area. All conduits routed in exterior or 

hazardous area, shall be heavy wall (rigid) galvanized steel type with threaded type fittings. All 

conduit shall be as manufactured by International Tube Company or equal. 

B. All conduit fitting shall conform to all applicable codes. 

C. PVC Schedule 40 shall only be permitted below grade of building exterior footprint; conduit shall 

transition to GRS where exposed. 



A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. 

B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in. 

C. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as 

required to complete wiring system. 


A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 

B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

C. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. 

D. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. 

E. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to 

make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate 

bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. 

F. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. 

G. All conduit to be supported either from joist or ceiling, as directed by the drawings. 

3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS 

A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. 

B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and duct work wherever possible. 


CONDUIT 16131 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 16138 

BOXES 



A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. 

B. Floor boxes. 

C. Pull and junction boxes. 



B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for 



2.01 OUTLET BOXES 

A. Provide and install outlet boxes, junction boxes and pull boxes as required or as indicated. 

B. In general, boxes shall be galvanized, pressed steel, have depth and shape best suited to the 

intended use, and contain knockouts of quantity and size equal to the conduit runs to be 

connected thereto. All boxes shall be securely fastened in place and shall provide sufficient 

support to the purpose of its intended use. 

C. Exterior outlet boxes shall be weather-resistant (rain tight), having appropriate covers fitted with 

gaskets and fastened with screws. Boxes shall be Crouse-Hinds series CPS or Series V., as 

applicable. 

D. Pull boxes shall be as hereinbefore specified for junction boxes in conduit runs. Wires or splices in 

boxes shall not exceed the quantity allowed by the National or Local Electrical Code for junction, 

outlet and pull boxes. Where large pull boxes are used, barriers will be installed to separate the 

feeders. 



A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." 

B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment 

connections, and as required by NFPA 70. 

C. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements 

D. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. 

E. Support boxes independently of conduit. 

F. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. 


A. Adjust floor boxes flush with finish flooring material. 

B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. 

C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 

3.04 CLEANING 

Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. 


BOXES 16138 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 16139 

CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 



A. Hinged cover enclosures. 

B. Cabinets. 

C. Terminal blocks. 

D. Accessories. 


Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets. 






2.01 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES 

A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 steel enclosure. 

B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by screwdriver. 

C. Provide interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish with 

white enamel. 

D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel. 

2.02 CABINETS 

A. Boxes: Galvanized steel. 

B. Backboard: Provide 3/4 inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint matte 

white. 

C. Fronts: Steel, flush type with concealed trim clamps, door with concealed hinge, and flush lock 

keyed to match branch circuit panelboard. Finish with gray baked enamel. 

D. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. 

E. Furnish two of each key. 



A. Install in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 

3.02 CLEANING 

A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. 

B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. 


CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 16139 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 16140 

WIRING DEVICES 



A. Wall switches. 

B. Wall dimmers. 

C. Receptacles. 

D. Device plates and box covers. 



B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for 



2.01 WALL SWITCHES 

A. Wiring devices shall be of specification grade and the manufactured products of Hubbell, Pass 

and Seymour, Leviton, Eagle or Slater. Each receptacle shall be constructed to include a 

grounding pole from which a wired connection to ground shall be provided. 

B. Switches shall be as follows: 

1. Single pole- Hubbell 1221-I 

2. Two pole - Hubbell 1222-I 

3. Three way - Hubbell 1223-I 

C. Toggle switches shall be rated 20 ampere, 120-277 volts, except where otherwise shown on the 

drawings. 

D. Duplex receptacles 

1. Standard - Hubbell 5362-I 

2. Isolated Ground - Hubbell IG2162 (Orange) 

3. Ground Fault Interrupter - Hubbell GF5362I 

Leviton, Seymour, Slater, or Eagle will be considered as approved equals. 

E. Exterior weatherproof outlets 

1. Grade level (not installed on rooftops for service rooftop mechanical equipment) 

weatherproof outlets will be ground fault interrupter outlets mounted in weatherproof box 

and cover as manufactured by Pass & Seymour #4600 weatherproof heavy cast 

Aluminum Cover with #4600-26 enclosure with mounting plate tor GFCI outlet. All 

enclosures shall be keyed alike. 

2. Rooftop level weatherproof outlets will be ground fault interrupter outlets mounted in a 

weatherproof box and cover. 

F. Provide plates for all outlets, with opening configuration suitable for devices to be covered. 

Plates shall be in place with screws finished to match the plates. Plates will be brushed stainless 

steel. 

G. All plates used for motor starting switches shall be with engraving denoting its function. 

H. Covers for "FS" or "FD" boxes shall be corrosion resistant. 



A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." 

B. Install devices plumb and level. 

WIRING DEVICES 16140 - Page 1 of 2



Version: March 2011a 

C. Install switches with OFF position down. 

D. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as 

instructed by manufacturer. 

E. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. 

F. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. 

G. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. 

H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. 

I. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. 

J. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. 

K. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above 

accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. 

L. Install protective rings on active flush cover service fittings. 

3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS 

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16138 to obtain mounting heights 

specified. 

B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor. 

C. Install convenience receptacle 48 inches above finished floor in service area, 18 inches above 

finished floor in all other areas unless noted otherwise. 

D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter. 

E. Install dimmer 48 inches above finished floor. 

F. Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor. 

G. Install telephone jack for side-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches 

above finished floor. 

H. Install telephone jack for forward-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 inches 

above finished floor. 


A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. 

B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. 

C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. 

D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. 

E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 


A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 

3.05 CLEANING 

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. 


WIRING DEVICES 16140 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 16155 

EQUIPMENT WIRING 



A. Electrical connections to equipment. 





PART 2 PRODUCTS, Not Used 



A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and start up. 

3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Exposed conduits shall be held in place by galvanized metal straps or clips. Where grouped, they 

shall be neatly racked, supported by suitable trapeze or pipe ring hangers; same to be run parallel 

with and at right angles to beams and walls. The installation of perforated strap hangers or 

wire will NOT be permitted. Hangers shall be spaced not more than 5 ft. on centers. 

C. Where conduits terminate in panel boxes, distribution panels, switchboards, pull boxes or starter 

boxes, provide fiber bushing and lock nuts. Bushings shall be O.Z. Type "A" up to 2" conduit, and 

Type "B" over 2", or equal, Appleton or Thomas & Betts. Bushings made of thermoplastic or 

other flammable material are NOT acceptable. 

D. All conduit which enters the building through the floor or foundation walls shall enter through a hot 

dipped galvanized cast iron conduit entrance assembly. The shell of this fitting shall be installed in 

the foundation wall before the concrete is poured. Entrance seals shall be as manufactured by 

O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company, Type "FSK" or approved equal. 

E. All conduit entering the building below grade and terminating into panels or pull boxes will be 

terminated with O.Z. Electrical Manufacturing Company, Type "KR" sealing bushing. 

F. Final connections to all motors shall be made with flexible steel conduit. Final connections to roof 

exhaust fans shall be made with "Sealtite" waterproof flexible conduit. Provide additional ground 

wire to assure a perfect ground connection. 

G. No conduit will be routed on the roof. 


EQUIPMENT WIRING 16155 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 16195 

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 


1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS 

A. The General Provisions, Supplemental General Provisions, Special Provisions and Division 1 

Specification sections, apply to work covered by this Section. 

B. Comply with Division 16 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for coordination of 

work. 


A. Provide labor, material, equipment, tools and services, and perform operations required for, and 

reasonably incidental to, the providing of electrical identification, including related accessories. 

B. Provide electrical identification for the following: 

1. Panelboards, motor starters, contactors, disconnect switches, circuit breakers and other 

electrical equipment with nameplate identifying the item of equipment and the equipment 

serving the same. 

2. Raceways, junction boxes and pull boxes. 

3. Wiring devices. 

4. Wiring. 

5. Three phase motor rotation. 


A. Submit product data in accordance with Division 1 for products specified under PART 2 - 

PRODUCTS. 



A. Brady 

B. Panduit 

C. Thomas & Betts 

D. Seton 

2.02 IDENTIFICATION 

A. Nameplates 

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - Page 1 of 3




1. Nameplates shall be black engraved surface on white core for normal power circuits and 

red engraved surface on white core for emergency power circuits. 

2. Provide for each distribution panelboard, branch circuit panelboard, transformer and any 

other similar equipment furnished under this Division identification as to its given name, 

voltage and origination of service. Examples are as follows: 

‘HA’ 

480Y/277V 

FED FROM ‘DPA’ 

DPA’ 

480Y/277V 

FED FROM ‘MSA’ 

‘LA’ 

208Y/120V 

FED FROM ‘TLA’ 

TLA’ 

5 KVA, 480V to 208Y/120V 

FED FROM ‘HA’ 

3. Provide for each motor starter enclosure, circuit breaker enclosure, disconnect switch 

and any other similar equipment furnished under this Division, identification as to the 

specific load that it serves and the origination of service. Examples are as follows: 

‘CHP-1' 

FED FROM ‘MCC-1' 

AHU-1' 

FED FROM ‘DPA’ 

4. Provide for each feeder protective device in each distribution panelboard and any other 

similar equipment furnished under this Division, identification as to the specific load that it 

serves. 

5. Nameplates shall be laminated, white core, plastic with beveled edges, minimum 1/16 

inch thick. Lettering shall be machine-engraved, not less than 1/4" high, cut through the 

black or red surface to the white core. 

B. Junction Boxes and Pull Boxes 

1. Identification shall be with a black permanent marking pen on the top of 4" x 4" junction 

box covers or on the back of an outlet box cover plate identifying the branch circuits and 

systems within the conduit. Pull boxes shall be provided with a nameplate stating voltage 

and system served. 

C. Wiring Device Wall Plates 

1. On the back side of wiring device wall plates identify with a black permanent marking pen 

the panelboard and branch circuit number the device is served from. 

D. Wire Markers 

1. Wire markers for identification of wiring shall be self-adhesive type having letters and 

numerals indicating serving equipment and feeder or branch circuit number. 

E. Rotation Tags 

1. Rotation tags shall be brass or aluminum securely attached to equipment. 



A. Surfaces to receive labels or nameplates shall be carefully prepared in accordance with the 

manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 



3.02 NAMEPLATES 



A. Nameplates shall be properly attached to identify panelboards, feeder circuit breakers, 

disconnect switches, pull boxes and other similar equipment furnished under this Division. 

3.03 WIRE MARKERS 

A. Wire markers shall be applied to each conductor or cable within panelboards, motor starter 

enclosures, circuit breaker enclosures, disconnect switches, cabinets, junction boxes, pull 

boxes, and other similar equipment identifying the serving equipment and feeder or branch 

circuit from which the conductors originate. 






SECTION 16210 

ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES 


PRIOR TO BID CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY REQUIREMENTS FOR AND LOCATION OF (NEW 

OR EXISTING AS PER UTILITY COMPANY) ELECTRICAL TRANSFORMER WITH UTILITY 

COMPANY AT INTIATION OF JOB/AS PER SPECIFICATIONS. 


A. Electrical Utility Services 


A. Product Data: Provide ratings and dimensions of transformer cabinets and meter bases. 

B. Submit utility company-prepared drawings. 


A. Perform work in accordance with utility company written requirements and NFPA 70. 

1. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 



1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING 

A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. Review service entrance 

requirements and details with a Utility Company representative. 



A. Utility Transformer Pad: Concrete or as required by Utility Company. 

B. Other Components: As required by Utility Company. 



A. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project. 

B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on utility company drawings. 


A. Install service rack, weatherhead, transformer pad, metering transformer cabinets, and meter base 

as required by utility company. 

B. Install in accordance with NECA “Standard of Installation”. 


ELECTRICAL UTILITY SERVICES 16210 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 16412 

ENCLOSED SWITCHES 



A. Fusible switches. 

B. Nonfusible switches. 







A. Square D 

B. General Electric 

C. Siemens 

D. Cutler Hammer 


A. All safety switches shall have provision for padlocking in either "ON" or "OFF" positions, shall be 

quick make and break, load break, with Type "A" mechanisms with spring reinforced fuse clips and 

switch contacts, shall be totally enclosed, externally operated, dual rated, shall conform in all 

respects to Panelboards Specifications above insofar as they apply, shall be fusible except as 

noted, and shall be “Square D” General Duty Type or equal. 

B. Safety switches manufacturer shall match manufacturer of switchgear, motor starters, lighting and 

appliance panelboard, and distribution panelboards. 



A. Install in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 

B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. 

C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size 

installed. 





ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16412 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 16426 

ENCLOSED CONTACTORS 



A. General purpose contactors. 

B. Lighting contactors. 







Square D or equal. 

Accessories: 

1. Pushbutton: ON/OFF. 

2. Selector Switch: ON/OFF. 

3. Indicating Light: RED. 

4. Auxiliary Contacts: One, normally open. 

5. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1. 

2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS 

A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor. 

B. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. 

C. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function. 

2.03 LIGHTING CONTACTORS 

A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor. 

B. Configuration: Electrically held. 

C. Coil operating voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hertz. 

D. Poles: As required to match circuit configuration and control function. 

E. Contact Rating: Match branch circuit overcurrent protection, considering derating for continuous 

loads. 

2.04 DISCONNECTS 

A. Combination Contactors: Combine contactor with disconnect in common enclosure. 

B. Disconnects: Thermal magnetic circuit breaker; NEMA AB 1, with integral thermal and 

instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. 

C. Disconnects: Fusible switch assembly; NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable 

handle. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses. 



A. Install enclosed contactors where indicated, in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 

B. Height: 5 ft to operating handle. 

C. Provide fuses for fusible switches. 

D. Provide engraved plastic nameplates. 



B. Perform applicable inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.16.1. 


ENCLOSED CONTACTORS 16426 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 16442 

DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS 



A. Switchboards. 

. Switchboard accessories. 


A. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, fault 

current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of all equipment and components. 

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown; 

conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars per 

phase, neutral, and ground; and switchboard instrument details. 


Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose. 

1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 

Furnish two of each key. 



A. Square D I-Line 

B. Siemens 

C. General Electric 

D. Cutler Hammer 

2.02 SWITCHBOARDS 

A. Description: NEMA PB 2 switchboard with electrical ratings and configurations as indicated and 

specified. 

B. Ratings: 

1. Voltage: 120/208 volts. 

2. Configuration: Three phase, four wire, grounded. 

3. Main Bus: As shown on drawing 

4. Integrated Equipment Rating: As shown on drawing 

C. Main Section Devices: Panel mounted. 

D. Distribution Section Devices: Panel mounted. 

E. Auxiliary Section Devices: Individually mounted. 

F. Bus Material: Copper, standard size. 

G. Bus Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance. 

H. Ground Bus: Extend length of switchboard. 

I. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in 

each pole. 

1. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch 

circuits. 

2. Include shunt trip where indicated. 

J. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, molded case circuit breakers. 

1. Integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically 

resetting current limiting elements in each pole. 

DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS 16442 - Page 1 of 2




2. Interrupting rating 100,000 rms amperes symmetrical let-through current and energy level less 

than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse. 

3. Include shunt trip where indicated. 

K. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from the front only of the switchboard, suitable for the 

conductor materials and sizes indicated. 

L. Metering Transformer Compartment: For utility company's use; compartment size, bus spacing 

and drilling, door, and locking and sealing requirements in accordance with Section 16210. 

M. Future Provisions: Fully equip spaces for future devices with bussing and bus connections, 

suitably insulated and braced for short circuit currents. Provide continuous current rating as 

indicated. 

N. Enclosure: Type 1 - General Purpose. 

1. Align sections at front and rear. 

2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal 

surfaces with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc. 

3. Mimic Bus: Show bussing, connections and devices in single line form on the front panels of 

the switchboard. 

a. Use blue factory painting. 

b. Use plastic strips. 

c. Fasten strips flat against the panel face with screws or rivets. 

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 

A. Shop inspect and test switchboard according to NEMA PB 2. 



A. Install switchboard in locations shown on drawings, according to NEMA PB 2.1. 

B. Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing switchboard. 

C. Install fuses in each switch. 





A. Tighten bolted bus connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 

B. Adjust circuit breaker trip and time delay settings to values indicated. 

3.04 CLEANING 

Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 


DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS 16442 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 16443 

PANELBOARDS 



A. Distribution panelboards. 

B. Branch circuit panelboards. 

C. Load centers. 



1.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 

Furnish two of each panelboard key. 


2.01 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS 

A. Power Distribution Panelboards shall be of the size and capacity as shown on the drawings and 

similar in features to Panelboards as previously specified. 

B. Mains and branches shall be circuit breaker type similar to those specified under panelboard 

section. 

C. Steel directory frame with glass front with typed directory card to fit holder in door. 

D. Distribution Panelboards shall be type I-LINE as manufactured by Square "D", Siemens, 

General Electric, or Cutler-Hammer. 

E. Distribution panelboard manufacturer shall match manufacturer of motor starters, lighting and 

appliance panelboard, and safety switches. 

2.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS 

A. Panelboards shall contain the following: 

1. Code gauge galvanized steel cabinets. 

2. Adjustable trim tabs on all flush mounted cabinets. 

3. Baked gray enamel finish on all exposed metal parts. 

4. Flush doors with ring catch and master keyed flush cylinder lock on all branch circuit lighting 

panelboards. 

5. Stud mountings sufficient to support front panels on all surface mounted panelboards (to 

facilitate mounting same). 

6. Steel directory frame with glass front and neatly typed circuit directory to fit holder on door. 

7. Completely enclosed dead front construction, except as otherwise noted. 

8. Silver plated contacts, wire terminals and copper bus connections. 

9. Copper bus 

10. The number, size and type of mains and brances as indicated on the plan. 

11. Double row panels shall be separated by a 1" air space. 

12. Solderless wire terminals on both mains and branches. 

13. Contactors will be of the mechanically held type as manufactured by Automatic Switch 

Company or Zenith. 

B. All Circuit Breakers shall contain the following: 

1. Quick-make and quick-break mechanism. 

2. Dual thermal magnetic trip elements. 

3. Common trips on all multi-pole breakers (no handle ties will be allowed) 

4. Positive "OFF" positions. 

5. Trip free handles. 

6. Switching duty rated, HACR rating for all breakers feeding heat pumps or air conditioners. 

7. All circuits switched from panels will be rated for switch duty. 

PANELBOARDS 16443 - Page 1 of 2




8. Sequenced phased with ODD numbers on the left and EVEN numbers on the right. 

9. All breakers will be bolted to the bus and panel. 

C. Panelboards will be as manufactured by Square "D" type NQOD or NEHB (as voltage 

appropriate), Siemens, General Electric or Cutler Hammer. 

D. Lighting and appliance panelboard manufacturer shall match manufacturer of motor starters, 

distribution panelboards and safety switches. 



A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and the NECA Standard of Installation. 

B. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 

4 inches above floor. 

C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. 

D. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise 

directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. 

E. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16075. 

F. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. 

Identify each as SPARE. 

1. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. 

G. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16060. 



B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.4 for switches, Section 7.5 for 

circuit breakers. 


A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard 

to balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multiwire 

branch circuits. 


PANELBOARDS 16443 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 16510 

INTERIOR LUMINARIES 



A. Interior luminaries and accessories. 




2.01 LUMINAIRES 

Furnish products as indicated in drawing fixture schedule. 

2.02 LAMPS 

Lamp Types: Acceptable Manufacturers: GE, Phillips, Sylvania. 



A. Install suspended luminaries and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. 

Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. 

B. Support luminaries larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling framing. 

C. Locate recessed ceiling luminaries as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. 

D. Install surface mounted luminaries and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and 

with each other. Secure to prevent movement. 

E. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaries in grid ceiling directly from building 

structure. 

F. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below. 

G. Install recessed luminaries using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory 

requirements for fire rating. 

H. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaries in place. 

I. Install wall mounted luminaries, emergency lighting units, and exit signs at height as indicated on 

Drawings. 

J. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire. 


A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and 

operation. 


A. Aim and adjust luminaries as indicated. 

B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 


A. Relamp luminaries that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. 


INTERIOR LUMINARIES 16510 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 16520 

EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES 



A. Exterior luminaires and accessories. 

B. Poles. 



B. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the 

purpose specified and indicated. 

1.03 EXTRA MATERIALS 

Furnish two of each type and wattage lamp installed. 


2.01 LUMINAIRES 

Furnish products as indicated in drawing fixture schedule. 

2.02 LAMPS 

Lamp Types: Acceptable Manufacturers: GE, Phillips, Sylvania. 



A. For non-direct burial poles only, provide concrete bases for lighting poles at locations indicated, in 

accordance with Section 03300. For direct burial poles see Drawings for information. 

B. Install poles plumb. 

1. Provide shims to adjust plumb. 

2. Grout around each base. 

C. Install lamps in each luminaire. 

D. Bond luminaires, metal accessories, and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding 

conductor. Provide supplementary grounding electrode at each pole. 


A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and 

operation. 

B. Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with performance requirements. Take 

measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring 

moon. 


Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. 


EXTERIOR LUMINARIES 16520 - Page 1 of 1




SECTION 16721 

FIRE ALARM – CONDUIT AND PULL STRING ONLY 


1.01 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 

A. SCOPE & RELATED DOCUMENTS 

1. Furnish and install conduit, and installation of conduit for the Fire Alarm System as described 

herein and as shown on the plans; a pull string shall be provided in the conduit by this 

contractor. Provide all outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary material for a 

complete installation. 

2. The Electrical Contractor shall provide conduit and wire for the 120vac power connection to 

the fire alarm panel. Electrical Contractor to furnish and install all conduit for all the fire alarm 

peripheral devices attached to the system. Electrical Contractor shall stub conduit up into the 

ceiling joist and leave a pull string in the conduit. 

3. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and General 

Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 

4. The complete installation is to conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-72, Local Code 

Requirements and National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 760. 

5. Additionally, the entire installed system and all integrated system operations shall be within 

the guidelines of the Basic Building Code. 

6. The work covered by this section of the specifications is to be coordinated with the related 

work as specified elsewhere under the project specifications. 

B. REFERENCES 

NEC (Current Edition) 

NFPA 72, the National Fire Alarm Code 

NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code® 

Building Code appropriate for this Jurisdiction. 

Other Applicable Codes and/or Standards 

1.02 CONDUIT AND WIRE 

A. POWER REQUIREMENTS 

1. The control panel shall receive 120VACpower as noted on the plans via a dedicated 20A, 

120vac, fused disconnect circuit. Electrical Contractor shall provide red over-current device 

with lock on breaker. Label in distribution panel as “Fire Alarm Circuit”. Wire shall be 12ga. 

copper in metal conduit. 

2. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused 

at the control panel. 

B. CONDUIT AND WIRE: 

1. Conduit: 

a. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state 

requirements and as described elsewhere in this specification. 

b. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or approved metallic raceway. Conduit fill shall not 

exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are 

contained within a single conduit. 

c. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and 

shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, 

per NEC Article 760-29. 

FIRE ALARM (rev 2 2-11-10) 16721 - Page 1 of 2




d. Wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar 

power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and 

signaling line circuits. 

e. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control 

panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP 

manufacturer. 

f. Contractor shall be responsible for satisfying all conduit fill requirements. Conduit cross 

sectional conductor fill shall not exceed 40% under any circumstances. 

2. Wire: 

a. All fire alarm system wiring as installed under this contract shall be new “Fire Wire” from 

FACP to device. 

b. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) 

and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of 

conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less 

than 16 AWG for initiating device circuits and signaling line circuits, and 14 AWG for 

notification appliance circuits. 

c. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use 

with a protective signaling system. 

d. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. 

3. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: 

All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. All junction boxes shall 

be painted red. 

4. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, waterflow). Mixed 

category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to 

intelligent reporting device. 

P. INSTALLATION 

1. Installation of equipment and final devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be 

closely coordinated with the appropriate Subcontractors. 

2. The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm 

equipment after completion of the installation. 

3. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and/or labeled "Fire Alarm". Wiring color code shall be 

maintained throughout the installation. 

4. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable 

codes, and the Manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in accordance 

with all applicable codes and standards. Upon completion of installation, the Contractor shall 

so certify, in writing, to the Owner and the General Contractor. 

S. FIRE ALARM WIRING 

1. All wiring shall be color coded as follows and must be installed within conduit: 

a. Fire alarm control panel - 120 Volt - 2 #12 AWG. 

b. Alarm initiating devices - 2 #16 AWG per zone, one (1) brown, on (1) violet. 

c. Horn devices - 2 #14 AWG per circuit. One (1) red, one (1) black. 

d. Visual devices - on same circuit as horn devices. 

e. Slave fan relay - 2 #14 AWG blue wires from fire alarm control panel to fan relay. 

f. Magnetic door holder device - 2 #14 AWG yellow wires from fire alarm control panel to 

holders. 

g. Remote annunciator/graphic device - 2 #14 and 1 pair #18 AWG. All wires #14 AWG and 

properly identified at control panel and annunciator locations. 

2. Install and connect conduit and wiring from fire alarm control panel to telephone terminal 

cabinet for central station tie. 

3. All junction boxes used with the fire alarm system will be painted red. 

4. Coordinate connections with supplies of central station network system. 


FIRE ALARM (rev 2 2-11-10) 16721 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 16722 

SECURITY ALARM – conduit only 


1.01 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM 


1. Furnish and install conduit for the Security Alarm System as described herein and as shown 

on the plans; pull string shall be provided in the conduit by this contractor. Provide all outlet 

boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete installation. 

2. The Electrical Contractor shall provide conduit and wire for the 120vac power connection to 

the security alarm panel. Electrical Contractor to furnish and install all conduit for all the 

security alarm peripheral devices attached to the system. Electrical Contractor shall stub 

conduit up into the ceiling joist and leave a pull string in the conduit. 





5. Additionally, the entire installed system and all integrated system operations shall be within 

the guidelines of the BOCA Basic Building Code. 



B. REFERENCES 



BOCA 


1.02 CONDUIT AND WIRE 

A. POWER REQUIREMENTS 

1. The control panel shall receive 120VACpower as noted on the plans via an outlet mounted at 

the control panel for a plug-in transformer. 

2. 120vac power outlets are also required for the “Assistance Call System”, “Outside Parts 

Doors” and the Inventory Room electric door strikes. See E-8 for locations. 

3. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 12 VDC and shall be individually fused 

at the control panel. 

O. CONDUIT AND WIRE: 

1. Conduit: 


requirements and as described elsewhere in this specification. 









signaling line circuits. 

FIRE ALARM rev 2 2-11-10 16722 - Page 1 of 2




e. Conduit shall not enter the security alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted 

control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the 

manufacturer. 



2. Wire: 

a. All security alarm system wiring as installed under this contract shall be new “BA Wire” 

from the control panel to device. 



conductors shall be as recommended by the alarm system manufacturer, but not less 







All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. l 

4. Initiating circuits shall be arranged as shown on drawing E-8 to serve like categories (motion 

sensors, door contacts). Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling 

line circuits connected to intelligent reporting device. 

P. INSTALLATION 

1. Installation of equipment and final devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be 


2. The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm 

equipment after completion of the installation. 

3. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable 




S. SECURITY ALARM WIRING 


a. Security alarm control panel – plug-in transformer to panel - 2 #16 AWG cable. 

b. Alarm initiating devices - 4 #18 AWG, white jacketed cable per zone, 

g. Remote annunciator/graphic device – 2pair #16, twisted/shielded cable. Cable shall be 


2. Install and connect conduit and wiring from security alarm control panel to telephone terminal 




FIRE ALARM rev 2 2-11-10 16722 - Page 2 of 2




SECTION 17000 

SPRINKLER SUPERVISORY, FIRE ALARM & MONITORING SYSTEM 


1.01 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 


1. National Account Vendor as listed on drawings shall furnish and install a complete Fire Alarm 

System as described herein and as shown on the plans; to be wired, connected, and left in first 

class operating condition. The system shall use closed loop initiating device circuits with 

individual zone supervision, individual NAC supervision, incoming and standby power 

supervision. Include a control panel, manual stations (fire alarm boxes), automatic fire detectors, 

indicating devices, remote enunciators, all wiring, connections to devices, outlet boxes, junction 

boxes, and all other necessary material for a complete operating system. 

2. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labor, 

drawings, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations in connection with the 

installation of the Fire Alarm System as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. 





5. Additionally, the entire installed system and all integrated system operations shall be within the 

guidelines of the Basic Building Code. 

6. The work covered by this section of the specifications is to be coordinated with the related work 

as specified elsewhere under the project specifications. 

7. The approved vendor is a National Account Vendor as listed on drawings as designated on 

drawings. No substitutions allowed. 

8. Knox Box shall be provided by the General Contractor with tamper switch and wired by the 

National Account as designated on drawings for tamper monitoring. Supervisory signal to be sent 

to the National Account as designated on drawings Net Center for 24 hr. Remote Station 

Monitoring. 

9. Remote Station monitoring of the fire alarm system shall be provided by the National Account as 

designated on drawings under separate contract with the owner. Any other local requirements for 

signals to be sent to the location fire department directly shall be by the owner. 

B. REFERENCES 



Building Code appropriate for this Jurisdiction. 


C. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 

1. Equipment: All devices, combinations of devices, notification appliances, and equipment, shall be 

listed for the protective signaling purpose for which they are used and shall be installed in 

compliance with applicable codes and standards. 

2. Type of System: The control panel shall be Listed for power-limited applications per NEC 760 and 

for compliance with the National Fire Protection Association Standards NFPA 72; for Local, 

Auxiliary, Remote Station, and/or Proprietary fire protective signaling systems. 

3. Type of Service: The control panel shall be Listed for the applicable types of service, i.e.; Manual 

Alarm, Automatic Alarm, Waterflow Alarm and/or Sprinkler Supervisory Service. 

4. Type of Signaling: The control panel shall be Listed for the applicable types of signaling methods 

used, i.e.; Temporal Coded, Zone Coded, Non-Coded, June Time and/or Digital Alarm 

Communicator (DACT) Signaling. 

FIRE ALARM (SCSS REV #3 4-1-10) 17000 - Page 1




D. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 

1. Fire Alarm System: A complete, supervised, power-limited, fire detection and evacuation system. 

2. All equipment herein specified is that of FireLite Alarms as manufactured by Honeywell and 

supplied by a National Account Vendor, this depicts the type and quality of the equipment to be 

furnished. Refer to Submittals, Products/Manufacturers, and Products/Substitutions sections in 

this specification for further information and qualifications 

3. System Supervision: The fire protective signaling system shall be an electrically supervised 

system which shall monitor the integrity of circuit conductors and power supplies. Remote 

annunciator LEDs and associated wiring and remote emergency control wiring shall be 

supervised; whereas, an open condition in the circuit shall cause a trouble indication at the 

control panel. 

4. The fire alarm control panel shall allow for loading or editing special instructions and operating 

sequences as required. The system is to be capable of on-site programming to accommodate 

facility expansion, building parameter changes, or changes as required by local codes. All 

software operations are to be stored in a non-volatile, programmable memory resident within the 

fire alarm control panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions 

stored in memory. 

5. The ability for selective input/output control functions based on ANDing, ORing, NOTing, and 

special coded operations is to also be incorporated in the resident software programming of the 

system. 

6. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, initiation circuits shall be individually 

configurable on-site to provide either alarm/trouble operation, alarm only, trouble only, current 

limited alarm, no alarm, normally closed device monitoring, a non-latching circuit, or a alarm 

verification circuit. 

7. The control panel shall provide a minimum of 4 amps of power for notification appliances and 

auxiliary devices. Provisions shall be available for expanding the standard power to provide an 

additional 5 amps of power for notification appliances and auxiliary devices. 


A. The fire alarm system specified is manufactured by Firelite Alarms. Catalog and model numbers are 

intended to establish the type and quality of equipment and system design as well as exact operating 

features required, there are no substitutions permitted. The manufacturer's specification sheets of 

each item so listed shall be considered to be part of the specification and binding therein. 

B. OPERATION 

1. Under normal condition, the front panel shall display a "SYSTEM NORMAL" message and the 

current time and date. 

2. Should an abnormal condition be detected, the appropriate LED (Alarm, Supervisory, or Trouble) 

shall flash. The panel audible signal shall pulse for alarm conditions and sound steadily for 

trouble and supervisory conditions. 

3. The following three characteristics relative to an abnormal condition shall be displayed 

simultaneously in alphanumeric format. Information shall include: 

4. Custom location label (80 characters minimum). 

5. Type of device (i.e. smoke, pull station, waterflow). 

6. Status (i.e. alarm, trouble). 

7. Pressing the appropriate acknowledge button shall acknowledge the alarm or trouble condition. 

The acknowledge functions may be passcode protected if the user has insufficient privilege to 

acknowledge such conditions. A message shall indicate insufficient privilege but allow the user to 

view the points without acknowledging them. Should the user have sufficient privilege to 

acknowledge, a message shall be displayed informing the user that the condition has been 

acknowledged. 

8. Systems not capable of password protected manual command operations shall provide key 

operated switches for these functions. Function key switches shall be keyed differently from any 

other keyed switches or locks used within the system. 





9. After all the points have been acknowledged, the LEDs shall glow steady and the panel audible 

signal shall be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory, and trouble conditions shall be 

displayed along with a prompt to review each list chronologically. The end of the list shall be 

indicated. The first 10 fire alarm zones shall be displayed simultaneously in chronological order. 

10. Alarm Silencing 

a. Pressing the "Alarm Silence" button shall cause all notification appliances programmed for 

“On-Until-Silenced” to be deactivated. A separate panel mounted yellow LED shall illuminate 

to indicate the alarm silenced mode. 

b. All NACs programmed for “On-Until-Reset” shall remain activated until the system is Reset. 

11. Alarm Silence Inhibit Timer 

a. Operation shall include a programmable duration timer that specifies the length of time that 

notification appliances shall not be deactivated during alarm silence inhibit mode. 

b. The inhibit timer shall be programmable from 0 to 60 minutes in duration. 

12. System Reset 

a. The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state after an 

alarm condition has been remedied. The display shall step the user through the reset process 

with simple English language messages. Messages shall provide operator assurance of the 

sequential steps (i.e.: "IN PROGRESS", "RESET COMPLETED", and "SYSTEM NORMAL") 

as they occur, should all alarm conditions be cleared. 

b. Should an alarm condition continue to exist, the system shall remain in an abnormal state. 

System control relays shall not reset. The panel audible signal and the Alarm LED shall be 

on. The display shall indicate the total number of alarms and troubles present in the system 

along with a prompting to review the points. These points shall not require acknowledgment if 

they were previously acknowledged. 

c. Should the Alarm Silence Inhibit function be active, the "System Reset" key press shall be 

ignored and a message shall be displayed for a short time to indicate that the reset was 

inhibited. For operator assurance, a message indicating that reset is no longer inhibited shall 

be displayed when the inhibit function time expires. 

13. History Logging. 

a. The control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of fifty (50) events in an alarm log 

plus a minimum of one hundred (100) events in a separate trouble log. These events shall be 

stored in a battery protected random access memory (RAM). Systems not having discrete 

alarm and trouble logging memory shall include an alternate supervised (e.g.: floppy drive, 

tape cassette) historic recording method with battery backup. Real time and date shall 

accompany all history event recording. 

b. History logs shall be capable of being viewed separately or shall be selectable for viewing as 

a combined history log that displays both alarm and trouble events in chronological order. 

14. Walk Test System Testing 

a. The system shall be capable of being tested by one person. While in the test mode, the 

system shall display a trouble condition. 

b. While in the walk test mode, the activation of an initiating device shall be silently logged as an 

alarm in the historical log. The panel shall automatically reset after logging the alarm. 

c. The momentary disconnection of an initiating device or notification appliance shall be silently 

logged as a trouble condition in the historical log. The panel shall automatically reset itself 

after logging of the trouble condition. 

d. Integrity of the installation conductors of IDCs and NACs shall be verified by momentarily 

opening any circuit. 

e. Walk Test of ground fault circuit testing shall be verified by operating the Notification 

Appliances for 4 seconds. 

f. Optionally, the Walk Test sequence shall have the capability of activating NACs to signal with 

a code associated with the alarmed zone. If this option is selected, any momentary opening 

of initiating or NAC wiring shall cause the notification appliances to sound for 4 seconds to 

indicate the trouble condition. The Walk Test feature shall automatically revert to the normal 

operating mode after eight (8) hours if it is not manually activated. 





g. Suppliers of systems not having this feature as functionally specified above shall include a 

testing agreement meeting the requirements of NFPA-72 in their base bid quotation. As a 

minimum, two (2) years of scheduled testing shall be included. 

15. LED Supervision 

a. All slave module LEDs shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement. Should a problem 

occur, the panel shall display the module and the LED location numbers to facilitate location 

of that LED. 

16. Active Status Reminder 

a. Should any Alarm, Supervisory, or Trouble condition be present within the system and the 

audible signal silenced, the local tone alert shall resound every 8 hours (each change of work 

shift) to act as a reminder that the fire alarm system is not 100% operational. 

17. Access Levels 

a. There shall be a minimum of four (4) access levels. Passcodes shall consist of up to four (4) 

digits. Changes to passcodes shall only be made by authorized personnel. 

b. Systems not capable of password protected manual command operations shall provide key 

operated switches for these functions. Function key switches shall be keyed differently from 

any other keyed switches or locks used within the system. 

c. In order to maintain security when entering a passcode, the entered digits shall not be 

displayed. 

d. When a correct passcode is entered, a message indicating acceptance shall be displayed. 

The new access level shall be in effect until the operator manually logs out or leaves the 

keypad inactive for ten (10) minutes. 

e. When an incorrect passcode is entered, a message shall be displayed indicating that the 

passcode was invalid 

f. Access to a level shall only allow the operator to perform all actions within that level and all 

actions of lower levels, not higher levels. 

g. The following keys/switches shall have access levels associated with them: 

Alarm Acknowledge 

Supervisory Acknowledge 

Trouble Acknowledge 

Alarm Silence 

System Reset 

18. ALARM SEQUENCE 

a. The system alarm operation subsequent to the alarm activation of any manual station, 

automatic detection device, or sprinkler flow switch is to be as follows: 

b. All audible alarm notification appliances shall sound as required by local authority having 

jurisdiction. 

c. All visible alarm notification appliances: 

Xenon Strobes shall display a continuous synchronized pattern. 

d. All doors normally held open by door control devices shall release. 

e. A supervised signal to notify the local fire department or an approved central station is to be 

activated. To accommodate and facilitate job site changes, the type of "city connection circuit" 

is to be determined by the fire alarm equipment supplier and all city tie connection equipment 

supplied as required. 

f. An alarm is to be displayed on the panel display as defined in the OPERATION section of 

these specifications. The alarm LED shall flash on the control panel and the remote 

annunciator until the alarm has been acknowledged at the control panel or the remote 

annunciator. Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm 

received from another zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control 

panel and the panel display shall show the new alarm information. 

g. A pulsing alarm tone shall occur within the control panel and the remote annunciator until 

acknowledged. 

h. The control panel is to have a dedicated supervisory service LED and a dedicated 

supervisory service acknowledge switch. 





i. The activation of any standpipe or sprinkler valve tamper switch shall activate the system 

supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control panel and the remote 

annunciator. Differentiation between valve tamper activation and opens and/or grounds on 

fire alarm initiation circuit wiring shall be provided. 

j. A combination waterflow indicator/sprinkler supervisory switch combination IDC type shall be 

selected allowing a single pair of wires to monitor both conditions. Waterflow monitor shall 

have priority over sprinkler supervisory monitoring. 

k. Activating the Supervisory Service Acknowledge Switch shall silence the supervisory audible 

signal while maintaining the Supervisory Service LED on indication that the tamper contact is 

still in the off-normal state. 

l. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the Supervisory Service LED to 

extinguish, indicating restoration to normal. 

m. A manual evacuation means shall be provided to activate the system NACs. 

n. Alarm and trouble conditions shall be immediately displayed on the control panel front 

alphanumeric display. If more alarms or troubles are in the system, the operator shall be able 

to manually scroll to display new alarms. The first 10 fire alarm zones in alarm shall be 

displayed simultaneously in chronological order. 

o. The system shall have an alarm list means that shall allow the operator to display all alarms, 

troubles, and supervisory service conditions with the time of occurrence. This shall allow for 

the determination of the most recent alarm and may also indicate the path that the fire is 

taking. 

p. The control panel shall be capable of supplying 4 Amps @ 24 VDC power output for external 

system use including power for NACs. 

q. An additional internally mounted power supply rated at 5 Amps @ 24 VDC shall be provided. 

as required to service initiating circuits. 

19. SUPERVISION 

a. The system shall contain the number of independently supervised initiation circuits shown on 

the drawing plus a minimum of two spare circuits so that a fault in any one zone shall not 

affect any other zone. The alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the 

subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation circuit. 

b. There shall be sprinkler supervisory initiation device circuits for connection of all sprinkler 

valve tamper switches to perform the Supervisory Service Operation. This independent 

initiation circuit shall be labeled Supervisory Service and shall differentiate between tamper 

switch activation and wiring faults. 

c. There shall be sufficient (number as required) independently supervised and independently 

fused NACs for audible notification appliances horns, and visible notification appliances. 

Disarrangement conditions of any circuit shall not affect the operation of other circuits. 

d. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete panel readout to indicate 

disarrangement conditions per circuit. 

e. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be 

audibly and visibly indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator. A green "power 

on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. 

f. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of 

the battery shall be audibly and visibly indicated at the control panel and the remote 

annunciator. 

g. Additional monitoring shall be provided to initiate a depleted battery warning at the panel 

when battery operation has exceeded the battery capacity. 

h. The System Expansion Modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. 

Should a module become disconnected from the controls, the system trouble indicator must 

illuminate and audible trouble signal must sound. 

i. The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for 

maintenance or testing purposes. Restoration of a disabled circuit displays the status of the 

circuit and initiates a count down timer allowing the operator to “Abort the Enable” to prevent 

unwanted activation of notification appliances, off-premise reporting, and emergency controls. 





j. The count down timer shall be programmable from the front panel to be from 0 to 60 minutes. 

C. POWER REQUIREMENTS 

1. The control panel shall receive power as noted on the plans via a dedicated 20A, 120vac, fused 

disconnect circuit. 

2. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon 

loss of normal AC mains power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of sixty (60) hours with 

5 minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to 

the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be 

automatic. 

3. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at 

the control panel. 

D. SUBMITTALS 

1. Submit Manufacturer product data sheets for all proposed devices and equipment. 

2. Provide wiring diagrams, equipment ratings, dimensions, and finishes for all proposed devices 

and equipment. 

3. If submittals, upon review by the Owner and/or the Owners Representative, are found not to 

conform with the performance, type and quality of products as well as all other requirements of 

these specifications; the Contractor shall be required to resubmit. The Contractor shall be 

responsible for the Owner's extra expenses for subsequent review(s) of rejected submittals. Such 

extra fees shall be deducted from payments by the Owner to the Contractor. Approval of the 

submittals by the Owner shall, in no case, relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to meet the 

requirements of this specification. 

E. PROJECT RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS 

1. The National Account Vendor shall provide and maintain on the site an up-to-date record set 

of approved shop drawings. 

2. Record drawings shall include location of end-of-line device locations. 

3. Upon completion of the work, and final acceptance by the local authority, the Contractor shall 

submit record drawings to the Owner and the Engineer. 

F. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 

1. Submit Manufacturer data sheets for all equipment installed. 

2. Include operating, installation, and routine maintenance instructions. 

3. Include Manufacturer letter stating the date of installation on which the system is operational. 

G. SUBSTITUTIONS 

1. Other equipment may be substituted as long as the level of quality and performance of 

operation is equal to, or greater than, that which is specified. The Owner and/or Owners 

Representative shall make the determination as to whether or not the substitute 

equipment is acceptable. 

H. FIRE DETECTION AND CONTROL PANEL 

1. Where shown on the plans, locate a Firelite type MS-10UD Fire Alarm Control Panel. 

Construction shall be modular with solid state, microprocessor based electronics. 

2. A local audible device shall sound during Alarm, Trouble or Supervisory conditions. This 

audible device shall pulse to indicate alarm conditions and shall be on steadily for 

Supervisory or Trouble conditions. 

3. Primary Keys & Panel Display 

a. The Control Panel’s display shall be backlit for enhanced readability. So as to conserve 

battery standby power, it shall not be lit during an AC power failure unless an alarm 

condition occurs or there should be keypad activity. 

b. The display shall support both upper and lower case letters. Lowercase letters shall be 

used for softkey titles and prompting the user. Uppercase letters shall be used for System 

Status Information. A cursor shall be visible when entering information. 

4. The fire alarm control panel cabinet shall provide the following features: 

a. The fire alarm control panel shall be housed in a single cabinet capable of housing the 

maximum of expansion and optional modules required for system feature upgrading or 

system expansion. 





b. The cabinet shall be equipped with lock and transparent door panel providing freedom 

from tampering yet allowing full view of the various displays and pertinent operator 

controls. 

c. The printed circuit board assemblies of the control panel shall be mounted such that 

removal of a common, single piece mounting chassis shall provide access for installing 

the cabinet and for pulling wires into the cabinet. 

d. Provisions for semi-flush mounting between 24 inch center stud wall construction. 

e. Cabinet color shall be beige. 

f. To facilitate installation, the cabinet shall provide: 

1) Built-In depth gauges for ½ inch thick drywall installation. 

2) Built-In knockouts for nail holes and wiring conduit entrance. 

3) A built-in trim band to allow semi-flush mounting into rough cut wall openings. 

I. INITIATING DEVICES 

Locate, where shown on the drawings, the following signal initiating devices: 

1. Stations: Furnish and install type BG-12L double action manual pull stations with raised 

white lettering and a smooth high gloss finish. The break-glass station shall have a hinged 

front with key lock. Stations which utilize screwdrivers, allen wrenches, or other commonly 

available tools shall not be accepted. Stations shall be keyed alike with the fire alarm control 

panel. When the station is operated, the handle shall lock in a protruding manner to facilitate 

quick visual identification of the activated station. Provide Stopper type red wire guards 

where shown on drawings. 

2. Thermodetectors: Position white, low-profile, type 282B-PL thermodetectors rated at 194 o 

rate of rise and fixed temperature in all areas except where noted on the drawings, which 

shall be type 281B-PL rated at 135 o fixed temperature. 

3. Smoke Detectors: Locate type I3 Series (2W-B), ceiling mounted, photoelectric smoke 

detectors. Detector shall have a completely closed back to restrict entry of dust and air 

turbulence and 30 mesh insect screen. Electronics of unit shall be shielded to protect against 

false alarms from E.M.I. and R.F.I. Unit shall contain a red LED which shall pulse to indicate 

power on and which shall glow continuously to indicate alarm. Detector shall have a 

magnetically operated functional test switch and be capable of being supplied with a remote 

alarm LED indicator. Unit shall have a separate mounting base with terminal strip for ease of 

wiring, changing and cleaning. 

4. Duct Smoke Detectors: Locate type DH100 series photoelectric duct smoke detector. Duct 

housing base assembly shall be provided with an auxiliary relay with Form C contacts, rated 

at 1 AMP. Necessary sampling tubes shall be provided across the entire width of duct work. 

Those Duct Smoke Detectors installed above ceiling or not visible from viewing area shall be 

furnished with a remote test station type RTS-451KEY with a red light emitting diode (LED) 

mounted on a single gang stainless steel plate. 

5. Sprinkler Waterflow Switch: Shall be furnished and installed under Division 15 of the 

Specification and wired under this Section of the Specification. Switch shall have two (2) sets 

of N.O. contacts and adjustable retard chamber to compensate for water surge. 

6. Sprinkler System Gate Valve Supervisory Switch: Shall be furnished and installed under 

Division 15 of the Specification and wired under this Section of the Specification. 

J. ALARM INDICATING DEVICES 

Locate, where shown on the drawings, the following audio/visual devices: 

1. Audio/Visual Device shall be FireLite type P2R series (rectangular style), semi-flush on a 

standard electrical outlet box. A common mounting bezel shall contain the horn and high 

intensity xenon strobe flashing light. The side viewing white translucent lens shall have the 

word "FIRE" in red imprinted on it. Flash rate shall be 1 flash per second with an 15/75 

candela flash intensity or as marked on drawing. Both audio and visual units shall be on the 

same supervised circuit or circuits. The horn shall be rated at 87 db sound pressure level at 

ten (10) feet. Device shall be U.L. 1971 listed. All audio/visual units will include a 

synchronized flash module. All power supplies will be sized to appropriately account for 





synchronized flash power consumption. 

2. Visual only units will be FireLite type SR series similar to as specified above. 

K. REMOTE DEVICES 

Locate, where shown on the drawings, the following remote devices: 

1. Slave Fan Relays: Furnish and install type MR-101/C/R fan relay with required contacts. 

Cabinet shall have a screw on cover. Minimum contact rating shall be 10 AMP resistive. 

L. CONDUIT AND WIRE: (PROVIDED BY THE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR) 

1. Conduit: 


requirements and as described elsewhere in specification 16721, and provided by the 

Electrical Contractor. 









signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and 

the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without 

interference or loss of signals. 

e. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control 

panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP 

manufacturer. 



2. Wire: 

a. All fire alarm system wiring as installed under this contract shall be new “Fire Wire” from 

FACP to device. 



conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less 







All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose. All junction boxes shall 

be painted red. 

4. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, waterflow). Mixed 

category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line circuits connected to 

intelligent reporting device. 

M. INSTALLATION 

1. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be 


2. The security vendor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire 

alarm equipment after completion of the installation. 

3. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and/or labeled "Fire Alarm". Wiring color code shall be 

maintained throughout the installation. 

4. Install all system components in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable 








N. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 

1. The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72, Chapter 

7, [and local Fire Department requirements,] by the Installer, in the presence of the Owner's 

representative and the Local Fire Marshal. Upon completion of a successful test, the Installer 

shall so certify, in writing, to the Owner and General Contractor. 

2. The Manufacturer shall provide on-site technical installation support. 

O. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES 

1. Include on-site services of a National Account certified technician to provide technical 

installation support for panel start up, program editing, troubleshooting of the Fire Protective 

Signaling System Control Panel, and assistance to the Installer for one complete final system 

checkout in accordance with the Field Quality Control section of these specifications. The 

Manufacturer shall also provide one training session with the Owner, or Owners 

Representatives, upon completion of installation, for instruction of system operation. 

P. FIRE ALARM WIRING 


a. Fire alarm control panel - 120 Volt - 2 #12 AWG. 

b. Alarm initiating devices - 2 #14 AWG per zone, one (1) brown, on (1) violet. 

c. Horn devices - 2 #16 AWG per circuit. One (1) red, one (1) black. 

d. Visual devices - on same circuit as horn devices. 

e. Slave fan relay - 2 #14 AWG blue wires from fire alarm control panel to fan relay. 

f. Magnetic door holder device - 2 #14 AWG yellow wires from fire alarm control panel to 

holders. 

g. Remote annunciator/graphic device - 2 #14 and 1 pair #18 AWG. All wires #14 AWG and 


2. Install and connect conduit and wiring from fire alarm control panel to telephone terminal 


3. All junction boxes used with the fire alarm system will be painted red. 







SECTION 17101 

DETECTION AND ALARM 


1.01 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM 

SCOPE AND RELATED DOCUMENTS 

1. The National Account Vendor as listed on the drawings shall furnish and install a complete 

Security Alarm System as described herein and as shown on the plans; to be wired, 

connected, and left in first class operating condition. The system shall use closed loop 

initiating device circuits with individual zone supervision, incoming and standby power 

supervision. Include a control panel, motion sensors, recessed door contact, remote 

enunciators, all wiring, connections to devices, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other 

necessary material for a complete operating system. 

2. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labor, 

drawings, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations in connection with the 

installation of the Security Alarm System as shown on the drawings and as herein 

specified. 

3. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions and 

General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section. 


Requirements and National Electrical Code with particular attention to Article 760. The 

Electrical Contractor under specification section 16722 shall provide all conduit and labor 

to install conduit as required. 



6. The approved vendor is a National Account as listed on drawings as designated on 

drawings. No substitutions allowed.. 


A. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 

1. UL 365 – Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Units and Systems 

2. UL 609 – Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems 

3. UL 1023 – Household Burglar-Alarm System Units 

4. UL 1610 – Central Station Burglar-Alarm Units 

B. NFPA70 – National Electrical Code. 


A. The system shall be a Burglary Alarm System, Honeywell Vista 20P, that includes the 

following capabilities: 

1. Listed for UL Burglary 

2. Supports up to 8 on-board hardwired zones. 

3. Supports up to two (2) separate partitions. 

4. Supports up to 48 users. 

5. Provides supervision of peripheral devices. 

VISTA-20P Rev #3 (4-1-10) 17101-1 Detection and Alarm




6. Supports up to 16 optional relay outputs. 

7. Supports IP alarm reporting and uploading/downloading capability. 

8. Provides scheduling capability to allow for automated operations. 

9. Supports up to eight (8) alphanumeric paging devices. 

10. Monitors smoke detector maintenance signals. 

11. Capable of being installed using existing wiring. 


A. Submittals shall include manufacturer data sheets for all major system components. 

1.05 MANUFACTURES 

A. The alarm manufacturer shall be Honeywell. Catalog and model numbers are intended to 

establish the type and quality of equipment and system design as well as exact operating 

features required. 


2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 

A. Control Panel - The control panel shall be a two (2)-partition, UL burglary control panel 

that supports up to 16 zones using basic hardwired, polling loop, and wireless zones. It 

shall also provide supervision of one alarm output appliance circuits, RF receivers, and 

relay modules. In addition, the control shall provide the ability to schedule time-driven 

events, and allow certain operations to be automated by pressing a single button. The 

system shall be capable of interfacing with an ECP long range radio (LRR) unit that can 

send Contact ID messages, and alphanumeric paging devices. 

1. Basic Hardwired Zones - The control shall provide eight (8) style-B hardwire 

zones with the following characteristics: 

a. EOLR supervision (optional for zones 3-8): Shall support N.O. or N.C. 

sensors (EOLR supervision required for UL installations). 

b. Zones/Points shall be individually assignable to one of eight (8) 

partitions. 

c. Supports up to 50 two-wire latching glass break detectors on one 

selected zone. 

2. Optional Expansion Zones 

a. Loop Expansion – The control shall support up to 8 additional hardwire 

zones using a 4219 eight hardwired expansion zone module. 

3. Partitions – The control shall provide the ability to operate two (2) separate 

areas, each functioning as if it had its own control. Partitioning features shall 

include: 

a. Assignable by zone. 

b. Assignable by keypad. 

c. Assignable by relay to one or both partitions. 

d. Certain system options selectable by partition, such as entry/exit delay 

and subscriber account number. 





4. User Codes – The control shall accommodate 48 user codes, all of which an 

operate one or both partitions. Certain characteristics must be assignable to 

each user code, as follows: 

a. Authority level (Master, Manager, or several other Operator levels). 

Each User Code (other than the installer code) shall be capable of being 

assigned the same or a different authority level for each partition that it 

will operate. 

b. Opening/Closing central station reporting option. 

c. Specific partitions that the code can operate. 

d. Global arming capability (ability to arm all partitions the code has access 

to in one command). 

e. Use of an RF (button) to arm and disarm the system (RF key must first 

be enrolled into the system). 

5. Keypad/Annunciator – The control shall accommodate up to 8 keypads . 

keypads shall be capable of the following 

a. Performing all system arming functions. 

b. Being assigned to any partition. 

c. Providing four programmable single-button function keys, which can be 

used for: 

(1) Panic Functions –activated by wired and wireless keypads; 

reported separately by partition. 

(2) Keypad Macros –32 keypad macro commands per system (each 

macro is a series of keypad commands). Assignable to the A, B, 

C, and D keys by partition. 

6. Optional Output Relays - A total of 4 relay outputs shall be accommodated using 

relay module. Relay module shall provide four (4) Form C (normally open and 

normally closed) relays for general-purpose use or two (2) Class-B, Style-Y 

supervised notification appliance circuit outputs, when using the 4204CF module. 

The relays shall be capable of being: 

a. Programmed to activate in response to system events. 

b. Programmed to activate using time intervals. 

c. Activated manually using a keypad command. 

d. Assigned an alpha descriptor. 

7. VIP Module allows system control from any touchtone phone. 

8. Auxiliary Relay – A built-in Form C relay shall be provided. The relay contacts 

shall be rated at 12 VAC/VDC, 2 amps maximum. The relay shall support: 

a. Alarm activation. 

b. Trouble/supervisory activation. 

c. Reset of four-wire smoke detectors. 

d. Battery saving feature. 

9. Wireless Equipment – The Control shall be compatible with UL Listed 

Commercial Wireless Security equipment including: 





a. ADEMCO 5881ENL Burg Receiver. - The receiver shall be capable of 

receiving as many points as the control panel is rated for. Up to two (2) 

Receivers may be used on any system. Receivers may be remotely 

located anywhere on the system Keypad/Annunciator bus. 

11. Event Log – The System shall maintain a log of different event types (enabled in 

programming). The event log shall provide the following characteristics: 

a. Stores up to 100 events, viewable at the keypad. 

18. Scheduling - Provides the following scheduling capabilities: 

a. Open/close schedules (for control of arming/disarming and reporting). 

b. Holiday schedules (allows different time windows for open/close 

schedules). 

c. Timed events (for activation of relays, auto-bypassing and un-bypassing, 

auto-arming and disarming, etc.). 

d. Access schedules (for limiting system access to users by time) 

e. Automatic adjustment for daylight savings time. 

19. Communication Features - Supports the following formats and features for the 

primary and secondary central station receivers: 

a. Formats 

(1) ADEMCO Low Speed (Standard or Expanded). 

(2) Sescoa/Radionics. 

(3) ADEMCO Express. 

(4) ADEMCO High Speed. 

(5) ADEMCO Contact ID. 

b. Backup reporting – The system shall support backup reporting via the 

following: 

(1) Secondary phone number. 

(2) Internet Communicator. 

20. Exit Error False Alarm Prevention Feature – The System shall be capable of 

differentiating between an actual alarm and an alarm caused by leaving an 

entry/exit door open. If not subsequently disarmed, the control panel shall: 

a. Bypass the faulted E/E zone(s) and/or interior zones and arm the 

system. 

b. Generate an Exit Error report by user and by zone so the central station 

knows it was an exit alarm and who caused it. 

21. Programming - The Control shall be capable of being programmed locally or 

remotely using the ADEMCO Compass Downloader and shall be capable of: 

a. Uploading and downloading all programming information at 300 baud. 

b. Uploading and displaying firmware revision levels from the control. 

The control panel shall be the ADEMCO VISTA-20P Burglary Partitioned Security System. 





2.02 SELECTED SYSTEM CAPABILITIES 

A. The system shall integrate with facility doors, windows, and departments. The system 

shall also integrate with external systems, such as building appliances and building alert 

systems for remote control and central collection of external system alerts. When 

integrated with external systems, the system shall connect to the external system to 

receive status changes by way of a dry contact output from the external system. The 

system shall use its user interface to provide local status messages from external 

systems, providing for the initiation of local building policies. Optionally, the system may 

transmit information to an off-site monitoring service to provide initiation of remote 

policies when appropriate. 

2.03 ENCLOSURE 

A. The Control Panel shall be enclosed in a metal cabinet, suitable for wall mounting. The 

dimensions shall not exceed 14.5 inches (36.8 cm) in height, 12.5 inches (31.8 cm) in width 

or 3 inches (7.6 cm) in depth. 

2.04 ELECTRICAL POWER REQUIREMENTS 

A. System Power – The Burglary Alarm System shall operate using standard 120 volts AC, 

50/60 Hz power. 

1. Control Primary Power – Transformer power shall be 16.5 VAC, 25VA. 

2. Backup Battery – A rechargeable 12 VDC, gel type, lead acid backup battery 

shall be provided. The battery shall be rated between 7 (AH). 

3. Alarm Power – Alarm power shall be 12 VDC, 600ma maximum. 

4. Auxiliary Standby Power – Standby power shall be 12 VDC, 400 mA load with 4 

hour stand-by.maximum. 

2.05 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 

A. Environmental Conditions – The Burglary Alarm System shall be designed to meet the 

following environmental conditions. 

1. Storage Temperature – The system shall be designed for a storage temperature 

of -10° C to 70°C. 

2. Operating Temperature - The system shall be designed for an operating 

temperature of 0° C to 50°C (32° F to 120°F). 

3. Humidity - The system shall be designed for normal operation in an 85% relative 

humidity environment. 

4. Electromagnetic Interference – The system shall meet or exceed the 

requirements of FCC Part 15, Class B devices, FCC Part 68, IEC EMC directive. 



A. Submission of a proposal confirms that the Contract Documents and site conditions are 

accepted without qualifications unless exceptions are specifically noted. 

B. The site shall be visited on a regular basis to appraise ongoing progress of other trades 

and contracts, make allowances for all ongoing work, and coordinate the requirements of 

this contract in a timely manner. 






A. The System shall be installed and tested in accordance with the Manufacturer’s 

Installation instructions. The following conditions are applicable: 

1. In order to ensure a complete, functional System, for bidding purposes, where 

information is not available from the Owner upon request, the worst case condition 

shall be assumed. 

2. Interfaces shall be coordinated with the Owner’s representative, where appropriate. 

3. All necessary backboxes, pullboxes, connectors, supports, conduit, cable, and wire 

shall be furnished and installed to provide a complete and reliable System 

installation. Exact location of all boxes, conduit, and wiring runs shall be presented 

to the Owner for approval in advance of any installation. 

4. All conduit, cable, and wire shall be installed parallel and square with building lines, 

including raised floor areas. Conduit fill shall not exceed forty percent (40%). All 

wires shall be gathered and tied up to create an orderly installation. 

3.03 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION 

A. The National Account Vendor shall demonstrate the functionality of the System upon 

completion of installation, documenting the result of all tests and providing these results to 

the Owner. The System shall be tested in accordance with the following: 

1. The National Account Vendor shall conduct a complete inspection and test of all 

installed equipment. This includes testing and verifying connection to equipment 

of other Divisions. 

2. The National Account Vendor shall provide staff to test all devices and all 

operational features of the System for witness by the Owner’s representative and 

the Authority having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall provide two-way radio 

communications to assist in the testing. All testing must be witnessed by the 

owner’s representative, prior to acceptance. 

3. The testing and certification shall take place as follows: 

a. System shall be tested in conjunction with the manufacturer’s 


b. All deficiencies noted in the above test shall be corrected. 

c. Test results shall be submitted to the consultant or owner’s 


d. System test witnessed by owner’s representative and correction of any 

deficiencies noted. 

e. The owner’s representative shall accept the System. 

f. System test shall be witnessed by the Authority having Jurisdiction, and 

any deficiencies that are noted shall be corrected. 

4. A letter of certification shall be provided to indicate that the tests have been 

performed and all devices are operational. 






APPENDIX A 

GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 

APPENDIX A 

GEOTECH REPORT

REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL 

ENGINEERING EVALUATION 

PROPOSED BRIDGESTONE/FIRESTONE 

NWC OF VANCE STREET 

AND WEST CENTER AVENUE 

LAKEWOOD, COLORADO 

PSI PROJECT NUMBER 0532281 

Prepared for 

Bridgestone Firestone 


Bloomingdale, Illinois 60108 

Attn: Mr. James Blecha 

Prepared by 

ELECTRONIC COPY 

Professional Service Industries, Inc. 

1070 West 124 th Avenue, Suite 800 

Westminster, Colorado 80234 

Matthew R. Satterfield, P.E. 

(303) 424-5578 Project Engineer 


Kyle R. Duitsman, P.E. 

Department Manager 

April 20, 2011 

Reviewed By: 

Kevin C. Miller, P.E. 

Principal Consultant

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

1.0 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... 1 

2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION ....................................................................................................... 1 

3.0 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION ............................................................................................... 2 

3.1 SITE GEOLOGY AND GEOLOGIC HAZARDS.................................................................................. 2 

3. 2 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS....................................................................................................... 2 

3.2.1 Subsurface Profile ........................................................................................................... 2 

3.2.2 Groundwater Conditions.................................................................................................. 3 

3.2.3 Laboratory Testing .......................................................................................................... 4 

4.0 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION ............................................................................................. 4 

5.0 SITE GRADING RECOMMENDATIONS.................................................................................. 4 

5.1 OVEREXCAVATION AND REPLACEMENT – SWELL MITIGATION...................................................... 4 

5.2 ENGINEERED FILL..................................................................................................................... 6 

5.2.1 Imported Structural Fill .................................................................................................... 6 

5.3 GENERAL FILL PLACEMENT AND TESTING .................................................................................. 6 

6.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................................... 7 

6.1 DRILLED PIER FOUNDATIONS .................................................................................................... 7 

6.2 SEISMIC PARAMETERS.............................................................................................................. 8 

6.3 SLABS ON GRADE..................................................................................................................... 9 

6.4 PAVEMENT DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................................................. 10 

6.4.1 Subgrade Preparation Recommendations.................................................................... 10 

6.4.2 Pavement Thickness Recommendations...................................................................... 11 

6.4.3 Lime Stabilization .......................................................................................................... 12 

6.4.4 Flexible Pavement......................................................................................................... 13 

6.4.5 Aggregate Base Course................................................................................................ 14 

6.4.6 Rigid Pavement ............................................................................................................. 14 

6.4.7 Movement of Pavement Section ................................................................................... 14 

7.0 LIMITATIONS.......................................................................................................................... 14 

ATTACHMENTS 

Site Location Map (Figure 1) 

Boring Location Map (Figure 2) 

Boring Logs (Figures 3 through 11) 

Key to Symbols (Figure 12) 

Appendix A – Laboratory Test Results

Proposed Bridgestone April 20, 2011 

NWC of Vance St. & W. Center Ave. PSI Project No. 532281 

Lakewood, Colorado Page 1 of 15 

1.0 INTRODUCTION 

Professional Service Industries, Inc. (PSI) has conducted a geotechnical engineering 

evaluation for the proposed Bridgestone Automotive Store to be located at the northwest 

corner of the intersection of Vance Street and West Center Avenue in Lakewood, 

Colorado. The purpose of our study was to characterize the subsurface strata at the 

subject site and to develop recommendations for site preparation and for foundation and 

pavement design for the proposed Bridgestone development. Our services on this 

project were authorized by Mr. Kenton Girard with Bridgestone Retail Operations, LLC 

with the Geotechnical Engineering Agreement between PSI and Bridgestone Retail 

Operations, LLC. 

PSI’s scope of services for the geotechnical study did not include an assessment of 

environmental conditions in the soil, bedrock, surface water, groundwater, or air, on or 

below, or around this site. Any statements in this report or on the boring logs regarding 

odors, colors, and unusual or suspicious items or conditions are strictly for informational 

purposes. The report, which follows, presents a brief review of our understanding of the 

project, a discussion of the site and subsurface conditions, and our recommendations. 

2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION 

PSI has been provided with project information for the proposed development from Ms. 

Julie Emmett with Mays and Company. We understand that Bridgestone is planning the 

construction of a Bridgestone/Firestone auto service store to be located at the northwest 

corner of Vance Street and West Center Avenue in Lakewood, Colorado (See Figures 1 

and 2). 

The latitude and longitude of the subject site is approximately 39º 42’ 20” North and 105º 

04’ 49” West. The subject site is bounded by an undeveloped parcel to the north, a 

paved parking area to the west, West Center Avenue to the south, and Vance Street to 

the east. The site proposed for development is currently undeveloped with a mixture of 

weeds and grasses covering the site. The subject site is relatively flat with gentle slope 

to the southeast. 

Based on the information provided to PSI, we understand that the proposed 

development will include the construction of an approximately 8,500 square foot singlestory 

structure with no below grade structures. The Bridgestone building type planned is 

L-2010 SEPT-10L according to the provided site plan. 

PSI has not been provided with the expected loading for the building. Therefore, for the 

purpose of this report, PSI expects that the proposed structure will not exceed column 

loads of 30 kips, wall loads of 1 kip per linear foot, floor loads of 125 psf, and 

concentrated lift loads up to 5 kip point loads. 

A grading plan was not provided for this site; however, based on the existing site 

topography, only minor filling/cutting is anticipated for the majority of the subject 

property. 

Descriptions of the site are based upon observations made during our field exploration 

program. The geotechnical recommendations presented in this report are based upon 

the available project information and the subsurface materials described in this report. If




any of the noted information is incorrect, please inform us so that we may amend the 

recommendations presented in this report, if needed. 

3.0 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION 

The following sections provide information relating to subsurface conditions in the area 

of the proposed addition. The geology section is based upon the, “Geologic Map of the 

Greater Denver Area, Front Range Urban Corridor, Colorado” by Donald E. Trimble and 

Michael N. Machette, dated 1979 and information relating to subsurface conditions 

within the property gathered from our current field study. 

3.1 Site Geology and Geologic Hazards 

The site is located on the high plains approximately 25 miles east of the foothills of the 

Rocky Mountains. Based on the United States Geological Survey (USGS) “Geologic 

Map of the Greater Denver Area, Front Range Urban Corridor, Colorado” by Donald E. 

Trimble and Michael N. Machette, 1979, the majority of the site is mapped as being 

underlain by the Early Tertiary and Late Cretaceous age Denver and Arapahoe 

Formations. The Denver and Arapahoe Formations consist of sandstone, mudstone, 

claystone and conglomerate and is characterized by andesitic materials. 

3. 2 Subsurface Conditions 

As part of PSI’s evaluation of this site, PSI drilled 9 exploratory borings, 5 within the building 

pad and 4 within the parking lot, at the subject site as indicated on Figure 2, the Boring 

Location Map. The borings were drilled to approximate depths of 20 feet below existing 

grades within the proposed building area and to approximate depths of 10 feet below the 

existing grades in the parking areas. The borings were advanced using a CME-55 truck 

mounted drill rig equipped with 4-inch diameter, solid-stem, continuous-flight auger. Soil 

samples were recovered at selected depths during drilling with the truck-mounted drill rig 

using a Modified California Barrel Sampler (inside diameter- 2.0 inches and outside 

diameter- 2.4 inches) driven by a 140-lb. weight free falling 30 inches. The number of 

blows required to drive the sampler 12 inches is designated as the penetration resistance 

(N-value, blows per foot) and provides an indication of the consistency of cohesive soils 

and the relative density of granular materials. While the procedure is similar to that 

employed in the Standard Penetration Test (ASTM D1586), the penetration resistance 

obtained using the California barrel sampler is generally higher than that obtained using the 

standard split spoon sampler. 

An engineer from our office observed the drilling of our borings and logs were prepared of 

the encountered conditions. Individual logs of the borings are presented on Figures 3 

through 11. It should be noted that the subsurface conditions presented on the boring logs 

are representative of the conditions at the specific locations drilled. Variations may occur 

and should be expected across the site. The stratification represents the approximate 

boundary between subsurface materials and the transitions may be gradual and indistinct. 

Water level information, if encountered, obtained during our field operations is also shown 

on the boring logs. 

3.2.1 Subsurface Profile 

In general, the overburden soils consisted of light brown to dark brown, moist, very stiff 

to stiff sandy clay and clayey sand. The overburden material was found overlying




sedimentary bedrock in the borings at depths of 5 ½ to 8 feet below the existing grade 

and consisted of brown, red, brown, and light brown, moist, hard, sandy claystone. The 

following table present the materials encountered during our investigation. 

Material / Property 

Thickness Encountered 

Dry Density (pcf) 

Moisture Content (%) 

*Percent Swell (%) 

Liquid Limit (%) 

Plastic Limit (%) 

Blows per foot 

Sandy 

Range 0 ft 100 – 112 13 – 20 1.6 – 11.2 54 – 60 21 – 22 21 – 58 

Clay Average 0 ft 105 17 7.4 58 22 38 

Sandy 

Claystone 

Bedrock 

Range 5 ½ - 8 100 – 107 19 – 26 0.3 – 1.2 - - 50+ 

Average 8 ft 103 22 0.9 - - 50+ 

PSI performed Denver Swell Testing on selected samples collected during our field 

investigation. The testing yielded swell percentages ranging from 0.3 to 11.2 percent 

when wetted under a 250, 500, or 1,000 psf surcharge pressure. Based on these swell 

percentages, PSI has classified this site as having “high” swell potential. The 

development at this site will need to be designed for high swelling soils. 

The Boring Logs illustrated in Figures 3 through 11 should be reviewed for specific 

information at individual boring locations. These records include soil descriptions, 

stratifications, penetration resistances, locations of the samples and laboratory test data. 

3.2.2 Groundwater Conditions 

Groundwater was not encountered during our drilling operations. However, it should be 

noted that it is possible for the groundwater table to fluctuate during the year depending 

upon climatic and rainfall conditions and changes to surface topography and drainage 

patterns. Also, based on our laboratory data, the sandy claystone may be saturated. 

Discontinuous zones of perched water may also exist, or develop, within the overburden 

materials subsequent to the construction of the pump station. The groundwater levels 

presented in this report are the levels that were measured at the time of our field 

activities.




3.2.3 Laboratory Testing 

The soil samples obtained during the field exploration were transported to the laboratory 

and selected soil samples were tested in the laboratory to determine material properties 

for our evaluation. Laboratory testing was accomplished in general accordance with 

ASTM and other applicable procedures. Laboratory testing was performed on selected 

samples to evaluate the classification, swell and other engineering characteristics of the 

subsurface materials. Laboratory test data along with detailed descriptions of the soils 

can be found on the logs of borings and in Appendix A. The samples that were not 

altered by laboratory testing will be retained for 30 days from the date of this report and 

then will be discarded without further notice. 

4.0 GEOTECHNICAL EVALUATION 

Based on the subsurface conditions observed and our experience with similar materials, 

it is PSI’s opinion that the on-site soils can generally be characterized as having “high” 

swell potential and the proposed development need to be designed to accommodate for 

swell potential. 

Due to the swell potential of the soils obtained during our site investigation, it is our 

opinion that the proposed structure may be supported on a drilled pier foundation system 

bearing within the sedimentary bedrock material encountered during our investigation. A 

structural floor system may also be utilized for the proposed structure. 

PSI provides recommendations for allowable bearing capacity and allowable skin friction 

for drilled pier foundations in Section 6.0 Recommendations of this report. 

Additionally, due to the swell potential of the on-site material, PSI recommends that the 

subgrade to receive pavement and slab-on-grades be overexcavated and replaced as 

moisture conditioned compacted fill material. PSI provides recommendations on depth 

and type of moisture conditioned fill material and the amount of movement that may be 

expected for each alternative. To minimize the potential for movement due to swelling 

soils in the pavement areas, PSI recommends that the subgrade be chemically treated 

with lime. 

The following geotechnical design recommendations have been developed on the basis 

of the described project characteristics and subsurface conditions encountered. Once 

final design/grading plans and specifications are available, a general review by PSI is 

required as a means to check that the recommendations presented in the following 

sections of this report are properly interpreted and implemented. 

5.0 SITE GRADING RECOMMENDATIONS 

Prior to site grading or excavation for foundation construction, the site should be stripped 

of vegetation, topsoil, loose uncompacted fill, soil stockpiles, and debris. The stripped 

vegetation/topsoil may be re-placed as topsoil in designated landscape areas. The 

loose soils or stockpiled soils may be incorporated and placed as structural fill. Trash 

and debris should be disposed of in accordance with local and state regulations. 

5.1 Overexcavation and Replacement – Swell Mitigation 

Due to the “moderate” to “high” swell potential of the existing site soils, swell mitigation 

through overexcavation and replacement should be performed to limit potential




movements in the pavement area. As an alternative to overexcavation and replacement, 

the subgrade may be chemically treated with lime. If potential movement of less than 3 

½ inches is required in pavement areas, PSI recommends that lime treatment of the 

subgrade be performed. 

Below, we provide recommendations for the depth of overexcavation and type of 

replacement soil for the proposed parking area and the amount of potential movement 

that can be expected. 

Pavement Subgrade 

Depth of Overexcavtion 

Below Final Subgrade 

Elevations 

3 feet 

3 feet 

Replacement Soil 

Moisture Conditioned, 

Compacted On-Site Soils 

Moisture Conditioned, 

Compacted Import Non- 

Expansive Soils 

Potential Movement 

5 inches 

3 ½ inches 

1 ½ feet Lime Treated Subgrade ¼ inches 

The owner should perform a cost analysis for each overexcavation recommendation and 

choose which method and depth of excavation would be the most economical for each 

of the proposed alternatives. 

Overexcavation and replacement for the proposed building and parking areas should 

extend 2 feet horizontally beyond their limits. The areas that are excavated and will 

receive structural fill should be graded to drain before fill placement to prevent water 

from being trapped. 

Once the areas below the parking area have been overexcavated, the existing site soils 

should be proofrolled to identify areas of loose soils prior to placement of moisture 

conditioned, compacted soils (either on-site or imported). The proofroll should be 

conducted with a loaded tandem-axle dump truck or similar pneumatic-tired equipment 

with a minimum weight of 15 tons and a maximum weight of 25 tons. 

If the on-site excavated soils are re-used as moisture conditioned, compacted structural 

fill, it should be noted that the moisture content of the existing soils should be maintained 

throughout the construction process. The soils should not be allowed to dry excessively 

and should be replaced as compacted structural fill as detailed in the Section 5.3 below. 

If the soils are allowed to dry after placement, it will need to be removed and replaced. 

Some of the soils encountered at this site are considered sensitive to changes in 

moisture content. Controlling the moisture content variation of a soil will reduce its 

tendency to undergo changes in volume. In this regard, we recommend that positive site 

drainage be provided to reduce infiltration of surface water around the perimeter of the 

concrete anchors and beneath exterior concrete slabs.




5.2 Engineered Fill 

Based on PSI’s field and laboratory data it is our opinion that on-site overburden soils will 

be suitable for re-use as backfill soils and for use as structural fill, provided the material is 

properly moisture conditioned and compacted and the owner accepts a “moderate” 

potential for vertical movement due to swelling soils. If unanticipated material such as 

construction debris, trash, or other undesirable material is encountered during construction, 

they should be removed off site. 

5.2.1 Imported Structural Fill 

Imported structural fill, if required, should be free of organic or other deleterious 

materials, have a liquid limit less than 30, a plasticity index less than 10, and meet the 

following gradation outlined below. This structural fill criteria is intended as a general 

guideline. Imported structural fill materials should have a swell potential of less than 1 

percent when compacted to 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight (MDUW) and at 2 

percent below optimum moisture content (OMC) and tested under a swell test surcharge 

of 500 psf. The MDUW and OMC should be determined by ASTM D698 (Standard 

Proctor). 

Screen Size 


2 Inch 100 

#4 50 – 100 

#200 < 30 

Imported fill material proposed for use on this site that does not meet these criteria 

should be submitted to the project geotechnical engineer for evaluation and approval. 

The geotechnical engineer should evaluate the proposed import fill prior to purchase and 

delivery. Fine-grained soils used for fill require close moisture content control and 

careful placement by the contractor to achieve the recommended degree of compaction 

and to control swell potential and settlement. 

5.3 General Fill Placement and Testing 

Unless otherwise specified, fill material should be compacted to at least 95 percent of 

the maximum dry unit weight as determined by the Standard Proctor Test (ASTM D 

698). Each lift of compacted fill should be tested for density by a representative of the 

geotechnical engineer prior to placement of subsequent lifts. Sand fill soils should be 

moisture conditioned to between two percent below and two percent above optimum 

moisture content and clay fill soils should be moisture conditioned to a range from 

optimum moisture content to four percent above optimum moisture content. All fill 

material should be placed in maximum eight inch loose lifts.




A sample(s) of the proposed backfill soil(s) should be obtained for moisture density 

relationship (proctor test) three to four days prior to backfilling operations to expedite 

compaction and moisture content testing by the materials testing service provider. 

Weather conditions in the site area are typically dry in the summer and early fall. 

Precipitation in the form of snowfall is common from October through March. While 

grading can be inhibited for short periods during and following times of precipitation, 

grading can generally be conducted year round. The major factor that must be 

considered during the winter months is ground freezing. During extended periods of 

sub-freezing weather, it can be difficult to properly moisture condition and compact soils. 

Grading must be conducted during the warmer parts of the day in freezing weather. 

6.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS 

Based on the potential for vertical movement due to the high swelling soils, and the 

relatively shallow depth to bedrock, it is PSI’s opinion that the proposed structure be 

supported on a drilled pier foundation system and that a structurally supported floor 

system be utilized. Swell mitigation through overexcavation and replacement will reduce 

but not eliminate the potential for movement due to swelling soils. A drilled pier 

foundation system will further reduce the potential for movement than overexcavation 

and replacement could. 

6.1 Drilled Pier Foundations 

Piers should be sized using the allowable end-bearing pressures and side shear 

resistance given below. The side shear resistance for the piers should only be 

considered within the bedrock material and should be neglected in the existing 

overburden material. A summary of the pier design criteria are as follows: 

Allowable 

End Bearing 

Pressure 

(psf) 

Allowable 

Side Shear 

Resistance 

(psf) 

Bearing Strata 

Depth of 

Embedment into 

Bedrock 

Uplift Force 

(pounds) 

Hard to very hard 

25,000 2,500 

9 feet 106,000* 

bedrock 

* For 24 inch diameter pier, based on a 7 foot zone of wetting. 

A minimum pier diameter of 24-inches is recommended for the piers. No shear rings or 

bedrock roughening is required during drilling operations. Piers should be reinforced for 

their full length. The structural engineer should size reinforcing steel for the piers based 

upon the tensile forces that could be developed from the difference between the uplift force 

and the dead load applied to the pier. It is recommended that the pier reinforcing steel 

extend up into the grade beam, as determined by the structural engineer. A minimum 8- 

inch void space should be anticipated under all grade beams, between the piers. 

The calculated uplift force should be resisted by a combination of actual dead load on each 

pier plus the resistance in side shear calculated for the portion of the pier in the bearing 

strata, beneath the zone of wetting (7 feet below grade). 

A 1/3 increase in bearing capacity may be used for wind loads of short duration. Net 

tension from structural actions can be resisted using the full 2,500 psf side shear 

resistance within the bedrock material.




Vertical grouping effects of recommended piers can be ignored due to the piers bearing 

into a hard to very hard bedrock. Horizontal grouping effects can be ignored as long as 

the loads are transmitted into the hard to very hard bedrock. 

For a deep foundation system designed and constructed as discussed in this report, we 

estimate total and differential movements on the order of less than ½ inch for this 

project. 

General Pier Construction Details 

Care should be taken to place the steel reinforcement centered within the piers and that 

it remains in position during concrete placement. Enlargement or "mushrooming" of the 

pier, near the ground surface, should not be allowed. Casing of upper overburden 

material is recommended. 

The contractor should be aware that the depth to bedrock varies across the site. During 

PSI’s field investigation, bedrock was found at depths ranging from 5 ½ to 8 feet across the 

site. 

All pier holes should be filled with concrete immediately or as soon as practicable after the 

completion of drilling. In no case shall drilled shafts be left open overnight. Due to the low 

moisture content and calcium carbonate in portions of the subgrade soils encountered, 

casing may be required to keep holes open prior to placing concrete. Water may be 

encountered during drilling and concrete should not be placed by free fall methods if more 

than three inches of water exists in the bottom of any pier hole. If more than three inches of 

water is encountered, concrete placement using tremie methods will be necessary to 

complete pier construction. 

PSI should be retained to observe the drilling of the piers during construction. The 

purpose of the pier drilling observations is to evaluate whether subsurface conditions 

encountered are generally consistent with those anticipated herein. 

6.2 Seismic Parameters 

The project site is located within a municipality that employs the International Building 

Code, 2006 edition. As part of this code, the design of structures must consider dynamic 

forces resulting from seismic events. These forces are dependent upon the magnitude of 

the earthquake event as well as the properties of the soils that underlie the site. As part of 

the procedure to evaluate seismic forces, the code requires the evaluation of the Seismic 

Site Class, which categorizes the site based upon the characteristics of the subsurface 

profile within the upper 100 feet of the ground surface. To define the Site Class for this 

project, we have interpreted the expected results of soil test borings drilled with the project 

site and estimated appropriate soil properties below grade to a depth of 100 feet, as 

permitted by Section 1615.1.1 of the code. The estimated soil properties were based upon 

data available in published geologic reports as well as our experience with subsurface 

conditions in the general site area. 

Based upon our evaluation, it is our opinion that the subsurface conditions within the site 

are consistent with the characteristics of Site Class C as defined in Table 1615.1.1 of the 

building code.




The USGS-NEHRP interpolated probabilistic ground motion values near latitude 39º 42’ 

21” North and 105º 04’ 49” West obtained from the USGS geohazards web page are as 

follows: 

Period 

2% Probability 

of Event in 50 

years 

Site 

Coefficient 

Site 

Coefficient 

(seconds) (% g) F a F v 

0.2 (S s ) 27.2 1.2 NA 

1.0 (S 1 ) 9.8 NA 1.7 

The Site Coefficients, Fa and Fv presented in the above table were interpolated from 

IBC Tables 1615.1.2(1) and 1615.1.2(2) as a function of the site classification and 

mapped spectral response acceleration at the short (S s ) and 1 second (S 1 ) periods. 

6.3 Slabs on Grade 

Due to the “moderate” to “high” swell potential of the on-site soils, PSI recommends that 

proposed structure utilize a structurally supported interior floor slab. 

Due to the “moderate” to “high” swell potential of the on-site soils, PSI recommends that 

the subgrade soils to support the proposed exterior slab-on-grades be overexcavated to 

a depth of 36 inches below final subgrade elevation and replaced as moisture 

conditioned compacted structural fill material. 

For subgrade prepared as recommended and properly compacted fill, a modulus of 

subgrade reaction, k value, of 140 pounds per cubic inch (pci) may be used in the grade 

slab design based on values typically obtained from 1 ft. x 1 ft. plate load tests. 

However, depending on how the slab load is applied, the value will have to be 

geometrically modified. The value should be adjusted for larger areas using the 

following expression for cohesive and cohesionless soil: 

k 

Modulus of Subgrade Reaction, k s = ( ) for cohesive soil and 

B 

B 1 

k s = k ( ) 

2 

for cohesionless soil 

2B 

and 

where: 

k s = coefficient of vertical subgrade reaction for loaded area, 

k = coefficient of vertical subgrade reaction for 1x1 square foot area, 

B = width of area loaded, in feet 

The precautions listed below are considered good construction practice. 

 

Cracking of slabs-on-grade can occur as a result of heaving or compression of the 

supporting soil, but also as a result of concrete curing stresses. The occurrence of 

concrete shrinkage cracks, and problems associated with concrete curing may be 

reduced and/or controlled by limiting the slump of the concrete, proper concrete




placement, finishing, and curing, and by the placement of crack control joints at 

frequent intervals, particularly, where re-entrant slab corners occur. The American 

Concrete Institute (ACI) recommends a maximum panel size (in feet) equal to 

approximately three times the thickness of the slab (in inches) in both directions. 

For example, joints are recommended at a maximum spacing of 12 feet assuming a 

four-inch thick slab. We also recommend that control joints be scored three feet in 

from and parallel to all foundation walls. Using fiber reinforcement in the concrete 

can also control shrinkage cracking. 

 

 

Some increase in moisture content is inevitable as a result of development and 

associated landscaping. However, extreme moisture content increases can be 

largely controlled by proper and responsible site drainage, building maintenance 

and irrigation practices. 

All utility backfill in areas supporting slabs should be moisture conditioned or dried 

by scarification, and compacted. Backfill in all interior and exterior water and sewer 

line trenches should be uniformly compacted. 

Exterior slabs should be isolated from the building. These slabs should be 

reinforced to function as independent units. Movement of these slabs should not 

be transmitted to the building foundation or superstructure. 

6.4 Pavement Design Recommendations 

The following analysis and pavement thickness recommendations are in general 

accordance with AASHTO and the Colorado Department of Transportation Pavement 

Design Manual. 

6.4.1 Subgrade Preparation Recommendations 

Due to the “moderate” to “high” swell potential of the existing site soils, swell mitigation 

through overexcavation and replacement or lime stabilization should be performed to 

limit potential movements in the pavement areas. 

PSI recommends that the subgrade soils to support the proposed pavements be 

overexcavated to a depth of 3 feet below final subgrade elevation and replaced as 

moisture conditioned compacted structural fill in accordance with Section 5.1. It should 

be noted that swell potential is a function of the moisture content and the compacted 

structural fill should be placed with a strict tolerance for moisture content as described in 

Section 5.3. 

Once the areas below the parking area have been overexcavated, the existing site soils 

should be proofrolled to identify areas of loose soils prior to placement of moisture 

conditioned, compacted soils (either on-site or imported). The proofroll should be 

conducted with a loaded tandem-axle dump truck or similar pneumatic-tired equipment 

with a minimum weight of 15 tons and a maximum weight of 25 tons. 

As an alternative to the overexcavation and replacement alternatives, PSI recommends 

that the subgrade be chemically treated with lime.




6.4.2 Pavement Thickness Recommendations 

Based on the sandy clay material encountered during our subsurface investigation, PSI has 

assumed an R-value of 5 to support the proposed pavement sections if on-site soils are 

used for overexcavation and replacement. If an imported structural fill material is used for 

backfill during overexcavation and replacement, a higher subgrade support value can be 

used. Based on the properties of the imported structural fill recommended in Section 5.2.1, 

PSI has based this report on the imported structural fill providing at least an R-Value of 60 

to support the proposed pavement sections if imported structural fill is used.. 

PSI has identified two pavement categories based on anticipated traffic use and traffic 

loads. We have assigned estimated traffic loads to each category expressed in EDLA’s, 

where the EDLA is the equivalent daily load applications of vehicles relative to an 18-kip 

single axle load. We have also assumed the following design criteria; a 20-yr design life, 

a Pavement Serviceability Index (PSI) of 2.0 and a Reliability of 85%. 

 

 

PSI has assigned an estimated EDLA of 2 for the general parking stall (Light Duty 

Traffic) area. Anticipated traffic in this area includes private passenger vehicles or 

similar vehicles. 

The drive lanes within the site have been assigned an estimated EDLA of 5 (Heavy 

Duty Traffic - Drive Lanes), PSI anticipates that traffic in this area will be mixed use 

consist of delivery vehicles of varying size and weight and passenger vehicles. 

Pavement section options are provided for full depth asphalt, asphalt over aggregate 

base course, and rigid (Portland Cement Concrete) pavement. However, it is PSI’s 

experience that pavements with properly placed base aggregate on a properly drained 

grade outperforms full depth pavement sections. Based on this information for the 

subject pavement, the following pavement sections were determined, as presented 

below. 

The following table presents pavement section thicknesses if swell mitigation through 

overexcavation and replacement with moisture conditioned and compacted on-site soils 

is selected. 

Pavement Area 

Composite Section 

(inches) 

Full-Depth Asphalt 

(inches) 

Full-Depth 

Portland Cement 

Concrete (inches) 

Light Duty Traffic 

Parking Stalls 

(EDLA = 2) 

Heavy Duty Traffic 

Drive Lanes 

(EDLA = 5) 

4 inches Asphalt 

over 

8 inches Aggregate 

Base Course 

4 ½ inches Asphalt 

over 


Base Course 

6 ½ inches 5 inches 

7 ½ inches 5 inches




The following table presents pavement section thicknesses if swell mitigation through 

overexcavation and replacement with moisture conditioned and compacted import soils 

is selected. 

Pavement Area 


(inches) 


(inches) 

Full-Depth 





(EDLA = 2) 


Drive Lanes 

(EDLA = 5) 


over 


Base Course 


over 


Base Course 

4 ½ inches 4 ½ inches 

5 inches 4 ½ inches 

Concrete pavement at least seven inches thick is recommended for the trash 

dumpster run-up due to the heavy wheel and impact loads that this area receives. The 

run-up should extend far enough away to support all wheels of the sanitation truck while 

stopped and in the loading position. Concrete pavement is also recommended in areas, 

which receive continuous repetitive traffic such as product unloading areas and parking 

lot entrances. 

6.4.3 Lime Stabilization 

In the proposed pavement areas, as an alternative to overexcavation and replacement 

with on-site or imported structural fill material, PSI recommends that the pavement 

subgrade be chemically stabilized with lime. The pavement subgrade should consist of 

a mixture of native or imported soils, hydrated, or quick lime and water as outlined by 

ASTM C997 and CDOT 307. 

If this alternative is selected, PSI recommends that the pavement subgrade be 

overexcavated to a depth of 12 inches below grade and that the existing subgrade be 

blended with hydrated or quick lime and recompacted to provide a suitable pavement 

support section. 

The lime mix design should meet the following requirements: 

 

Minimum pH of 12.4 after completion of initial mixing 

Plasticity Index (PI) less than 6 

 

 

 

Minimum hydrated lime of 5.0 percent by dry weight 

Minimum unconfined compressive strength of 200 psi (28,800 psf) 

Sulfate concentrations not to exceed 0.5 percent




PSI should be contacted several days prior to placement of a lime treated subgrade to 

obtain a sample of the soil and lime to be used to ensure adequate time to perform the 

proctor and to verify that the proctor is performed in a manner consistent with how the 

lime treated subgrade will be placed in the field. 

Following the lime treatment of the pavement subgrade the following pavement design 

thicknesses are recommended: 

Pavement Sections with Lime Treated Subgrade 

Pavement Area 


(inches) 


(inches) 

Full-Depth 





(EDLA = 2) 


Drive Lanes 

(EDLA = 5) 


over 


Base Course 


over 


Base Course 

4 ½ inches 5 inches 

5 inches 5 inches 

6.4.4 Flexible Pavement 

Structural sections for parking lot and drive lane pavements may be full depth asphalt, a 

composite section of asphalt pavement over aggregate base course or Portland Cement 

concrete pavement. 

Flexible pavement is not recommended for Dumpster Pad/ Sanitation Truck Run-up 

areas. For Dumpster Pad/Sanitation Truck Run-up areas we recommend rigid 

pavement as discussed in the following Rigid Pavement Section. Allowances for proper 

drainage and proper material selection of base materials are most important for 

performance of asphaltic pavements. Ruts and birdbaths in asphalt pavement allow for 

quick deterioration of the pavement primarily due to saturation of the underlying base 

and subgrade. 

Hot bituminous pavement should meet the requirements as detailed for SuperPave 

Mixtures in Colorado Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and 

Bridge Construction. Material meeting the Colorado Department of Transportation 

requirements for Grading S (¾ inch nominal) or Grading SG (1 ½ inch nominal) is 

recommended. In addition, the following are presented as general guidelines for properties 

of asphaltic concrete.




Parking Lot 

Asphalt Cement PG 64-22 

Asphalt Content 

As per mix design 

Percent Air Voids 3½-5 

Asphalt material should be obtained from an approved mix design stating the SuperPave 

Mixture properties, including optimum asphalt content, job mix formula, and recommended 

mixing and placing temperatures. Materials and construction methods should be in 

accordance with the CDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction 

Section 403. 

6.4.5 Aggregate Base Course 

If aggregate base course is used as part of the pavement section, the materials should 

conform to CDOT requirements for Class 5 or 6 aggregate base course per Table 703-2 

and construction methods should conform to Section 304 of the Colorado Department of 

Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. 

6.4.6 Rigid Pavement 

The use of concrete for on-site pavements may be considered by the owner. Should 

concrete pavement be utilized, the concrete should be properly reinforced and jointed 

and should be constructed from a concrete mixture, which has a 28-day minimum 

laboratory compressive strength of 4,000 psi. We recommend a maximum water cement 

ratio of 0.45 and an air-entrainment specification of 5 percent (±1.5 percent) be followed. 

Expansion joints should be sealed with a polyurethane sealant so that moisture 

infiltration into the subgrade soils and resultant concrete deterioration at the joints is 

reduced. 

6.4.7 Movement of Pavement Section 

If should be noted that the site soils are sensitive to moisture and allowing the excessive 

drying of the soils will allow for a greater potential for movement. The proposed 

development should be designed as recommended above to keep the loss of moisture 

from the site soils to a minimum and therefore reduce the potential for vertical heave of 

the pavements. The contractor should be aware that considerable efforts may need to 

be made to properly moisture condition the compacted fill to limit the potential for 

swelling soils. 

7.0 LIMITATIONS 

The recommendations submitted are based on the available subsurface information 

obtained by PSI and design details furnished by Bridgestone/Firestone. If there are 

revisions to the plans for this project or if deviations from the subsurface conditions noted in 

this report are encountered during construction, PSI should be notified immediately to 

determine if changes in the foundation recommendations are required. If PSI is not




retained to perform these functions, PSI will not be responsible for the impact of those 

conditions on the project. 

The geotechnical engineer warrants that the findings, recommendations, specifications, or 

professional advice contained herein have been made in accordance with generally 

accepted professional geotechnical engineering practices in the local area. No other 

warranties are implied or expressed. 

After the plans and specifications are more complete, the geotechnical engineer should be 

retained and provided the opportunity to review the final design plans and specifications to 

check that our engineering recommendations have been properly incorporated into the 

design documents. At that time, it may be necessary to submit supplementary 

recommendations. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of Bridgestone 

Firestone and their consultants for the specific application to the Proposed Bridgestone 

Automotive Store located at the northwest corner of the intersection of Vance Street and 

West Center Avenue in Lakewood, Colorado.

Site 

N 

Bridgestone - Lakewood, Colorado 

JOB NO. 532281 

Aerial taken from Google Earth 

Site Location Map FIGURE NO. 1

FIGURE: 3 

DATE STARTED: 4/5/11 DRILL COMPANY: Dakota Drilling 

DATE COMPLETED: 4/5/11 

DRILLER: NF LOGGED BY: CW 

COMPLETION DEPTH 20.0 ft DRILL RIG: CME-55 

BENCHMARK: 

N/A 

DRILLING METHOD: 4" Solid Stem Auger 

ELEVATION: N/A SAMPLING METHOD: 2-in SS/ Mod. California 

LATITUDE: 

HAMMER TYPE: Manual BORING LOCATION: 

LONGITUDE: 

EFFICIENCY N/A SW Bldg Corner 

STATION: N/A OFFSET: N/A 

REMARKS: 

Elevation (feet) 

Depth, (feet) 

0 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 

Recovery (inches) 

REVIEWED BY: MS See Boring Location Map 

MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 

SANDY LEAN CLAY (CL) AND SANDY FAT 

CLAY (CH) , with CLAYEY SAND (SC) in 

parts, possible fill material to 4 feet, light brown 

and dark brown, moist, stiff to very stiff 

USCS Classification 

SPT Blows per 6-inch (SS) 

Moisture, % 

Water 

0 

0 

BORING B1 

While Drilling 

Upon Completion 

Delay 

STANDARD PENETRATION 

TEST DATA 

N in blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

25 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Qp 

2.0 

50 

4.0 

None Encountered 


Additional 

Remarks 

N/A 

1 

12 

6-15 

N=21 

17 

DD = 103 pcf 

S(250) = 8.9% 

P = 6.5k 

5 

2 

12 

CL 

20-30 

N=50 

15 

DD = 114 pcf 

S(500) = 7.7% 

P = 16.4k 

-200 = 57.9% 

10 

3 

6 

SANDY CLAYSTONE BEDROCK (CL) , 

CLAYEY SANDSTONE (SC) in parts, reddish 

brown and light brown, moist, hard 

50/6" 

26 

>> 

DD = 100 pcf 

S(1000) = 0.3% 

P = 2.5k 

15 

4 

4 

CL 

50/4" 

>> 

20 

5 

5 

50/5" 

>> 


451 East 124th Avenue 

Thornton, CO 80241 

Telephone: (303) 424-5578 

PROJECT NO.: 0532281 

PROJECT: 

Bridgestone 

LOCATION: NWC of Vance St & W. Center Ave. 

Lakewood, CO 

The stratification lines represent approximate boundaries. The transition may be gradual. Sheet 1 of 1

FIGURE: 4 





BENCHMARK: 

N/A 



LATITUDE: 


LONGITUDE: 

EFFICIENCY N/A SE Bldg Corner 


REMARKS: 


Depth, (feet) 

0 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 










Moisture, % 

Water 

0 

0 

BORING B2 



Delay 


TEST DATA 

N in blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

25 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Qp 

2.0 

50 

4.0 



Additional 

Remarks 

N/A 

1 

12 

10-14 

N=24 

20 

>> 

DD = 112 pcf 

LL = 60 

PL = 22 

CL 

5 

2 

12 

14-22 

N=36 

13 

DD = 99 pcf 

-200 = 41.3% 




10 

3 

6 

50/6" 

23 

>> 

DD = 103 pcf 

-200 = 86.0% 

CL 

15 

4 

4 

50/4" 

>> 

20 

5 

4 

50/4" 

>> 




Telephone: (303) 424-5578 


PROJECT: 

Bridgestone 


Lakewood, CO 


FIGURE: 5 





BENCHMARK: 

N/A 



LATITUDE: 


LONGITUDE: 

EFFICIENCY N/A North Garage Wall 


REMARKS: 


Depth, (feet) 

0 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 






parts, possible fill material to 2.5 feet, light brown 




Moisture, % 

Water 

0 

0 

BORING B3 



Delay 


TEST DATA 

N in blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

25 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Qp 

2.0 

50 

4.0 



Additional 

Remarks 

N/A 

1 

12 

CL 

15-17 

N=32 

16 

-200 = 62.2% 

5 

2 

12 

15-25 

N=40 

16 

DD = 107 pcf 

S(500) = 6.3% 

P = 4.9k 




10 

3 

6 

50/6" 

19 

>> 

DD = 107 pcf 

S(1000) = 1.1% 

P = 4.4k 

-200 = 70.5% 

CL 

15 

4 

6 

50/6" 

>> 

20 

5 

4 

50/4" 

>> 




Telephone: (303) 424-5578 


PROJECT: 

Bridgestone 


Lakewood, CO 


FIGURE: 6 





BENCHMARK: 

N/A 



LATITUDE: 


LONGITUDE: 

EFFICIENCY N/A East Bldg Wall 


REMARKS: 


Depth, (feet) 

0 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 

1 


12 








CL 


12-15 

N=27 

Moisture, % 

20 

Water 

0 

0 

BORING B4 



Delay 


TEST DATA 

N in blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

25 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Qp 

2.0 

50 

4.0 

>> 



Additional 

Remarks 

DD = 109 pcf 

LL = 59 

PL = 22 

S(250) = 10.7% 

P = 14.2k 

N/A 

5 

2 

11 

30-20/5" 

N=50 

14 

DD = 109 pcf 

S(500) = 4.7% 

P = 9.5k 

-200 = 49.2% 




10 

3 

6 

50/6" 

23 

>> 

DD = 103 pcf 

S(1000) = 1.2% 

P = 5.7k 

CL 

15 

4 

5 

50/5" 

>> 

20 

5 

5 

50/5" 

>> 




Telephone: (303) 424-5578 


PROJECT: 

Bridgestone 


Lakewood, CO 


FIGURE: 7 





BENCHMARK: 

N/A 



LATITUDE: 


LONGITUDE: 

EFFICIENCY N/A NW Bldg Corner 


REMARKS: 


Depth, (feet) 

0 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 

1 


12 








CL 


12-15 

N=27 

Moisture, % 

20 

Water 

0 

0 

BORING B5 



Delay 


TEST DATA 

N in blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

25 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Qp 

2.0 

50 

4.0 

>> 



Additional 

Remarks 

DD = 103 pcf 

LL = 54 

PL = 21 

S(250) = 7.7% 

P = 8.8k 

N/A 

5 

2 

11 

20-30/5" 

N=50 

16 

DD = 100 pcf 

S(500) = 1.6% 

P = 1.5k 

-200 = 54.5% 




10 

3 

6 

50/6" 

19 

>> 

-200 = 77.8% 

CL 

15 

4 

5 

50/5" 

>> 

20 

5 

6 

50/6" 

>> 




Telephone: (303) 424-5578 


PROJECT: 

Bridgestone 


Lakewood, CO 


FIGURE: 8 





BENCHMARK: 

N/A 



LATITUDE: 


LONGITUDE: 

EFFICIENCY N/A SW Pavement Area 


REMARKS: 


Depth, (feet) 

0 

5 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 

1 

2 


12 

12 








CL 


16-20 

N=36 

20-25 

N=45 

Moisture, % 

18 

14 

Water 

0 

0 

BORING P1 



Delay 


TEST DATA 

N in blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

25 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Qp 

2.0 

50 

4.0 



Additional 

Remarks 

Composite Sample 

A-7-6 (15) 

CL 

DD = 103 pcf 

S(250) = 11.2% 

P = 10.6k 

-200 = 65.4% 

-200 = 59.2% 

N/A 




10 

3 

6 

50/6" 

>> 

CL 




Telephone: (303) 424-5578 


PROJECT: 

Bridgestone 


Lakewood, CO 


FIGURE: 9 





BENCHMARK: 

N/A 



LATITUDE: 


LONGITUDE: 

EFFICIENCY N/A SE Pavement Area 


REMARKS: 


Depth, (feet) 

0 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 

1 


12 








CL 


14-16 

N=30 

Moisture, % 

18 

Water 

0 

0 

BORING P2 



Delay 


TEST DATA 

N in blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

25 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Qp 

2.0 

50 

4.0 

>> 



Additional 

Remarks 


A-7-6 (12) 

CL 

DD = 105 pcf 

LL = 58 

PL = 22 

S(250) 8.5% 

P = 11.8k 

N/A 

5 

2 

12 

21-25 

N=46 

15 

DD = 110 pcf 

S(500) = 6.3% 

P = 17.4k 

-200 = 65.3% 




10 

3 

5 

50/5" 

>> 

CL 




Telephone: (303) 424-5578 


PROJECT: 

Bridgestone 


Lakewood, CO 


FIGURE: 10 





BENCHMARK: 

N/A 



LATITUDE: 


LONGITUDE: 

EFFICIENCY N/A NE Pavement Area 


REMARKS: 


Depth, (feet) 

0 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 

1 


12 








CL 


12-14 

N=26 

Moisture, % 

19 

Water 

0 

0 

BORING P3 



Delay 


TEST DATA 

N in blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

25 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Qp 

2.0 

50 

4.0 



Additional 

Remarks 


A-7-6 (27) 

CH 

DD = 106 pcf 

S(250) = 10.4% 

P = 20.0k 

N/A 

5 

2 

10 

30-20/4" 

N=50 

15 

-200 = 52.0% 




10 

3 

6 

50/6" 

>> 

CL 




Telephone: (303) 424-5578 


PROJECT: 

Bridgestone 


Lakewood, CO 


FIGURE: 11 





BENCHMARK: 

N/A 



LATITUDE: 


LONGITUDE: 

EFFICIENCY N/A NW Pavement Area 


REMARKS: 


Depth, (feet) 

0 

Graphic Log 

Sample Type 

Sample No. 

1 


12 








CL 


15-19 

N=34 

Moisture, % 

18 

Water 

0 

0 

BORING P4 



Delay 


TEST DATA 

N in blows/ft 

PL 

Moisture 

LL 

25 

STRENGTH, tsf 

Qu 

Qp 

2.0 

50 

4.0 



Additional 

Remarks 


A-7-6 (9) 

CL 

DD = 107 pcf 

S(250) = 9.7% 

P = 10.3k 

-200 = 61.9% 

N/A 

5 

2 

12 

20-38 

N=58 

13 

>> 

DD = 102 pcf 

S(500) = 2.9% 

P = 3.6k 

-200 = 43.4% 




10 

3 

6 

50/6" 

>> 

CL 




Telephone: (303) 424-5578 


PROJECT: 

Bridgestone 


Lakewood, CO 


KEY TO SYMBOLS 


USCS Low Plasticity Clay 

Shale 

HSA = Hollow Stem Auger 

CFA = Continuous Flight Auger 

SPT = Standard Penetration Test 

DCP = Dynamic Cone Penetrometer 

SS = Split-spoon Sampler 

ST = Shelby Tube Sampler 

RC = Rock Core 

DD = Dry Density 

LL = Liquid Limit 

PL = Plastic Limit 

Qu = Unconfined Compressive 

Strength 

Qp = Pocket Penetrometer 

RQD = Rock Quality Designation 

REC'D = Rock Core Recovery Percentage 

PID = Photo Ionic Detector (ppm) 

MR* = Unable to determine depth of water 

due to mud rotary drilling methods 

The borings were advanced into the ground using hollow stem augers. At regular intervals throughout the boring depths, soil 

samples were obtained with either a 1.4-inch I.D., 2.0-inch O.D., split-spoon sampler or a 3-inch diameter Shelby tube. The 

split-spoon sampler was first seated 6-inches to penetrate any loose cuttings and then driven an additional foot where possible 

with blows of a 140 pound hammer falling 30-inches. The number of hammer blows required to drive the sampler each 6-inch 

increment is recorded in the field. The penetration resistance "N-value" is redesignated as the number of hammer blows 

required to drive the sampler the final foot and, when properly evaluated, is an index to cohesion for clays and relative density for 

sands. The split-spoon sampling procedures used during this exploration are in general accordance with ASTM Designation D 

1586. 

Relatively undisturbed Shelby tube samples were obtained by forcing a section of 3-inch diameter steel tubing into the soil at the 

desired sampling levels. This sampling procedure was in general accordance with ASTM Designation D 1587. Each tube, 

together with the encased soil, was carefully removed from the ground, sealed and transported to the laboratory for testing. 




Telephone: (303) 424-5578 

Fax: (303) 423-5625 

PSI Job No.: 

Project: 

Location: 

0532281 

Bridgestone 

NWC of Vance St & W. Center Ave. 

Lakewood, CO

APPENDIX A 

Laboratory Test Results

100 

US SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES US SIEVE NUMBERS 

HYDROMETER 

1.5 3/4 3/8 4 10 16 30 40 100 200 

90 

80 

70 

% 

F 

I 

N 

E 

R 

60 

50 

40 

by 

W 

E 

I 

G 

H 

T 

30 

20 

10 

0 

1000 

100 

10 

1 

0.1 

0.01 

0.001 

GRAIN SIZE (mm) 

GRAVEL SAND 

COBBLES COARSE FINE CRS MED FINE SILT OR CLAY 

Specimen I.D. Description USCS AASHTO Group Index LL PI PL 

P1 @ 0-5 FEET Sandy Lean Clay 

CL A-7-6 15 46 28 18 


CL A-7-6 12 42 25 17 

P3 @ 0-5 FEET Sandy Fat Clay 

CH A-7-6 27 57 36 21 


CL A-7-6 9 47 24 23 

Specimen I.D. D100 D60 D30 D10 Cc Cu %Gravel %Sand %Silt&Clay 

P1 @ 0-5 FEET 19.00 8 30 62 

P2 @ 0-5 FEET 2.00 0 39 61 

P3 @ 0-5 FEET 4.75 0 25 75 

P4 @ 0-5 FEET 19.00 0.14 12 36 52 

Bridgestone - Lakewood, CO 

GRADATION CURVES 

JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532281 

A-1

12 

SWELL-CONSOLIDATION TEST 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

100 1000 10000 100000 

Sample Location 

B1 

Dry Density 

103 pcf 

Sample Depth 

2.5 feet Moisture Content 17.0 % 

Sample Description Sandy Clay 

Volume Change 

8.9 % 


CL 

Swell Pressure 6,500 psf 


SWELL - CONSOLIDATION TEST 

JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-2

10 


8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

-4 

100 1000 10000 100000 


B1 

Dry Density 

114 pcf 

Sample Depth 

5 feet Moisture Content 15.1 % 


Volume Change 

7.7 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-3

12 


10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

100 1000 10000 100000 


B1 

Dry Density 

100 pcf 

Sample Depth 


Sample Description Sandy Claystone Bedrock Volume Change 

0.3 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-4

10 


8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

-4 

100 1000 10000 100000 


B3 

Dry Density 

107 pcf 

Sample Depth 



Volume Change 

6.3 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-5

12 


10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

100 1000 10000 100000 


B3 

Dry Density 

107 pcf 

Sample Depth 



1.1 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-6

12 


10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

100 1000 10000 100000 


B4 

Dry Density 

109 pcf 

Sample Depth 



Volume Change 10.7 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-7

12 


10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

100 1000 10000 100000 


B4 

Dry Density 

109 pcf 

Sample Depth 



Volume Change 

4.7 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-8

12 


10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

100 1000 10000 100000 


B4 

Dry Density 

103 pcf 

Sample Depth 

B4 feet Moisture Content 23.3 % 


1.2 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-9

10 


8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

-4 

100 1000 10000 100000 


B5 

Dry Density 

103 pcf 

Sample Depth 



Volume Change 

7.7 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-10

10 


8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

-4 

100 1000 10000 100000 


B5 

Dry Density 

100 pcf 

Sample Depth 



Volume Change 

1.6 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-11

12 


10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

-4 

100 1000 10000 100000 


P1 

Dry Density 

103 pcf 

Sample Depth 





CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-12

10 


8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

-4 

100 1000 10000 100000 


P2 

Dry Density 

105 pcf 

Sample Depth 



Volume Change 

8.5 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-13

12 


10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

100 1000 10000 100000 


P2 

Dry Density 

110 pcf 

Sample Depth 



Volume Change 

6.3 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-14

12 


10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

100 1000 10000 100000 


P3 

Dry Density 

106 pcf 

Sample Depth 





CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-15

12 


10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

-4 

100 1000 10000 100000 


P4 

Dry Density 

107 pcf 

Sample Depth 



Volume Change 

9.7 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-16

12 


10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0 

-2 

100 1000 10000 100000 


P4 

Dry Density 

102 pcf 

Sample Depth 



Volume Change 

2.9 % 


CL 




JOB NO. 

FIGURE NO. 

532181 

A-17

June 21, 2012 

Bridgestone Retail Operations 


Bloomingdale, Illinois 60108 

Attention: 

Subject 

Mr. Scot Dever 

Addendum 1 to Original Report 

Proposed Bridgestone/Firestone 

NWC of Vance Street and West Center Avenue 

Lakewood, Colorado 

PSI Project No. 0532281 

Dear Mr. Dever: 

In response to the recent discussions with Mays & Company, we are pleased to transmit this 

addendum to PSI’s original geotechnical investigation. This addendum includes 

recommendations to aide in design of the proposed Bridgestone/Firestone in Lakewood, 

Colorado. 

Project Information 

PSI understands that Bridgestone/Firestone is planning the construction of a new retail facility at 

the northwest corner of Vance Street and West Center Avenue in Lakewood, Colorado. 

Original Report 

PSI performed a geotechnical investigation for the proposed development and issued a report 

entitled, “Report of Geotechnical Engineering Evaluation, Proposed Bridgestone/Firestone, 

NWC of Vance Street and West Center Avenue, Lakewood, Colorado,” PSI Project No. 

0532281, dated April 20, 2011 . 

Additional Information 

Subsequent to issuance of the above referenced report, PSI has had phone conversations with 

Ms. Michelle Smith and others with Mays & Company. Briefly, PSI understands that due to cost 

considerations, alternative recommendations are requested to include overexcavation and 

recompaction with imported soils, and a shallow foundation system. 

Alternative Foundation Design 

Based on the subsurface conditions observed and our experience with similar materials, it is PSI’s 

opinion that the on-site overburden soils and bedrock can generally be characterized as having 

“moderate” to “high” swell potential and the proposed development should be designed to 

accommodate for swell potential. 

Professional Service Industries, Inc. • 1070 West 124 th Ave, Suite 800 • Westminster, Colorado 80234 • 303-424-5578 (phone)

Bridgestone/Firestone – Lakewood, CO Addendum June 21, 2012 

PSI Project No. 532281 Page 2 of 6 

Based on the potential for vertical movement due to the high swelling soils and 

Bridgestone/Firestone’s maximum allowable movement requirements (1 inch), it is PSI’s opinion 

that the proposed structures be supported on a drilled pier foundation system and that a structurally 

supported floor system be utilized. However, as an alternative to the drilled pier foundation system, 

PSI recommends that the proposed structures be placed on shallow footing foundations bearing on 

non-expansive imported structural fill. 

If the shallow footing foundation alternative is selected, PSI recommends that overexcavation 

and replacement with structural fill be performed within the building pad area to reduce the 

potential movement of the building due to swelling soils. This overexcavation should extend to a 

depth of 4 feet below bottom of footings, 7 feet total. It should be noted that these 

recommendations are based on a depth of wetting of 7 feet below grade, an average swell 

potential of 5 percent for native in-situ soils, an average swell percentage of 2.5 percent for 

moisture conditioned and compacted on site soils, and an average swell percentage of less 

than 1 percent for moisture conditioned and compacted non-expansive imported structural fill 

material. 

The engineering design team should perform a cost analysis of the various depths and type of 

structural fill and determine the amount of risk that may be tolerated from swelling soils. The 

overexcavation and replacement with on-site soils should extend 10 feet horizontally on the 

north, south and west sides and should extend 5 feet horizontally on the east side. Additionally, 

PSI recommends a 5 foot horizontal zone of inorganic/non-irrigated material around the 

proposed structure to reduce the potential infiltration of water to moisture-sensitive soils. 

On-Site Structural Fill Material 

Based on PSI’s field and laboratory data it is our opinion that on-site overburden soils will NOT be 

suitable for re-use as backfill soils and for use as structural fill. Also, the claystone bedrock should 

NOT be used as fill material. 

Imported Structural Fill 

Imported structural fill should be free of organic or other deleterious materials, have a liquid limit 

less than 30, a plasticity index less than 10, and meet the following gradation outlined below. 

This structural fill criteria is intended as a general guideline. Imported structural fill materials 

should have a swell potential of less than 1 percent when compacted to 95 percent of maximum 

dry unit weight (MDUW) and at 2 percent below optimum moisture content (OMC) and tested 

under a swell test surcharge of 500 psf. The MDUW and OMC should be determined by ASTM 

D698 (Standard Proctor).



Screen Size 


2 Inch 100 

#4 50 – 100 

#200 < 30 

Imported fill material proposed for use on this site that does not meet these criteria should be 

submitted to the project geotechnical engineer for evaluation and approval. The geotechnical 

engineer should evaluate the proposed import fill prior to purchase and delivery. Fine-grained 

soils used for fill require close moisture content control and careful placement by the contractor 

to achieve the recommended degree of compaction and to control swell potential and 

settlement. 

General Fill Placement and Testing 

Unless otherwise specified, fill material should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the 

maximum dry unit weight as determined by the Standard Proctor Test (ASTM D 698). Each lift 

of compacted fill should be tested for density by a representative of the geotechnical engineer 

prior to placement of subsequent lifts. Sand fill soils should be moisture conditioned to between 

two percent below and two percent above optimum moisture content and clay fill soils should be 

moisture conditioned to a range from optimum moisture content to four percent above optimum 

moisture content. Fill material should be placed in maximum eight inch loose lifts. A compaction 

test should be performed for every 2,500 square feet for each lift of soil placed. 

A sample(s) of the proposed backfill soil(s) should be obtained for moisture density relationship 

(proctor test) three to four days prior to backfilling operations to expedite compaction and 

moisture content testing by the materials testing service provider. 

Shallow Footing Foundation System 

As an alternative to the drilled pier foundation system, PSI recommends that the proposed 

structures be supported on continuous or individual column footings provided that the subgrade 

soils are overexcavated and replaced with moisture conditioned and compacted, structural fill 

material as outlined previously. The footings should be designed for an allowable soil bearing 

pressure as shown in the following tables: 

Allowable Bearing Capacity of Continuous 

Footing (psf) 

Allowable Bearing Capacity 

Bearing Depth of 

Foundation Below 

Existing Grade 

3 feet 4,000 psf



Allowable Bearing Capacity of Individual 

Column Pad (psf) 

Allowable Bearing Capacity 

Bearing Depth of 

Foundation Below 

Existing Grade 

3 feet 5,000 psf 

The allowable bearing capacities provided above are based on a factor of safety of 3 and that the 

imported structural fill material meets the recommendations listed above. 

Continuous footings supporting bearing walls should incorporate a minimum lateral dimension of 16 

inches. PSI recommends that the interior and exterior foundations bear at a depth of 36 inches 

below grade for frost protection and to reduce the heave potential. Exterior and interior columns 

should not bear at a depth lower than 36 below grade to allow for a buffer between high swell 

potential soils and bedrock and the foundation bearing elevation. 

The uplift capacity of shallow foundations should be limited to the weight of the foundation concrete 

plus the weight of the soil immediately above the footing. A concrete unit weight of 145 pcf should 

be used for design purposes. 

Lateral loads applied to the foundations will be resisted by a combination of passive pressure 

against the sides and friction along the base. For design purposes, PSI recommends using an 

equivalent fluid pressure of 50 pcf for the “active” case and 70 pcf for the “at-rest” case. A passive 

pressure of 250 pcf along with a coefficient of friction of 0.3 is recommended to a depth of 15 feet. 

The foundation excavations should be observed by a representative of PSI prior to reinforcing steel 

or concrete placement to assess that the foundation bearing materials are capable of supporting 

the design loads and are consistent with the materials discussed in this report. Soft or loose zones 

encountered at the bottom of the footing should be removed and replaced with properly compacted 

fill as directed by the geotechnical engineer. 

After the foundation bearing materials have been approved, steel reinforcement and concrete 

should be placed as quickly as possible to avoid exposure of the footing bottoms to wetting and 

drying. Surface run-off water should be drained away from the excavations and not be allowed to 

pond. If possible, the foundation concrete should be placed during the same day the excavation is 

made. If it is required that the excavation be left open for more than one day, they should be 

protected to reduce evaporation or entry of moisture. Excavations should be careful to prevent 

caving. 

6.2 Slabs on Grade 

A slab-on-grade interior floor slab system may be utilized for the proposed structures provided 

that the swell mitigation within the building areas as previously outlined is performed. PSI 

anticipates that slabs-on-grades placed on moisture conditioned, imported, structural fill could 

experience total movement on the order of ½ inch with differential movements on the order of ¼ 

inch over a 50 foot span. 

If the slabs are placed on the imported structural fill, PSI recommends a subgrade support 

modulus (k-value) of 125-pci (based on a 1 foot square plate load test) be used for slab design. 

However, depending on how the slab load is applied, the value will have to be geometrically



modified. The value should be adjusted for larger areas using the following expression for 

cohesive and cohesionless soil: 

Where concrete slabs will be covered with tile or other moisture sensitive covering, we recommend 

that the slabs be underlain by a vapor retarder and a 4 inch sub-base of coarse aggregate 

conforming to ASTM No. 57 or 67 to reduce vapor transmission through the slab. 

The above referenced Modulus of Subgrade Reaction value will allow for the expected car lift loads, 

rack post loads and vehicle loads on the slab-on-grades. 

The precautions listed below are considered good construction practice. 

Cracking of slabs-on-grade can occur as a result of heaving or compression of the 

supporting soil, but also as a result of concrete curing stresses. The occurrence of concrete 

shrinkage cracks, and problems associated with concrete curing may be reduced and/or 

controlled by limiting the slump of the concrete, proper concrete placement, finishing, and 

curing, and by the placement of crack control joints at frequent intervals, particularly, where 

re-entrant slab corners occur. The American Concrete Institute (ACI) recommends a 

maximum panel size (in feet) equal to approximately three times the thickness of the slab (in 

inches) in both directions. For example, joints are recommended at a maximum spacing of 

12 feet assuming a four-inch thick slab. We also recommend that control joints be scored 

three feet in from and parallel to all foundation walls. Using fiber reinforcement in the 

concrete can also control shrinkage cracking. 

 

 

A minimum 1-inch void space is recommended above, or below partitions that are placed on 

the slab. In finished areas, all furring strips, drywall and paneling should stop at least 1 inch 

from the top of the slab. The void space can be covered with a molding strip. Doorways 

should also be designed for this movement. NOTE: These void spaces are not intended to 

anticipate total potential slab movement. They are intended to prevent immediate damage 

to the superstructure and serve as an indicator of slab movement. They must be monitored 

and maintained by the owner for the life of the structure. 

Slabs should be separated from exterior walls, column posts, interior bearing members and 

utility lines to allow independent vertical movement of the slab. If project structural and 

architectural details require the slab on grade to be structurally tied to the exterior 

wall/foundation system, then control joints should be placed in the slab within approximately 

3 feet of the wall. The owner must understand and accept the risk of cracking at or near the 

control joints if the slab on grade is tied to the foundation system.



 

Some increase in moisture content is inevitable as a result of development and associated 

landscaping. However, extreme moisture content increases can be largely controlled by 

proper and responsible site drainage, building maintenance and irrigation practices. 

Utility backfill in areas supporting slabs should be moisture conditioned or dried by 

scarification, and compacted. Backfill in interior and exterior water and sewer line trenches 

should be uniformly compacted. 

Exterior slabs should be isolated from the building. These slabs should be reinforced to 

function as independent units. Movement of these slabs should not be transmitted to the 

building foundations or superstructures. 

PSI appreciates the opportunity to submit this addendum and look forward to working with you 

on this project. If you have any questions concerning our report, please contact our office. 

Respectfully Submitted, 

PROFESSIONAL SERVICE INDUSTRIES, INC. 



Matthew R. Satterfield, P.E. 

Project Engineer 

Kyle R. Duitsman, P.E. 

Department Manager 

Cc: Mays & Company

Specs

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?